JP7521492B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the special game state is transitioned to, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-005447 A

However, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to ensure that play is carried out smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play games in an optimal manner.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a game device that includes a predetermined derivation means for deriving awarded corresponding information by using at least the number of game values awarded to a player in a predetermined situation;
A specific execution means for executing a specific process for stopping a game based on the fact that the grant corresponding information derived by the specific derivation means becomes the specific target information ;
an area processing execution means for executing an area processing by using a program in a predetermined address range in the program storage means;
an outside-area processing execution means for executing outside-area processing by utilizing a program at an address outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means;
Equipped with
The processing within the area includes a predetermined processing for progressing the game,
The out-of-area process includes a specific process for managing a game history,
The process for deriving the added corresponding information in the predetermined deriving means is included in the outside area process,
The specific processing is characterized in that it is included in the intra-region processing.

The present invention makes it possible to ensure that games are played in an optimal manner.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device when a game round is being executed. 13A to 13J are explanatory diagrams for explaining the main and sub-patterns which are variably displayed in each pattern row. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a support mode. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first win/loss table at low probability, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second win/loss table at low probability, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the win/loss table at high probability. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot allocation table for the first special chart, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot allocation table for the second special chart, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table for the first special chart, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table for the second special chart. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each jackpot result, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each time-saving result and ceiling time-saving. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving result or ceiling time-saving. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal power control processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of starting normal map fluctuation in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during normal map confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart special power control processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring hold information in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the decrement process of the high probability state counter in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. An explanatory diagram to explain the stopping results of the special chart display unit and the stopping results of the pattern display device. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the stopping result of the first special chart display unit and the pattern display device when the first time-saving result is obtained in a game turn triggered by the first hold information in the final game turn of a normal game state or a time-saving state; (b) An explanatory diagram for explaining the stopping result of the first special chart display unit and the pattern display device when the first time-saving result is obtained in a game turn other than the final game turn of a high probability state or a time-saving state in a game turn triggered by the first hold information; (c) An explanatory diagram for explaining the stopping result of the first special chart display unit and the pattern display device when a miss result is obtained in a game turn triggered by the first hold information. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the time-saving status counter in the main MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts to explain the order of execution of processes during special drawing confirmation processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process of a variable selection state counter in a master MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts for explaining the relationship between the execution timing of a high reach frequency state and a time-saving state triggered by a ceiling time-saving state. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing executed by the main MPU in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas in the third embodiment. FIG. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU in the fifth embodiment. A front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 1A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device in a non-guiding state, and FIG. A vertical cross-sectional view to explain the internal structure of the prize distribution device. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas. FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first win/lose table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the second win/lose table, (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot allocation table, (d) an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table, (e) an explanatory diagram for explaining the small win allocation table, and (f) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each small win result. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart special power control processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring hold information in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a power outage monitoring process in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during special drawing confirmation executed by the main MPU in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the subtraction process of the time-saving status counter executed by the main MPU in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts for explaining the subsequent game state when a time-saving result or ceiling time-saving occurs in the time-saving state. A front view of the game board in the tenth embodiment. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol special power control process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol special power control process in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the end of the time-saving state in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the left-hit notification process in the audio/optical side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the end-corresponding game round in the time-saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target. A flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period executed by the main MPU in the 12th embodiment. A front view of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of programs and data in a main ROM. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main RAM. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for specific control and various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for transmitting a command from the main side MPU to the audio-optical side MPU. FIG. 5A to 5D are time charts showing how commands are transmitted. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process in the main MPU. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed while a setting value update processing or a setting confirmation processing is being executed. 13 is a flowchart showing a first management process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a disconnection/short-circuit process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process in a main MPU. An explanatory diagram to explain the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of a detection sensor are input to a main MPU. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring hold information in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a fraud detection process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing information clearing processing in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing fraud detection execution processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal power control processing in a main MPU. (a) is a flowchart showing the special call start processing in the main MPU, (b) is a flowchart showing the special call open processing in the main MPU, and (c) is a flowchart showing the special call closed processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a magnetic monitoring process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing fraud handling processing in the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how winning monitoring is performed using the second actuation port detection sensor as an example. 13 is a flowchart showing security processing in a main MPU. 5A to 5H are time charts showing how a security signal is output to the outside. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used for managing game history. FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a calculation result storage area. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. 5A to 5C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. 13 is a flowchart showing a second management process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a check process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal goal management processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a result calculation process in a main MPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for controlling the display of various display circuits by a main CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a display IC. 13 is a flowchart showing a second timer interrupt process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for an eighth display data buffer in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a display process in the main MPU. 13A to 13I are time charts showing how various displays are made on the first to fourth notification display devices and the setting display device when the supply of operating power to the main MPU is started. 13 is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an information abnormality monitoring process in a main MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU in the fourteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing management processing in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring hold information in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the setting process of the prize ball counter in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal goal management processing in the main MPU. FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the main ROM referenced to control the game status, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game status. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing high-probability progression processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of the electrical configuration of an amusement hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are installed. (a) is a rear view of a pachinko machine showing an enlarged view of the external terminal board and its surroundings provided on the rear pack unit of the pachinko machine, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the external output buffer provided in the main RAM, and (c) is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the external terminal board. 13 is a flowchart showing an outer end process in the main MPU. 13A to 13G are time charts showing how the output states of the first jackpot signal, the second jackpot signal, and the advantageous state signal are switched. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving subtraction process in the main MPU. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining an address table for a game play period. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process in a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing the performance control processing during time reduction in the sound/light side MPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the pattern display device in the time-saving state. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the execution of special hold display is regulated when a look-ahead command corresponding to a specified reach is received. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state in another form of the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state in another form of the fifteenth embodiment. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in the sixteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first win/loss table at low probability in the 17th embodiment, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the second win/loss table at low probability, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining the win/loss table at high probability. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in another form of the seventeenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the value of the state determination counter and the game state in the 18th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing high-probability progression processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving subtraction process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. An explanatory diagram to explain the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state in the 19th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing the latency of the third time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern determination process in the sound/light side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts to explain the manner in which the presentation is executed in the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram to explain the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state in the twentieth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state in the 21st embodiment, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table for the first special chart, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table for the second special chart. An explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing the latency of the third time-saving state. A flowchart showing a time-saving progress process executed by the main MPU in the 22nd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. An explanatory diagram to explain the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state in the 23rd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a standby setting process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a standby setting process executed by the main MPU in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. An explanatory diagram to explain the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state in the 26th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a third time-saving setting process in the main MPU. (a) to (j) are time charts showing the latency of the third time-saving state. A flowchart showing the setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in the 27th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a third time-saving setting process in the main MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state in the 28th embodiment, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the generation order memory area. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. (a) to (j) are time charts showing the latency of the third time-saving state. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in another form of the twenty-eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in another form of the twenty-eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in another form of the twenty-eighth embodiment. An explanatory diagram to explain the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game status in the 29th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in another form of the twenty-ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in another form of the twenty-ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing a time-saving progress process executed by the main MPU in another form of the twenty-ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results executed by the main MPU in another form of the twenty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode in the 30th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the main RAM used to control the game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a decrement process of the ceiling counter in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for time-saving progression in the main MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state in another form of the 30th embodiment, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state in another form of the 30th embodiment. 31A to 31C are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of a presentation executed by the pattern display device in the time-saving state in the thirty-first embodiment. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a presentation executed by the pattern display device when the final play of each time-saving state while the third time-saving state is lurking does not result in a jackpot, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a presentation in the pattern display device that enables the player to recognize that the third time-saving state will end in fewer play times than it should have continued. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory area of the sound-light side RAM used by the sound-light side MPU to control the execution of the performance in the time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance control processing in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern determination process in the sound/light side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts to explain the manner in which the presentation is executed in the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the sound-light side ROM which is referenced to control the execution of the performance in the time-saving state in the 32nd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance control processing in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern determination process in the sound/light side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts to explain the manner in which the presentation is executed in the time-saving state. (a) A flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period of the main MPU in the 33rd embodiment, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the main ROM, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the sound-light ROM. A flowchart showing the performance control processing of the sound and light side MPU in the thirty-fourth embodiment. An explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the remaining number of times the time-saving state continues as measured by the time-saving state counter in the 35th embodiment and the type of stage grasped by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern determination process in the sound/light side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts to explain the manner in which the presentation is executed in the time-saving state. A flowchart showing the processing during special drawing confirmation by the main MPU in the 36th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the ceiling time reduction in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a second time-saving progress process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the work area for non-specific control in the thirty-seventh embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing how a predetermined difference in the number of balls is measured using a total winning number counter. 13 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process of the total acquisition number executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing executed by the main MPU. This is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special call termination processing executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending control process executed by an audio/optical side MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a first management process executed by a main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the game state transitions to the normal game state when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter reaches the ending standard number. A flowchart showing the special line release processing of the main MPU in the 38th embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart special power control processing of the main MPU in the thirty-ninth embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the special chart change start processing of the main MPU in the 40th embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing the special chart determination processing executed by the main MPU, and (c) is a flowchart showing the special call end processing executed by the main MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; A flowchart showing the special picture special power control processing of the main MPU in the 41st embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded form. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the game area.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made of wooden boards connected at all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to an island facility. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island facility of the amusement hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end of rotation and the right side as the tip end of rotation when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by using an unlocking key to perform an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front side of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on Figure 3. Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail as a guide means. Game balls launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 66a (described later) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating a launching operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game balls are launched.

The game board 24 has multiple openings of various sizes that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special chart unit 37, and a general chart unit 38.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are paid out. On the other hand, if a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34, three prize balls are paid out, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, fifteen prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, or the second actuation port 34 may have a larger number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33. In addition, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first actuation port 33 and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the second actuation port 34 are not limited to a configuration in which both are multiple, and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first actuation port 33 may be one, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the second actuation port 34 may be one, or both may be one.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, "ball entry" means that the game ball passes through a specified opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also the case where the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the game ball entering the outlet 24a, the game ball entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 will also be referred to as "winning."

The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are unitized as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 open upward. In addition, both actuation ports 33, 34 are aligned vertically with the first actuation port 33 facing upward.

A stage section 36b is provided in the lower frame section 36a, which is the portion below the pattern display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, so as to extend horizontally above the first operating port 33, and a warp passage entrance section 36d is formed in the left frame section 36c, which is the portion to the left of the pattern display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, which enables a game ball flowing down the left area of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage section 36b. The horizontal center section of the stage section 36b is located vertically above the first operating port 33, and a lead-out section 36e is formed in the central section to lead the game ball by its own weight to the bottom of the stage section 36b. In this case, game balls that are guided to the stage portion 36b from an area other than the lead-out portion 36e to below the stage portion 36b are unlikely to enter the first operating port 33, but game balls that are guided from the lead-out portion 36e to below the stage portion 36b have a high probability of entering the first operating port 33.

The first actuation port 33 is open upward, and is not provided with any opening/closing member for preventing game balls from entering the first actuation port 33. When game balls are released in the same manner, the probability of winning at the first actuation port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first actuation port 33 is always capable of receiving game balls that flow down the game area PA toward the first actuation port 33.

The second operating port 34 is provided with a normal power device 34a, which acts as a guide piece consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right. When the normal power device 34a is in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, but when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and a game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after entering. This makes it possible for a game ball that enters the through gate 35 to enter the second operating port 34.

When a ball wins through the through gate 35, the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, the winning of the through gate 35 triggers a normal power win/loss determination process, and the image is displayed in the normal power display section 38a of the normal power unit 38, which is located in the lower right corner of the play area PA, an area where the game ball does not pass through. Then, when the result of the normal power win/loss determination process is a win for the electric role release, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the display of the changes on the normal power display section 38a ends, the normal power open state is entered. In the normal power open state, the normal power role 34a is opened in a specified manner.

The map display unit 38a is configured with a segment display in which a number of segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. The image displayed on the map display unit 38a may be a number of different types of letters, a number of symbols, a number of characters, or a number of colors that are switched between.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls that enter the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

The winning/losing determination process is triggered by the winning/losing entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The result of the winning/losing determination process is then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

The special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display section 37a and a second special chart display section 37b. In the first special chart display section 37a, a winning/losing determination process is performed with the winning/losing result as a trigger, and a changing display of the pattern is performed. Then, a stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/losing determination process is displayed. In this case, the winning/losing determination process results in the jackpot result, the time-saving result, and the loss result, which will be described later, exist, but the contents of the stop result in the first special chart display section 37a are different for each of the winning/losing result, the time-saving result, and the loss result. The display of the stop result in the first special chart display section 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and a new changing display of the pattern is started in the first special chart display section 37a. In addition, in the second special chart display section 37b, a winning/losing determination process is performed with the winning/losing result as a trigger, and a changing display of the pattern is performed. Then, a stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/losing determination process is displayed. In this case, the results of the hit/miss determination process include the jackpot result, time-saving result, and miss result, which will be described later, but the contents of the stop results in the second special chart display section 37b are different for each of the jackpot result, time-saving result, and miss result. The display of the stop results in the second special chart display section 37b is maintained until the next game round begins and the second special chart display section 37b begins to display new patterns.

The first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b are configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the images displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors.

In the special chart unit 37, a first special chart reserve display section 37c and a second special chart reserve display section 37d are provided adjacent to the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b. The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 can be reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the first special chart reserve display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 can be reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the second special chart reserve display section 37d.

Regarding the pattern display device 41 in detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the pattern display device 41, when a changing pattern display is performed in the first special pattern display section 37a based on a winning entry in the first operating port 33, the pattern display is accordingly changed, and when a changing pattern display is performed in the second special pattern display section 37b based on a winning entry in the second operating port 34, the pattern display is accordingly changed. In addition to display effects triggered by a winning entry in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the pattern display device 41 also displays effects during the opening and closing execution mode described below, which is entered after a jackpot result is achieved.

Based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33, 34, a display is started on any of the special symbol display units 37a, 37b and the pattern display device 41, and the display ends after displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/losing determination process, and the execution of the special symbol determination process in the main control device 71, which will be described later, is completed, which corresponds to one game round.

In this pachinko machine 10, a winning/losing determination process is executed based on winning into the operating ports 33 and 34, and when the winning/losing determination process results in a jackpot result, the machine transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed, and when a winning occurs in the special electric winning device 32 that is in an open state, the payout of game balls is executed. Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined open duration has elapsed, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won in the special electric winning device 32. In this case, in a configuration in which the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the open duration is set to 29 seconds, and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, the duration of the round play is set to be longer than the product of the ball launch cycle and the upper limit of the number of balls that can be played in one round play, so it is expected that more than the upper limit of the number of balls will win the special winning device 32 in each round play. Also, the upper limit of the number of round plays varies depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition.

As the winning/losing lottery mode of the winning/losing judgment process, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of a jackpot result that causes a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high and low. In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of support modes are set so that the manner in which the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state is different from each other. In detail, the support modes are set to a high frequency support mode (a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode described later) and a low frequency support mode so that the frequency at which the normal power role 34a is in an open state per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which the launch of game balls continues in a similar manner to the game area PA. The game state in a situation that is not the opening/closing execution mode differs depending on the type of combination of the winning/losing lottery mode and the support mode. As the game state, a normal game state that is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a high probability state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and a time-saving state that is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode are set. In the high probability state and time-saving state, the average time it takes to play one round is shorter than in the normal game state.

Both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are installed in the lower area PAU, which is the area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are unitized as an actuation port device in a state where they are arranged vertically side by side, with the first actuation port 33 at the top and the second actuation port 34 at the bottom. The normal electric device 34a of the second actuation port 34 can be controlled to an open state upon winning at the through gate 35, which is located in the left side area PAL, which is the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The game ball flowing down the left side area PAL is guided to the lower area PAU, and the game ball guided to the lower area PAU can be guided to the area where the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are provided. Therefore, when a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning through the first actuation port 33, not only can a winning result occur in the first actuation port 33, but a winning result can also occur in the second actuation port 34, and when a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning through the second actuation port 34, not only can a winning result occur in the second actuation port 34, but a winning result can also occur in the first actuation port 33.

When the game state is the normal game state, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as described above, so that winning at the second actuation port 34 is less likely to occur, and winning at the first actuation port 33 is more likely to occur than at the second actuation port 34. Therefore, in the normal game state, the target for the execution of the game round is basically the first special chart display section 37a, and if a winning at the second actuation port 34 occurs accidentally, the second special chart display section 37b becomes the target for the execution of the game round.

On the other hand, when the game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as described above, so winning at the second actuation port 34 is more likely to occur. In this case, winning at the second actuation port 34 is more likely to occur than at the first actuation port 33. However, as already explained, if a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning at the second actuation port 34, winning at the first actuation port 33 may occur, and the game ball guided to the outlet portion 36e of the stage portion 36b will win at the first actuation port 33 with a high probability, so even in the high frequency support mode, winning at the first actuation port 33 will occur with the same frequency as in the low frequency support mode.

The pattern display device 41 executes the effects for a game round in a manner that corresponds to the pattern of the special display units 37a and 37b that are the targets of the game round. The following describes the display contents of the pattern display device 41 when the effects for a game round are executed.

Figures 4(a) and 4(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device 41 when a game round is being played.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display surface of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the upper, middle, and lower rows as multiple display areas. Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is configured with main and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. In other words, when a game round is played, most of the display surface of the pattern display device 41 is used to display changing patterns.

Figures 5(a) to 5(j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the main and sub-patterns that are variably displayed in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. As shown in Figures 5(a) to 5(j), the patterns, which are a type of picture, are composed of nine main patterns, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-pattern consisting of a shell-shaped picture pattern. More specifically, the main patterns are composed of nine character patterns, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in FIG. 4(b), in the upper pattern row Z1, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle pattern row Z2, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", with one sub-pattern between each of these main patterns. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 patterns, with 10 main patterns arranged. On the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclical manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction. The symbol display device 41 is configured to stop and display three symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, resulting in a total of nine symbols (3 x 3). As shown in FIG. 4(a), the symbol display device 41 has five active lines set, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-right line L4, and an upward-right line L5.

When the pattern display device 41 displays a changing pattern based on a winning entry to the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, the changing display starts so that the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the display is switched from the changing display to the standby display basically in the order of upper pattern row Z1 → lower pattern row Z3 → middle pattern row Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined patterns being statically displayed in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

When the display of the changing patterns ends, if the result of the winning/losing determination process in the main control device 71, which will be described later, is a jackpot result, which will be described later, a combination of the same patterns will be formed on one of the effective lines L1 to L5. Also, if the result of the winning/losing determination process is a time-saving result, which will be described later, and the time-saving state is set using the time-saving result as a trigger, a combination of predetermined patterns (for example, "1, 2, 3", "3, 4, 1") that is not the same combination of patterns and is not a combination of reach patterns will be formed on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 when the display of the changing patterns ends. In this case, since there are multiple types of time-saving results, as will be described later, the content of the combination of predetermined patterns also differs depending on the type of time-saving result. On the other hand, if the result of the winning/losing determination process is a time-saving result, which will be described later, and the time-saving state is not set using the time-saving result as a trigger, a stop pattern for a non-reach miss that does not form a reach pattern combination will be displayed when the display of the changing patterns ends. In other words, if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result described below, and the time-saving state is not set based on that time-saving result, the stopping results for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be the same as if the result of the win/loss determination process was a loss result.

In the configuration in which the variable display of the patterns is performed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 as described above, an expectation effect is set as the display effect of the pattern display device 41 when a game round is executed. The expectation effect is a display state that makes the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in a jackpot result from the start of the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display device 41 until the stop result is derived and displayed. Two types of expectation effects are set: a reach display and a preview display that makes the player expect the occurrence of a reach display or a jackpot result before the reach display occurs.

The reach display includes a display state in which the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed in the upper pattern column Z1 and the lower pattern column Z3 among the multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 to display a combination of reach patterns, and in this state, the remaining middle pattern column Z2 displays a variable pattern. In addition, it includes a state in which the remaining pattern columns display a variable pattern in the state in which the reach combination is displayed as described above, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on the background screen, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on almost the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the reach pattern combination. If the game result is a jackpot, the same type of pattern as the pattern forming the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle pattern column Z2, and if the game result is not a jackpot, a pattern of a type different from the pattern forming the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle pattern column Z2.

The advance notice display includes a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a situation in which symbols are displayed in a changing manner in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the changing display of symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 has started, or in a situation in which symbols are displayed in a changing manner in some symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It also includes a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a mode in which the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such advance notice displays can occur in both game rounds when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), in addition to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a reserved display area 42 and a status suggestion area 43 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The reserved display area 42 is set at the bottom of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The reserved display area 42 has a first reserved display area 42a in which an image is displayed to inform the player of the number of reserved pieces of information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on a winning entry into the first operating port 33, and a second reserved display area 42b in which an image is displayed to inform the player of the number of reserved pieces of information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on a winning entry into the second operating port 34. The reserved information is information that triggers the execution of a win/loss determination process in the main control device 71, and is information that triggers the execution of a game round. The reserved information acquired in response to a winning entry into the first operating port 33 (hereinafter also referred to as the first reserved information) triggers the execution of a game round in the first special chart display section 37a, and the reserved information acquired in response to a winning entry into the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved information) triggers the execution of a game round in the second special chart display section 37b. A maximum of four pieces of first reserved information are stored for reservation, and a maximum of four pieces of second reserved information are also stored for reservation.

The first pending display area 42a displays the first pending images G1 in a number corresponding to the number of first pending information. In other words, if the number of first pending information stored in the reserved memory is 0, the first pending image G1 is not displayed in the first pending display area 42a. Also, if the number of first pending information stored in the reserved memory is 1, one first pending image G1 is displayed, if the number of first pending information stored in the reserved memory is 2, two first pending images G1 are displayed, if the number of first pending information stored in the reserved memory is 3, three first pending images G1 are displayed, and if the number of first pending information stored in the reserved memory is 4, four first pending images G1 are displayed. When multiple first pending images G1 are displayed, the multiple first pending images G1 are displayed side by side with a certain interval between them. Also, if the number of first pending information stored in the reserved memory increases, the first pending images G1 are displayed to increase toward the right, and if the first pending information becomes the trigger for the start of a game round and the number of first pending information stored in the reserved memory decreases, the first pending images G1 are displayed to decrease toward the left.

In the second hold display area 42b, the number of second hold images G2 corresponding to the number of second hold information are displayed. In other words, if the number of second hold information stored in the hold is 0, the second hold image G2 is not displayed in the second hold display area 42b. Also, if the number of second hold information stored in the hold is 1, one second hold image G2 is displayed, if the number of second hold information stored in the hold is 2, two second hold images G2 are displayed, if the number of second hold information stored in the hold is 3, three second hold images G2 are displayed, and if the number of second hold information stored in the hold is 4, four second hold images G2 are displayed. When a plurality of second hold images G2 are displayed, the plurality of second hold images G2 are displayed side by side at a certain interval. Also, if the number of second hold information stored in the hold increases, the second hold images G2 are displayed to increase toward the right, and if the second hold information becomes a trigger for the start of a game round and the number of second hold information stored in the hold decreases, the second hold images G2 are displayed to decrease toward the left.

In FIG. 4(b), the number of first pending information stored is four and the number of second pending information is four, so four first pending images G1 are displayed in the first pending display area 42a and four second pending images G2 are displayed in the second pending display area 42b.

The state suggestion area 43 is set at the top of the display surface of the pattern display device 41. The state suggestion area 43 has a smaller display area than the display area of the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. In the state suggestion area 43, the variable display of the patterns for the game round is performed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, and in a situation where the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/losing judgment process of the game round is not stopped and displayed, the color is switched and displayed. Specifically, a predetermined display color pattern is repeated such as red → blue → green → red → blue → green → red .... Then, at the timing when the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/losing judgment process is displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the confirmation display (static display) starts, the game status at that time and the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/losing judgment process are displayed. In this case, if the result of the winning/losing judgment process is a jackpot result or a loss result, red is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In addition, if the result of the winning/loose judgment process is a time-saving result to be described later, if the time-saving state is set triggered by the time-saving result, red is stopped regardless of the type of the time-saving result, and if the time-saving state is not set triggered by the time-saving result, blue or green is stopped according to the type of the time-saving result. In the configuration in which the stop result in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 can be the same as the stop result in the winning/loose judgment process when the result of the winning/loose judgment process is a time-saving result to be described later and the time-saving state is not set triggered by the time-saving result as described above, by making the display content of the state suggestion area 43 different between the case where the result of the winning/loose judgment process is a time-saving result to be described later and the time-saving state is not set triggered by the time-saving result, and the case where the result of the winning/loose judgment process is a miss result, it is possible to display different display content as a whole on the pattern display device 41 when the result of the winning/loose judgment process is a time-saving result to be described later and the time-saving state is not set triggered by the time-saving result, and when the result of the winning/loose judgment process is a miss result.

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), if the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a jackpot result, the game will transition to the open/close execution mode as already explained. In the open/close execution mode, the opening and closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed. The special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when a jackpot result is selected in the hit/miss judgment process. Note that in the closed state, a prize is not impossible, but it may be configured to be less likely to win than in the open state. In the open/close execution mode, a display performance corresponding to the open/close execution mode is executed by the pattern display device 41.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 of the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window section 61 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window section 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted into it. The window panel 62 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be formed of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, or may be formed of color and transparency as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 62 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

A display light-emitting unit 64 is provided above the window 61. A pair of left and right speaker units 65 are also provided to output sound effects according to the game status. An upper bulge 66 and a lower bulge 67 that bulge toward the front are arranged vertically below the window 61. An upper tray 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 66, and a lower tray 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 67. The upper tray 66a has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 67a also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 66a.

Next, we will explain the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) is equipped with a main control device 71 that mainly controls the game. The main control device 71 is formed by housing a main control board in a board box. The board box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Possible trace means include a joint structure that inseparably connects the multiple case bodies that make up the board box and requires destruction of a specified portion when separating them, or a structure in which a seal sticker that leaves a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the bonded object when peeled off is affixed across the boundaries between the multiple case bodies. Also, a trace structure may be a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the multiple case bodies that make up the board box.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 71. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 72 formed from a transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls are successively replenished from the island equipment of the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged into the upper tray 66a or the lower tray 67a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power source on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 is equipped with a payout control device 77 that has the function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply and launch control device 78 that generates and outputs the predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the launch operation device 28. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are stacked one behind the other, with the payout control device 77 at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 71 is equipped with a main control board 81 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 81 is equipped with an MPU 82. The MPU 82 has a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, a RAM 84 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, etc. built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and RAM 84 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 82, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 82 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 82 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 85 provided in the main control unit 71, and to a dispensing control unit 77. The power failure monitoring board 85 is connected to a power supply and launch control unit 78 that has the function of supplying operating power, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85.

The input side of the MPU 82 is connected to various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e. The various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e include a detection sensor 86a provided in the general winning port 31, a detection sensor 86b provided in the special electric winning device 32, a detection sensor 86c provided in the first operating port 33, a detection sensor 86d provided in the second operating port 34, and a detection sensor 86e provided in the through gate 35. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 judges whether a winning ball has been won in each winning ball entry section. In addition, the MPU 82 executes various lotteries based on the winning balls in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The output side of the MPU 82 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and an audio/light emitting control device 91. For example, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning ball determination result in the winning ball entry section. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio/light emitting control device 91.

The output side of the MPU 82 is connected to the special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, the normal electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34, the special chart unit 37, and the normal chart unit 38. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display unit 37a, a second special chart display unit 37b, a first special chart reserved display unit 37c, and a second special chart reserved display unit 37d, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Similarly, the normal chart unit 38 is provided with a normal chart display unit 38a and a normal chart reserved display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 82 controls the drive of the special power driver 32b so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. Also, when the regular power role 34a is selected for the electric role opening, the MPU 82 controls the drive of the regular power driver 34b so that the regular power role 34a is opened and closed. Also, during each game round, the MPU 82 controls the display of the special chart unit 37. Also, when the lottery result of whether or not to set the regular power opening state in which the regular power role 34a is opened is to be clearly indicated, the MPU 82 controls the display of the regular chart unit 38.

The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for each of the main control device 71, the payout control device 77, etc., and supplies the generated operating power.

Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a for when power is turned on and a power supply unit 78b for when power is turned off. The power supply unit 78a for when power is turned on is connected to a commercial power source in, for example, a game hall, and has the function of generating operating power when external power is being supplied from the commercial power source and supplying the generated operating power. The power supply unit 78b for when power is turned off is composed of a capacitor, and is charged by the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a for when power is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when power is being supplied from an external power source). In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power outage occurs in the commercial power source, or in other power-off state (when power supply from an external power source is cut off), the power supply unit 78b is discharged and backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the dispensing control device 77 is retained and not erased while backup power is being supplied from the power outage power supply unit 78b.

Here, the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 temporarily stores information on the current game state and game progress, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of prize balls that have not been paid out. In this case, by supplying backup power from the power supply unit 78b during power outage as described above to these RAMs, it is possible to store and hold the current game state, game progress, and prize ball information for a predetermined period of time even in a situation where there is no power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power on. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power outage to the sound and light emission control device 91 and the display control device 101. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the sound and light emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 is not backed up, and is destroyed or erased when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power on is stopped.

The power supply unit 78b for use during power interruption has a relatively large capacity, and information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 before the power is cut off is retained for a specified period of time (e.g., one or two days). The power supply unit 78b for use during power interruption is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, etc.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for use during power outages (not shown) that is different from the power supply unit for use during power outages 78b. The power supply and launch control device 78 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the driving power source for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the power outage processing described below, by discharging from the power outage power supply unit, even after the stable 24-volt DC power supply falls below 22 volts. This allows the main control device 71 and other devices to execute and complete power outage processing normally.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with various power supply units 78a and 78b as well as a launch control unit 78c. The touch sensor 28a, push sensor 28b, and variable resistor 28c built into the launch operation device 28 are electrically connected to the launch control unit 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operating handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, it outputs a predetermined electrical signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation to the launch control unit 78c. Upon receiving the predetermined electrical signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is touching the outer surface of the operating handle. The launch control unit 78c also determines whether the launch stop switch of the launch operating device 28 has been operated according to the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and determines the amount of rotation of the operating handle according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c.

When a predetermined condition for launching a game ball is satisfied, the launch control unit 78c transmits a condition satisfaction signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main control unit 71. Specifically, the launch control unit 78c continuously transmits a HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the satisfaction of the condition) to the MPU 82 on the condition that it receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player and receives a signal from the push sensor 28b indicating that the launch stop switch is not being manually operated by the player. Note that, if any of the above signals are not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the satisfaction of the condition) is transmitted to the MPU 82. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball dispensing device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfaction signal corresponding to the satisfaction of the condition.

When the MPU 82 receives a HI level condition satisfaction signal and is in a state in which the launch of the game ball can be permitted, it continues to send a HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to launch permission) to the launch control unit 78c. Note that when the MPU 82 does not receive a HI level condition satisfaction signal from the launch control unit 78c, it sends a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission), but the relationship between the LOW level and HI level of the launch permission signal may be reversed.

When the game ball launching mechanism 27 is electrically connected and a HI-level launch permission signal is received from the MPU 82, the launch control unit 78c periodically drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 27. In this case, if game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 27, one game ball is launched into the game area PA at a specific launch period (specifically, 0.6 seconds). In addition, the launch strength is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c during this launch, so that the game ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle.

The audio and light emission control device 91 includes an audio and light emission control board 92 equipped with an MPU 93. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 93, a RAM 95 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The MPU 93 drives and controls the display light emission unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 based on commands received from the main control device 71, and transmits commands to the display control device 101.

The display control device 101 includes a display control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 103, a RAM 105 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 based on commands received from the sound and light emission control device 91.

Although not shown, the display control board 102 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), character ROM, video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 103. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM, and reads image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, etc. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

For the sake of convenience, in the following explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the main control device 71 are referred to as the main side MPU 82, main side ROM 83, and main side RAM 84, the MPU 93, ROM 94, and RAM 95 of the audio/light emission control device 91 are referred to as the audio/light side MPU 93, audio/light side ROM 94, and audio/light side RAM 95, and the MPU 103, ROM 104, and RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are referred to as the display side MPU 103, display side ROM 104, and display side RAM 105.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG.

During play, the main MPU 82 uses various counter information to perform a lottery for determining whether a win occurs, settings for the display of the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, settings for the symbol display unit 41, settings for the display of the normal symbol display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for determining whether a win occurs, a type random number counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot result and the type of time-saving result, a reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery for determining whether a reach occurs when the symbol display unit 41 misses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the period of fluctuation display in the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display unit 41. In addition, a normal electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 is in a normal electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are located in the various counter areas 84b of the main RAM 84.

Each time counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, C4 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and it is a loop counter that returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special chart reserve area 84a provided in the main RAM 84 when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The special chart reserve area 84a includes a first special chart reserve area 111, a second special chart reserve area 112, and an execution area 113 for special charts.

The first special chart reserve area 111 includes a first area 111a, a second area 111b, a third area 111c, and a fourth area 111d, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any one of the areas 111a to 111d as the first reserved information according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. In this case, when winnings occur multiple times consecutively in the first operating port 33, the numerical information is stored in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d in the order of the first area 111a → the second area 111b → the third area 111c → the fourth area 111d in chronological order. By providing the four areas 111a to 111d in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls in the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of reserved items that can be stored in the first special chart reservation area 111 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

The second special chart reserve area 112 includes a first area 112a, a second area 112b, a third area 112c, and a fourth area 112d, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any one of the areas 112a to 112d as the second reserved information in accordance with the winning history of the second operating port 34. In this case, when winnings occur multiple times consecutively in the second operating port 34, the numerical information is stored in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d in the order of the first area 112a → the second area 112b → the third area 112c → the fourth area 112d in chronological order. By providing the four areas 112a to 112d in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls in the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of reserved items that can be stored in the second special chart reservation area 112 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

The execution area 113 for special charts is an area in which reserved information for targets for which hit/fail judgments and allocation judgments are performed when variable display is started in either of the special chart display units 37a, 37b is stored. Specifically, when variable display is started in the first special chart display unit 37a, the reserved information stored in the first area 111a of the first special chart reserve area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for special charts. On the other hand, when variable display is started in the second special chart display unit 37b, the reserved information stored in the first area 112a of the second special chart reserve area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for special charts.

Information corresponding to the normal random number counter C4 is stored in the normal map reserve area 84c when a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs. The normal map reserve area 84c has a first area 114a, a second area 114b, a third area 114c, and a fourth area 114d, and the numerical information of the normal random number counter C4 is stored in one of the areas 114a to 114d as reserved information on the normal map side according to the winning history of the through gate 35. In this case, when winning entries into the through gate 35 occur multiple times in succession, the numerical information is stored in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d in the order of the first area 114a → the second area 114b → the third area 114c → the fourth area 114d in chronological order. In this way, by providing four areas 114a to 114d, the winning history of game balls into the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored up to four times. The number of reserved items that can be stored in the regular map reservation area 84c is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or it can be a single number. The regular map reservation area 84c has an execution area 115 for regular maps. The execution area 115 for regular maps is an area in which reserved information for which regular map pass/fail judgment processing is performed when the regular map display unit 38a starts displaying changes. Specifically, when the regular map display unit 38a starts displaying changes, the reserved information stored in the first area 114a of the regular map reservation area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for regular maps.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail below.

First, the normal random number counter C4 will be described. The normal random number counter C4 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The normal random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal map holding area 84c when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a specified timing, a normal map hit/miss determination process is performed to determine whether or not to control the normal random number device 34a to an open state based on the value of the stored normal random number counter C4.

As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of support modes are set so that the manner of support provided by the normal power device 34a differs from one another. Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support modes.

The support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in a similar manner into the game area. In addition, a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode are set as the high-frequency support mode.

When the normal play hit/miss judgment process is executed to determine by lottery whether the normal play hit device 34a will be in the open normal play state, there are a high probability mode on the normal play side and a low probability mode on the normal play side as judgment modes so that the probability of winning the electric play hit is relatively high and low. In the low probability mode on the normal play side, the probability of winning the electric play hit in one normal play hit/miss judgment process is 1/2, while in the high probability mode on the normal play side, the probability of winning the electric play hit in one normal play hit/miss judgment process is 4/5.

When the normal map hit/miss judgment process is executed, the display of changing patterns will begin in the normal map display section 38a. In this case, the normal map fluctuation period, which is the duration of the fluctuation display round during which the display of changing patterns is executed in the normal map display section 38a, has a long period and a short period so that the period is relatively long and short. The long period is 10 seconds, while the short period is 1 second.

When the normal map display section 38a ends a change display round, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process that triggered the execution of the change display round. In this case, if the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a miss, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the miss result, and no transition to the normal power open state occurs. If the normal map side reserved information is stored in the normal map reserved area 84c, a new normal map hit/miss judgment process is executed on the reserved information on the normal map side, and a new change display round is started in the normal map display section 38a. On the other hand, if the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a result corresponding to the electric role release winning, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the winning result, and a transition to the normal power open state occurs.

As execution modes of the normal power opening state, there are a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode so that the expectation of the game ball entering the normal power role 34a is relatively high and low. In the low expectation mode, a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As already explained, the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, so when a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once, the game ball does not basically enter the second operating port 34, and even if it does, the number of balls that enter is about one. In addition, the normal power opening state also ends when the number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal power side. However, when a short opening occurs once, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is about one, so the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side will not enter the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long opening is two seconds. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so when the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, about three game balls can enter the second operating port 34. In the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times, with an interval period (specifically, one second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in a closed state. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter. As described above, the normal power opening state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit number on the normal power side, which is 10. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, an event may occur in which the normal power opening state ends when the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side enters the second operating port 34.

As described above, in a configuration in which the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process, the fluctuation period of the normal map in the normal map display unit 38a, and the execution mode of the normal power open state are set, in the low-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is long, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a low-expectation mode in which one short opening occurs. Also, in the first high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a high-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high-expectation mode in which three long openings occur. Also, in the second high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high-expectation mode in which three long openings occur. Therefore, when the launch of game balls continues in the same manner so that winning occurs in the through gate 35, the expectation of the rate at which the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state per unit time is highest in the first high-frequency support mode, next highest in the second high-frequency support mode, and lowest in the low-frequency support mode. Also, since the execution mode of the normal power open state in the low-frequency support mode is a low expectation mode, in the low-frequency support mode, game balls hardly enter the second operating port 34, whereas in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high expectation mode, so in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, game balls can be expected to enter the second operating port 34 more than the upper limit number of second reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 112.

The configuration for differentiating the expectation of the rate at which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state per unit time between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, the first high-frequency support mode may select a short period as the normal map fluctuation period, while the second high-frequency support mode may select a medium period between the short period and the long period. The first high-frequency support mode may be configured to cause a long opening to occur three times as the execution mode of the normal power opening state, while the second high-frequency support mode may cause a long opening to occur twice. In addition, although the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is the same in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to have a higher expectation of the rate at which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state per unit time than the second high-frequency support mode, depending on the content of the normal map fluctuation period or the execution mode of the normal power opening state.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 9999, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the first special chart reserve area 111 when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second special chart reserve area 112 when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The winning/losing determination process is then performed using the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 thus stored.

The random number value that is a winning result during the hit/miss determination process is stored as a hit/miss table in the main ROM 83. In this pachinko machine 10, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode as the hit/miss lottery mode of the hit/miss determination process, in which the probability of a jackpot result is relatively high and low. As hit/miss tables referenced in the hit/miss determination process in the low probability mode, a first hit/miss table 121 at low probability that is referenced when the hit/miss determination process is performed on the first pending information, and a second hit/miss table 122 at low probability that is referenced when the hit/miss determination process is performed on the second pending information are provided. In addition, a hit/miss table 123 at high probability is provided as a hit/miss table referenced in the hit/miss determination process in the high probability mode.

Figure 9(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first win/lose table 121 when the probability is low, Figure 9(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second win/lose table 122 when the probability is low, and Figure 9(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the win/lose table 123 when the probability is high.

As shown in Figures 9(a) to 9(c), the results of the win/loss determination process include a jackpot result, a time-saving result, and a loss result. A jackpot result is a win/loss result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which multiple rounds of play are played, as well as a transition to a win/loss selection mode and a support mode. A time-saving result is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode or a win/loss selection mode, but can trigger a transition to the support mode. A loss result is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to the win/loss selection mode or the support mode.

This pachinko machine 10 has a setting value that determines the degree of advantage per unit time. The setting value is "Setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6"), and the larger the value of n (i.e., the higher the setting value), the higher the degree of advantage. There are setting values "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". As shown in FIG. 9(a), in the first win/lose table 121 for low probability, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a miss result. On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is set to be the same for all of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, in the lowest setting value "Setting 1", 50 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9850 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", 52 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9848 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9846 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", 56 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9844 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", 58 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9842 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In "Setting 6", which is the highest setting value, 60 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9840 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. As shown above, regardless of the setting, in low probability mode, the probability of a time-saving result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the second win/lose table 122 for low probability is set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a miss result. On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is set to be the same for all "Setting 1" to "Setting 6."

Specifically, in the lowest setting value "Setting 1", 50 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 120 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9830 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", 52 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 120 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9828 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 120 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9826 pieces of numerical information are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", 56 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot result, 120 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result, and 9824 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a miss result. In "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", 58 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot result, 120 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result, and 9822 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a miss result. In "Setting 6", which is the highest setting value, 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot result, 120 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result, and 9820 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a miss result.

In other words, the probability of a jackpot result for each setting value is the same for the first win/loss table 121 at low probability and the second win/loss table 122 at low probability. In contrast, the probability that the time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process is higher for the second win/loss table 122 at low probability than for the first win/loss table 121 at low probability. Therefore, when the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the probability of the time-saving result being selected is higher when the win/loss determination process is performed on the second pending information than when the win/loss determination process is performed on the first pending information.

In addition, without being limited to this, the probability of the time-saving result being selected in the winning/losing judgment process may be the same or approximately the same in the first winning/losing table 121 at low probability and the second winning/losing table 122 at low probability, and the first winning/losing table 121 at low probability may be higher than the second winning/losing table 122 at low probability. In addition, in the first winning/losing table 121 at low probability, the probability of the time-saving result is not limited to the same configuration for each set value, and may be configured to vary depending on the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the time-saving result, and may be configured to decrease the probability of the time-saving result. In addition, in the second winning/losing table 122 at low probability, the probability of the time-saving result is not limited to the same configuration for each set value, and may be configured to vary depending on the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the time-saving result, and may be configured to decrease the probability of the time-saving result.

As shown in FIG. 9(c), the high probability hit/miss table 123 is set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a miss result. On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is set to be the same for all "Setting 1" to "Setting 6."

Specifically, in "Setting 1," the lowest setting value, 500 is set as the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 is set as the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9,400 is set as the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In "Setting 2," which is one step higher than "Setting 1," 520 is set as the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 is set as the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9,380 is set as the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 3," which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2," 540 is set as the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 is set as the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9,360 is set as the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In "Setting 4," which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3," 560 is set as the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, 100 is set as the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result, and 9,340 is set as the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss. In addition, in "Setting 5," which is one step higher than "Setting 4," the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot is set to 580, the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result is set to 100, and the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss is set to 9,320. In addition, in "Setting 6," which is the highest setting, the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot is set to 600, the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time-saving result is set to 100, and the number of numerical information pieces in the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a miss is set to 9,300.

The high probability win/loss table 123 is referenced in high probability mode when the win/loss determination process is performed on the first pending information and when the win/loss determination process is performed on the second pending information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 required to store the win/loss table, compared to a configuration in which a win/loss table is provided for each of the cases in which the win/loss determination process is performed on the first pending information in high probability mode and the win/loss determination process is performed on the second pending information in high probability mode.

In "setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200 in low probability mode and 10 times that, or 1/20, in high probability mode. In "setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result is approximately 1/192 in low probability mode and 10 times that, or 1/19.2, in high probability mode. In "setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result is approximately 1/185 in low probability mode and 10 times that, or 1/18.5, in high probability mode. In "setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result is approximately 1/179 in low probability mode and 10 times that, or 1/17.9, in high probability mode. In "setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result is approximately 1/172 in low probability mode and 10 times that, or 1/17.2, in high probability mode. In "Setting 6," the probability of a jackpot result is approximately 1/167 in low probability mode, and 10 times that, or approximately 1/16.7, in high probability mode. In other words, in any of "Settings 1" to "6," the probability of a jackpot result is 10 times higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode.

On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is 1/100 for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" in the first win/loss table 121 at low probability and the win/loss table 123 at high probability, and is approximately 1/83 for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" in the second win/loss table 122 at low probability. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of a time-saving result in the win/loss table 123 at high probability may be configured to be higher than the first win/loss table 121 at low probability and lower than the second win/loss table 122 at low probability, or may be configured to be higher than the second win/loss table 122 at low probability.

The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of the jackpot, may be configured to be set in a consolidated manner so as to be consecutive numbers, or may be configured to be set in a dispersed manner so that at least some or all of it is not consecutive numbers. The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of the time reduction, may be configured to be set in a consolidated manner so as to be consecutive numbers, or may be configured to be set in a dispersed manner so that at least some or all of it is not consecutive numbers.

As described above, whether the trigger is the first pending information or the second pending information, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, so the higher the setting value, the more advantageous it is for the player. Also, the open/close execution mode is the period during which the player's ball holdings increase the most per unit time, and the probability of a jackpot result that triggers the transition to the open/close execution mode varies according to the setting value, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the setting value.

In a configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is a certain number (specifically, 10 times) higher than the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode, which is a number greater than "1", regardless of the setting state, in the high probability mode. This makes it possible to keep the rate of change in the probability of a jackpot result constant between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, regardless of the setting state.

When comparing combinations with the same combination of setting values and winning/losing selection modes, the probability of a jackpot result is the same whether the trigger is the first reserved information or the second reserved information. This makes it possible to eliminate any difference in the probability of a jackpot result occurring whether the trigger is the first reserved information or the second reserved information.

The probability of a time-saving result when the first reserved information is the trigger is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Also, the probability of a time-saving result when the second reserved information is the trigger is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible to limit the target that the player focuses on in order to guess the setting value to the jackpot result, making it difficult to guess the setting value. On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result when the second reserved information is the trigger is higher than when the first reserved information is the trigger. This makes it possible to make the frequency of time-saving results different between when a game round is executed when the first reserved information is triggered and when a game round is executed when the second reserved information is triggered.

The type random number counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type random number counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special chart reserve area 111 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 33, and is stored in the second special chart reserve area 112 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: the number of rounds played in the opening/closing execution mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A jackpot allocation table 125 for the first special symbol is provided as a jackpot allocation table referenced in the jackpot allocation determination process when a jackpot result is selected in the win/lose determination process for the first reserved information. In addition, a jackpot allocation table 126 for the second special symbol is provided as a jackpot allocation table referenced in the jackpot allocation determination process when a jackpot result is selected in the win/lose determination process for the second reserved information.

Figure 10(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot allocation table 125 for the first special design, and Figure 10(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot allocation table 126 for the second special design. As shown in Figures 10(a) and 10(b), in each jackpot allocation table 125, 126, the types of jackpot results are set as 5R low probability result, 5R high probability result, and 10R high probability result. Figure 11(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each jackpot result.

As already explained, the 5R low probability result occurs when the win/loss determination process results in a jackpot result and the jackpot allocation determination process selects the result. The 5R low probability result is a jackpot result in which the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode is 5, the win/loss selection mode after the open/close execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode after the open/close execution mode ends becomes the first high frequency support mode. In this case, the low probability mode continues at least until the next open/close execution mode occurs. The first high frequency support mode ends when 100 play times have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 100 play times have been played, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 5R high probability result occurs when the win/loss determination process results in a jackpot result and the jackpot allocation determination process selects the result. The 5R high probability result is a jackpot result in which the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode is 5, the win/loss selection mode after the open/close execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode after the open/close execution mode ends becomes the first high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode end when 100 play rounds have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 100 play rounds have been played, the win/loss selection mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 10R high probability result occurs when the win/loss determination process results in a jackpot result and the jackpot allocation determination process selects the result. The 10R high probability result is a jackpot result in which the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode is 10, the win/loss selection mode after the open/close execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode after the open/close execution mode ends becomes the first high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode end when 100 play rounds have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 100 play rounds have been played, the win/loss selection mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol has 5R low probability result, 5R high probability result, and 10R high probability result set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low probability result, the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 22" corresponds to the 5R high probability result, and the type random number counter C2 of "23 to 29" corresponds to the 10R high probability result. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol has 5R low probability result and 10R high probability result set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low probability result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 29" corresponds to the 10R high probability result.

The probability of switching to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode in the case of a jackpot win is the same for the jackpot allocation table 125 for the first special symbol and the jackpot allocation table 126 for the second special symbol. On the other hand, the average number of rounds played is greater for the jackpot allocation table 126 for the second special symbol than for the jackpot allocation table 125 for the first special symbol. Therefore, in terms of the type of jackpot result that can be selected in the case of a jackpot win, it is more advantageous for the player to have a win in the second actuation port 34 and a win/loss determination process performed than to have a win in the first actuation port 33 and a win/loss determination process performed.

Not only are multiple types of jackpot results set, but multiple types of time-saving results are also set. When a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process, the type of time-saving result is determined by lottery using the type random number counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot result by lottery. In other words, not only is the win random number counter C1 used to select the jackpot result used as a random number for selecting the time-saving result in the win/loss determination process used, but the type random number counter C2 used to select the type of jackpot result is used as a random number for selecting the type of time-saving result when a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process. This makes it possible to reduce the number of counters used for the lottery, and to reduce the storage capacity of the main RAM 84 required for performing the lottery.

A time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special chart is provided as a time-saving allocation table to be referenced in the allocation judgment process for time-saving when a time-saving result is selected in the success/failure judgment process for the first reserved information. Also, a time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special chart is provided as a time-saving allocation table to be referenced in the allocation judgment process for time-saving when a time-saving result is selected in the success/failure judgment process for the second reserved information.

Figure 10(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special pattern, and Figure 10(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special pattern. As shown in Figures 10(c) and 10(d), in each of the time-saving allocation tables 127, 128, a first time-saving result and a second time-saving result are set as the type of time-saving result. Figure 11(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each time-saving trigger.

As already explained, the first time-saving result is generated by becoming the time-saving result in the win/lose determination process and being selected in the time-saving allocation determination process. The first time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the open/close execution mode, nor does it trigger a transition to the win/lose lottery mode, but is a time-saving result that sets the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 play times have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 100 play times have been played, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the second time-saving result is generated by being the time-saving result in the win/lose determination process and being selected in the time-saving allocation determination process. The second time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the open/close execution mode, nor does it trigger a transition to the win/lose lottery mode, and is a time-saving result that sets the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 150 play times have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 150 play times have been played, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the second time-saving result has a greater number of play times during which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time-saving result. Therefore, the second time-saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving result.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special chart has the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result set as the type of time-saving result to be allocated. In the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special chart, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 19" corresponds to the first time-saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "20 to 29" corresponds to the second time-saving result. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(d), the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special chart has the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result set as the type of time-saving result to be allocated. In the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special chart, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 9" corresponds to the first time-saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "10 to 29" corresponds to the second time-saving result.

In the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special symbol, the probability of selecting the relatively unfavorable first time-saving result is higher than the probability of selecting the relatively favorable second time-saving result, whereas in the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special symbol, the probability of selecting the relatively favorable second time-saving result is higher than the probability of selecting the relatively unfavorable first time-saving result. Furthermore, the probability of selecting the relatively favorable second time-saving result is higher in the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special symbol than in the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special symbol. Thus, the type of time-saving result that can be selected in the time-saving result determination process is more favorable for the player when a win occurs in the second actuation port 34 and a win/loss determination process is performed than when a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 and a win/loss determination process is performed.

Here, the selection of the time-saving result in the winning/losing judgment process can occur whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, but even if the time-saving result is selected in the high probability mode, the support mode is not set based on the time-saving result. In addition, the selection of the time-saving result in the winning/losing judgment process can occur whether the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, or the second high-frequency support mode, but even if the time-saving result is selected in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the support mode is not set based on the time-saving result. In other words, the setting of the support mode based on the time-saving result in response to the selection of the time-saving result in the winning/losing judgment process occurs only in a situation in which the mode is the low probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. Note that the situation in which the mode is the low probability mode and the low-frequency support mode also includes a situation after the process for terminating the high-frequency support mode and transitioning to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the last play of the high-frequency support mode in a situation in which the mode is the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode.

The transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to the time-saving result only occurs in the low probability mode, so when a time-saving result occurs and a transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, it is a low probability mode and becomes the second high-frequency support mode. In other words, the time-saving result results in a transition to the above-mentioned time-saving state without the intervening open/close execution mode. Also, the support mode that is set after the open/close execution mode in response to a jackpot result is the first high-frequency support mode, whereas the support mode that is set in response to a time-saving result is the second high-frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by a jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by a time-saving result.

In this pachinko machine 10, in addition to the time-saving results described above, there is also a ceiling time-saving event that transitions the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode without generating the opening/closing execution mode. The ceiling time-saving event occurs when the ceiling number of play times is consumed without a jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 11(b). The ceiling number of play times is set when a jackpot result occurs, and also when the supply of operating power begins. This will be explained in detail later. The ceiling time-saving event does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger a transition to the win/lose lottery mode, but results in the support mode being the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 play times are consumed without a new opening/closing execution mode being generated. When 100 play times are consumed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The number of times the second high-frequency support mode occurs as a result of the ceiling time-saving is reached is the same as the number of times the second high-frequency support mode occurs as a result of the first time-saving result, and is less than the number of times the second high-frequency support mode occurs as a result of the second time-saving result. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player if the time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process than if the ceiling time-saving is reached.

The consumption of the ceiling number of times of play does not occur in the high probability mode. Therefore, even if the ceiling number of times is newly set due to a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result, the remaining ceiling number of times is not subtracted until the high probability mode ends. On the other hand, the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play occurs in the low probability mode regardless of the support mode. However, even if the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play is completed in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the setting of the support mode triggered by the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play is not performed. In other words, the setting of the support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction in response to the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play is completed only occurs in the low probability mode and in the low frequency support mode. Note that the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode also includes the situation after the process for terminating the high frequency support mode and transitioning to the low frequency support mode is executed in the last play of the high frequency support mode in the low probability mode and in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode.

The transition to the second high frequency support mode due to the ceiling time reduction occurs only in the low probability mode, so when the ceiling time reduction occurs and a transition to the second high frequency support mode occurs, it is a low probability mode and becomes the second high frequency support mode. In other words, the ceiling time reduction results in the game state transitioning to the above time reduction state without the intervening opening and closing execution mode. Also, the support mode that is set after the opening and closing execution mode in response to a jackpot result is the first high frequency support mode, whereas the support mode that is set in response to a ceiling time reduction is the second high frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by a jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

Figure 12 is a time chart showing how the time-saving state is set by the time-saving result or the ceiling time-saving. Figure 12(a) shows the period in the open/close execution mode, Figure 12(b) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84, Figure 12(c) shows the period in the high probability state, Figure 12(d) shows the timing when the time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process, and Figure 12(e) shows the period in the time-saving state.

First, we will explain the cases where events that trigger a time-saving state due to a time-saving result and events that trigger a time-saving state due to a ceiling time-saving result occur discontinuously.

When the result of the win/loss determination process is a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result, the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this case, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the fixed ceiling number of 500 is set in the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84 as shown in FIG. 12(b). The ceiling counter 131 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining ceiling number of times.

After that, the open/close execution mode ends at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 12(a), and the high probability state is entered as shown in FIG. 12(c). The high probability state is a game state that is a high probability mode and is the first high frequency support mode. The high probability state ends at the timing of t4 when 100 game rounds are consumed. In the open/close execution mode, since game rounds are not executed, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented, and in the high probability mode, even if game rounds are executed, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented. Therefore, at the timing of t4 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 has not changed from the timing of t1 when the fixed ceiling number was set in the ceiling counter 131. Also, at the timing of t3, which is a timing in the middle of the high probability state, a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process as shown in FIG. 12(d), but since it is a high probability mode, the time-saving result is invalidated.

At timing t4, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the high probability state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state. In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as shown in FIG. 12(b) regardless of whether a game round triggered by the first reserved information or a game round triggered by the second reserved information is executed.

After that, at the timing of t5, the time-saving result is selected by the winning/losing judgment process as shown in FIG. 12(d). Since the game state at the timing of t5 is the normal game state, the time-saving result is used as a trigger to transition to the time-saving state as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, the open/close execution mode is not intervened as shown in FIG. 12(a), and the winning/losing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time-saving state is a game state in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. In the time-saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 12(b), regardless of whether a game round triggered by the first reserved information or a game round triggered by the second reserved information is executed. After that, the remaining number of times the time-saving state continues becomes 0 at the timing of t6 without a jackpot result occurring in the time-saving state, and the time-saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, the game state becomes the normal game state.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 12(b). In other words, the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play is completed. Since the game state at the timing of t7 is the normal game state, the ceiling time-saving triggers a transition to the time-saving state as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the open/close execution mode does not intervene, and the win/lose lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time-saving state is a game state in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. After that, without a jackpot result occurring in the time-saving state, the remaining number of times of the time-saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t8, and the time-saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, the game state becomes the normal game state.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set whether the time-saving state is entered as a result of the ceiling time-saving or the time-saving state ends. In addition, a transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more, a game round is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". Therefore, a transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs only once after a jackpot result occurs, and if a transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs once, basically no transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur unless a jackpot result occurs afterwards and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set.

Next, we will explain the cases where an event in which the time-saving state is triggered by a time-saving result and an event in which the time-saving state is triggered by a ceiling time-saving result occur consecutively.

When the result of the win/loss determination process is a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result, the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this case, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the fixed ceiling number of 500 is set in the ceiling counter 131 as shown in FIG. 12(b).

After that, at the timing of t10, the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 12(a), and the high probability state is entered as shown in FIG. 12(c). The high probability state ends at the timing of t11 when 100 play times have been consumed. In this case, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented because no play times are executed in the open/close execution mode, and furthermore, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented even if a play time is executed in the high probability mode. Therefore, at the timing of t11 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 has not changed from the timing of t9 when the fixed ceiling number was set in the ceiling counter 131.

At timing t11, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the high probability state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state. In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as shown in FIG. 12(b) regardless of whether a game round triggered by the first reserved information or a game round triggered by the second reserved information is executed.

After that, at the timing of t12, the time-saving result is selected by the winning/losing judgment process as shown in FIG. 12(d). Since the game state at the timing of t12 is the normal game state, the time-saving result is used as a trigger to transition to the time-saving state as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the open/close execution mode is not intervened, and the winning/losing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time-saving state is a game state in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. In the time-saving state, whether a game round triggered by the first reserved information or a game round triggered by the second reserved information is executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 12(b). After that, at the timing of t13, which is a timing in the middle of the time-saving state, the time-saving result is selected by the winning/losing judgment process as shown in FIG. 12(d), but since the time-saving state is in effect, the time-saving result is invalidated.

After that, the remaining number of times the time-saving state continues becomes 0 at the timing of t14 without a jackpot result occurring in the time-saving state, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 12(b). In this case, the time-saving state is in effect at the timing when the last game round in the time-saving state is started, but the support mode is changed from the second high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode by specifying that the remaining number of times the time-saving state continues becomes 0 in the process executed when the game round ends, and the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal game state. In addition, when the game round ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 after the process is executed, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In other words, after the game state is set from the time-saving state to the normal game state in the game round, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". Therefore, the time-saving state is set in response to the completion of the consumption of the ceiling number of times in the game round. Therefore, the time-saving state continues without ending at the timing of t14. The time-saving state is a low probability mode and a gaming state that is the second high frequency support mode. After that, if no big win occurs in the time-saving state and the remaining number of times the time-saving state continues becomes 0 at timing t15, the time-saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 in FIG. 7 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game round in which the same symbol combination is ultimately stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in a game round corresponding to a time-saving result, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Furthermore, in a game round corresponding to a miss result, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 83.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The change type counter CS is used by the main MPU 82 to determine the change display period in the special chart display units 37a and 37b and the change display period of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is obtained when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the special chart display units 37a and 37b and at the start of the pattern change by the pattern display device 41.

<Various processes executed by the main MPU 82>
Next, we will explain each process executed to progress the game by the main MPU 82. The processes of the main MPU 82 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on initial setting process is executed (step S101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the main process is started and then the process waits until a predetermined waiting time (specifically, one second) has elapsed before proceeding to the next process. During this predetermined waiting period, the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. In addition, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted.

Then, the internal function register setting process is executed (step S102). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is started, is set to a predetermined period (specifically, 4 milliseconds). The details of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be explained later. In addition to setting the interrupt period, the internal function register setting process also executes processes such as setting the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1.

Then, the start-up processing flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S103). The start-up processing flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to identify a situation in which, even if the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is started, the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processing set in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is executed, but the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) should be terminated without executing processing for progressing the game.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) is started in the main processing (FIG. 13), and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) ends and the remaining processing (steps S127 to S130) is started. In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step S112) or setting value update processing (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed among the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126). On the other hand, as described above, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), even if the startup process in progress flag is set to "1", steps S201 to S205 are executed, and power outage monitoring is executed even in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or setting value update process (step S117) described below is being executed among the processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126), and the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

In particular, even if the startup processing flag is set to "1", the power outage monitoring process (step S201) is executed, so that even if a power outage occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) described later among the processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to SB126) is being executed, it is possible to execute the power outage process. In the power outage process, the power outage flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 84, so that when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 84 from being identified. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) described later, it is possible to identify the occurrence of a power outage during these setting-related processes at the start of the next supply of operating power. Incidentally, when the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) described below is being executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time.

After the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S103, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S104). The power outage flag is set to "1" when power outage processing is executed in the power outage monitoring processing (step S201) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). The power outage flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine whether power outage processing was performed appropriately the last time the power was shut off.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step S105). Specifically, a checksum is first calculated for the main RAM 84. The method of calculating the checksum is arbitrary, but the calculation method is the same as the calculation method used when the checksum is calculated in the power outage processing in the power outage monitoring processing (step S201) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) described later. Then, the checksum calculated in the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped and stored in the main RAM 84 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in the current main processing. It is then determined whether the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step S105: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is within the normal range (step S106). The setting reference area is a memory area in which information is stored for the main MPU 82 to identify the setting value set as the target for use in the current pachinko machine 10. If the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area, the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area, the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". If the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area, the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If the numerical information "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 will be "Setting 6." In step S106, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is any of "1" to "6."

If all of steps S104 to S106 are judged to be positive, this means that no information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84. In this case, it is judged whether the setting update in progress flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S107). The setting update in progress flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that the setting value update process (step S117) described later is being executed, and when the setting update in progress flag is set to "1", the notification display device 141 (see FIG. 6) mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71 displays a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value being updated. The notification display device 141 is equipped with multiple segment displays. These multiple segment displays are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the display surface of each segment display can be seen from outside the board box of the main control device 71 without opening the board box.

The setting update in progress flag is set to "1" when the setting value update process (step S117) is started and cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (step S117) is ended, so the setting update in progress flag is not generally set to "1" when the setting value update process (step S117) is not being executed. However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, the setting update in progress flag will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is subsequently started. This setting update in progress flag set to "1" is maintained until the process of clearing the setting update in progress flag to "0" is executed in the setting value update process (step S117).

If a negative judgment is made in step S107 because the setting update in progress flag is not set to "1", it is judged whether the reset button 142 (see FIG. 6) is pressed (step S108). The reset button 142 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the pressing portion of the reset button 142 is not covered by the board box of the main control device 71. Therefore, it is possible to operate the reset button 142 without opening the board box. In step S108, it is judged whether the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 has started while the reset button 142 is being pressed.

If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S108: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksum does not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) described later, while the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed by making a positive judgment in step S206. As a result, when the power outage processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power outage and the power outage flag was not set to "1", when the checksum does not match due to the memory state of the main RAM 84 having changed since the previous power outage, or when the set value is abnormal, the processing for performing power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the processing for progressing the game is not executed. If a positive determination is made in step S109, the processes in steps S124 and S125 described below are executed.

If the negative judgment is made in step S109, it is judged whether the setting key insertion unit 143 (see FIG. 6) is turned on using the setting key (step S110). The setting key insertion unit 143 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the keyhole portion for turning on the setting key insertion unit 143 using the setting key is not covered by the board box of the main control device 71. Therefore, it is possible to turn on the setting key insertion unit 143 using the setting key without opening the board box. If the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on using the setting key (step S110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S112). Also, even if the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on using the setting key (step S110: NO), if the setting confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S111: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S112).

The setting confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, and when the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", the notification display device 141 displays a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set setting value. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is started and cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is ended, so in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is not being executed, the setting confirmation flag is not basically set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, the setting confirmation flag will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started thereafter. The setting confirmation flag remains set to "1" until the RAM clear process (step S119) described below is executed, the setting value update process (step S117) described below is executed, or the setting confirmation process (step S112) clears the setting confirmation flag to "0."

As described above, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed not only when the reset button 142 is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is ON (i.e., when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 142 is not pressed and the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. This makes it possible to continue checking the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, if the reset button 142 is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is not executed and the process corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power is resumed is executed among the RAM clear process (step S119) and the setting value update process (step S117). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear process (step S119) or the setting value update process (step S117) over the setting confirmation process (step S112).

Here, we will explain the setting confirmation process executed in step S112.

In the setting confirmation process, the interrupt permission is set first. This allows the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) to interrupt and start at a predetermined cycle. In this pachinko machine 10, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited from interrupting in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126), and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is allowed to be executed when the setting confirmation process (step S112) and the setting value update process (step S117) are being executed. However, since the start-up process in progress flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, even if the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is started, the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is terminated without executing the process for progressing the game. Then, on condition that the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 84 is not set to "1", the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". By setting the setting confirmation flag to "1", a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the notification display device 141. Then, a confirmation start command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. As a result, the display side MPU 103 is controlled to display an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed and an image that allows the user to recognize the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process (step S112) on the pattern display device 41.

After that, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". This cancels the state in which the notification display device 141 displays the indication that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the indication of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Then, an interrupt prohibition is set. This prohibits the interruption of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is terminated and the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 13) (steps S101 to S126) is resumed. Then, a return command at the time of confirmation is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. This ends the display of the image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being performed on the pattern display device 41 and the image for enabling recognition of the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process (step S112).

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), if the setting key insertion section 143 is not turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1" (steps S110 and S111: NO), it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open (step S113). A main body open detection sensor 144 (see FIG. 6) is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13. The main body open detection sensor 144 is electrically connected to the main MPU 82, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, it transmits a LOW level open detection signal to the main MPU 82, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, it transmits a HI level open detection signal to the main MPU 82. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI may be reversed. In step S113, it is determined whether a HI level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144.

When a HIGH level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144 (step S113: YES), that is, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S114). The processing of step S113 is executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the reset button 142 is not pressed, and the setting key insertion section 143 is not turned ON by the setting key, and both the setting update flag and the setting confirmation flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1". In this case, the setting confirmation processing (step S112), the setting value update processing (step S117), and the RAM clear processing (step S119) are not executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126). In addition, in the arcade, the main power supply that supplies operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided on the power supply and launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance, so that when it is time to start business for the day, the main power supply is turned on so that each pachinko machine 10 is simultaneously activated.

In such circumstances, a positive judgment is made in step S113 when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 is intentionally left in an open state without executing the setting confirmation process (step S112), the setting value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119). In such a situation, the ceiling counter 131 is set to information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times. This makes it possible to create a situation where the ceiling counter 131 is set to information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times when the supply of operating power starts in a situation different from the start of normal business hours, and to create this situation without involving the setting confirmation process (step S112), the setting value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119).

If a negative judgment is made in step S113 or if the processing of step S114 is executed, a normal return command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S115). By receiving the normal return command, the sound/light side MPU 93 determines that the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) in the main side MPU 82 has ended, and determines that none of the RAM clear processing (step S119), setting confirmation processing (step S112), and setting value update processing (step S117) have been executed in the processing at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 has been pressed and that the setting key insertion unit 143 has been turned on using the setting key (step S116: YES), or if it is determined in step S107 that the setting update flag is set to "1", the setting value update process is executed (step S117). As described above, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed not only when the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on (i.e., when a "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the setting update flag is set to "1" regardless of whether the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on. Therefore, when a power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of whether the operation content at the start of the supply of operating power thereafter is "no operation", "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", or "setting confirmation operation". This allows the execution of the setting value update process (step S117) to be prioritized.

Here, we will explain the setting value update process executed in step S117.

In the setting value update process, the interrupt permission is set first. This allows the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) to interrupt and be started at a predetermined cycle. In this pachinko machine 10, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126), and the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) and the setting value update process (step S117) are being executed. However, since the start-up process in progress flag is set to "1" in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, even if the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is started, the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the process for progressing the game is not executed and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is terminated. Thereafter, on condition that the setting update in progress flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1", the setting update in progress flag is set to "1". By setting the setting update in progress flag to "1", a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display of the setting values selected as the update targets for the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the notification display device 141.

Then, the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" in step S121 of the main processing (FIG. 13) when the power outage processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power outage and the power outage flag was not set to "1" (step S104: NO), when the checksum does not match due to the change in the memory state of the main RAM 84 since the previous power outage (step S105: NO), or when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area is not within the normal range (step S106: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed by making a positive judgment in step S206. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 as described above, the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the setting value update process, it is possible to release the state in which an information abnormality has been identified in the main RAM 84 when the setting value update process (step S117) is executed.

Then, "1" is set in the setting update area provided in the main RAM 84. The setting update area is a storage area in which information on the setting value being updated during the setting value update process (step S117) is stored. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 6". Then, an update start command is sent to the audio-visual side MPU 93. As a result, the display side MPU 103 is controlled so that an image indicating that the setting value update process (step S117) is being performed, an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for terminating the setting value update process (step S117) are displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In the setting value update process, the value in the setting update area is incremented by 1, provided that the reset button 142 is pressed. This causes the setting value to be updated to the next higher level each time the reset button 142 is pressed. Furthermore, if the value in the setting update area after incrementing by 1 is 7 or greater, the setting update area is set to "1." This causes the setting to revert to "setting 1" if the reset button 142 is pressed once when the setting is "setting 6."

In the setting value update process, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value information stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area. As a result, the setting value information updated in this setting value update process (step S117) is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. After that, interrupt prohibition is set. As a result, when the setting value update process (step S117) is terminated and the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 13) (steps S101 to S126) is returned to, interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) are prohibited.

After that, the RAM clear process is executed. In the RAM clear process, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in the main RAM 84 where the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (i.e., the setting reference area), the ceiling counter 131, and the area in the main RAM 84 where the information for calculating the role ratio is stored. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the normal power role object 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the special map reserve area 84a and the normal map reserve area 84c are also cleared to "0", so the first reserved information, the second reserved information, and the reserved information on the normal map side are erased. In addition, the setting update flag, the setting confirmation flag, and the setting update area are cleared to "0". In addition, in the RAM clear process, various registers in the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" before initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process in step S102 is performed.

Here, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 in the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and no new ceiling count is set, including information on the fixed ceiling count. This makes it possible to maintain the remaining ceiling count even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed.

Then, a return command for the update is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. This ends the display of the image indicating that the setting value update process (step S117) is being performed in the pattern display device 41, the image for enabling recognition of the operation content for changing the setting value, and the image for enabling recognition of the operation content for terminating the setting value update process (step S117).

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), if it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 has been pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 has not been turned ON using the setting key (step S116: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S118). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the setting value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while the processes of steps S207 to S220 are not executed by making a positive determination in step S206. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly the last time the power was shut down, if the checksum does not match because the memory state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the last time the power was shut down, or if the setting value is abnormal, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed, but processing for progressing the game will not be executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step S118: NO), a RAM clear process is executed (step S119). In the RAM clear process, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in the main RAM 84 where the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (i.e., the setting reference area), the ceiling counter 131, and the area in the main RAM 84 where the information for calculating the role ratio is stored. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the special map reservation area 84a and the regular map reservation area 84c are also cleared to "0", so the first reservation information, the second reservation information, and the reservation information on the regular map side are erased. The setting update flag and the setting confirmation flag are also cleared to "0". In the RAM clear process, the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" before the initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step SB102 is performed.

Here, even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 in the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and no new ceiling count is set, including information on the fixed ceiling count. This makes it possible to maintain the remaining ceiling count even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed.

Then, a clear recovery command is sent to the audio/light side MPU 93 (step S120). By receiving the clear recovery command, the audio/light side MPU 93 determines that the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) in the main side MPU 82 has ended, and determines that the RAM clear processing (step S119) was performed during the current processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126).

In the main processing (FIG. 13), if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S104 to S106, i.e., if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S121). As already explained, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the processes of steps S207 to S220 are not executed by making a positive judgment in step S206. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the previous power failure, if the checksums do not match due to a change in the memory state of the main RAM 84 since the previous power failure, or if the set value is abnormal, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but the processes for progressing the game are not executed.

Then, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S122). As already explained, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling number including the information of the fixed ceiling number is not newly set. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed to release the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, it is possible to reset the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number.

Then, it is determined whether the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123). If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S123: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or setting value at the start of the supply of operating power is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S124). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the display light-emitting unit 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and causes the speaker unit 65 to output a voice saying "Please change the settings." In addition, a text image saying "Please change the settings" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification will be restarted when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S117) is executed.

After that, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S125). In the external output processing in the event of an abnormality, processing is executed to externally output an abnormality signal to the gaming hall's management computer. In this case, the signal output of the abnormality signal is performed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 100 milliseconds). However, this is not limited to this, and the signal output of the abnormality signal may be continued when the game stop flag is set to "1", and the signal output of the abnormality signal may be stopped by clearing the game stop flag to "0".

If the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned ON using the setting key (step S116). If the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned ON using the setting key (step S116 and step S123: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step S117). The contents of the setting value update process have already been described. In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed even if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S104 to S106 due to an abnormality occurring in the main RAM 84. This makes it possible to prioritize the change of the setting value. In addition, in the setting value update process (step S117), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" as already described. As a result, when the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, it becomes possible to resolve the condition in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 after the setting value update is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 142 is pressed but the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned ON (step S123: YES, step S116: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S118). Since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1" in the processing of step S118 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121, a positive determination is made in step S118. In this case, an abnormality command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 in step S124, and an abnormality signal is output to the outside in step S125.

In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the power failure flag, checksum, or setting value and a negative judgment is made in any of steps S104 to S106, the RAM clear process (step S119) is not executed even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. In addition, the RAM clear process (step S119) is not executed even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" from being canceled even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. In contrast, when the "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" or not, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (step S117). This makes it necessary to execute the setting value update process (step S117) in order to cancel the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1". Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to require not only the process of initializing a portion of the main RAM 84, but also the resetting of the setting value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if the "setting change operation" is not performed, i.e., if there is no operation, or if the "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, a positive judgment is made in step S109 or step S118, and an abnormality command is sent in step S124 and an external output process in the event of an abnormality is executed in step S125. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output in the event of an abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are executed every time the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, regardless of the processing results of steps S104 to S106 in the subsequent main processing, unless the setting value update process (step S117) is executed. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the setting value should be changed.

When the process of step S112, step S115, step S117, step S120, or step S125 is executed, the start-up processing flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S126). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0", a negative judgment is made in step S206 when the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is started, and not only the processes of steps S201 to S205 but also the processes of steps S207 to S220 are executed, and the state in which processes for progressing the game are not executed is released. Note that in step S126, the power outage flag in the main RAM 84 is also cleared to "0".

Then, proceed to the remaining processing of steps S127 to S130. In other words, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of the timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S127 to S130. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S127 to S130 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S127, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). In the following step S128, random number initial value update processing is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S129, fluctuation counter update processing is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processing, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 84, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to "0". After that, in step S130, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. When the processing of step S130 is executed, the process returns to step S127, and the processing of steps S127 to S130 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 14. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a cycle of 4 msec.

First, the power outage monitoring process is executed (step S201). In the power outage monitoring process, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cut is received from the power outage monitoring board 85, and if a power outage is identified, the power outage process is executed and then an infinite loop is entered. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is saved.

Then, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is read out sequentially from the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed similar to step S128 in the main process (Figure 13), and in step S204, a variable counter update process is executed similar to step S129 in the main process (Figure 13).

Then, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a specific event set as a target for fraudulent activity has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and if a specific event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1".

Then, it is determined whether either the game stop flag or the startup processing flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S206). If either the game stop flag or the startup processing flag is set to "1" (step S206: YES), this timer interrupt process ends without executing the processes in steps S207 to S220. As a result, when the game stop flag or the startup processing flag is set to "1", it is possible to perform power outage monitoring, random number updating, and fraud monitoring in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while not executing the processes to progress the game in steps S207 to S220.

If both the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag are not set to "1" (step S206: NO), the process for progressing the game in steps S207 to S220 is executed. Specifically, the port output process is executed first (step S207). In the port output process, if the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, if the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is started, and if the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, if the information to switch the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started, and if the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, a read process is executed (step S208). In the read process, signals other than the power outage signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes. Then, a ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, signals received from each winning detection sensor 86a to 86e are read, and a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball has entered the general winning gate 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating gate 33, the second operating gate 34, and the through gate 35.

Then, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of the multiple types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 84 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled in a consolidated manner, but it is also possible to configure the system to collectively update both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters.

Then, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of the game balls (step S211). When the launch operation is continued on the launch operation device 28, as already explained, one game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds to achieve the predetermined launch cycle.

Then, as an input status monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are checked for disconnections and the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are checked for opening (step S212).

After that, a special chart special power control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the open/close execution mode (step S213), and a normal chart normal power control process is executed to control the display of the normal chart display unit 38a and to control the execution of the normal power open state (step S214). These special chart special power control processes and normal chart normal power control processes will be explained in detail later.

In the next step S215, based on the processing results of the previous steps S213 and S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of first reserved information in the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of second reserved information in the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information on the regular chart side in the regular chart reserved display unit 38b. Also, in step S215, based on the processing results of the previous steps S213 and S214, output information is set to update the display contents of the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b, and output information is set to update the display contents of the regular chart display unit 38a.

Then, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout status receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S216). In addition, a payout output process is executed to set the prize ball command as the output target (step S217). In addition, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step S218).

Then, a setting monitoring process is executed (step S219). In the setting monitoring process, by judging whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is any of "1" to "6", it is judged whether the setting value set as the target for use is any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". If the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the setting value set as the target for use is abnormal, so the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". As a result, it becomes impossible to proceed with the game until the setting value to be used is newly set in the setting value update process (step S117). Then, a management process is executed (step S220). In the management process, a process for storing the game history for calculating the role ratio, a process for calculating the role ratio using the stored game history, and a process for displaying the calculated role ratio on the notification display device 141 are executed.

<General map and power control processing>
Next, the normal power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If a win has occurred in the through gate 35 (step S301: YES), and the number of reserved information on the regular map side stored in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the regular map reserve area 84c is less than the upper limit of four (step S302: NO), a storage process is executed in the regular map reserve area 84c (step S303). In this storage process, the numerical information of the regular random number counter C4 is stored as reserved information on the regular map side in the area with the earlier consumption order among the areas in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the regular map reserve area 84c where reserved information on the regular map side is not stored. In addition, when reserved information on the regular map side is acquired, data settings are performed so that the display content of the regular map reserve display unit 38b is updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of reserved information on the regular map side.

If a negative judgment is made in step S301, if a positive judgment is made in step S302, or if the processing of step S303 is executed, the normal map/normal power address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read (step S304). The normal map/normal power address table contains the start address of a program for executing processing corresponding to the numerical information of the normal map/normal power counter. The normal map/normal power counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to identify the processing content to be executed in the normal map/normal power control processing.

The normal map normal power counter can take values from "0" to "3", and each value from "0" to "3" corresponds to each process (steps S307 to S310). Specifically, when the value of the normal map normal power counter is "0", the normal map change start process (step S307) is executed, which is a process for starting the change display in the normal map display unit 38a. When the value of the normal map normal power counter is "1", the normal map change process (step S308) is executed, which is a process for progressing the change display in the normal map display unit 38a. When the value of the normal map normal power counter is "2", the normal map confirmation process (step S309) is executed, which is a process for ending the change display in the normal map display unit 38a. When the value of the normal map normal power counter is "3", the normal power control process (step S310) is executed, which is a process for controlling the normal power open state of the normal power role 34a in the second operating port 34.

In the normal map normal power control process, after reading the normal map normal power address table (step S304), the start address corresponding to the information of the normal map normal power counter is obtained from the normal map normal power address table (step S305), and the process indicated by the obtained start address is jumped to (step S306). Each process from step S307 to step S310 is explained individually below.

<Regular map change start processing>
First, the general map change start process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the normal map change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S402) on the condition that the reserved information on the normal map side is stored in the normal map reserved area 84c (step S401: YES). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 114a of the normal map reserved area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for the normal map. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the normal map reserved area 84c. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 114a to 114d in order to the lower area side, specifically, the data in each area is shifted from the second area 114b to the first area 114a, the third area 114c to the second area 114b, and the fourth area 114d to the third area 114c. Then, the fourth area 114d is cleared to "0". In addition, the data setting process performs data setting so that the display contents of the regular map pending display section 38b are updated in accordance with the current decrease in the number of pending information items on the regular map side.

Then, it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S403), and if it is not the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether the first high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S404). The first high frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify whether the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or not, and when a transition to the first high frequency support mode occurs, the first high frequency flag is set to "1", and when the first high frequency support mode ends, the first high frequency flag is cleared to "0".

If the mode is the open/close execution mode (step S403: YES), the low probability table of the normal side is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S405). Also, if the mode is not the open/close execution mode but the first high frequency flag is not set to "1" (step S404: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the low probability table of the normal side is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S405). On the other hand, if the mode is not the open/close execution mode and the first high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S404: YES), that is, if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode, the high probability table of the normal side is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S406). The value of the normal random number counter C4 that will be the electric role opening winning is set in each of the low probability table of the normal side and the high probability table of the normal side. In this case, the high probability table on the normal side is set to have a larger number of values of the normal random number counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role release than the low probability table on the normal side. As a result, the probability of winning the electric role release is higher when the high probability table on the normal side is referenced than when the low probability table on the normal side is referenced. In other words, there are a high probability mode on the normal side and a low probability mode on the normal side so that the probability of winning the electric role release is relatively high and low as the judgment mode for the normal role win/loss judgment process (step S407) described later. The low probability table on the normal side is set so that the probability of winning the electric role release is 1/2, and the high probability table on the normal side is set so that the probability of winning the electric role release is 4/5, but as long as the high probability mode on the normal side has a higher probability of winning the electric role release than the low probability mode on the normal side, these probabilities of winning the electric role release are arbitrary.

When the process of step S405 or the process of step S406 is executed, a normal map correctness determination process is executed (step S407). In the normal map correctness determination process, the numerical information for the normal signal random number counter C4 in the reserved information of the normal map side that is the target of the current normal map correctness determination process is compared against the table read out in step S405 or step S406.

If the result of the normal winning/losing determination process is a winning electric role release (step S408: YES), a stop result setting process for the normal winning result is executed (step S409). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern for the normal winning result to be finally stopped and displayed in the current variable display in the normal display unit 38a is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Note that the stop mode of one type of pattern may be set as the stop mode of the pattern for the normal winning result, or the stop mode of multiple types of patterns may be set.

If the result of the normal winning/losing determination process is not a winning electric role release (step S408: NO), a process for setting the stop result for the normal losing result is executed (step S410). Specifically, information on the stopping mode of the pattern for the normal losing result that is to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal display unit 38a in the current display continuation is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the stopping mode of the pattern for the normal winning result.

When the process of step S409 or the process of step S410 is executed, it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S411), and if it is not the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S412). As already explained, the first high frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or not, and when a transition to the first high frequency support mode occurs, the first high frequency flag is set to "1", and when the first high frequency support mode ends, the first high frequency flag is cleared to "0". The second high frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the support mode is the second high frequency support mode or not, and when a transition to the second high frequency support mode occurs, the second high frequency flag is set to "1", and when the second high frequency support mode ends, the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0".

If the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (step S411: YES), information corresponding to 10 seconds, which is a long period of time as the duration of the current variable display in the general map display unit 38a, is set in the general map side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S413). Also, if both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag are not set to "1" (step S412: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, information corresponding to 10 seconds, which is a long period of time as the duration of the current variable display in the general map display unit 38a, is set in the general map side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S413). The update of the numerical information set in the general map side timer counter is performed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 14). As a result, if the mode is the opening/closing execution mode or the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the variable display in the general map display unit 38a is performed for a long period of time, which is a relatively long duration.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not selected and the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S412: YES), that is, if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, information corresponding to one second, which is a short period of time for the current variable display in the general map display unit 38a, is set in the general map timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S414). As a result, when the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the variable display in the general map display unit 38a is performed for a relatively short period of time.

Then, the display of the pattern change in the normal map display unit 38a is started (step S415). A change display table for the normal map is pre-stored in the main ROM 83 as a table to be referenced by the main MPU 82 when the pattern change display is performed in the normal map display unit 38a. When the pattern change display is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, the same change display table is used regardless of the result of the normal map correctness judgment process. When the pattern change display is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, the change display of the pattern according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, and the change display table for the normal map is set with control data for one revolution in the change display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the pattern change display is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, the change display table for the normal map is repeatedly used until just before the confirmation display is performed. Then, the value of the normal map normal power counter is incremented by 1 (step S416). As a result, the value of the normal map normal power counter becomes "1" corresponding to the normal map change processing (step S308).

<Processing during normal map fluctuations>
Next, the normal map fluctuation processing in step S308 in the normal map normal power control processing (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the normal map change processing, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the final display while the pattern is being changed in the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, it is determined that the timing is before the final display when the value of the normal map timer counter that measures the duration of the current change display is 0.4 seconds remaining. If it is before the final display, a process is executed to regularly change the display mode of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a. This regular change continues until the timing to start the final display. In addition, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is a winning electric role opening. In addition, when it is time to display the final display, the display mode of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is set to a stop mode corresponding to the result of the current normal map hit/miss judgment process. This stop mode is a stop mode corresponding to the information read out to the main RAM 84 in step S409 or step S410 of the normal map change start process (FIG. 16). Then, the value of the normal map normal electricity counter is incremented by 1, updating the value of the counter to one corresponding to the normal map confirmation process.

<General map confirmation processing>
Next, the process during normal map confirmation in step S309 in the normal map normal power control process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

By determining whether the value of the regular map timer counter, which measures the duration of the current variable display, is "0", it is determined whether the final display period of the current variable display (specifically, 0.4 seconds) has elapsed (step S501). If the final display period has elapsed (step S501: YES), it is determined whether the result of the regular map win/loss determination process for the current variable display is a win for the electric role opening (step S502). If the electric role opening is not a win (step S502: NO), the value of the regular map regular electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S503), and then this regular map confirmation process is terminated. This causes the value of the regular map regular electricity counter to correspond to the regular map variable start process.

If the electric release is won (step S502: YES), it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S504), and if it is not the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S505). If it is the opening/closing execution mode (step S504: YES), the processing of steps S506 to S508 is executed. Also, if it is not the opening/closing execution mode but both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag are not set to "1" (step S505: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the processing of steps S506 to S508 is executed.

In steps S506 to S508, first, the normal power opening counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S506). The normal power winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 is also set to "10" (step S507). Information corresponding to 0.7 seconds, which is the duration of the short opening on the normal power side, is also set in the normal power side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S508). The normal power opening counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times that the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the current normal power opening state. The normal power winning counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine whether the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 in the current normal power opening state has reached the upper limit of 10 on the normal power side.

By executing the processes of steps S506 to S508, the execution mode of the normal power opening state that occurs in the low frequency support mode becomes the low expectation mode. In other words, in the normal power opening state in the low expectation mode, a short opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once. As already explained, since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, when a short opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, the game balls do not basically enter the second operating port 34, and even if they do, the number of balls that enter is about one.

If the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag is set to "1" instead of the open/close execution mode (step S505: YES), that is, if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the normal power release counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "3" (step S509), the normal power winning counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "10" (step S510), and information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long opening on the normal power side, is set to the normal power side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S511). By executing the processing of steps S509 to S511, the execution mode of the normal power release state that occurs in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode becomes the high expectation mode. In other words, in the normal power release state of the high expectation mode, the long opening of the normal power role 34a occurs three times. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so when the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, about three game balls can enter the second operating port 34. In the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times, with an interval period on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in a closed state. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter. Note that the normal power opening state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal power side, so when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, an event may occur in which the normal power opening state ends when the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side enters the second operating port 34.

When the process of step S507 or the process of step S510 is executed, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 34b for normal power is started, thereby opening the normal power mechanism 34a of the second operating port 34. After that, the value of the normal power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the value of the counter to one corresponding to the normal power control process.

<General power control processing>
Next, the normal power control process of step S310 in the normal power control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the normal power control process, if a winning entry has occurred in the second operating port 34, a value corresponding to the number of winning entries is subtracted from the value of the normal power winning counter in the main RAM 84. Then, if the value of the normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the normal power open counter in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the second operating port 34 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b. Then, the value of the normal map normal power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the normal map normal power control process becomes the normal map fluctuation start process (step S307).

If no winning has occurred in the second operating port 34 or if the value of the normal power winning counter is not "0", it is determined whether the value of the normal power side timer counter in the main RAM 84 is "0". If the value of the normal power side timer counter is "0", the second operating port 34 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b. Then, the value of the normal power opening counter in the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the normal power opening counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If the value of the normal power opening counter after the subtraction of 1 is 1 or more, the second operating port 34 is maintained in a closed state for the normal power side interval period (specifically, 1 second), and then the second operating port 34 is opened by again outputting the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b. In addition, information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long opening on the normal power side, is set in the normal power side timer counter in the main RAM 84. As a result, the second operating port 34 is opened again, and the duration of this open state is set to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long open state on the normal power side. If the value of the normal power open counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the value of the normal map normal power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the normal map normal power control process becomes the normal map fluctuation start process (step S307).

<Special chart special signal control processing>
Next, the special picture special power control process executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a process for acquiring reserved information is executed (step S601). In the process for acquiring reserved information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, if a winning has occurred in the first actuation port 33 (step S701: YES) and the number of first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 is less than the upper limit number (step S702: YES), a process for acquiring the first reserved information is executed.

In the process for acquiring the first reserved information, the value of the first reserved counter provided in the main RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in order to grasp the number of unprocessed first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 by the main MPU 82 (step S703). The display content of the first special chart reserved display section 37c in the special chart unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special chart reserved counter. As a result, the display content of the first special chart reserved display section 37c corresponds to the number of first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111. After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved area 111, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S703 (step S704). Then, the first reserved command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S705). As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content in the first hold display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the first hold information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S701, if a negative judgment is made in step S702, or if the processing of step S705 is executed, a winning has occurred in the second actuation port 34 (step S706: YES), and further, on the condition that the number of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit number of stored information (step S707: YES), processing is executed to obtain the second reserved information.

In the process for acquiring the second reserved information, the value of the second reserved counter provided in the main RAM 84 is first incremented by 1 in order to grasp the number of unprocessed second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 by the main MPU 82 (step S708). The display content of the second special chart reserved display section 37d in the special chart unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special chart reserved counter. As a result, the display content of the second special chart reserved display section 37d corresponds to the number of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112. After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved area 112, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S708 (step S709). Then, the second reserved command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S710). As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content in the second hold display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the second hold information.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart special call control process (FIG. 18), after executing the pending information acquisition process in step S601, the numerical information of the special chart special call counter provided in the main RAM 84 is read (step S602), and the special chart special call address table provided in the main ROM 83 is read (step S603). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special chart special call counter is obtained from the special chart special call address table (step S604), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S605).

The special chart special electricity counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine which of the processes in steps S606 to S612 in the special chart special electricity control processing should be executed, and the special chart special electricity address table has a starting address set in the program for executing each process in steps S606 to S612 corresponding to the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter. If the value of the special diagram special transmission counter is "0", the process jumps to the special diagram change start process in step S606, if the value of the special diagram special transmission counter is "1", the process jumps to the special diagram change process in step S607, if the value of the special diagram special transmission counter is "2", the process jumps to the special diagram confirmation process in step S608, if the value of the special diagram special transmission counter is "3", the process jumps to the special transmission start process in step S609, if the value of the special diagram special transmission counter is "4", the process jumps to the special transmission open process in step S610, if the value of the special diagram special transmission counter is "5", the process jumps to the special transmission closed process in step S611, if the value of the special diagram special transmission counter is "6", the process jumps to the special transmission end process in step S612. Each process in steps S606 to S612 will be explained individually below.

<Special chart change start processing>
First, the special chart change start process of step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 20. Note that the special chart change start process is not executed in a situation where a game round has already been executed or in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode is executed.

In the special chart change start process, if the second reserved information is not stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 and the first reserved information is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 (step S801: YES, step S802: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S803). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special chart reserved area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special chart. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the memory area of the first special chart reserved area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d in order to the lower area side, specifically, the data in each area is shifted from the second area 111b to the first area 111a, the third area 111c to the second area 111b, and the fourth area 111d to the third area 111c. Then, the fourth area 111d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the first special chart reserved counter in the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special chart reserved display section 37c in the special chart unit 37 is changed to one in which the first reserved information has been reduced by one. Also, in this data setting process, a first reduction command indicating that the first reserved information in the first special chart reserved area 111 has been reduced by one is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the first reserved display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the reduction in the first reserved information.

On the other hand, when the second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 (step S801 and step S802: YES), even if the first reserved information acquired before the second reserved information is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S804). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special chart reserved area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special chart. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the memory area of the second special chart reserved area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d in order to the lower area side, specifically, the data in each area is shifted from the second area 112b to the first area 112a, the third area 112c to the second area 112b, and the fourth area 112d to the third area 112c. Then, the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the second special chart reserved counter in the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special chart reserved display section 37d in the special chart unit 37 is changed to one in which the second reserved information has been reduced by one. In addition, in this data setting process, a second reduction command indicating that the second reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 112 has been reduced by one is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the reduction in the second reserved information.

When the second reserved information is stored as described above, even if the first reserved information obtained before the second reserved information is stored, the second reserved information is subject to shifting to the execution area 113 for the special chart. As a result, the second reserved information is given priority over the first reserved information as the target for starting a game round.

When the process of step S803 or the process of step S804 is executed, a win/loss determination process is executed (step S805). In the win/loss determination process, if the win/loss selection mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the first win/loss table 121 (see FIG. 9(a)) at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, if the win/loss selection mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the second win/loss table 122 (see FIG. 9(b)) at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the win/loss selection mode is the high probability mode, whether the start target of the game round is the first reserved information or the second reserved information, the win/loss table 123 (see FIG. 9(c)) at the time of high probability is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading out the winning/losing tables 121-123, the winning/losing determination information, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1, is read out from the reserved information stored in the execution area 113 for the special chart, and it is determined whether the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as a jackpot result in the data group corresponding to the currently used setting value in the winning/losing tables 121-123 read out above. Also, if it does not match the numerical information set as a jackpot result, it is determined whether the winning/losing determination information matches any of the numerical information set as a time-saving result in the data group corresponding to the currently used setting value in the winning/losing tables 121-123 read out above.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a jackpot result (step S806: YES), a jackpot distribution determination process is executed (step S807). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol (see FIG. 10(a)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol (see FIG. 10(b)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126, the information for distribution determination, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 113 for the special symbol, and the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126 are referred to to identify which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process for the jackpot, the flag in the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in the distribution determination process for the jackpot is set to "1" (step S808). Then, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S809). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 37a, 37b that is the start target of the current game round is identified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b is set differently for each type of jackpot result, and in step S809, the information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in step S808 is stored in the main RAM 84. The stopping pattern may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or multiple types of stopping patterns may be set for at least some jackpot results. The method of selecting the stopping result for a jackpot result for which multiple types of stopping patterns are set may be arbitrary, but for example, the stopping result may be selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2.

If the result of the hit/miss determination process is not a jackpot result but a time-saving result (step S806: NO, step S810: YES), a time-saving allocation determination process is executed (step S811). In the time-saving allocation determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the time-saving allocation table 127 (see FIG. 10(c)) for the first special chart is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the time-saving allocation table 128 (see FIG. 10(d)) for the second special chart is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After the time-saving allocation tables 127 and 128 are read, the allocation determination information, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 113 for the special chart, and the time-saving allocation tables 127 and 128 are referred to to identify which type of time-saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After the time-saving allocation determination process is executed, the flag in the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of time-saving result identified in the time-saving allocation determination process is set to "1" (step S812). Then, the stop result setting process for the time-saving result is executed (step S813). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special pattern display unit 37a, 37b that is the start target of the current game round is identified from the stop result table for the time-saving result stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In this stop result table for the time-saving result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b is set differently for each type of time-saving result, and in step S813, the information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of time-saving result identified in step S812 is stored in the main RAM 84. The stopping pattern may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each time-saving result, or multiple types of stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the time-saving results. The method of selecting the stopping result for a time-saving result for which multiple types of stopping patterns are set may be arbitrary, but for example, the stopping result may be selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2. The information on the pattern type selected in step S813 is different from the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the hit/miss determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result (step S810: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S814). Specifically, the information on the pattern type to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b in the current game round is identified from a stop result table for miss results pre-stored in the main ROM 83, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern type selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a time-saving result, and is one type common to the first special pattern display unit 37a and the second special pattern display unit 37b.

When the process of step S809, the process of step S813, or the process of step S814 is executed, a process for determining the variable display period is executed (step S815). Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the variable display period.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S901). The high probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode or not, and the high probability flag is set to "1" when a transition to the high probability mode occurs, and the high probability flag is cleared to "0" when the high probability mode ends. If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S901: YES), that is, if the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode, a group of tables for high probability is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S902). In a situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the high probability table group, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the high probability table group, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. There are multiple types of variable display periods for the reach display mode, but the variable display period of any reach display mode is longer than the variable display period when no reach display occurs.

If no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, if the game round is started when the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of the game round triggered by the second reserved information in the high probability mode. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started when the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

On the other hand, if the current game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 when no jackpot result occurs and no miss reach display occurs, or if the current game round is started in a situation where the first reserved information is the target of the game round and no jackpot result occurs and no miss reach display occurs, the information on the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period of the current game round. This makes it possible to guarantee the situation in which the second reserved information is acquired in the high probability mode. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the second reserved information is the target of the game round and the game round is started in a situation where one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, or if the first reserved information is the target of the game round, the information on the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

In high probability mode, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process (step S805), it will be invalidated. In this case, when the variable display period of the number of play times is selected by referring to the high probability table group, the time-saving result is treated the same as a loss result, making it possible to make the occurrence of invalidated time-saving results less noticeable.

If the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S901: NO), it is determined whether either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S903). If the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S903: YES), that is, if the win/lose selection mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, a table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S904). In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step S908 with reference to the high-frequency support table group, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the high-frequency support table group, and the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from the case where the high-probability table group is referenced, and specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when the high-probability table group is referenced than when the high-frequency support table group is referenced. However, this relationship may be reversed.

If no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of the game round triggered by the second reserved information in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

On the other hand, in the case where the current game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 when no jackpot result occurs and no miss reach display occurs, or in the case where the first reserved information is the target of the game round when no jackpot result occurs and no miss reach display occurs, the information of the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period of the current game round. This makes it possible to guarantee the situation where the second reserved information is acquired in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the second reserved information is the target of the game round and the game round is started in a situation where one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, or if the first reserved information is the target of the game round, the information of the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

In a low probability mode in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process (step S805), it is invalidated unless it is the last game in the high frequency support mode. In this case, when the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the high frequency support table group, the time-saving result is treated the same as a miss result, so that the occurrence of the invalidated time-saving result is not noticeable. In addition, when a time-saving result is selected in the last game round in the high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode is generated by the time-saving result, but even in this case, the variable display period of the game round is selected to be the same as the case of a miss result in which no reach display occurs, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result from the variable display period of the game round.

If neither the first high frequency flag nor the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S903; NO), that is, if the win/lose selection mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency reach state flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S905). The high frequency reach state flag is a flag that the main MPU 82 uses to identify whether or not a high frequency reach state that can occur in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode is in effect. The high frequency reach state is a game state in which a miss reach display occurs more frequently than in a situation in which the high frequency reach state is not in effect in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

When the high reach frequency state flag is set to "1" (step S905: YES), that is, when the mode is low probability mode and low frequency support mode and the state is also high reach frequency, the table group for high reach frequency is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S906). In a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high reach frequency, the probability that the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of a miss reach display is higher than in a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for low frequency support described below.

When a jackpot occurs in the current game round, or when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for high reach frequency, and the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is such that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for low frequency support described later is referenced. In addition, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode in this case is the same as when the table group for high probability is referenced, but it may be configured so that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for high probability is referenced, or a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for high probability is referenced, or a configuration that is the same as when the table group for high frequency support is referenced, or a configuration that is more likely to be selected so that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for high frequency support is referenced.

If a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result is read out by comparing the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time with the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for high frequency of reach. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result are set, and the variable display period corresponding to any of the time-saving results is longer than the shortest period on the special chart side and shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result, and of these, the period corresponding to the obtained value of the variable type counter CS is selected as the variable display period for the current game round.

If no jackpot or time-saving result occurs in the current game round, and no miss reach display occurs, and if the game round was started in a situation where the first reserved information is the target for the game round and three or more pieces of first reserved information are stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, the information for the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of game rounds triggered by the first reserved information in the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the case where the first reserved information is the target of the game round when neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, nor a reach-to-miss display occurs, and the game round has been started in a situation where one or two pieces of first reserved information are stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, or in the case where the second reserved information is the target of the game round when neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, nor a reach-to-miss display occurs, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the table corresponding to the complete miss result in the table group for high reach frequency, thereby reading out information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete miss result. There are multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete miss result, and whichever variable display period corresponds to the complete miss result, is longer than the shortest period on the special chart side and shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result and the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display. Specifically, the variation display periods corresponding to a complete miss are set to 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds, and among these, the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is selected as the variation display period for the current game round.

When the high-frequency reach state flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), that is, when the mode is low probability mode, low-frequency support mode, and not a high-frequency reach state, the table group for low-frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S907). In a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for low-frequency support, the probability that the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of a miss reach display is lower than in a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high-frequency reach, as already explained.

If a jackpot occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information being executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the low frequency support table group, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. As already explained, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode in this case is such that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the high frequency reach table group is referenced.

When a time-saving result occurs in the current game, the information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result is read out by comparing the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time with the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for low-frequency support. The selection manner of the information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result is the same as when the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for high-frequency reach is referenced. In other words, multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result are set, and the variable display period corresponding to any of the time-saving results is longer than the shortest period on the special chart side and shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result, and the period corresponding to the obtained value of the variable type counter CS among these is selected as the variable display period for the current game.

If no jackpot or time-saving result occurs in the current game round, and no miss reach display occurs, and if the game round was started in a situation where the first reserved information is the target for the game round and three or more pieces of first reserved information are stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, the information for the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of game rounds triggered by the first reserved information in the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the case where the first reserved information is the target of the game round when neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, nor a reach-to-miss display occurs, and the game round is started in a situation where one or two pieces of first reserved information are stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, or in the case where the second reserved information is the target of the game round when neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, nor a reach-to-miss display occurs, the information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete miss result is read out by comparing the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time with the table corresponding to the complete miss result in the low-frequency support table group. The selection mode of the information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete miss result is the same as when the table corresponding to the complete miss result in the high-frequency reach table group is referenced. In other words, multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete miss result are set, and whichever variable display period corresponds to the complete miss result, is longer than the shortest period on the special chart side and shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result and the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display. Specifically, the variation display periods corresponding to a complete miss are set to 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds, and among these, the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is selected as the variation display period for the current game round.

When the process of step S902, step S904, step S906, or step S907 is executed, the table group read in any of these processes is referenced to execute a variable display period selection process (step S908). The contents of this selection process have already been explained. Then, the information of the variable display period selected in step S908 is set in the special chart side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S909). The numerical information set in the special chart side timer counter is updated by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 14).

Returning to the explanation of the special chart variation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of specifying the variation display period in step S815, a variation command and a type command corresponding to the game round to be started this time are sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S816). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S815 and also includes information indicating which of the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b the game round to be started corresponds to. Note that the variation command does not include information on whether or not to execute a reach display, but since the variation display period when the reach display occurs is set as a period longer than the variation display period when the reach display does not occur, the sound/light side MPU 93 can specify whether or not a reach display has occurred from the information on the variation display period. The type command includes information on whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result, includes information indicating which type of jackpot result it is. The type command also includes information on whether the game round to be started this time corresponds to a time-saving result, and if so, information indicating what type of time-saving result it is.

Then, the display of the changing pattern is started in the display section that is the start target of the current game round, either the first special chart display section 37a or the second special chart display section 37b (step S817). Then, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S818). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "1", which corresponds to the special chart changing process (step S607).

When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a variation command and a type command, it executes a process to determine the execution content of the game round presentation corresponding to those commands. It then executes light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 64 and sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to a table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emission presentation in the display light-emitting unit 64 and the sound output presentation in the speaker unit 65 are executed throughout the variable display period of the current game round. In addition, the sound/light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the execution content of the game round presentation determined this time to the display side MPU 103. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 103 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 according to the table corresponding to that command. As a result, the display presentation in the pattern display device 41 is executed throughout the variable display period of the current game round.

<Special chart change processing>
Next, the special chart changing process executed in step S607 of the special chart special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

If the value of the special pattern timer counter is 1 or more and the variable display period for the current game round has not elapsed, and it is time to update the display content of the special pattern display unit 37a, 37b that is the target of the current game round, data is set to update the display content of the special pattern display unit 37a, 37b. As a result, the display content of the pattern in the controlled special pattern display unit 37a, 37b is updated to the display content of the next order.

The mode at the start of the display of the changing patterns in the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the update mode of the display of the changing patterns are performed in a fixed manner regardless of the win/lose judgment result and the allocation judgment result, and are also performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the presentation for the game round in the pattern display device 41. For example, the display content of the patterns goes around once by the occurrence of a predetermined number of update timings, and the display pattern with a fixed display order is repeated, and when the changing display period has elapsed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the situation in which the display order of the display pattern is being displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, if the value of the special chart side timer counter is "0", that is, if the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. After that, at the start of a game round, the information on the stop mode of the images of the special chart display units 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 is read out in any of steps S809, S813, and S814 in the special chart variable start processing (FIG. 20). As a result, the variable display of the images is stopped in a state where the image corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special chart display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Then, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special chart side timer counter. This starts the measurement of the final stop period. Then, the value of the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 1. As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter becomes "2", which corresponds to the special chart confirmation processing (step S608).

When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a final stop command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the command, it causes the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result of the current game round to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 for the final stop period.

<Special drawing confirmation processing>
Next, the special drawing confirmation process executed in step S608 of the special drawing special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special image side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1001: YES), and the result of the current game is a jackpot (step S1002: YES), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special image side timer counter (step S1003), and an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S1004). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the performance corresponding to the opening period to be performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

Then, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S1005). In other words, when the game number corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening and closing execution mode starts, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling number of times is set in the ceiling counter 131 not when the opening and closing execution mode starts but during the opening and closing execution mode or when the opening and closing execution mode ends, if a fraudulent act is performed in which the supply of operating power is stopped after the opening and closing execution mode starts and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed, as already explained, in the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress is cleared, while the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be resumed in a situation where the remaining ceiling number of times is small while obtaining the benefits of the opening and closing execution mode until the supply of the operating power is stopped. In response to this, when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set to a fixed ceiling count of 500, making it possible to neutralize fraudulent behavior such as the one described above.

Then, the information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the variable selection state counter 132 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1006). The trigger for decrementing the value of the variable selection state counter 132 by 1 is the same as the trigger for decrementing the value of the ceiling counter 131 by 1. That is, when one game round is played in a situation where the winning/losing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 at the end of the game round. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and as a result of decrementing the value of the variable selection state counter 132 by 1, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". When the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" in a situation where the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode, the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the reach high frequency table group in the variable display period specification process (FIG. 21) as already explained.

In other words, if the game play count of the period switching reference number is consumed in the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, if the low frequency support mode is in the high frequency reach state, the table group for the high frequency reach is referenced. In the high frequency reach state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display is selected in the case of a miss is higher than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode situations where the reach is not in the high frequency reach state, and the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode situations where the reach is not in the high frequency reach state. In addition, the period switching reference number is a predetermined number (specifically 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number. Therefore, it is possible to generate the high frequency reach state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

Then, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S1007). As a result, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter becomes "3", which corresponds to the special transmission start process (step S609).

If the result of the current game is not a jackpot (step S1002: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) is decremented in step S1008, the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented in step S1009, the time-saving result setting process is executed in step S1010, the ceiling counter 131 is decremented in step S1011, and the high probability state counter 133 (see FIG. 6) is decremented in step S1012. The contents of the processes in steps S1008 to S1012 will be explained in detail later. After that, the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart variable start process (step S606).

<Special call start processing>
Next, the special call start processing executed in step S609 of the special call control processing (FIG. 18) will be described.

The process of setting the number of times of opening and closing is executed on the condition that the value of the timer counter on the special chart side is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the result of the current game is a 5R low probability result or a 5R high probability result, the round counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "5", and if the result of the current game is a 10R high probability result, the round counter on the main RAM 84 is set to "10". The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special chart side timer counter. In addition, the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "10". The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of the winning upper limit number in the main MPU 82. In addition, the special electric winning device 32 is opened by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b. After that, the value of the special chart special electric counter is incremented by one. As a result, the value of the special chart special call counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special call open processing (step S610).

<Special call open processing>
Next, the special line open processing executed in step S610 of the special chart special line control processing (Figure 18) will be described.

When the value of the special picture side timer counter is "0", that is, when the open duration has elapsed, the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is stopped, so that the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. Also, when a game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the winning counter after the subtraction is "0", the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is stopped, so that the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. Also, when the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special picture side timer counter, and then the value of the special picture special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special picture special electric counter becomes "5", which corresponds to the special electric closed processing (step S611). On the other hand, if the round counter value after subtracting 1 is "0", the ending period information (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special chart side timer counter, and after sending an ending command to the sound/light side MPU 93, the value of the special chart special signal counter is incremented by 2. As a result, the value of the special chart special signal counter becomes "6", which corresponds to the special signal end process (step S612). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives an ending command, it causes the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the ending period.

<Special line shutdown processing>
Next, the special line closed processing executed in step S611 of the special chart special line control processing (Figure 18) will be described.

If the value of the special chart side timer counter is "0", i.e., if the interval period has elapsed, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special chart side timer counter. Also, the winning counter in the main RAM 84 is set to "10". Also, the special electric winning device 32 is set to an open state by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b. After that, the value of the special chart special electric counter is decremented by 1. As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special electric open processing (step S610).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special call termination process executed in step S612 of the special call control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", i.e., the ending period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), and the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode was a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result (step S1102: YES), the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1103). As already explained, the high probability flag is a flag that the main MPU 82 uses to determine whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode or not. By setting the high probability flag to "1", the win/lose lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

Then, the first high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). As already explained, the first high frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or not, and the second high frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the support mode is the second high frequency support mode or not, as already explained. By setting the first high frequency flag to "1" and clearing the second high frequency flag to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

Then, the high probability state counter 133 provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "100", which is the high probability continuation number (step S1105). The high probability state counter 133 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of times the high probability mode will continue. In this pachinko machine 10, the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are entered when the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result ends, but if the number of times that have been played without a new jackpot result in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode reaches 100, which is the high probability continuation number, in a situation where a jackpot result has not occurred, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are entered even if a jackpot result has not occurred.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is a 5R low probability result (step S1102: NO), the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1106). By clearing the high probability flag to "0", the win/lose lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. After that, the first high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1107). By setting the first high frequency flag to "1" and clearing the second high frequency flag to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

Then, the time-saving state counter 134 provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "100", which is the first time-saving continuation number (step S1108). The time-saving state counter 134 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of times the high-frequency support mode (first high-frequency support mode or second high-frequency support mode) will continue in the low-probability mode. In this pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are entered when the open/close execution mode triggered by the 5R low-probability result ends. In the low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, if the number of games played without a new jackpot result reaches the first time-saving continuation number, the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are entered even if a jackpot result has not occurred.

When the process of step S1105 or the process of step S1108 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S1019). In this transmission process, the state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processes of steps S1102 to S1108 is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. The sound/light side MPU 93 executes a process to cause the effect corresponding to the content of the received state designation command to be executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After that, the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart variation start process (step S606).

<Decrement process of high probability state counter 133>
Next, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 executed in step S1012 of the special chart determination process (Figure 22) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 24.

If the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1201: YES), that is, if the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1202). If the value of the high probability state counter 133 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1203: YES), it means that 100 play times, which is the high probability continuation number, have been consumed in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1204), and the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1205). This results in a normal game state that is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S1206). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the high probability state has ended is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it ends the execution of the presentation corresponding to the high probability mode in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the presentation corresponding to the normal game state.

<Time-saving result setting process>
Next, the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S1010 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step S1301: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1302). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1302: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps S1303 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game executed in a situation in which the high probability mode is active, the time-saving result is invalidated without the second high-frequency support mode being set as a result of the time-saving result.

Here, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the last game in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", and the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Then, when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result. Therefore, in the game in which the hit/miss judgment process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order so that the time-saving result setting process (Figure 25) is executed before the subtraction process (Figure 24) of the high probability state counter 133 during the special chart determination process (Figure 22).

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (steps S1303, S1304). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is either the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. If the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode (step S1303 or S1304: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processing from step S1305 onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the winning/losing judgment process of the game performed in a situation in which the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is selected, if the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is selected at the time when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is performed, the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result, and the time-saving result is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings from being executed to transition to high-frequency support mode while in that mode.

If the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (steps S1303 and S1304: NO), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1305). This causes the support mode to become the second high-frequency support mode. If the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result (step S1306: YES), the time-saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 84 is set to information of "100", which is the first time-saving continuation number (step S1307), and if the current time-saving result is the second time-saving result (step S1306: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to information of "150", which is the second time-saving continuation number (step S1308). The time-saving state counter 134 is a counter for identifying the remaining continuation number of the time-saving state, which is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode (first high-frequency support mode or second high-frequency support mode), in the main MPU 82. When the number of times that have been played without a new jackpot result during time-saving mode reaches 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, or 150 times, which is the second time-saving continuation number, the mode will enter low probability mode and low frequency support mode, even if a jackpot result has not occurred.

When the processing of step S1307 or the processing of step S1308 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S1309). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. The state designation command also includes information on the number of times the time-saving state has continued that has been set this time. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to perform an effect indicating that the time-saving state has started.

As described above, even if a time-saving result is selected in the winning/losing judgment process, the second high-frequency support mode may or may not be set based on the time-saving result, depending on the situation at the timing when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at the end of the game round that resulted in the time-saving result. In this case, the stop result displayed on the special chart display units 37a and 37b in the game round in which the time-saving result was selected in the winning/losing judgment process does not change depending on whether the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result, whereas the stop result displayed on the pattern display unit 41 changes depending on whether the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result. The details of this will be explained below. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop results of the special chart display units 37a and 37b and the stop results of the pattern display unit 41.

As already explained, the game results that can be selected by the winning/losing judgment process (step S805) and the various allocation judgment processes (steps S807 and S811) of the game round include a 5R low probability result, a 5R high probability result, a 10R high probability result, a first time-saving result, a second time-saving result, and a losing result. The stop results displayed as the confirmation display of the game round on the special chart display units 37a and 37b are "1" for a 5R low probability result, "2" for a 5R high probability result, "3" for a 10R high probability result, "4" for a first time-saving result, "5" for a second time-saving result, and "-" for a losing result. These stop results do not change regardless of the game situation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can unambiguously grasp the game result of the game round by checking the stop results on the special chart display units 37a and 37b.

The stop result displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a confirmation of the number of play times does not change regardless of the game situation in the case of a jackpot result or a miss result, whereas it changes depending on the game situation in the case of a time-saving result. In detail, in the case of a 5R low probability result, the same combination of even symbols is displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a red color is displayed in the status suggestion area 43. In the case of a 5R high probability result, the same combination of odd symbols other than the "7" symbol is displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a red color is displayed in the status suggestion area 43. In the case of a 10R high probability result, the "7" symbol combination is displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a red color is displayed in the status suggestion area 43. In the case of a losing result, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win result, and a losing combination other than the first time-saving combination ("1, 2, 3") and the second time-saving combination ("3, 4, 1") are displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the status suggestion area 43 is displayed in red.

In the case of the first time-saving result, if it is the final play in the normal game state of low probability mode and low frequency support mode, or the final play in the time-saving state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode), the first time-saving combination of symbols ("1, 2, 3") is displayed frozen on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is displayed frozen in the state suggestion area 43. In the case of the second time-saving result, if it is the final play in the normal game state of low probability mode and low frequency support mode, or the final play in the time-saving state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode), the second time-saving combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1") is displayed frozen on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is displayed frozen in the state suggestion area 43. Although details will be described later, in the final game in the time-saving state, the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented (step S1008) to end the time-saving state, and then the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed, so that by the time when the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed, the time-saving state has already ended and the game is in the normal game state.

Figure 27(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the first special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41 when the first time-saving result occurs in the final game round in the normal game state or the time-saving state triggered by the first hold information. As shown in Figure 27(a1), the symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 displays the first time-saving trigger symbol combination ("1, 2, 3") on the center line L2, and the state suggestion area 43 displays red as a stopped color. Also, as shown in Figure 27(a2), the first special symbol display section 37a displays the stopped result "4" corresponding to the first time-saving result.

On the other hand, in the high probability state, which is the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, or in a game round other than the final game round in the time-saving state, a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 regardless of whether the result is the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result. A non-missing symbol combination is a combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result, the combination of symbols that triggers the first time-saving ("1, 2, 3"), the combination of symbols that triggers the second time-saving ("3, 4, 1"), and the combination of symbols that triggers a miss. In the state suggestion area 43, blue is displayed in the case of the first time-saving result, and green is displayed in the case of the second time-saving result.

Figure 27(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop results of the second special symbol display section 37b and the symbol display device 41 when the first time-saving result occurs in a play round other than the final play round in the high probability state or time-saving state, triggered by the second reserved information. As shown in Figure 27(b2), the second special symbol display section 37b displays a "4", which is the stop result corresponding to the first time-saving result. Meanwhile, as shown in Figure 27(b1), the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 display non-out-of-reach symbol combinations on each of the active lines L1 to L5, and the state suggestion area 43 displays blue as a stop color.

If the time-saving result is one that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode (the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result), a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The combination of non-missing symbols is also displayed when the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result.

Figure 27(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop results of the second special symbol display section 37b and the symbol display device 41 when the win/loss determination process results in a miss in a game round triggered by the second reserved information. As shown in Figure 27(c2), the second special symbol display section 37b displays a "-" which is a stop result corresponding to a miss. Also, as shown in Figure 27(c1), the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 display combinations of symbols that are not in a reach or a miss on each of the active lines L1 to L5, and the state suggestion area 43 displays a red color.

The display area of the pattern display device 41 is larger than that of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and furthermore, since the pattern display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the play area PA, while the special pattern display units 37a and 37b are located in the corners of the play area PA, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. Also, while the pattern display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach displays, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, as already explained, only display the changing patterns in a certain manner and the stop results corresponding to the game results, so from this point of view as well, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. In such circumstances, if the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode (the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result), a combination of non-missing symbols that can be displayed as stopped in the case of a miss result is displayed on each of the activated lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it has been selected.

In the case of a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, even if a combination of non-reach miss patterns that is displayed as a stop when the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed on each of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. That is, in the case of FIG. 27(b) and FIG. 27(c), in the case of the first time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43 as shown in FIG. 27(b), whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43 as shown in FIG. 27(c). Also, in the case of the second time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, green is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, if a combination of non-reach miss patterns is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to see the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, it will be possible for the manager to ascertain whether this is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

In either case of the first time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, or the second time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, a combination of non-reach out symbols is displayed on each of the effective lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, but a different result is displayed in the status suggestion area 43 between the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result. In other words, in the case of the first time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, blue is displayed in the status suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of the second time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, green is displayed in the status suggestion area 43. As a result, when a combination of non-reach-missing symbols is displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 on the symbol display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to see the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b, by checking the state suggestion area 43, it becomes possible to ascertain not only whether this is a time-saving result or a miss result, but also, if it is a time-saving result, whether it is the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result.

The processing configuration that enables the display of the stop result on the pattern display device 41 as described above will be described. Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variation pattern executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. Note that the process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side MPU 82.

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step S1401: YES), a process for determining a stop pattern for the jackpot result is executed (step S1402). In the process for determining a stop pattern for the jackpot result, a combination of stop patterns corresponding to the type of the current jackpot result is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. The relationship between the type of jackpot result and the combination of stop patterns is as shown in FIG. 26. In addition, in the process for determining a stop pattern for the jackpot result, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of stop patterns corresponding to the type of the current jackpot result are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S1403).

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the game round to be started corresponds to the time-saving result (step S1404: YES), if the current game state is neither a high probability state nor a time-saving state (steps S1405 and S1406: NO), or if the current game state is a time-saving state but is the final game round of the time-saving state (steps S1406 and S1407: YES), a process for determining a stop pattern for indicating time-saving is executed (step S1408). Note that the sound/light side MPU 93 can specify whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high probability state, or a time-saving state based on the state designation command received from the main side MPU 82, and can further specify whether it is the final game round of the time-saving state based on the number of times the change command is received after receiving the state designation command corresponding to the start of the time-saving state.

In the process of determining the stop pattern for suggesting time saving, a combination of stop patterns corresponding to the type of the current time saving result is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, if the result is the first time saving result, the combination of the first time saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3") is selected, and if the result is the second time saving result, the combination of the second time saving occurrence patterns ("3, 4, 1") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for suggesting time saving, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of stop patterns corresponding to the type of the current time saving result are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S1409).

On the other hand, if the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a time-saving result (step S1404: YES), and the current game state is a high probability state (step S1405: YES), or if the current game state is a time-saving state and is not the final game round of the time-saving state (step S1406: YES, step S1407: NO), a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach is executed (step S1410). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach, a stop result is determined by lottery to be displayed as a stop result in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which is a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of first time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3"), a combination of second time-saving patterns ("3, 4, 1"), and a combination of non-missed patterns that is a combination of patterns other than the combination of the miss reach patterns.

After that, if the currently received type command contains information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to the first time-saving result (step S1411: YES), blue is selected as the stop result in the status suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S1412). Also, if the currently received type command contains information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to the second time-saving result (step S1411: NO), green is selected as the stop result in the status suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S1413).

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to a loss result (step S1404: NO), a loss stop pattern determination process is executed (step S1414). In the loss stop pattern determination process, if the currently received variable command is set with variable display period information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to the occurrence of a reach display, a loss reach pattern combination is determined by lottery as a stop result to be stopped and displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, and the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the determined loss reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. In addition, in the process of determining the stop symbol for a loss, if the currently received variable command is set with variable display period information indicating that the currently started game round does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach display, the stop result that is displayed is determined by lottery, in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win result, the first time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3"), the second time-saving pattern combination ("3, 4, 1"), and a combination of symbols other than the combination of the loss reach symbols are stopped. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1415).

When the processing of step S1403, step S1409, step S1412, step S1413 or step S1415 is executed, a pattern determination process is executed (step S1416). In the pattern determination process, a notice lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a notice display and, if so, the type of notice display. Then, as a result of the notice lottery process, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps S1401 to S1415 and the information on the fluctuation display period included in the currently received fluctuation command is selected, and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read fluctuation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform the presentation of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round.

Then, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S1416 is sent to the display side MPU 103 (step S1417). The display side MPU 103 reads out a display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read out display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 in the current game round and the stop results to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps S1401 to S1415 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (FIG. 28).

<Subtraction Process of Ceiling Counter 131>
Next, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S1011 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1501). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1501: YES), the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S1502 and onwards. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented during a game played in the high probability mode, and furthermore, since the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented, no ceiling time reduction occurs.

Here, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the last game in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 subtracts 1 from the value of the high probability state counter 133, and the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", so that the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Then, when the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. Therefore, in the game in which the hit/miss determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order during special chart determination processing (Figure 22) so that the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (Figure 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (Figure 24).

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S1503 and onward. As already explained, the process of setting information to the ceiling counter 131 is only in step S114 when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, in step S122 when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and in step S1005 when the open/close execution mode is started. After the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes are executed. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the process from step S1503 onwards. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, and if the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is entered by playing the number of times of the time reduction continuation without a jackpot result being played in the time reduction state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the playing times without a jackpot result are played repeatedly thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502: YES), subtract 1 from the value of the ceiling counter 131 (step S1503), and determine whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1504). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1504: YES), on the condition that the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S1505: NO), set the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 to "1" (step S1506), and set the information of "100", which is the first time reduction continuation number, to the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 (step S1507). This results in a time reduction state that is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. Furthermore, the time-saving state ends when the number of times that play has been performed without a jackpot result reaching 100, which is the first time-saving continuation count, and the game returns to the normal game state, which is the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S1508). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. This state designation command also includes information on the first time-saving continuation count that has been set this time. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives this state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time-saving state has started.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1, if the second high frequency flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S1506 to S1508 is not executed, and the second high frequency support mode is not set in response to the current ceiling time reduction, and the current ceiling time reduction is invalidated. In other words, even if the fixed ceiling number of times of play is completed in a time-saving state, the second high frequency support mode is not set in response to the ceiling time reduction, and the ceiling time reduction is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for transitioning to the high frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high frequency support mode. Note that the first high frequency support mode is set only until 100 times of play are played after the opening and closing execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of times is set to 500 when the opening and closing execution mode is started. Therefore, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 does not become "0" in a situation in which the first high frequency support mode is in a state ...

If a positive judgment is made in step S1505 or if the processing of step S1508 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1509). As a result, when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether the second high frequency support mode is set in response to the ceiling time reduction.

<Decrement process of time-saving state counter 134>
Next, the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 134 executed in step S1008 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 22) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1601). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1601: YES), the decrement process of the time-saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S1602 and onward. In the high probability state, the support mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode, but since the trigger for ending the high probability state is determined using the high probability state counter 133 as already explained, when the high probability flag is set to "1", the process for decrementing the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is not executed.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1602: YES), i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S1603), and if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1604: YES), both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S1605). As a result, if the first high frequency support mode was in effect, the first high frequency support mode ends and the low frequency support mode is entered, and if the second high frequency support mode was in effect, the second high frequency support mode ends and the low frequency support mode is entered. In other words, the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered.

Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S1606). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. By receiving this state designation command, the sound/light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the presentation corresponding to the time-saving state in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the presentation corresponding to the normal game state.

Here, as already explained, in the process during special pattern determination (Figure 22), the subtraction process (Figure 30) of the time-saving state counter 134 is executed before the setting process for the time-saving result (Figure 25), and the subtraction process (Figure 30) of the time-saving state counter 134 is executed before the subtraction process (Figure 29) of the ceiling counter 131. Also, as already explained, in the process during special pattern determination (Figure 22), the setting process for the time-saving result (Figure 25) is executed before the subtraction process (Figure 29) of the ceiling counter 131. The effect of setting the execution order of the processes in this way will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 31. FIG. 31(a) shows the period during which a game round is being played, FIG. 31(b) shows the period during which the time-saving state is in effect, FIG. 31(c) shows the timing at which the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented (step S1603), FIG. 31(d) shows the timing at which the time-saving state is set in response to the time-saving result (steps S1305 to S1308), and FIG. 31(e) shows the timing at which the ceiling counter 131 is decremented (step S1503).

First, we will explain the case where the result of the win/loss determination process in the final game round in the time-saving state is the time-saving result and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0".

In a time-saving state as shown in FIG. 31(b), a game round is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 31(a). Then, as the variable display period of the game round passes, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed as a confirmed result on either the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, whichever is the target of the game round, and the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed as a confirmed result on the pattern display device 41. When the final stop period passes with these stop results displayed as a confirmed result, the processing from step S1002 onward in the special chart determination processing (FIG. 22) is executed. In this case, since the game result of the game round is not a jackpot result, a negative judgment is made in step S1002 of the special chart determination processing (FIG. 22), and the processing from step S1008 onward is executed.

In the processing from step S1008 onwards, first, the decrement process (Fig. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134 is executed. Since this is a game round executed in the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented by 1 at timing t2 during which the decrement process (Fig. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134 is being executed, as shown in Fig. 31(c). Then, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after the decrement becomes "0", and the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0", and the current time-saving state ends at timing t2 as shown in Fig. 31(b), and the game enters the normal game state, which is the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

After that, in the special chart determination process (Fig. 22), the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 25) is executed, which is set to be executed later than the subtraction process (Fig. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134. Since the time-saving result has been selected in the win/loss determination process this time, the time-saving state is set based on the current time-saving result at the timing of t3 during the execution of the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 25), as shown in Fig. 31(d). Therefore, at the timing of t3, the game state becomes a time-saving state in which the game state is in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, as shown in Fig. 31(b). In addition, since the current time-saving result is the second time-saving result, the information of "150", which is the second time-saving continuation number, is set in the time-saving state counter 134.

After that, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed, which is set to be executed later than the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25). At the timing of t4 during the execution of the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 as shown in FIG. 31(e), and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction becomes "0". In other words, a ceiling time-saving occurs. However, as already explained, the result of the win/loss determination process in the current game round is the time-saving result, and the time-saving state has already been set in response to the time-saving result at the timing of t3 in the current game round. Therefore, the ceiling time-saving that has occurred this time is invalidated. After that, at the timing of t5, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 31(a).

As described above, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is set in a later order of execution than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134. Therefore, even if the result of the win/loss determination process in a play round other than the final play round in the time-saving state is a time-saving result, the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, and if the result of the win/loss determination process in the final play round in the time-saving state is a time-saving result, the second high-frequency support mode is set in response to the time-saving result. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving state from being newly set during the time-saving state so that the time-saving state does not continue excessively, while making the setting of the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result in the final play round in the time-saving state valid, so that the player can be given as much benefit as possible from the time-saving result being selected in the win/loss determination process. In addition, it is possible to create such excellent effects by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

As described above, in a configuration in which the second high frequency support mode is not set in response to a time-saving result in a play round other than the final play round in the time-saving state, even if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result, the second high frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result in the final play round in the time-saving state, but if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result in the final play round in the time-saving state, the second high frequency support mode is set in response to the time-saving result, as already explained, in the pattern arrays Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result in a play round other than the final play round in the time-saving state, a combination of non-reach miss patterns is displayed stationarily on each of the effective lines L1 to L5, and if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result in the final play round in the time-saving state, a combination of time-saving generating patterns (a combination of first time-saving generating patterns or a combination of second time-saving generating patterns) is displayed stationarily on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. This makes it possible to set the stop results in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 to stop results that correspond to whether or not the time-saving result triggers the setting of a time-saving state.

In particular, the combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a time-saving result in a play round other than the final play round in the time-saving state is a combination of symbols that is displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that although a time-saving result has been achieved, the second high-frequency support mode will not be set in response to that time-saving result.

Even if the time-saving result is as described above and the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to display a stop result that is displayed when the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b will display a stop pattern corresponding to the time-saving result. This allows the manager of the game hall to visually confirm whether or not the time-saving result has occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

Even if the configuration is such that, in the case where a time-saving result has been achieved as described above but the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, the stop result displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, a stop result different from the case when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss is displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to visually confirm whether or not a time-saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is set in an order of execution before the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. Therefore, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in a game in which the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result, it is possible to prioritize the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving. The number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving is fixed at 100 times, while the number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is 100 times if the first time-saving result is obtained, and 150 times if the second time-saving result is obtained. In other words, the number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is equal to or greater than the number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result takes precedence over the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving result, so that when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in a game in which the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result, the setting mode of the number of times the time-saving continues is set will not be disadvantageous to the player. Also, it is possible to produce such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

Next, we will explain what happens when the result of the win/loss determination process in the final game round in the time-saving state is a miss and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0."

In a time-saving state as shown in FIG. 31(b), a game round is started at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 31(a). Then, as the variable display period of the game round passes, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed as a confirmed result in either the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, whichever is the target of the game round, and the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed as a confirmed result in the pattern display device 41. When the final stop period passes with these stop results displayed as a confirmed result, the processing from step S1002 onwards in the special chart determination processing (FIG. 22) is executed. In this case, since the game result of the game round is not a jackpot result, a negative judgment is made in step S1002 of the special chart determination processing (FIG. 22), and the processing from step S1008 onwards is executed.

In the processing from step S1008 onwards, first, a subtraction process (Fig. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134 is executed. Since this is a game round executed in the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is subtracted by 1 at timing t7 during which the subtraction process (Fig. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134 is being executed, as shown in Fig. 31(c). Then, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0", so that the time-saving state ends at timing t7 as shown in Fig. 31(b), and the game enters the normal game state which is the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. After that, during the special chart determination process (Fig. 22), a setting process for the time-saving result (Fig. 25) is executed, which is set to be executed later than the subtraction process (Fig. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134. However, since the result of the win/loss determination process in this game round is a miss, the time-saving state is not set in the setting process.

After that, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, which is set to be executed later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134, is executed. At the timing of t8 during the execution of the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 as shown in FIG. 31(e), and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction becomes "0". In other words, the ceiling time-saving occurs. Then, the time-saving state is set in response to the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving, and at the timing of t8, the game state becomes the time-saving state in which the game state is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31(b). Also, since the ceiling time-saving is the trigger, the information of "100", which is the first time-saving continuation number, is set in the time-saving state counter 134. After that, at the timing of t9, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 31(a).

As described above, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is set in a later order of processing than the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30). This makes it possible to prevent the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" in a play round other than the final play round of the time-saving state, while setting the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" in the final play round of the time-saving state. This makes it possible to give the player the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving as much as possible by making the setting of the time-saving state triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving in the final play round of the time-saving state effective while preventing the time-saving state from being newly set during the time-saving state so that the time-saving state does not continue excessively. In addition, it is possible to create such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

<Decrement process of the variable selection state counter 132>
Next, the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 executed in step S1009 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1701). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1701: YES), the decrement process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S1702 and onward.

As already explained, when the game times of the period switching reference number are consumed in the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, if it is the low frequency support mode, it becomes the high frequency reach state in which the table group for the high frequency reach is referred to. And, in the high frequency reach state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display is selected in the case of a miss result is higher than the situation in which it is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and is not in the high frequency reach state, and the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than the situation in which it is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and is not in the high frequency reach state. Also, the period switching reference number is a number that is a predetermined number (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number. Therefore, it is possible to generate the high frequency reach state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. The variable selection state counter 132 is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times of play of the period switching reference number. In this case, as already explained, in the high probability state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and the ceiling time reduction does not occur in the high probability state. Therefore, when the high probability flag is set to "1", the process of decrementing the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not executed.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702). If the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variation selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S1703 and after. As already explained, the process of setting information to the variation selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the opening and closing execution mode is started, and after the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" unless the process in step S1006 is executed. On the other hand, the reach high frequency state occurs when the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 in a situation where the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" as described above (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes in step S1703 and thereafter. As a result, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" and a high-reach frequency state occurs. If this high-reach frequency state ends, the high-reach frequency state will not occur even if multiple play rounds are played without a jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent the high-reach frequency state from occurring excessively.

As already explained, the period switching reference number of times is set to a number that is a predetermined number (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times, so that a high-frequency reach state occurs before the second high-frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction, but once the ceiling time reduction has occurred, it will not occur even if multiple play rounds are played without a jackpot result. In this case, by preventing the high-frequency reach state from occurring when the high-frequency reach state ends as described above, even if multiple play rounds are played without a jackpot result, it is possible to prevent the high-frequency reach state from occurring in situations where the ceiling time reduction does not occur.

If the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702: YES), the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 (step S1703), and it is determined whether the value of the variation selection state counter 132 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1704). If the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1704: YES), the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1705).

The state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is cancelled by subtracting 1 in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29), causing the value of the ceiling counter 131 to become "0", and then clearing the reach high frequency state flag to "0" in step S1509. In other words, the state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is cancelled when a ceiling time reduction occurs, regardless of whether or not a time reduction state is set in response to the ceiling time reduction.

Here, the processing of step S1705 is executed even in the time-saving state. In contrast, in the process of determining the variable display period (FIG. 21), the processing of step S903 to determine whether either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" is executed before the processing of step S905 to determine whether the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". Therefore, even if the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1", when selecting the variable display period of the number of play times, the selection mode of the variable display period in the time-saving state takes precedence over the selection mode of the variable display period in the reach high frequency state. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the efficiency of playing times is high in the time-saving state from being hindered by the reach high frequency state flag being set to "1".

On the other hand, even in the time-saving state, the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" and the reach high frequency state flag remains set to "1". Therefore, if the time-saving state ends before an opportunity occurs to clear the reach high frequency state flag to "0", it is possible to generate a reach high frequency state from that point on.

Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S1706). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the reach high frequency state flag has been set to "1" is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives this state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the reach high frequency state will start, provided that the time-saving state is not in effect. In addition, when the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command in the time-saving state, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the reach high frequency state will start if the time-saving state ends before the period switching reference number of times is consumed.

Next, the relationship between the execution timing of the high-frequency reach state and the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 33. FIG. 33(a) shows a period in the open/close execution mode, FIG. 33(b) shows a period in the high probability state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode), FIG. 33(c) shows a period in the time-saving state (low probability mode and first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode), FIG. 33(d) shows the state of the variable selection state counter 132, FIG. 33(e) shows a period in the high-frequency reach state, and FIG. 33(f) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131.

First, we will explain the case where the high reach frequency state occurs when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0".

When the game round resulting in a 5R high probability result ends at the timing t1, the open/close execution mode starts at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, at the timing t1, the information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the variable selection state counter 132 as shown in FIG. 33(d), and the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 as shown in FIG. 33(f).

After that, at timing t2, the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 33(a), and the high probability state, which is the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, is entered as shown in FIG. 33(b). In the high probability state, game rounds are repeatedly executed, but even if game rounds are repeatedly executed in the high probability state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not decremented as shown in FIG. 33(d).

After that, at the timing of t3, the high probability continuation number of play times in the high probability state is completed, and the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 33(b), and the game enters the normal game state, which is the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. Each time a play time is consumed in the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(d).

Then, at timing t4, the time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process, and the time-saving state begins as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the time-saving state, each time a game is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(d).

After that, at the timing of t5, the time-saving continuation number of play times is consumed, and the time-saving state ends and the normal play state is entered, as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the normal play state, each time a play time is consumed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented, as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented, as shown in FIG. 33(d).

After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(d). At the timing of t6, the time-saving state is not in place as shown in FIG. 33(c). Therefore, at the timing of t6, the high reach frequency state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(e). As already explained, in the high reach frequency state, the probability that the reach display will be selected in the event of a miss is higher than in a normal game state that is not in the high reach frequency state, and the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in a normal game state that is not in the high reach frequency state.

After that, at the timing of t7, which is the high frequency reach state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(f). At the timing of t7, the time-shortened state is not in place as shown in FIG. 33(c). Therefore, at the timing of t7, the time-shortened state is in place as shown in FIG. 33(c). Also, at the timing of t7, the high frequency reach state ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). In the time-shortened state, a short period is more likely to be selected as the variable display period for the number of play times, so the efficiency of playing times is increased.

After that, at the timing of t8, the time-saving continuation count is consumed, and the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is resumed, as shown in FIG. 33(c). In this case, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 33(f), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not reset, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0". Also, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not reset, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0".

Next, we will explain the case where the setting of the high reach frequency state is delayed due to the time-saving state being in effect when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0".

When the game round resulting in a 5R low probability result ends at the timing of t9, the open/close execution mode starts at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, at the timing of t9, the information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the variable selection state counter 132 as shown in FIG. 33(d), and the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 as shown in FIG. 33(f).

After that, at timing t10, the opening and closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 33(a), and the time-saving state is entered, which is the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the time-saving state, each time a play is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(d).

After that, at timing t11, the time-saving continuation count is consumed, and the time-saving state ends and the game enters the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the normal game state, each time a game is consumed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented, as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented, as shown in FIG. 33(d).

Then, at timing t12, the time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process, and the time-saving state begins as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the time-saving state, each time a game is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(d).

After that, at the timing of t13, which is the time-saving state, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(d). At the timing of t13, the time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 33(c). Therefore, at the timing of t13, the high-frequency reach state is not entered as shown in FIG. 33(e). However, the high-frequency reach state flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and the state in which the high-frequency reach state flag is set to "1" is maintained. In this case, the time-saving state continues, and in the time-saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented each time a play round is played as shown in FIG. 33(f).

After that, at the timing of t14, the time-saving continuation count is consumed, and the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, as shown in FIG. 33(c). However, because the high-reach state flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the high-reach state is entered at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33(e). As already explained, in the high-reach state, the probability that the reach display will be selected in the event of a miss is higher than in the normal game state where the reach display is not in the high-reach state, and the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in the normal game state where the reach display is not in the high-reach state.

After that, at the timing of t15 when the high frequency of reach state is reached, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(f). At the timing of t15, the time-save state is not reached as shown in FIG. 33(c). Therefore, at the timing of t15, the time-save state is reached as shown in FIG. 33(c). Also, at the timing of t15, the high frequency of reach state ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). In the time-save state, a short period is more likely to be selected as the variable display period for the number of play times, so the efficiency of the number of play times is increased.

After that, at the timing of t16, the time-saving continuation count is consumed, and the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is resumed, as shown in FIG. 33(c). In this case, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 33(f), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not reset, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0". Also, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not reset, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0".

The above-described embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

Even if a time-saving result or ceiling time-saving occurs during the time-saving state (excluding the final play), the time-saving state will not be set based on this time-saving result or ceiling time-saving. This makes it possible to prevent a new time-saving state from being set in the middle of the time-saving state, and to prevent the time-saving state from continuing excessively.

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is set in a later order of execution than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time-saving state counter 134. This makes it possible to prevent the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result from the win/loss determination process in a play round other than the final play round of the time-saving state, even if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result, while making it possible to set the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result in the final play round of the time-saving state. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving state from being newly set during the time-saving state, so that the time-saving state does not continue excessively, while making the setting of the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result in the final play round of the time-saving state effective, so that the player is given as much benefit as possible from the time-saving result being selected in the win/loss determination process. In addition, it is possible to create such excellent effects by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In a configuration in which the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result even if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result in a game round other than the final game round in the time-saving state, while the second high-frequency support mode is set in response to the time-saving result in the final game round in the time-saving state if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result in the final game round in the time-saving state, in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result in a game round other than the final game round in the time-saving state, a combination of non-reach-miss patterns is stopped and displayed on each of the effective lines L1 to L5, and if the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result in the final game round in the time-saving state, a combination of time-saving generating patterns (a combination of first time-saving generating patterns or a combination of second time-saving generating patterns) is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. This makes it possible to set the stop results in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 to be stop results corresponding to whether or not the time-saving result triggers the setting of the time-saving state.

In particular, the combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a time-saving result in a play round other than the final play round in the time-saving state is a combination of symbols that is displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that although a time-saving result has been achieved, the second high-frequency support mode will not be set in response to that time-saving result.

Even if the configuration is such that the stop result displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is a stop result that is displayed when the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result when a time-saving result is reached but the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b will display a stop pattern corresponding to the time-saving result. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to visually confirm whether or not a time-saving result has occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

Even if the configuration is such that the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed as stop results when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss when the time-saving result is reached but the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 displays a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss. This allows the manager of the game hall to visually confirm whether or not a time-saving result has occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

If a time-saving result is reached but the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, regardless of whether the time-saving result is the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result, the stop result that is displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss is displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. This makes it possible to not only nullify the time-saving result, but also to not make it obvious that the relatively favorable second time-saving result has been nullified.

If a time-saving result is reached but the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, regardless of whether the time-saving result is the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to display the stop results that are displayed when the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result, and the special pattern display sections 37a and 37b display the patterns corresponding to the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result, respectively. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to visually confirm whether the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result have occurred, regardless of whether the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

In the case where a time-saving result is reached but the second high-frequency support mode is not set in response to the time-saving result, regardless of whether the time-saving result is the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result, the stop results that are displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss are displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the stop results corresponding to the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result are displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to visually confirm whether the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result have occurred, regardless of whether the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is set to be executed later than the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30). This prevents the second high-frequency support mode from being set in response to the ceiling time-saving state even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1 in a play round other than the final play round of the time-saving state, while allowing the second high-frequency support mode to be set in response to the ceiling time-saving state if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1 in the final play round of the time-saving state. This prevents the time-saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time-saving state, preventing the time-saving state from continuing excessively, while enabling the setting of the time-saving state triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state in the final play round of the time-saving state, making it possible to give the player the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state as much as possible. In addition, it is possible to create such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

If a time-saving result or ceiling time-saving occurs in the final play in the time-saving state, the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result or ceiling time-saving starts following the end of the current time-saving state, so the total number of play times in these time-saving states is greater than the number of play times in the time-saving state when the time-saving state starts from the normal play state. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of starting a time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result or ceiling time-saving when a time-saving result or ceiling time-saving occurs in the final play in the time-saving state following the end of the current time-saving state.

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is set in an order of execution before the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. Therefore, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in a game in which the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result, it is possible to prioritize the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving. The number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving is fixed at 100 times, while the number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is 100 times if the first time-saving result is obtained, and 150 times if the second time-saving result is obtained. In other words, the number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is equal to or greater than the number of times that the time-saving continues in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result takes precedence over the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving result, so that when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in a game in which the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result, the setting mode of the number of times the time-saving continues is set will not be disadvantageous to the player. Also, it is possible to produce such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the last game in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", so that the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Then, when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result. Therefore, in the game in which the hit/miss judgment process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order so that the time-saving result setting process (Figure 25) is executed before the subtraction process (Figure 24) of the high probability state counter 133 during the special chart determination process (Figure 22).

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the last game in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 and the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", and the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Then, when the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. Therefore, in the game in which the hit/miss determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order during special chart determination processing (Figure 22) so that the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (Figure 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (Figure 24).

In a high probability state, not only does a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving state not occur, but the process of decrementing the ceiling counter 131 by one is not executed. This makes it possible to exclude the number of play times executed in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player from the number of play times that are subject to decrementing the value of the ceiling counter 131.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set in either the case where a transition to the time-saving state is triggered by the ceiling time-saving or the case where the time-saving state ends. In addition, a transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs when a game is played in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as a result, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". Therefore, a transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs only once after a jackpot result occurs, and if a transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs once, basically, a transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving does not occur unless a jackpot result occurs thereafter and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set. This makes it possible to prevent excessive transitions to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving.

Even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 in the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and no new ceiling count is set, including information on the fixed ceiling count. This makes it possible to maintain the remaining ceiling count even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed.

Even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 in the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and no new ceiling count is set, including information on the fixed ceiling count. This makes it possible to maintain the remaining ceiling count even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed.

Even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and the ceiling number, including the information on the fixed ceiling number, is not newly set. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed to release the game stop state due to the information abnormality in the main RAM 84 when the information abnormality occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. In contrast, if it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to reset the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number.

When the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the information of the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84. Such processing is executed when the setting confirmation processing (step S112), the setting value update processing (step S117), and the RAM clear processing (step S119) are not executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126). In addition, in the gaming hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF, and the power switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned ON in advance, and when it is time to start business for the day, the main power supply is turned ON so that each pachinko machine 10 is simultaneously started up. In such a situation, if the gaming machine main body 12 is intentionally placed in an open state so that the supply of operating power can be started without executing the setting confirmation process (step S112), the setting value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119), the ceiling counter 131 is set to the fixed ceiling number of 500 times. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the ceiling counter 131 is set to the fixed ceiling number of 500 times when the supply of operating power starts in a situation that is different from the start of normal business hours, and to create the situation without involving the setting confirmation process (step S112), the setting value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119).

When the game play corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open/close execution mode starts, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case where the fixed ceiling number is set in the ceiling counter 131 not when the open/close execution mode starts but during the open/close execution mode or when the open/close execution mode ends, if a fraudulent act is performed in which the supply of operating power is stopped after the open/close execution mode starts and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed, as already explained, in the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119), the information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress is cleared, while the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that there is a risk that the game will be resumed in a situation where the remaining ceiling number is small while the advantage of the open/close execution mode until the supply of the operating power is stopped is obtained. In contrast, by setting the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, in the ceiling counter 131 when the open/close execution mode starts, it is possible to neutralize such fraudulent acts.

When the game play count of the period switching reference number is consumed in the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, if the mode is the low frequency support mode, the state becomes a high frequency reach state in which the table group for the high frequency reach is referenced. In the high frequency reach state, the probability that the reach display is selected in the case of a miss is higher than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode situations where the reach is not in the high frequency reach state, and the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode situations where the reach is not in the high frequency reach state. In addition, the period switching reference number is a predetermined number (specifically 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number that triggers the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to generate the high frequency reach state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1 in the high reach frequency state and a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, the high reach frequency state ends. In the time-saving state, a short period is more likely to be selected as the variable display period for the number of play times, so the efficiency of the number of play times increases. This makes it possible to make it possible for the high reach frequency state to occur without hindering the high efficiency of the number of play times in the time-saving state.

When the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the process of setting the high-reach state flag of the main RAM 84 to "1" is executed even in the time-saving state. In contrast, in the process of determining the variable display period (FIG. 21), the process of step S903 for determining whether either the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" is executed before the process of step S905 for determining whether the high-reach state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". Therefore, even if the high-reach state flag is set to "1", the selection mode of the variable display period in the time-saving state is prioritized over the selection mode of the variable display period in the high-reach state when selecting the variable display period of the number of play times. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the consumption efficiency of the number of play times is high in the time-saving state from being hindered by setting the high-reach state flag to "1".

On the other hand, even in the time-saving state, the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" and the reach high frequency state flag remains set to "1". Therefore, if the time-saving state ends before an opportunity occurs to clear the reach high frequency state flag to "0", it is possible to generate a reach high frequency state from that point on.

The process of setting information to the variable selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the open/close execution mode is started, and after the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" unless the process of step S1006 is executed. On the other hand, the high-reach state occurs when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more. In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the process from step S1703 onwards. As a result, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtraction becomes "0" and a high-reach state occurs, and when the high-reach state ends, the high-reach state does not occur even if the consumption of the game rounds without a jackpot result is repeated thereafter. This will help prevent high-frequency reach states from occurring excessively.

The period switching reference number of times is set to a number that is a predetermined number (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times, so that a high-frequency reach state occurs before the second high-frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction, but once the ceiling time reduction has occurred, the ceiling time reduction will not occur even if there are repeated play times thereafter without a jackpot result. In this case, by preventing the high-frequency reach state from occurring when the high-frequency reach state ends, even if there are repeated play times thereafter without a jackpot result, it is possible to prevent the high-frequency reach state from occurring in a situation where the ceiling time reduction does not occur.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution order of the process in the special drawing determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the special chart change start process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1801 to S1817, the same processing as steps S801 to S817 of the special chart change start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. After executing the processing of step S1817, by determining whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the current game state is a high probability state (step S1818). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1818: YES), the start high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1819), and if the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1818: NO), the start high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1820). The start high probability flag is a flag for the main MP 82 to determine whether or not the win/lose lottery mode at the start of the game round was the high probability mode in the special chart determination processing (FIG. 35) described later.

When the process of step S1819 or the process of step S1820 is executed, the value of the special image counter is incremented by 1 (step S1821). As a result, the value of the special image counter becomes "1", which corresponds to the special image changing process (step S607).

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1901 to S1907, the same processing as in steps S1001 to S1007 of the special chart confirmation processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), and the result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step S1902: NO), the high probability state counter 133 is decremented in step S1908, the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented in step S1909, the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented in step S1910, the time-saving result setting process is executed in step S1911, and the ceiling counter 131 is decremented in step S1912. Then, the special chart special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S1913). In other words, in this embodiment, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is not set as a processing order after the setting process for the time-saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131, but rather, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is set as a processing order before the setting process for the time-saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result in this embodiment, which is executed in step S1911 of the special chart determination process (Figure 35).

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether the start high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2002). Then, if the start high probability flag is set to "1" (step S2002: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps S2003 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game started in a situation where the high probability mode is selected, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode in response to the time-saving result.

If the start high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2002: NO), it is determined whether the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (steps S2003, S2004). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is either the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. If the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode (step S2003 or S2004: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the process from step S2005 onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the winning/losing judgment process of the game performed in a situation in which the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is selected, if the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is selected at the time when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 36) is performed, the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result, and the time-saving result is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings from being executed to transition to high-frequency support mode while in that mode.

If the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (steps S2003 and S2004: NO), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2005). This causes the support mode to become the second high-frequency support mode. If the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result (step S2006: YES), the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is set to "100", which is the first time-saving continuation count (step S2007). If the current time-saving result is the second time-saving result (step S2006: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "150", which is the second time-saving continuation count (step S2008). When the number of times that have been played without a new jackpot result during time-saving mode reaches 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, or 150 times, which is the second time-saving continuation number, the mode will enter low probability mode and low frequency support mode, even if a jackpot result has not occurred.

When the processing of step S2007 or the processing of step S2008 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S2009). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. The state designation command also includes information on the number of times the time-saving state has continued that has been set this time. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state has started.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 in this embodiment, which is executed in step S1912 of the special chart determination process (Figure 35).

First, it is determined whether the start high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2101). Then, if the start high probability flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S2102 and onwards. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented in a game round that is started in the high probability mode, and furthermore, since the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented, no ceiling time reduction occurs.

If the start high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2102: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the process from step S2103 onwards. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" and a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, and if the number of times of play for the time-saving continuation is consumed without a jackpot result in the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving does not occur even if the consumption of the game times without a jackpot result is repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102: YES), subtract 1 from the value of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2103), and determine whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2104). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2104: YES), on the condition that the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2105: NO), set the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 to "1" (step S2106), and set the information of "100", which is the first time reduction continuation number, to the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 (step S2107). This results in a time reduction state that is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. Furthermore, the time-saving state ends when the number of times that play has been performed without a jackpot result reaching 100, which is the first time-saving continuation count, and the game returns to the normal game state, which is the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S2108). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. This state designation command also includes information on the first time-saving continuation count that has been set this time. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives this state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time-saving state has started.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1, if the second high frequency flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S2106 to S2108 is not executed, and the second high frequency support mode is not set in response to the current ceiling time reduction, and the current ceiling time reduction is invalidated. In other words, even if the fixed ceiling number of times of play is completed in a time-saving state, the second high frequency support mode is not set in response to the ceiling time reduction, and the ceiling time reduction is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for transitioning to the high frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high frequency support mode. Note that the first high frequency support mode is set only until 100 times of play are played after the opening and closing execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of times is set to 500 when the opening and closing execution mode is started. Therefore, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 does not become "0" in a situation in which the first high frequency support mode is in a state ...

If a positive judgment is made in step S2105 or if the processing of step S2108 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). As a result, when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether the second high frequency support mode is set in response to the ceiling time reduction.

The embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 35), the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 36) is executed after the subtraction process (step S1908) of the high probability state counter 133. However, if the game round is started in high probability mode and the win/loss determination process is executed by referring to the high probability win/loss table 123, the start high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1". And, if the start high probability flag is set to "1" when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 36) is started, even if the time-saving result was selected in the win/loss determination process, the time-saving state is not set based on the time-saving result. This makes it possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result in a game round in which the win/loss determination process was executed in an execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

The start high probability flag is set to "1" on the condition that the high probability mode is selected when a game round is started, and the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 36) is configured to determine whether or not to invalidate the time-saving result, making it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above regardless of the execution order of the special chart determination process (Fig. 35).

In the special chart determination process (FIG. 35), the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is executed after the decrement process of the high probability state counter 133 (step S1908). However, if the game round is started in high probability mode and the win/loss determination process is executed by referring to the high probability win/loss table 123, the start high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1". Then, if the start high probability flag is set to "1" when the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is started, the decrement of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the decrement of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in a game round in which the win/loss determination process is executed in an execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

When a game round is started, the start high probability flag is set to "1" on the condition that the game is in high probability mode, and the configuration determines whether or not to subtract the value of the ceiling counter 131 in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (Figure 37). This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects regardless of the execution order of the processes in the special chart determination process (Figure 35).

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the trigger for switching the winning/losing lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in addition to the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, random number initial value counter CINI, fluctuation type counter CS, and normal power random number counter C4, a fall random number counter C5 is provided. Note that the contents of the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, random number initial value counter CINI, fluctuation type counter CS, and normal power random number counter C4, and the contents of the process that uses these counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS, are the same as those in the first embodiment described above.

The fall random number counter C5 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fall random number counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special chart holding area 111 when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second special chart holding area 112 when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. In the high probability mode, when a game round is started, a fall judgment process is executed using the numerical information corresponding to the fall random number counter C5 from the reserved information that is the target for starting the game round. Then, when a fall result is selected in the fall judgment process, the win/lose lottery mode changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at that point. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, the win/lose selection mode transitions from the high probability mode to the low probability mode when the number of times played in the high probability mode reaches the high probability continuation number, but in this embodiment, the transition to the low probability mode does not occur depending on the number of times played in the high probability mode, and the transition to the low probability mode occurs when a fall result is selected in the fall determination process.

Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the special chart change start process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the second reserved information is not stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 and the first reserved information is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 (step S2201: YES, step S2202: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S2203). The contents of the first data setting process are the same as step S803 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if the second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 (step S2201 and step S2202: YES), even if the first reserved information acquired before the second reserved information is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S2204). The contents of the second data setting process are the same as step S804 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2203 or the process of step S2204 is executed, the fall judgment process is executed (step S2206) on the condition that the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES). In the fall judgment process, the fall judgment table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. The fall judgment table is set with the numerical information of the fall random number counter C5 which is the fall result. Only one type of fall judgment table is provided, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall judgment process is constant regardless of the set value and is constant whether the first reserved information or the second reserved information is the starting target of the game round. However, it is not limited to this, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall judgment process may be configured to vary depending on the set value, or the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall judgment process may be configured to vary depending on whether the first reserved information or the second reserved information is the starting target of the game round.

The fall judgment table is set so that the probability that a fall result is selected is 1/15, but the probability may be lower or higher than 1/15. In the fall judgment process, information for fall judgment, i.e., numerical information obtained from the fall random number counter C5, is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 113 for the special chart, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as a fall result in the read fall judgment table.

If the result of the fall judgment process is a fall result (step S2207: YES), the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2208), and if the result of the fall judgment process is not a fall result (step S2207: NO), the high probability flag is maintained set to "1". As a result, if the result of the fall judgment process is a fall result, the winning/losing lottery mode transitions from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and if the result of the fall judgment process is not a fall result, the winning/losing lottery mode is maintained in the high probability mode. In addition, the fall judgment process is executed before the winning/losing lottery process (step S2209), and the transition to the low probability mode when the result of the fall judgment process is a fall result is also executed before the winning/losing lottery process (step S2209). As a result, if the result of the fall judgment process is a fall result, it is possible to execute the winning/losing lottery mode (step S2209) in a situation where the winning/losing lottery mode is the low probability mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2205, if a negative judgment is made in step S2207, or if the processing of step S2208 is executed, a correct/incorrect judgment process is executed (step S2209). The contents of the correct/incorrect judgment process are the same as step S805 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment described above.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a jackpot result (step S2210: YES), the allocation determination process for the jackpot is executed (step S2211), the flag setting process for the jackpot is executed (step S2212), and the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S2213). The contents of steps S2211 to S2213 are the same as steps S807 to S809 of the special chart change start process (Figure 20) in the first embodiment described above.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is not a jackpot result but a time-saving result (step S2210: NO, step S2214: YES), and if the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2215: YES), the first time-saving result is selected (step S2216), and if the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2215: NO), an allocation determination process for time-saving is executed (step S2217). In the time-saving allocation determination process, similar to step S811 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, if the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special chart (see FIG. 10(c)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special chart (see FIG. 10(d)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After the time-saving allocation tables 127 and 128 are read, the information for allocation determination, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 113 for the special chart, and the time-saving allocation tables 127 and 128 are referred to to identify which type of time-saving result the read numerical information corresponds to. Therefore, either the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result is selected.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the result of the winning/losing determination process in a high probability state is a time-saving result, the time-saving state is not set based on the time-saving result. In this case, if the result of the winning/losing determination process in a high probability state is a time-saving result, the first time-saving result with a lower advantage than the second time-saving result is forcibly selected. Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a, 37b and the pattern display unit 41 that the result of the winning/losing determination process in a high probability state is a time-saving result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first time-saving result with a lower advantage has been invalidated, rather than the second time-saving result with a higher advantage, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasting money due to the occurrence of the invalidation. This configuration may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment, or to the fourth to twelfth embodiments described later.

When the process of step S2216 or step S2217 is executed, a flag set process for time saving is executed (step S2218), and a stop result setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S2219). The contents of steps S2217 to S2219 are the same as steps S811 to S813 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment described above. Also, if the result of the win/loss determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a time saving result (step S2214: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S2220). The contents of step S2220 are the same as step S814 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment described above.

When the process of step S2213, the process of step S2219, or the process of step S2220 is executed, the process of steps S2221 to S2224 is executed. The contents of steps S2221 to S2224 are the same as steps S815 to S818 of the special chart variation start process (Figure 20) in the first embodiment described above.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2301 to S2307, the same processing as in steps S1001 to S1007 of the special chart determination processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S2301: YES), and the result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step S2302: NO), a subtraction process is executed on the time-saving state counter 134 in step S2308, a subtraction process is executed on the variable selection state counter 132 in step S2309, a setting process for the time-saving result is executed in step S2310, and a subtraction process is executed on the ceiling counter 131 in step S2311. Then, the special chart special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S2312). Steps S2308 to S2311 execute the same processing as steps S1008 to S1011 in the special drawing confirmation processing (Figure 22) in the first embodiment described above.

In other words, in this embodiment, the process during special pattern determination (FIG. 40) does not include the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 that was set in the process during special pattern determination (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Therefore, in this embodiment, a transition to the low probability mode does not occur depending on the number of times the game is played in the high probability mode.

As described above, when a game round is started in the high probability mode, the fall determination process (step S2206) is executed, and if the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is a fall result, the win/lose lottery mode changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at that point. These processes are executed before the win/lose determination process (step S2209). This makes it possible to execute the win/lose determination process (step S2209) in a situation where the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result.

When a time-saving result is selected in the winning/losing judgment process (step S2209), in the low probability mode, the first or second time-saving result is selected in the time-saving allocation judgment process (step S2217), whereas in the high probability mode, the first time-saving result is forcibly selected. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the result of the winning/losing judgment process in the high probability state is a time-saving result, the time-saving state is not set based on the time-saving result. In this case, if the result of the winning/losing judgment process in the high probability state is a time-saving result, the first time-saving result, which is less advantageous than the second time-saving result, is forcibly selected. Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a, 37b and the pattern display unit 41 that the result of the winning/losing judgment process in the high probability state is a time-saving result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first time-saving result, which is less advantageous, has been invalidated, rather than the second time-saving result, which is more advantageous, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasting money due to the occurrence of the invalidation.

In a configuration in which the relatively less advantageous first time-saving result is selected when the result of the win/loss determination process (step S2209) in the high probability mode is a time-saving result, the fall determination process (step S2206) is executed before the process of allocating the time-saving result to either the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result (steps S2215 to S2219). As a result, when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is a fall result and a transition to the low probability mode occurs, the process of allocating the time-saving result to either the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result (steps S2215 to S2219) is executed after the transition to the low probability mode. Therefore, in a game in which a transition to the low probability mode occurs because the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is a fall result, it becomes possible to select the relatively more advantageous second time-saving result when the result of the win/loss determination process (step S2209) is a time-saving result.

In a configuration in which a transition from high probability mode to low probability mode occurs when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is a fall result, the process of transitioning to the low probability mode is executed at the start of a game round, whereas the setting process for the time-saving result (step S2310) and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed in the special chart determination process (FIG. 40), which is the process executed at the end of a game round. As a result, when a transition to the low probability mode occurs because the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is a fall result, the setting process for the time-saving result (step S2310) and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed after the transition to the low probability mode. Therefore, in a game in which the fall determination process (step S2206) results in a fall result, causing a transition to a low probability mode, if the win/loss determination process (step S2209) results in a time-saving result, it is possible to set a time-saving state triggered by that time-saving result, and if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", causing a ceiling time-saving state to be set by that ceiling time-saving state.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2401 to S2416, the same processing as steps S101 to S116 in the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed. If it is determined that the reset button 142 has been pressed (step S2408 or step S2422: YES), if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 has been turned ON using the setting key (step S2416: YES), or if it is determined in step S2407 that the setting update in progress flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", a setting value update process is executed (step S2417). The setting value update process will be described later. Also, in steps S2418 to S2420, the same processing as steps S118 to S120 in the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S2404 to S2406, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2421). As in the first embodiment, the game stop flag is set to "1", and the processes in steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while a positive judgment is made in step S206 and the processes in steps S207 to S220 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power failure, if the checksums do not match due to a change in the memory state of the main RAM 84 since the previous power failure, or if the set value is abnormal, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but the processes for progressing the game are not executed.

In the first embodiment described above, if it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121, a process is executed in step S122 to set information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84. However, in this embodiment, this process is not set. In other words, even if it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S2421, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is not executed.

Then, it is determined whether the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422). If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2422: NO), the processes of steps S2423 and S2424 are executed. In the processes of steps S2423 and S2424, the same processes as steps S124 and S125 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

If the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422: YES), and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned ON using the setting key (step S2416: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step S2417). Note that steps S2425 to S2429 are the same as steps S126 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment.

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process executed in step S2417 of the main process (Figure 41).

First, interrupt permission is set (step S2501). Then, the setting update in progress flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2502). Then, if the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2503: NO), a RAM clear process is executed (step S2504), and the process proceeds to step S2507. If the game stop flag is set to "1" (step S2503: YES), a RAM clear process is executed (step S2505), and the ceiling counter 131 is set (step S2506), and the process proceeds to step S2507.

In the RAM clear process in each of steps S2504 and S2505, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed, except for the area in the main RAM 84 where the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (i.e., the setting reference area), the ceiling counter 131, the setting update flag, and the area in the main RAM 84 where the information for calculating the role ratio is stored. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is a high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes a low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the special map reserve area 84a and the normal map reserve area 84c are also cleared to "0", so the first reserved information, the second reserved information, and the reserved information on the normal map side are erased. Additionally, the setting confirmation flag and setting update area are cleared to "0." In addition, in the RAM clear process, various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" before initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process in step S2402 is performed.

In the setting process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S2506, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 is identified and the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", preventing the start of processing to proceed with the game, if the setting value update process is executed and the blocked situation is lifted, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131.

Then, the setting update area of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2507), and an update start command is sent to the audio-visual MPU 93 (step S2508). It is also determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area is any of "1" to "6" (step S2509). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step S2509: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S2510). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S2509 or if the processing of step S2510 is executed, it is judged whether the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step S2511). If a negative judgment is made in step S2511, on the condition that the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2512: YES), the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1 (step S2513). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher setting value each time the reset button 142 is pressed once. Also, if the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2512: NO) or the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1, the processing returns to step S2509, but if it is judged in step S2509 that the value of the setting update area is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S2510. As a result, if the reset button 142 is pressed once when the setting is "Setting 6," the setting will return to "Setting 1."

When it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from an ON state to an OFF state (step S2511: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area (step S2514). As a result, the setting value information resulting from the update in this setting value update process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S2515). A recovery command at the time of update is also sent to the audio/light side MPU 93 (step S2516). The setting update in progress flag in the main side RAM 84 is also cleared to "0" (step S2517).

According to the above configuration, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 is identified and the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", preventing the start of processing to proceed with the game, if the setting value update process is executed and the blocked situation is released, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, even if the information in the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 occurs, it is possible to reset the information in the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number.

It is possible to integrate the process of resetting the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, into the setting value update process executed to release the situation in which the start of the process for progressing the game is blocked. Also, it is possible to automatically execute the process of resetting the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, when the setting value update process is executed to release the situation in which the start of the process for progressing the game is blocked.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the configuration that is the same as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

Steps S2601 to S2612 execute the same processing as steps S101 to S112 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above. If the setting key insertion unit 143 has not been turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1" (steps S2610 and S2611: NO), it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open by determining whether a HI level open detection signal has been received from the main body open detection sensor 144 (step S2613).

When a HIGH level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144 (step S2613: YES), that is, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S2614). The processing of step S2613 is executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the reset button 142 is not pressed, and the setting key insertion section 143 is not turned ON by the setting key, and both the setting update flag and the setting confirmation flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1". In this case, the setting confirmation processing (step S2612), the setting value update processing (step S2617), and the RAM clear processing (step S2619) are not executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S2601 to S2626). In addition, in the game hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance, so that when it is time to start business for the day, the main power supply is turned on so that each pachinko machine 10 is simultaneously started up. In such a situation, a positive determination is made in step S2613 when the supply of operating power is started with the gaming machine main body 12 intentionally left in an open state in a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step S2612), the setting value update process (step S2617), and the RAM clear process (step S2619) are not executed. In such a situation, the information on 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. This allows the situation in which the information on the first ceiling number of times, 500, is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the supply of operating power begins to occur in a situation different from the start of normal business hours, and allows this to occur without the setting confirmation process (step S2612), setting value update process (step S2617), and RAM clear process (step S2619). Note that the information on the first ceiling number of times, 500, is also set in the ceiling counter 131 when a jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode begins.

Steps S2615 to S2620 execute the same processing as steps S115 to S120 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment. If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S2604 to S2606, i.e., if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2621). As in the first embodiment, the game stop flag is set to "1", and the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while a positive judgment is made in step S206, and the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly the last time the power was shut down, if the checksum does not match because the memory state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the last time the power was shut down, or if the setting value is abnormal, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed, but processing for progressing the game will not be executed.

Then, the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling number that is greater than the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S2622). In steps S2623 to S2630, the same processing as steps S123 to S130 of the main processing (Figure 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

As in the first embodiment, even if the setting value update process (step S2617) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and the ceiling number is not newly set. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S2617) is executed to release the game stop state due to the information abnormality when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. In contrast, when it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to reset the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling number.

The second ceiling number is a number greater than the first ceiling number that is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the open/close execution mode is started or in step S2614 of the main processing (Figure 43). As a result, if an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, the second ceiling number, which is a relatively large number, is set in the ceiling counter 131, and if fraudulent behavior involving the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 is committed, it is possible to impose a penalty in the form of a greater number of game plays required to generate a ceiling time reduction.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the play area PA provided on the play board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 44 is a front view of the game board 24 to explain the configuration of the game area PA in this embodiment.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail as a guide means. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The game board 24 is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special chart unit 37, and a general chart unit 38, as in the first embodiment. Also, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. Also, in this embodiment, a distribution winning device 161 is provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are dispensed. On the other hand, if a ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the special winning device 151, and the allocation winning device 161, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed to increase the number of game media available to the player. Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, 10 game balls are dispensed, when a ball enters the special winning device 32, 15 game balls are dispensed, when a ball enters the first operating opening 33, 3 game balls are dispensed, when a ball enters the special winning device 151, 1 game ball is dispensed, and when a ball enters the allocation winning device 161, 15 game balls are dispensed.

As described below, the distribution winning device 161 is provided with a discharge passage area 165b and a V winning passage area 165c, and the game ball that enters the distribution winning device 161 passes through either the discharge passage area 165b or the V winning passage area 165c. Regardless of whether the game ball passes through the discharge passage area 165b or the V winning passage area 165c, the same number of game balls (specifically 15 balls) are paid out. In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 and the special winning device 151 may be the same, or the number of prize balls in the distribution winning device 161 may be greater or less than the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the center of the game area PA. The peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, and thus an area is defined in which game balls shot into the game area PA can flow down. Specifically, the game area PA is defined as an upper area PA1, which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2, which is an area connected below the upper area PA1 and to the left of the variable display unit 36, a right area PA3, which is an area connected below the upper area PA1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area PA4, which is an area connected below the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 and below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game balls start to flow down to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, the game balls start to flow down to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4. In other words, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game balls flow down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, and can also play the game so that the game balls flow down the right area PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the following order: upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 33 is open upward, and no opening and closing member is provided to prevent game balls from entering the first operating port 33. In addition, when game balls are launched in the same manner, the probability of winning at the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of receiving game balls that flow down the game area PA toward the first operating port 33. In addition, the first operating port 33 is located directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and game balls that flow onto the stage portion 36b through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36 and are discharged outside the variable display unit 36 from the horizontal center of the stage portion 36b are more likely to enter the first operating port 33.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, but upstream of the first operating port 33 toward the right area PA3, a restricting nail 24c is provided so that the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 cannot reach the first operating port 33. In addition, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided in the left area PA2 but not in the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first operating port 33, but when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first operating port 33. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the restricting nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided in the right area PA3, so that the game ball can enter the first operating port 33 even when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. In other words, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

The configuration of the special winning device 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device 151 in a non-guiding state. The special winning device 151 includes a base unit 151a in which a discharge passage 153 is formed for discharging game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24, and a guide unit 152 for guiding game balls flowing down the game area PA to the discharge passage 153. The entrance 153a of the discharge passage 153 has an opening area of at least one game ball and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 154 is provided on the exit 153b side of the discharge passage 153, and the detection sensor 154 detects the game ball that has won the special winning device 151.

The induction unit 152 includes a guide member 155 for receiving game balls flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA from below and guiding the received game balls into the discharge passage 153, a guide drive portion 156 for displacing the guide member 155 between an initial position where the game ball cannot be guided into the discharge passage 153 and a guide position where the game ball can be guided, and a blocking member 157 that is arranged in a blocking position that blocks the flow of game balls into the discharge passage 153 when the guide member 155 is arranged in the initial position and in a non-blocking position that does not block the flow of game balls into the discharge passage 153 when the guide member 155 is arranged in the guide position. The guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are arranged opposite each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction so that the guide member 155 is downward. A transmission unit 158 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide drive portion 156 to the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157.

When the guide drive unit 156 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 155 is placed in the initial position and the blocking member 157 is placed in the blocking position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are entirely embedded in the discharge passage 153 and do not protrude into the play area PA. As a result, a game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 in the play area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 153 by the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157, that is, the game ball flows downward in the play area PA without entering the special winning device 151. In addition, since the blocking member 157 is placed in the blocking position, the actual opening area of the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 is less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably block the game ball from entering the special winning device 151 when the guide member 155 is placed in the initial position.

When the guide drive unit 156 is in the driven state, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, and the guide member 155 is placed in the guided position and the blocking member 157 is placed in the non-blocking position. Figure 45 (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device 151 when in the guided state.

When the guide member 155 is disposed in the induction position, the tip side of the guide member 155 protrudes from the inlet 153a of the discharge passage 153 toward the play area PA. This protrusion amount is such that it is possible to receive from below the game balls flowing down the front area of the inlet 153a in the play area PA. And, since the upper surface of the tip side of the guide member 155 is inclined downward toward the inlet 153a of the discharge passage 153, the game balls received from below at the tip side of the guide member 155 roll on the upper surface of the guide member 155 and are guided into the discharge passage 153. Also, when the blocking member 157 is disposed in the non-blocking position, the tip of the blocking member 157 is displaced so that it is positioned above the blocking position, so that the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the guide member 155 flow into the discharge passage 153 without interfering with the blocking member 157. As a result, the guide drive unit 156 is driven, and the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 153a in the game area PA enters the special winning device 151. For ease of explanation, the state in which the guide drive unit 156 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 155 is located in the initial position, and the blocking member 157 is located in the blocking position is referred to as the non-guiding state of the guide unit 152 or the closed state of the special winning device 151, and the state in which the guide drive unit 156 is in a driven state, the guide member 155 is located in the guiding position, and the blocking member 157 is located in the non-blocking position is referred to as the guiding state of the guide unit 152 or the open state of the special winning device 151.

The special winning device 151 is provided with a cover member 159 that is provided to face the entrance 153a of the discharge passage 153 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 159 is formed in a gate shape to form a vertical passage 159a in the front area of the entrance 153a in the play area PA, and is provided to limit the number of game balls that pass through the front area of the entrance 153a at the same time to one, and to restrict the movement of the game ball forward and sideways of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents multiple game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 153 of the special winning device 151 when the guide unit 152 of the special winning device 151 is in the guided state, and makes it possible to reliably guide game balls that pass through the front area of the entrance 153a in the guided state into the discharge passage 153.

As shown in FIG. 44, a through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. In addition, the special winning device 151 is provided vertically below the through gate 35, and further, the special electric winning device 32 and the distribution winning device 161 are provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. Therefore, a game ball that wins at the through gate 35 can win a prize at the special winning device 151, the special electric winning device 32, or the distribution winning device 161.

The right area PA3 where the special winning devices 151 and the through gate 35 are arranged is defined on the left by a side wall 36f that bulges out further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 36, and on the right by a restricting wall that is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protrudes further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the game board 24. The right area PA3 is set to have a narrower horizontal dimension than the lower area PA4, and the horizontal dimension is such that it is impossible to line up the game ball entry devices at the same height in the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to limit the trajectory of the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to a specified range, making it easier for game balls to enter the special winning devices 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement of the nails 24b upstream of the through gate 35 in the right area PA3 is set to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through gate 35. This makes it easier for game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to enter the through gate 35, and because it is easier for the balls to enter the through gate 35, it also makes it easier for the balls to enter the special winning device 151.

The special winning device 151 goes from a closed state to an open state when the induction unit 152 of the special winning device 151 is switched from a non-induction state to an induction state based on winning through the through gate 35. Specifically, the winning through the through gate 35 triggers a normal winning/losing determination process, and the image is displayed in the normal winning display section 38a of the normal winning unit 38, which is located in the lower left corner of the game area PA, where the game ball does not pass. Then, when the result of the normal winning/losing determination process is a winning electric role opening, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the display of the variation on the normal winning display section 38a is terminated, the normal electric opening state is entered. In the normal electric opening state, the induction unit 152 goes into an induction state in a predetermined manner, and the special winning device 151 goes into an open state in a predetermined manner.

Even in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes, and the probability of winning the electric role release in the normal play judgment process in each of these support modes, the selection mode of the duration of the variable display times in the normal play display section 38a, and the selection mode of the stop result in the normal play display section 38a are the same as those in the first embodiment. In addition, the mode in which the special winning device 151 is in the open state when the normal play state is reached in each support mode (open duration, number of times of opening, upper limit number of winnings, interval period) is the same as the mode in which the normal play element 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state when the normal play state is reached in each support mode in the first embodiment.

In the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than in the special winning device 151, but in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the first operating port 33. When a win is made in the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

A win/loss determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a win in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. The result of the win/loss determination process is then clearly displayed through the display effects in the special chart unit 37 and the pattern display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. The special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display unit 37a and a second special chart display unit 37b, as in the first embodiment. In the first special chart display unit 37a, a win/loss determination process is performed on the first reserved information acquired when a win occurs in the first operating port 33, and a variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the win/loss determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, a jackpot result, a time-saving result, and a loss result exist as the judgment result of the win/loss determination process, but the contents of the stop results of the first special chart display unit 37a are different for each of the jackpot result, the time-saving result, and the loss result. The display of the stop result in the first special chart display section 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the first special chart display section 37a starts displaying a new pattern variation. In addition, in the second special chart display section 37b, the winning/losing determination process is performed on the second reserved information acquired when a win occurs in the special winning device 151, and the pattern variation is displayed. Then, a result corresponding to the judgment result of the winning/losing determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, there are a big win result, a time-saving result, and a loss result as the judgment result of the winning/losing determination process, and there is also a small win result. The contents of the stop result in the second special chart display section 37b are different for each of the big win result, the time-saving result, the small win result, and the loss result. The display of the stop result in the second special chart display section 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the second special chart display section 37b starts displaying a new pattern variation.

In the special chart unit 37, a first special chart reserve display section 37c is provided adjacent to the first special chart display section 37a. The number of game balls that have won in the first operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the first special chart reserve display section 37c. On the other hand, there is no special chart reserve display section corresponding to the second special chart display section 37b. The number of game balls that have won in the special winning device 151 is not reserved and stored, unlike the first operation port 33. In other words, if a winning ball is won in the special winning device 151 in a situation where it is possible to start a game round, a game round in the second special chart display section 37b is executed, but even if a winning ball is won in the special winning device 151 in a situation where it is not possible to start a game round, the reserved information that serves as a trigger for starting a game round is not stored. However, even if a winning ball is won in the special winning device 151 in a situation where it is not possible to start a game round, the payout of game balls for that winning ball is executed.

The display range of the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b is narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 41. In addition, the display range of the entire first special chart display section 37a, the second special chart display section 37b, and the first special chart reserved display section 37c is also narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 41. This makes it possible to attract more attention from the player to the pattern display device 41 than to the first special chart display section 37a, the second special chart display section 37b, and the first special chart reserved display section 37c.

When the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b displays a changing pattern, i.e., when a game round is being played, the pattern display device 41 displays accordingly. When a game round performance is being played on the pattern display device 41, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the first reserved display area 42a, and the state suggestion area 43 are set as in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the second reserved information is not stored for reservation, so the second reserved display area 42b is not displayed. Furthermore, the pattern display device 41 not only displays the game round, but also displays during the opening and closing execution mode, which is entered after a jackpot result, etc.

When a jackpot result is selected in the win/lose determination process executed based on winning in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the opening/closing execution mode is entered after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is completed. In the opening/closing execution mode, winning in the special winning device 32 is possible. As shown in FIG. 44, the special winning device 32 is located below the special winning device 151 and above the distribution winning device 161 in the right area PA3. In other words, the special winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a large winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win if a big win result is selected in the win/loss determination process. Note that while a win is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which a win is more difficult to occur than in the open state. The execution content of the opening/closing execution mode is the same as in the first embodiment described above.

When a small win result is selected in the win/lose determination process executed based on a win in the special winning device 151, the system transitions to allocation execution mode after the game round corresponding to the small win result ends. In the allocation execution mode, it becomes possible to win in the allocation winning device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 is located in a position lower than the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, the distribution winning device 161 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game balls flow down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game balls flow down the right area PA3.

The configuration of the prize distribution device 161 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 in addition to FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the prize distribution device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 has a distribution entrance 161a large enough for game balls to pass through, and a distribution side opening and closing member 162 that switches the distribution entrance 161a between a closed state where game balls cannot pass through and an open state where game balls can pass through. The distribution side opening and closing member 162 is opened by being driven by a drive unit 163 for the distribution entrance through a link mechanism (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 46, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance 161a are led to a branch passage 165 formed in the base body 164 of the distribution winning device 161. The branch passage 165 includes an upstream passage area 165a set so that the passage direction is inclined downward horizontally from the entrance part of the branch passage 165 to the middle position of the branch passage 165, a discharge passage area 165b that is continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage area 165a and is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and a V-winning passage area 165c that is branched from the middle position of the discharge passage area 165b and leads the game ball to a side different from the discharge passage area 165b. In this case, the upstream passage area 165a has a dimension in a direction perpendicular to the passage direction that is equal to or larger than one game ball but smaller than two game balls, so that the game ball is prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 165a when multiple game balls are lined up in a direction perpendicular to the passage direction. This prevents multiple game balls from simultaneously reaching the branching point in the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c.

At the branch point of the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c, a switching piece 166 is provided to guide the game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c. The switching piece 166 is rotatably supported in an area opposite the V winning passage area 165c side with respect to the discharge passage area 165b in the base body 164, and can be displaced between a retracted position where the entirety is retracted outside the discharge passage area 165b and a V guiding position where the entirety protrudes into the discharge passage area 165b. The driving force of the switching drive unit 167 is transmitted to the switching piece 166 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 167 is in a non-driven state, the switching piece 166 is positioned at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and when the switching drive unit 167 is in a driven state, the switching piece 166 is displaced against the biasing force and positioned at the V guiding position.

When the switching piece 166 is arranged in the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 165 flows down the discharge passage area 165b without being guided to the V winning passage area 165c. Then, the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 166 in the discharge passage area 165b, and then discharged to the rear of the game board 24. On the other hand, when the switching piece 166 is arranged in the V induction position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 165 is received from below by the switching piece 166. The upper surface of the switching piece 166 in the state in which it is arranged in the V induction position is inclined downward toward the V winning passage area 165c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 166 flows into the V winning passage area 165c by its own weight, and flows down the V winning passage area 165c. The game ball is then detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 provided in the V winning passage area 165c, and is then discharged to the rear of the game board 24.

When the distribution side opening/closing member 162 is in the open state, the period during which the open state is maintained is fixed at 2 seconds, which is a period longer than the launch cycle of the game balls, and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the distribution winning device 161 in the distribution execution mode is fixed at 5. In addition, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In this case, when the distribution side opening/closing member 162 is in the open state, the number of game balls that enter the distribution winning device 161 is often one or two, and is at most about three. On the other hand, the switching piece 166 starts to operate when the operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the switching piece 166 is arranged in the V-guiding position for a certain period of time at a certain cycle. The switching piece 166 is placed in the V-guiding position once every four seconds, and is held in the V-guiding position for one second. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the open distribution winning device 161, it is assumed that the switching piece 166 is not placed in the V-guiding position at the time the game ball reaches the position of the switching piece 166, in which case the game ball will not be detected by the V-winning detection sensor 169.

When a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the allocation winning device 161 are paid out. Also, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the allocation execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the allocation execution mode. On the other hand, when the allocation execution mode ends without a game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the opening and closing execution mode does not occur.

In this embodiment, when the distribution execution mode occurs and the launch of game balls toward the distribution winning device 161 continues, there is a 1/2 probability that the V winning detection sensor 169 will detect a game ball. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability may be lower or higher than 1/2. In addition, when the distribution execution mode occurs and the launch of game balls toward the distribution winning device 161 continues, there may be a 100% or nearly 100% probability that the V winning detection sensor 169 will detect a game ball.

Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a variable type counter CS, and a regular random number counter C4 are provided. The contents of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS, and the regular random number counter C4, and the contents of the process using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, when a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs, the numerical information of the regular random number counter C4 is stored in the regular map reserve area 84c, and the configuration of the regular map reserve area 84c is the same as in the first embodiment.

The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special chart area 171 provided in the main RAM 84 when a win occurs in the first operating port 33. In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the second special chart execution area 174 provided in the main RAM 84 when a win occurs in the special winning device 151.

The first special chart area 171 includes a first area 172a, a second area 172b, a third area 172c, and a fourth area 172d, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the first reserved information in any of the areas 172a to 172d in accordance with the winning history of the first operating port 33. In this case, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs multiple times in succession, the numerical information is stored in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d in the order of the first area 172a → the second area 172b → the third area 172c → the fourth area 172d in chronological order. By providing the four areas 172a to 172d in this way, up to four winning history of game balls in the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of reserved items that can be stored in the first special chart area 171 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

In addition to the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d, the first special chart area 171 also has an execution area 173 for the first special chart. The execution area 173 for the first special chart is an area in which first reserved information for which a win/lose determination process and various allocation determination processes are performed when the changing display of the pattern begins in the first special chart display unit 37a is stored. The reserved information stored in the first area 172a is shifted to the execution area 173 for the first special chart when the changing display of the first special chart display unit 37a begins.

In the execution area 174 for the second special symbol, when a prize is won in the special winning device 151 in a situation where a game round can be started, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored as the second reserved information. Here, as already explained, the first special symbol area 171 is provided with the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d, and the first reserved information is reserved and stored even in a situation where a game round cannot be started, whereas only the execution area 174 for the second special symbol is provided for the second reserved information, and no area is provided for reserving and storing the second reserved information. This makes it possible to treat the presence or absence of reserved storage differently for the first reserved information and the second reserved information. In addition, since a reach performance that ultimately results in a miss does not occur in the game round triggered by the second reserved information, the first reserved information includes the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3, whereas the second reserved information does not include the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. However, this is not limited to this, and the second pending information may also include numerical information of the reach random number counter C3.

The winning/losing determination process is carried out using the winning random number counter C1. In the first embodiment, a low probability mode and a high probability mode were set as the winning/losing lottery mode, but in this embodiment, there is only one winning/losing lottery mode.

When the win/loss determination process is executed for the first pending information, the first win/loss table 181 stored in the main ROM 83 is referenced. FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first win/loss table 181 when the setting value set to be used is "Setting 3". As shown in FIG. 48(a), the first win/loss table 181 has the jackpot result, the time-saving result, and the loss result set as the result of the win/loss determination process. Note that even if the first win/loss table 181 corresponds to a setting value other than "Setting 3", the jackpot result, the time-saving result, and the loss result are set. The number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 set corresponding to the jackpot result differs for each setting value as in the first embodiment, and the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 set corresponding to the time-saving result is the same for each setting value.

When the win/loss determination process is executed for the second pending information, the second win/loss table 182 stored in the main ROM 83 is referenced. FIG. 48(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second win/loss table 182 when the setting value set as the target for use is "Setting 3". As shown in FIG. 48(b), the second win/loss table 182 has the jackpot result, time-saving result, and miss result set as the result of the win/loss determination process, and also has the small win result set. Note that even in the second win/loss table 182 corresponding to a setting value other than "Setting 3", the jackpot result, time-saving result, small win result, and miss result are set. The number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 set corresponding to the jackpot result differs for each setting value as in the first embodiment, and the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 set corresponding to each of the time-saving result and small win result is the same for each setting value.

When a jackpot result is selected in the win/lose determination process, the type of jackpot result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the jackpot distribution determination process for determining the type of jackpot result is executed, the jackpot distribution table 183 stored in the main ROM 83 is referenced. Figure 48(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 183. As shown in Figure 48(c), a low frequency jackpot result and a high frequency jackpot result are set in the jackpot distribution table 183 as a result of the jackpot distribution determination process.

The result of a low-frequency jackpot triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode. In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a low-frequency jackpot result, the number of rounds played will be 10. In addition, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In this case, the low-frequency support mode will continue at least until the next opening and closing execution mode occurs.

The high frequency jackpot result triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode. In the open/close execution mode triggered by the high frequency jackpot result, the number of rounds played will be 10. In addition, the support mode after the open/close execution mode ends will be the first high frequency support mode. In this case, the first high frequency support mode will end when 10 play times have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 10 play times have been played, the support mode will become the low frequency support mode.

The jackpot distribution table 183 is referenced when the result of the hit/miss determination process for the first reserved information is a jackpot result, and when the result of the hit/miss determination process for the second reserved information is a jackpot result. In addition, the same jackpot distribution table 183 is referenced regardless of the setting value. The jackpot distribution table 183 is set so that there is a 2/3 probability that a low-frequency jackpot result is selected and a 1/3 probability that a high-frequency jackpot result is selected, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process, the type of time-saving result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the time-saving allocation determination process is executed to determine the type of this time-saving result, the time-saving allocation table 184 stored in the main ROM 83 is referenced. Figure 48 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table 184. As shown in Figure 48 (d), the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result are set in the time-saving allocation table 184 as the results of the time-saving allocation determination process.

The first time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the open/close execution mode, but is a time-saving result that sets the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game turns, which is the first time-saving continuation count, are consumed without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 10 game turns have been consumed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The second time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the open/close execution mode, and is a time-saving result that sets the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 15 game rounds, which is the second time-saving continuation count, are played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When 15 game rounds have been played, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the second time-saving result results in a greater number of game rounds in which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time-saving result. Therefore, the second time-saving result is more advantageous for the player than the first time-saving result.

Note that even in this embodiment, there is a ceiling time-saving feature. When the second high-frequency support mode is set as a result of the ceiling time-saving feature, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 10 play times, which is the first time-saving continuation count, are consumed without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring, as in the case of the first time-saving result. When 10 play times are consumed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The time-saving allocation table 184 is referenced when the result of the correct/incorrect judgment process for the first pending information is a time-saving result, and when the result of the correct/incorrect judgment process for the second pending information is a time-saving result. In addition, the same time-saving allocation table 184 is referenced regardless of the setting value. The time-saving allocation table 184 is set so that the first time-saving result is selected with a 2/3 probability and the second time-saving result is selected with a 1/3 probability, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When a small win result is selected in the win/lose determination process, the type of small win result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the small win distribution determination process is executed to determine the type of this small win result, the small win distribution table 185 stored in the main ROM 83 is referenced. Figure 48 (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small win distribution table 185. As shown in Figure 48 (e), the first small win result, the second small win result, and the third small win result are set in the small win distribution table 185 as the results of the small win distribution determination process.

All of these first to third small win results trigger a transition to the allocation execution mode. In the allocation execution mode, the allocation winning device 161 is in an open state, as already explained. When a game ball that enters the allocation winning device 161 flows into the V winning passage area 165c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the system transitions from the allocation execution mode to the open/close execution mode. After the open/close execution mode ends, the system enters a support mode that corresponds to the type of small win result. Figure 48 (f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combinations of the open/close execution mode and the support mode that correspond to each small win result.

The first small win result is a small win result in which the number of round play executions in the opening and closing execution mode, which is entered when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the allocation execution mode, is one. In addition, the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The second small win result is a small win result in which the number of round play times in the open/close execution mode, which is entered when the V winning detection sensor 169 detects a game ball in the allocation execution mode, is four. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when ten play times have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When ten play times have been played, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The third small win result is a small win result in which the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode, which is entered when the V winning detection sensor 169 detects a game ball in the allocation execution mode, is nine. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when ten play times have been played without a new open/close execution mode occurring. When ten play times have been played, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 48(e), the small win distribution table 185 is referenced when the result of the win/loss determination process for the first reserved information is a small win result, and when the result of the win/loss determination process for the second reserved information is a small win result. In addition, the same small win distribution table 185 is referenced regardless of the setting value. The small win distribution table 185 is set so that the first small win result is selected with a 1/3 probability, the second small win result is selected with a 1/3 probability, and the third small win result is selected with a 1/3 probability, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the special chart special power control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the acquisition process of reserved information is executed (step S2701). FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of reserved information. If a winning has occurred in the first actuation port 33 (step S2801: YES), the number of first reserved information stored in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d of the first special chart area 171 is less than the upper limit storage number of four (step S2802: NO), and the storage process is executed in the first special chart area 171 (step S2803). In this storage process, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the first reserved information in the area with the earlier consumption order among the areas in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d of the first special chart area 171 where the first reserved information is not stored. In addition, when the first reserved information is acquired, data setting is performed so that the display content of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of first reserved information this time. In addition, when the first pending information is acquired, a corresponding command is sent to the audiovisual side MPU 93. As a result, the image in the first pending display area 42a on the pattern display device 41 is updated in response to the new acquisition of the first pending information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2801, if a negative judgment is made in step S2802, or if the processing of step S2803 is executed, it is judged whether or not a prize has been won in the special prize winning device 151 (step S2804). If a positive judgment is made in step S2804, on the condition that the current situation is a situation in which none of the game times, the allocation execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode are being executed (step S2805: YES), a storage process is executed in the execution area 174 for the second special chart (step S2806). In this storage process, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart as the second reserved information. In other words, the second reserved information is acquired only in a situation in which none of the game times triggered by the first reserved information, the game times triggered by the second reserved information, the allocation execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode are being executed. As described in detail below, the second reserved information takes priority over the first reserved information as an execution trigger for the execution of the winning/losing determination process, in other words, the execution of a game round, so when the second reserved information is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special pattern, the winning/losing determination process triggered by the second reserved information is immediately executed, and a game round triggered by the second reserved information is started. Note that there is no second special pattern reserved display section for notifying the number of second reserved information stored, and furthermore, the pattern display device 41 does not display an image for notifying the number of reserved memories of the second reserved information.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart special power control process (Figure 49), after executing the pending information acquisition process in step S2701, the special chart special power address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out (step S2702). The special chart special power address table contains the start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the special chart special power counter. The special chart special power counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to identify the processing content to be executed in the special chart special power control process.

The special chart special electricity counter can take a value between "0" and "8", and each value between "0" and "8" corresponds to the start address of each process (steps S2705 to S2713). Specifically, when the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "0", the special chart change start process (step S2705) is executed, which is a process for starting the presentation for the game round. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "1", the special chart change in progress process (step S2706) is executed, which is a process for progressing the presentation for the game round. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "2", the special chart confirmation process (step S2707) is executed, which is a process for ending the presentation for the game round. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "3", the distribution start process (step S2708) is executed, which is a process for setting the start of the distribution execution mode. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "4", the distribution process (step S2709) is executed, which is a process for executing various processes during the distribution execution mode. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "5", the special electricity start process (step S2710) is executed, which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening and closing execution mode. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "6", the special electricity open process (step S2711) is executed, which is a process for controlling the state of the special electricity winning device 32 while it is open. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "7", the special electricity closed process (step S2712) is executed, which is a process for controlling the state of the special electricity winning device 32 while it is closed. When the value of the special chart special electricity counter is "8", the special electricity end process (step S2713) is executed, which is a process for controlling the ending of the opening and closing execution mode and the transition of the game state when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the special picture special call control process, after reading the special picture special call address table (step S2702), the start address corresponding to the information of the special picture special call counter is obtained from the special picture special call address table (step S2703), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S2704). Each process from step S2705 to step S2713 will be explained individually below.

<Special chart change start processing>
First, the special chart change start processing of step S2705 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 51.

In the special chart change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S2902) on the condition that the first reserved information or the second reserved information is stored (step S2901: YES). In the data setting process, if the second reserved information is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart, the second reserved information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart is set as the execution target, regardless of whether the first reserved information acquired before the second reserved information is acquired in the area 171 for the first special chart. This makes it possible to prioritize the second reserved information over the first reserved information as a trigger for executing the win/loss judgment process, and also makes it possible to prioritize it as a trigger for executing a game round. Note that the second reserved information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart is erased when the game round triggered by the second reserved information ends.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, if the second reserved information is not stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart, the data stored in the first area 172a of the first special chart area 171 is moved to the execution area 173 for the first special chart. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first special chart area 171. This data shift process is a process to shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d in order to the lower area side, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area 172b to the first area 172a, the third area 172c to the second area 172b, and the fourth area 172d to the third area 172c, and then the fourth area 172d is cleared to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c are updated in accordance with the current decrease in the number of reserved information on the first special chart side. In addition, in the data setting process, a reserved decrease command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. As a result, the image in the first pending display area 42a on the pattern display device 41 is updated in accordance with the reduction in the first pending information.

After the data setting process is executed, the winning/losing determination process is executed (step S2903). In the winning/losing determination process, if the execution target of the current game round is the first reserved information, the first winning/losing table 181 (see FIG. 48(a)) corresponding to the current setting is read from the main ROM 83, and if the execution target of the current game round is the second reserved information, the second winning/losing table 182 (see FIG. 48(b)) corresponding to the current setting is read from the main ROM 83. As already explained, there is only one winning/losing lottery mode. After reading the winning/losing tables 181 and 182, if the first reserved information is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special chart is read, and if the second reserved information is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart is read. Then, it is determined whether the numerical information read from the winning random number counter C1 matches any of the game results set in the winning/losing tables 181 and 182.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a jackpot result (step S2904: YES), a process for the jackpot result is executed (step S2905). In the process for the jackpot result, the same process as steps S807 to S809 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the distribution determination process for the jackpot, the jackpot distribution table 183 shown in FIG. 48 (c) is referenced regardless of the type and setting value of the reserved information that is the target of the start of the game round. In this case, when the first reserved information is the target of the start of the game round, it is determined whether the numerical information for the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special chart matches any of the jackpot results set in the jackpot distribution table 183. Also, when the second reserved information is the target of the start of the game round, it is determined whether the numerical information for the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart matches any of the jackpot results set in the jackpot distribution table 183. In addition, in the jackpot flag set process, if a low-frequency jackpot result is selected in the jackpot distribution determination process, a corresponding flag is set, and if a high-frequency jackpot result is selected, a corresponding flag is set. In addition, in the jackpot result stop result setting process, if a low-frequency jackpot result is selected in the jackpot distribution determination process, the corresponding stop result information is stored in the main RAM 84, and if a high-frequency jackpot result is selected, the corresponding stop result information is stored in the main RAM 84.

If the result of the win/loss judgment process is a time-saving result (step S2906: YES), a process for the time-saving result is executed (step S2907). In the process for the time-saving result, the same process as steps S811 to S813 of the special chart fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the time-saving allocation judgment process, the time-saving allocation table 184 shown in FIG. 48 (d) is referenced regardless of the type and setting value of the reserved information that is the target of the start of the game round. In this case, when the first reserved information is the target of the start of the game round, it is determined whether the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special chart matches any of the time-saving results set in the time-saving allocation table 184. Also, when the second reserved information is the target of the start of the game round, it is determined whether the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart matches any of the time-saving results set in the time-saving allocation table 184. In addition, in the time-saving flag set process, if the first time-saving result is selected in the time-saving allocation determination process, a corresponding flag is set, and if the second time-saving result is selected, a corresponding flag is set. In addition, in the time-saving result stop result setting process, if the first time-saving result is selected in the time-saving allocation determination process, information on the corresponding stop result is stored in the main RAM 84, and if the second time-saving result is selected, information on the corresponding stop result is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern type selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a small win result (step S2908: YES), a small win allocation determination process is executed (step S2909). In the small win allocation determination process, the small win allocation table 185 shown in FIG. 48(e) is referenced regardless of the type and setting value of the reserved information that is the target for starting a game round. In this case, when the first reserved information is the target for starting a game round, it is determined whether the numerical information for the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special chart matches any of the small win results set in the small win allocation table 185. Also, when the second reserved information is the target for starting a game round, it is determined whether the numerical information for the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special chart matches any of the small win results set in the small win allocation table 185.

Then, a flag set process for a small win is executed (step S2910). In the flag set process for a small win, if the first small win result is selected in the small win allocation determination process in step S2909, a corresponding flag is set, if the second small win result is selected, a corresponding flag is set, and if the third small win result is selected, a corresponding flag is set.

After that, the stop result setting process for the small win result is executed (step S2911). In the stop result setting process for the small win result, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the second special chart display unit 37b in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for the small win result stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In this stop result table for the small win result, the type of stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the second special chart display unit 37b is set differently for each type of small win result, and in step S2911, the information on the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of small win result specified in step S2909 is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a big win result and is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time-saving result. The stopping patterns of the images may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each small win result, or multiple types of stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the small win results.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a loss result (step S2908: NO), a loss result stop result setting process is executed (step S2912). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally displayed in the current game round on the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b, whichever is the target of the game round, is identified from a loss result stop result table stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a big win result, the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time-saving result, and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the process for specifying the variable display period is executed (step S2913). In the process for specifying the variable display period, if the current state is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the high frequency support table group, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. Also, if a small win result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the small win-corresponding table in the high frequency support table group, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the small win mode. In addition, if a jackpot result, a reach-to-miss display, or a small jackpot result does not occur in the current game round, and if the second reserved information is the target for the game round, information on the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of game rounds triggered by the second reserved information in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. On the other hand, if a jackpot result, a reach-to-miss display, or a small jackpot result does not occur in the current game round, and if the first reserved information is the target for the game round, information on the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round.

If the current state is the low-frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the low-frequency support table group to read out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. Also, if a small win result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the small win-corresponding table in the low-frequency support table group to read out information on the variable display period of the small win mode. Also, if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the time-saving table in the low-frequency support table group to read out information on the variable display period of the time-saving mode. In addition, if the current game round does not have a big win result, a miss reach display, a small win result, or a time-saving result, if the second reserved information is the target of the game round, the information of the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period of the current game round. This makes it possible to reduce the consumption efficiency of the game round triggered by the second reserved information in the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the first reserved information is the target of the game round when no big win result, miss reach display, small win result, or time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started in a situation where three or more pieces of first reserved information are stored in the first special chart area 171, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read as the variable display period of the current game round, and if the game round is started in a situation where one or two pieces of first reserved information are stored in the first special chart area 171, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is compared with the table corresponding to the complete miss result in the low-frequency support table group, and the information of the variable display period corresponding to the complete miss result is read.

After executing the process of specifying the variable display period in step S2913, a variable command and a type command corresponding to the game round to be started this time are sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S2914). The variable command includes information on the variable display period specified in step S2913 and information indicating which of the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b the game round to be started corresponds to. Note that the variable command does not include information on whether or not to execute a reach display, but since the variable display period when the reach display occurs is set to a period longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur, the sound/light side MPU 93 can specify whether or not the reach display has occurred from the information on the variable display period. The type command includes information on whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result, includes information indicating which type of jackpot result it is. The type command also includes information on whether the game round to be started this time corresponds to a time-saving result, and if so, information indicating what type of time-saving result it is. The type command also includes information on whether the game round to be started this time corresponds to a small win result, and if so, information indicating what type of small win result it is.

Then, the display of the changing pattern is started in the display section that is the start target of the current game round, either the first special chart display section 37a or the second special chart display section 37b (step S2915). Then, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S2916). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "1", which corresponds to the special chart changing process (step S2706).

<Special chart change processing>
Next, the special chart changing process executed in step S2706 of the special chart special electric control process (Figure 49) will be described.

If the value of the special pattern timer counter is 1 or more and the variable display period for the current game round has not elapsed, and it is time to update the display content of the special pattern display unit 37a, 37b that is the target of the current game round, data is set to update the display content of the special pattern display unit 37a, 37b. As a result, the display content of the pattern in the controlled special pattern display unit 37a, 37b is updated to the display content of the next order.

The mode at the start of the display of the changing patterns in the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the update mode of the display of the changing patterns are performed in a fixed manner regardless of the win/lose judgment result and the allocation judgment result, and are also performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the presentation for the game round in the pattern display device 41. For example, the display content of the patterns goes around once by the occurrence of a predetermined number of update timings, and the display pattern with a fixed display order is repeated, and when the changing display period has elapsed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the situation in which the display order of the display pattern is being displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, if the value of the special chart side timer counter is "0", that is, if the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. After that, at the start of a game round, the information on the stop mode of the images of the special chart display units 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 is read out in any of steps S2905, S2907, S2911, and S2912 in the special chart variable start processing (FIG. 51). As a result, the variable display of the images is stopped in a state where the image corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special chart display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Then, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special chart side timer counter. This starts the measurement of the final stop period. Then, the value of the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 1. As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter becomes "2", which corresponds to the special chart confirmation processing (step S2707).

When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a final stop command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the command, it causes the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result of the current game round to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 for the final stop period.

<Special drawing confirmation processing>
Next, the special drawing confirmation processing executed in step S2707 of the special drawing special electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

If the value of the special chart side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S3001: YES), and the result of the current game is a jackpot (step S3002: YES), the special chart side timer counter is set to information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) (step S3003), and an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S3004). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the performance corresponding to the opening period to be performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After that, the value of the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 3 (step S3005). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter becomes "5", which corresponds to the special electric start process (step S2710).

If the game result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step S3002: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented in step S3006, the time-saving result setting process is executed in step S3007, and the ceiling counter 131 is decremented in step S3008. The time-saving state counter 134 decrement process in step S3006 is the same as the time-saving state counter 134 decrement process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1601 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist. In addition, the time-saving result setting process in step S3007 is the same as the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1302 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist. In addition, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S3008 is the same as the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment (FIG. 29), except that the process of step S1501 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist, and when the second high frequency support mode occurs as a result of the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction state counter 134 is set to information of 10 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number.

After that, it is determined whether the result of the current game is a small win result (step S3009). If the result of the current game is a small win result (step S3009: YES), the value of the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S3010). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "3" corresponding to the allocation start process (step S2708). If the result of the current game is not a small win result (step S3009: NO), the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S3011). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special chart fluctuation start process (step S2705).

<Processing for starting sorting>
Next, the allocation start process executed in step S2708 of the special picture special call control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

First, a distribution start command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the distribution start command from the main side MPU 82, it controls the light emission of the display light-emitting unit 64 and the sound output of the speaker unit 65 so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. The sound/light side MPU 93 also sends a distribution start command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the distribution start command from the sound/light side MPU 93, it controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed after an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode has started is executed.

Then, the distribution winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "5". The distribution winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the trigger for switching the distribution winning device 161 from an open state to a closed state in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 161 that is in an open state in the distribution execution mode. In addition, a process for setting the distribution opening period is executed. In the process for setting the distribution opening period, information corresponding to the 2 seconds during which the distribution winning device 161 is maintained in an open state is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 84. Then, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 163 for the distribution entrance is started to set the distribution winning device 161 in an open state. Then, the value of the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1. As a result, the value of the special chart special power counter becomes "4" corresponding to the distribution process (step S2709).

<Sorting process>
Next, the allocation process executed in step S2709 of the special picture special call control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161, the V winning flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1". The V winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that a game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 169. It also sends a V winning command to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a V winning command from the main MPU 82, it executes light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 64 and sound output control of the speaker unit 65 so that a performance corresponding to the detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 is executed. In addition, the sound/light side MPU 93 sends a V winning command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives a V winning command from the sound/light side MPU 93, it controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that a display performance indicating that a game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 is executed.

In the distribution process, when the distribution winning device 161 is in an open state, it is determined whether the distribution open period, which is measured using the timer counter of the main RAM 84, has elapsed. If the distribution open period has not elapsed, it is determined whether a winning has occurred in the distribution winning device 161 by determining whether a game ball has been detected by the count detection sensor 168 or V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161. If a winning has occurred in the distribution winning device 161, the value of the distribution winning counter in the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the value of the distribution winning counter after the decrement is "0".

If the distribution open period has elapsed or the value of the distribution winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the closing condition of the distribution winning device 161 is met, so the distribution winning device 161 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the distribution entrance drive unit 163. After that, in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until there are no game balls in the distribution winning device 161, information corresponding to the waiting period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 84. The waiting period is set to a period longer than the longest period required for a game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 to be detected by either the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169. Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the distribution execution mode until the waiting period has elapsed in this way, if a game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 just before the distribution winning device 161 is closed is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, it can be treated as valid.

In the allocation process, it is determined whether the waiting period measured by the timer counter of the main RAM 84 has elapsed. If the waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether the V winning flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". If the V winning flag is set to "1", a process is executed to transition to the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, a display start process of the special display unit 191 provided on the game board 24 is executed. In the display start process, the display of the special display unit 191 is controlled so that the display state of the special display unit 191 becomes a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the opening and closing execution mode. Then, the same process as steps S3003 to S3005 in the special chart determination process (Figure 52) is executed. This starts the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the value of the special chart special electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric start process (step S2710). In addition, when processing is performed during special drawing determination processing (FIG. 52) to transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the display of the special display unit 191 may be controlled so that the display state of the special display unit 191 becomes a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the opening and closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag in the main RAM 84 is not set to "1", a flag clear process is executed. In the flag clear process, the various flags in the main RAM 84 used in the current game are cleared to "0". For example, in the allocation execution mode, any of the first to third small win flags in the main RAM 84 are set to "1", and the flag to which "1" is set is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart fluctuation start process (step S2705).

Here, if the allocation execution mode is entered but no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the process for switching to the support mode is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting of the support mode and the duration table for the game round corresponding to the type of small win result that triggered the allocation execution mode from being performed if the allocation execution mode is entered but the open/close execution mode does not occur afterwards. Then, after the allocation execution mode ends, the support mode before the allocation execution mode started is maintained.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when a game round resulting in a small win is played, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented by 1 in the decrement process of the time-saving state counter 134 (step S3006), and if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after the decrement is "0", a process is executed to transition to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a game round resulting in a small win is started in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the allocation execution mode may be in the low-frequency support mode. In this case, if the open/close execution mode does not occur after the allocation execution mode, a new game round will be played in the low-frequency support mode.

Even if a game round resulting in a small win is played, the ceiling counter 131 decrement process (step S3008) executes a process of decrementing the value of the ceiling counter 131 by 1, and if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the decrement is "0", a process is executed to transition to the second high frequency support mode using the ceiling time reduction as an opportunity, so even if a game round resulting in a small win is started in the low frequency support mode, the allocation execution mode may be in the second high frequency support mode. In this case, if the open/close execution mode does not occur after the allocation execution mode, a new game round will be played in the second high frequency support mode.

<Special call start processing>
Next, the special call start processing executed in step S2710 of the special call control processing (FIG. 49) will be described.

The process of setting the number of times of opening and closing is executed on the condition that the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the current game result is a low frequency big win result or a high frequency big win result, the round counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "10", if the current game result is a first small win result, the round counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", if the current game result is a second small win result, the round counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "4", and if the current game result is a third small win result, the round counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "9". The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening and closing execution mode by the main MPU 82. In addition, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special chart timer counter. In addition, the winning counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "10". The winning counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the number of remaining winning points from the upper limit. In addition, the special line winning device 32 is set to an open state by outputting a drive signal to the special line drive unit 32b. After that, the value of the special line counter is incremented by 1. As a result, the value of the special line counter becomes "6", which corresponds to the special line open processing (step S2711).

<Special call open processing>
Next, the special line open processing executed in step S2711 of the special chart special line control processing (Figure 49) will be described.

When the value of the special picture side timer counter is "0", that is, when the open duration has elapsed, the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is stopped, so that the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. Also, when a game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the winning counter after the subtraction is "0", the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is stopped, so that the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. Also, when the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special picture side timer counter, and then the value of the special picture special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special picture special electric counter becomes "7", which corresponds to the special electric closed processing (step S2712). On the other hand, if the round counter value after subtracting 1 is "0", the ending period information (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special chart side timer counter, and after sending an ending command to the sound/light side MPU 93, the value of the special chart special signal counter is incremented by 2. As a result, the value of the special chart special signal counter becomes "8", which corresponds to the special signal end process (step S2713). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives an ending command, it causes the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the ending period.

<Special line shutdown processing>
Next, the special line closed processing executed in step S2712 of the special chart special line control processing (Figure 49) will be described.

If the value of the special chart side timer counter is "0", i.e., if the interval period has elapsed, information on the duration of the round play open (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special chart side timer counter. Also, the winning counter in the main RAM 84 is set to "10". Also, the special electric winning device 32 is set to an open state by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b. After that, the value of the special chart special electric counter is decremented by 1. As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter becomes "6", which corresponds to the special electric open processing (step S2711).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special call termination processing executed in step S2713 of the special call control processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step S3101: YES), and if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency big win result, a second small win result, or a third small win result (step S3102: YES), the first high-frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3103), and the second high-frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3104). As already explained, the first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or not, and the second high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode or not, as already explained. The support mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode by setting the first high-frequency flag to "1" and clearing the second high-frequency flag to "0".

After that, the time-saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is set to "10", which is the first time-saving continuation number (step S3105). The time-saving state counter 134 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of times the high-frequency support mode (first high-frequency support mode or second high-frequency support mode) will continue. As a result, the first high-frequency support mode is maintained until the first time-saving continuation number of 10 times is consumed. In the first high-frequency support mode, the special winning device 151 is opened with high frequency. When a game ball enters the special winning device 151, a small win result is selected with a high probability, and when a small win result is selected, the allocation execution mode is executed. Then, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the allocation winning device 161 in the allocation execution mode, the open/close execution mode is generated.

Here, when the result of the win/loss determination process is the first time-saving result and the second high-frequency support mode is set, the time-saving state counter 134 is set to the first time-saving continuation number of "10", whereas when the result of the win/loss determination process is the second time-saving result and the second high-frequency support mode is set, the time-saving state counter 134 is set to the second time-saving continuation number of "15", which is greater than the first time-saving continuation number. In other words, when the second time-saving result is set to the second high-frequency support mode, a greater number of time-saving continuations is set than when the first high-frequency support mode is set in response to a big win or small win result. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the win/loss determination process resulting in the second time-saving result.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result (step S3102: NO), both the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S3106). In addition, the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). This changes the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

When the processing of step S3105 or the processing of step S3107 is executed, a transmission process of a state designation command is executed (step S3108). In this transmission process, a state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processing of steps S3102 to S3107 is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. The sound/light side MPU 93 executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance corresponding to the content of the received state designation command.

Then, the ceiling counter 131 in the main RAM 84 is set to "500", which corresponds to the fixed ceiling count (step S3109). Then, the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S3110). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart fluctuation start process (step S2705).

As described above, when the open/close execution mode ends, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In this embodiment, as already explained, if the result of the winning/losing determination process is a big win result, the open/close execution mode is entered when the game round ends, and if the result of the winning/losing determination process is a small win result, the open/close execution mode is entered when the distribution execution mode in which the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 occurs ends, not when the game round ends. In other words, there are multiple routes for entering the open/close execution mode. In this configuration, by setting the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, in the ceiling counter 131 when the open/close execution mode ends, it is possible to consolidate the process of setting the information of the fixed ceiling number of times into one process regardless of which route the open/close execution mode occurs. Therefore, it is possible to set the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, in the ceiling counter 131 when the open/close execution mode occurs, while reducing the program capacity.

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the power failure monitoring process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the power failure monitoring process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 14).

If a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 85 (step S3201: YES), the current state is the open/close execution mode, and the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode is a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result (steps S3202 and S3203: YES), the information "800" corresponding to the special ceiling number is set in the ceiling counter 131 (step S3204). This special ceiling number is a number greater than the fixed ceiling number set in the ceiling counter 131 in step S3109 of the special power termination process (Fig. 53). On the other hand, if the current state is not the open/close execution mode (step S3202: NO), or if the current state is the open/close execution mode but the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode is either a high-frequency big win result, a second small win result, or a third small win result (step S3202: NO), the process of step S3204 is not executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3202, if a negative judgment is made in step S3203, or if the processing of step S3204 is executed, the power outage flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3205), the checksum of the main RAM 84 is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 84 (step S3206), and the output port is cleared (step S3207). Thereafter, the processing waits until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

In a configuration in which a fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening/closing execution mode ends as in this embodiment, if the opening/closing execution mode is started as a result of a low-frequency big win, or if the allocation execution mode is triggered by the first small win result and then the opening/closing execution mode is started when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the allocation execution mode, if a fraudulent act is committed in which the supply of operating power is stopped during the opening/closing execution mode and a setting value update process (step S117) or a RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) clears the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress as in the first embodiment, but the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that there is a risk that gameplay will resume with a small number of ceiling counts remaining while obtaining the benefits of the opening/closing execution mode until the supply of operating power is stopped. In particular, when an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result is executed, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, so even if the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior is performed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result, the fraudulent person will not suffer any disadvantage in relation to the support mode. In contrast, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result, the information "800" corresponding to the special ceiling number is set in the ceiling counter 131 before the supply of operating power is stopped. This makes it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior.

Furthermore, if any of the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are committed, a special ceiling count, which is a count higher than the fixed ceiling count that is set when the opening/closing execution mode ends, is set in the ceiling counter 131. Therefore, if any of the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are committed, it is possible to impose a penalty for them.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the supply of operating power is started in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state and none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting check operation" are performed, the information of "500", which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 in step S114 in the main processing (FIG. 13). As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the open/close execution mode triggered by a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result even though no fraudulent activity as described above is being performed, the manager of the game hall can perform an operation to start the supply of operating power in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state and none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting check operation" are performed, and the information of "500", which is the fixed ceiling number, can be set in the ceiling counter 131 in the same way as when the open/close execution mode is ended.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the selection mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the specific confirmation process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special image side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S3301: YES), and the result of the current game is a jackpot (step S3302: YES), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special image side timer counter (step S3303), and an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S3304). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the opening period.

Then, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S3305). In other words, when the game number corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening and closing execution mode starts, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling number of times is set in the ceiling counter 131 not when the opening and closing execution mode starts but during the opening and closing execution mode or when the opening and closing execution mode ends, if a fraudulent act is performed in which the supply of operating power is stopped after the opening and closing execution mode starts and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed, as already explained, in the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress is cleared, while the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be resumed in a situation where the remaining ceiling number of times is small while the profit of the opening and closing execution mode until the supply of the operating power is stopped is obtained, and the game will be resumed in a situation where the remaining ceiling number of times is small. In response to this, when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set to a fixed ceiling count of 500, making it possible to neutralize fraudulent behavior such as the one described above.

Then, the game counter provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3306). The game counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the number of times the game has been played since the opening and closing execution mode ended has reached the reference number. The reference number is the number of times the last digit of the number of times the game has been played becomes the reference number. "7" is set as the reference number. Therefore, the number of times the game has been played since the opening and closing execution mode ended, such as "7", "17", "27", "37", "47", "57", "67", "77", "87", "97", "107" ..., becomes the reference number for all game times whose last digit is "7". Then, the value of the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S3307). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter becomes "3", which corresponds to the special electric start process (step S609).

If the game result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step S3302: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented (step S3308). The content of this process is the same as the decrement process of the time-saving state counter 134 in the first embodiment (FIG. 30). Then, the setting process for the time-saving result is executed (step S3309). The content of this process is the same as the setting process for the time-saving result in the first embodiment (FIG. 25). Then, the ceiling counter 131 is decremented (step S3310). The content of this process is the same as the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment (FIG. 29). Then, the high probability state counter 133 is decremented (step S3311). The content of this process is the same as the decrement process of the high probability state counter 133 in the first embodiment (FIG. 24). Then, the special chart special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S3312). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart change start process (step S606).

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the value of the game count counter in the main RAM 84 is incremented by 1 (step S3401). That is, the game count counter is cleared to "0" in step S3306 in the special chart determination process (FIG. 55) when the open/close execution mode is started, and is incremented by 1 in step S3401 in the variable display period specification process (FIG. 56) every time a game round is started regardless of the game state. In addition, the value of the game count counter is not updated, including being cleared to "0", even if a transition to the second high frequency support mode occurs as a result of the time reduction or a transition to the second high frequency support mode occurs as a result of the ceiling time reduction. This enables the main MPU 82 to use the game count counter to measure the number of games executed after the open/close execution mode is terminated. In addition, the game count counter in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" even if the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed in the main process (FIG. 13) when the supply of operating power is started. As a result, if the setting value update process (step S117) or RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power starts, the main MPU 82 can use the game count counter to count the number of games that have been played since the supply of operating power started until a new open/close execution mode is generated.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the game play counter in the main RAM 84 is the reference number (step S3402). As already explained, the reference number is the number of times the last digit of the number of times a game has been played is the reference number (specifically, "7"). If a positive determination is made in step S3402, it is determined whether a jackpot result has been selected in the win/loss determination process for this game play (step S3403).

If a jackpot result is selected (step S3403: YES), the table for the jackpot result is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3404). In a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step S3411 with reference to the table for the jackpot result, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is compared with the table for the jackpot result to read information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. There are multiple types of variable display periods for the reach display mode, but the variable display period of any of the reach display modes is longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur. When information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is selected, the reach display will reliably occur on the pattern display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

If a jackpot result has not been selected (step S3403: NO), a table for non-reach occurrence is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3405). In a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step S3411 with reference to the table for non-reach occurrence, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is compared with the table for non-reach occurrence to read information on the variable display period in which the reach display does not occur. There are multiple types of variable display periods in which the reach display does not occur, but all of these multiple types of variable display periods are shorter than the variable display period in which the reach display occurs. When information on the variable display period in which the reach display does not occur is selected, the reach display does not occur reliably on the pattern display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

When a negative judgment is made in step S3402, if the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3406: YES), the table group for high probability is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3407). The selection mode of the variable display period when the table group for high probability is referenced is the same as that of the first embodiment. Also, when the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), if either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3408: YES), the table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3409). The selection mode of the variable display period when the table group for high frequency support is referenced is the same as that of the first embodiment. Furthermore, when the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), and when neither the first high frequency flag nor the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3408: NO), a table group for low frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3410). The selection of the variable display period when the table group for low frequency support is referenced is the same as in the first embodiment described above.

When the process of step S3404, step S3405, step S3407, step S3409, or step S3410 is executed, the table group read in any of these processes is referenced to execute a variable display period selection process (step S3411). The contents of this selection process have already been explained. Then, the information of the variable display period selected in step S3411 is set in the special drawing side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3412). The numerical information set in the special drawing side timer counter is updated by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 14).

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the number of executions since the end of the open/close execution mode is the reference number, the reach display will not be generated on the pattern display device 41 unless a jackpot result is obtained. In this case, in the reference number of game rounds, the occurrence of a jackpot result is confirmed at the point in time when the reach display is generated. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the presentation for the game round on the pattern display device 41 in relation to the number of game rounds executed.

The play count counter for measuring the reference number of times is cleared to "0" when the open/close execution mode is executed, and is not cleared to "0" even when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result occurs or when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs. This makes it possible to make the reach display appear only when a jackpot result is achieved in a play that is the reference number of times since the open/close execution mode ended, even if the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result or the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs after the open/close execution mode ends. This makes it easy for players to understand which play count is the reference number of times.

The number of times the game has been played since the open/close execution mode ended may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. In this case, the display of the number of times the game has been played on the pattern display device 41 is not cleared to "0" even if the second high-frequency support mode occurs due to the time-saving result or the second high-frequency support mode occurs due to the ceiling time-saving result. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the reference number of times the game has been played.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 134 executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 134 in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3501). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S3501: YES), the decrement process of the time-saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S3502 and onward. In the high probability state, the support mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode, but since the trigger for ending the high probability state is determined using the high probability state counter 133 as already explained, when the high probability flag is set to "1", the process for decrementing the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is not executed.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the first high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3502: YES), i.e., in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S3503), and if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after the decrement is "0" (step S3504: YES), the first high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3505). This ends the first high frequency support mode and switches to the low frequency support mode. In other words, the time-saving state ends and switches to the normal game state.

Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S3506). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. By receiving this state designation command, the sound/light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the presentation corresponding to the time-saving state in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the presentation corresponding to the normal game state.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3507: YES), that is, in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3508), and if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3509: YES), the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3510). This ends the second high frequency support mode and the mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In other words, the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered. In addition, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S3511). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it ends the execution of the effects corresponding to the time-saving state in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the effects corresponding to the normal game state.

After that, the set process of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed (step S3512). In this case, the information of 50 times, which is the predetermined switching reference number, is set in the variable selection state counter 132 of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when one game round is played in a situation where the winning/losing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 at the end of the game round. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, as a result of decrementing the value of the variable selection state counter 132 by 1, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". When the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" in a situation where the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode, the reach high frequency table group is referenced in the variable display period specification process (FIG. 21) to select the variable display period of the game round, as in the first embodiment.

In other words, if the predetermined switching reference number of times of play is consumed in a low probability mode after the end of either the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result or the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving, if the low frequency support mode is in the high frequency reach state, the table group for the high frequency of reach is referenced. In the high frequency reach state, as in the first embodiment, the probability that the reach display is selected in the case of a miss result is higher than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode situations where the reach is not in the high frequency reach state, and the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode situations where the reach is not in the high frequency reach state. Therefore, if the predetermined switching reference number of times of play is consumed after the end of either the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result or the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving, the high frequency reach state occurs, making it possible to increase attention to the game.

In the time-saving state, the efficiency of game rounds is high, whereas in the high-reach state, the efficiency of game rounds is low. In this case, by making it so that the high-reach state occurs after the time-saving state ends, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of game rounds from becoming excessively high.

When the time-saving state ends, the high-reach state does not immediately occur, but rather occurs when a predetermined switching reference number of play times have been played after the time-saving state ends. This makes it possible to prevent a sudden change from a high to a low efficiency in play times. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above without causing any discomfort to the player.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration when the time-saving result or the ceiling time-saving occurs in the time-saving state is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the setting process for time-saving results in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3602). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S3602: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps S3603 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game executed in a situation in which the high probability mode is active, the time-saving result is invalidated without the second high-frequency support mode being set as a result of the time-saving result.

Here, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 58) is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the last game in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", so that the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 58) is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Then, when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 58) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result. Therefore, in the game in which the hit/miss judgment process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order so that the time-saving result setting process (Figure 58) is executed before the subtraction process (Figure 24) of the high probability state counter 133 during the special chart determination process (Figure 22).

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S3602: NO), it is determined whether or not the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3603). In other words, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. If the support mode is not the first high frequency support mode (step S3603: NO), the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3604), and if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode (step S3603: YES), the processing of step S3604 is not executed. As a result, if the time-saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, if the time-saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and if the time-saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are selected.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3603 or if the processing of step S3604 is executed, it is determined whether the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result (step S3605). If the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result (step S3605: YES), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100", which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation count (step S3606). If the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time-saving continuation count (step S3606: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100", which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation count (step S3607).

Then, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3608). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started or that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S3608 is executed after the processing of step S3607 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. In this case, the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 displays the first time-saving occurrence pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") in a stopped state. Then, after these stopped results are displayed in a stopped state, the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time-saving state is occurring and an image indicating the first time-saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and while the reduced area displays a changing pattern corresponding to a new game round, the area secured by the reduction continues to display an image indicating that a time-saving state will occur and an image indicating the first number of times the time-saving state will continue. The display of the image ends when one game round is completed, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S3608 is executed after the processing of step S3607 is executed in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the first time-saving continuation number has been reset. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the first time-saving continuation number has been reset. In this case, in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41, the combination of patterns corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3"), the combination of the second time-saving occurrence patterns ("3, 4, 1"), and the combination of non-reach-miss patterns, which is a combination of patterns other than the combination of miss-reach patterns, are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that the time-saving continuation number in the time-saving state has actually been reset and an image indicating the first time-saving continuation number are displayed. The image is displayed when a game round ends, so a new game round can start immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and while the reduced area displays a varying pattern corresponding to a new game round, the area secured by the reduction continues to display an image indicating that the number of times the time-saving continues in the time-saving state has been reset and an image indicating the reset first number of times the time-saving continues is reset. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size when the display of the image ends.

If the current time-saving result is the second time-saving result (step S3605: NO), regardless of the current value of the time-saving state counter 134, the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "150" corresponding to the second time-saving continuation count (step S3609). After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3610). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started or that the second time-saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S3610 is executed after the processing of step S3609 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. In this case, the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 displays the combination of second time-saving occurrence patterns ("3, 4, 1") in a stopped state. Then, after these stopped results are displayed in a stopped state, the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time-saving state is occurring and an image indicating the second time-saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and while the pattern corresponding to the new game round is displayed in the reduced area, the image indicating that the time-saving state will occur and the image indicating the second number of times the time-saving state will continue are displayed in the area secured by the reduction. The display of the image ends when one game round is completed, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S3610 is executed after the processing of step S3609 is executed in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the second time-saving continuation number has been reset. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the second time-saving continuation number has been reset. In this case, in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41, the combination of patterns corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving occurrence pattern ("1, 2, 3"), the combination of the second time-saving occurrence pattern ("3, 4, 1"), and the combination of non-reach-miss patterns, which is a combination of patterns other than the combination of miss-reach patterns, are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that the time-saving continuation number in the time-saving state has actually been reset and an image indicating the second time-saving continuation number are displayed. The image is displayed when a game round ends, so a new game round can start immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and the pattern corresponding to the new game round is displayed in the reduced area while the image indicating that the number of times the time-saving continues in the time-saving state has been reset and the image indicating the reset second number of times the time-saving continues are displayed in the area secured by the reduction. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size when the display of the image ends.

Figure 59 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3701). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S3701: YES), the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S3702 and onward. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented during a game played in high probability mode, and furthermore, since the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented, no ceiling time reduction occurs.

Here, in the special chart determination process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the last game in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 and the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", and the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Then, when the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at that timing, the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed because the high probability flag is still set to "1". Therefore, in the game in which the hit/miss determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order during special chart determination processing (Figure 22) so that the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (Figure 59) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (Figure 24).

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes from step S3703 onwards. The process of setting information to the ceiling counter 131 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, only in step S114 when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, in step S122 when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and in step S1005 when the open/close execution mode is started, and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes are executed. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the process from step S3703 onwards. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, and if the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is entered by playing the number of times of the time reduction continuation without a jackpot result being played in the time reduction state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the playing times without a jackpot result are played repeatedly thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S3703), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3704). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3704: YES), regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" or not, the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S3705). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are entered. The low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and the first high frequency support mode ends when 100 play times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, have been consumed. Therefore, the ceiling time-saving that occurs when 500 play times, which is the fixed ceiling number, have been consumed in the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, does not occur in the first high frequency support mode.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100", which corresponds to the first number of times the time-saving state continues (step S3706). If the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first number of times the time-saving state continues (step S3706: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100", which corresponds to the first number of times the time-saving state continues (step S3707).

Then, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3708). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started or that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S3708 is executed after the processing of step S3707 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. Since the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 display stop displays a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of patterns other than the first time-saving occurrence pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") and the second time-saving occurrence pattern combination ("3, 4, 1"), which is a combination of patterns that is a loss pattern (including a loss reach pattern combination). Then, after the stop result is displayed and the final display for the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and an image indicating the first number of times the time-saving will continue are displayed. The timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, so a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 is reduced, and while a variable display of the patterns corresponding to the new game round is performed in the reduced area, the image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and the image indicating the first number of times the time-saving will continue are continued to be displayed in the area secured by the reduction. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S3708 is executed after the processing of step S3707 is executed in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset. Since the reset of the first time-saving continuation count triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 display stop displays a combination of patterns that corresponds to a jackpot result, a combination of patterns that is a loss pattern (including a loss reach pattern combination) other than the combination of patterns that causes the first time-saving occurrence ("1, 2, 3") and the combination of patterns that causes the second time-saving occurrence ("3, 4, 1"). Then, after the stop result is displayed and the final display for the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and an image indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset are displayed. The timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, so a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 is reduced, and while a variable display of the patterns corresponding to the new game round is performed in the reduced area, the image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and the image indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset are continued to be displayed in the area secured by the reduction. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3706 or if the processing of step S3708 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3709). As a result, when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether the second high frequency support mode is set in response to the ceiling time reduction.

Here, in the special chart determination process (Fig. 22), the setting process for the time-saving result (Fig. 58) is executed, followed by the subtraction process (Fig. 59) of the ceiling counter 131, and in the subtraction process (Fig. 59) of the ceiling counter 131, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0", if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the processes of steps S3707 and S3708 are not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the first time-saving continuation count from being reset due to the ceiling time-saving in a game that has resulted in the first or second time-saving result. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving continuation count from being reset due to the time-saving result and the time-saving continuation count from being reset due to the ceiling time-saving from being executed in a duplicated manner. In particular, if the second time-saving continuation count is reset in response to the second time-saving result, and then the first time-saving continuation count is reset in response to the ceiling time-saving result, the number of time-saving continuations will be reduced, but the above configuration makes it possible to prevent this inconvenience from occurring.

Next, the game state after the occurrence of a time-saving result or ceiling time-saving in the time-saving state will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 60. FIG. 60(a) shows the period in the open/close execution mode, FIG. 60(b) shows the period when the first high-frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", FIG. 60(c) shows the period when the second high-frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", FIG. 60(d) shows the state of the time-saving state counter 134, FIG. 60(e) shows the timing when the first time-saving result occurs, FIG. 60(f) shows the timing when the second time-saving result occurs, and FIG. 60(g) shows the timing when the ceiling time-saving occurs.

First, we will explain the cases where the second time-saving result occurs during the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 60(e), the result of the win/loss determination process becomes the first time-saving result, and when the game round in which the win/loss determination process was executed ends, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1," and as shown in FIG. 60(d), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100," which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation count, as shown in FIG. 60(d). This results in a time-saving state that is the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, and the first time-saving continuation count is set as the remaining continuation count of the time-saving state. Then, as game rounds that do not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d).

After that, when the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the result of the win/loss determination process becomes the second time-saving result as shown in FIG. 60(f) at timing t2 in the second high-frequency support mode, when the game round in which the win/loss determination process was executed ends, information of "150" corresponding to the second time-saving continuation number is set in the time-saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). As a result, in the middle of the time-saving state, the remaining continuation number of the time-saving state increases from a number less than the first time-saving continuation number to the second time-saving continuation number.

Next, we will explain the cases where a ceiling time reduction occurs during the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, but no benefit is awarded due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

At timing t3, as shown in FIG. 60(f), the result of the win/loss determination process becomes the second time-saving result, and when the game round in which the win/loss determination process was executed ends, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and as shown in FIG. 60(d), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "150", which corresponds to the second time-saving continuation number, as shown in FIG. 60(d). This results in a time-saving state that is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, and the second time-saving continuation number is set as the remaining continuation number of the time-saving state. Then, as game rounds that do not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d).

After that, at timing t4 when the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the second high-frequency support mode is in effect, a ceiling time-saving state occurs as shown in FIG. 60(g). In this case, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is greater than the first time-saving continuation count that is set in response to the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is maintained as is. In this way, even if a ceiling time-saving state occurs in the middle of a time-saving state, if the remaining continuation count at that point in time in the time-saving state is greater than the first time-saving continuation count that is set in response to the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state, the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state is invalidated.

Next, we will explain the case where a ceiling time reduction occurs during the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, and a profit is awarded due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 60(e), the result of the win/loss determination process becomes the first time-saving result, and when the game round in which the win/loss determination process was executed ends, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1," and as shown in FIG. 60(d), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100," which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation count, as shown in FIG. 60(d). This causes the game to enter a time-saving state that is the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, and the first time-saving continuation count is set as the remaining number of times that the time-saving state will continue. Then, as game rounds that do not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d).

After that, at timing t6 when the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the second high-frequency support mode is in effect, a ceiling time-saving state occurs as shown in FIG. 60(g). In this case, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is a value smaller than the first time-saving continuation count that is set in response to the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state. Therefore, at timing t6 when the ceiling time-saving state occurs, information of "100" corresponding to the first time-saving continuation count is set in the time-saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). As a result, in the middle of the time-saving state, the remaining continuation count of the time-saving state increases from a number smaller than the first time-saving continuation count to the first time-saving continuation count.

Next, we will explain the cases where the first time-saving result occurs during the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode.

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and as shown in FIG. 60(b), the first high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1," and as shown in FIG. 60(d), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100," which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation count, as shown in FIG. 60(d). This causes the game to enter a time-saving state that is the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, and the first time-saving continuation count is set as the remaining number of times that the time-saving state will continue. Then, as game rounds that do not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly played, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d).

After that, at the timing of t8 when the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the result of the winning/losing judgment process becomes the first time-saving result as shown in FIG. 60(e). In this case, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is a value smaller than the first time-saving continuation number set as a trigger of the occurrence of the first time-saving result. Therefore, when the game round in which the winning/losing judgment process results in the first time-saving result ends, the information of "100" corresponding to the first time-saving continuation number is set in the time-saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). As a result, the remaining continuation number of the time-saving state increases from a number smaller than the first time-saving continuation number to the first time-saving continuation number during the time-saving state. In addition, the support mode of the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained, and the remaining continuation number of the time-saving state, which is the first high-frequency support mode, is set to the first time-saving continuation number as a trigger of the occurrence of the first time-saving result.

Next, we will explain the cases where the second time-saving result occurs during the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode.

At timing t9, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and as shown in FIG. 60(b), the first high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and as shown in FIG. 60(d), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100", which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation count. As a result, the time-saving state is entered as the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, and the first time-saving continuation count is set as the remaining continuation count of the time-saving state. Then, as game rounds that do not trigger a transition to the opening and closing execution mode are repeatedly executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d).

After that, at the timing of t10 when the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the first high-frequency support mode is in effect, the result of the winning/losing judgment process becomes the second time-saving result as shown in FIG. 60(f). The second time-saving continuation count set in response to the occurrence of the second time-saving result is a count greater than the first time-saving continuation count of the time-saving state set when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends. Therefore, when the game round in which the winning/losing judgment process results in the second time-saving result ends, information of "150" corresponding to the second time-saving continuation count is set in the time-saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). As a result, the remaining continuation count of the time-saving state increases from a count less than the first time-saving continuation count to the second time-saving continuation count during the time-saving state. Furthermore, the support mode of the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but rather the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained, and therefore, upon the occurrence of the second time-saving result, the remaining number of times that the time-saving state, which is the first high-frequency support mode, will be continued is set to the second time-saving number of times.

With the above configuration, when a time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, the game transitions to a time-saving state with the number of times the time-saving continues that corresponds to the type of time-saving result. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a transition to the time-saving state occurs without going through the opening/closing execution mode, based on the result of the success/failure determination process in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

When the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 reset to 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. Also, when the second time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 set to 150 times, which is the second time-saving continuation number. As a result, when the time-saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, a situation occurs in which the remaining continuation number of the time-saving state becomes greater than before while continuing the first high-frequency support mode, in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be in an open state than in the second high-frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time-saving result occurring in the time-saving state.

If the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is equal to or greater than 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, when the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without any new settings being made regarding the time-saving state due to the occurrence of this first time-saving result. Also, if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, when the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 set to 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. Also, if the second time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 set to 150 times, which is the second time-saving continuation number. As a result, when a time-saving result occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the number of remaining continuations of the time-saving state increases while continuing the second high-frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time-saving result occurring in the time-saving state.

When a time-saving result occurs during a time-saving state, the remaining number of times the current time-saving state will continue and the number of times the time-saving result can be set based on the newly generated time-saving result, whichever is greater, will be the remaining number of times the time-saving state will continue. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of a time-saving result occurring during a time-saving state.

When the ceiling time-saving occurs in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, a transition to the time-saving state with the first number of times of time-saving continuation occurs. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a transition to the time-saving state occurs without going through the opening and closing execution mode based on the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

When the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is equal to or greater than 100 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without any new settings being made regarding the time reduction state due to the occurrence of this ceiling time reduction. Also, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the value of the time reduction state counter 134 set to 100 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number. In other words, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the greater of the remaining continuation number of the current time reduction state and the time reduction continuation number that can be set by the newly occurring ceiling time reduction becomes the remaining continuation number in the subsequent time reduction state. As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining continuation number of the time reduction state is greater than before, so it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction in the time reduction state.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the play area PA provided on the play board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 61 is a front view of the game board 24 to explain the configuration of the game area PA in this embodiment.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail as a guide means. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The game board 24 is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special chart unit 37, and a general chart unit 38, as in the first embodiment. Also, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. The configuration of the special winning device 151 is the same as in the sixth embodiment.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are dispensed. On the other hand, if a ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed to increase the number of game media available to the player. Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, 10 game balls are dispensed, when a ball enters the special winning device 32, 15 game balls are dispensed, when a ball enters the first operating opening 33, 3 game balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the special winning device 151, 1 game ball is dispensed. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls in the first operating opening 33 and the special winning device 151 may be the same.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the center of the game area PA. The peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, and thus an area is defined in which game balls shot into the game area PA can flow down. Specifically, the game area PA is defined as an upper area PA1, which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2, which is an area connected below the upper area PA1 and to the left of the variable display unit 36, a right area PA3, which is an area connected below the upper area PA1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area PA4, which is an area connected below the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 and below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game balls start to flow down to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, the game balls start to flow down to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4. In other words, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game balls flow down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, and can also play the game so that the game balls flow down the right area PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the following order: upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 33 is open upward, and no opening and closing member is provided to prevent game balls from entering the first operating port 33. In addition, when game balls are launched in the same manner, the probability of winning at the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of receiving game balls that flow down the game area PA toward the first operating port 33. In addition, the first operating port 33 is located directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and game balls that flow onto the stage portion 36b through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36 and are discharged outside the variable display unit 36 from the horizontal center of the stage portion 36b are more likely to enter the first operating port 33.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, but a restricting nail 24c is provided upstream of the first operating port 33 toward the right area PA3 so that the game ball that has flowed down the right area PA3 cannot reach the first operating port 33. In addition, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided in the left area PA2, but not in the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first operating port 33, but when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first operating port 33. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the restricting nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided in the right area PA3, so that the game ball can enter the first operating port 33 even when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. In other words, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

A through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. In addition, the special winning device 151 is provided vertically below the through gate 35, and the special electric winning device 32 is provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. Therefore, a game ball that wins the through gate 35 can win a prize in the special winning device 151 or the special electric winning device 32.

The right area PA3 where the special winning devices 151 and the through gate 35 are arranged is defined on the left by a side wall 36f that bulges out further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 36, and on the right by a restricting wall that is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protrudes further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the game board 24. The right area PA3 is set to have a narrower horizontal dimension than the lower area PA4, and the horizontal dimension is such that it is impossible to line up the game ball entry devices at the same height in the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to limit the trajectory of the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to a specified range, making it easier for game balls to enter the special winning devices 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement of the nails 24b upstream of the through gate 35 in the right area PA3 is set to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through gate 35. This makes it easier for game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to enter the through gate 35, and because it is easier for the balls to enter the through gate 35, it also makes it easier for the balls to enter the special winning device 151.

The special winning device 151 goes from a closed state to an open state when the induction unit 152 of the special winning device 151 is switched from a non-induction state to an induction state based on winning through the through gate 35. Specifically, the winning through the through gate 35 triggers a normal winning/losing determination process, and the image is displayed in the normal winning display section 38a of the normal winning unit 38, which is located in the lower left corner of the game area PA, where the game ball does not pass. Then, when the result of the normal winning/losing determination process is a winning electric role opening, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the display of the variation on the normal winning display section 38a is terminated, the normal electric opening state is entered. In the normal electric opening state, the induction unit 152 goes into an induction state in a predetermined manner, and the special winning device 151 goes into an open state in a predetermined manner.

Even in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes, and the probability of winning the electric role release in the normal play judgment process in each of these support modes, the selection mode of the duration of the variable display times in the normal play display section 38a, and the selection mode of the stop result in the normal play display section 38a are the same as those in the first embodiment. In addition, the mode in which the special winning device 151 is in the open state when the normal play state is reached in each support mode (open duration, number of times of opening, upper limit number of winnings, interval period) is the same as the mode in which the normal play element 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state when the normal play state is reached in each support mode in the first embodiment.

In the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than in the special winning device 151, but in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the first operating port 33. When a win is made in the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

A win/loss determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a win in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. The result of the win/loss determination process is then clearly displayed through the display effects in the special chart unit 37 and the pattern display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. The special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display unit 37a and a second special chart display unit 37b, as in the first embodiment. In the first special chart display unit 37a, a win/loss determination process is performed on the first reserved information acquired when a win occurs in the first operating port 33, and a variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the win/loss determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, a jackpot result, a time-saving result, and a loss result exist as the judgment result of the win/loss determination process, but the contents of the stop results of the first special chart display unit 37a are different for each of the jackpot result, the time-saving result, and the loss result. The display of the stop result in the first special chart display section 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the first special chart display section 37a starts displaying a new pattern variation. In addition, in the second special chart display section 37b, the winning/losing determination process is performed on the second reserved information acquired when a win occurs in the special winning device 151, and the pattern variation is displayed. Then, a result corresponding to the judgment result of the winning/losing determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, there are a jackpot result, a time-saving result, and a loss result as the judgment result of the winning/losing determination process, but the contents of the stop result in the second special chart display section 37b are different for each of the jackpot result, the time-saving result, and the loss result. The display of the stop result in the second special chart display section 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the second special chart display section 37b starts displaying a new pattern variation.

In the special chart unit 37, a first special chart reserve display section 37c is provided adjacent to the first special chart display section 37a. A maximum of four game balls that have entered the first operating port 33 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the first special chart reserve display section 37c. In addition, in the special chart unit 37, a second special chart reserve display section 37d is provided adjacent to the second special chart display section 37b. A maximum of four game balls that have entered the special winning device 151 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the second special chart reserve display section 37d.

The display range of the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b is narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 41. In addition, the display range of the entire first special chart display section 37a, the second special chart display section 37b, the first special chart reserved display section 37c, and the second special chart reserved display section 37d is also narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 41. This makes it possible to attract more attention from the player to the pattern display device 41 than to the first special chart display section 37a, the second special chart display section 37b, the first special chart reserved display section 37c, and the second special chart reserved display section 37d.

When the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b displays a changing pattern, i.e., when a game round is being played, the pattern display device 41 displays accordingly. When the pattern display device 41 displays a game round, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the first reserved display area 42a, the second reserved display area 42b, and the state suggestion area 43 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the pattern display device 41 not only displays a game round, but also displays during an open/close execution mode, which is entered after a jackpot result, etc.

When a jackpot result is selected in the win/lose determination process executed based on a win in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the opening/closing execution mode will be entered after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has ended. In the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes possible to win in the special winning device 32. The special winning device 32 is located below the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, the special winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a large winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win if a big win result is selected in the win/loss determination process. Note that while a win is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which a win is more difficult to occur than in the open state. The execution content of the opening/closing execution mode is the same as in the first embodiment described above.

Figure 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a variable type counter CS, and a regular random number counter C4 are provided. The contents of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS, and the regular random number counter C4, and the contents of the process using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, when a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs, the numerical information of the regular random number counter C4 is stored in the regular map reserve area 84c, and the configuration of the regular map reserve area 84c is the same as in the first embodiment.

When a win occurs in the first operating port 33, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special chart reserve area 111 of the main RAM 84, as in the first embodiment described above. When a win occurs in the special winning device 151, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second special chart reserve area 112 of the main RAM 84, as in the first embodiment described above when a win occurs in the second operating port 34.

The execution area 192 for the special chart includes an execution area 192a for the first special chart and an execution area 192b for the second special chart. The execution area 192a for the first special chart is an area in which the first reserved information for the target for the hit/miss judgment process and the allocation judgment process is stored when the variable display is started in the first special chart display unit 37a. The execution area 192b for the second special chart is an area in which the second reserved information for the target for the hit/miss judgment process and the allocation judgment process is stored when the variable display is started in the second special chart display unit 37b. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special chart display unit 37a is started, the first reserved information stored in the first area 111a of the first special chart reserve area 111 is shifted to the execution area 192a for the first special chart. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special chart display unit 37b is started, the second reserved information stored in the first area 112a of the second special chart reserve area 112 is shifted to the execution area 192b for the second special chart.

In this embodiment, at least a portion of the period of a game round on the first special chart display unit 37a and at least a portion of the period of a game round on the second special chart display unit 37b may overlap. In other words, a game round on the second special chart display unit 37b may be started even if a game round is being executed in the middle of being executed in the first special chart display unit 37a, and a game round on the first special chart display unit 37a may be started even if a game round is being executed in the middle of being executed in the second special chart display unit 37b.

When the winning/losing determination process is performed on the first reserved information, as in the first embodiment, if it is in low probability mode, the first winning/losing table 121 for low probability is referenced, and if it is in high probability mode, the winning/losing table 123 for high probability is referenced. Also, when the winning/losing determination process is performed on the second reserved information, as in the first embodiment, if it is in low probability mode, the second winning/losing table 122 for low probability is referenced, and if it is in high probability mode, the winning/losing table 123 for high probability is referenced. Also, if a jackpot result is selected in the winning/losing determination process on the first reserved information, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot allocation table 125 for the first special chart is referenced, and if a time-saving result is selected in the winning/losing determination process on the first reserved information, the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special chart is referenced, as in the first embodiment. In addition, if a jackpot result is selected in the hit/miss judgment process for the second reserved information, the jackpot allocation judgment process is executed by referencing the jackpot allocation table 126 for the second special chart, as in the first embodiment above, and if a time-saving result is selected in the hit/miss judgment process for the second reserved information, the time-saving allocation judgment process is executed by referencing the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special chart, as in the first embodiment above.

In this embodiment, the special picture special power control process is set to a first special picture special power control process corresponding to the first reserved information and a second special picture special power control process corresponding to the second reserved information. These processes are described below.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern special power control process executed by the main MPU 82, and Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the second special pattern special power control process executed by the main MPU 82. Note that since the first special pattern special power control process and the second special pattern special power control process have similar processing configurations, they will be explained separately for each corresponding processing configuration.

In the first special picture special electric control process (FIG. 63), the first reserved information acquisition process is first executed (step S3801). In the second special picture special electric control process (FIG. 64), the second reserved information acquisition process is first executed (step S3901).

In the process of acquiring the first reserved information, if a winning has occurred in the first operating port 33 and the number of first reserved information stored in the first special pattern reserved area 111 is less than the upper limit number of stored information, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as the first reserved information in the area with the earlier consumption order among the areas in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d of the first special pattern reserved area 111 where the first reserved information is not stored. When the first reserved information is acquired, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the first special pattern reserved display section 37c are updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of first reserved information. In addition, a first reserved command indicating that the first reserved information has increased is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. The sound/light side MPU 93 sends a command corresponding to the received first reserved command to the display side MPU 103, thereby changing the display of the number of first reserved information in the first reserved display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the reserved number.

In the process of acquiring the second reserved information, if a prize has been won in the special winning device 151 and the number of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit number of stored pieces, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as second reserved information in the area with the earlier consumption order among the areas in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d of the second special chart reserved area 112 where the second reserved information is not stored. When the second reserved information is acquired, data setting is performed so that the display content of the second special chart reserved display section 37d is updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of second reserved information. In addition, a second reserved command indicating that the second reserved information has increased is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. The sound/light side MPU 93 sends a command corresponding to the received second reserved command to the display side MPU 103, thereby changing the display of the number of second reserved information in the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the reserved number.

In the first special picture special power control process (FIG. 63) and the second special picture special power control process (FIG. 64), after executing the pending information acquisition process (step S3801 or step S3901), the special picture special power address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read (step S3802, step S3902). In the special picture special power address table, the start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the first special picture special power counter provided in the main RAM 84 and the second special picture special power counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set. The first special picture special power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first special picture special power control process (FIG. 63) by the main MPU 82. The second special picture special power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the second special picture special power control process (FIG. 64) by the main MPU 82. The value of each special diagram special electric counter corresponds to a start address, and when the value of each special diagram special electric counter is "0", a special diagram change start process (step S3805, step S3905) is executed, when the value of each special diagram special electric counter is "1", a special diagram change in progress process (step S3806, step S3906) is executed, when the value of each special diagram special electric counter is "2", a special diagram confirmation process (step S3807, step S3907) is executed, and when the value of each special diagram special electric counter is If the value is "3", special call start processing (steps S3808, S3908) is executed, if the value of each special call counter is "4", special call open processing (steps S3809, S3909) is executed, if the value of each special call counter is "5", special call closed processing (steps S3810, S3910) is executed, and if the value of each special call counter is "6", special call end processing (steps S3811, S3911) is executed.

In the first special chart special power control process (Fig. 63) and the second special chart special power control process (Fig. 64), after reading out the special chart special power address table (steps S3802, S3902), a start address corresponding to the information of the corresponding special chart special power counter is obtained from the special chart special power address table (steps S3803, S3903), and a jump is made to the process indicated by the obtained start address (steps S3804, S3904). The special chart change start process (steps S3805, S3905), special chart change in progress process (steps S3806, S3906), and special chart confirmation in progress process (steps S3807, S3907) are described below. In addition, the special line start process (steps S3808, S3908), the special line open process (steps S3809, S3909), and the special line closed process (steps S3810, S3910) are the same as steps S609 to S611 in the first embodiment. In addition, the special line end process (steps S3811, S3911) executes the same process as the special line end process (FIG. 23) in the first embodiment, except that the high probability state counter 133 is not provided in the main RAM 84, and when the open/close execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result ends, the high probability state, which is the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, is continued until the next game round resulting in a jackpot occurs.

<Special chart change start processing>
First, the special chart change start processing in steps S3805 and S3905 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a process for a jackpot state is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) (step S4001). As already explained, in this embodiment, even if a game round is being executed on one of the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b, a game round may be executed on the other side. In this case, step S4001 is executed, and if a process for a jackpot state is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64), the process from step S4002 onwards is not executed and the start of a new game round is restricted. As a result, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode is being executed in response to a game round on one of the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b, a new game round on the other side is restricted from being started. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the opening and closing execution mode. If this is the special chart change start process in the first special chart special electricity control process (Figure 63), step S4001 determines whether the value of the second special chart special electricity counter is 3 or more, and if it is 3 or more, the process from step S4002 onwards is not executed. If this is the special chart change start process in the second special chart special electricity control process (Figure 64), step S4001 determines whether the value of the first special chart special electricity counter is 3 or more, and if it is 3 or more, the process from step S4002 onwards is not executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4001, it is judged whether the corresponding reserved number is one or more (step S4002). If this is the special chart change start process in the first special chart special electric control process (Figure 63), it is judged whether one or more first reserved information is stored in the first special chart reserve area 111, and if this is the special chart change start process in the second special chart special electric control process (Figure 64), it is judged whether one or more second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserve area 112.

If the positive judgment is made in step S4002, the data setting process is executed (step S4003). In the data setting process, if this is the first special pattern special power control process (Fig. 63), the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special pattern reserve area 111 is moved to the execution area 192a for the first special pattern. Then, a process of shifting the data stored in the memory area of the first special pattern reserve area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d in order to the lower area side, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area 111b to the first area 111a, the third area 111c to the second area 111b, and the fourth area 111d to the third area 111c, and then the fourth area 111d is cleared to "0". In this case, the display content of the first special pattern reserve display section 37c in the special pattern unit 37 is changed to a content in which the first reserved information is reduced by one. In addition, in this data setting process, a command indicating that the number of first reserved information items in the first special chart reserved area 111 has been reduced by one is sent to the audio/visual side MPU 93. The audio/visual side MPU 93 sends a command corresponding to this command to the display side MPU 103, thereby changing the display of the number of first reserved information items in the first reserved display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of reserved information items.

In the data setting process, if this is the second special pattern special power control process (Fig. 64), the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special pattern reserve area 112 is moved to the execution area 192b for the second special pattern. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second special pattern reserve area 112. This data shift process is a process to shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d in order to the lower area side, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area 112b to the first area 112a, the third area 112c to the second area 112b, and the fourth area 112d to the third area 112c, and then the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". In this case, the display content of the second special pattern reserve display section 37d in the special pattern unit 37 is changed to a content in which the second reserved information is reduced by one. In addition, in this data setting process, a command indicating that the number of second reserved information items in the second special chart reserved area 112 has decreased by one is sent to the audio/visual side MPU 93. The audio/visual side MPU 93 sends a command corresponding to this command to the display side MPU 103, thereby changing the display of the number of second reserved information items in the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of reserved information items.

After the data setting process is executed, it is determined whether a game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special electric control process (FIG. 63, FIG. 64) and whether the reserved information that triggered the start of the game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step S4004). If a negative determination is made in step S4004, a win/loss determination process is executed (step S4005). In the win/loss determination process, if the win/loss selection mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the first win/loss table 121 at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83, if the win/loss selection mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the second win/loss table 122 at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83, and if the win/loss selection mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table 123 at the time of high probability is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the start target of the game round is the first reserved information or the second reserved information. After reading the win/lose table, the information for determining whether or not a win has occurred, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the win random number counter C1, is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 192a for the first special symbol or the execution area 192b for the second special symbol that is the target for starting the current game round, and it is determined which game result in the win/lose table the numerical information read corresponds to.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a jackpot result (step S4006: YES), a jackpot allocation determination process is executed (step S4007). In the jackpot allocation determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the jackpot allocation table 125 for the first special symbol is read from the main ROM 83, and if the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the jackpot allocation table 126 for the second special symbol is read. Then, from the reserved information stored in the execution area 192a for the first special symbol or the execution area 192b for the second special symbol that is the start target of the current game round, information for allocation determination, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, is read, and by referring to the allocation table, it is determined which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process for the jackpot, the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in the distribution determination process is set to "1" (step S4008). Then, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S4009). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 37a, 37b that is the start target of the current game round is identified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b is set differently for each type of jackpot result, and in step S4009, the information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in step S4008 is stored in the main RAM 84. The stopping patterns of the images may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, and multiple types of stopping patterns may be set for at least some jackpot results.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a time-saving result (step S4010: YES), a time-saving allocation determination process is executed (step S4011). In the time-saving allocation determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the time-saving allocation table 127 for the first special symbol is read from the main ROM 83, and if the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the time-saving allocation table 128 for the second special symbol is read. Then, from the reserved information stored in the execution area 192a for the first special symbol or the execution area 192b for the second special symbol that is the start target of the current game round, the information for allocation determination, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, is read, and by referring to the allocation table, it is determined which type of time-saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After the allocation judgment process for time reduction is executed, the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of time reduction result identified in the allocation judgment process is set to "1" (step S4012). Then, the stop result setting process for the time reduction result is executed (step S4013). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 37a, 37b that is the start target of the current game round is identified from the stop result table for time reduction result stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In this stop result table for time reduction result, the type of stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b is set differently for each type of time reduction result, and in step S4013, the information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of time reduction result identified in step S4012 is stored in the main RAM 84. The stopping patterns of the images may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each time-saving result, or multiple types of stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the time-saving results. The information on the pattern pattern selected in step S4013 is different from the information on the pattern pattern selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result (step S4010: NO), a stop result setting process for a loss result is executed (step S4014). Specifically, the information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b in the current game round is identified from a stop result table for loss results pre-stored in the main ROM 83, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern form selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern form selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern form selected in the case of a time-saving result, and is one type common to the first special pattern display unit 37a and the second special pattern display unit 37b.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S4004, that is, if a game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special power control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) and the reserved information that triggered the start of that game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the miss result already described is executed without executing the win/loss judgment process (step S4014). In other words, although this pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a game round can be started on the other side even if a game round is being executed on one of the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b, if the reserved information that triggered the start of an already executed game round corresponds to one of the jackpot results, the newly executed game round will be the game round corresponding to the miss result regardless of whether the reserved information that triggered the start of that game round corresponds to the jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent game rounds corresponding to jackpot results from being executed in duplicate. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the start of a new round of play is prevented if a round of play corresponding to a jackpot result has already been played, there is a risk that it will become clear that the currently played round of play is the round of play corresponding to the jackpot result at the point when a new round of play is not started even though pending information for the start of a round of play has been acquired; however, by configuring in such a way that a new round of play can be started even if a round of play corresponding to a jackpot result has already been played, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

When the process of step S4009, the process of step S4013, or the process of step S4014 is executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S4016), provided that the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 or more (step S4015: YES). Then, if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S4017: YES), the time-saving end flag corresponding to the current special chart special power control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) among the first time-saving end flag and the second time-saving end flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4018). The first time-saving end flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the time-saving state should be terminated and the normal game state should be transitioned to when the game round in the first special chart display unit 37a is completed. The second time-saving end flag is a flag that determines in the main MPU 82 that the time-saving state should end and the game should transition to the normal game state when the game round in the second special chart display section 37b ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4015, if a negative judgment is made in step S4017, or if the processing of step S4018 is executed, a process for specifying the variable display period is executed (step S4019). The process for specifying the variable display period will be described later. After that, a variable command and a type command corresponding to the game round to be started this time are sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S4020). The variable command includes information on the variable display period specified in step S4019 and information indicating which of the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b the game round to be started corresponds to. The type command includes information indicating which of the jackpot result, the time-saving result, and the miss result the game round to be started this time corresponds to, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result, information indicating which type of jackpot result it is, and if it corresponds to a time-saving result, information indicating which type of time-saving result it is.

In the low frequency support mode, when the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a change command and a type command indicating that the first pending information is the target for starting a game round, it starts the changing display of the patterns in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 and causes the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the changing display of the patterns, whereas even if it receives a change command and a type command indicating that the second pending information is the target for starting a game round, it does not cause the changing display of the patterns in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 and the corresponding performance in the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to be performed. Therefore, when a game is played in response to the first reserved information in the low-frequency support mode, the first special chart display unit 37a displays changing patterns and the pattern display is also performed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, whereas when a game is played in response to the second reserved information in the low-frequency support mode, the second special chart display unit 37b displays changing patterns, but the pattern display is not performed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41.

A small display area may be set on the outer edge of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and when a game round triggered by the second reserved information is being played in the low-frequency support mode, the display area may flash or change color. Also, when a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the second reserved information in the low-frequency support mode, an effect is performed on the pattern display device 41 to notify the player of the jackpot result at the end of the game round, and when a time-saving result occurs in a game round triggered by the second reserved information in the low-frequency support mode, an effect is performed on the pattern display device 41 to notify the player of the time-saving result at the end of the game round.

In the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, when the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a change command and a type command indicating that the second pending information is the target for starting a game round, it starts the changing display of the patterns in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 and causes the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the changing display of the patterns, whereas even if it receives a change command and a type command indicating that the first pending information is the target for starting a game round, it does not cause the changing display of the patterns in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 and the corresponding performance in the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to be performed. Therefore, when a game round triggered by the first reserved information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the first special chart display unit 37a displays the changing patterns, but the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 do not display the changing patterns, whereas when a game round triggered by the second reserved information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the second special chart display unit 37b displays the changing patterns, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 display the changing patterns.

In addition, a small display area may be set on the outer edge of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and when a game round triggered by the first reserved information is being played in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the display area may flash or change color. In addition, when a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the first reserved information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, an effect is performed on the pattern display device 41 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot result at the timing when the game round ends, and when a time-saving result occurs in a game round triggered by the first reserved information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, an effect is performed on the pattern display device 41 to notify the occurrence of the time-saving result at the timing when the game round ends.

Then, the display of the varying patterns is started in the display section that is the start target of the current game round, either the first special chart display section 37a or the second special chart display section 37b (step S4021). Also, if the current process corresponds to the first special chart special electricity control process (Figure 63), the value of the first special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special chart special electricity control process (Figure 64), the value of the second special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S4022).

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period executed in step S4019.

If both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1" (step S4101: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is determined whether the start target of the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4102). If the start target of the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4102: YES), the table group for the normal variable period is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4103). Then, a selection process for the variable display period is executed using the table group for the normal variable period (step S4104), and the information of the variable display period selected in the selection process is set in the first special chart side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S4105). The update of the numerical information set in the first special chart side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In a situation where the selection process for the variable display period in step S4104 is executed by referring to the table group for the normal variable period, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for the normal variable period, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode.

If a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result is read out by comparing the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time with the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for normal variable periods. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result are set, and the variable display period corresponding to any time-saving result is longer than the shortest period on the special chart side and shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result, and of these, the period corresponding to the obtained value of the variable type counter CS is selected as the variable display period for the current game round.

If no jackpot or time-saving result occurs in the current game round, and no miss reach display occurs, and the game round was started with three or more pieces of first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, the information for the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of game rounds triggered by first reserved information in the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the case where the current game round does not generate a jackpot result or a time-saving result, and furthermore does not generate a reach-to-miss display, and the first reserved information is the target of the game round and one or two pieces of first reserved information are stored in the first special chart reserved area 111, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the table corresponding to the complete miss result in the table group for the normal fluctuation period, and the information of the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete miss result is read out. There are multiple types of information of the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete miss result, and any of the fluctuation display periods corresponding to the complete miss result is longer than the shortest period on the special chart side and shorter than the fluctuation display period corresponding to the time-saving result and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete miss result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS among these is selected as the fluctuation display period for the current game round.

If the low frequency support mode is selected (step S4101: NO) and the start target for the current game round is the second pending information (step S4102: NO), the information on the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special chart side as the variable display period for the current game round is set in the second special chart side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S4106). The numerical information set in the second special chart side timer counter is updated by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 14).

As described above, in the low frequency support mode, if the first reserved information is the start of a game round, the variable display period for the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period, whereas if the second reserved information is the start of a game round, the longest period on the special chart side (specifically, 10 minutes) is selected as the variable display period for the game round regardless of the game result of that game round. The longest period on the special chart side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player plays the game by operating the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2.

If either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4101: YES), i.e., if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, it is determined whether the start target of the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4107). If the start target of the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4107: YES), the long-term information (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side is set as the variable display period of the current game round in the first special chart side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S4108).

If the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is selected (step S4101: YES) and the start target for the current game round is the second reserved information (step S4107: NO), a table group for short-term fluctuations is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4109). Then, a selection process for the fluctuation display period is executed using the table group for short-term fluctuations (step S4110), and the information on the fluctuation display period selected in the selection process is set in the second special chart timer counter in the main RAM 84 (step S4111).

In a situation where the process of selecting the variable display period in step S4110 is executed with reference to the table group for short-term fluctuations, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for short-term fluctuations, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode.

If no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, and if the game round was started with two or more pieces of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of game rounds triggered by second reserved information in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, and if the game round was started with two or more pieces of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

On the other hand, if a jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, and the game round started with one piece of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, information on the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to ensure that the second reserved information is acquired in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round started with one piece of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, information on the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

As described above, in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, if the second reserved information is the start of a game round, the display period for the variation of the game round is selected by referring to the table group for short-term variation, whereas if the first reserved information is the start of a game round, the long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side is selected as the display period for the variation of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. The long period on the special chart side is longer than the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side selected in a game round with a miss result in which no reach display is generated due to the second reserved information. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the player plays the game by operating the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

<Special chart change processing>
Next, the special chart changing process executed in step S3806 of the first special chart special voltage control process (FIG. 63) and in step S3906 of the second special chart special voltage control process (FIG. 64) will be described.

If the variable display period for the current game round on the controlled special chart display unit 37a, 37b has not elapsed and it is time to update the display content of the controlled special chart display unit 37a, 37b, data is set to update the display content of the controlled special chart display unit 37a, 37b. This updates the display content of the pattern on the controlled special chart display unit 37a, 37b to the display content of the next order.

The mode at the start of the display of the changing patterns in the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the update mode of the display of the changing patterns are performed in a fixed manner regardless of the results of the win/lose judgment process and the distribution judgment process, and are also performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the presentation for the game round in the pattern display device 41. For example, the display content of the patterns goes around once by the occurrence of a predetermined number of update timings, and the display pattern with a fixed display order is repeated, and when the changing display period has elapsed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the situation in which the display order of the display pattern is being displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, if the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. The final stop command includes information corresponding to either the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, whichever has had the variable display period elapsed. Then, information on the stop mode of the images in the special chart display units 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 at the start of the game round that is currently being terminated is read out. As a result, the variable display of the images is stopped with the image corresponding to the game result of the current game round being displayed in the special chart display units 37a and 37b to be controlled.

Then, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter corresponding to the special chart display unit 37a, 37b to be controlled. This starts the measurement of the final stop period. Then, if the current process corresponds to the first special chart special electricity control process (Figure 63), the value of the first special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special chart special electricity control process (Figure 64), the value of the second special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1.

<Special drawing confirmation processing>
Next, the special chart determination processing executed in step S3807 of the first special chart special voltage control processing (FIG. 63) and in step S3907 of the second special chart special voltage control processing (FIG. 64) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67.

If the final stop period has elapsed (step S4201: YES) and the game result of the current game is a jackpot result (step S4202: YES), it is determined whether the value of the special chart special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special electric control process (Figs. 63 and 64) is "0" or not, and whether the game is being executed on the special chart display unit 37a, 37b on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special electric control process (Figs. 63 and 64) is determined (step S4203). If the value of the special chart special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special electric control process (Figs. 63 and 64) is not "0" (step S4203: NO), the display of the changing patterns on the special chart display unit 37a, 37b on the side that does not correspond to the current special chart special electric control process (Figs. 63 and 64) is terminated with the result of the miss stopped (step S4204). Then, the special pattern special power counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special pattern special power control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4205). As a result, in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being executed on both the first special pattern display unit 37a and the second special pattern display unit 37b, if the variable display of one of the patterns stops, resulting in a jackpot result and an open/close execution mode occurs, the variable display of the other pattern is forcibly terminated with the missing result stopped and displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4203 or if the processing of step S4205 is executed, information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter corresponding to the current special picture special electric control processing (FIGS. 63 and 64) (step S4206), and an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S4207). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the performance corresponding to the opening period to be performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

Then, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S4208). In other words, when the game number corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening and closing execution mode starts, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling number of times is set in the ceiling counter 131 not when the opening and closing execution mode starts but during the opening and closing execution mode or when the opening and closing execution mode ends, if a fraudulent act is performed in which the supply of operating power is stopped after the opening and closing execution mode starts and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed, as already explained, in the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress is cleared, while the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be resumed in a situation where the remaining ceiling number of times is small while the profit of the opening and closing execution mode until the supply of the operating power is stopped is obtained, and the game will be resumed in a situation where the remaining ceiling number of times is small. In response to this, when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set to a fixed ceiling count of 500, making it possible to neutralize fraudulent behavior such as the one described above.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special picture special electricity control process (Figure 63), the value of the first special picture special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special picture special electricity control process (Figure 64), the value of the second special picture special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S4209).

If the result of the current game is not a jackpot (step S4202: NO), a process for determining whether the time-saving state has ended is executed in step S4210, a process for setting the time-saving result is executed in step S4211, and a process for decrementing the ceiling counter 131 is executed in step S4212. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special chart special electricity control process (FIG. 63), the first special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0", and if the current process corresponds to the second special chart special electricity control process (FIG. 64), the second special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S4213).

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the end of the time-saving state, which is executed in step S4210 of the special chart determination process (Figure 67).

First, it is determined whether or not the time-saving end flag corresponding to the current special chart special electricity control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4301). That is, if the current process corresponds to the first special chart special electricity control process (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not the first time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and if the current process corresponds to the second special chart special electricity control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether or not the second time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S4301, the time-saving end flag corresponding to the current special chart special power control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4302). After that, both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S4303). This ends the time-saving state and the normal game state is resumed.

In a configuration in which a game round can be started in the second special chart display section 37b even while a game round is being executed in the first special chart display section 37a, and a game round can be started in the first special chart display section 37a even while a game round is being executed in the second special chart display section 37b, the time-saving state ends when the end-corresponding game round that was started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations was one ends. In this case, even if a game round that was started after the end-corresponding game round started ends before the end-corresponding game round, the time-saving state continues and ends when the end-corresponding game round ends. In contrast, in the time-saving state (i.e., the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode), if the game round is executed based on the second reserved information, the table group for short-term fluctuation is referenced to select the change display period of the game round, whereas in the game round executed based on the first reserved information, the long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side is uniquely selected. In this way, in the time-saving state, the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game balls flow down the right area PA3, so that the game rounds with the second reserved information as the execution target are repeatedly executed, and when the remaining number of times that the time-saving state continues is one, the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game balls flow down the left area PA2 so that the first reserved information becomes the execution target of the game rounds, so that the end-corresponding game round in the time-saving state becomes the game round with the first reserved information as the execution target. And, since the end-corresponding game round is started with the first reserved information as the execution target, the end-corresponding game round is executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side, by operating the launch operation device 28 so that the game balls flow down the right area PA3 while the end-corresponding game round is being executed, the game rounds with the second reserved information as the execution target are repeatedly executed, so that the number of times that the time-saving state continues can be substantially increased.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S4211 of the special chart determination process (Figure 67).

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4402). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S4402: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps S4403 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game executed in a situation in which the high probability mode is active, the time-saving result is invalidated without the second high-frequency support mode being set as a result of the time-saving result.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S4402: NO), it is determined whether or not the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4403). In other words, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. If the support mode is not the first high frequency support mode (step S4403: NO), the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4404), and if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode (step S4403: YES), the processing of step S4404 is not executed. As a result, if the time-saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, if the time-saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and if the time-saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are selected.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4403 or if the processing of step S4404 is executed, it is judged whether the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result (step S4405). If the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result (step S4405: YES), it is judged whether the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100", which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation number (step S4406). If the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time-saving continuation number (step S4406: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100", which corresponds to the first time-saving continuation number (step S4407).

Then, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S4408). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started or that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S4408 is executed after the processing of step S4407 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. In this case, the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 displays the first time-saving occurrence pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") in a stopped state. Then, after these stopped results are displayed in a stopped state, the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time-saving state is occurring and an image indicating the first time-saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and while the reduced area displays a changing pattern corresponding to a new game round, the area secured by the reduction continues to display an image indicating that a time-saving state will occur and an image indicating the first number of times the time-saving state will continue. The display of the image ends when one game round is completed, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S4408 is executed after the processing of step S4407 is executed in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the first time-saving continuation number has been reset. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the first time-saving continuation number has been reset. In this case, in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41, the combination of patterns corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving occurrence pattern ("1, 2, 3"), the combination of the second time-saving occurrence pattern ("3, 4, 1"), and the combination of non-reach-miss patterns, which is a combination of patterns other than the combination of miss-reach patterns, are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that the time-saving continuation number in the time-saving state has actually been reset and an image indicating the first time-saving continuation number are displayed. The image is displayed when a game round ends, so a new game round can start immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and while the reduced area displays a varying pattern corresponding to a new game round, the area secured by the reduction continues to display an image indicating that the number of times the time-saving continues in the time-saving state has been reset and an image indicating the reset first number of times the time-saving continues is reset. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size when the display of the image ends.

If the current time-saving result is the second time-saving result (step S4405: NO), regardless of the current value of the time-saving state counter 134, the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "150" corresponding to the second time-saving continuation count (step S4409). After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S4410). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started or that the second time-saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S4410 is executed after the processing of step S4409 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. In this case, the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 displays the combination of the second time-saving occurrence patterns ("3, 4, 1") in a stopped state. Then, after these stopped results are displayed in a stopped state, the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time-saving state is occurring and an image indicating the second time-saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and while the pattern corresponding to the new game round is displayed in the reduced area, the image indicating that the time-saving state will occur and the image indicating the second number of times the time-saving state will continue are displayed in the area secured by the reduction. The display of the image ends when one game round is completed, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S4410 is executed after the processing of step S4409 is executed in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the second time-saving continuation number has been reset. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the second time-saving continuation number has been reset. In this case, in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41, the combination of patterns corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving occurrence pattern ("1, 2, 3"), the combination of the second time-saving occurrence pattern ("3, 4, 1"), and the combination of non-reach-miss patterns, which is a combination of patterns other than the combination of miss-reach patterns, are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that the time-saving continuation number in the time-saving state has actually been reset and an image indicating the second time-saving continuation number are displayed. The image is displayed when a game round ends, so a new game round can start immediately. In this case, the area on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced, and while the reduced area displays a varying pattern corresponding to a new game round, the area secured by the reduction continues to display an image indicating that the number of times the time-saving continues in the time-saving state has been reset and an image indicating the reset second number of times the time-saving continues is reset. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size when the display of the image ends.

When the process of step S4408 or the process of step S4410 is executed, the first time-saving end flag and the second time-saving end flag provided in the main RAM 84 are each cleared to "0" (step S4411). As a result, if a time-saving result occurs in a game round that targets the second reserved information while a game round that corresponds to an end in the time-saving state is being executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side with the first reserved information as the execution target, the remaining number of times that the time-saving state will continue is extended. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of executing a game round that corresponds to an end in the time-saving state with the first reserved information as the execution target.

With the above configuration, when a time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, the game transitions to a time-saving state with the number of times the time-saving continues that corresponds to the type of time-saving result. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a transition to the time-saving state occurs without going through the open/close execution mode, based on the result of the success/failure determination process in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

When the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 reset to 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. Also, when the second time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 set to 150 times, which is the second time-saving continuation number. As a result, when the time-saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, a situation occurs in which the remaining continuation number of the time-saving state becomes greater than before while continuing the first high-frequency support mode, in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be in an open state than in the second high-frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time-saving result occurring in the time-saving state.

If the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is equal to or greater than 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, when the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without any new settings being made regarding the time-saving state due to the occurrence of this first time-saving result. Also, if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, when the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 set to 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. Also, if the second time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the value of the time-saving state counter 134 set to 150 times, which is the second time-saving continuation number. As a result, when a time-saving result occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the number of remaining continuations of the time-saving state increases while continuing the second high-frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time-saving result occurring in the time-saving state.

When a time-saving result occurs during a time-saving state, the remaining number of times the current time-saving state will continue and the number of times the time-saving result can be set based on the newly generated time-saving result, whichever is greater, will be the remaining number of times the time-saving state will continue. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of a time-saving result occurring during a time-saving state.

Figure 70 is a flow chart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S4213 of the special chart determination process (Figure 67).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4501). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S4501: YES), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S4502 and onwards. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted during a game played in high probability mode, and furthermore, since the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, no ceiling time reduction occurs.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes from step S4503 onwards. The process of setting information to the ceiling counter 131 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, only in step S114 when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, in step S122 when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and in step S4208 when the open/close execution mode is started, and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes are executed. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the process from step S4503 onwards. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, and if the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is entered by playing the number of times of the time reduction continuation without a jackpot result being played in the time reduction state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the playing times without a jackpot result are played repeatedly thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S4503), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4504). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4504: YES), regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" or not, the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S4505). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are entered. The low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and the first high frequency support mode ends when 100 play times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, have been consumed. Therefore, the ceiling time-saving that occurs when 500 play times, which is the fixed ceiling number, have been consumed in the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, does not occur in the first high frequency support mode.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the main RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100", which corresponds to the first number of times the time-saving state continues (step S4506). If the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first number of times the time-saving state continues (step S4506: NO), the time-saving state counter 134 is set to "100", which corresponds to the first number of times the time-saving state continues (step S4507).

Then, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S4508). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state has started or that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S4508 is executed after the processing of step S4507 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. Since the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 display stop displays a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of patterns other than the first time-saving occurrence pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") and the second time-saving occurrence pattern combination ("3, 4, 1"), which is a combination of patterns that is a loss pattern (including a loss reach pattern combination). Then, after the stop result is displayed and the final display for the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and an image indicating the first number of times the time-saving will continue are displayed. The timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, so a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 is reduced, and while a variable display of the patterns corresponding to the new game round is performed in the reduced area, the image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and the image indicating the first number of times the time-saving will continue are continued to be displayed in the area secured by the reduction. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S4508 is executed after the processing of step S4507 is executed in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the state designation command includes information indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset. Since the reset of the first time-saving continuation count triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 display stop displays a combination of patterns that corresponds to a jackpot result, a combination of patterns that is a loss pattern (including a loss reach pattern combination) other than the combination of patterns that causes the first time-saving occurrence ("1, 2, 3") and the combination of patterns that causes the second time-saving occurrence ("3, 4, 1"). Then, after the stop result is displayed and the final display for the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and an image indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset are displayed. The timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, so a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 is reduced, and while a variable display of the patterns corresponding to the new game round is performed in the reduced area, the image indicating that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur and the image indicating that the first time-saving continuation count has been reset are continued to be displayed in the area secured by the reduction. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When a positive judgment is made in step S4506 or when the processing of step S4508 is executed, the first time-saving end flag and the second time-saving end flag provided in the main RAM 84 are each cleared to "0" (step S4509). As a result, if a time-saving result occurs in a game round that targets the second reserved information while a game round that targets the end of the time-saving state is being executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side with the first reserved information as the execution target, the remaining number of times that the time-saving state will continue is extended. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of executing a game round that targets the end of the time-saving state with the first reserved information as the execution target.

Here, in the special chart determination process (Fig. 67), the setting process for the time-saving result (Fig. 69) is executed, followed by the subtraction process (Fig. 70) of the ceiling counter 131, and in the subtraction process (Fig. 70) of the ceiling counter 131, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0", if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the processes of steps S4507 and S4508 are not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the first time-saving continuation count from being reset due to the ceiling time-saving in a game that has resulted in the first or second time-saving result. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving continuation count from being reset due to the time-saving result and the time-saving continuation count from being reset due to the ceiling time-saving from being executed in a duplicated manner. In particular, if the second time-saving continuation count is reset in response to the second time-saving result, and then the first time-saving continuation count is reset in response to the ceiling time-saving result, the number of time-saving continuations will be reduced, but the above configuration makes it possible to prevent this inconvenience from occurring.

With the above configuration, when the ceiling time-saving occurs in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, the game will transition to a time-saving state with the first number of times of time-saving continuation. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the game transitions to the time-saving state without going through the opening and closing execution mode based on the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

When the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is equal to or greater than 100 times, which is the first number of times of time reduction continuation, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without any new settings being made regarding the time reduction state due to the occurrence of this ceiling time reduction. Also, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first number of times of time reduction continuation, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode continue with the value of the time reduction state counter 134 set to 100 times, which is the first number of times of time reduction continuation. In other words, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the greater of the remaining number of times of continuation of the current time reduction state and the number of times of continuation of the time reduction that can be set by the newly occurring ceiling time reduction becomes the remaining number of times of continuation in the subsequent time reduction state. As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of times of continuation of the time reduction state is greater than before, so it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction in the time reduction state.

Next, the left-hit notification process executed by the sound/light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 71. The left-hit notification process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short interval (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

If the mode is not the high probability mode (step S4601: NO) but the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) (step S4602: YES), it is determined whether the number of times that the current high frequency support mode has been played since it was started is the notification reference number (step S4603). The notification reference number is when the remaining number of times that the high frequency support mode (i.e., the time-saving state) continues is 5 times. This 5 times is set as the number of times obtained by adding 1 to the maximum number of reserved items of the second reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 112.

In step S4603, processing for a left hit notification is executed (step S4604). In the processing for a left hit notification, processing is executed so that a left hit notification image is displayed on the pattern display device 41. As the left hit notification image, an image is displayed that enables the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched by aiming at the left side area PA2 so that the first pending information will be the execution target for the game round five turns from the current time. This makes it possible to encourage the player to perform a launch operation so that the game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state will be executed with the first pending information as the execution target.

Next, the manner in which a game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state is executed with the first reserved information as the execution target will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 72. FIG. 72(a) shows the period in the time-saving state, FIG. 72(b) shows the period during which a game round with the first reserved information as the execution target is being executed, FIG. 72(c) shows the period during which a game round with the second reserved information as the execution target is being executed, FIG. 72(d) shows the period during which the first time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", FIG. 72(e) shows the timing of the time-saving result, and FIG. 72(f) shows the timing of the ceiling time-saving occurrence.

First, we will explain the case where a game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target, and neither the time-saving result nor the ceiling time-saving occurs during the game round corresponding to the end.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), at the timing of t1 in the time-saving state, a game round with the first reserved information as the execution target is started as shown in FIG. 72(b). The variable display period of the game round is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special chart side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of times of continuation in the time-saving state is 1, it is a game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, and at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the first time-saving end flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". After that, as shown in FIG. 72(c), a game round with the second reserved information as the execution target is executed at each of a plurality of timings including timings t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6, which are situations in which a game round corresponding to the end is executed with the first reserved information as the execution target is executed as shown in FIG. 72(b). In this case, since the time-saving state is set at each of the multiple timings including t2 to t6 as shown in FIG. 72(a), the variable display period of the game round that starts at each of the multiple timings including t2 to t6 is determined by referring to the table group for short-term variation. Since each of these game rounds starts in a situation where two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 and neither a jackpot result nor a miss reach display occurs, the variable display period of the game round is the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds).

After that, at timing t7, the game corresponding to the end of the game that is to be executed based on the first reserved information ends, as shown in FIG. 72(b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the first time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", so the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, and the time-saving state ends, as shown in FIG. 72(a).

As described above, the game turn that is the target of the first reserved information is executed as the end-corresponding game turn in the time-saving state, and in this end-corresponding game turn, the variable display period of the game turn is a long period on the special chart side (specifically, 2 minutes). Then, in this end-corresponding game turn, about 30 game turns have been triggered by the second reserved information, which is the shortest variable display period. As a result, in this time-saving state, about 30 game turns have been executed more than the set number of continuations of the first time-saving continuation count and the second time-saving continuation count.

Next, we will explain the case where a game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target and a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the game round corresponding to the end.

At the timing of t8 in the time-saving state as shown in FIG. 72(a), a game round is started in which the first reserved information is to be executed as shown in FIG. 72(b). The variable display period of that game round is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special chart side. Since that game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of times the time-saving state continues is 1, it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time-saving state, and at the timing of t8, the first time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 72(d).

After that, at each of a plurality of timings including t9, t10, t11, t13, and t14, in which a game corresponding to the end is being executed with the first reserved information as the execution target as shown in Fig. 72(b), a game is executed with the second reserved information as the execution target as shown in Fig. 72(c). In this case, since the time-saving state is in effect as shown in Fig. 72(a) at each of a plurality of timings including t9, t10, t11, t13, and t14, the game display period for the game starts at each of a plurality of timings including t9, t10, t11, t13, and t14 is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation. Each of these game rounds begins with two or more pieces of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, and neither a jackpot result nor a miss reach display occurs, so the variable display period for the game round is the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Of the multiple game times including t9, t10, t11, t13, and t14, the game time at t11 is determined by the result of the win/lose determination process as shown in FIG. 72(e). Therefore, at the end of the game time at t12, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the first time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0," and if the result is the first time-saving result, the first time-saving continuation count is reset in the time-saving state counter 134, and if the result is the second time-saving result, the second time-saving continuation count is reset in the time-saving state counter 134. Thus, the time-saving state is extended.

After that, at the timing of t14, the game round corresponding to the end for which the first reserved information is to be executed ends, as shown in FIG. 72(b). However, since the first time-saving end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t12 and the time-saving state is extended, the time-saving state does not end at the timing of t14.

As described above, the game turn for which the first reserved information is to be executed is executed as the game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, and in that game turn corresponding to the end, the variable display period of the game turn becomes a long period on the special chart side (specifically, 2 minutes). Then, the time-saving state is extended by generating a time-saving result in the game turn for which the second reserved information executed in that game turn corresponding to the end is executed. By executing the game turn for which the first reserved information is to be executed as the game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, it becomes possible to grant the benefit of an extension of the time-saving state.

Next, we will explain the case where a game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target and a ceiling time-saving occurs in the middle of the game round corresponding to the end.

At timing t15 in the time-saving state as shown in FIG. 72(a), a game round is started in which the first reserved information is the target for execution as shown in FIG. 72(b). The variable display period for that game round is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special chart side. Since that game round was started in a situation where the remaining number of times the time-saving state continues is 1, it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time-saving state, and at timing t15, the first time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 72(d).

After that, at each of a plurality of timings including t16, t17, t18, t19, and t21, in which a game corresponding to the end is being executed with the first reserved information as the execution target as shown in Fig. 72(b), a game is executed with the second reserved information as the execution target as shown in Fig. 72(c). In this case, since the time-saving state is in effect as shown in Fig. 72(a) at each of a plurality of timings including t16, t17, t18, t19, and t21, the game display period for the game starts at each of a plurality of timings including t16, t17, t18, t19, and t21 is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation. Each of these game rounds starts with two or more pieces of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, and neither a jackpot result nor a miss reach display occurs, so the variable display period for the game round is the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds).

At the timing of t20, which is the timing at which the game round at timing t19 ends among the multiple game rounds at each of the timings including timing t16, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t21, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", and the ceiling time reduction occurs as shown in FIG. 72(f). At the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the first time reduction end flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the first time reduction continuation count is reset in the time reduction state counter 134. Thus, the time reduction state is extended.

After that, at the timing of t21, the game round corresponding to the end for which the first reserved information is to be executed ends, as shown in FIG. 72(b). However, since the first time-saving end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t20 and the time-saving state is extended, the time-saving state does not end at the timing of t21.

As described above, the game turn for which the first reserved information is to be executed is executed as the game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, and in that game turn corresponding to the end, the variable display period of the game turn becomes a long period on the special chart side (specifically, 2 minutes). Then, the time-saving state is extended by the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving triggered by the game turn for which the second reserved information is to be executed, which is executed in that game turn corresponding to the end. By executing the game turn for which the first reserved information is to be executed as the game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, it becomes possible to provide the benefit of an extension of the time-saving state.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the process of specifying the variable display period executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the tenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the tenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

When both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the processing of steps S4702 to S4706 is executed. These steps S4702 to S4706 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the process of specifying the variable display period in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment (FIG. 66). In other words, in the low frequency support mode, if the first reserved information is the start target of a game round, the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period, whereas if the second reserved information is the start target of a game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special chart side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. And the longest period on the special chart side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 to make the game ball flow down the left area PA2.

If either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), i.e., if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, it is determined whether the start target of the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4707). If the start target of the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4707: YES), it is determined whether or not the first time-saving end flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4708). In other words, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the current first reserved information is to be executed is a game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state. If the first time-saving end flag is set to "1" (step S4708: YES), the information on the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) as the variable display period for this game round is set in the first special chart side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S4709); if the first time-saving end flag is not set to "1" (step S4708: NO), the information on the longest period on the special chart side (specifically, 2 minutes) as the variable display period for this game round is set in the first special chart side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S4710).

If the first or second high frequency support mode is selected (step S4701: YES) and the start target for the current game round is the second reserved information (step S4707: NO), steps S4711 to S4713 are executed. These steps S4711 to S4713 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the process of determining the variable display period in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 66).

As described above, when a game turn triggered by the first reserved information is executed as a game turn other than a game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side is selected as the variable display period of the game turn triggered by the first reserved information. This makes it possible to reduce the consumption efficiency of the game turn triggered by the first reserved information in the time-saving state. On the other hand, when a game turn triggered by the first reserved information is started as a game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is selected as the variable display period of the game turn triggered by the first reserved information. This shortest period on the special chart side is the period selected as the variable display period of the game turn triggered by the second reserved information in the time-saving state and in which no reach display occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the game turn triggered by the second reserved information from being repeatedly executed in a situation in which the game turn corresponding to the end is being executed when the game turn triggered by the first reserved information becomes a game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state.

In addition, when the game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state becomes the game round triggered by the first reserved information, if a jackpot result occurs in that game round, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side may be selected as the duration of that game round. For example, a medium period on the special chart side (specifically, 10 seconds) may be selected, or a long period on the special chart side (specifically, 2 minutes) may be selected. In addition, the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be determined by lottery using the jackpot table included in the short-term variable table group read out in step S4711 and the value of the variable type counter CS at that time. This makes it possible to secure a certain amount of time until the jackpot result occurs, even if the game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state becomes the game round triggered by the first reserved information.

Twelfth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the process of specifying the variable display period executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the tenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the tenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

When both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1" (step S4801: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the processing of steps S4802 to S4806 is executed. These steps S4802 to S4806 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the process of specifying the variable display period in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment (FIG. 66). In other words, in the low frequency support mode, if the first reserved information is the start target of a game round, the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period, whereas if the second reserved information is the start target of a game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special chart side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. And the longest period on the special chart side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 to make the game ball flow down the left area PA2.

If either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4801: YES), i.e., if the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, it is determined whether the start target for the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4807). If the start target for the current game round is the first reserved information (step S4807: YES), it is determined whether or not the first time-saving end flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4808). In other words, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the current first reserved information is to be executed is a game round corresponding to the end in the time-saving state.

If the first time-saving end flag is set to "1" (step S4808: YES), the table group for the end timing is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4809). Then, the table group for the end timing is used to execute a selection process for the variable display period (step S4810), and the information on the variable display period selected in the selection process is set in the first special chart timer counter in the main RAM 84 (step S4811).

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period in step S4810 is performed by referring to the end timing table group, if a jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special pattern side is read out. In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 10th embodiment, in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, when the sound and light side MPU 93 receives a variable command and a type command indicating that the second reserved information is the start target of the game round, it starts the variable display of the patterns in the pattern column Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 and causes the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the variable display of the patterns, while it does not cause the variable display of the patterns in the pattern column Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 and the corresponding performance in the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform, even if it receives a variable command and a type command indicating that the first reserved information is the start target of the game round. In addition, in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the first reserved information, an effect is performed on the pattern display device 41 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot result at the timing when the game round ends, and in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, if a time-saving result occurs in a game round triggered by the first reserved information, an effect is performed on the pattern display device 41 to notify the occurrence of the time-saving result at the timing when the game round ends. If neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared with the table corresponding to the end timing in the table group for end timing, thereby reading out information on the variable display period corresponding to the end. As information on the variable display period corresponding to the end, 3 seconds, which is the shortest period on the special chart side, 10 seconds, which is the medium period on the special chart side, and 2 minutes, which is the longest period on the special chart side, are set. In the table corresponding to the end timing, the shortest period on the special chart side is selected with a probability of 1/3, the medium period on the special chart side is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the long period on the special chart side is selected with a probability of 1/3.

If the first time-saving end flag is not set to "1" (step S4808: NO), the long-term information (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side as the variable display period for the current game round is set in the first special chart side timer counter in the main RAM 84 (step S4812).

If the first or second high frequency support mode is selected (step S4801: YES) and the start target for the current game round is the second reserved information (step S4807: NO), steps S4813 to S4815 are executed. These steps S4813 to S4815 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the process of determining the variable display period in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 66).

As described above, when a game turn triggered by the first reserved information is executed as a game turn other than a game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side is selected as the variable display period of the game turn triggered by the first reserved information. This makes it possible to reduce the consumption efficiency of the game turn triggered by the first reserved information in the time-saving state. On the other hand, when a game turn triggered by the first reserved information is started as a game turn corresponding to the end in the time-saving state, one of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side, the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special chart side, and the long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special chart side is selected by lottery as the variable display period of the game turn triggered by the first reserved information. When the shortest period on the special chart side is selected, the game time triggered by the second reserved information is not repeatedly executed in a situation where the game time corresponding to the end triggered by the first reserved information is being executed, when the medium period on the special chart side is selected, the game time triggered by the second reserved information is executed a small number of times in a situation where the game time corresponding to the end triggered by the first reserved information is being executed, and when the long period on the special chart side is selected, the game time triggered by the second reserved information is repeated many times in a situation where the game time corresponding to the end triggered by the first reserved information is being executed. As a result, when the game time corresponding to the end is executed in response to the first reserved information, the player will expect a longer variable display period to be selected, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Thirteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configurations different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 75 is a front view of the main control device 71 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 75, the main control device 71 is configured by housing a main control board 81 in a board box 71a. A main MPU 82 is mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 81, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 71a is formed transparent so that the main MPU 82 housed in the board box 71a can be seen from outside the board box 71a. The board box 71a is formed colorless and transparent, but may be formed colored and transparent as long as the main MPU 82 housed in the board box 71a can be seen from outside the board box 71a. The main control device 71 is mounted on the back of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 in the board box 71a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a, and also to visually observe the main MPU 82 through the opposing wall portion 71b.

The board box 71a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 71c in front and behind, and the plurality of case bodies 71c are provided with joints 71d for preventing separation of the case bodies 71c and for leaving a trace when the case bodies 71c are separated. The joints 71d are arranged in a row on one side of the board box 71a, which is substantially rectangular in shape. As a result, even if some of the joints 71d are used to prevent separation of the case bodies 71c and the case bodies 71c are separated by destroying the part of the joints 71d, it is possible to prevent separation of the case bodies 71c again by connecting another joint 71d thereafter. In addition, since the joints 71d are destroyed when the case bodies 71c are separated and a trace is left, it is possible to visually check the joints 71d to know whether the separation of the case bodies 71c is being performed illegally. In addition, a seal 71e is attached to the side of the board box 71a opposite to the side on which the joints 71d are arranged, so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 71c. When the seal 71e is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body 71c. This makes it possible to leave a trace when the seal 71e is peeled off when the case body 71c is separated.

In the main control device 71 configured as above, the main control board 81 is provided with a setting key insertion section 195, a reset button 196, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a setting display device 205, and an abnormality display device 206. Note that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" and can be any setting.

The setting key insertion section 195, reset button 196, first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, setting display device 205, and abnormality display device 206 are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. As already explained, the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the opposing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a, but the setting key insertion section 195 and reset button 196 are not covered by the opposing wall portion 71b. In other words, the areas of the opposing wall portion 71b that face the setting key insertion section 195 and reset button 196 are separate openings. This makes it possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion section 195 and press the reset button 196 without having to open the board box 71a.

By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion section 195 and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion section 195 is turned ON. In this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196 (i.e., by starting the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71). In this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed by one step in ascending order in the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" each time the reset button 196 is pressed once. Note that if the reset button 196 is operated in the "Setting 6" state, it is updated to "Setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion section 195 from the ON position in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion section 195 is turned OFF. When the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned OFF, the state in which the setting value can be changed ends, and the game becomes possible to play with the setting value at that time. Note that the setting value cannot be changed even if the reset button 196 is operated after the state in which the setting value can be changed ends.

The ON operation of the setting key insertion section 195 is only valid when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71 starts). Therefore, even if the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 195a is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71 is completed, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (i.e., the higher the setting value), the higher the degree of advantage. There are two winning/losing lottery modes that determine the probability of winning a jackpot result: a low probability mode with a relatively low probability of winning and a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of winning, and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot result in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

When the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned ON and the reset button 196 is not pressed, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71 is started), the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 can be checked. When the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned OFF, the state in which the setting values can be checked ends.

By pressing the reset button 196 without turning on the setting key insertion section 195 and starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 (i.e., starting the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71), the data in a specified area in the main RAM 84 is cleared. The ON operation of the reset button 196 is only valid when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71 starts). Therefore, even if the reset button 196 is pressed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71 has finished, the data in the main RAM 84 cannot be cleared.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 and the setting display device 205 are all segment displays in which eight LED display segments are arranged, but are not limited to this and may be liquid crystal displays or organic EL displays. The first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 and the setting display device 205 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces, and are covered by the opposing wall 71b of the board box 71a. In this case, since the board box 71a is formed transparent, it is possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 and the setting display device 205 housed within the board box 71a from outside the board box 71a. In addition, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 71b, which faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 in the board box 71a, faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the rear surface of the resin base 21 is exposed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display surface of the setting display device 205 through the opposing wall portion 71b.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the results of game history management. In addition, in the setting display device 205, the setting value to be selected is displayed when a setting value update process is being executed to change the setting value, and the setting value to be set is displayed when a setting confirmation process is being executed to confirm the setting value. In other words, if the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 1", "1" is displayed on the setting display device 205, if the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 2", "2" is displayed on the setting display device 205, if the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 3", "3" is displayed on the setting display device 205, if the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 4", "4" is displayed on the setting display device 205, if the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 5", "5" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and if the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 6", "6" is displayed on the setting display device 205. In addition, when neither the setting value update process nor the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting display device 205 remains off.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the results of game history management and the setting display device 205 for displaying setting values are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. As described above, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a with the opposing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the rear surface of the resin base 21 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display surface of the setting display device 205 through the opposing wall portion 71b. The element mounting surface of the main control board 81 is provided with a setting key insertion section 195 and a reset button 196, so when performing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, exposing the back surface of the resin base 21 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. However, since the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided on the element mounting surface as described above, it is possible to visually check not only the display of the setting value of the selection target or setting target on the setting display device 205, but also the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The abnormality display device 206 is provided with a monochromatic LED. The abnormality display device 206 is installed so that its light-emitting surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces, and is covered by the opposing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a. In this case, since the board box 71a is formed transparent, it is possible to visually check the abnormality display device 206 housed in the board box 71a from the outside of the board box 71a. In addition, since the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 in the board box 71a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 71a, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the rear surface of the resin base 21 forward of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to visually check the abnormality display device 206 through the opposing wall portion 71b. When a specific abnormality occurs, the abnormality display device 206 changes from an off state to an on state, and the on state continues until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

<Specific control and non-specific control>
Next, the contents of various controls executed by the main MPU 82 will be described.

Various controls executed by the main MPU 82 using a program are classified into specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, controls related to the management of game history and monitoring of fraud are classified as non-specific control, and controls other than non-specific control, including controls for progressing the game based on the game operation by the player, are classified as specific control. In detail, the control by the main process (FIG. 81) executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started includes all processes other than the first management process described below, which is included in the specific control, and the first management process is included in the non-specific control. In addition, there are a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) as processes that are periodically interrupted and started, and all processes of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are included in the specific control, and all processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) other than the fraud detection process and the second management process described below are included in the specific control, and the fraud detection process and the second management process are included in the non-specific control.

Figure 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM 83. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control in the control executed by the main MPU 82, as shown in Figure 76, the addresses of the areas in the main ROM 83 where programs and data for specific control are stored and programs and data for non-specific control are stored are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, specific control programs are stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each successive address within the range of address X(1) to address X(k+2). In addition, addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5) successive to address X(1) to address X(k+2) are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and specific control data are stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each successive address within the range of address X(k+6) to address X(m+2). In addition, addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) successive to address X(k+6) to address X(m+2) are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control programs are stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each successive address within the range of address X(m+6) to address X(n+2). In addition, addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5), which are consecutive to addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2), are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control data is collectively stored in each consecutive address area within the range of addresses X(n+6) to X(p+2). The relationship between the above programs and data and addresses is set in both the physical addresses in the main ROM 83 and the logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the main MPU 82.

As described above, the programs and data for specific control and the programs and data for non-specific control are stored in different address ranges regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. Therefore, when checking only the programs and data for specific control, it is necessary to check only the address range area in which these programs and data for specific control are stored, and when checking only the programs and data for non-specific control, it is necessary to check only the address range area in which these programs and data for non-specific control are stored. This makes it possible to efficiently check the programs and data for specific control and non-specific control separately. This also makes it possible to efficiently correct the programs and data for specific control and non-specific control separately.

By setting an address range for an unused area in which no data is stored between the address range of the area in which the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored and the address range of the area in which the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control when performing a check.

In the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in different address ranges, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls, which makes it possible to efficiently check programs and data separately. In addition, an address range for an unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area in which the program is stored and the address range of the area in which the data is stored, which makes it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range of the program and the address range of the data when checking.

Figure 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting mode of each area in the main RAM 84. In accordance with the fact that the control executed using a program in the main MPU 82 is distinguished between specific control and non-specific control, as shown in Figure 77, the address range of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control is also clearly distinguished from the address range of the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the main RAM 84.

Specifically, the area of each successive address within the range of address Y(1) to address Y(r+2) is set as the work area 211 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) that are successive to address Y(1) to address Y(r+2) are unused area addresses, and the area of each successive address within the range of address Y(r+6) to address Y(s+2) is set as the stack area 212 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5) that are successive to address Y(r+6) to address Y(s+2) are unused area addresses, and the area of each successive address within the range of address Y(s+6) to address Y(t+2) is set as the work area 213 for non-specific control. In addition, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5), which are consecutive to addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2), are unused area addresses, and the consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(t+6) to Y(u+2) are set as stack areas 214 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set in both the physical addresses in the main RAM 84 and the logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the main MPU 82.

As described above, the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control are set separately, so that different areas of the main RAM 84 are used when performing various calculations, etc., when the main MPU 82 executes specific control and when it executes non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which information in the main RAM 84 required for executing one of specific control and non-specific control is erased when the other is executed. Incidentally, a load command is issued by the main MPU 82 when writing information to each work area 211, 213 and reading information from each work area 211, 213.

By setting the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control separately, different areas of the main RAM 84 are used when saving information stored in the registers of the main MPU 82 and when storing information of the return address in the program, depending on whether the main MPU 82 executes specific control or non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent an event in which information used in the other is erased when saving information stored in the registers of the main MPU 82 and when storing information of the return address in the program while one of the specific control and non-specific control is being executed. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 212, 214, a push command is issued by the main MPU 82, and when reading information from each stack area 212, 214, a pop command is issued by the main MPU 82. When reading information from each stack area 212, 214, the order of writing to the stack areas 212, 214 is such that the later information is read first.

Here, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, and can read information from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but cannot write information to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

In addition, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and can read information from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, but cannot write information to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed.

Note that backup power is supplied to the main RAM 84 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and this backup power is supplied to all of the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is retained as long as backup power is being supplied, even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Figure 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various memory areas provided in the work area 211 for specific control and the various memory areas provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

The work area 211 for specific control includes a first security counter 211a, a special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, a regular power monitoring delay timer counter 211c, a confirmation flag group 211d, a previous value storage area 211e, a security flag 211f, and a check counter 211g. The work area 213 for non-specific control includes first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, a magnetic detection counter 213i, a magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, a second security counter 213k, first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, a special power winning abnormality flag 213o, a first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, a second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, an out abnormality flag 213r, a gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and a magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

The first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control and the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control are both counters used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall, and in the case of an external output, are counters used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is output. Events that trigger the external output of a pulsed security signal include the execution of a setting value update process, the execution of a clear process of the main RAM 84, the detection of a disconnection of a specified detection sensor, the detection of a short circuit of a specified detection sensor, the detection of an abnormality in winning, and the detection of a magnetic abnormality. Note that events that trigger the external output of a pulsed security signal are not limited to those listed above, and may include, in addition to or in place of at least a part of these, the detection of an abnormality in radio waves and the opening operation of the game machine main body 12. Additionally, when performing the above-mentioned external output of a security signal and associated processing, the previous value storage area 211e and security flag 211f are used.

The special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period during which the detection of a game ball by the special power detection sensor 234a provided in the special power winning device 32 is treated as valid even after the open state of the special power winning device 32 becomes closed. The normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period during which the detection of a game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a provided in the second operating port 34 is treated as valid even after the open state of the second operating port 34 becomes closed. The confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control has various confirmation flags that allow the main MPU 82 to confirm the entry of game balls into the outlet 24a, the three general winning ports 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. The check counter 211g of the work area 211 for specific control is used when executing display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c in the work area 213 for non-specific control correspond one-to-one to the three general winning openings 31. The first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c are counters used by the main MPU 82 to determine the period from when a winning opening detection sensor 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning opening 31 detects one game ball to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. Note that while in the first embodiment, four general winning openings 31 are provided, in this embodiment, three general winning openings 31 are provided.

The fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213d in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period from when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a of the special electric winning device 32 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. The fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period from when one game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a provided in the first actuation port 33 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. The sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period from when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a of the second actuation port 34 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. The seventh winning monitoring timer counter 213g in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the period from when one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a provided at the outlet 24a to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. The eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the period from when one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a provided at the through gate 35 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid.

Details will be described later, but the process for monitoring whether the game balls are entering the three general winning openings 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the outlet 24a is normal or not is included in the non-specific control. In this case, among the various timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h provided to monitor whether the game balls are entering the three general winning openings 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the outlet 24a is normal or not, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control, while the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

Since the measurement of the invalid period of the detection of the game ball using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h is started by the detection result of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, it is possible to specify the start trigger by the non-specific control processing without taking into account the processing result of the specific control. Therefore, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to measure the invalid period of the detection of the game ball using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h by the non-specific control processing without taking into account the processing result of the specific control. And, under such circumstances, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the work area 211 for specific control.

On the other hand, the measurement of the effective period of the detection of the game ball using the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b is triggered by the execution of the process of changing the special power winning device 32 from an open state to a closed state, and the measurement of the effective period of the detection of the game ball using the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c is triggered by the execution of the process of changing the second operating port 34 from an open state to a closed state. And since the process of changing the special power winning device 32 and the second operating port 34 to a closed state is executed as a specific control process, it is impossible to identify the start trigger by the non-specific control process without taking into account the result of the specific control process. In this case, if the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the processing configuration for identifying the start trigger of the measurement of the effective period in the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c may become complicated. In response to this, by providing the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the regular power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control rather than in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated, although the required storage capacity in the work area 211 for specific control increases accordingly.

The first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n of the work area 213 for non-specific control are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the three general winning ports 31, and if the non-specific control process determines that an abnormal ball has been detected as a result of the monitoring process using the first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c, the corresponding flag among the first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n is set to "1" in the non-specific control process. The special electric winning abnormality flag 213o of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32, and if the non-specific control process determines that an abnormal ball has been detected as a result of the monitoring process using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213d, the non-specific control process sets the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o to "1".

The first operation winning abnormality flag 213p of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided in correspondence with the first operation port 33, and if the non-specific control process determines that an abnormal ball has been detected as a result of the monitoring process using the fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p is set to "1" in the non-specific control process. The second operation winning abnormality flag 213q of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided in correspondence with the second operation port 34, and if the non-specific control process determines that an abnormal ball has been detected as a result of the monitoring process using the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c or the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to "1" in the non-specific control process.

The out abnormality flag 213r of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided in correspondence with the out port 24a, and if the non-specific control process determines that an abnormal ball has been detected as a result of the monitoring process using the seventh winning monitoring timer counter 213g, the out abnormality flag 213r is set to "1" in the non-specific control process. The gate winning abnormality flag 213s of the work area 213 for specific control is provided in correspondence with the through gate 35, and if the non-specific control process determines that an abnormal ball has been detected as a result of the monitoring process using the eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s is set to "1" in the non-specific control process.

The magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the number of times that the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly has been identified. In this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back of the game board 24, and the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor is input to the main MPU 82. When the magnetic detection sensor does not detect a magnetism, it outputs a LOW level magnetic detection signal to the main MPU 82, and when it detects a magnetism, it outputs a HI level magnetic detection signal to the main MPU 82. The magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the period during which magnetic anomalies are not monitored. The magnetic anomaly flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" in the non-specific control processing when the non-specific control processing determines that the number of occurrences of timing anomalies measured by the magnetic detection counter 213i has reached the anomaly reference number (specifically, "3") in a situation where the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j is not measuring a period during which magnetic anomalies are not monitored.

<Command transmission configuration>
FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for transmitting commands from the main side MPU 82 to the acoustic/optical side MPU 93.

The main MPU 82 is provided with a specific control processing unit 221 as a function for executing specific control processing using the specific control program and specific control data stored in the main ROM 83, and a non-specific control processing unit 222 as a function for executing non-specific control processing using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data stored in the main ROM 83. When the specific control processing unit 221 executes specific control processing, as already explained, information is read from and written to the specific control work area 211 and the specific control stack area 212, and information is read from the non-specific control work area 213. Note that when the specific control processing unit 221 executes specific control processing, information is not written to the non-specific control work area 213 and the non-specific control stack area 214. When the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes non-specific control processing, as already explained, information is read from and written to the non-specific control work area 213 and the non-specific control stack area 214, and information is read from the specific control work area 211. When non-specific control processing is performed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, no information is written to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Regardless of whether specific control processing is performed by the specific control processing unit 221 or non-specific control processing is performed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, information is read from and written to a register area 223 provided in the main MPU 82. The register area 223 includes a general-purpose register area 223a and a command transmission buffer 223b. The general-purpose register area 223a includes a flag register, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. The various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers include a WA register, a BC register, a DE register, a HL register, an IX register, and an IY register.

The command transmission buffer 223b stores a specific command to be transmitted when it becomes necessary to transmit a specific command to the sound/light side MPU 93 provided on the sound/light emission control board 92 of the sound/light emission control device 91 due to the execution of specific control processing by the specific control processing unit 221. In addition, the command transmission buffer 223b stores a specific command to be transmitted when it becomes necessary to transmit a specific command to the sound/light side MPU 93 due to the execution of non-specific control processing by the non-specific control processing unit 222. The command transmission buffer 223b is provided as a ring buffer provided with multiple unit storage areas capable of storing one type of command. The command to be transmitted is written to a unit storage area corresponding to the information of the write pointer provided in the main MPU 82. In this case, the unit storage area to be written to is switched sequentially according to a specific order, and after the last unit storage area is written to, the first unit storage area is written to.

The commands written to each unit storage area of the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 provided in the main side MPU 82. The command transmission circuit 224 is provided with a read pointer, and transmits the command stored in the unit storage area corresponding to the information of the read pointer to the sound-light side MPU 93. In this case, the unit possible areas to be read are switched sequentially according to a specific order, and after the last unit storage area is read, the first unit storage area is read.

The command transmission circuit 224 reads a command from the target unit storage area of the command transmission buffer 223b and transmits the read command without involving the execution of a program-based process in the specific control processing unit 221 and the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82, i.e., without involving the execution of a program-based process. Therefore, even if the command transmission circuit 224 is transmitting a command to the sound-light side MPU 93, the specific control processing unit 221 can execute a specific control process and the non-specific control processing unit 222 can execute a non-specific control process. Furthermore, by executing specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221, even in a situation where a command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, not only can specific control processing be executed in the specific control processing unit 221, but also non-specific control processing can be executed in the non-specific control processing unit 222; and by executing non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222, even in a situation where a command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, not only can non-specific control processing be executed in the non-specific control processing unit 222, but also specific control processing can be executed in the specific control processing unit 221.

The speed at which the command transmission circuit 224 transmits commands to the audio-visual side MPU 93 is set to a speed at which unsent commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are not overwritten by new commands being stored in the command transmission buffer 223b.

The manner in which commands are transmitted will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 80. Figure 80(a) shows the period during which specific control processing is being performed by the specific control processing unit 221, Figure 80(b) shows the period during which non-specific control processing is being performed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, Figure 80(c) shows the timing at which commands are stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, and Figure 80(d) shows the period during which commands are transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 80(a), specific control processing is started in the specific control processing unit 221. Thereafter, at timing t2, the specific control processing is executed, causing a command to be stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80(c). Since there is an unsent command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 80(d). Since the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221 and the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, the specific control processing is executed in the specific control processing unit 221 as shown in FIG. 80(a) even during the period when commands are being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224 from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in FIG. 80(d).

After that, in a situation where specific control processing is being performed by the specific control processing unit 221 as shown in FIG. 80(a), the command is stored again in the command transmission buffer 223b at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 80(c). Since there is an unsent command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 80(d).

After that, while the transmission of the command started at the timing of t4 is continuing, the situation changes at the timing of t5 from the situation where the specific control processing unit 221 is executing specific control processing to the situation where the non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing non-specific control processing, as shown in Figures 80(a) and 80(b). In this case, the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 is performed not only independently of the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221, but also independently of the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222. Therefore, even if the situation where the specific control processing is being executed at the timing of t5 is switched to the situation where the non-specific control processing is being executed, the transmission of the command continues as shown in Figure 80(d). The transmission of the command ends at the timing of t6.

After that, non-specific control processing is executed at timing t7, and a command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80(c). Since there is an unsent command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 80(d). Since the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222 and the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, non-specific control processing is executed in the non-specific control processing unit 222 as shown in FIG. 80(b) even during the period from timing t7 to timing t8 as shown in FIG. 80(d) when commands are being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224.

After that, in a situation where non-specific control processing is being performed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 as shown in FIG. 80(b), the command is stored again in the command transmission buffer 223b at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 80(c). Since there is an unsent command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 80(d).

After that, while the command transmission started at timing t9 is continuing, the situation changes at timing t10 from the situation where non-specific control processing is being performed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 to the situation where specific control processing is being performed by the specific control processing unit 221, as shown in Figures 80(a) and 80(b). In this case, the operation of transmitting a command in the command transmission circuit 224 is performed not only independently of the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222, but also independently of the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221. Therefore, even if the situation where specific control processing is being performed at timing t10 is switched to the situation where non-specific control processing is being performed, the transmission of the command continues as shown in Figure 80(d). The transmission of the command ends at timing t11.

As described above, in both the situation where specific control processing unit 221 is executing specific control processing and the situation where non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing non-specific control processing, the command to be sent is stored in command sending buffer 223b of register area 223. In other words, even if the area to which information is written in main RAM 84 is configured to be different between the situation where specific control processing is being executed and the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed, the area to which the command to be sent is written is shared in the situation where specific control processing is being executed and the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed. Therefore, since there is no need to consolidate the processing for storing commands into only one of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for storing commands from becoming complicated.

The commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224, which operates independently of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration of the program-based processing in the main side MPU 82, since there is no need to adjust the timing of command transmission in relation to the execution content of the program-based processing in the main side MPU 82.

<Main processing>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 82 using programs will be described. Fig. 81 is a flowchart showing the main process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Among the processes in steps S4901 to S4932 in the main process, the processes other than the first management process called and executed in step S4927 are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control, and the first management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, the power-on initial setting process is executed (step S4901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the main process is started and then a predetermined waiting time (specifically, one second) elapses before proceeding to the next process. During this predetermined waiting period, the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. In addition, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted.

Then, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S4902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) to be described later, which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is started, is set to a first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) to be described later, which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is started, is set to a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in this embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) exist as timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are started by interrupting the main processing. Also, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114). Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are not being executed, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is started first, regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is a process that is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) may be configured to be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) is set in a specified register of the main MPU 82, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) is set in a specific register of the main MPU 82. In addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, the internal function register setting process also executes processes for setting the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1.

Then, a protection setting process is executed (step S4903). In the protection setting process, "1" is set in the protection register 223c provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, so that unused areas of the main RAM 84 other than the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are excluded from the targets of writing information (including clearing to "0").

Specifically, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information to the main RAM 84 and reading information from the main RAM 84. When the address of an area from which information is to be read is specified by the execution of a program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads information from the area at the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82, and when the address of an area from which information is to be written is specified by the execution of a program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 writes the specified information to the area at the specified address. In this case, the address ranges of unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) are prestored in the main ROM 83. When protection is set, the RAM management circuit 225 will not write information if the address of the area to which information is to be written is specified and the address is within the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83. Writing this information also includes clearing to "0". This makes it possible to prevent information from being written to unused areas in the main RAM 84.

When the RAM management circuit 225 determines that the address designated as the target for writing information is included in the address range of an unused area stored in the main ROM 83 while the protection setting is in place, the information may not be written, but an abnormality alert may also be issued. The manner in which the abnormality alert is issued is arbitrary, and may include, for example, an abnormality light emission from the display light-emitting unit 64, an abnormality sound output from the speaker unit 65, an abnormality display from the pattern display device 41, or an abnormality external output to a management computer installed in the game hall.

The register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is provided with a protect register 223c as shown in FIG. 79. The protect register 223c is a storage area for the RAM management circuit 225 to specify whether or not writing of information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is prohibited. When the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, the above-mentioned protect setting is performed, and even if an address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is specified as the write target, information is not written to the address area as described above. On the other hand, when the protect information is not set in the protect register 223c, the above-mentioned protect setting is not performed, and when an address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is specified as the write target, information is written to the address area.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area. When the protect register 223c is set to "1", it corresponds to the case where the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, and when the information in the protect register 223c is "0", it corresponds to the case where the protect information is not set in the protect register 223c. When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the information in the protect register 223c is "0", so that the protect information is not set. However, when the protect setting process of step S4903 is executed, the protect register 223c is set to "1", so that the protect information is set. This makes it impossible to write information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

Note that the protect register 223c is not limited to being configured as a 1-bit area, but may be configured as an area of 2 or more bits, a 1-byte area, or a 2-byte area.

Then, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4904). The start-up processing flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) described below is started, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) should end without executing any processing for progressing the game, while still executing the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history, among the various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88).

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) is started in the main processing (Figure 81), and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) ends and the remaining processing (steps S4929 to S4932) is started. In the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S5506 to S5520 is not executed, thereby making it possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing or setting value update processing described below is being executed among the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928). On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), even if the start-up process in progress flag is set to "1", steps S5501 to S5504 and S5521 are executed, and power outage monitoring is executed even in a situation where the setting confirmation process or setting value update process described below is being executed among the processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), and the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further management of the game history is executed.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are not prohibited from interrupting, and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and started during the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process, the return address information of the main process (FIG. 81) for returning after the timer interrupt process that was started is finished is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the information of various registers of the main MPU 82 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that was started is finished, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 81) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control is restored to the various registers of the main MPU 82.

After setting the startup processing in progress flag to "1" in step S4904, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4905). The power outage flag is set to "1" when power outage processing is executed in the power outage information storage processing (step S5501) of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88). The power outage flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine whether power outage processing was performed appropriately the last time the power was shut off.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S4905: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step S4906). Specifically, first, the checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 211 and the specific control stack area 212. Then, the checksum for the specific control work area 211 and the specific control stack area 212 that was calculated and stored in the specific control work area 211 in the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step S4906: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area in the work area 211 for specific control is within the normal range (step S4907). The setting reference area is a memory area in which information for identifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main MPU 82 is stored. If the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". If the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If the numerical information "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 will be "Setting 6." In step S4907, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is any of "1" to "6."

If all of steps S4905 to S4907 are judged to be positive, it is judged whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4908). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that the setting value update process described later is being executed, and when the setting update display flag is set to "1", a display showing the setting value being updated is performed on the setting display device 205 of the main control device 71. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process is started and cleared to "0" when the setting value update process is ended, so that the setting update display flag is not basically set to "1" in a situation where the setting value update process is not being executed. However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped in a situation where the setting value update process is being executed, the setting update display flag will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started thereafter. The setting update display flag will remain set to "1" until the setting value update process clears the setting update display flag to "0."

If a negative judgment is made in step S4908 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is judged whether the reset button 196 has been pressed (step S4909). In other words, it is judged whether the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 has started while the reset button 196 has been pressed.

If the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S4909: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4910). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), while a positive determination is made in step S5505, so that the processes of steps S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly the previous time the power was shut down, if the checksums do not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power outage in at least one of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, or if the setting value is abnormal, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history is executed, but processing for progressing the game is not executed. If a positive determination is made in step S4910, the processing of steps S4924 and S4925 described below is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4910, it is judged whether or not the setting key insertion unit 195 has been turned ON using the setting key (step S4911). If the setting key insertion unit 195 has been turned ON using the setting key (step S4911: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913). Even if the setting key insertion unit 195 has not been turned ON using the setting key (step S4911: NO), if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4912: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that a setting confirmation process is being executed, and when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the setting display device 205 of the main control device 71 displays the currently set setting value. The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process is started and cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process is ended, so the setting confirmation display flag is not basically set to "1" when the setting confirmation process is not being executed. However, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started thereafter. This state in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the RAM clear process (step S4919) described later is executed, the setting value update process described later is executed, or the process of clearing the setting confirmation display flag to "0" is executed in the setting confirmation process.

As described above, the setting confirmation process is executed not only when the reset button 196 is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is ON (i.e., when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 196 is not pressed and the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. This makes it possible to continue checking the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process is being executed and the reset button 196 is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter, the setting confirmation process is not executed, and the RAM clear process (step S4919) and the setting value update process corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power is resumed are executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear process (step S4919) or the setting value update process over the setting confirmation process.

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step S4913 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing in steps S5001 to S5007 in the setting confirmation process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the master MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, interrupt permission is set (step S5001). This causes the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) to be started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) to be started at the second interrupt period.

In the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are basically prohibited, and interrupts are permitted in the processing for setting confirmation and the processing for updating set values. Therefore, in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), in a situation where the processing for setting confirmation and the processing for updating set values are not being executed, the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited, and in a situation where the processing for setting confirmation or the processing for updating set values is being executed, the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is permitted. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is started, the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history are executed, but the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) ends without executing any process for progressing the game.

After that, on condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step S5002). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", the setting display device 205 of the main control device 71 displays the currently set setting value.

Then, the confirmation start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5003). By storing the confirmation start command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the confirmation start command, the sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display side MPU 103 so that an image indicating that the setting confirmation process is being executed and an image for enabling the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process to be recognized are displayed on the pattern display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed, and allows the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content required to terminate the setting confirmation process.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step S5004). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 195 has changed from a reception state corresponding to the ON state to a reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, a negative determination is made in step S5004 not only when the setting key insertion unit 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started with the setting key insertion unit 195 in the OFF state and the OFF state is maintained. If it is not determined that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: NO), the process of step S5004 is repeated.

When it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5005). This causes the display of the currently set setting value on the setting display device 205 to end.

Then, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S5006). As a result, when the setting confirmation process is terminated and the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 81) (steps S4901 to S4928) is returned to, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited from interrupting.

Then, the return command upon confirmation is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5007). By storing the return command upon confirmation in the command transmission buffer 223b, the return command upon confirmation is transmitted to the sound-and-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the return command upon confirmation, the sound-and-light side MPU 93 terminates the display of the image indicating that the setting confirmation process is being executed in the pattern display device 41 and the image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process.

As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion unit 195 turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 196, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started and the main processing (Figure 81) is started, but the reset button 196 is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is executed in a state where processing is being executed when the supply of operating power begins, which is the state before the processing for progressing the game is executed in the main processing (Figure 81). This makes it possible to check the setting values when no game is being played.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 81), if the setting key insertion unit 195 has not been turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation display flag has not been set to "1" (steps S4911 and S4912: NO), a normal return command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S4914). By storing the normal return command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the normal return command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the normal return command, the sound/light side MPU 93 determines that the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) has ended in the main MPU 82, and determines that none of the RAM clear processing (step S4919), the processing for setting confirmation, and the processing for updating the setting value have been executed in the processing at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928). Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the reset button 196 has been pressed, and if it is determined in step S4915 that the setting key insertion unit 195 has been turned on using the setting key, or if it is determined in step S4908 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting value update process is executed (step S4916). As described above, the setting value update process is executed not only when the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on (i.e., when a "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on. Therefore, if a power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process is being executed, the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether the operation content at the start of the supply of operating power thereafter is "no operation", "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", or "setting confirmation operation". This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update process.

Here, the setting value update process executed in step S4916 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processes in steps S5101 to S5115 in the setting value update process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the master MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, interrupt permission is set (step S5101). This causes the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) to be started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) to be started at the second interrupt period.

In the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are basically prohibited, and interrupts are permitted in the processing for setting confirmation and the processing for updating set values. Therefore, in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), in a situation where the processing for setting confirmation and the processing for updating set values are not being executed, the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited, and in a situation where the processing for setting confirmation or the processing for updating set values is being executed, the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is permitted. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is started, the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history are executed, but the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) ends without executing any process for progressing the game.

Then, on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step S5102). By setting the setting update display flag to "1", the setting display device 205 of the main control device 71 displays the currently selected setting value.

Then, the initial setting at the start is performed (step S5103). In this initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" in step S4922 of the main processing (FIG. 81) when the power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power outage and the power outage flag was not set to "1" (step S4905: NO), when the checksums do not match due to the fact that the storage state of information has changed since the previous power outage for at least one of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control (step S4906: NO), or when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area is not within the normal range (step S4907: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the processes of steps S5506 to S5520 are not executed by making a positive determination in step S5505. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 as described above, the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history are executed, but the processes for progressing the game are not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step S5103, it is possible to release the state in which an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 when the setting value update process is executed.

Then, "1" is set in the setting update area in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5104). The setting update area is a storage area in which information on setting values being updated during the setting value update process is stored. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "Setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "Setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "Setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "Setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "Setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "Setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area in step S5104, the setting value of the selection target becomes "Setting 1". In other words, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process is started, the setting value of the selection target becomes "Setting 1". Note that the process of step S5104 may be configured not to be executed. In this case, by writing information from the setting reference area to the setting update area when the setting value update process is started, the setting value of the setting target at that time becomes the setting value of the selection target when the setting value update process is started.

Then, the update start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5105). By storing the update start command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the update start command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the update start command, the sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display side MPU 103 so that an image indicating that the setting value update process is being performed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for terminating the setting value update process are displayed on the pattern display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and allows the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content required to change the setting value and the operation content required to terminate the setting value update process.

It is then determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area is any one of "1" to "6" (step S5106). If it is not any one of "1" to "6" (step S5106: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S5107). As a result, the setting value to be selected becomes "Setting 1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S5106 or if the processing of step S5107 is executed, it is judged whether the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step S5108). Specifically, it is judged whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 195 has changed from a reception state corresponding to the ON state to a reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, a negative judgment is made in step S5108 not only when the setting key insertion unit 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update processing is started when the setting key insertion unit 195 is in the OFF state and the OFF state is maintained.

If the determination in step S5108 is negative, and the reset button 196 is pressed (step S5109: YES), the value in the setting update area is incremented by 1 (step S5110). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher level each time the reset button 196 is pressed. If the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S5109: NO) or the value in the setting update area is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S5106. However, if the value in the setting update area is determined to be 7 or greater in step S5106, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S5107. As a result, if the reset button 196 is pressed once in the "setting 6" situation, the setting returns to "setting 1."

When it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from an ON state to an OFF state (step S5108: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area (step S5111). As a result, the setting value information resulting from the update in this setting value update process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, interrupts are disabled (step S5112). As a result, when the setting value update process is terminated and the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 81) (steps S4901 to S4928) is resumed, interrupts in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are disabled.

Then, the RAM clear process is executed (step S5113). In the RAM clear process, the specific control work area 211 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 211 (i.e., the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the special chart reserve area 84a and the normal chart reserve area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the first special chart display unit 37a and the reserved information for the second special chart display unit 37b are erased, and the reserved information for the normal chart display unit 38a is erased. In addition, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the RAM clear process, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed. In addition, in the RAM clear process, various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step S4902 is performed. Note that the process for clearing the work area 213 for non-specific control and the process for performing initial settings for the stack area 214 for non-specific control to "0" are not performed.

Then, the update return command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5114). By storing the update return command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the update return command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the update return command, the sound/light side MPU 93 ends the display of the image indicating that the setting value update process is being performed in the pattern display device 41, the image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and the image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for terminating the setting value update process. Then, the setting update display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5115).

As described above, the setting value update process is executed not only by pressing the reset button 196 while turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, but also by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion unit 195 with the setting key. Also, as already explained, the setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion unit 195 with the setting key without pressing the reset button 196. This makes it possible to make the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 195 a common operation for executing setting-related processes related to setting values. This makes it possible to make the operation content for generating setting-related processes easy to understand for the manager of the amusement hall.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on by the setting key, if the reset button 196 is not pressed, a setting confirmation process is executed, and if the reset button 196 is pressed, a setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process, depending on whether the reset button 196 is pressed or not. This makes it possible to make the operation contents for executing the desired process between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process easy to understand for the manager of the amusement hall. Also, by making the operation contents for executing the setting value update process more than the setting confirmation process, it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to carry out fraudulent acts of setting value update processing.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 81), after the setting value update processing is executed in step S4916, the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4917). As already explained, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the amusement hall's management computer, and, if an external output is required, is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is to be output.

In the main process (FIG. 81), if it is determined in step S4909 that the reset button 196 has been pressed and if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 195 has not been turned on using the setting key (step S4915: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4918). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksum does not match, or when the setting value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the processes of steps S5506 to S5520 are not executed by making a positive determination in step S5505. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly the last time the power was cut off, if the checksums do not match because the information storage state has changed since the last power outage in at least one of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, or if the setting value is abnormal, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history will be executed, but processing for progressing the game will not be executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step S4918: NO), a RAM clear process is executed (step S4919). In the RAM clear process, the specific control work area 211 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 211 (i.e., the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the special chart reserve area 84a and the normal chart reserve area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the first special chart display unit 37a and the reserved information for the second special chart display unit 37b are erased, and the reserved information for the normal chart display unit 38a is erased. In addition, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the RAM clear process, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed. In addition, in the RAM clear process, various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step S4902 is performed. Note that the process for clearing the work area 213 for non-specific control and the process for performing initial settings for the stack area 214 for non-specific control to "0" are not performed.

Then, the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4920). As already explained, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the amusement hall's management computer, and, if an external output is required, is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is to be output.

Then, the reset command when clearing is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S4921). By storing the reset command when clearing in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the reset command when clearing to the audio/light side MPU 93. By receiving the reset command when clearing, the audio/light side MPU 93 determines that the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) in the main MPU 82 has ended, and determines that the RAM clear processing of step S4919 has been performed in the processing at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928). Then, it executes the processing corresponding to the reception of the reset command when clearing.

Here, in the case where power failure processing is executed while the setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing is being executed, the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Fig. 81) when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in Fig. 84.

First, we will explain the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Figure 81) when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing nor the setting confirmation processing is executed.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a "no operation" situation, the main processing (FIG. 81) does not execute any of the RAM clear processing (step S4919), the setting value update processing, and the setting confirmation processing. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 81) executes the RAM clear processing (step S4919), but the setting value update processing and the setting confirmation processing are not performed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 81) executes the setting value update processing, but the RAM clear processing (step S4919) and the setting confirmation processing are not performed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 81) executes the setting confirmation processing, but the RAM clear processing (step S4919) and the setting value update processing are not performed.

Next, we will explain the contents of the processing that is executed in the main processing (Figure 81) when the supply of operating power is resumed if power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1").

In all cases where the supply of operating power is resumed when "no operation" has been performed, when the supply of operating power is resumed when a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, when the supply of operating power is resumed when a "setting change operation" has been performed, or when the supply of operating power is resumed when a "setting check operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 81) executes the setting value update processing, but the RAM clear processing (step S4919) and the setting check processing are not executed. In other words, if the power outage processing is executed when the setting value update processing is being executed, the setting value update processing is started anew regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed.

With the above configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update process can be started anew regardless of the operation content of the setting key insertion unit 195 and the reset button 196 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This makes it possible to reliably create an opportunity to complete the setting value update. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent gameplay from starting before the setting value update is complete.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process, the setting value update process is executed uniquely regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the processing content to be executed changes depending on the operation content.

Next, we will explain the contents of the processing that is executed in the main processing (Figure 81) when the supply of operating power is resumed if power outage processing is executed while the setting confirmation processing is being executed (i.e., the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1").

If the supply of operating power is resumed when a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 81) executes the RAM clear processing (step S4919), but the setting value update processing and the setting confirmation processing are not executed. In other words, even if the power outage processing is executed when the setting confirmation processing is executed, if a "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the RAM clear processing (step S4919) is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 81). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear processing (step S4919) over the "RAM clear operation." Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear processing (step S4919) is executed.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 81) executes the setting value update processing, but does not execute the setting confirmation processing. In other words, even if the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing is executed, if a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update processing is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation processing. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update processing for the "setting change operation". Even if the setting confirmation processing is not executed in this way, the setting value update processing is executed, and the setting value to be selected is displayed on the setting display device 205, and when the setting value update processing is completed, the information of the setting value to be selected at that time is set in the setting reference area, so that the manager of the game hall can check the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clear processing (step S5113) in the setting value update processing.

If the supply of operating power is resumed after the "settings check operation" has been performed, the main processing (Fig. 81) executes the settings check process on the condition that no abnormalities have occurred in the power outage flag, checksum, or settings. As a result, even if power outage processing is executed in the middle of the settings check process, it is possible to resume checking the settings by performing the "settings check operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a "no operation" state, the main processing (FIG. 81) executes the setting confirmation processing even if the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned ON, provided that no abnormalities have occurred with the power outage flag, checksum, or setting value. This makes it possible to resume checking the setting value even if the power outage processing is executed during the setting confirmation processing and the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed in a "no operation" state.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907 in the main processing (FIG. 81), i.e., if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4922). As already explained, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S5501 to S5504 and S5521 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), whereas a positive judgment is made in step S5505, so that the processing of steps S5506 to S5520 is not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly the last time the power was cut off, if the checksums do not match because the information storage state has changed since the last power outage in at least one of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, or if the setting value is abnormal, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history will be executed, but processing for progressing the game will not be executed.

Then, it is determined whether the reset button 196 has been pressed (step S4923). If the reset button 196 has not been pressed (step S4923: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or setting value at the start of the supply of operating power is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S4924). By storing the abnormal command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the abnormal command, the sound-light side MPU 93 causes the display light-emitting unit 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and causes the speaker unit 65 to output a voice saying "Please change the settings." In addition, a text image saying "Please change the settings" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notifications will be restarted when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process is executed.

After that, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S4920). In the external output processing in the event of an abnormality, processing is executed to externally output an abnormality signal to the gaming hall's management computer. In this case, the signal output of the abnormality signal is performed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 100 milliseconds). However, this is not limited to this, and the signal output of the abnormality signal may be continued in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", and the signal output of the abnormality signal may be stopped by clearing the game stop flag to "0".

If the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4923: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned ON using the setting key (step S4915). If the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned ON using the setting key (step S4915 and step S4923: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step S4916). The contents of the setting value update process have already been described. In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process is executed even if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907 due to an abnormality occurring in the main RAM 84. This makes it possible to prioritize the change of the setting value. In addition, in the setting value update process, as already described, the initial setting at the start is executed in step S5103, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, when the setting value update process is executed, it is possible to resolve the condition in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 after the setting value update is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 196 is pressed but the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned ON (step S4923: YES, step S4915: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4918). Since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1" in the processing of step S4918 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S4922, a positive determination is made in step S4918. In this case, processing is executed in step S4924 to send an abnormality command to the sound/light side MPU 93, and an abnormality signal is output to the outside in step S4925.

In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the power failure flag, checksum, or setting value and a negative judgment is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907, the RAM clear process (step S4919) is not executed even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. In addition, the RAM clear process (step S4919) is not executed even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" from being canceled even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. In contrast, when the "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" or not, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step S5103) at the start of the setting value update process. This makes it necessary to execute a setting value update process to cancel the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1." Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 211 for specific control, it becomes possible to require not only a process for initializing the work area 211 for specific control, but also a resetting of the setting value.

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, if there is no operation, or if the "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, a positive judgment is made in step S4910 or step S4918, and a process for sending an abnormality command is executed in step S4924, and an external output process in the event of an abnormality is executed in step S4925. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of steps S4905 to S4907 in the subsequent main processing, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output in the event of an abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are executed each time the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, unless the setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the setting value should be changed.

When step S4913, step S4914, step S4917, step S4921, or step S4925 is performed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter 211g (see FIG. 78) provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4926). The value set in the checking counter 211g is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter 211g, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 continue to display the check. The contents of the check display will be described in detail later.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the initial check period is started after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) is completed in the main MPU 82 and before the remaining processing (steps S4929 to S4932) described below is started. This makes it unnecessary to control the initial check period when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

In addition, the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are executed as processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), whereas the initial check period is started when the processes at the start of the supply of operating power end. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, this does not affect the display of the setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Then, the first management process is executed by the CALLI command (step S4927). The CALLI command and the first management process will be described in detail later.

Then, the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S4928). By clearing the start-up processing in progress flag to "0", if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started, a negative judgment is made in step S5505, which causes the processing of not only steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 but also steps S5506 to S5520 to be executed, and the state in which processing for progressing the game is not executed is released. Note that in step S4928, the power outage flag in the work area 211 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Then, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S4929 to S4932. In other words, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt process, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps S4929 to S4932. In this respect, the remaining process of steps S4929 to S4932 can be said to be non-periodic process that is executed non-periodically. In steps S4929 to S4932, the same process is executed as steps S127 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment.

Next, we will explain the processing of step S4927 in the main processing (Figure 81).

In step S4927 of the main processing (FIG. 81), the first management processing is executed by the CALLI command, as already explained. The first management processing is included in the non-specific control processing. In other words, when the main processing (FIG. 81) changes from a situation in which specific control processing is being executed to a situation in which non-specific control processing is being executed, the non-specific control processing is called using the CALLI command.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved to the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, and a half carry flag, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program for the first management process, which is a non-specific control process, is started, it becomes possible to save the information in the flag register in the state before it changes after the call of the first management process or the start of the first management process, in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) described below are prohibited from interrupting and starting while the first management process, which is a non-specific control process, is being executed.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the specific control stack area 212, and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) are prohibited from interrupting, and then the program corresponding to the first management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the first management process to be executed by the CALLI command, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control by one command ("CALLI"), and the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, the program corresponding to the first management process can be started. Therefore, compared to the case where an instruction for saving the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control, an instruction for prohibiting the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), and an instruction for starting the program for the first management process are separately provided, the number of instructions set in the program for executing the first management process can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program.

Figure 85 is a flowchart showing the first management process. Note that the processes of steps S5201 to S5216 in the first management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, the load command sets "LD SP, Y(u+2)" to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S5201). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify the storage area to which information is to be written by the push command in the stack areas 212 and 214. Each time a push command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the next order is to be written, and each time a pop command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the previous order is to be written. In addition, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, the storage area to which the information is to be stored is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5201, the stack pointer is set to the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. This same process of storing information from the memory area with the last address to the memory area with the first address also applies to the stack area 212 for specific control.

Incidentally, for both the specific control stack area 212 and the non-specific control stack area 214, if an additional push command is executed even though information has been set in all memory areas, all areas of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" as an abnormality has occurred in the memory process. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing as is despite an abnormality occurring in the memory process.

Then, the information in the WA register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S5202). Also, the information in the BC register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_BCBUF), BC" (step S5203). Also, the information in the DE register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_DEBUF), DE" (step S5204). Also, the information in the HL register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_HLBUF), HL" (step S5205). Also, the information in the IX register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IXBUF), IX" (step S5206). Also, the information in the IY register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IYBUF), IY" (step S5207).

In addition to the flag register already described, the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the master MPU 82 contains various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S5202 to S5207, the information of some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, namely the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, is saved to the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is each 2 bytes.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short-circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short-circuit process (step S5209), it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short-circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, is selectively saved to the work area 213 for non-specific control, thereby making it possible to reduce the capacity reserved for saving the register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to save the above-mentioned register information while securing a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that is available during the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short-circuit process (step S5209).

Note that, of course, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the processing corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

In addition, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 214 for non-specific control, it is possible to keep the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control small. In addition, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as already explained, the writing order of information is such that later information is read first. Therefore, if the reading order of information is shifted due to some kind of noise or the like, all information in the subsequent reading order will be restored to different registers. The probability of such an event occurring increases as the amount of information saved to the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring even when there is a lot of information to be saved.

After the processes of steps S5202 to S5207 are executed, the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) are executed. When the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) are executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) set in the program for non-specific control is executed, and when the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the first management process after the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) are executed is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) are completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program for the first management process indicated by the return address is returned to. Details of the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209) will be explained later.

After executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209), a load command is issued to set Y(r+a) as a fixed address in the stack pointer of the master MPU 82 when returning to specific control after the first management process ends (step S5210). The address of Y(r+a) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control immediately before the first management process is called in step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81) is always constant, and the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 at that timing (i.e., the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is, for example, the return address information of the main process (FIG. 81) after the first management process is completed. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+a). Therefore, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short-circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to specific control is returned to, the constant information Y(r+a) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, so that the information of the stack pointer can be restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, eliminating the need to save the stack pointer information of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and eliminates the need to reserve an area in the main RAM 84 for the save.

Then, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S5211). Also, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)" (step S5212). Also, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S5213). Also, the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)" (step S5214). Also, the load command "LD IX, (_IXBUF)" overwrites the IX register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S5215). Also, the load command "LD IY, (_IYBUF)" overwrites the IY register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S5216). By executing the processes of steps S5211 to S5216, it becomes possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the master MPU 82 to the information corresponding to specific control immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started.

After the processing of steps S5211 to S5216 is performed, the RETI command causes a return to the main processing (FIG. 81) included in the processing of specific control. Execution of the RETI command restores the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the first management processing to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and switches the state from prohibiting the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) to a permitted state. This causes the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to return to information for executing specific control, and enables new execution of the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing.

Because of the configuration for executing the RETI command, the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the first management process can be restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82 by one command ("RETI"), and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) can be switched from a prohibited state to an allowed state. Therefore, compared to a case where an command for restoring the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the first management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82 and an command for switching from a prohibited state to an allowed state for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the number of commands set in the program for non-specific control processing can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program for non-specific control processing.

Here, when non-specific control processing is executed, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when specific control processing is resumed. This eliminates the need to secure a memory area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is information that will not be used when non-specific control processing is started again after returning to specific control processing. In other words, information required for multiple rounds of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when non-specific control processing is executed, no problem occurs in executing non-specific control processing.

Next, the initial setting process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5208 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process. Note that the processes in steps S5301 to S5304 in the initial setting process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the initial setting process, processing is executed to perform initial settings for each memory area of the work area 213 for non-specific control, including the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, second security counter 213k, first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operational winning abnormality flag 213p, second operational winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and magnetic abnormality flag 213t, as already explained. The first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, second security counter 213k, first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and magnetic abnormality flag 213t all have a data capacity of 1 byte, and addresses are set so that they are consecutive for each of these areas. The addresses increase by "1" in the following order: 1st to 8th winning monitoring timer counters 213a-213h → magnetic detection counter 213i → magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j → 2nd security counter 213k → 1st to 3rd general winning abnormality flags 213l-213n → special line winning abnormality flag 213o → 1st operation winning abnormality flag 213p → 2nd operation winning abnormality flag 213q → out abnormality flag 213r → gate winning abnormality flag 213s → magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

In the initial setting process, a start address is first set as an initial setting target address in a specific register of the main MPU 82 (step S5301). The start address is the address of the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a.

After that, initial settings are made to the area corresponding to the address to be initialized (step S5302). If the address to be initialized is the start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a, so initial settings are made to the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a. Specifically, the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a is cleared to "0" as the initial setting.

Then, it is determined whether the address to be initially set is the final address (step S5303). The final address is the address of the magnetic abnormality flag 213t. If the address to be initially set is not the final address (step S5303: NO), the address to be initially set is updated to the next address in the sequence (step S5304). Specifically, the address to be initially set is incremented by 1. Then, in step S5302, initial setting is performed for the area corresponding to the address after the increment of 1, and the processing of step S5303 is executed.

When the processing of step S5304 is executed in a situation where the address to be initially set is the start address, the address to be initially set becomes the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b, and the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is initially set. Specifically, the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is cleared to "0" as the initial setting. Also, when the processing of step S5304 is executed in a situation where the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is the address to be initially set, the address to be initially set becomes the address of the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c, and the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c is initially set. Specifically, the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c is cleared to "0" as the initial setting.

When the processing of steps S5302 to S5304 is repeated and the address of the magnetic abnormality flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set to the initial setting target address in the processing of step S5304, the magnetic abnormality flag 213t is cleared to "0" as the initial setting and then a positive determination is made in step S5303. The positive determination in step S5303 ends this initial setting processing. Note that in this initial setting processing (FIG. 86), the initial setting of step S5302 is not performed for the normal counter area 251, the calculation result storage area 252, the display target setting area 253, the switching timing counter 254, and the display target counter 255, which are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control and will be described later.

Next, the disconnection short-circuit processing executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5209 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the disconnection short-circuit processing. Note that the processing of steps S5401 to S5411 in the disconnection short-circuit processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, the value of the monitored counter provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5401). The monitored counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the type of detection sensor to be monitored for the occurrence of a disconnection or short circuit. The detection sensors to be monitored for the occurrence of a disconnection or short circuit include the first to third winning port detection sensors 231a to 233a provided for each of the three general winning ports 31, the special electric detection sensor 234a provided in the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port detection sensor 235a provided in the first operating port 33, the second operating port detection sensor 236a provided in the second operating port 34, the outlet detection sensor 237a provided in the outlet 24a, and the gate detection sensor 238a provided in the through gate 35 (see FIG. 90). The monitored counter value of "0" corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, the monitored counter value of "1" corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 232a, the monitored counter value of "2" corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, the monitored counter value of "3" corresponds to the special current detection sensor 234a, the monitored counter value of "4" corresponds to the first operating opening detection sensor 235a, the monitored counter value of "5" corresponds to the second operating opening detection sensor 236a, the monitored counter value of "6" corresponds to the outlet detection sensor 237a, and the monitored counter value of "7" corresponds to the gate detection sensor 238a.

A voltage of 12 V is applied to each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a through the input electrical path. In addition, each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is connected to the main MPU 82 through the output electrical path, and applies a voltage to the main MPU 82 according to the detection result of each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In this case, multiple resistors are connected to the output electrical path, and these resistors function to keep the voltage applied to the main MPU 82 below a predetermined value and the current supplied below a predetermined value.

An electrical signal is input to the main MPU 82 depending on whether or not a game ball has passed through the detection section of each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In this case, when a game ball has not passed through the detection section of each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, a LOW level electrical signal is input to the main MPU 82, and when a game ball has passed through the detection section, a HI level electrical signal is input to the main MPU 82.

If a break occurs in the electrical path or inside each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, the voltage input from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main MPU 82 will be a lower voltage (i.e., 0V) than in the case of a LOW level. If a short circuit occurs between the electrical paths or inside the sensor, the voltage input from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main MPU 82 will be a higher voltage than in the case of a HI level. The main MPU 82 determines that a break has occurred when the voltage applied from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is a lower voltage than in the case of a LOW level, and determines that a short circuit has occurred when the voltage applied from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is a higher voltage than in the case of a HI level.

In the disconnection short-circuit processing, after the value of the monitored counter is cleared to "0" in step S5401, it is determined whether or not a disconnection has occurred by determining whether the voltage input from the detection sensor 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter is a voltage lower than the LOW level (i.e., 0 V) (step S5402). If it is determined that a disconnection has occurred (step S5403: YES), a disconnection occurrence command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S5404). By storing the disconnection occurrence command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the disconnection occurrence command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the disconnection occurrence command, the sound-light side MPU 93 causes the display light-emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the pattern display device 41 to issue a notification indicating that a disconnection has occurred. This disconnection notification may also be configured to notify the type of detection sensor 231a-238a that identified the current disconnection.

Then, the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5405). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the amusement hall's management computer, and, if an external output is required, is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is to be output.

When a negative judgment is made in step S5403, or when the process of step S5405 is executed, it is judged whether or not a short circuit has occurred by judging whether or not the voltage input from the detection sensor 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter is a voltage higher than the HI level (step S5406). Then, when it is judged that a short circuit has occurred (step S5407: YES), a short circuit occurrence command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S5408). When the short circuit occurrence command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the short circuit occurrence command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the short circuit occurrence command, it causes the display light-emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the pattern display unit 41 to execute an announcement indicating that a short circuit has occurred. In this short circuit announcement, the type of the detection sensor 231a to 238a that has identified the occurrence of the short circuit may also be announced.

Then, the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5409). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the amusement hall's management computer, and, if an external output is required, is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is to be output.

If a negative determination is made in step S5407, or if the processing of step S5409 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value of "7" (step S5410). If a negative determination is made in step S5410, the value of the monitored counter is incremented by 1 (step S5411), and the processing of steps S5402 to S5409 is executed for the detection sensor 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter after the increment of 1. If it is determined in step S5410 that the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value, this open circuit short circuit processing is terminated.

<First timer interrupt processing>
Next, the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 82 will be described. Fig. 88 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing. Among the processing of steps S5501 to S5521 in the first timer interrupt processing, the processing other than the fraud detection processing called and executed in step S5509 and the second management processing called and executed in step S5521 is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control, and the fraud detection processing and the second management processing are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, the power outage monitoring process is executed (step S5501). In the power outage monitoring process, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cut is received from the power outage monitoring board 85, and if a power outage is identified, the power outage process is executed and then an infinite loop is entered. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is saved.

Then, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S5502). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is read out sequentially from the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to "0". After that, in step S5503, a random number initial value update process is executed similar to step S4930 in the main process (Figure 81), and in step S5504, a variable counter update process is executed similar to step S4931 in the main process (Figure 81).

Then, it is determined whether either the game stop flag or the startup processing flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S5505). If either the game stop flag or the startup processing flag is set to "1" (step S5505: YES), the process proceeds to step S5521 for managing the game history without executing steps S5506 to S5520. As a result, in a situation where the game stop flag or the startup processing flag is set to "1", it is possible to perform power outage monitoring, random number updating, and game history management in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), while not executing the processes for progressing the game in steps S5506 to S5520.

If both the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag are not set to "1" (step S5505: NO), the process for progressing the game in steps S5506 to S5520 is executed. Specifically, the port output process is executed first (step S5506). In the port output process, if the output information has been set in the previous first timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output information corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, if the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is started, and if the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, if the information to switch the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started, and if the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, a read process is executed (step S5507). In the read process, signals other than the power outage signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes. Then, a ball entry detection process is executed (step S5508). In the ball entry detection process, signals received from each detection sensor 231a to 238a are read, and a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball has entered the out gate 24a, the general winning gate 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating gate 33, the second operating gate 34, and the through gate 35.

After that, a fraud detection process is executed by a CALLI command (step S5509). The fraud detection process will be described in detail later. Then, a timer update process for specific control is executed to collectively update the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the work area 211 for specific control in the main RAM 84 (step S5510). In this case, the timer counters in which the stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled in a consolidated manner, but it is also possible to configure the updating of both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters in a consolidated manner. Then, a fraud response process is executed (step S5511). The fraud response process will be described in detail later.

After that, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of the game balls (step S5512). When the launch operation is continued on the launch operation device 28, one game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds to achieve the predetermined launch cycle, as in the first embodiment. After that, as an input status monitoring process, the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S5507 (step S5513).

After that, a special chart special power control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the open/close execution mode (step S5514), and a normal chart normal power control process is executed to control the display of the normal chart display section 38a and to control the execution of the normal power open state (step S5515). The processing contents of these special chart special power control processes and normal chart normal power control processes are basically the same as those of the first embodiment. The processing configuration of the different parts will be explained later.

In the next step S5516, based on the processing results of the previous steps S5514 and S5515, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of first reserved information in the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of second reserved information in the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information on the regular chart side in the regular chart reserved display unit 38b. Also, in step S5516, based on the processing results of the previous steps S5514 and S5515, output information is set to update the display contents of the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b, and output information is set to update the display contents of the regular chart display unit 38a.

Then, a payout status receiving process is executed to confirm the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 and perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S5517). A payout output process is also executed to set the prize ball command as the output target (step S5518). An external information setting process is also executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this first timer interrupt process (step S5519).

After that, a setting monitoring process is executed (step S5520). In the setting monitoring process, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is any of "1" to "6", thereby determining whether the setting value set to be used is any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". If the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or greater, this means that the setting value set to be used is abnormal, so the game stop flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1". This makes it impossible to proceed with the game until the setting value to be used is newly set in the setting value update process (FIG. 83).

If a positive determination is made in step S5505, or if the processing of step S5520 is executed, the second management processing is executed by the CALLI command (step S5521). The second management processing will be described in detail later.

<Composition of the award winners>
Next, the configuration regarding the winning will be described. Fig. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of the game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As in the first embodiment, a game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, a game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back of the game board 24, discharge passages 231-237 are formed corresponding to the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the outlet 24a, respectively. Game balls that flow into the discharge passages 231-237 flow down the discharge passages 231-237 and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are collected in a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The game balls collected in the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 231-237 is provided with various detection sensors 231a-237a for detecting game balls. The discharge passages 231-237 and the detection sensors 231a-237a are described below. Since there are three general winning openings 31, there are discharge passages 231-233 corresponding to each of the three. The first winning opening detection sensor 231a is provided so that its detection range is located midway through the first discharge passage 231 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31, the second winning opening detection sensor 232a is provided so that its detection range is located midway through the second discharge passage 232 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 233a is provided so that its detection range is located midway through the third discharge passage 233 corresponding to the rightmost general winning opening 31.

A fourth discharge passage section 234 exists corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 234a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the fourth discharge passage section 234, and a game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a while passing through the fourth discharge passage section 234. A fifth discharge passage section 235 exists corresponding to the first operating port 33. A first operating port detection sensor 235a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the fifth discharge passage section 235, and a game ball that enters the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a while passing through the fifth discharge passage section 235. A sixth discharge passage section 236 exists corresponding to the second operating port 34. A second actuation port detection sensor 236a is provided so that its detection range exists midway through the sixth discharge passage section 236, and a game ball that enters the second actuation port 34 is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a as it passes through the sixth discharge passage section 236. A seventh discharge passage section 237 exists corresponding to the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 237a is provided so that its detection range exists midway through the seventh discharge passage section 237, and a game ball that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a as it passes through the seventh discharge passage section 237.

A gaming ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 231a-237a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 231a-237a. In addition, a gate detection sensor 238a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 on its way down the play area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a.

The various detection sensors 231a-238a are all electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 231a-238a are electrically connected to the main MPU 82, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 231a-238a are output to the main MPU 82. Specifically, the various detection sensors 231a-238a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to the above, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Next, we will explain the configuration in the main MPU 82 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and through gate 35 based on the detection results of each detection sensor 231a to 238a. Figure 90 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration in which the detection results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a are input to the main MPU 82.

The main MPU 82 is provided with an input port 241. The input port 241 is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area in which information "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, this area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. Although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 241, in order to limit the types of signals that can be input simultaneously to eight, the group of signals to be input to the input port 241 is switched through switching control by a driver IC.

In the ball entry detection process (step S5508) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), the group of signals to be input to the input port 241 is set to the group of signals from each detection sensor 231a to 238a. In a situation where such settings have been made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, the first bit D1 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 232a, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 234a, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operating opening detection sensor 235a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operating opening detection sensor 236a, the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 237a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 238a.

When the detection sensors 231a to 238a do not detect the passage of a game ball, they output a LOW level signal indicating that they are not detecting as a detection signal, and when they detect the passage of a game ball, they output a HI level signal indicating that they are detecting as a detection signal. When the input port 241 receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, it stores "1" information in the corresponding bit. In other words, when the detection sensors 231a to 238a do not detect the passage of a game ball, they store "0" information corresponding to the information indicating that they are not detecting in the corresponding bit, and when they detect the passage of a game ball, they store "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that they are detecting in the corresponding bit.

Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S5508 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88). Note that steps S5601 to S5623 in the ball entry detection process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, various flags are cleared (step S5601). In the various flags clearing process, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special line winning flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag, which are set in the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control, are cleared to "0". The contents of each of these confirmation flags will be explained later. In addition, the ball entry detection process is executed in each processing of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in a situation where a negative judgment is made in step S5505 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), but in this situation, the execution of the process corresponding to the state of the above confirmation flag is completed after the ball entry detection process is executed in each processing of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), so there is no problem even if the above confirmation flag is cleared to "0" each time the ball entry detection process is started.

If it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a (step S5602: YES). In this case, the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5603), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5604). The first winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a. The 10-ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls should be performed. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives a 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 232a (step S5605: YES). In this case, the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5606), and the value of the 10-ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5607). The second winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 232a.

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 233a (step S5608: YES). In this case, the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5609), and the value of the 10-ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5610). The third winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 233a.

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a (step S5611: YES). In this case, the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5612), and the value of the 15-ball counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by one (step S5613). The special electric winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to identify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32. In the special electric winning confirmation flag of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the special electric winning confirmation flag is set to "1" to determine that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, and the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is reduced by one. In addition, since the content of the special electric winning confirmation flag is also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special electric winning confirmation flag of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) (step S5514), even if the information of the special electric winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the special electric winning confirmation flag of the special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the special electric winning confirmation flag is maintained as it is. The 15-ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times that the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. If the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), and the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 15 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 235a (step S5614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5615), and the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by one (step S5618). The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times that one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88), and when the one prize ball command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives a one-ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to identify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33.

Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring reserved information in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the processes of steps S5701 to S5710 in the process of acquiring reserved information are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the first operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S5701: YES), the number of first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 is less than the upper limit memory number (step S5702: YES), and a process for acquiring the first reserved information is executed. In the process for acquiring the first reserved information, the value of the first special chart reserved counter is first incremented by 1 (step S5703). The display content of the first special chart reserved display section 37c in the special chart unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special chart reserved counter. As a result, the display content of the first special chart reserved display section 37c corresponds to the number of first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111. After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved area 111, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S5703 (step S5704). After that, the first pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5705). By storing the first pending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the first pending command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the first pending display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the first pending information.

The contents of the first operation winning confirmation flag are also referenced in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special chart special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88). Therefore, even if the information of the first operation winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the pending information acquisition process (Figure 92) in the special chart special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the first operation winning confirmation flag is maintained as is.

Returning to the explanation of the ball entry detection process (Figure 91), if it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a (step S5617: YES). In this case, the second actuation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5618), and the value of the one winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5619).

In the pending information acquisition process shown in FIG. 92, if the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S5706: YES), and the number of second pending information stored in the second special chart pending area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S5707: YES), a process for acquiring the second pending information is executed. In the process for acquiring the second pending information, the value of the second special chart pending counter is first incremented by 1 (step S5708). The display content of the second special chart pending display section 37d in the special chart unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special chart pending counter. As a result, the display content of the second special chart pending display section 37d corresponds to the number of second pending information stored in the second special chart pending area 112. Then, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first memory area of the second special pattern holding area 112, that is, the memory area corresponding to the number of reserved memories incremented by 1 in step S5708 (step S5709). Then, the second reserved command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5710). By storing the second reserved command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the second reserved command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the second reserved information.

In addition, since the contents of the second operation winning confirmation flag are also referenced in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special chart special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), even if the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the special chart special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is maintained as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the ball entry detection process (Figure 91), if it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the out hole detection sensor 237a (step S5620: YES). In this case, the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5621). The out confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to identify that one game ball has been detected by the out hole detection sensor 237a.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 238a (step S5622: YES). In this case, the gate winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5623). The gate winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal map normal power control process (step S5515) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), by confirming that the gate winning confirmation flag is set to "1", the process is executed to store the current numerical information of the normal power random number counter C4 as the reserved information of the normal map side in the normal map reserve area 84c, provided that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the normal map reserve area 84c is less than the upper limit of four.

Next, we will explain the processing of step S5509 in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88).

In step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), as already explained, fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI command. The fraud detection processing is included in the non-specific control processing. In other words, when the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) changes from a situation in which specific control processing is being executed to a situation in which non-specific control processing is being executed, the non-specific control processing is called using the CALLI command.

When fraud detection processing is executed by a CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved to the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, and a half carry flag, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program for fraud detection processing, which is non-specific control processing, is started, it becomes possible to save the information in the flag register in the state before it changes after the fraud detection processing is called or the fraud detection processing is started to the stack area 212 for specific control.

When fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) described below are prohibited from interrupting and starting while fraud detection processing, which is non-specific control processing, is being executed.

When fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (Figure 114) are prohibited from interrupting, and then the program corresponding to the fraud detection processing is started.

In this way, by configuring the fraud detection process to be executed by the CALLI command, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the specific control stack area 212 by one command ("CALLI"), and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited from interrupting. Then, the program corresponding to the fraud detection process can be started. Therefore, compared to the case where an command for saving the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the specific control stack area 212, an command for prohibiting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), and an command for starting the program for the fraud detection process are separately provided, the number of commands set in the program for executing the fraud detection process can be reduced. This allows the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program to be reduced.

Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the fraud detection process. Note that the processes in steps S5801 to S5818 in the fraud detection process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, the load command sets "LD SP, Y(u+2)" to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S5801). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify the storage area to which information is to be written by the push command in the stack areas 212 and 214. Each time a push command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the next write command is to be executed, and each time a pop command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the previous write command is to be executed. In addition, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, the storage area to which the information is to be stored is changed to the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5801, the stack pointer is set to the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Then, the information in the WA register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S5802). Also, the information in the BC register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_BCBUF), BC" (step S5803). Also, the information in the DE register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_DEBUF), DE" (step S5804). Also, the information in the HL register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_HLBUF), HL" (step S5805). Also, the information in the IX register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IXBUF), IX" (step S5806). Also, the information in the IY register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IYBUF), IY" (step S5807).

In addition to the flag register already described, the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the master MPU 82 contains various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S5802 to S5807, the information of some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, namely the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, is saved to the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is each 2 bytes.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the information clearing process (step S5808), the test firing process (step S5809), the timer update process for non-specific control (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the information clearing process (step S5808), the test firing process (step S5809), the timer update process for non-specific control (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control is restored to these registers, making it possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the information clearing process (step S5808), the test firing process (step S5809), the timer update process for non-specific control (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, is selectively saved to the work area 213 for non-specific control, thereby making it possible to reduce the capacity reserved for saving the register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to save the above-mentioned register information while securing a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that is available for the information clearing process (step S5808), the test firing process (step S5809), the timer update process for non-specific control (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811).

Note that, of course, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the processing corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

In addition, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 214 for non-specific control, it is possible to keep the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control small. In addition, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as already explained, the writing order of information is such that later information is read first. Therefore, if the reading order of information is shifted due to some kind of noise or the like, all information in the subsequent reading order will be restored to different registers. The probability of such an event occurring increases as the amount of information saved to the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring even when there is a lot of information to be saved.

After executing steps S5802 to S5807, information clearing processing (step S5808), test firing processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are executed. When the information clearing process (step S5808), test firing process (step S5809), non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and fraud detection execution process (step S5811) are executed, subroutine programs corresponding to the information clearing process (step S5808), test firing process (step S5809), non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and fraud detection execution process (step S5811) set in the program for non-specific control are executed, and when the subroutine programs are executed, information for specifying the return address of the fraud detection process after the information clearing process (step S5808), test firing process (step S5809), non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and fraud detection execution process (step S5811) are executed is written to stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the information clearing process (step S5808), test firing process (step S5809), non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and fraud detection execution process (step S5811) are completed, a pop command is used to read information to identify the return address, and the program returns to the fraud detection process indicated by that return address.

In the test firing process in step S5809, test firing information is generated and stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In the timer update process for non-specific control in step S5810, the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control in the main RAM 84 is updated collectively. The timer counters include the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h and the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j. Each time the process in step S5810 is executed, one is subtracted from each of these timer counters 213a to 213j, and a timer counter whose carry flag (or borrow flag) is set to "1" because it has been subtracted from "0" when it was already "0" is cleared to "0". Details of the information clear process (step S5808) and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811) will be explained later.

After executing the information clear process (step S5808), test firing process (step S5809), timer update process for non-specific control (step S5810), and fraud detection execution process (step S5811), a load command is issued to set Y(r+b) as "LD SP, Y(r+b)" in the stack pointer of the master MPU 82 as a fixed address at the time of returning to specific control after the fraud detection process ends (step S5812). The address of Y(r+b) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control immediately before the fraud detection process is called in step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) is always constant, and the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 at that timing (i.e., the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is, for example, the return address information of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) after the fraud detection process is completed. The above-mentioned fixed information of the stack pointer is Y (r + b). Therefore, when the information clear process (step S5808), the test firing process (step S5809), the timer update process for non-specific control (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to specific control is returned to, the fixed information Y (r + b) is set to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, making it possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, eliminating the need to save the stack pointer information of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 84 before starting the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and eliminates the need to reserve an area in the main RAM 84 for the save.

Then, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S5813). Also, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)" (step S5814). Also, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S5815). Also, the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)" (step S5816). Also, the load command "LD IX, (_IXBUF)" overwrites the IX register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S5817). Also, the load command "LD IY, (_IYBUF)" overwrites the IY register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S5818). By executing the processes of steps S5813 to S5818, it is possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the master MPU 82 to the information corresponding to specific control immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started.

After executing the processes of steps S5813 to S5818, the RETI command returns to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) included in the specific control process. Execution of the RETI command restores the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the fraud detection process to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and switches the state in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited from occurring to a state in which they are permitted. This causes the flag register information of the main MPU 82 to return to information for executing specific control, and enables new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process. Note that the RETI command in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) may be configured to maintain the state in which the first timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring.

Because the configuration executes the RETI command, the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the fraud detection process is executed can be restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82 by one command ("RETI"), and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) can be switched from a prohibited state to an allowed state. Therefore, compared to a case where an command for restoring the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the fraud detection process is executed to the flag register of the main MPU 82 and an command for switching from a prohibited state to an allowed state for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the number of commands set in the program for non-specific control processing can be reduced. This allows the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing the program for non-specific control processing to be reduced.

Here, when non-specific control processing is executed, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when specific control processing is resumed. This eliminates the need to secure a memory area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is information that will not be used when non-specific control processing is started again after returning to specific control processing. In other words, information required for multiple rounds of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when non-specific control processing is executed, no problem occurs in executing non-specific control processing.

Next, the information clearing process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5808 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the information clearing process. Note that the processes in steps S5901 to S5904 in the information clearing process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the information clearing process, processing is executed to clear to "0" the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operational winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operational winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t, all of which are already explained in the respective memory areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control. The first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special line winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t all have a data capacity of 1 byte, and the addresses are set so that they are consecutive numbers for each of these areas. The addresses increase by "1" in the order of the first general winning abnormality flag 213l → the second general winning abnormality flag 213m → the third general winning abnormality flag 213n → the special line winning abnormality flag 213o → the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p → the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q → the out abnormality flag 213r → the gate winning abnormality flag 213s → the magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

In the information clearing process, a start address is first set in a specific register of the master MPU 82 as the address to be cleared (step S5901). The start address is the address of the first general winning abnormality flag 213l.

Then, the area corresponding to the address to be cleared is cleared to "0" (step S5902). If the address to be cleared is the start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, so the first general winning abnormality flag 213l is cleared to "0".

It is then determined whether the address to be cleared is the final address (step S5903). The final address is the address of the magnetic abnormality flag 213t. If the address to be cleared is not the final address (step S5903: NO), the address to be cleared is updated to the next address in the sequence (step S5904). Specifically, the address to be cleared is incremented by 1. Then, the area corresponding to the address after the increment is cleared to "0" in step S5902, and the processing of step S5903 is executed.

When the processing of step S5904 is executed in a situation where the address to be cleared is the start address, the address to be cleared becomes the address of the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, and the second general winning abnormality flag 213m is cleared to "0." Also, when the processing of step S5904 is executed in a situation where the address of the second general winning abnormality flag 213m is the address to be cleared, the address to be cleared becomes the address of the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, and the third general winning abnormality flag 213n is cleared to "0."

When the address of the magnetic abnormality flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set as the address to be cleared in step S5904 by repeating the above steps S5902 to S5904, a positive judgment is made in step S5903 after the magnetic abnormality flag 213t is cleared to "0". The information clearing process is terminated by making a positive judgment in step S5903. Note that in the initial setting process (FIG. 86), the clearing process in step S5902 is not performed on the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, the second security counter 213k, the normal counter area 251, the calculation result storage area 252, the display target setting area 253, the switching timing counter 254, and the display target counter 255 in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

By executing the information clearing process as described above, it becomes possible to clear the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special line winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operational winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operational winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t to "0" before the fraud detection execution process described below is executed. The effect of clearing these flags 213l to 213t to "0" before the fraud detection execution process is executed will be explained later.

Next, the fraud detection execution process that is executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5811 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the fraud detection execution process. Note that the processes in steps S6001 to S6019 in the fraud detection execution process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether the second activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6001). As already explained, if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second activation port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) included in the processing of specific control, that is, if one game ball has entered the second activation port 34, the second activation winning confirmation flag is set to "1".

If the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S6001: YES), it is determined whether the normal power release state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6002), and it is determined whether the value of the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6003).

Here, the normal power control processing executed in the normal power control processing of step S5515 of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88) will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 96. The normal power control processing is processing for controlling the normal power release state of the normal power accessory 34a in the second operating port 34, similar to the first embodiment described above. Note that the processing of steps S6101 to S6111 in the normal power control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, it is determined whether the normal power open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" to determine whether the second operating port 34 is open (step S6101). The normal power open state flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine that a drive signal is being output to the normal power drive unit 34b and that the second operating port 34 is open. The normal power open state flag is set to "1" when the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started in the normal power confirmation process (step S309) of the normal power control process (FIG. 15), and the normal power open state flag is also set to "1" when the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started in step S6110 described later.

If the normal power open state flag is set to "1" (step S6101: YES), a process for determining whether or not the closing is determined is executed (step S6102). In the process for determining whether or not the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", that is, when a winning has occurred in the second operation port 34, the value of the normal power winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1. As in the first embodiment, the normal power winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 in the current normal power open state has reached the upper limit of 10 balls on the normal power side. If the value of the normal power winning counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the second operation port 34 has been established. In addition, if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 34 or the value of the normal power winning counter is not "0", it is determined whether the value of the normal power side timer counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" to determine whether the duration of one opening of the second operating port 34 has elapsed. If the value of the normal power side timer counter is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the second operating port 34 has been met.

If the closing condition of the second actuation port 34 is met (step S6103: YES), a closed setting process is executed (step S6104). In the closed setting process, the second actuation port 34 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b. After that, the normal power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6105).

Then, information on the normal power monitoring delay period is set in the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6106). The normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period during which the detection of a game ball by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a provided in the second actuation port 34 is treated as valid even after the second actuation port 34, which is in an open state, becomes closed. The normal power monitoring delay period is set to a period equal to or longer than the longest period expected as the period until a game ball that has entered the second actuation port 34, which is in an open state, is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a, and is specifically set to one second.

Then, the end branch process is executed (step S6107). In the end branch process, if the value of the normal power winning counter is "0", the normal power open state is terminated and the value of the normal power counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing of the normal power control process becomes the normal power change start process (step S307). If the value of the normal power winning counter is 1 or more, the value of the normal power open counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1. As in the first embodiment, the normal power open counter is a counter for specifying the number of times that the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the normal power open state in the current normal power open state by the main MPU 82. If the value of the normal power open counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", the normal power open state is terminated and the value of the normal power counter in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next round of the normal map normal power control process becomes the normal map change start process (step S307). If the value of the normal power release counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or greater, information on the interval period on the normal power side (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the normal map side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. In this case, since the value of the normal map normal power counter is maintained, the process to be executed in the next round of the normal map normal power control process remains the normal power control process (Figure 96).

When it is determined that the value of the normal power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control in the normal power control process is "0" (step S6101: NO), it is determined whether the value of the normal power side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the interval period on the normal power side has elapsed (step S6108). If the interval period on the normal power side has elapsed (step S6108: YES), information corresponding to the duration of the long open state on the normal power side (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the normal power side timer counter (step S6109). In addition, the second operating port 34 is opened by again outputting a drive signal to the drive unit 34b for normal power (step S6110). After that, the normal power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6111). In this case, since the value of the normal power counter is maintained, the process to be executed in the next processing of the normal power control process is maintained as the normal power control process (Fig. 96).

Returning to the explanation of the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), in a situation where the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6001: YES), the normal power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S6002: NO), and further, if the value of the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6003: YES), it means that a game ball was detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a even after the period during which the detection of a game ball by the second operation port detection sensor 236a is treated as valid after the second operation port 34 is closed has elapsed. In this case, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6004). As already explained, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is provided in correspondence with the second operation port 34. If the result of the monitoring process using the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c or the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213g is that an abnormal game ball has been detected by the non-specific control process, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to "1" by the non-specific control process.

Then, the normal power winning abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S6005). By storing the normal power winning abnormality command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the normal power winning abnormality command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the normal power winning abnormality command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the display light-emitting unit 64, speaker unit 65, and pattern display device 41 to issue an alert indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the winning of the second operating port 34.

Then, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6006). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the amusement hall's management computer, and, if an external output is required, is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is to be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6001, if a positive judgment is made in step S6002, if a negative judgment is made in step S6003, or if the processing of step S6006 is executed, it is determined whether or not the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6007). As already explained, if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) included in the processing of specific control, that is, if one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, the special electric winning confirmation flag is set to "1".

If the special line winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S6007: YES), it is determined whether the special line open status flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6008), and it is determined whether the value of the special line monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009).

Here, the special line start processing, special line open processing, and special line closed processing executed in the special line control processing of step S5514 of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88) will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of Figs. 97(a) to 97(c). The special line start processing, special line open processing, and special line closed processing are processing for controlling the opening and closing of the special line prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, as in the first embodiment. Note that the processing of steps S6201 to S6208 in the special line start processing, steps S6301 to S6307 in the special line open processing, and steps S6401 to S6407 in the special line closed processing are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the program for specific control and data for specific control.

97(a), in the special call start process, by determining whether the value of the special picture side timer counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is "0", it is determined whether the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode has elapsed (step S6201). If a positive determination is made in step S6201, the round counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set with information on the number of round games corresponding to the game result that triggered the execution of the current opening and closing execution mode (step S6202). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening and closing execution mode by the main MPU 82, as in the first embodiment. In addition, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special picture side timer counter (step S6203). In addition, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6204). The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of the upper limit number of winnings by the main MPU 82, as in the first embodiment. In addition, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to an open state by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b (step S6205).

Then, the special line open status flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6206). The special line open status flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that a drive signal is being output to the special line drive unit 32b and that the special line winning device 32 is in an open state.

Then, the special line release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6207). When the special line release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special line release command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the special line release command, it causes the display light-emitting unit 64, speaker unit 65, and pattern display unit 41 to execute an effect indicating that the special line winning device 32 has been opened.

Then, the value of the special diagram special line counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6208). As a result, the value of the special diagram special line counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special line release processing (Figure 97 (b)).

In the special line open process shown in FIG. 97(b), a process for determining whether or not the round has been opened is executed (step S6301). In the process for determining whether or not the special line winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", that is, when a winning has occurred in the special line winning device 32, the value of the winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1. If the value of the winning counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the special line winning device 32 has been met. In addition, if a winning has not occurred in the special line winning device 32 or the value of the winning counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the value of the special chart side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". If the value of the special chart side timer counter is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the special line winning device 32 has been met.

If the closing condition of the special line winning device 32 is met (step S6302: YES), a closing setting process is executed (step S6303). In the closing setting process, the special line winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the special line drive unit 32b. After that, the special line open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6304).

Then, the information on the special line monitoring delay period is set in the special line monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6305). The special line monitoring delay timer counter 211b is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period during which the detection of a game ball by the special line detection sensor 234a provided in the special line winning device 32 is treated as valid even after the special line winning device 32, which is in an open state, becomes closed. The special line monitoring delay period is set to a period equal to or longer than the longest period expected as the period until a game ball that has won the special line winning device 32, which is in an open state, is detected by the special line detection sensor 234a, and is specifically set to one second.

After that, the round counter value in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6306), and then the ending branch process is executed (step S6307). In the ending branch process, if the round counter value after subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special diagram side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control, and then the value of the special diagram special signal counter in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special diagram special signal counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special signal closed process (FIG. 97 (c)). On the other hand, if the round counter value after subtraction is "0", the ending period information (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special diagram side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. In addition, the ending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82. When the ending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the ending command to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the ending command, it causes the display light-emitting unit 64, speaker unit 65, and pattern display device 41 to execute the ending performance of the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 2. As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "6", which corresponds to the special electricity end process (step S612) of the special chart special electricity control process (Figure 18).

In the special line closed process shown in FIG. 97(c), it is determined whether the interval period has elapsed by determining whether the value of the special chart side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6401). If a positive determination is made in step S6401, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special chart side timer counter (step S6402). In addition, the winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "10" (step S6403). In addition, the special line winning device 32 is set to the open state by outputting a drive signal to the special line drive unit 32b (step S6404).

Then, the special line open status flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6405). Then, the special line open command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S6406). By storing the special line open command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special line open command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the special line open command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the display light-emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the pattern display device 41 to perform an effect indicating that the special line winning device 32 has been opened. Then, the value of the special chart special line counter in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S6407). As a result, the value of the special chart special line counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special line open processing (Figure 97 (b)).

Returning to the explanation of the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95), in a situation where the special line winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6007: YES), the special line open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S6008: NO), and the value of the special line monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009: YES), it means that a game ball was detected by the special line detection sensor 234a even after the period during which the detection of a game ball by the special line detection sensor 234a is treated as valid after the special line winning device 32 has been closed. In this case, the special line winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6010). As already explained, the special line winning abnormality flag 213o is provided in correspondence with the special line winning device 32. If the non-specific control process determines that an abnormal ball has been detected as a result of the monitoring process using the special line monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213e, the non-specific control process sets the special line winning abnormality flag 213o to "1".

Then, the special line winning abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6011). When the special line winning abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special line winning abnormality command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the special line winning abnormality command, it causes the display light-emitting unit 64, speaker unit 65 and pattern display device 41 to issue an alert indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the winning of the special line winning device 32.

Then, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6012). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the amusement hall's management computer, and, if an external output is required, is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is to be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6007, if a positive judgment is made in step S6008, if a negative judgment is made in step S6009, or if the processing of step S6012 is executed, it is determined whether or not a confirmation flag corresponding to the value of the monitored counter provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" among the first winning confirmation flag, second winning confirmation flag, third winning confirmation flag, special line winning confirmation flag, first operation winning confirmation flag, second operation winning confirmation flag, out confirmation flag, and gate winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6013).

The monitored counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the type of confirmation flag to be monitored in steps S6014 to S6016. At the timing when the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is started, the value of the monitored counter is "0". The types of confirmation flags to be monitored in steps S6014 to S6016 are as follows: when the monitored counter has a value of "0", it is the first winning confirmation flag; when the monitored counter has a value of "1", it is the second winning confirmation flag; when the monitored counter has a value of "2", it is the third winning confirmation flag; when the monitored counter has a value of "3", it is the special line winning confirmation flag; when the monitored counter has a value of "4", it is the first operation winning confirmation flag; when the monitored counter has a value of "5", it is the second operation winning confirmation flag; when the monitored counter has a value of "6", it is the out confirmation flag; and when the monitored counter has a value of "7", it is the gate winning confirmation flag.

If the confirmation flag corresponding to the current value of the monitored counter is set to "1" (step S6013: YES), it is determined whether the value of the winning monitoring timer counter 213a-213h corresponding to the value of the monitored counter in the work area 213 for non-specific control among the winning monitoring timer counters 213a-213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control is 1 or greater (step S6014).

As already explained, the first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c are counters used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period from when a game ball is detected by the winning port detection sensor 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning port 31 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. The fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213d is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period from when a game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a of the special electric winning device 32 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. The fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period from when a game ball is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 235a provided in the first operation port 33 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. As already explained, the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the period from when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a of the second actuation port 34 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. The seventh winning monitoring timer counter 213g is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the period from when one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a provided at the outlet 24a to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. As already explained, the eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the period from when one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a provided at the through gate 35 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid.

If the value of the monitored counter is "0", the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a is the one to be checked. If the value of the monitored counter is "1", the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is the one to be checked. If the value of the monitored counter is "2", the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c is the one to be checked. If the value of the monitored counter is "3", the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213d is the one to be checked. If the value of the monitored counter is "4", the fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e is the one to be checked. If the value of the monitored counter is "5", the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f is the one to be checked. If the value of the monitored counter is "6", the seventh winning monitoring timer counter 213g is the one to be checked. If the value of the monitored counter is "7", the eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h is the one to be checked.

When the value of the winning monitoring timer counter 213a-213h corresponding to the monitored counter value is 1 or more (step S6014: YES), it means that the detection result of the detection sensor 231a-238a corresponding to the monitored counter value becomes the detection result of a new game ball before the detection invalid period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the detection result of the detection sensor 231a-238a became the detection result of one game ball. An example of a case where such a situation occurs is when chattering of a game ball occurs within the detection range of the detection sensor 231a-238a, and the detection result of the detection sensor 231a-238a becomes the detection result corresponding to the passage of multiple game balls in response to the passage of one game ball. The detection invalid period is set as a period during which no new detection of a game ball occurs when the game ball passes normally without chattering.

If a positive judgment is made in step S6014, it means that the detection of the game ball occurred in the detection sensor 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter before the detection invalid period has elapsed. In this case, among the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special line winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, and the gate winning abnormality flag 213s in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the abnormality flags 213l to 213s corresponding to the value of the monitored counter are set to "1" (step S6015). If the value of the monitored counter is "0", the first general winning abnormality flag 213l is set to "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "1", the second general winning abnormality flag 213m is set to "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "2", the third general winning abnormality flag 213n is set to "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "3", the special winning abnormality flag 213o is set to "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "4", the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p is set to "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "5", the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "6", the out abnormality flag 213r is set to "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "7", the gate winning abnormality flag 213s is set to "1". As a result, if a game ball is detected before the detection invalid period has elapsed in the detection sensor 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter, the corresponding abnormality flag 213l to 213s is set to "1".

If a negative judgment is made in step S6014, or if the processing of step S6015 is executed, a detection invalid period is set in the winning monitoring timer counter 213a-213h corresponding to the value of the monitored counter (step S6016). As a result, a detection invalid period is set in the winning monitoring timer counter 213a-213h corresponding to the monitored counter, regardless of whether a game ball is detected before the detection invalid period has elapsed in the detection sensor 231a-238a corresponding to the monitored counter, or whether a game ball is detected after the detection invalid period has elapsed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value of "7" (step S6017). If the value of the monitored counter is less than the maximum value (step S6017: NO), the value of the monitored counter is incremented by 1 (step S6018) and the process returns to step S6013. As a result, the monitoring process of steps S6014 to S6016 is executed for the next target detection sensor 231a to 238a. By executing the process of steps S6013 to S6018 as described above, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected during the detection invalid period for each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a.

If the value of the monitored counter is at its maximum value (step S6017: YES), magnetic monitoring processing is executed (step S6019). FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the magnetic monitoring processing. Note that steps S6501 to S6509 in the magnetic monitoring processing are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether the value of the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control is "0" (step S6501). As already explained, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify a magnetic monitoring delay period during which no monitoring of magnetic anomalies is performed. The magnetic monitoring delay period is arbitrary, but is set to 0.5 seconds in this pachinko machine 10.

If the value of the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j is "0" (step S6501: YES), it is determined whether the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor provided on the back of the game board 24 corresponds to magnetic detection (step S6502). If a negative determination is made in step S6502, the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6503). As already explained, the magnetic detection counter 213i is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times that a magnetic abnormality has been identified.

If a positive judgment is made in step S6502, the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6504). Then, if the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the abnormality reference number (specifically, "3") (step S6505: YES), the magnetic anomaly flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6506). By setting the magnetic anomaly flag 213t to "1", the main MPU 82 executes processing to deal with the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly.

Then, the magnetic anomaly command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6507). By storing the magnetic anomaly command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the magnetic anomaly command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the magnetic anomaly command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the display light-emitting unit 64, speaker unit 65, and pattern display unit 41 to issue an alert indicating that a magnetic anomaly has occurred.

Then, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6508). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not a pulsed security signal needs to be output from the main MPU 82 to the amusement hall's management computer, and, if an external output is required, is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the pulsed security signal is to be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6505, or if the processing of step S6508 is executed, a magnetic monitoring delay period is set in the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6509). This starts measurement of the magnetic monitoring delay period during which no monitoring of magnetic anomalies is performed. By setting the magnetic monitoring delay period during which no monitoring of magnetic anomalies is performed in this manner, and by configuring the magnetic detection counter 213i to identify the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly when the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i reaches or exceeds the abnormality reference number set as a number of times as described above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly from being identified as occurring even when magnetism is generated due to electrical noise rather than an unauthorized magnetic output.

Next, the fraud response processing executed in step S5511, which is a processing sequence that follows the fraud detection processing including the fraud detection execution processing in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 99. Note that the processing in steps S6601 to S6625 in the fraud response processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6601: YES), it means that the detection of the game ball (i.e., winning into the general winning port 31) by the first winning port detection sensor 231a identified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, is due to an abnormality caused by chattering, etc. In this case, although the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control was set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, the first winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6602). The fraud response process (Figure 99) is set to a processing order that is later than the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and earlier than the second management process described below. Therefore, in the second management process described below, it is determined that a game ball has not been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a.

Then, the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S6603). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is incremented by 1 in response to the detection of a game ball by the first prize opening detection sensor 231a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process. In addition, if the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a process is executed to send a 10 prize ball command to the payout control device 77 to instruct the payout of 10 game balls in the payout output process in step S5518, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In this case, if the detection of game balls by the first winning port detection sensor 231a is due to an abnormality, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud response process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing time in which the value of the 10 prize ball counter is incremented by 1. This makes it possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

In steps S6604 to S6606, the same processing as in steps S6601 to S6603 is performed for the second winning hole detection sensor 232a, and in steps S6607 to S6609, the same processing as in steps S6601 to S6603 is performed for the third winning hole detection sensor 233a. Specifically, if the second general winning abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6604: YES), the second winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6605), and the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S6606). Furthermore, if the third general winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6607: YES), the third winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6608), and the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S6609).

If the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6610: YES), this means that the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a (i.e., the winning of the game ball into the special electric winning device 32) identified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, is due to an abnormality such as chattering, or fraud caused by the game ball entering the special electric winning device 32 that should be in a closed state. In this case, although the special electric winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control was set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, the special electric winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6611). The fraud response process (Figure 99) is set in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) after the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) and before the special chart special electric control process (step S5514) and the second management process described below. Therefore, it is determined that the game ball has not been detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the special electric open process (Figure 97 (b)) or the second management process described below.

Then, the value of the 15 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S6612). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1 in response to the detection of a game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process. In addition, if the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a process is executed to send a 15 prize ball command to the payout control device 77 to instruct the payout of 15 game balls in the payout output process in step S5518, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In this case, if the detection of game balls by the special electric detection sensor 234a is due to an abnormality or fraud, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud response process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing time in which the value of the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1. This makes it possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

If the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6613: YES), it means that the detection of the game ball (i.e., winning at the first operation port 33) in the first operation port detection sensor 235a identified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, is due to an abnormality such as chattering. In this case, although the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control was set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, the first operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6614). The fraud response process (FIG. 99) is set in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) and before the special chart special power control process (step S5514) and the second management process described below. Therefore, in the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 92) or the second management process described below, it is determined that a game ball has not been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a.

Then, the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S6615). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the value of the one prize ball counter is incremented by 1 in response to the detection of a game ball by the first operating port detection sensor 235a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process. In addition, if the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, a process is executed to send a one prize ball command to the payout control device 77 to instruct the payout of one game ball in the payout output process in step S5518, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In this case, if the detection of a game ball by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a is due to an abnormality, the value of the single prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud response process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing time in which the value of the single prize ball counter was incremented by 1. This makes it possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

If the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6616: YES), it means that the detection of the game ball by the second operation port detection sensor 236a (i.e., winning the second operation port 34) identified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, is due to an abnormality such as chattering, or a fraudulent act of allowing the game ball to enter the second operation port 34 that should be in a closed state. In this case, although the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control was set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, the second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6617). The fraud response process (FIG. 99) is set in a processing order that is later than the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), but earlier than the special chart special power control process (step S5514), the normal chart normal power control process (step S5515), and the second management process described below. Therefore, in the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 92), the normal power control process (FIG. 96), or the second management process described below, it is determined that a game ball has not been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a.

Then, the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S6618). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the value of the one prize ball counter is incremented by 1 in response to the detection of a game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process. In addition, if the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, a process is executed to send a one prize ball command to the payout control device 77 to instruct the payout of one game ball in the payout output process in step S5518, which is a processing sequence prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In this case, if the detection of a game ball by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a is due to an abnormality or fraud, the value of the single prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud response process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing time in which the value of the single prize ball counter was incremented by 1. This makes it possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

If the out abnormality flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6619: YES), this means that the detection of the game ball by the out hole detection sensor 237a (i.e., the ball entering the out hole 24a) identified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, is due to an abnormality such as chattering. In this case, although the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control was set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, the out confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6620). The fraud response process (Figure 99) is set to a processing order that is later than the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and earlier than the second management process described below. Therefore, in the second management process described below, it is determined that the game ball has not been detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a.

If the gate winning abnormality flag 213s in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6621: YES), this means that the detection of the game ball (i.e., winning through the through gate 35) in the gate detection sensor 238a identified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, is due to an abnormality such as chattering. In this case, although the gate winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control was set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order prior to this fraud response process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing round, the gate winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6622). The fraud response process (Figure 99) is set in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) after the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) and before the normal play control process (step S5515). Therefore, in the process to obtain reserved information on the normal play side in the normal play control process (step S5515), it is determined that the game ball has not been detected by the gate detection sensor 238a.

If the magnetic anomaly flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6623: YES), the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6624). If the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), but the processes of steps S5506 to S5520 are not executed by making a positive determination in step S5505. As a result, when it is determined that a magnetic anomaly has occurred, the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history are executed, but the processes for progressing the game are not executed.

In the fraud response process, steps S6601 to S6624 are executed, and then security processing is executed in step S6625. Security processing will be described in detail later.

The manner in which the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 236a is monitored to determine whether it is normal or not is explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 100. FIG. 100(a) shows the period during which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is being executed, FIG. 100(b) shows the period during which the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process is being executed, FIG. 100(c) shows the state of the second activation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control, FIG. 100(d) shows the period during which the fraud response process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process is being executed, FIG. 100(e) shows the period during which the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 92) included in the specific control process is being executed, FIG. 100(f) shows the period during which the information clear process (FIG. 94) included in the non-specific control process is being executed, FIG. 100(g) shows the period during which the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process is being executed, and FIG. 100(h) shows the state of the second activation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

First, we will explain the cases where the detection of a game ball by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a is not due to an abnormality or fraud.

At the timing of t1, a new processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, at the timing of t2, when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) of the processing round is being executed, the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b). In the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91), the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control are first cleared to "0". In addition, since it is determined in the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91) that a game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a, the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 100(c).

After that, at the timing of t4, the ball entry detection process (Fig. 91) ends as shown in Fig. 100(b), and at the timing of t4, the fraud detection process (Fig. 93) is called by the CALLI command, and the information clearing process (Fig. 94) starts as shown in Fig. 100(f). As already explained, in the information clearing process (Fig. 94), the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0" among the memory areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control.

After that, at the timing of t5, the information clearing process (Fig. 94) ends as shown in Fig. 100(f), and at the timing of t5, the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) starts as shown in Fig. 100(g). In the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) included in the processing of non-specific control, it is determined that the second activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", but the setting of the second activation winning confirmation flag to "1" is not determined to be due to an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 100(h), the second activation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1", and the information of the second activation winning abnormality flag 213q is maintained at "0".

After that, at the timing of t6, the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) ends as shown in Fig. 100(g), and at the timing of t6, the fraud response process (Fig. 99) starts as shown in Fig. 100(d). In the fraud response process (Fig. 99) included in the processing of specific control, it is determined that the second activation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1", so the process of clearing the second activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control to "0" is not executed. Therefore, the state in which the second activation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" is maintained as shown in Fig. 100(c).

After that, the fraud response process (Fig. 99) ends at the timing of t7 as shown in Fig. 100(d), and the pending information acquisition process (Fig. 92) starts at the timing of t7 as shown in Fig. 100(e). In the pending information acquisition process (Fig. 92), the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" as shown in Fig. 100(c), so the process for acquiring the second pending information is executed on the condition that the number of second pending information stored in the second special chart reserve area 112 is less than the upper limit number of stored information. The state in which the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" is released by clearing to "0" in the ball entry detection process (Fig. 91) in the next processing of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88). After that, the current processing of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) ends at the timing of t8 as shown in Fig. 100(a).

Next, we will explain what happens when the detection of a game ball by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a is due to an abnormality or fraud.

At the timing of t9, a new processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, at the timing of t10, when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) of the processing round is being executed, the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b). In the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91), the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control are first cleared to "0". Furthermore, when it is determined in the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) that a game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a, the second actuation winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" at timing t11, as shown in Figure 100 (c).

After that, at the timing of t12, the ball entry detection process (Fig. 91) ends as shown in Fig. 100(b), and at the timing of t12, the fraud detection process (Fig. 93) is called by the CALLI command, and the information clearing process (Fig. 94) starts as shown in Fig. 100(f). As already explained, in the information clearing process (Fig. 94), the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0" among the memory areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control.

After that, at the timing of t13, the information clearing process (Fig. 94) ends as shown in Fig. 100(f), and at the timing of t13, the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) starts as shown in Fig. 100(g). In the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) included in the processing of non-specific control, it is determined that the second activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". Then, it is determined that the setting of the second activation winning confirmation flag to "1" is due to an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, at the timing of t14, the second activation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" as shown in Fig. 100(h).

After that, at the timing of t15, the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) ends as shown in Fig. 100(g), and at the timing of t15, the fraud response process (Fig. 99) starts as shown in Fig. 100(d). In the fraud response process (Fig. 99) included in the processing of specific control, it is determined that the second activation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". Therefore, at the timing of t16, the second activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" as shown in Fig. 100(c).

After that, at the timing of t17, the fraud response process (Fig. 99) ends as shown in Fig. 100(d), and the pending information acquisition process (Fig. 92) starts as shown in Fig. 100(e) at the timing of t17. In the pending information acquisition process (Fig. 92), the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1" as shown in Fig. 100(c) and therefore the process for acquiring the second pending information is not executed. After that, at the timing of t18, the current round of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) ends as shown in Fig. 100(a).

After that, at timing t19, a new processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, at timing t20, when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) of that processing round is being executed, the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b). In the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91), it is determined that a game ball has not been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a, and therefore the second actuation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 100(c).

After that, at the timing of t21, the ball entry detection process (Fig. 91) ends as shown in Fig. 100 (b), and at the timing of t21, the fraud detection process (Fig. 93) is called by the CALLI command, and the information clearing process (Fig. 94) starts as shown in Fig. 100 (f). In the information clearing process (Fig. 94), as already explained, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first actuation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second actuation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0" in each storage area of the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, at the timing of t22, the second actuation winning abnormality flag 213q is cleared to "0" as shown in Fig. 100 (h). Thereafter, at timing t23, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100(f), and at the same timing t23, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts as shown in FIG. 100(g).

As described above, the specific control processes include the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) for determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a which detect the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the outlet port 24a and the through gate 35, and the processes for progressing the game in response to the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a (process for acquiring pending information (Figure 92), general electric control process (Figure 96), process during special electric release (Figure 97 (c)), payout output process (step S5518), etc.), whereas the non-specific control processes include the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) for monitoring whether the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud. As a result, since there is no need to execute the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) for monitoring whether the detection of the game ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud during the specific control process, the data capacity allocated to the specific control program and specific control data in the main ROM 83 can be allocated to processes other than the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95).

In the processing sequence of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88), after the ball entry detection processing (Figure 91), which is included in the processing of specific control and is a processing for determining whether or not a gaming ball has been detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a, a fraud detection execution processing (Figure 95), which is included in the processing of non-specific control and is for monitoring whether or not the detection of a gaming ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud, is executed, and after the fraud detection execution processing (Figure 95), processing which is included in the processing of specific control and is for progressing the game in response to the detection of a gaming ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a (hold information acquisition processing (Figure 92), normal power control processing (Figure 96), special power open processing (Figure 97 (c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent processing for progressing the game in response to detection of a gaming ball by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a due to an abnormality or fraud from being executed as a non-specific control process, even if the configuration is such that the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of a gaming ball by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process.

If the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) included in the processing of specific control determines that a game ball has been detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a, then each confirmation flag provided in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", and if the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) included in the processing of non-specific control determines that the detection of the game ball is due to an abnormality or fraud, then each abnormality flag 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1", and if the abnormality flags 213l to 213s are set to "1", the confirmation flags corresponding to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s that were set to "1" in the fraud response process (Figure 99) included in the processing of specific control are cleared to "0". This allows the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control to be read in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, while information can be written to the work area 211 for specific control in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, but not in non-specific control processing; and further allows the information stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control to be read in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, while information can be written to the work area 213 for non-specific control in both non-specific control processing and not in specific control processing, but it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

After the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed, the fraud response process (Fig. 99) included in the specific control process is executed before the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) is executed again. Then, in the fraud response process (Fig. 99), the confirmation flag is cleared to "0" and the counters for various prize balls are subtracted according to the abnormal flags 213l to 213s for which information was set in the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95). In this case, the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) first clears the abnormal flags 213l to 213s to "0", and then executes a process for setting information in the abnormal flags 213l to 213s. This makes it possible to clear the abnormal flags 213l to 213s to "0" at an appropriate timing in the non-specific control process in a configuration in which writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process.

<Configuration regarding security signals>
Next, the security processing executed in step S6625 of the fraud response processing (FIG. 99) included in the specific control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 101. Note that the processing in steps S6701 to S6714 in the security processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the master MPU 82 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

First, it is determined whether the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control has increased since the previous security process was executed (step S6701). The work area 211 for specific control is provided with a previous value storage area 211e (see FIG. 78) for storing the value of the second security counter 213k when the security process is executed. In step S6701, it is determined whether the value of the second security counter 213k is greater than the value in the previous value storage area 211e.

If the value of the second security counter 213k is greater than the value in the previous value storage area 211e (step S6701: YES), the value in the previous value storage area 211e is subtracted from the value of the second security counter 213k, and the value after the subtraction is added as an increment to the first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6702). After that, the value of the second security counter 213k is overwritten in the previous value storage area 211e (step S6703).

As already explained, the first security counter 211a is incremented by "1" when the setting value update process (step S4916) is executed in the main processing (Figure 81) (step S4917) and when the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed in the main processing (Figure 81) (step S4920). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is incremented by "1" when a break is confirmed in the break/short circuit process (FIG. 87) (step S5405), when a short circuit is confirmed in the break/short circuit process (FIG. 87) (step S5409), when a game ball is confirmed to have entered the second operating port 34 that is in a closed state in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) (step S6006), when a game ball is confirmed to have entered the special line winning device 32 that is in a closed state in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) (step S6012), and when a magnetic abnormality is confirmed to have occurred in the magnetic monitoring process (FIG. 98) (step S6508).

If a negative judgment is made in step S6701 or if the processing of step S6703 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704). If the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704: YES), the security flag 211f (see FIG. 78) provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6705). If the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71 becomes illuminated. Note that if the value of the security flag 211f is "0", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in an off state. The state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 continues, and the security flag 211f is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear process (step S4919) in the main process (Figure 81) or the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the setting value update process (Figure 83) is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6704 or if the processing of step S6705 is executed, it is judged whether or not the current situation is one in which a security signal is being externally output from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall (step S6706). If a security signal is not being externally output (step S6706: NO), it is judged whether or not the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6707), and it is judged whether or not the value of the duration counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6708). The duration counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to measure the output duration when the security signal output is continued for the output duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds), and to measure the stop duration when the output of the security signal is continued for the stop duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds). The value set in the duration counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process for specific control in step S5510 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) is executed.

If the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or greater and the value of the duration counter is "0" (steps S6707 and S6708: YES), a security signal output start process is executed (step S6709). This starts the external output of a security signal from the main MPU 82 to the gaming hall's management computer. After that, information corresponding to the output duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the duration counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6710). In addition, the value of the first security counter 211a is decremented by 1 (step S6711).

If the security signal is being output externally (step S6706: YES), it is determined whether the output duration has elapsed by determining whether the value of the duration counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6712). If the value of the duration counter is "0" (step S6712: YES), a process to stop the output of the security signal is executed (step S6713). This stops the external output of the security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the amusement hall. After that, information corresponding to the stop duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the duration counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6714).

Next, the manner in which the security signal is output to the outside will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 102. FIG. 102(a) shows the period during which the specific control process is being executed, FIG. 102(b) shows the value of the first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control, FIG. 102(c) shows the period during which the non-specific control process is being executed, FIG. 102(d) shows the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control, FIG. 102(e) shows the period during which the security process (FIG. 101) included in the specific control process is being executed, FIG. 102(f) shows the state of the security flag 211f in the work area 211 for specific control, FIG. 102(g) shows the period during which the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71 is in a light-emitting state, and FIG. 102(h) shows the period during which the security signal is output to the management computer of the game hall from the main MPU 82.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), specific control processing is executed in the main MPU 82 from timing t1 to timing t3. In this case, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, and the main processing (FIG. 81) is executed. Then, a setting value update processing (step S4916) or a RAM clear processing (step S4919) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 81), and the value of the first security counter 211a is incremented by 1 at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 102(b).

After that, at timing t3, while specific control processing is being executed in the main processing (Figure 81), the first management processing (Figure 85) included in the non-specific control processing is called by the CALLI command (step S4927). The first management processing (Figure 85) is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 as shown in Figure 102 (c). In this case, the occurrence of a break or short circuit is identified by the break/short circuit processing (Figure 87) in the first management processing (Figure 85). Therefore, at timing t4, the value of the second security counter 213k is incremented by 1 as shown in Figure 102 (d).

After that, the first management process (FIG. 85) ends at timing t5, and specific control processing is executed from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control processing, the processes of steps S4927 to S4932 in the main processing (FIG. 81) and the processes of steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) are executed.

After that, at the timing of t6, while the specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88), the fraud detection processing (Fig. 93) included in the non-specific control processing is called by the CALLI command (step S5509). The fraud detection processing (Fig. 93) is executed from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 as shown in Fig. 102 (c). In this case, the fraud detection execution processing (Fig. 95) in the fraud detection processing (Fig. 93) does not identify the winning of the second operating port 34, which is in the closed state, the winning of the special electric winning device 32, which is in the closed state, or the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly, so the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being incremented by 1.

After that, the fraud detection process (Fig. 93) ends at time t7, and specific control processing is executed from time t7 to time t10 as shown in Fig. 102(a). In this specific control processing, steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) are executed. In this case, security processing (Fig. 101) is executed in the fraud response process (step S5511) from time t8 to time t9 as shown in Fig. 102(e).

In the security process (Figure 101), by determining that the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control has increased compared to the value in the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control, the increased value is added to the first security counter 211a. Therefore, as shown in Figure 102 (b), the value of the first security counter 211a increases from "1" to "2" at timing t8.

In the security process (Fig. 101), by determining that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or greater, the security flag 212f is set to "1" at timing t8 as shown in Fig. 102(f). By setting the security flag 212f to "1", the anomaly display device 206 becomes illuminated at timing t8 as shown in Fig. 102(g).

In the security process (Figure 101), by determining that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or greater, external output of a security signal is started at timing t9 as shown in Figure 102 (h), and the value of the first security counter 211a is decremented by 1 as shown in Figure 102 (b).

After that, at timing t10, while specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the CALLI command calls the second management processing (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control processing (step S5521), which will be described later, and is executed from timing t10 to timing t11, as shown in FIG. 102(c).

After that, the second management process (FIG. 107) ends at timing t11, and specific control processing is executed from timing t11 to timing t12 as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control processing, steps S4927 to S4932 in the main processing (FIG. 81) and steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) are executed.

After that, at the timing of t12, while the specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88), the fraud detection processing (Fig. 93) included in the non-specific control processing is called by the CALLI command (step S5509). The fraud detection processing (Fig. 93) is executed from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13 as shown in Fig. 102 (c). In this case, the fraud detection execution processing (Fig. 95) in the fraud detection processing (Fig. 93) does not identify the winning of the second operating port 34, which is in the closed state, the winning of the special electric winning device 32, which is in the closed state, or the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly, so the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being incremented by 1.

After that, the fraud detection process (Fig. 93) ends at time t13, and specific control processing is executed from time t13 to time t16 as shown in Fig. 102(a). In this specific control processing, steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) are executed. In this case, security processing (Fig. 101) is executed in the fraud response process (step S5511) from time t14 to time t15 as shown in Fig. 102(e).

In the security process (FIG. 101), the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control has not changed from the value of the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control, so the process of increasing the value of the first security counter 211a according to the value of the second security counter 213k is not executed as shown in FIG. 102(b). In addition, the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 continues, and is maintained unless the RAM clear process (step S4919) in the main process (FIG. 81) or the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, so the light-emitting state of the abnormality display device 206 is maintained as shown in FIG. 102(g). In addition, since the output duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds) has not elapsed since the start of the external output of the security signal, the external output of the security signal is continued as shown in FIG. 102(h).

After that, at timing t16, while specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the second management processing (FIG. 107) described below, which is included in the non-specific control processing, is called by the CALLI command (step S5521).

As described above, the process for determining whether an event that is the subject of an external output of a security signal has occurred is executed not only in the specific control process but also in the non-specific control process. This allows the process for monitoring whether an event that is the subject of an external output of a security signal has occurred to be assigned to the non-specific control process, making it possible to allocate the program and data capacity for the specific control process to other processes.

A first security counter 211a is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and a second security counter 213k is provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. When it is determined in the specific control process that an event that is the target of an external output of a security signal has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is incremented by 1, and when it is determined in the non-specific control process that an event that is the target of an external output of a security signal has occurred, the value of the second security counter 213k is incremented by 1. This makes it possible to write information to the work area 211 for specific control in the specific control process but not in the non-specific control process, and to write information to the work area 213 for non-specific control in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process, while making it possible to appropriately identify the occurrence of an event that is the target of an external output of a security signal in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process.

In the security process (FIG. 101) included in the specific control process, the increment in the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added to the first security counter 211a, and if the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, the security process (FIG. 101) outputs a security signal to the outside. Then, the external output of a pulsed security signal for a predetermined output duration or more, with a predetermined stop duration in between, is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". This makes it possible to consolidate the process for externally outputting a security signal into the specific control process in a configuration in which the occurrence of an event that is the subject of an external output of a security signal is identified by both the specific control process and the non-specific control process.

When the value of the first security counter 211a becomes 1 or more, the security flag 211f is set to "1", and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is illuminated. The state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 continues, and is maintained as long as the RAM clear process (step S4919) in the main process (FIG. 81) or the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is not executed, and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in an illuminated state. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall aware of whether or not an event that is the subject of the external output of a security signal has occurred, regardless of the timing of checking the abnormality display device 206, at least while the game hall is open.

<Configuration for managing game history>
Next, a configuration for managing game history will be described.

The contents of the various areas 251 to 254 of the work area 213 for non-specific control used to manage game history are explained below. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control used to manage game history.

The work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with a normal counter area 251. The normal counter area 251 is provided with a normal winning counter 251a, a special winning counter 251b, a first operation counter 251c, a second operation counter 251d, and an out counter 251e. The normal winning counter 251a is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that enter the general winning port 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special winning counter 251b is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that enter the special winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counter 251c is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that enter the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counter 251d is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that enter the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counter 251e is a counter for counting the number of game balls that enter the out hole 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

Each counter 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the game is not in the open/close execution mode or the high frequency support mode. Note that the reason why the state in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state is not included in the measurement is to exclude from the measurement the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 by hand when the front door frame 14 is open. However, this is not limited to this, and the state in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state may be configured to count in the same way as when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state.

In addition to the normal counter area 251, the work area 213 for non-specific control is also provided with a calculation result storage area 252. The calculation result storage area 252 is an area for storing information on the results of game history management calculated using the normal counter area 251. The information on the results of game history management stored in the calculation result storage area 252 is stored and held until the information on the results of game history management is newly calculated and the newly calculated information is overwritten.

Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 252 in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

The calculation result storage area 252 stores information on the base value calculated by the main MPU 82. The base value is the ratio of the total number of game balls dispensed to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode.

In a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode, when one game ball enters the general winning port 31, the value of the general winning counter 251a is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the special winning device 32, the value of the special winning counter 251b is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the value of the first operating counter 251c is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the second operating port 34, the value of the second operating counter 251d is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the out port 24a, the value of the out counter 251e is incremented by 1. And, when the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
Base value: total number of game balls paid out (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning through the general winning port 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning through the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "number of prize balls for winning through the first operating port 33" + K94 x "number of prize balls for winning through the second operating port 34") / ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

The calculation of the base value is performed each time the result calculation process (Fig. 110) described later is executed in the second management process (Fig. 107) included in the non-specific control process, but the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" when the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the play area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation where the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" and the mode is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, and when the management start flag is set to "1" and the mode is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the play area PA) becomes the shift reference number.

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is a number less than the shift reference number. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and the subsequent operation is checked. The base value under such circumstances may be a value different from the situation in which normal play is performed. Therefore, when the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the play area PA) in a situation in which the management start flag is not set to "1" and the mode is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode, becomes the management start reference number, which is a number less than the shift reference number, the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0", thereby making it possible to reduce the influence of the above operation check on the base value in a situation in which normal play is performed after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10. The management start threshold number is not limited to 300, but can be any number greater than 300, and may be set to a number less than 300 or more than 300.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000 balls. Since the pachinko machine 10 shoots a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, 60,000 balls is the maximum number of balls shot in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours of the game hall are about 13 hours, and the time during which games are played in neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is about 10 hours. Therefore, the shift reference number is set assuming the maximum number of game balls shot in roughly one business day. By clearing the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, it is possible to calculate the base value within the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60,000 balls and can be any number multiple, and may be set to a number less than 60,000 balls or more than 60,000 balls.

The calculation result storage area 252 is provided with a current state area 256, a first history area 257, a second history area 258, and a third history area 259 as storage areas for storing the above-mentioned base value information. All of these various areas 256 to 259 have the same storage capacity, specifically, a capacity of 1 byte so that base value information can be stored.

The current status area 256 stores the base value calculated in the most recent result calculation process (Figure 110). In other words, the current status area 256 stores the most recent base value.

The first history area 257 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1", the first history area 257 stores the base value at the time when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the previous calculation period in a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result and the high-frequency support mode are not in effect (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number. Also, if the management start flag is set to "1" after the previous calculation period has elapsed, the first history area 257 stores the base value at the time when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the previous calculation period in a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result and the high-frequency support mode are not in effect (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number.

The second history area 258 stores the final base value for the calculation period two times before. In this case, if the calculation period two times before is a situation after the management start flag was set to "1", the second history area 258 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode in the calculation period two times before becomes the shift reference number (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA). Also, if the management start flag is set to "1" after the calculation period two times before has elapsed, the second history area 258 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode in the calculation period two times before becomes the management start reference number.

The third history area 259 stores the final base value for the calculation period three times before. In this case, if the calculation period three times before is a situation after the management start flag was set to "1", the third history area 259 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode in the calculation period three times before (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) became the shift reference number. Also, if the management start flag was set to "1" after the calculation period three times before has elapsed, the third history area 259 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode in the calculation period three times before (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) became the management start reference number.

The base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, each time the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the base value to be notified is switched in a predetermined order of the current status area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 → third history area 259, and the switching of the base value to be notified in this predetermined order is repeated.

105(a) to 105(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base values stored in the various areas 256 to 259 are notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". FIG. 105(a) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current state area 256 is notified, FIG. 105(b) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the first history area 257 is notified, FIG. 105(c) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the second history area 258 is notified, and FIG. 105(d) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the third history area 259 is notified.

As shown in FIG. 105(a) to FIG. 105(d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 201a to 204a. Of the eight display segments 201a to 204a, seven of the display segments 201a to 204a are rod-shaped light-emitting areas of the same shape and size, and are arranged to form the number "8". On the other hand, one of the display segments 201a to 204a is a circular light-emitting area, and is provided at the lower right position of the seven display segments 201a to 204a arranged in the shape of the number "8". When reporting any of the base values of the various areas 256 to 259, at least one of the display segments 201a to 204a in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light-emitting state.

The first notification display device 201 displays a message indicating that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are reporting base values. Specifically, the letter "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of which base value is being reported in the various areas 256 to 259. If the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are reporting information other than base values, the letter "b" is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. As a result, by confirming that the letter "b" is being displayed on the first notification display device 201, the manager of the gaming hall can understand that base values are being reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The second notification display device 202 displays which of the various areas 256 to 259 is being reported. Specifically, when the base value in the current status area 256 is being reported, the second notification display device 202 displays the character "L." as shown in FIG. 105(a). When the base value in the first history area 257 is being reported, the second notification display device 202 displays the character "1." as shown in FIG. 105(b). When the base value in the second history area 258 is being reported, the second notification display device 202 displays the character "2." as shown in FIG. 105(c). When the base value in the third history area 259 is being reported, the second notification display device 202 displays the character "3." as shown in FIG. 105(d). This allows the manager of the amusement hall to know which calculation period the base value being reported on the first through fourth notification display devices 201-204 corresponds to by checking the text displayed on the second notification display device 202.

In the second alarm display device 202, the circular display segments 201a-204a are illuminated regardless of which base value is being reported among the various areas 256-259. In the third alarm display device 203 and the fourth alarm display device 204, a number from "0" to "9" is displayed to indicate the base value. In this case, if the second alarm display device 202 displays a number from "1" to "3", three numbers will be lined up on the second to fourth alarm display devices 202-204, making it difficult to grasp the base value. In contrast, when the circular display segments 201a to 204a located at the bottom right of the second alarm display device 202 are illuminated, even if the second alarm display device 202 displays any of the numbers "1" to "3," it is possible to distinguish and understand the number displayed on the second alarm display device 202 from the numbers displayed on the third alarm display device 203 and the fourth alarm display device 204.

The third alert display device 203 and the fourth alert display device 204 display the numeric value of the base value to be notified. The base value is calculated as a decimal to two decimal places, with the first decimal place of the base value being displayed on the third alert display device 203 and the second decimal place of the base value being displayed on the fourth alert display device 204. Here, if the base value is "1.00", the numeric value "0" is displayed on both the third alert display device 203 and the fourth alert display device 204. On the other hand, if a base value has not yet been stored in the areas 256 to 259 to be notified, the character "- " is displayed on both the third alert display device 203 and the fourth alert display device 204 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(a). As a result, even when the base value calculated as a decimal to two decimal places is displayed on the two display devices, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, it is possible to distinguish between the display content when the base value is "1.00" and when the base value has not yet been stored in the area 256 to 259 that is the subject of the notification.

The display contents of the combination of the third and fourth alarm display devices 203 and 204 are the same when the base value is "1.00" and when the base value is "0.00". In contrast, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and latter may maintain the illuminated state of the "00" display, and the other may display the "00" in a flashing state.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, a check display is performed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 until the initial check period has elapsed, so that the arcade manager can check whether the display segments 201a to 204a on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 can light up normally. Specifically, as the check display, all the display segments 201a to 204a on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light-emitting state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(b).

In a situation where the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1", as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(c), in a situation where all the display segments 201a, 202a are illuminated in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, the third notification display device 203 displays the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. By displaying the numbers corresponding to the base value in the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 while all the display segments 201a, 202a are illuminated in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the currently notified base value is the base value in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

Next, we will explain the processing of step S5521 in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88).

In step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), the second management process is executed by the CALLI command as already explained. The second management process is included in the non-specific control process. In other words, when the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) changes from a situation where specific control process is being executed to a situation where non-specific control process is being executed, the non-specific control process is called using the CALLI command.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the flag register information of the main MPU 82 is first saved to the specific control stack area 212. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, and a half carry flag, and the flag register information changes depending on the execution results of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program for the second management process, which is a non-specific control process, is started, it becomes possible to save the flag register information in the state before it changes after the second management process is called or the second management process is started to the specific control stack area 212.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) described below are prohibited from interrupting and starting during the execution of the second management process, which is a non-specific control process.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the specific control stack area 212, and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) are prohibited from interrupting, and then the program corresponding to the second management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the second management process to be executed by the CALLI command, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control by one command ("CALLI"), and the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, the program corresponding to the second management process can be started. Therefore, compared to the case where an instruction for saving the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control, an instruction for prohibiting the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), and an instruction for starting the program for the second management process are separately provided, the number of instructions set in the program for executing the second management process can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the second management process. Note that the processing of steps S6801 to S6816 in the second management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, the load command sets "LD SP, Y(u+2)" to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S6801). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify the storage area to which information is to be written by the push command in the stack areas 212 and 214. Each time a push command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the next information is to be written, and each time a pop command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the previous information is to be written. In addition, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, the storage area to which the information is to be stored is changed to the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, the stack pointer is set to the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Then, the information in the WA register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S6802). Also, the information in the BC register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_BCBUF), BC" (step S6803). Also, the information in the DE register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_DEBUF), DE" (step S6804). Also, the information in the HL register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_HLBUF), HL" (step S6805). Also, the information in the IX register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IXBUF), IX" (step S6806). Also, the information in the IY register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IYBUF), IY" (step S6807).

In addition to the flag register already described, the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the master MPU 82 contains various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6802 to S6807, the information of some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, namely the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, is saved to the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is each 2 bytes.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are used in the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and check process (step S6809), it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, is selectively saved to the work area 213 for non-specific control, thereby making it possible to reduce the capacity reserved for saving register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to save the above-mentioned register information while securing a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that is available for the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and check process (step S6809).

Note that, of course, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the processing corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

In addition, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 214 for non-specific control, it is possible to keep the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control small. In addition, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as already explained, the writing order of information is such that later information is read first. Therefore, if the reading order of information is shifted due to some kind of noise or the like, all information in the subsequent reading order will be restored to different registers. The probability of such an event occurring increases as the amount of information saved to the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring even when there is a lot of information to be saved.

After executing the processes of steps S6802 to S6807, the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are executed. When executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), a subroutine program corresponding to the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) set in the program for non-specific control is executed, and when the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the second management process after the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are executed is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program for the second management process indicated by the return address is returned to. Details of the information anomaly monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) will be explained later.

After executing the information anomaly monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), a load command is issued to set Y(r+c) in the stack pointer of the master MPU 82 as a fixed address at the time of returning to specific control after the second management process ends (step S6810). The address of Y(r+c) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control immediately before the second management process is called in step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) is always constant, and accordingly, the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 at that timing (i.e., the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is, for example, the return address information of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) after the second management process is completed. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+c). Therefore, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to specific control is returned to, the constant information Y(r+c) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, making it possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, eliminating the need to save the stack pointer information of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 84 before starting the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and eliminates the need to reserve an area in the main RAM 84 for the save.

Then, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S6811). Also, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)" (step S6812). Also, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S6813). Also, the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)" (step S6814). Also, the load command "LD IX, (_IXBUF)" overwrites the IX register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6815). Also, the load command "LD IY, (_IYBUF)" overwrites the IY register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6816). By executing the processes of steps S6811 to S6816, it is possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the master MPU 82 to the information corresponding to specific control immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started.

After the processing of steps S6811 to S6816 is executed, the RETI command causes a return to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) included in the processing of the specific control. Execution of the RETI command restores the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the second management processing to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and switches the state in which the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to a state in which they are permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to information for executing the specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

Because of the configuration for executing the RETI command, the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the second management process can be restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82 by one command ("RETI"), and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) can be switched from a prohibited state to an allowed state. Therefore, compared to a case where an command for restoring the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the second management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82 and an command for switching from a prohibited state to an allowed state for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the number of commands set in the program for non-specific control processing can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program for non-specific control processing.

Here, when non-specific control processing is executed, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when specific control processing is resumed. This eliminates the need to secure a memory area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is information that will not be used when non-specific control processing is started again after returning to specific control processing. In other words, information required for multiple rounds of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when non-specific control processing is executed, no problem occurs in executing non-specific control processing.

Next, the check process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S6809 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the check process. Note that steps S6901 to S6906 in the check process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the check process, if the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S6901: NO), is not in the opening and closing execution mode (step S6902: NO), and is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S6903: NO), the normal entry management process (step S6904) is executed, and then the result calculation process (step S6905) and the display process (step S6906) are executed. On the other hand, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S6901: YES), is in the opening and closing execution mode (step S6902: YES), or is in the high-frequency support mode (step S6903: YES), the result calculation process (step S6905) and the display process (step S6906) are executed without executing the normal entry management process (step S6904).

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the normal entry management process in step S6904. Note that the processes in steps S7001 to S7014 in the normal entry management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

If the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7001: YES), it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the first winning port detection sensor 231a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7002). Also, if the second winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7003: YES), it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the second winning port detection sensor 232a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7004). In addition, if the third winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7005: YES), it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the third winning port detection sensor 233a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7006).

If the special electric winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7007: YES), it means that a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32 and one game ball has been normally detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. In this case, the value of the special electric winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7008).

If the first actuation winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7009: YES), it means that a winning has occurred in the first actuation port 33 and one game ball has been normally detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a. In this case, the value of the first actuation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7010).

If the second activation winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7011: YES), it means that a winning has occurred in the second activation port 34 and one game ball has been normally detected by the second activation port detection sensor 236a. In this case, the value of the second activation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7012).

If the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7013: YES), it means that a game ball has entered the out port 24a and one game ball has been normally detected by the out port detection sensor 237a. In this case, the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7014).

The information of the first winning confirmation flag, second winning confirmation flag, third winning confirmation flag, special electric winning confirmation flag, first operational winning confirmation flag, second operational winning confirmation flag and out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is read out by the normal winning management process included in the processing of non-specific control, but the information of these flags is not updated in the normal winning management process. The process of clearing these flags to "0" or setting them to "1" is executed by the winning detection process (Figure 91) included in the processing of specific control, as already explained.

Figure 110 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process executed in step S6905 of the check process (Figure 108). Note that steps S7101 to S7115 in the result calculation process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, a calculation process for the base value is executed (step S7101). In this calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251. The method for calculating the base value has already been explained. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten in the current state area 256 (step S7102).

Then, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7103). The management start flag is set to a value of "0" when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10. The value of the management start flag also becomes "0" when the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" including the management start flag and initialized. In a situation where the management start flag is set to a value of "0" and the mode is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number, and the management start flag is set to "1". In addition, when the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" and a new calculation period is started. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the influence of operational checks at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 to affect the base value in a situation where normal play is being carried out after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

If the determination in step S7103 is negative, the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7104). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference number of 300 (step S7105). Note that the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the total number is equal to or greater than the management start reference number of 300.

If the determination in step S7105 is affirmative, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7106). Then, data shift processing is executed (step S7107). In the data shift processing, the information stored in the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is shifted in the order of the second history area 258 → the third history area 259, the first history area 257 → the second history area 258, and the current state area 256 → the first history area 257. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times ago is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value in the calculation period three times ago, the final base value in the calculation period one time ago is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value in the calculation period two times ago, and the base value calculated last in the current calculation period is stored in the first history area 257 as the final base value in the calculation period one time ago. In data shift processing, the LDIR command is used to shift information as described above. With the LDIR command, the address of the area from which the information is to be stored and the address of the area to which the information is to be stored are specified, and the information stored in the source area is shifted (copied) to the destination area.

However, when the management start flag is not set to "1", basically no base value information is stored in the first to third history areas 257 to 259, so in step S7107, essentially, only the final base value for the calculation period when the management start flag is not set to "1" is shifted to the first history area 257. After that, all counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" (step S7108).

If the result of the judgment in step S7103 is positive, the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7109). Then, it is judged whether the calculated total number is greater than the initial reference number of 6,000 (step S7110). If the result of the judgment in step S7110 is negative, the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7111), and if the result of the judgment in step S7110 is positive, the calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S7112). The calculation initial flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial reference number in a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode due to the jackpot result and the high frequency support mode are not in effect since the calculation period of the base value was newly started.

When the processing of step S7111 or step S7112 is executed, it is determined whether the total number calculated in step S7109 is equal to or greater than the shift reference number of 60,000 (step S7113). When the determination in step S7113 is affirmative, data shift processing is executed (step S7114). In the data shift processing, similar to step S7107, the information stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is shifted in the order of the second history area 258 → the third history area 259, the first history area 257 → the second history area 258, and the current status area 256 → the first history area 257. As a result, the final base value for the calculation period two calculations ago is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value for the calculation period three calculations ago, the final base value for the calculation period one calculation ago is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value for the calculation period two calculations ago, and the base value calculated last in the current calculation period is stored in the first history area 257 as the final base value for the calculation period one calculation ago. In the data shift process, when shifting information as described above, the LDIR command is used. With the LDIR command, the address of the area from which the information is stored and the address of the area to which the information is stored are specified, and the information stored in the area from which the information is stored is shifted (copied) to the area to which the information is stored. After that, all of the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" (step S7115).

Next, the configuration for reporting the base value will be described. First, the configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main MPU 82 will be described. Figure 111 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main MPU 82.

At least the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b, the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, the regular chart display unit 38a, the regular chart reserved display unit 38b, the setting display unit 205, and the first to fourth notification display units 201 to 204 are present as objects for which display control is performed by the main MPU 82. All of these are provided as segment display units in which multiple display segments made of LEDs are arranged. These segment display units are illuminated when data corresponding to the illuminated state (for example, data "1", which is one of the binary data) is set, and are illuminated when data corresponding to the unlit state (for example, data "0", which is the other of the binary data) is set.

The main control board 81 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the first special chart display unit 37a, a second display circuit 262 corresponding to the second special chart display unit 37b, a third display circuit (not shown) corresponding to the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, a fourth display circuit (not shown) corresponding to the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, a fifth display circuit (not shown) corresponding to the normal chart display unit 38a, a sixth display circuit (not shown) corresponding to the normal chart reserved display unit 38b, a seventh display circuit 263 corresponding to the setting display device 205, and an eighth display circuit 264 corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the first special chart display unit 37a. As a result, each display segment of the first special chart display unit 37a is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the first special chart display unit 37a that are illuminated by the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 gradually turn off as a predetermined period has passed without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the first special chart display unit 37a is changed, but also when the display content of the first special chart display unit 37a is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the second special chart display unit 37b. As a result, each display segment of the second special chart display unit 37b is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the second special chart display unit 37b that are illuminated by the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 gradually turn off as the predetermined period passes without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the second special chart display unit 37b is changed, but also when the display content of the second special chart display unit 37b is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

The third display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c. As a result, each display segment of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit. In this case, the third display circuit can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c that are illuminated by the display data provided to the third display circuit gradually turn off as a predetermined period passes without new display data being provided to the third display circuit. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c is changed, but also when the display content of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the third display circuit.

The fourth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the second special chart reserved display unit 37d. As a result, each display segment of the second special chart reserved display unit 37d is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit. In this case, the fourth display circuit can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the second special chart reserved display unit 37d that are illuminated by the display data provided to the fourth display circuit gradually turn off as a predetermined period has passed without new display data being provided to the fourth display circuit. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the second special chart reserved display unit 37d is changed, but also when the display content of the second special chart reserved display unit 37d is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the fourth display circuit.

The fifth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the general map display unit 38a. As a result, each display segment of the general map display unit 38a is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit. In this case, the fifth display circuit can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the general map display unit 38a that are illuminated by the display data provided to the fifth display circuit gradually turn off after a predetermined period has passed without new display data being provided to the fifth display circuit. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the general map display unit 38a is changed, but also when the display content of the general map display unit 38a is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the fifth display circuit.

The sixth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the regular map reserved display unit 38b. As a result, each display segment of the regular map reserved display unit 38b is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the sixth display circuit. In this case, the sixth display circuit can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the regular map reserved display unit 38b that are illuminated by the display data provided to the sixth display circuit gradually turn off after a predetermined period has passed without new display data being provided to the sixth display circuit. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the regular map reserved display unit 38b is changed, but also when the display content of the regular map reserved display unit 38b is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the sixth display circuit.

The seventh display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments provided in each of the setting display devices 205. As a result, each display segment of the setting display device 205 is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the seventh display circuit 263. In this case, the seventh display circuit 263 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the setting display device 205 that are illuminated by the display data provided to the seventh display circuit 263 gradually turn off after a predetermined period has passed without new display data being provided to the seventh display circuit 263. In addition, with this configuration, not only when the display content of the setting display device 205 is changed, but also when the display content of the setting display device 205 is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the seventh display circuit 263.

The eighth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments provided on each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. As a result, each display segment of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264. In this case, the eighth display circuit 264 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-0 state. Therefore, the display segments of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 that are illuminated by the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264 gradually turn off as the predetermined period has passed without new display data being provided to the eighth display circuit 264. Furthermore, with this configuration, not only when the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed, but also when the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output process is supplied to the eighth display circuit 264.

Each of the first to fourth alert display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments. Display data is provided in 8-bit units. When the display data of the first to fourth alert display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the eighth display circuit 264, 8-bit display data corresponding to the first alert display device 201 is provided as 8-bit data, then 8-bit display data corresponding to the second alert display device 202 is provided as 8-bit data, then 8-bit display data corresponding to the third alert display device 203 is provided as 8-bit data, and finally 8-bit display data corresponding to the fourth alert display device 204 is provided as 8-bit data.

In a configuration in which the first to eighth display circuits 261-264 are provided as described above, the main MPU 82 supplies display data to the display IC 266. In other words, the display ICs 266 are not provided one-to-one with the first to eighth display circuits 261-264, but rather one display IC 266 is provided common to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261-264. When the main MPU 82 supplies display data to the display IC 266, it also supplies type data to the display IC 266 indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261-264 the display data corresponds to.

Regarding the electrical connection between the main MPU 82 and the display IC 266, in detail, the main MPU 82 and the display IC 266 are electrically connected using a type data signal line LN1, a type clock signal line LN2, a display data signal line LN3, and a display clock signal line LN4. All of these signal lines LN1 to LN4 are signal lines for transmitting signals from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 in one-way communication.

The category data is transmitted by serial communication from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the category data signal line LN1. In this case, the division of each bit of the category data by serial communication is indicated by the category clock signal transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the category clock signal line LN2. The category data is data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The category data is transmitted as 8-bit data consisting of the first to eighth bits. If the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HIGH level and the other bits become LOW level. If the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HIGH level and the other bits become LOW level. If the display data corresponds to the third display circuit, the third bit becomes HIGH level and the other bits become LOW level. If the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit, the fourth bit becomes HIGH level and the other bits become LOW level. If the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit, the fifth bit is HIGH and the other bits are LOW. If the display data corresponds to the sixth display circuit, the sixth bit is HIGH and the other bits are LOW. If the display data corresponds to the seventh display circuit 263, the seventh bit is HIGH and the other bits are LOW. If the display data corresponds to the eighth display circuit 264, the eighth bit is HIGH and the other bits are LOW.

Display data is transmitted by serial communication from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, the division of each bit of the display data by serial communication is indicated by a display clock signal transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units using the 1st to 8th bits.

In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) described later, the main MPU 82 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to eighth display circuits 261-264 to the display IC 266. In this case, in one processing round of the second timer interrupt process, display data is transmitted to one of the first to eighth display circuits 261-264, and the display circuits 261-264 to which the display data is transmitted are changed one by one each time a new processing round of the second timer interrupt process occurs in the order of the nth display circuit → the n+1th display circuit. In addition, in the second timer interrupt process in the processing round following the processing round in which display data corresponding to the 8th display circuit 264, which is the last in the order, is transmitted, display data corresponding to the first display circuit 261, which is the first in the above order, is transmitted. In addition, in the second timer interrupt process in which display data is sent to any one of the first to seventh display circuits 261 to 263, only one 8-bit display data is sent, but in the second timer interrupt process in which display data is sent to the eighth display circuit 264, four 8-bit display data are sent to correspond to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the configuration in which the main MPU 82 transmits display data as described above, various storage areas referenced by the main MPU 82 to transmit display data are set in the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control. Figure 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various buffers 271 to 278 provided in the work area 211 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 112, the work area 211 for specific control is provided with a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, a fifth display data buffer 275, a sixth display data buffer 276, a seventh display data buffer 277, and an eighth display data buffer 278.

The first display data buffer 271 stores display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261. As already explained, the first display circuit 261 is provided in correspondence with the first special display unit 37a, so the first display data buffer 271 stores display data for causing the first special display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display. In this case, the display data is stored in the first display data buffer 271 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special display control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261 is processed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The second display data buffer 272 stores display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262. As already explained, the second display circuit 262 is provided in correspondence with the second special display unit 37b, so the second display data buffer 272 stores display data for causing the second special display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display. In this case, the display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special display control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262 is processed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data to be supplied to the third display circuit. As already explained, the third display circuit is provided in correspondence with the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, so the third display data buffer 273 stores display data for causing the first special chart reserved display unit 37c to perform a predetermined display. In this case, the display data is stored in the third display data buffer 273 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special chart special power control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit is processed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit. As already explained, the fourth display circuit is provided in correspondence with the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, so the fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data for causing the second special chart reserved display unit 37d to perform a predetermined display. In this case, the storage of display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special chart special power control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the fourth display circuit is processed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit. As already explained, the fifth display circuit is provided in correspondence with the normal map display unit 38a, so the fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the normal map display unit 38a to perform a specified display. In this case, the display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the normal map normal power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) that transmits display data to the fifth display circuit is processed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The sixth display data buffer 276 stores display data to be supplied to the sixth display circuit. As already explained, the sixth display circuit is provided in correspondence with the normal map reserve display unit 38b, so the sixth display data buffer 276 stores display data for causing the normal map reserve display unit 38b to perform a specified display. In this case, the storage of display data in the sixth display data buffer 276 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the normal map normal power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) that transmits display data to the sixth display circuit is processed, the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data to be supplied to the seventh display circuit 263. As already explained, the seventh display circuit 263 is provided in correspondence with the setting display device 205, so the seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data for causing the setting display device 205 to perform a predetermined display. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed, the seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. Also, when the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. When the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the seventh display circuit 263 is processed, the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The eighth display data buffer 278 stores display data to be supplied to the eighth display circuit 264. As already explained, the eighth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, and therefore the eighth display data buffer 278 stores display data for causing the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 to perform a predetermined display. When the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the eighth display circuit 264 is processed, the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

Here, the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 display a value corresponding to the base value. In this case, since the eighth display data buffer 278 is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, the process of storing display data in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed as a process corresponding to specific control. On the other hand, the process of deriving the base value is performed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, and each base value stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 is displayed sequentially on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204.

As shown in FIG. 103, the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with not only the calculation result storage area 252 for storing each base value, but also the display target setting area 253 for storing the base values to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259. Since the period during which one base value is continuously displayed is 5 seconds, the base values to be displayed are read from the calculation result storage area 252 according to a predetermined display order every 5 seconds in the process corresponding to non-specific control, and the read base values are stored in the display target setting area 253. Then, when the base values are to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 is read in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is the process corresponding to specific control, and the read display data is stored in the eighth display data buffer 278.

In a configuration in which the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 are provided as described above, the main MPU 82 reads display data from the display data buffers 271 to 278 corresponding to each processing round of the second timer interrupt processing (Figure 114) and transmits the read display data to the display IC 266, while also transmitting type data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 the display data corresponds to to the display IC 266. Figure 113 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 113, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output unit 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output unit 284. The display data buffer 283 stores display data received from the main MPU 82. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264. The type data buffer 281 stores type data received from the main MPU 82. The selection signal output unit 282 outputs a selection signal to specify the display circuit 261 to 264 among the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 that corresponds to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 as the destination to receive the display data.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 111, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using a display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided so as to enable 8-bit display data to be transmitted at once, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. In addition, a branch signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 is electrically connected to each of the second display circuit 262, the third display circuit, the fourth display circuit, the fifth display circuit, the sixth display circuit, the seventh display circuit 263, and the eighth display circuit 264. The branch signal group 292 is provided so as to enable 8-bit display data to be transmitted at once, similar to the display signal group 291, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication.

As described above, by providing the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264. In this case, the first to eighth selection signal lines 301 to 304 are provided to specify the display circuits 261 to 264 that should receive and use the supplied display data.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301 in order to have the first display circuit 261 receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the first display circuit 261.

The second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302 so that the second display circuit 262 receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the second display circuit 262.

The third selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit. When type data corresponding to the third display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a third selection signal to the third display circuit through the third selection signal line so that the third display circuit receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the third display circuit.

A fourth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit. When type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit through the fourth selection signal line so that the fourth display circuit receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fourth display circuit.

The fifth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit. When type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit through the fifth selection signal line in order to have the fifth display circuit receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fifth display circuit.

A sixth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the sixth display circuit. When type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a sixth selection signal to the sixth display circuit through the sixth selection signal line in order to have the sixth display circuit receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the sixth display circuit.

The seventh selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the seventh display circuit 263. When type data corresponding to the seventh display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a seventh selection signal to the seventh display circuit 263 through the seventh selection signal line 303 so that the seventh display circuit 263 receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the seventh display circuit 263.

The eighth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the eighth display circuit 264. When type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits an eighth selection signal to the eighth display circuit 264 through the eighth selection signal line 304 so that the eighth display circuit 264 receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the eighth display circuit 264.

Next, the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 114. Note that the processes in steps S7201 to S7213 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) (step S7201). By prohibiting occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) from interrupting and starting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) even if the first interrupt period has elapsed. Also, by prohibiting occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) from being started redundantly even if the second interrupt period has elapsed during execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114).

Then, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7202). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the setting value update process (Figure 83) is being executed by the main MPU 82. As already explained, the setting value update process (Figure 83) is executed in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed in the main process (Figure 81) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, but when the setting value update process (Figure 83) is started, an interrupt is permitted in step S5101. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (Figure 83) is being executed by the main MPU 82, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) is started by interrupting.

The setting update display flag being set to "1" means that the current processing of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) is a processing run that was started by interrupting a situation in which the setting value update process (Fig. 83) is being executed by the main MPU 82. If a positive determination is made in step S7202, setting processing is executed in the seventh display data buffer 277 during the setting update (step S7203). In this setting processing, display data is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 to cause the setting display device 205 to display the setting value currently being selected for the pachinko machine 10. As a result, a display is displayed on the setting display device 205 indicating the setting value currently being selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S7202 or if the processing of step S7203 is executed, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7204). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) is executed in a situation in which the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, but an interrupt is permitted in step S5001 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) is started. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) is being executed in the main MPU 82, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is interrupted and started.

The setting confirmation display flag being set to "1" means that the current processing of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) is a processing run that was started by interrupting a situation in which the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82) is being executed by the main MPU 82. If a positive determination is made in step S7204, a setting process is executed in the seventh display data buffer 277 during the setting confirmation (step S7205). In this setting process, display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. As a result, a display is displayed on the setting display device 205 indicating the setting value that is the current setting target.

If a negative determination is made in step S7204 or if the processing of step S7205 is executed, a setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278 is executed (step S7206). FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278. Note that the processing of steps S7301 to S7310 in the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278 is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, it is determined whether the value of the check counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or more (step S7301). If the value of the check counter 211g is 1 or more (step S7301: YES), it means that it is the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds). In this case, the data of the check display is set to the 8th display data buffer 278 in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7302). As already explained, the display data set in the 8th display data buffer 278 is display data for display control of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. In addition, the data of the check display is display data for causing the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display, that is, display data for making all the display segments 201a to 204a in each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 emit light. When the check display data is supplied to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(b), all of the display segments 201a-204a in each of the first to fourth alert display devices 201-204 are illuminated as a check display. This allows the amusement hall manager to know whether or not each of the display segments 201a-204a in the first to fourth alert display devices 201-204 can be illuminated normally.

Then, the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1 (step S7303). As a result, when the checking counter 211g is being used to measure the initial check period, the value of the checking counter 211g is periodically decremented each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started.

If the value of the check counter 211g is "0" and it is not the initial check period (step S7301: NO), it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7304). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S7304: NO), a setting process for the display before management start is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7305). In this setting process, display data for making all display segments 201a and 202a in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 emit light is set in the eighth display data buffer 278. Note that the configuration is not limited to one in which all display segments 201a, 202a in each of the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 are illuminated, and the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 may each be configured to flash all display segments 201a, 202a.

Then, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is read (step S7306), and the read calculation result data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 (step S7307). Details will be described later, but in the display process (FIG. 116) included in the processing for non-specific control, if the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value is read from the current area 256, and the calculation result data corresponding to the digits in the first and second decimal places of the read base value is set in the display target setting area 253. In step S7307, this calculation result data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204.

When the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 278 in steps S7305 and S7307 is supplied to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(c), in a situation where all the display segments 201a, 202a are illuminated in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, the third notification display device 203 displays the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. By displaying the numbers corresponding to the base value on the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 while all the display segments 201a, 202a are illuminated in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the currently notified base value is the base value in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

When the management start flag is set to "1", as already explained, the base value to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 is switched in the predetermined order of current status area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 → third history area 259 each time the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, whereas when the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the current status area 256 is maintained as the one to be notified. This makes it possible to check the current base value at any time when an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7304: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is read, and the read display data is set in the 8th display data buffer 278 (step S7308). When the display data is supplied to the display IC 266, if the base value in the current status area 256 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(a) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification; if the base value in the first history area 257 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(b) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification; if the base value in the second history area 258 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(c) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification; and if the base value in the third history area 259 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(d) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

Then, it is determined whether the initial display flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7309). The initial display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify a situation in which the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be displayed blinking to notify the user that the base value in the current state area 256 is the target of notification and that the base value is the initial base value calculated after the start of the calculation period. If the initial display flag is set to "1" (step S7309: YES), a blinking setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7310).

In the blinking setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed on the first and second alarm display devices 201 and 202, the display is set to blink. Specifically, for the setting to blink, data corresponding to the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is sent to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed for the transmission of display data to the first and second alarm display devices 201 and 202, and then data for turning off all the display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second alarm display devices 201 and 202 is sent to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and then these predetermined lighting periods and predetermined lighting periods are alternately repeated. As a result, if the base value in the current state area 256 becomes the target for notification immediately after a new calculation period for the base value has begun, the first and second notification display devices 201, 202 will display the initial calculation result, allowing the amusement hall manager to understand that the current base value being notified on the first through fourth notification display devices 201-204 is the value immediately after the start of a new calculation period.

Here, in addition to the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value, a setting display device 205 is provided for displaying the setting value in the setting confirmation process (Figure 82) or the setting value update process (Figure 83), and in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 82) or the setting value update process (Figure 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114), not only are processes (steps S7202 to S7205) performed for displaying the setting value on the setting display device 205, but also a process (step S7206) for displaying the base value on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 are executed. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm both the setting value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by rotating the game machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the front side of the main control device 71. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value in the setting value update process (FIG. 83), and can check the correspondence between the past base value and the current setting value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82).

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), after the process of step S7206 is executed, the signal transmission state through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is set to the OFF state (step S7207), and the signal transmission state through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is set to the OFF state (step S7208). After that, the type counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is updated (step S7209).

The type counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the display data transmission target among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. When the type counter value is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the transmission target, when the type counter value is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the transmission target, when the type counter value is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is the transmission target, when the type counter value is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is the transmission target, when the type counter value is "5", the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 is the transmission target, when the type counter value is "6", the display data of the sixth display data buffer 276 is the transmission target, when the type counter value is "7", the display data of the seventh display data buffer 277 is the transmission target, and when the type counter value is "8", the display data of the eighth display data buffer 278 is the transmission target. In the type counter update process, the type counter value is incremented by 1, and if the type counter value after incrementing by 1 exceeds the upper limit of "8", the type counter value is set to "1". This causes the display data transmission target to be changed sequentially in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 for each processing of the second timer interrupt process.

Then, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 83 (step S7210). Specifically, when the type counter value is "1", type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 83; when the type counter value is "2", type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 83; when the type counter value is "3", type data corresponding to the third display circuit is read from the main ROM 83; when the type counter value is "4", type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit is read from the main ROM 83; when the type counter value is "5", type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is read from the main ROM 83; when the type counter value is "6", type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main ROM 83; when the type counter value is "7", type data corresponding to the seventh display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 83; and when the type counter value is "8", type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 83.

Then, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 278 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S7211). Specifically, if the type counter value is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271; if the type counter value is "2", display data is read from the second display data buffer 272; if the type counter value is "3", display data is read from the third display data buffer 273; if the type counter value is "4", display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274; if the type counter value is "5", display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275; if the type counter value is "6", display data is read from the sixth display data buffer 276; if the type counter value is "7", display data is read from the seventh display data buffer 277; and if the type counter value is "8", display data is read from the eighth display data buffer 278.

After that, a transmission process of various signals is executed (step S7212). In this transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S7210 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in this transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S7211 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

After that, interrupt permission is set to allow the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) to occur (step S7213).

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the display process executed in step S6906 of the check process (Figure 108). Note that the processing of steps S7401 to S7420 in the display process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or greater (step S7401). If the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or greater (step S7401: YES), the previous checking flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7402). The previous checking flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to identify that it was confirmed in the previous processing of the display process that the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or greater.

If the value of the checking counter 211g is "0" (step S7401: NO), it is determined whether the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7403). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S7403: NO), the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7404).

Then, the base value is read from the current state area 256, and the calculation result data corresponding to the digits in the first and second decimal places of the read base value is set in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7405). By transmitting display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the digits in the first and second decimal places of the base value in the current state area 256 are displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the digits in the second decimal place of the base value in the current state area 256 are displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified.

When the management start flag is not set to "1", calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 253, but display type data is not set. When the base value is notified when the management start flag is not set to "1", as already explained, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are different from the display contents when the base value is notified when the management start flag is set to "1". Specifically, all display segments 201a, 202a are illuminated in the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, respectively.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7403: YES), it is determined whether the previous check flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7406). If the previous check flag is not set to "1" (step S7406: NO), the value of the switching timing counter 254 (see FIG. 103) provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step S7407). The switching timing counter 254 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine that it is time to switch the base values to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 of the calculation result storage area 252. As already explained, each time the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the base value to be notified is switched in a predetermined order from current status area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 → third history area 259, and the switching of the base value to be notified in this predetermined order is repeated.

When the processing of step S7407 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the switching timing counter 254 after subtracting 1 is "0", thereby determining whether the display duration has elapsed since the base value currently being notified became the target of notification (step S7408). If a positive determination is made in step S7408, the value of the display target counter 255 (see FIG. 103) provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7409). Then, if the value of the display target counter 255 after incrementing 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3" (step S7410: YES), the value of the display target counter 255 is cleared to "0" (step S7411).

The display target counter 255 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the base value to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 from among the base values stored in the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the base value stored in the current state area 256 is the base value to be notified, when the value of the display target counter is "1", the base value stored in the first history area 257 is the base value to be notified, when the value of the display target counter is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 258 is the base value to be notified, and when the value of the display target counter is "3", the base value stored in the third history area 259 is the base value to be notified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S7410, or if the processing of step S7411 is executed, a value corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing of the notification target (step S7412).

If a negative determination is made in step S7408, or if the process of step S7412 is executed, a process is executed to set display data corresponding to the base value that is the target of the current notification in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Specifically, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 is first set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7413). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display an indication that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and display data for causing the second notification display device 202 to display an indication of which of the current status area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 the base value of the notification target corresponds to.

Then, the base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 among the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252, and calculation result data corresponding to the digits in the first decimal place and the digits in the second decimal place in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7414). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a number corresponding to the digit in the first decimal place in the base value of the notification target, and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display a number corresponding to the digit in the second decimal place in the base value of the notification target.

As described above, display data consisting of display type data and calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 253. The display data is sent to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display data corresponding to the display data.

The process of step S7414 is also executed each time the display process (FIG. 116) is executed, regardless of the timing of the change in the base value of the notification target. As already explained, each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 110) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current values of the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251, and the calculated base value is stored in the current state area 256 of the calculation result storage area 252. In this case, the process of step S7414 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 253 as described above is executed each time the display process (FIG. 116) is executed, regardless of the timing of the change in the base value of the notification target. This makes it possible to notify the changed base value when the base value in the current state area 256 is changed in a situation where the base value is changed and the base value is the notification target.

Then, based on the value of the display target counter, it is determined whether the base value in the current state area 256 is the target for notification (step S7415), and it is determined whether the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7416). As already explained, the calculation initial flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the play area PA) has reached the initial reference number since the base value calculation period was newly started in a situation other than the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result and the high frequency support mode. If a positive determination is made in both steps S7415 and S7416, the initial display flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7417), and if a negative determination is made in either step S7415 or step S7416, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S7418).

The initial display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify a situation in which the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be flashed to notify the user that the base value in the current state area 256 is the target of notification and that the base value is the initial base value calculated after the start of the calculation period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) identifies that the initial display flag is set to "1", not only is the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 sent to the display IC 266, but when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are caused to display a display corresponding to the display data, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are caused to flash and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are caused to light up. In addition, if the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) determines that the initial display flag is not set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on to display the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 253.

When the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" and the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7401: NO, step S7403: YES), and the previous check in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7406: YES), it means that the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) has elapsed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". In this case, after clearing the previous check in the work area 213 for non-specific control to "0" (step S7419), the setting process of the switching timing counter 254 is executed (step S7420).

In the process of setting the switching timing counter 254, a value corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing of the notification target. Meanwhile, the value of the display target counter 255 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is maintained without being updated. The display target counter 255 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to identify the base value to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 from among the base values stored in the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252.

After executing the processes of steps S7419 and S7420, the processes of steps S7413 to S7418 are executed. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base values corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 among the base values stored in the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252.

As described above, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), and the display of the base values is started on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204. After the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends and an initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs, when the initial check period ends, the display of the base values that were the subject of notification immediately before the initial check period started, among the base values stored in each of the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258 and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252, is resumed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the resumed base values is continued for the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display duration period at the time the initial check period started. This makes it possible to properly display the base value after the initial check period ends.

As already explained, the switching timing counter 254 and the display target counter 255 are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In the setting value update process (FIG. 83), a RAM clear process (step S5113) is executed. In the RAM clear process (step S5113), the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are cleared, but the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are not cleared. Therefore, even if the RAM clear process (step S5113) is executed in the setting value update process (FIG. 83), the information of the switching timing counter 254 and the information of the display target counter 255 are maintained without being cleared.

Figure 117 is a time chart showing how various displays are made on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. Figure 117(a) shows the period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82, Figure 117(b) shows the period during which the setting value update process (Figure 83) is being executed, Figure 117(c) shows the period during which the base values stored in the current state area 256 in the calculation result storage area 252 are displayed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, Figure 117(d) shows the period during which the base values stored in the first history area 257 in the calculation result storage area 252 are displayed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, and Figure 117(e) shows the period during which the base values stored in the second history area 258 in the calculation result storage area 252 are displayed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 117(f) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 117(g) shows the value of the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control, FIG. 117(h) shows the period during which the setting value is displayed on the setting display device 205, and FIG. 117(i) shows the period during which the check display is displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204.

First, we will explain the case where the setting confirmation process (Figure 82) and the setting value update process (Figure 83) are not executed when the supply of operating power is started.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 117(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 begins. In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in an off state, and display of the base value does not begin.

After that, at the timing of t2, the setting process of the checking counter 211g (step S4926) is executed, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are permitted to be executed. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the check display is started on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117(i). By visually checking the check display, the manager of the amusement hall can determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204.

After that, an initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the timing of t2, and the check display on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 ends at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 117(i). When the check display ends in a situation in which execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the display of the base value stored in the current status area 256 starts on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, as shown in FIG. 117(c). Also, at the timing of t3, information corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254, as shown in FIG. 117(g).

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses at the timing of t4, and the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 is changed from the base value stored in the current state area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257 at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 117(c) and FIG. 117(d). After that, including the timings of t5, t6, and t7, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the base values to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 are sequentially switched in a predetermined order (current state area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 → third history area 259) as shown in FIG. 117(c) to FIG. 117(f). Furthermore, after the base value is displayed in the third history area 259, which is the last order, for a display duration (specifically, 5 seconds), the base value is displayed in the current status area 256, which is the first order, for a display duration (specifically, 5 seconds).

Next, we will explain the case where the setting value update process (Figure 83) is executed when the supply of operating power starts.

At timing t8, as shown in FIG. 117(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 begins. In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in an off state, and display of the base value does not begin.

After that, at timing t9, as shown in FIG. 117(b), the main MPU 82 starts the setting value update process (FIG. 83). As a result of the setting value update process (FIG. 83) starting, at timing t9, the setting display device 205 starts displaying the setting values that are currently being selected, as shown in FIG. 117(h).

In addition, the start of the setting value update process (FIG. 83) allows the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is allowed to be executed, and the display of the base value stored in the current state area 256 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 117(c). This results in a situation in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display device 205 as shown in FIG. 117(h) and the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117(c). In addition, at the timing of t9, information corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254 as shown in FIG. 117(g).

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) measured in the switching timing counter 254 elapses, and at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 117(c) and FIG. 117(d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed from the base value stored in the current status area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257. Also, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) measured in the switching timing counter 254 elapses, and at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 117(d) and FIG. 117(e), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed from the base value stored in the first history area 257 to the base value stored in the second history area 258. Also, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) measured in the switching timing counter 254 elapses, and at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 117(e) and FIG. 117(f), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed from the base value stored in the second history area 258 to the base value stored in the third history area 259. Also, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, at timing t13, which is midway through the measurement of the display duration by the switching timing counter 254 as shown in FIG. 117(g), the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends as shown in FIG. 117(b). When the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends, the display of the setting value on the setting display device 205 ends at timing t13 as shown in FIG. 117(h). In this case, the setting display device 205 goes into an off state.

In addition, as a result of the completion of the setting value update process (FIG. 83), the display of the base value ends at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 117(f). In addition, at the timing of t13, the setting process (step S4926) of the checking counter 211g is executed, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. Therefore, at the timing of t13, the check display starts at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in FIG. 117(i). By visually checking the check display, the manager of the gaming hall can determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses from the timing of t13, and the check display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ends at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 117(i). When the check display ends in a situation in which execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the display of the base value starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 117(f), the base value to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value in the third history area 259 that was displayed immediately before the check display started. Also, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is newly set in the switching timing counter 254. As a result, the display of the type of base value that was displayed immediately before the check display started is resumed after the check display ends, and the display of the base value is not displayed for the remaining display duration immediately before the check display started, but is displayed for the newly set display duration.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses at the timing of t15, and as shown in FIG. 117(c) and FIG. 117(f), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed from the base value stored in the third history area 259 to the base value stored in the current situation area 256 at the timing of t15. Also, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses at the timing of t16, and as shown in FIG. 117(c) and FIG. 117(d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed from the base value stored in the current situation area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257 at the timing of t16.

In addition to the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value, a setting display device 205 is provided for displaying the setting value in the setting confirmation process (Figure 82) or the setting value update process (Figure 83), and in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 82) or the setting value update process (Figure 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114), not only are processes (steps S7202 to S7205) performed for displaying the setting value on the setting display device 205, but also a process (step S7206) for displaying the base value on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 are executed. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm both the setting value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by rotating the game machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the front side of the main control device 71. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value in the setting value update process (FIG. 83), and can check the correspondence between the past base value and the current setting value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82).

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, during the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), a setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or a setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, thereby starting the display of the base values on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. After the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends and an initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs, when the initial check period ends, the display of the base values that were the subject of notification immediately before the initial check period started, among the base values stored in each of the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258 and the third history area 259 in the calculation result memory area 252, is resumed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the resumed base values is continued for the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display duration period at the time the initial check period started. This makes it possible to properly display the base value after the initial check period ends.

<Processing to erase information>
Next, the process for deleting information will be described. Fig. 118 is a flow chart showing the RAM clear process executed in step S4919 of the main process (Fig. 81) or in step S5113 of the set value update process (Fig. 83). The processes in steps S7501 to S7506 in the RAM clear process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the master MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, a protection release process is executed (step S7501). In the protection release process, a process is executed to release the state in which unused areas of the main RAM 84 other than the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are excluded from the target of writing information (including clearing to "0").

As already explained, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information to the main RAM 84 and reading information from the main RAM 84. When the address of an area from which information is to be read is specified by the execution of a program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads information from the area at the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82, and when the address of an area from which information is to be written is specified by the execution of a program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 writes the specified information to the area at the specified address. In this case, the address ranges of unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) are prestored in the specific control data in the main ROM 83. When protection is enabled, the RAM management circuit 225 does not write information when the address of the area to which information is to be written is specified and the address is within the address range of an unused area stored in the main ROM 83. On the other hand, when protection is disabled, the RAM management circuit 225 writes information to the area in the address range, even if it is within the address range of an unused area, if the address is included in the address specified as the area to which information is to be written. Writing this information also includes clearing it to "0".

As already explained, the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is provided with a protect register 223c (see FIG. 79). The protect register 223c is a storage area for the RAM management circuit 225 to specify whether or not writing of information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is prohibited. When the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, the above-mentioned protect setting is performed, and even if an address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is specified as the write target, information is not written to the address area as described above. On the other hand, when the protect information is not set in the protect register 223c, the above-mentioned protect setting is not performed, and when an address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is specified as the write target, information is written to the address area.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area, and when "1" is set in the protect register 223c, it corresponds to a case where protection information is set in the protect register 223c, and when the information in the protect register 223c is "0", it corresponds to a case where protection information is not set in the protect register 223c. In the protection release process in step S7501, the protect register 223c is cleared to "0".

Then, address Y(3) is set as the target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S7502). Address Y(3) is an address of an area included in the work area 211 for specific control in the main RAM 84 as shown in FIG. 77, and is an address set in the following order with respect to the first address Y(1) and the second address Y(2) in the main RAM 84 and the work area 211 for specific control. The area corresponding to the first address Y(1) is a setting reference area in which information on the setting value to be used is stored. The area corresponding to the second address Y(2) is a setting update display flag. In the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), the clear process is performed on the areas corresponding to the addresses from the third address Y(3) onwards, but the clear process is not performed on the setting reference area corresponding to the first address Y(1) and the setting update display flag corresponding to the second address Y(2). This makes it possible to prevent the information on the setting values to be used from being erased by the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), and also makes it possible to prevent the information indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is in the middle of being executed from being erased. Note that the area excluded from the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) may be configured to include the ceiling counter 131, as in the first embodiment.

Then, the area corresponding to the target address is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed (step S7503). If the address to be cleared is address Y(3), the area corresponding to address Y(3) is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. Also, if the address to be cleared is any of addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5), the corresponding area becomes an unused area, but since the protect register 223c was cleared to "0" in step S7501, the unused area is also cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed.

Then, it is determined whether the target address is address Y(s+1) (step S7504). Address Y(s+1) is the address of an area contained in the stack area 212 for specific control as shown in FIG. 77, and is the address immediately preceding the final address Y(s+2) in the stack area 212 for specific control. Since the final address Y(s+2) in the stack area 212 for specific control contains information about the return address in the program after the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is completed, it is excluded from the target of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118).

If the target address is not address Y(s+1) (step S7504: NO), the target address is updated to the next address in the sequence (step S7505). Specifically, the target address is incremented by 1. Then, in step S7503, the area corresponding to the address after the increment is cleared to "0" and initialized, and the process of step S7504 is executed.

When the processing of step S7505 is executed in a situation where the target address is the final address Y(r+2) in the work area 211 for specific control, the target address becomes address Y(r+3) corresponding to an unused area, and the unused area is cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, no initialization is performed, so it is simply cleared to "0". Also, when the processing of step S7505 is executed in a situation where the target address is address Y(r+5) corresponding to an unused area, the target address becomes top address Y(r+6) in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the area of top address Y(r+6) in the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, no initialization is performed, so it is simply cleared to "0".

By repeating the above processing of steps S7503 to S7505, the area from address Y(3) to address Y(r+2) in the work area 211 for specific control, the unused area in the address range (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, and the area from address Y(r+6) to address Y(s+1) in the stack area 212 for specific control are cleared to "0" and initialized. Then, after the area of address Y(s+1) is cleared to "0" and initialized, a positive determination is made in step S7504.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7504, a protection setting process is executed (step S7506), similar to step S4903 in the main process (Figure 81). As already explained, in the protection setting process, "1" is set in the protection register 223c. When "1" is set in the protection register 223c and protection information is set, it becomes impossible to write information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)). Then, this RAM clear process is terminated.

By executing the RAM clear process (Fig. 118) as described above, when the supply of operating power is started, it becomes possible to execute a clear process on some areas of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control as necessary. In this case, in a configuration in which an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is set between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the main RAM 84, when the RAM clear process (Fig. 118) is executed, a protection release process (step S7501) is executed and the protection register 223c is cleared to "0", thereby releasing the state in which writing of information to the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is disabled. As a result, when performing clearing processing on the specific control work area 211 and the specific control stack area 212 in the RAM clearing processing (FIG. 118), the clearing processing can be performed by specifying the address range (address Y(3) to Y(s+1)) that is a series of ranges extending from the specific control work area 211 to the specific control stack area 212, including the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) set between the specific control work area 211 and the specific control stack area 212. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the RAM clearing processing (FIG. 118) is performed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the specific control work area 211 and the address range to be cleared in the specific control stack area 212.

Even if the protection release process (step S7501) is executed and the protection register 223c is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is started, when the execution of the clear process for the area of the address range to be cleared is completed, the protection setting process (step S7506) is executed and the protection register 223c is set to "1". As a result, when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is completed, it becomes possible to once again disable writing of information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In the protection release process (step S7501), the protection register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protection setting process (step S7506), the protection register 223c is set to "1". This makes it possible to perform a process for enabling writing of information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) while reducing the processing load in the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), and a process for disabling writing of information to the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

Next, the information anomaly monitoring process executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 119. Note that the processes in steps S7601 to S7606 in the information anomaly monitoring process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, a monitoring process of the work area 213 for non-specific control is executed (step S7601). In this monitoring process, it is determined whether the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the program for non-specific control is outside the normal numerical range, and if it is outside the normal numerical range, it is determined that there is an abnormality. It also determines whether the information stored in the normal counter area 251 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is clearly abnormal. For example, if the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 is "0" but the value of the general winning counter 251a is 1000 or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality.

If the monitoring process in step S7601 identifies an abnormality (step S7602: YES), address Y(s+k) is set as the target address in a specified register of the main MPU 82 (step S7603). In the work area 213 for non-specific control, the area from the top address Y(s+6) to address Y(s+k-1) is the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer in which information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved when the process of specific control is changed to the process of non-specific control. In the information abnormality monitoring process (Figure 119), a clear process is performed on the area of the work area 213 for non-specific control corresponding to addresses after address Y(s+k), but a clear process is not performed on the area in the address range of the work area 213 for non-specific control from the top address Y(s+6) to address Y(s+k-1). This makes it possible to prevent information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control from being erased from the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82 when a non-specific control process is executed from a specific control process, even if the occurrence of an information abnormality is identified during the information abnormality monitoring process (Figure 119).

Then, the area corresponding to the target address is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed (step S7604). If the address to be cleared is address Y(s+k), the area corresponding to address Y(s+k) is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed.

Then, it is determined whether the target address is address Y(t+2) (step S7605). Address Y(t+2) is the last address in the work area 213 for non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 77.

If the target address is not the final address (t+2) in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7605: NO), the target address is updated to the next address in the sequence (step S7606). Specifically, the target address is incremented by 1. Then, in step S7604, the area corresponding to the address after incrementing by 1 is cleared to "0" and initialized, and the processing of step S7605 is executed. As a result, the areas included in the specified address range (address Y(s+k) to address Y(t+2)) in the work area 213 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" and initialized. The area of the address range (address Y(s+k) to address Y(t+2)) includes the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, the second security counter 213k, the first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, the special line winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, the magnetic abnormality flag 213t, the normal counter area 251, the calculation result storage area 252, the display target setting area 253, the switching timing counter 254, and the display target counter 255. If the clear process is executed for the last address (t+2) in the work area 213 for non-specific control and a positive judgment is made in step S7605, this information abnormality monitoring process is terminated.

As described above, in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), if it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 213 for non-specific control, a clear process is performed on the areas in the work area 213 for non-specific control other than the area in which the register information in the main MPU 82 is saved. This makes it possible to deal with the information abnormality.

In the information anomaly monitoring process (FIG. 119), a clear process is performed on the work area 213 for non-specific control, but a clear process is not performed on the stack area 214 for non-specific control. An unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but there is no unused area in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, even if the information anomaly monitoring process (FIG. 119) is configured to specify a series of address ranges and perform a clear process, there is no need to perform a protection release process or a protection setting process.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are provided as storage areas in the main RAM 84 to which information is written when the main MPU 82 executes specific control processing, making it possible to use the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control as storage areas to which information is written depending on their roles. In addition, an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is provided between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the address of the main RAM 84, and information is not written to this unused area when specific control processing is executed, making it possible to clearly distinguish the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the address of the main RAM 84.

In this case, when the RAM clear process (Fig. 118) is executed, the protection release process (step S7501) is executed and the protection register 223c is cleared to "0", thereby releasing the state in which writing of information to the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is disabled. As a result, in the RAM clear process (Fig. 118), the clear process can be executed by specifying the address range (address Y(3) to Y(s+1)) that is a series of ranges from the work area 211 for specific control to the stack area 212 for specific control, including the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) set between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is executed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the work area 211 for specific control and the address range to be cleared in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Even if the protection release process (step S7501) is executed and the protection register 223c is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is started, when the clear process for the area of the address range to be cleared is completed, the protection setting process (step S7506) is executed and the protection register 223c is set to "1". As a result, when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is completed, it becomes possible to once again disable writing of information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In the protection release process (step S7501), the protection register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protection setting process (step S7506), the protection register 223c is set to "1". This makes it possible to perform a process for enabling writing of information to unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) while reducing the processing load in the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), and a process for disabling writing of information to the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), the clear process is performed on the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, including the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)), but the clear process is not performed on the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, which are used in the non-specific control process. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, which are used in the specific control process, and the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, which are used in the non-specific control process, even when the clear process is performed, in a configuration in which the clear process is performed including the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) in order to simplify the processing configuration.

In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), if it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 213 for non-specific control, a clear process is performed on the areas in the work area 213 for non-specific control other than the area in which the register information in the main MPU 82 is saved. This makes it possible to deal with the information abnormality. In this case, the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) performs a clear process on the work area 213 for non-specific control, but does not perform a clear process on the stack area 214 for non-specific control. There is an unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but there is no unused area in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In this configuration, even if the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) is configured to specify a series of address ranges and perform a clear process, the protection release process and the protection setting process are not performed. This makes it possible to prevent protection from being removed unnecessarily from unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In addition to the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value, a setting display device 205 is provided for displaying the setting value in the setting confirmation process (Figure 82) or the setting value update process (Figure 83), and in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 82) or the setting value update process (Figure 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114), not only are processes (steps S7202 to S7205) performed for displaying the setting value on the setting display device 205, but also a process (step S7206) for displaying the base value on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 are executed. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm both the setting value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by rotating the game machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the front side of the main control device 71. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value in the setting value update process (FIG. 83), and can check the correspondence between the past base value and the current setting value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82).

In a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display the base values, are mounted on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, the setting display device 205, which displays the setting values, is also provided on the element mounting surface. This makes it easy to check both the base values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting values displayed on the setting display device 205.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started and the set value update process (Fig. 83) is executed, the display of the base values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started when the set value update process (Fig. 83) is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display of the base values from starting before the amusement hall manager starts the work to change the set values.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a check display that allows confirmation of whether an abnormality has occurred in the display segments 201a to 204a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to confirm whether the display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is normal or not at a timing before the start of a game. In this case, when the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started when the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is completed. This makes it possible to perform a check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while giving priority to displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, if the processing at the start of the supply of operating power ends and the processing to progress the game begins without executing the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 82) and the setting value update processing (Fig. 83), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will start displaying a check display first, and after the check display ends, they will start displaying the base value. This makes it possible to prioritize the check display over starting to display the base value in this situation.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, during the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), a setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or a setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, thereby starting the display of the base values on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. After the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends and an initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs, when the initial check period ends, the display of the base values that were the subject of notification immediately before the initial check period started, among the base values stored in each of the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258 and the third history area 259 in the calculation result memory area 252, is resumed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the resumed base values is continued for the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display duration period at the time the initial check period started. This makes it possible to properly display the base value after the initial check period ends.

When specific control processing is executed, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are targets for writing information, but the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are not targets for writing information, and when non-specific control processing is executed, the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are targets for writing information, but the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are not targets for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of memory area to which information is written when specific control processing is executed from that when non-specific control processing is executed. On the other hand, even when a specific control process is being executed, information can be read not only from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, but also from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and even when a non-specific control process is being executed, information can be read not only from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but also from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing results of one of the specific control process and the non-specific control process in the other process.

In this case, if the non-specific control processing identifies that the detection of the game ball at each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a was due to an abnormality or fraud, a corresponding process is executed in the specific control processing. This makes it possible to execute the process corresponding to the detection of the game ball at each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a being due to an abnormality or fraud as a specific control process, even if the processing for identifying whether the detection of the game ball at each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a was due to an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process rather than a specific control process, allowing for some leeway in the processing that can be executed as a specific control process.

In a configuration in which processing for determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a is executed in specific control processing, if non-specific control processing determines that the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a was due to an abnormality or fraud, processing for invalidating the detection of the game ball is executed in specific control processing. This allows for the processing for determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a and the processing for invalidating the detection of the game ball to be performed in a consolidated manner in specific control processing, while allowing for leeway in processing that can be performed as specific control processing by executing the processing for determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a as non-specific control processing rather than specific control processing.

Specific control processing includes a ball entry detection process (Figure 91) for determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a which detect the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the outlet port 24a and the through gate 35, and processing for progressing the game in response to the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a (process for acquiring pending information (Figure 92), general electric control processing (Figure 96), special electric open processing (Figure 97 (c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.), while non-specific control processing includes a fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) for monitoring whether the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud. As a result, since there is no need to execute the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) for monitoring whether the detection of the game ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud during the specific control process, the data capacity allocated to the specific control program and specific control data in the main ROM 83 can be allocated to processes other than the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95).

In the processing sequence of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88), after the ball entry detection processing (Figure 91), which is included in the processing of specific control and is a processing for determining whether or not a gaming ball has been detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a, a fraud detection execution processing (Figure 95), which is included in the processing of non-specific control and is for monitoring whether or not the detection of a gaming ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud, is executed, and after the fraud detection execution processing (Figure 95), processing which is included in the processing of specific control and is for progressing the game in response to the detection of a gaming ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a (hold information acquisition processing (Figure 92), normal power control processing (Figure 96), special power open processing (Figure 97 (c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent processing for progressing the game in response to detection of a gaming ball by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a due to an abnormality or fraud from being executed as a non-specific control process, even if the configuration is such that the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of a gaming ball by each of the detection sensors 231a-238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process.

If the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) included in the processing of specific control determines that a game ball has been detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a, then each confirmation flag provided in the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", and if the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) included in the processing of non-specific control determines that the detection of the game ball is due to an abnormality or fraud, then each abnormality flag 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1", and if the abnormality flags 213l to 213s are set to "1", the confirmation flags corresponding to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s that were set to "1" in the fraud response process (Figure 99) included in the processing of specific control are cleared to "0". This allows the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control to be read in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, while information can be written to the work area 211 for specific control in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, but not in non-specific control processing; and further allows the information stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control to be read in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, while information can be written to the work area 213 for non-specific control in both non-specific control processing and not in specific control processing, but it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

After the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed, the fraud response process (Fig. 99) included in the specific control process is executed before the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) is executed again. Then, in the fraud response process (Fig. 99), the confirmation flag is cleared to "0" and the counters for various prize balls are subtracted according to the abnormal flags 213l to 213s for which information was set in the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95). In this case, the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) first clears the abnormal flags 213l to 213s to "0", and then executes a process for setting information in the abnormal flags 213l to 213s. This makes it possible to clear the abnormal flags 213l to 213s to "0" at an appropriate timing in the non-specific control process in a configuration in which writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process.

In a configuration in which the determination of whether the detection of a game ball by each detection sensor 231a-238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is performed by non-specific control processing, the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the regular power monitoring delay timer counter 211c, which are referenced during the determination, are provided in the work area 211 for specific control. This makes it possible to perform processing for measuring periods using these special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and regular power monitoring delay timer counter 211c by specific control processing.

In addition, the measurement of the effective period of the detection of the game ball using the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b is triggered by the execution of the process of changing the special power winning device 32 from an open state to a closed state, and the measurement of the effective period of the detection of the game ball using the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c is triggered by the execution of the process of changing the second operating port 34 from an open state to a closed state. And since the process of changing the special power winning device 32 and the second operating port 34 to a closed state is executed as a specific control process, it is impossible to identify the start trigger by the non-specific control process without taking into account the result of the specific control process. In this case, if the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the processing configuration for identifying the start trigger of the measurement of the effective period in the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c may become complicated. In response to this, by providing the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the regular power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control rather than in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated, although the required storage capacity in the work area 211 for specific control increases accordingly.

In a configuration in which the determination of whether the detection of a game ball by each detection sensor 231a-238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is performed by non-specific control processing, the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a-213h, which are referenced when monitoring whether the game balls enter the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the out port 24a, are normal, are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Measurement of the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a-213h is started in response to the detection results of each detection sensor 231a-238a, so that the start trigger can be determined by non-specific control processing without taking into account the processing results of specific control. Therefore, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it becomes possible to measure the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the non-specific control processing. In such a situation, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it becomes possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the work area 211 for specific control.

Regardless of whether the specific control processing unit 221 is executing specific control processing or the non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing non-specific control processing, the command to be sent is stored in the command sending buffer 223b of the register area 223. In other words, even if the area to which information is written in the main RAM 84 is configured to be different between the situation where specific control processing is being executed and the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed, the area to which the command to be sent is written is shared between the situation where specific control processing is being executed and the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed. Therefore, since there is no need to consolidate the processing for storing commands into only one of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for storing commands from becoming complicated.

The command transmission buffer 223b is provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, not in the main RAM 84. As a result, in a configuration in which the memory areas of the main RAM 84 to which information can be written during specific control processing and the memory areas of the main RAM 84 to which information can be written during non-specific control processing are clearly distinguished as the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, and the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, it is possible to make the memory area to which commands are written common to the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing while not using these areas 211-214.

The commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224, which operates independently of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration of the program-based processing in the main side MPU 82, since there is no need to adjust the timing of command transmission in relation to the execution content of the program-based processing in the main side MPU 82.

The process for determining whether an event that is the subject of an external output of a security signal has occurred is executed not only in the specific control process but also in the non-specific control process. This allows the process for monitoring whether an event that is the subject of an external output of a security signal has occurred to be assigned to the non-specific control process, making it possible to allocate the program and data capacity for the specific control process to other processes.

A first security counter 211a is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and a second security counter 213k is provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. When it is determined in the specific control process that an event that is the target of an external output of a security signal has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is incremented by 1, and when it is determined in the non-specific control process that an event that is the target of an external output of a security signal has occurred, the value of the second security counter 213k is incremented by 1. This makes it possible to write information to the work area 211 for specific control in the specific control process but not in the non-specific control process, and to write information to the work area 213 for non-specific control in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process, while making it possible to appropriately identify the occurrence of an event that is the target of an external output of a security signal in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process.

In the security process (FIG. 101) included in the specific control process, the increment in the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added to the first security counter 211a, and if the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, the security process (FIG. 101) outputs a security signal to the outside. Then, the external output of a pulsed security signal for a predetermined output duration or more, with a predetermined stop duration in between, is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". This makes it possible to consolidate the process for externally outputting a security signal into the specific control process in a configuration in which the occurrence of an event that is the subject of an external output of a security signal is identified by both the specific control process and the non-specific control process.

When the value of the first security counter 211a becomes 1 or more, the security flag 211f is set to "1", and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is illuminated. The state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 continues, and is maintained as long as the RAM clear process (step S4919) in the main process (FIG. 81) or the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is not executed, and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in an illuminated state. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall aware of whether or not an event that is the subject of the external output of a security signal has occurred, regardless of the timing of the manager's confirmation of the abnormality display device 206, at least while the game hall is open.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the thirteenth embodiment. The configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 120 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Note that, among the processes in steps S7701 to S7719 in the first timer interrupt process, the processes other than the management process called and executed in step S7719 are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control, and the management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps S7701 to S7707 execute the same processing as steps S5501 to S5507 of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 88) in the 13th embodiment described above. In step S7708, the ball entry detection processing is executed.

Figure 121 is a flowchart showing the scoring detection process in step S7708. Note that steps S7801 to S7818 in the scoring detection process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, a process for setting the prize ball counters is executed (step S7801). The process for setting the prize ball counters is a process for setting each prize ball counter according to the processing contents of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) and the processing contents of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the previous processing round. Details of the process for setting the prize ball counters will be explained later.

Then, various flags are cleared (step S7802). In the various flags clearing process, similar to the various flags clearing process (step S5601) in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special line winning flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0".

If it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a (step S7803: YES). In this case, the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7804). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a.

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 232a (step S7805: YES). In this case, the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7806). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the second winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 232a.

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 233a (step S7807: YES). In this case, the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7808). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the third winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 233a.

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a (step S7809: YES). In this case, the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7810). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the special electric winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to identify that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a.

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a (step S7811: YES). In this case, the first actuation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7812). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the first actuation winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to identify that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a.

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a (step S7813: YES). In this case, the second actuation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7814). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the second actuation winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a.

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a (step S7815: YES). In this case, the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7816). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the out confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 238a (step S7817: YES). In this case, the gate winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7818). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the gate winning confirmation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 82 to determine that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 238a.

Returning to the explanation of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120), after the ball entry detection process is executed in step S7708, the specific control timer update process is executed in step S7709, similar to step S5510 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) in the 13th embodiment. After that, the processes of steps S7710 to S7718 are executed. In steps S7710 to S7718, the same processes as steps S5512 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) in the 13th embodiment are executed.

In this embodiment, the fraud detection process (step S5509) and fraud response process (step S5511) that were set in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are not executed. Instead, in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) in this embodiment, a management process is called by a CALLI command in step S7719, and the fraud detection execution process is executed in the management process. The process of step S7719 is executed when a positive determination is made in step S7705 or when the process of step S7718 is executed.

Next, we will explain the processing of step S7719 in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120).

In step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120), as already explained, management processing is executed by the CALLI command. Management processing is included in non-specific control processing. In other words, when the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) changes from a situation in which specific control processing is being executed to a situation in which non-specific control processing is being executed, the non-specific control processing is called using the CALLI command.

When a management process is executed by a CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved to the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, and a half carry flag, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program for the management process, which is a non-specific control process, is started, it becomes possible to save the information in the flag register in the state before it changes after the management process is called or the management process is started to the stack area 212 for specific control.

When management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited from interrupting and starting up, which are specific control processing, during the execution of management processing, which is non-specific control processing.

When a management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the specific control stack area 212, and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) are prohibited from interrupting, and then the program corresponding to the management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the management process to be executed by the CALLI command, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the specific control stack area 212 by one command ("CALLI"), and the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, the program corresponding to the management process can be started. Therefore, compared to the case where an instruction for saving the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the specific control stack area 212, an instruction for prohibiting the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), and an instruction for starting the program for the management process are separately provided, the number of instructions set in the program for executing the management process can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program.

Figure 122 is a flowchart showing the management process. Note that steps S7901 to S7920 in the management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, the load command sets "LD SP, Y(u+2)" to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S7901). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify the storage area to which information is to be written by the push command in the stack areas 212 and 214. Each time a push command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the next write command is to be executed, and each time a pop command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the previous write command is to be executed. In addition, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, the storage area to which the information is to be stored is changed to the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, the stack pointer is set to the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Then, the information in the WA register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S7902). Also, the information in the BC register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_BCBUF), BC" (step S7903). Also, the information in the DE register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_DEBUF), DE" (step S7904). Also, the information in the HL register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_HLBUF), HL" (step S7905). Also, the information in the IX register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IXBUF), IX" (step S7906). Also, the information in the IY register of the master MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_IYBUF), IY" (step S7907).

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the information clearing process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the information clearing process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913), it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control is restored to these registers, making it possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, rather than saving all the information in the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register to be used in the information clearing process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information anomaly monitoring process (step S7912) and check process (step S7913), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, is selectively saved to the work area 213 for non-specific control, thereby making it possible to reduce the capacity required to save register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to back up the information in the registers as described above while ensuring a large capacity for the work area 213 for non-specific control that is available during the information clearing process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), non-specific control timer update process (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information anomaly monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913).

Note that, of course, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the processing corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

After executing the processes of steps S7902 to S7907, the information clearing process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913) are executed. When executing the information clearing process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913), the information clearing process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and A subroutine program corresponding to the check process (step S7913) is executed, and when the subroutine program is executed, information for identifying the return address of the management process after the information clear process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913) is executed is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the information clear process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913) are completed, information for identifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

The processing contents of the information clearing process (step S7908) are the same as the information clearing process (Figure 94) executed in step S5808 of the fraud detection process (Figure 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing contents of the test firing process (step S7909) are the same as the test firing process executed in step S5809 of the fraud detection process (Figure 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing contents of the timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910) are the same as the timer update process for non-specific control executed in step S5810 of the fraud detection process (Figure 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing contents of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) are the same as the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) executed in step S5811 of the fraud detection process (Figure 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The contents of the information anomaly monitoring process (step S7912) are the same as the information anomaly monitoring process (FIG. 119) executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) in the 13th embodiment. The contents of the check process (step S7913) are the same as the check process (FIG. 108) executed in step S6809 of the second management process (FIG. 107) in the 13th embodiment.

After executing the information clear process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), non-specific control timer update process (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913), the load command is used to set Y(r+d) as a fixed address at the time of returning to specific control after the end of the management process in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as "LD SP, Y(r+d)" (step S7914). The address of Y(r+d) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control immediately before the management process is called in step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) is always constant, and therefore the stack pointer information of the main MPU 82 at that timing (i.e., the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is, for example, the return address information of the main process (Figure 81) after the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) has ended. The above constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+d). Therefore, when the information clear process (step S7908), test firing process (step S7909), timer update process for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7913), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to specific control is returned to, the fixed information Y(r+d) is set to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, so that the information of the stack pointer can be returned to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information to the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is returned to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, so that it is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting the process corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and it is not necessary to secure an area for saving the information in the main RAM 84.

Then, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S7915). Also, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)" (step S7916). Also, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S7917). Also, the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the master MPU 82 by a load command as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)" (step S7918). Also, the load command "LD IX, (_IXBUF)" overwrites the IX register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7919). Also, the load command "LD IY, (_IYBUF)" overwrites the IY register of the master MPU 82 with the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7920). By executing the processes of steps S7915 to S7920, it is possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the master MPU 82 to the information corresponding to specific control immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started.

After the processing of steps S7915 to S7920 is executed, the RETI command causes a return to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) included in the specific control processing. Execution of the RETI command restores the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the management processing to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and switches the state from prohibiting the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) to allowing them. This causes the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to return to information for executing specific control, and enables new execution of the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing.

Because the configuration executes the RETI command, the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the management process can be restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82 by one command ("RETI"), and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) can be switched from a prohibited state to an allowed state. Therefore, compared to a case where an command for restoring the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82 and an command for switching from a prohibited state to an allowed state for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) can be separately provided, the number of commands set in the program for the non-specific control process can be reduced. This allows the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing the program for the non-specific control process to be reduced.

Here, when non-specific control processing is executed, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when specific control processing is resumed. This eliminates the need to secure a memory area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is information that will not be used when non-specific control processing is started again after returning to specific control processing. In other words, information required for multiple rounds of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when non-specific control processing is executed, no problem occurs in executing non-specific control processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the non-specific control processing is not distributed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), but is instead consolidated as a single process. This eliminates the need to repeatedly execute in one processing run of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) the process for saving information from various registers of the main MPU 82 to the main RAM 84 when the situation changes from one in which specific control processing is being performed to one in which non-specific control processing is being performed, and the process for restoring information saved in the main RAM 84 to various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is terminated and a return is made to specific control processing. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120).

The non-specific control processing that is set as one process in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120) is set as the last processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120). This makes it possible to execute the non-specific control processing in each processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120) taking into account the processing contents of all the specific control processing in that processing round. In addition, because the non-specific control processing is set as the last processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120), there is no need to store the return address information of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120) in the main RAM 84 after the non-specific control processing is completed.

Since the non-specific control processing is set as the last processing sequence in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 120), the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) is not executed after the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 120) and before the special chart special power control processing (step S7712), the normal chart normal power control processing (step S7713), and the payout output processing (step S7716). In this case, if the processing result of the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) in a specified processing time of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 120) is used as it is in the special chart special power control processing (step S7712), the normal chart normal power control processing (step S7713), and the payout output processing (step S7716) in the specified processing time, there is a risk that a process for progressing the game or a process for paying out game balls to the player will be executed based on the winning result of the game ball due to an abnormality or fraud. The processing configuration to prevent such inconveniences from occurring is explained below.

Figure 123 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring reserved information in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the processes of steps S8001 to S8022 in the process of acquiring reserved information are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

In step S8001, it is determined whether the first storage standby flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", and in step S8008, it is determined whether the second storage standby flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". The first storage standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that the storage of the first reserved information in the first special chart reserve area 111 is waiting after it has been determined that a game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a. The second storage standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify that the storage of the second reserved information in the second special chart reserve area 112 is waiting after it has been determined that a game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a.

If the first storage waiting flag is not set to "1" (step S8001: NO) and the second storage waiting flag is not set to "1" (step S8008: NO), it is determined whether the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8015). If the first operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S8015: YES), and the number of first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 is less than the upper limit memory number (step S8016: YES), the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first waiting area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8017). The first waiting area is an area for waiting the first reserved information acquired when a game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a without storing it in the first special chart reserved area 111 until it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that the detection of the game ball by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a is not due to an abnormality. After that, the first storage waiting flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8018).

If the first storage standby flag is set to "1" (step S8001: YES), it is determined whether the first actuation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8002). In other words, it is determined whether the detection of a game ball by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a that triggered the setting of the first storage standby flag to "1" was identified as being caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) of the previous processing round.

If the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p is not set to "1" (step S8002: NO), it means that the detection of the game ball by the first operation port detection sensor 235a, which triggered the setting of the first storage waiting flag to "1", was not identified as being due to an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120) of the previous processing round. In this case, the value of the first special chart reserved counter is incremented by 1 (step S8003). The display content of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c in the special chart unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special chart reserved counter. As a result, the display content of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c corresponds to the number of first reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area 111. After that, the first reserved information waiting in the first waiting area is stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved area 111, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S8003 (step S8004). After that, the first pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8005). By storing the first pending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the first pending command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the first pending display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the first pending information.

On the other hand, if the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p is set to "1" (step S8002: YES), this means that the detection of a game ball by the first operation port detection sensor 235a that triggered the setting of the first storage waiting flag to "1" was identified as being caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) of the previous processing round. In this case, the first pending information waiting in the first waiting area is erased (step S8006). Furthermore, when the process of step S8005 or the process of step S8006 is executed, the first storage waiting flag is cleared to "0" (step S8007).

If a negative judgment is made in step S8015, if a negative judgment is made in step S8016, or if the processing of step S8018 is executed, it is judged whether or not the second activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8019). If the second activation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S8019: YES), and the number of second reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit memory number (step S8020: YES), the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in a second waiting area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8021). The second waiting area is an area for waiting the second reserved information acquired when the second actuation port detection sensor 236a detects a game ball without storing it in the second special chart reserve area 112 until it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that the detection of the game ball by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a is not due to an abnormality or fraud. After that, the second storage waiting flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8022).

If the second storage standby flag is set to "1" (step S8008: YES), it is determined whether the second actuation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8009). In other words, it is determined whether the detection of a game ball by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a that triggered the setting of the second storage standby flag to "1" was identified as being caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) of the previous processing round.

If the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is not set to "1" (step S8009: NO), it means that the detection of the game ball by the second operation port detection sensor 236a, which triggered the setting of the second storage waiting flag to "1", was not identified as being due to an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120) of the previous processing round. In this case, the value of the second special chart pending counter is incremented by 1 (step S8010). The display content of the second special chart pending display unit 37d in the special chart unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special chart pending counter. As a result, the display content of the second special chart pending display unit 37d corresponds to the number of second pending information stored in the second special chart pending area 112. After that, the second pending information waiting in the second waiting area is stored in the first storage area of the second special chart pending area 112, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories incremented by 1 in step S8010 (step S8011). After that, the second pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8012). By storing the second pending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the second pending command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the second pending display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the second pending information.

On the other hand, if the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to "1" (step S8009: YES), it means that the detection of the game ball by the second operation port detection sensor 236a that triggered the setting of the second storage waiting flag to "1" was identified as being due to an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) of the previous processing round. In this case, the second pending information waiting in the second waiting area is erased (step S8013). Furthermore, when the process of step S8012 or the process of step S8013 is executed, the second storage waiting flag is cleared to "0" (step S8014).

With the above configuration, even if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a or the second actuation port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in a given processing time of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120), the corresponding reserved information is temporarily held in the corresponding waiting area in the reserved information acquisition process (Fig. 123) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120) in the given processing time. Then, if it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120) in the given processing time that the detection of the game ball that triggered the acquisition of the reserved information was not due to an abnormality or fraud, the reserved information held in the waiting area is stored in the corresponding special chart reserved area 111, 112 in the reserved information acquisition process (Fig. 123) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120) in the next processing time for the given processing time. As a result, due to the fact that non-specific control processing, including the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), is consolidated in the final processing sequence of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120), even if the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) is not set between the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) and the reserved information acquisition processing (Figure 123) in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120), it is possible to prevent reserved information from being stored in the special chart reserved areas 111, 112 in response to the detection of a game ball due to an abnormality or fraud.

The configuration described above of temporarily suspending execution of a predetermined process triggered by the detection of a gaming ball and then executing the predetermined process that was on hold if the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) determines that the detection of the gaming ball is not due to an abnormality or fraud is also adopted in the process for acquiring reserved information on the normal side in the normal control process (step S7713) triggered by the detection of a gaming ball by the gate detection sensor 238a.

Figure 124 is a flow chart showing the prize ball counter setting process executed in step S7801 of the ball entry detection process (Figure 121). Note that the processes in steps S8101 to S8120 in the prize ball counter setting process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8101: YES), the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8103) on the condition that the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8102: NO). If it is determined that the detection of the game ball in the first winning hole detection sensor 231a is due to an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing round, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l is set to "1". If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives a 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The first winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the winning ball detection process (Figure 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (Figure 124) is completed.

If the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8104: YES), the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8106) on the condition that the second general winning abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8105: NO). If it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing round that the detection of the game ball in the second winning port detection sensor 232a is due to an abnormality, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m is set to "1". If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives a 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The second winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (Figure 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (Figure 124) is completed.

If the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8107: YES), the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8109) on the condition that the third general winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8108: NO). If it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing round that the detection of the game ball in the third winning port detection sensor 233a is due to an abnormality, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n is set to "1". If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives a 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The third winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the winning ball detection process (Figure 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (Figure 124) is completed.

If the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8110: YES), and on the condition that the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8111: NO), the value of the 15 winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8112), and if the winning counter value in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or more, this value is decremented by 1 (step S8113). If it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing round that the detection of the game ball in the special electric detection sensor 234a is due to an abnormality or fraud, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is set to "1". If the value of the 15-ball counter is 1 or more, a 15-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the value of the 15-ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 15-ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15-ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out. Also, if the value of the winning counter becomes "0", it executes a process to close the special electric winning device 32 that is in the open state in the special chart special electric control process (step S7712). The special electric winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

If the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8114: YES), the value of the 1 winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8116) on the condition that the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8115: NO). If it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing round that the detection of the game ball in the first operation port detection sensor 235a is due to an abnormality, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p is set to "1". If the value of the 1 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 1 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120), and the value of the 1 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 1 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives a 1 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (Figure 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (Figure 124) is completed.

If the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8117: YES), and on the condition that the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8118: NO), the value of the one winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8119), and if the value of the normal power winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or more, this value is decremented by 1 (step S8120). If it is determined that the detection of the game ball in the second operation port detection sensor 236a is due to an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing round, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to "1". If the value of the 1 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 1 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120), and the value of the 1 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 1 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives a 1 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. Also, when the value of the normal power winning counter becomes "0", it executes a process to close the second operation port 34 that is in the open state in the normal power control process (step S7713). The second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (Fig. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (Fig. 124) is completed.

Due to the above configuration, even if the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in a specified processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120) determines that a game ball has been detected by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a, the payout output process (step S7716) in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120) in that specified processing round does not execute processing for executing the payout of the corresponding game ball, the special chart special power control process (step S7712) in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120) in that specified processing round does not execute processing for progressing the round of play, and the normal chart normal power control process (step S7713) in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120) in that specified processing round does not execute processing for progressing the normal power open state. Then, in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) of the specified processing round, if it is determined that the detection of the game balls by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a is not due to an abnormality or fraud, a process for executing the payout of the game balls, a process for progressing the round of play, and a process for progressing the normal power release state are executed. As a result, due to the fact that non-specific control processing, including the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), is consolidated in the final processing sequence of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120), even if the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) is not set between the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) and the payout output processing (step S7716), the special chart special power control processing (step S7712), and the normal chart normal power control processing (step S7713) in the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 120), it is possible to prevent processing for executing the payout of game balls in response to the detection of a game ball due to an abnormality or fraud, processing for progressing the round of play, and processing for progressing the normal power open state from being executed.

Figure 125 is a flowchart showing the normal entry management process executed in the check process in step S7913 of the management process (Figure 122). Note that the processes in steps S8201 to S8221 in the normal entry management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

If the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8201: YES), but the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8202: NO), this means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the first winning port detection sensor 231a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8203). In addition, when the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8204: YES) and the second general winning abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8205: NO), it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the second winning port detection sensor 232a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8206). In addition, if the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8207: YES), but the third general winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8208: NO), this means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the third winning port detection sensor 233a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8209).

If the special line winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8210: YES), but the special line winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8211: NO), this means that a winning has occurred in the special line winning device 32 and one game ball has been normally detected by the special line detection sensor 234a. In this case, the value of the special line winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8212).

If the first activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8213: YES), but the first activation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8214: NO), this means that a winning has occurred in the first activation port 33 and one game ball has been normally detected by the first activation port detection sensor 235a. In this case, the value of the first activation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8215).

If the second activation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8216: YES), but the second activation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8217: NO), this means that a winning has occurred in the second activation port 34 and one game ball has been normally detected by the second activation port detection sensor 236a. In this case, the value of the second activation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8218).

If the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8219: YES), but the out abnormality flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8220: NO), this means that a game ball has entered the out port 24a and one game ball has been detected normally by the out port detection sensor 237a. In this case, the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8221).

The normal ball entry monitoring process (Fig. 125) is executed after the ball entry detection process (step S7708) and after the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in each processing round of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120). Therefore, the normal ball entry monitoring process (Fig. 125) is executed after it has been determined whether the detection of the game ball by the various detection sensors 231a to 237a is due to an abnormality or fraud. In the normal ball entry monitoring process (Fig. 125), if the abnormality flags 213l to 213r are set to "1", "1" is not added to the counters 251a to 251e corresponding to the confirmation flags set to "1", even if the corresponding confirmation flags are set to "1". This makes it possible to accurately manage the game history.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content related to time saving is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram to explain the contents of the support mode.

The types of support modes in this embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment. Specifically, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in a situation in which game balls are continuously released in a similar manner into the game area. In addition, a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode are set as the high-frequency support modes.

When the normal play hit/miss judgment process is executed to determine by lottery whether the normal play device 34a will be in the open normal play state, there are a high probability mode on the normal play side and a low probability mode on the normal play side as judgment modes so that the probability of winning the electric play hit is relatively high and low. In the low probability mode on the normal play side, the probability of winning the electric play hit in one normal play hit/miss judgment process is 1/2, while in the high probability mode on the normal play side, the probability of winning the electric play hit in one normal play hit/miss judgment process is 4/5.

When the normal map hit/miss judgment process is executed, the display of changing patterns will start in the normal map display section 38a. In this case, the normal map fluctuation period, which is the duration of the fluctuation display round during which the display of changing patterns is executed in the normal map display section 38a, has a long period and a short period so that the period is relatively long and short. The long period is 10 seconds, while the short period is 1 second. The shorter the period, the shorter the shortest period between one normal power open state and the next normal power open state, so when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously launched in the same manner into the game area, the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state per unit time is relatively high.

When the normal map display section 38a ends a change display round, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process that triggered the execution of the change display round. In this case, if the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a miss, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the miss result, and no transition to the normal power open state occurs. If the normal map side reserved information is stored in the normal map reserved area 84c, a new normal map hit/miss judgment process is executed on the reserved information on the normal map side, and a new change display round is started in the normal map display section 38a. On the other hand, if the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a result corresponding to the electric role release winning, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the winning result, and a transition to the normal power open state occurs.

As execution modes of the normal power opening state, there are a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode so that the expectation of the game ball entering the normal power role 34a is relatively high and low. In the low expectation mode, a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As in the first embodiment, the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, so when a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once, the game ball does not enter the second operating port 34 basically, and even if it does, the number of balls that enter is about one. In addition, the normal power opening state also ends when the number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal power side. However, when a short opening occurs once, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is about one, so the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side will not enter the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long opening is two seconds. Since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, when the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, about three game balls can enter the second operating port 34. In the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times, with an interval period (specifically, one second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in a closed state. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter. As described above, the normal power opening state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit number on the normal power side, which is 10. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, an event may occur in which the normal power opening state ends when the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side enters the second operating port 34.

As described above, in a configuration in which the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process, the fluctuation period of the normal map in the normal map display unit 38a, and the execution mode of the normal power open state are set, in the low-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is long, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a low-expectation mode in which one short opening occurs. Also, in the first high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a high-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high-expectation mode in which three long openings occur. Also, in the second high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high-expectation mode in which three long openings occur. Therefore, when the launch of game balls continues in the same manner so that winning occurs in the through gate 35, the expectation of the rate at which the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state per unit time is highest in the first high-frequency support mode, next highest in the second high-frequency support mode, and lowest in the low-frequency support mode. Also, since the execution mode of the normal power open state in the low-frequency support mode is a low expectation mode, in the low-frequency support mode, game balls hardly enter the second operating port 34, whereas in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high expectation mode, so in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, game balls can be expected to enter the second operating port 34 to the maximum number of second reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 112.

The configuration for differentiating the expectation of the rate at which the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state per unit time between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, a short period may be selected as the normal map fluctuation period in the first high-frequency support mode, while a medium period between a short period and a long period may be selected in the second high-frequency support mode. As the execution mode of the normal power open state, a long open may occur three times in the first high-frequency support mode, while a long open occurs twice in the second high-frequency support mode. In addition, although the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is the same as the high probability mode on the normal map side, the expectation of the rate at which the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state per unit time may be higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the second high-frequency support mode depending on the content of the fluctuation period of the normal map or the execution mode of the normal power open state. In addition, although the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is the same in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, depending on the normal map fluctuation period or the contents of the execution mode of the normal power open state, the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to have a higher expectation of the percentage of the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time than the second high-frequency support mode.

Figure 126 (b) is an explanatory diagram to explain the contents of the time-saving state set in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, there are a normal game state, a high probability state, and time-saving states ST1 to ST3 as game states. The normal game state is a game state in which the winning/losing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. The high probability state is a game state in which the winning/losing lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. As in the first embodiment, the high probability state occurs when a game round in which the winning/losing determination process results in a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result (see FIG. 10) ends and the following opening/closing execution mode ends. The time-saving states ST1 to ST3 are game states in which the winning/losing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. In addition, the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 include a first time-saving state ST1, a second time-saving state ST2, and a third time-saving state ST3, which have different execution modes as shown in FIG. 126(b).

The first time-saving state ST1 occurs when a game round that results in a 5R low probability result (see Figure 10) in the win/loss determination process ends and the subsequent open/close execution mode ends. The first time-saving state ST1 is a game state in which the win/loss selection mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. The first time-saving state ST1 ends when a jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode occurs, and also ends when 100 game rounds have been played without a jackpot result. When 100 game rounds have been played, the normal game state resumes.

The second time-saving state ST2 occurs when the total number of play times consumed without a jackpot occurring in the normal game state or the time-saving state reaches the ceiling number. The ceiling number of play times is set when a jackpot occurs as in the first embodiment above, and also when the supply of operating power begins. However, this is not limited to this, and the ceiling number of play times may not be set when the supply of operating power begins. The ceiling number of play times is arbitrary, but in this embodiment it is set to 900 play times. In this case, the ceiling number of play times is set to a number greater than the number of play times in the first time-saving state ST1, and the ceiling number of play times is set when a jackpot occurs as described above. Therefore, the consumption of the ceiling number of play times will not be completed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1.

The second time-saving state ST2 is a game state in which the winning/losing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. As already explained, when game balls are continuously released in the same manner so that a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs, the expected rate of the regular power device 34a of the second operating port 34 being in an open state per unit time is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the second high-frequency support mode, so that the expected rate of the regular power device 34a of the second operating port 34 being in an open state per unit time is more advantageous for the player in the first time-saving state ST1 than in the second time-saving state ST2.

The second time-saving state ST2 ends when 150 game times have been played without a jackpot result occurring. When 150 game times have been played, the normal game state is entered. As already explained, the first time-saving state ST1 ends when 100 game times have been played without a jackpot result occurring. Therefore, in terms of the duration of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 is more advantageous for the player than the first time-saving state ST1. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of game times that trigger the end of the state may be the same in the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2, or the number of game times that trigger the end of the state may be greater in the first time-saving state ST1 than in the second time-saving state ST2. In these cases, the first time-saving state ST1 is more advantageous than the second time-saving state ST2 overall, including the expected rate at which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is open per unit time and the number of game plays that will trigger the end of the game.

If a jackpot result occurs during the second time-saving state ST2 and the opening and closing execution mode occurs, the second time-saving state ST2 also ends. In this case, if a 5R low probability result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode occurs, the first time-saving state ST1 will be entered after the opening and closing execution mode ends, so it can be said that the priority of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is set to the first time-saving state ST1 higher than the second time-saving state ST2.

The third time-saving state ST3 occurs when the time-saving result (FIG. 9) is selected in the winning/losing judgment process executed in the normal game state or the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. As in the first embodiment, the time-saving result can be selected regardless of whether the first winning/losing table 121 (FIG. 9(a)) for low probability, the second winning/losing table 122 (FIG. 9(b)) for low probability, or the winning/losing table 123 (FIG. 9(c)) for high probability is referenced. However, the third time-saving state ST3 does not occur even if the time-saving result is selected in the high probability state where the winning/losing table 123 for high probability is referenced. In addition, in the first embodiment, the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result exist as the time-saving result, but in this embodiment, there is only one type of time-saving result.

The third time-saving state ST3 is a game state in which the winning/losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. As already explained, the support mode in the second time-saving state ST2 is also the second high frequency support mode. Therefore, when the game ball continues to be released in the same manner so that a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs, the expected rate of the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time is the same in the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3. Also, as already explained, the support mode in the first time-saving state ST1 is the first high frequency support mode, so the expected rate of the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time is more advantageous for the player in the first time-saving state ST1 than in the third time-saving state ST3.

The third time-saving state ST3 ends when 50 play times have been played without a jackpot result occurring. When 50 play times have been played, the normal play state is resumed. As already explained, the first time-saving state ST1 ends when 100 play times have been played without a jackpot result occurring, and the second time-saving state ST2 ends when 150 play times have been played without a jackpot result occurring. Therefore, in terms of the ending conditions for the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the first time-saving state ST1 is more advantageous for the player than the third time-saving state ST3, and furthermore, the second time-saving state ST2 is more advantageous for the player than the third time-saving state ST3. In other words, the first time-saving state ST1 is more advantageous than the third time-saving state ST3, and the second time-saving state ST2 is more advantageous than the third time-saving state ST3, overall, including the expected rate at which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is open per unit time and the number of game plays that will trigger the end of the game.

The third time-saving state ST3 also ends if a jackpot result occurs during the third time-saving state ST3 and the open/close execution mode occurs. In this case, if a 5R low probability result occurs and the open/close execution mode occurs, the first time-saving state ST1 occurs after the open/close execution mode ends, and the first time-saving state ST1 continues even if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is played during the first time-saving state ST1. Therefore, it can be said that the priority of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is set higher for the first time-saving state ST1 than for the third time-saving state ST3. Also, if the ceiling number of game rounds is played during the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 ends and the second time-saving state ST2 occurs, and even if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is played during the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 continues. Therefore, it can be said that the priority of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is set higher for the second time-saving state ST2 than for the third time-saving state ST3. If a time-saving result occurs during the third time-saving state ST3, the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is reset to 50 times, which corresponds to the third time-saving state ST3.

Figure 127 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the main ROM 83 that is referenced to control the game state.

The main ROM 83 is provided with a game time period address table 311, a normal game time period table 312, a first stage time-saving game time period table 313, a second stage time-saving game time period table 314, a third stage time-saving game time period table 315, and a high probability game time period table 316. These tables 311 to 316 are referenced by the main MPU 82 when determining the variable display period of game times. The normal play time period table 312 is referred to by the main MPU 82 when determining the variable display period of the play times in the normal play state, the first to third stage time-saving play time period tables 313 to 315 are referred to by the main MPU 82 when determining the variable display period of the play times in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and the high probability play time period table 316 is referred to by the main MPU 82 when determining the variable display period of the play times in the high probability state. In this case, a shorter period is more likely to be selected as the variable display period of the play times when the first to third stage time-saving play time period tables 313 to 315 or the high probability play time period table 316 are referred to than when the normal play time period table 312 is referred to. In addition, the play time period address table 311 is referred to by the main MPU 82 when selecting the play time period tables 312 to 315 to be referred to in the normal play state or the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

Figure 127(b) is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory area of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a first time-saving state flag 322, a second time-saving state flag 323, a third time-saving state flag 324, a ceiling counter 325, a state determination counter 326, and a state duration counter 327.

The high probability flag 321 is a flag for the master MPU 82 to determine whether the game state is a high probability state or not, and is set to "1" when the high probability state starts and cleared to "0" when the high probability state ends. When the high probability flag 321 is set to "1", the high probability win/loss table 123 is read out when the win/loss determination process (step S805) is executed in the special chart fluctuation start process (Figure 20) of the master MPU 82, and when the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0", the low probability win/loss tables 121, 122 are read out when the win/loss determination process (step S805) is executed in the special chart fluctuation start process (Figure 20) of the master MPU 82. In addition, when the high probability flag 321 is set to "1", the high probability table (step S406) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display unit 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, when the high probability flag 321 is set to "1", steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process of the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

The first time-saving state flag 322 is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the game state is the first time-saving state ST1 or not, and is set to "1" when the first time-saving state ST1 starts, and is cleared to "0" when the first time-saving state ST1 ends. If the first time-saving state flag 322 is set to "1", the high probability table (step S406) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the main MPU 82, and further, when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display round (step S414). In addition, if the first time-saving state flag 322 is set to "1", steps S509 to S511 are executed as control processing for the normal power open state during the normal map determination process (FIG. 17) of the main MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

The second time-saving state flag 323 is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the game state is the second time-saving state ST2 or not, and is set to "1" when the second time-saving state ST2 starts, and is cleared to "0" when the second time-saving state ST2 ends. When the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1", the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the main MPU 82, and further, when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display round (step S414). In addition, if the second time-saving status flag 323 is set to "1", steps S509 to S511 are executed as control processing for the normal power open state during the normal map determination processing (FIG. 17) of the main MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

The third time-saving state flag 324 is a flag for the main MPU 82 to determine whether the game state is in the third time-saving state ST3 or not, and is set to "1" when the third time-saving state ST3 starts, and is cleared to "0" when the third time-saving state ST3 ends. When the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1", the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the main MPU 82, and further, when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display round (step S414). In addition, if the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1", steps S509 to S511 are executed as control processing for the normal power open state during the normal map determination process (FIG. 17) of the main MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the high probability flag 321 and the first to third time-saving state flags 322 to 324 are not set to "1", that is, when the game state is in the normal game state, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the long period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S413). Also, when the game state is in the normal game state, the master MPU 82 executes steps S506 to S508 as the control process of the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17), and the normal power open state becomes the low expectation mode. This control by the low frequency support mode is also performed in the opening and closing execution mode.

The ceiling counter 325 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of ceiling turns required until the second time-saving state ST2 occurs. When a jackpot result occurs or when the supply of operating power starts, the ceiling counter 325 is set to "900" as the number of ceiling turns. The value of this ceiling counter 325 is decremented by one each time a game turn is played in the normal game state or in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and when the value of the ceiling counter 325 after the decrement becomes "0", the second time-saving state ST2 occurs.

The state determination counter 326 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the progress of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. The first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 have multiple stages set according to the range of the number of times played, and the determination manner of the variable display period of the number of times played differs in each stage. A value corresponding to each stage is set in the state determination counter 326. The state duration counter 327 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the number of remaining times until the high probability state ends in the high probability state in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the number of remaining times until the above-mentioned stages of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 end in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

Next, we will explain the various processes executed by the main MPU 82 to control the game state in this embodiment. Figure 128 is a flowchart showing the special chart determination process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special image side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S8301: YES), and the result of the current game is a jackpot (step S8302: YES), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special image side timer counter (step S8303), and an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S8304). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the opening period.

Then, the information of 900 times, which is the ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 325 (step S8305). In other words, when the game number corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening and closing execution mode starts, the information of 900 times, which is the ceiling number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 325. In the case of a configuration in which the ceiling number of times is set in the ceiling counter 325 not when the opening and closing execution mode starts, but during the opening and closing execution mode or when the opening and closing execution mode ends, if a fraudulent act is performed in which the supply of operating power is stopped after the opening and closing execution mode starts and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) clears the information indicating that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress as in the first embodiment, while the value of the ceiling counter 325 is maintained, there is a risk that the game will be resumed in a situation where the remaining ceiling number of times is small while obtaining the benefits of the opening and closing execution mode until the supply of the operating power is stopped. In response to this, when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 325 is set to 900, which is the ceiling number of times, making it possible to neutralize fraudulent behavior such as the one described above.

Then, the outer end flag at the start of the jackpot, which is provided in the main RAM 84, is set to "1" (step S8306). The outer end flag at the start of the jackpot is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify the trigger for controlling the external output of a signal to a hall computer provided outside the pachinko machine 10. The control content of the external output of the signal will be explained later. Then, the value of the special chart special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S8307). As a result, the value of the special chart special charge counter becomes "3", which corresponds to the special charge start process (step S609).

If the result of the current game is not a jackpot (step S8302: NO), processing for time-saving progression is executed in step S8308, processing for setting the time-saving result is executed in step S8309, processing for decrementing the ceiling counter 325 is executed in step S8310, and processing for high-probability progression is executed in step S8311. The contents of the processing in steps S8308 to S8311 will be explained later. After that, the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S8312). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart variation start processing (step S606).

Figure 129 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", i.e., the ending period has elapsed (step S8401: YES), and the game result that triggered this opening and closing execution mode was a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result (step S8402: YES), the high probability flag 321 is set to "1", and the first time-saving state flag 322, the second time-saving state flag 323, and the third time-saving state flag 324 are each cleared to "0" (step S8403). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability state that is the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is started.

Then, the state duration counter 327 is set to "100", which is the high probability continuation number (step S8404). As already explained, the state duration counter 327 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining continuation number until the high probability state ends in the high probability state in the high probability state. In this pachinko machine 10, the high probability state is entered when the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result ends, but if the number of play times executed in the high probability state without a new jackpot result reaches 100, which is the high probability continuation number, the state enters the normal game state in which the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, even if a jackpot result has not occurred.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode was a 5R low probability result (step S8402: NO), the high probability flag 321 is cleared to "0" (step S8405). In addition, the first time-saving state flag 322 is set to "1", and the second time-saving state flag 323 and the third time-saving state flag 324 are each cleared to "0" (step S8406). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result becomes the first time-saving state ST1, which is a low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode was started.

Then, the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1 will continue (step S8407). As already explained, the state duration counter 327 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the number of times the remaining duration is to continue until each stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 ends in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

Regarding each stage in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the stage is divided into a first stage, a second stage, and a third stage. The manner in which the variable display period of the number of times of play is determined differs between these stages. When the stage is started in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the stage is the first stage. The first stage continues until 20 times of play are consumed in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. When the first stage ends in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the stage becomes the second stage. The second stage continues until 79 times of play are consumed in the first time-saving state ST1, until 129 times of play are consumed in the second time-saving state ST2, and until 29 times of play are consumed in the third time-saving state ST3. When the second stage ends in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the stage becomes the third stage. The third stage ends when one play round is played, regardless of whether the player is in the first, second, or third time-saving state ST1-ST3. The last play round becomes the third stage, regardless of whether the player is in the first, second, or third time-saving state ST1-ST3.

Then, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1" (step S8408). As already explained, the state determination counter 326 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the progress of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and a value corresponding to each stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is set to the state determination counter 326. Specifically, if it is the first stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1", if it is the second stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "2", and if it is the third stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "3". In addition, if the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 end, the state determination counter 326 is cleared to "0". Therefore, if the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0" and the value of the state determination counter 326 is "0", the game state becomes the normal game state.

When the processing of step S8404 or step S8408 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S8409). In this transmission process, the state designation command corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processing of steps S8402 to S8408 is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. The sound/light side MPU 93 executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance corresponding to the content of the received state designation command.

In this case, when a transition to the first time-saving state ST1 occurs, a state designation command indicating that the first time-saving state ST1 has newly started is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the first time-saving state ST1 is newly started. After the performance indicating that the first time-saving state ST1 is newly started ends, the sound/light side MPU 93 executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute the base performance of the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In this case, the pattern display device 41 displays a character corresponding to the first stage in front of the background image corresponding to the first stage.

Then, the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot, which is provided in the main RAM 84, is set to "1" (step S8410). The outer end flag at the end of the jackpot is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify the trigger for controlling the external output of a signal to a hall computer provided outside the pachinko machine 10. The control content of the external output of the signal will be explained later. Then, the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S8411). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart variation start process (step S606).

Figure 130 is a flowchart showing the high probability progression process executed in step S8311 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step S8501: YES), i.e., in the high probability state, the value of the state duration counter 327 is decremented by 1 (step S8502). If the value of the state duration counter 327 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S8503: YES), this means that 100 play times, which is the high probability continuation count, have been consumed in the high probability state after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability flag 321 is cleared to "0" (step S8504). This results in a normal play state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

Then, the high probability end outer end flag stored in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S8505). The high probability end outer end flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify the trigger for controlling the external output of a signal to a hall computer installed outside the pachinko machine 10. The details of the control of the external output of the signal will be explained later.

Then, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S8506). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the high probability state has ended is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. By receiving this state designation command, the sound/light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the presentation corresponding to the high probability state in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the presentation corresponding to the normal game state.

Figure 131 is a flow chart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 executed in step S8310 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step S8601). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step S8601: YES), the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S8602 and onward. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented in a game played in a high probability state, and since the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented, no ceiling time reduction occurs.

Here, in the special pattern determination process (Fig. 128), as already explained, the subtraction process (Fig. 131) of the ceiling counter 325 is executed before the high probability progression process (Fig. 130). As a result, in the last game in the high probability state, the value of the state duration counter 327 is subtracted by 1 in the high probability progression process (Fig. 130), and the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0", so that the subtraction process (Fig. 131) of the ceiling counter 325 is executed before the high probability flag 321 is cleared to "0". Then, when the subtraction process (Fig. 131) of the ceiling counter 325 is executed at that timing, the high probability flag 321 is still set to "1", so the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not executed. Therefore, in the game in which the win/loss determination process was executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability state, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 325 from being executed. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order so that the ceiling counter 325 decrement process (Figure 131) is executed before the high probability progression process (Figure 130) during the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step S8601: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more (step S8602). If the value of the ceiling counter 325 is "0" (step S8602: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 is terminated without executing the processes in steps S8603 and after. The process of setting the ceiling number information to the ceiling counter 325 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, only in step S114 when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, in step S122 when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and in step S8305 when the open/close execution mode is started, and after the value of the ceiling counter 325 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 325 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes are executed. On the other hand, the second time-saving state ST2 occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more and the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 325 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 is "0" as described above (step S8602: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 is terminated without executing the process from step S8603 onwards. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 325 after subtraction becomes "0" and the second time-saving state ST2 occurs, and if the number of play times of the second time-saving state ST2 is consumed without a jackpot result occurring in the second time-saving state ST2 and the second time-saving state ST2 ends and the normal game state is entered, the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur even if the consumption of play times without a jackpot result is repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state ST2 triggered by the ceiling time-saving from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more (step S8602: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 (step S8603), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 325 after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S8604). If the value of the ceiling counter 325 is "0" (step S8604: YES), the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1" and the third time-saving state flag 324 is cleared to "0" (step S8605). As a result, if the total number of times played in the normal game state or the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 reaches the ceiling number without a jackpot result occurring after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the second time-saving state ST2, which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode, is entered.

As already explained, in the high probability state, a negative judgment is made in step S8601 and the processing from step S8602 onwards is not executed, so the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur in the high probability state. In addition, the ceiling number of times is set to a number greater than the number of times that the first time-saving state ST1 continues, and the ceiling number of times is set when a jackpot result occurs, so that the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play does not occur in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1. On the other hand, the third time-saving state ST3 occurs when the time-saving result is obtained in the win/loss judgment processing, and even in the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is decremented by 1 in step S8603 each time a play time is consumed. Therefore, the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play may occur in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3. In this case, the processing of step S8605 is executed even in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3, so that the third time-saving state ST3 ends in the middle and the second time-saving state ST2 occurs. In other words, the second time-saving state ST2 is prioritized over the third time-saving state ST3.

Then, the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage of the second time-saving state ST2 will continue (step S8606). As already explained, the state duration counter 327 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of times each stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 will continue until the end of each stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

Then, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1" (step S8607). As already explained, the state determination counter 326 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the progress of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and a value corresponding to each stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is set to the state determination counter 326. Specifically, if it is the first stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1", if it is the second stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "2", and if it is the third stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "3".

Then, the outer end flag for when the time-saving period occurs, which is stored in the main RAM 84, is set to "1" (step S8608). The outer end flag for when the time-saving period occurs is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify the trigger for controlling the external output of a signal to a hall computer installed outside the pachinko machine 10. The details of the control of the external output of the signal will be explained later.

Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S8609). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has started is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to execute a performance indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 is started on the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After the performance indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 is newly started is finished, the sound/light side MPU 93 executes a process to execute the base performance of the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 on the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, on the pattern display device 41, a character corresponding to the first stage is displayed in front of the background image corresponding to the first stage.

Figure 132 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step S8701: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step S8702). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step S8702: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps S8703 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result.

Here, in the special chart determination process (Fig. 128), as already explained, the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 132) is executed before the high-probability progression process (Fig. 130). As a result, in the last game in the high-probability state, the value of the state duration counter 327 is subtracted by 1 in the high-probability progression process (Fig. 130), and the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0", so that the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 132) is executed before the high-probability flag 321 is cleared to "0". Then, when the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 132) is executed at that timing, the high-probability flag 321 is still set to "1", so the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result is not set. Therefore, in the game in which the win/loss judgment process was executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high-probability state, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order so that the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 132) is executed before the high probability progression process (Fig. 130) during the special chart determination process (Fig. 128).

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step S8702: NO), it is determined whether the first time-saving state flag 322 or the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1" (steps S8703, S8704). In other words, it is determined whether it is either the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2. If it is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 (step S8703 or S8704: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the process from step S8705 onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process of the game performed in a situation in which the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is selected, if the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is selected at the time when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 132) is executed, the third time-saving state ST3 is not set based on the time-saving result, and the time-saving result is invalidated. This makes it possible to prioritize the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2 over the third time-saving state ST3.

If both the first time-shortened state flag 322 and the second time-shortened state flag 323 are not set to "1" (steps S8703 and S8704: NO), i.e., if the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the third time-shortened state ST3, the third time-shortened state flag 324 is set to "1" (step S8705). As a result, if the gaming state was the normal gaming state, a transition to the third time-shortened state ST3 occurs, and if the gaming state was the third time-shortened state ST3, the third time-shortened state ST3 is maintained.

Then, the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3 will continue (step S8706). As already explained, the state duration counter 327 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the number of games remaining until each stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 ends in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

Then, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1" (step S8707). As already explained, the state determination counter 326 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the progress of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and a value corresponding to each stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is set to the state determination counter 326. Specifically, if it is the first stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1", if it is the second stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "2", and if it is the third stage, the state determination counter 326 is set to "3".

Then, the outer end flag for when the time-saving period occurs, which is stored in the main RAM 84, is set to "1" (step S8708). The outer end flag for when the time-saving period occurs is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify the trigger for controlling the external output of a signal to a hall computer installed outside the pachinko machine 10. The details of the control of the external output of the signal will be explained in detail later.

Then, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step S8709). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to execute a performance indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started on the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After the performance indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started ends, the sound/light side MPU 93 executes a process to execute the base performance of the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 on the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, on the pattern display device 41, a character corresponding to the first stage is displayed in front of the background image corresponding to the first stage.

As described above, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process, the third time-saving state ST3 may or may not be set based on the time-saving result, depending on the situation at the timing when the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 132) is executed at the end of the game round that resulted in that time-saving result. In this case, the stop result displayed on the special chart display units 37a and 37b in the game round in which the time-saving result was selected in the win/loss determination process does not change depending on whether the third time-saving state ST3 is set based on the time-saving result, whereas the stop result displayed on the pattern display device 41 changes depending on whether the third time-saving state ST3 is set based on the time-saving result. This content will be explained in detail below.

The game results that can be selected by the win/loss judgment process (step S805) and the jackpot allocation judgment process (step S807) include a 5R low probability result, a 5R high probability result, a 10R high probability result, a time-saving result, and a miss result. The stop results displayed as the confirmation display of the game round on the special chart display units 37a and 37b are "1" for a 5R low probability result, "2" for a 5R high probability result, "3" for a 10R high probability result, "4" for a time-saving result, and "-" for a miss result. These stop results do not change regardless of the game situation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can unambiguously grasp the game result of the game round by checking the stop results on the special chart display units 37a and 37b.

The stop result displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a confirmation of the number of play rounds does not change regardless of the game situation if it is a jackpot result or a miss result, but if it is a time-saving result, it changes depending on the game situation. This content will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 133. Figure 133 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. The process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side MPU 82.

If the currently received type command contains information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step S8801: YES), a process for determining the stop pattern for the jackpot result is executed (step S8802), and red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S8803). The content of these processes is the same as steps S1402 and S1403 of the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

If the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to a time-saving result (step S8804: YES), if the current game state is neither a high probability state, nor the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, i.e., if the current game state is a normal game state or the third time-saving state ST3 (steps S8805 and S8806: NO), or if the current game state is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 but is the final game round in that time-saving state ST1, ST2 (steps S8806 and S8807: YES), a process for determining the stopping pattern for suggesting time-saving is executed (step S8808). In addition, the sound/light side MPU 93 can determine whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3 based on the state designation command received from the main side MPU 82, and can further determine whether it is the final game round of the first or second time-saving state ST1 or ST2 based on the number of times the change command is received after receiving the state designation command corresponding to the start of the first or second time-saving state ST1 or ST2.

In the process of determining the stop pattern for suggesting time-saving, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3") is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for suggesting time-saving, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of stop patterns corresponding to the time-saving result are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S8809).

On the other hand, if the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the game round to be started corresponds to a time-saving result (step S8804: YES), and the current game state is a high probability state (step S8805: YES), or if the current game state is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 and is not the final game round of the time-saving state ST1 or ST2 (step S8806: YES, step S8807: NO), a stop pattern determination process for a non-missed reach is executed (step S8810). In the stop pattern determination process for a non-missed reach, a stop result is determined by lottery to be displayed as a stop result in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which is a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3"), and a combination of patterns other than the miss reach pattern combination, which is a combination of patterns that is not a miss reach pattern combination. Additionally, blue is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S8811).

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a loss result (step S8804: NO), a loss stop pattern determination process is executed (step S8812). In the loss stop pattern determination process, if the currently received variable command is set with variable display period information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach display, a loss reach pattern combination is determined by lottery as a stop result to be stopped and displayed in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, and the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the determined loss reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. In the loss stop pattern determination process, if the currently received variable command is set with variable display period information indicating that the currently started game round does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach display, a stop result in which a pattern combination corresponding to a jackpot result, a time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3"), and a pattern combination other than the loss reach pattern combination are stopped and displayed is determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S8813).

When the processing of step S8803, step S8809, step S8811, or step S8813 is executed, a pattern determination process is executed (step S8814). In the pattern determination process, a notice lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a notice display, and if so, the type of notice display. Then, as a result of the notice lottery process, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps S8801 to S8813 and the information on the fluctuation display period included in the currently received fluctuation command is selected, and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read fluctuation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute the presentation of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round.

Then, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S8814 is sent to the display side MPU 103 (step S8815). The display side MPU 103 reads out a display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read out display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 in the current game round and the stop results to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps S8801 to S8813 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (FIG. 133).

As described above, in the case of a time-saving result, if the game is in the normal game state, the third time-saving state ST3, or the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the combination of time-saving generating symbols ("1, 2, 3") is displayed frozen on the active lines L1-L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, and red is displayed frozen in the state suggestion area 43. Note that in the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the time-saving progress process (step S8308) for ending the time-saving state is executed, and then the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 132) is executed, so that the time-saving state has already ended and the game is in the normal game state at the time when the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 132) is executed.

On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state, or in the case of a play round other than the final play round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, even if a time-saving result is obtained, a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3. A non-missing symbol combination is a combination of symbols other than a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of symbols that generates a time-saving result ("1, 2, 3"), and a combination of symbols that are in a miss-reach state. A blue color is displayed as a stationary color in the state suggestion area 43. The above-mentioned non-missing symbol combination is also displayed as a stationary color when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result.

The display area of the pattern display device 41 is larger than that of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and furthermore, since the pattern display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the play area PA, while the special pattern display units 37a and 37b are located in the corners of the play area PA, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. Also, while the pattern display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach displays, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, as already explained, only display the changing patterns in a certain manner and the stop results corresponding to the game results, so from this point of view as well, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. In such circumstances, if the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, a combination of non-missing symbols that can be displayed as stopped in the case of a miss result is displayed on each of the activated lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it was selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in the case where a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to see the special chart display units 37a and 37b, it is possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

Figure 134 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress processing executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation processing (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step S8901). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step S8901: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step S8902.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and any one of the first time-saving state flag 322, the second time-saving state flag 323, and the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1" (step S8902: YES), i.e., if it is any one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, a time-saving subtraction process is executed (step S8903). The time-saving subtraction process will be described in detail later, but the value of the state duration counter 327 is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the state duration counter 327 after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0", if the current state is the first stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, a process is executed to transition to the second stage, thereby setting a predetermined value to the state duration counter 327, if the current state is the second stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, a process is executed to transition to the third stage, thereby setting a predetermined value to the state duration counter 327, and if the current state is the third stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the value of the state duration counter 327 is maintained at "0".

If the value of the state duration counter 327 is "0" after the time-saving subtraction process is executed in step S8903 (step S8904: YES), this means that the third stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 has ended, that is, the current first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 have ended. In this case, a clear process of the time-saving state flag is executed (step S8905). In this clear process, if the first time-saving state flag 322 is set to "1", the first time-saving state flag 322 is cleared to "0", if the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1", the second time-saving state flag 323 is cleared to "0", and if the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1", the third time-saving state flag 324 is cleared to "0".

Then, the outer end flag for the time-saving end stored in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S8906). The outer end flag for the time-saving end is a flag for the main MPU 82 to identify the trigger for controlling the external output of a signal to a hall computer provided outside the pachinko machine 10. The details of the control of the external output of the signal will be explained later.

Then, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S8907). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the current first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 have ended is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. By receiving this state designation command, the sound/light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effects corresponding to the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts an effect corresponding to the normal game state.

As already explained, in the special chart determination process (Fig. 128), the time-saving progress process (Fig. 133) is executed before the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 132) in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2. This makes it possible to prevent the setting of the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result from the win/loss determination process in a play round other than the final play round of the current time-saving state ST1 or ST2 from being set, while allowing the setting of the third time-saving state ST3 to be set by the time-saving result from the win/loss determination process in the final play round of the current time-saving state ST1 or ST2 to be set. Therefore, even if the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is prioritized over the third time-saving state ST3, by enabling the setting of the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result in the final game of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, it is possible to ensure that the player receives as much benefit as possible from the time-saving result selected in the win/loss determination process. In addition, it is possible to create such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the external output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC. Figure 135 is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of an amusement hall where many pachinko machines 10 are installed.

As shown in FIG. 135, an island facility S is provided in an amusement hall, and a number of pachinko machines 10 are installed on the island facility S. In addition, a data counter DC is provided on the island facility S in one-to-one correspondence with each pachinko machine 10. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and is provided with a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times a game has been played, and a second display unit DC2 for displaying the number of times a predetermined advantageous situation has been played.

A hall computer HC is provided in the gaming hall as a management and control means for managing each pachinko machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic calculation device having a management program, and has an MPU 501 mounted inside. The MPU 501 has a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 501, and a RAM 503, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and information input from the pachinko machine 10 when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502.

The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through a group of electrical wiring EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through a group of electrical wiring EL2. It then executes management processing based on information received from each pachinko machine 10, and transmits a signal according to the result of that management processing to each data counter DC.

The configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136(a) is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 showing an enlarged view of the external terminal board 331 and its surroundings provided in the back pack unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 136(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the external output buffer 341 provided in the main RAM 84, and FIG. 136(c) is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the external terminal board 331.

As shown in FIG. 136(a), the external terminal board 331 is provided with multiple external terminals (output terminals) 332-339. There are a total of eight external terminals 332-339, which output different types of information to the hall computer HC.

The external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal is used to externally output a first jackpot signal indicating whether or not an open/close execution mode based on a jackpot result in the hit/miss determination process of the main MPU 82 is occurring. The external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal is used to externally output a second jackpot signal indicating whether or not an open/close execution mode based on a jackpot result in the hit/miss determination process of the main MPU 82 is occurring, whether or not a second time-saving state ST2 has occurred based on the consumption of the ceiling number of play times, and whether or not a third time-saving state ST3 has occurred based on a time-saving result in the hit/miss determination process of the main MPU 82. The external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal is used to externally output an advantageous state signal indicating whether or not an open/close execution mode based on a jackpot result in the hit/miss determination process of the main MPU 82 is occurring, whether or not a high probability state is occurring, and whether or not any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is occurring.

In addition to the above-mentioned external terminals 332 to 334, the external terminals 332 to 339 include an external terminal 335 used to output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open or not, an external terminal 336 used to output information indicating that one game round has ended, an external terminal 337 used to output information indicating that a winning has occurred in the operating ports 33 and 34, an external terminal 338 used to output information indicating that a predetermined number of gaming balls have been paid out, and an external terminal 339 used to output information indicating that a predetermined fraud has been detected.

As shown in FIG. 136(b), the external output buffer 341 of the main RAM 84 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 342-349 for output setting, in one-to-one correspondence with each of the external terminals 332-339. Each unit area 342-349 for output setting has a predetermined bit amount of information, specifically 1 bit, and each unit area 342-349 is set with either "0" which is no output information or "1" which is output information. Note that the amount of information in each unit area 342-349 is not limited to 1 bit but is arbitrary, and the data configuration of the no output information and the output information is also arbitrary.

The main MPU 82 is electrically connected to each of the external terminals 332-339 of the external terminal board 331 in one-to-one correspondence through the electrical wiring group EL3 shown in FIG. 136(a), and outputs a signal of a predetermined voltage to the external terminals 332-339 corresponding to the unit areas 342-349 in which "1" is set in the external output buffer 341.

As shown in FIG. 136(c), each external terminal 332-339 is configured with a photocoupler 351 to enable the transmission of an electrical signal from the main MPU 82 to the hall computer HC while preventing the reverse flow. The light-emitting diode 352, which is the primary side of the photocoupler 351, is connected to the main MPU 82 via a resistor 353, and the light-receiving element 354, which is the secondary side, is connected to the hall computer HC. Therefore, when a signal is output from the main MPU 82 to the external terminal 332-339 corresponding to the unit area 342-349 in which "1" is set in the external output buffer 341, the light-emitting diode 352 of the external terminal 332-339 to which the signal is output emits light, and the light is received by the light-receiving element 354 of the external terminal 332-339 and converted into an electrical signal, which is then output to the hall computer HC.

The electrical signal output to the hall computer HC may be in any form, and may be such that a 0V signal is output when there is no external output from the main MPU 82, and a signal of a predetermined voltage greater than 0V is output when an external output is made, or the signal output pattern may be in the opposite relationship. Also, a signal of a reference voltage greater than 0V may be output when there is no external output from the main MPU 82, and a signal of a voltage greater than or less than the reference voltage may be output when an external output is made.

Next, the processing related to the external output executed by the main MPU 82 will be explained. However, in the following explanation, the configuration related to the external output through the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal, the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal among the external terminals 332 to 339 of the external terminal board 331 will be explained. The processing for controlling these external outputs is executed in the outer end processing. The outer end processing is executed as part of the processing of the external information setting processing (step S218) in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 14). Figure 137 is a flowchart showing the outer end processing.

In the outer edge processing, it is determined whether the outer edge flag at the start of the jackpot in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9001). As already explained, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open/close execution mode starts, the outer edge flag at the start of the jackpot is set to "1" in step S8306 in the special chart determination processing (Fig. 128). If the outer edge flag at the start of the jackpot is set to "1" (step S9001: YES), the first jackpot signal ON processing (step S9002), the second jackpot signal ON processing (step S9003), and the advantageous state signal ON processing (step S9004) are executed, and then the outer edge flag at the start of the jackpot is cleared to "0" (step S9005).

In the ON process of the first jackpot signal, "1" is set in the first unit area 342 corresponding to the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal in the external output buffer 341. As a result, the output state of the first jackpot signal through the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. Then, the state in which the first jackpot signal is at HI level continues with the value of the first unit area 342 being "1". Note that this HI/LOW relationship may be reversed. In the ON process of the second jackpot signal, "1" is set in the second unit area 343 corresponding to the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal in the external output buffer 341. As a result, the output state of the second jackpot signal through the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. Then, the state in which the second jackpot signal is at HI level continues with the value of the second unit area 343 being "1". It should be noted that this HIGH/LOW relationship may be reversed. In the ON process of the advantageous state signal, a "1" is set in the third unit area 344 corresponding to the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal in the external output buffer 341. This switches the output state of the advantageous state signal through the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The advantageous state signal is at a HIGH level, and the value of the third unit area 344 remains at "1". It should be noted that this HIGH/LOW relationship may be reversed.

In the outer end process, it is determined whether the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9006). As already explained, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result ends, the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot is set to "1" in step S8410 of the special call end process (FIG. 129). If the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot is set to "1" (step S9006: YES), the first jackpot signal OFF process (step S9007) and the second jackpot signal OFF process (step S9008) are executed, and then the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot is cleared to "0" (step S9009).

In the OFF process of the first jackpot signal, the first unit area 342 corresponding to the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal is cleared to "0" in the external output buffer 341. This switches the output state of the first jackpot signal through the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal from HI level to LOW level. Then, while the first jackpot signal is at LOW level, the value of the first unit area 342 remains at "0". In the OFF process of the second jackpot signal, the second unit area 343 corresponding to the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal is cleared to "0" in the external output buffer 341. This switches the output state of the second jackpot signal through the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal from HI level to LOW level. Then, while the second jackpot signal is at LOW level, the value of the second unit area 343 remains at "0".

In the outer end processing, it is determined whether the outer end flag at the end of the high probability state in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9010). As already explained, when the high probability state ends, the outer end flag at the end of the high probability state is set to "1" in step S8505 in the high probability progression processing (Figure 130). If the outer end flag at the end of the high probability state is set to "1" (step S9010: YES), the advantageous state signal OFF processing (step S9011) is executed, and then the outer end flag at the end of the high probability state is cleared to "0" (step S9012).

In the process of turning off the advantageous state signal, the third unit area 344 corresponding to the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal in the external output buffer 341 is cleared to "0". This switches the output state of the advantageous state signal through the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal from HI level to LOW level. The advantageous state signal is at a LOW level, and the situation in which the value of the third unit area 344 is "0" continues.

In the outer end process, it is determined whether the outer end flag at the time of time reduction in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9013). As already explained, when the ceiling number of play times is consumed and the second time-saving state ST2 starts, the outer end flag at the time of time reduction is set to "1" in step S8608 in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 (FIG. 131). Also, when the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew as a result of the time-saving result determination process, the outer end flag at the time of time reduction is set to "1" in step S8708 in the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 132). If the outer end flag when the time-saving feature occurs is set to "1" (step S9013: YES), the second jackpot signal is turned ON (step S9014), the advantageous state signal is turned ON (step S9015), and the ON continuation counter is set (step S9016), after which the outer end flag when the time-saving feature occurs is cleared to "0" (step S9017).

The ON processing of the second jackpot signal is the same as in step S9003, and the output state of the second jackpot signal through the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level by setting "1" in the second unit area 343 in the external output buffer 341 corresponding to the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal. The ON processing of the advantageous state signal is the same as in step S9004, and the output state of the advantageous state signal through the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal is switched from LOW level to HI level by setting "1" in the third unit area 344 in the external output buffer 341 corresponding to the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal.

In the process of setting the ON duration counter, information on the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the ON duration counter provided in the main RAM 84. The ON duration counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to determine the timing at which the HI level output state is switched to a LOW level as the ON duration elapses when the second jackpot signal becomes a HI level as a result of the occurrence of the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3. The ON duration is a period shorter than the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) that can be selected as the variable display period for the number of times played.

In the outer end process, if the value of the ON duration counter is 1 or more (step S9018: YES), the value of the ON duration counter is decremented by 1 (step S9019). Then, if the value of the ON duration counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S9020: YES), the second jackpot signal is turned OFF (step S9021). The content of the second jackpot signal OFF process is the same as that of step S9008, and the second unit area 343 corresponding to the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal in the external output buffer 341 is cleared to "0", so that the output state of the second jackpot signal through the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal is switched from HI level to LOW level.

As already explained, the ON duration is shorter than the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) that can be selected as the variable display period for a game round. Therefore, even if the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level due to a transition to the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3 when a game round ends, the HI level will be switched to LOW level before the next game round ends.

In the outer end process, it is determined whether the outer end flag at the time of the time reduction in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9022). As already explained, when any of the first to third time reduction states ST1 to ST3 ends, the outer end flag at the time of the time reduction is set to "1" in step S8906 in the time reduction progress process (Fig. 134). If the outer end flag at the time of the time reduction is set to "1" (step S9022: YES), the advantageous state signal OFF process (step S9023) is executed, and then the outer end flag at the time of the time reduction is cleared to "0" (step S9024). The contents of the advantageous state signal OFF process are the same as those in step S9011, and the third unit area 344 corresponding to the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal in the external output buffer 341 is cleared to "0", thereby switching the output state of the advantageous state signal through the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal from the HI level to the LOW level.

Next, the manner in which the output states of the first jackpot signal, the second jackpot signal, and the advantageous state signal are switched will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 138. FIG. 138(a) shows the output state of the first jackpot signal, FIG. 138(b) shows the output state of the second jackpot signal, FIG. 138(c) shows the output state of the advantageous state signal, FIG. 138(d) shows the period in which the open/close execution mode occurs, FIG. 138(e) shows the period in which the first time-saving state ST1 occurs, FIG. 138(f) shows the period in which the second time-saving state ST2 occurs, and FIG. 138(g) shows the period in which the third time-saving state ST3 occurs.

At the timing of t1, the open/close execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 138(d). In this case, at the timing of t1, the output state of the first jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 138(a), the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 138(b), and the output state of the advantageous state signal is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t2, the opening and closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 138(d), and the first time-saving state ST1 starts as shown in FIG. 138(e). In this case, at the timing of t2, the output state of the first jackpot signal is switched from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 138(a), and the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 138(b). Meanwhile, the output state of the advantageous state signal is maintained at HI level as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t3, the first time-saving state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 138(e), and the game state returns to the normal game state. In this case, at the timing of t3, the output state of the advantageous state signal is switched from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t4, the ceiling number of play times is consumed, and the second time-saving state ST2 begins as shown in FIG. 138(f). In this case, at the timing of t4, the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 138(b), and the output state of the advantageous state signal is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t5, the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds) that began to be measured at the timing of t4 elapses, and the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from HI to LOW as shown in FIG. 138(b). Meanwhile, the output state of the advantageous state signal is maintained at HI as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t6, the second time-saving state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 138(f), and the game state returns to the normal game state. In this case, at the timing of t6, the output state of the advantageous state signal is switched from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t7, the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends, and the third time-saving state ST3 begins as shown in FIG. 138(g). In this case, at the timing of t7, the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 138(b), and the output state of the advantageous state signal is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t8, the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds) that began to be measured at the timing of t7 elapses, and the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from HI to LOW as shown in FIG. 138(b). Meanwhile, the output state of the advantageous state signal is maintained at HI as shown in FIG. 138(c).

After that, at the timing of t9, the third time-saving state ST3 ends as shown in FIG. 138(f), and the game state returns to the normal game state. In this case, at the timing of t9, the output state of the advantageous state signal is switched from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 138(c).

As described above, the output state of the first jackpot signal is HI level during the period in which the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, and the output state is LOW level in other situations. The output state of the second jackpot signal is HI level during the period in which the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, and is HI level for the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds) when the ceiling number of play times is consumed and the second time-saving state ST2 is started, or when the play times corresponding to the time-saving result are finished and the third time-saving state ST3 is started, and is LOW level in other situations. In this case, if the ceiling number of play times is consumed in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 will end midway and the second time-saving state ST2 will start, but even when the second time-saving state ST2 starts, the output state of the second jackpot signal is HI level for the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds). In addition, when the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends in the third time-saving state ST3, the previous third time-saving state ST3 ends midway and the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew. Even when the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew, the output state of the second jackpot signal remains at HI level for the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds). Since the ON duration is shorter than the shortest period required to complete one game round (specifically, 3 seconds), there is no opportunity to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to HI level again when the output state of the second jackpot signal is at HI level. The output state of the advantageous state signal becomes HI level during the period of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, the period of the high probability state, and any of the periods of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and becomes LOW level in other situations.

As shown in Fig. 136(a), eight external terminals 332-339 are provided on the external terminal board 331 of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, the number of signal paths between a pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC is less than the number of external terminals 332-339 provided on the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal, the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal have some overlapping external output contents as external outputs during the open/close execution mode, but the other external terminals 335-339 are independent and have no correlation in the contents of their external outputs. Therefore, in amusement halls that introduce pachinko machines 10 without modifying existing facilities, it is considered that one of the external terminals 332 for the first jackpot signal, the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal will be selected and electrically connected. Furthermore, even in an arcade that can provide the same number of signal paths as the external terminals 332-339 by modifying existing equipment, the terminal that reflects information on the second display unit DC2, which displays the number of times a specific advantageous situation has occurred in the data counter DC, must be selected from the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal, the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal.

When the external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal is selected, the number of times that the output state of the first jackpot signal has changed from a LOW level to a HI level is measured, and the measured number of times is displayed on the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC, so that the number of times that the opening and closing execution mode has occurred is displayed on the second display unit DC2. When the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal is selected, the number of times that the output state of the second jackpot signal has changed from a LOW level to a HI level is measured, and the measured number of times is displayed on the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC, so that the total number of times that the opening and closing execution mode has occurred, the number of times that the second time-saving state ST2 has occurred, and the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 has occurred is displayed on the second display unit DC2. When the external terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal is selected, the number of times that the output state of the advantageous state signal changes from LOW level to HIGH level is counted, and the measured number of times is displayed on the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC, so that the second display unit DC2 displays the number of times that an advantageous continuation state has occurred, in which an open/close execution mode, a high probability state, and the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 occur from the normal game state, and then the normal game state is restored.

Next, we will explain how the effects are executed in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. Figure 139 is a flowchart showing the time-saving subtraction process executed in step S8903 of the time-saving progression process (Figure 134). Note that the time-saving subtraction process is executed when a game round ends in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

First, the value of the state duration counter 327 is decremented by 1 (step S9101). Then, if the value of the state duration counter 327 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S9102: YES), it is determined whether the value of the state determination counter 326 is "1" or not, thereby determining whether the number of play times in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is within the range of the first stage (step S9103).

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is "1" (step S9103: YES), this means that the first stage has ended in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In this case, the state determination counter 326 is set to "2", indicating that it is in the second stage (step S9104). This changes the stage of the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3 from the first stage to the second stage. Then, if the first time-saving state flag 322 is set to "1", that is, if the current state is the first time-saving state ST1 (step S9105: YES), the state duration counter 327 is set to "79", which corresponds to the number of times the second stage has continued in the first time-saving state ST1 (step S9106). Also, if the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1", i.e., the current state is the second time-saving state ST2 (step S9107: YES), the state duration counter 327 is set to "129", which corresponds to the number of times the second stage has continued in the second time-saving state ST2 (step S9108). Also, if the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1", i.e., the current state is the third time-saving state ST3 (step S9107: NO), the state duration counter 327 is set to "29", which corresponds to the number of times the second stage has continued in the third time-saving state ST3 (step S9109).

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is "2" (step S9110: YES), this means that the second stage has ended in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In this case, the state determination counter 326 is set to "3", indicating that it is the third stage (step S9111). This changes the stage of the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3 from the second stage to the third stage. Then, the state duration counter 327 is set to "1", which corresponds to the number of times the third stage has continued in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 (step S9112). In other words, the third stage is one game in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and this one game is the final play of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In step S8807 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 133) already described, it is possible to determine whether or not the value of the state determination counter 326 is "3" by determining whether or not it is the final game round in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2.

When a negative judgment is made in step S9102, when the processing of step S9106 is executed, when the processing of step S9108 is executed, when the processing of step S9109 is executed, or when the processing of step S9112 is executed, the processing for sending the time-saving command in steps S9113 to S9115 to the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed. Specifically, the value of the state determination counter 326 is read (step S9113), and the value of the state duration counter 327 is read (step S9114). Then, a time-saving command in which the value of the state determination counter 326 read in step S9113 and the value of the state duration counter 327 read in step S9114 are respectively set is sent to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S9115). By receiving the time-saving command, the sound-light side MPU 93 grasps the progress status in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and controls the execution of the performance in a manner corresponding to the grasped result.

On the other hand, if the value of the state determination counter 326 is "3" and the value of the state duration counter 327 after subtracting 1 in the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 becomes "0" (step S9110: NO), the value of the state determination counter 326 is cleared to "0" (step S9116). In this case, the time-saving calculation process (FIG. 139) ends with the value of the state duration counter 327 being "0" and the process proceeds to step S8904 of the time-saving progress process (FIG. 134). Since the value of the state duration counter 327 is "0", a positive determination is made in step S8904, and the process for ending the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 in steps S8905 to S8907 is executed.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for identifying the variable display period of the number of times played using the value of the state determination counter 326. Figure 140 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration in this embodiment for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82.

As in the first embodiment, various counters are provided, such as a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a variable type counter CS, a random number initial value counter CINI, and a normal random number counter C4. Also, as in the first embodiment, a special chart reserve area 84a and a normal chart reserve area 84c are provided as memory areas, and the special chart reserve area 84a is provided with a first special chart reserve area 111 in which the first reserved information is stored, a second special chart reserve area 112 in which the second reserved information is stored, and an execution area 113 for special charts in which the first reserved information or the second reserved information to be executed in a game round is stored. In this case, in the first embodiment, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the numerical information of the type random number counter C2, and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 are stored as the first reserved information or the second reserved information, while the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is not stored as the first reserved information or the second reserved information. In this embodiment, however, in addition to the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the numerical information of the type random number counter C2, and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is stored as the first reserved information or the second reserved information.

Figure 141 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the process of determining the variable display period is executed in step S815 in the special chart variable start process (Figure 20).

First, the address table 361 for the game play period is read from the main ROM 83 (step S9201). Figure 142 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the address table 311 for the game play period.

In the address table 311 for play times, consecutive addresses from "00A0H" to "00A4H" are set, with the start address being "00A0H" and the end address being "00A4H". Note that "H" indicates a hexadecimal number. The memory area corresponding to each address in the address table 311 for play times is set with information on the start address that has the smallest address value among the memory areas of the main ROM 83 in which the play time period table to be referenced is pre-stored.

Specifically, the memory area corresponding to "00A0H", which is the start address in the play period address table 311, is set with information on the start address of the memory area in which the normal play period table 312, which is referenced in the normal play state, is stored. The memory area corresponding to the next address "00A1H" in the play period address table 311 is set with information on the start address of the memory area in which the first stage play period table 313, which is referenced in the first stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, is stored. The memory area corresponding to the next address "00A2H" in the play period address table 311 is set with information on the start address of the memory area in which the second stage play period table 314, which is referenced in the second stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, is stored. In addition, the memory area corresponding to the next address "00A3H" in the game play period address table 311 has information set for the start address of the memory area storing the game play period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, which is referenced when the game is in the third stage of the time reduction states ST1 to ST3. In addition, the memory area corresponding to the end address "00A4H" in the game play period address table 311 has information set for the start address of the memory area storing the game play period table 316 for high probability, which is referenced when the game is in the high probability state.

In the process of determining the variable display period (FIG. 141), after reading out the address table 311 for the game play period in step S9201, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1", i.e., if the game state is a high probability state (step S9202: YES), the offset value is set to "4" in the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 (step S9203). If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step S9202: NO), the value of the state determination counter 326 is read out (step S9204), and the read value is set as the offset value in the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 (step S9205). In this case, if the game is in a normal game state, the value of the state determination counter 326 is "0", so the offset value is "0". If the game is in the first stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, the value of the state determination counter 326 is "1", so the offset value is "1". If the game is in the second stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, the value of the state determination counter 326 is "2", so the offset value is "2". If the game is in the third stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, the value of the state determination counter 326 is "3", so the offset value is "3".

When the processing of step S9203 or step S9205 is executed, the offset value set in step S9203 or step S9205 is added to the start address ("00A0H") of the address table 311 for game times read into the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 (step S9206). Then, the start address set in the memory area corresponding to the address after the addition in step S9206 in the address table 311 for game times is read (step S9207), and the game time period table 312 to 316 corresponding to the read start address is read into the master RAM 84 (step S9208). In this case, if "4" is set as the offset value in step S9203, the address calculated in step S9206 is "00A4H", so in step S9208, the game time period table 316 for high probability is read into the master RAM 84. Also, when "0" is set as the offset value in step S9205, the address calculated in step S9206 is "00A0H", so the normal play time period table 312 is read into the main RAM 84 in step S9208. Also, when "1" is set as the offset value in step S9205, the address calculated in step S9206 is "00A1H", so the first stage time reduction play time period table 313 is read into the main RAM 84 in step S9208. Also, when "2" is set as the offset value in step S9205, the address calculated in step S9206 is "00A2H", so the second stage time reduction play time period table 314 is read into the main RAM 84 in step S9208. Also, if the offset value is set to "3" in step S9205, the address calculated in step S9206 will be "00A3H", so in step S9208 the play time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction is read into the main RAM 84.

With the above configuration, in game states other than the high probability state, the value indicating the game state stored in the state determination counter 326 is used as an offset value as is, making it possible to read the start address of the corresponding game cycle period table 312-315 from the game cycle period address table 311. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for reading the game cycle period tables 312-315 in the normal game state and each stage of the time-saving states ST1-ST3. In particular, in the time-saving states ST1-ST3, the value corresponding to each stage is stored in the state determination counter 326, and since this value becomes the offset value as is, it becomes possible to read the game cycle period tables 313-315 using information for identifying each stage of the time-saving states ST1-ST3.

Then, the selection process for the variable display period is executed by referring to the game round period tables 312 to 316 read in step S9208 (step S9209). In this case, since the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information in this embodiment, when the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is selected by referring to the game round period tables 312 to 316, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS becomes the numerical information of the variable type counter CS when the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of this game round is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 or the second special chart reserved area 112. Then, the information of the variable display period selected in step S9209 is set in the special chart side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S9210). The update of the numerical information set in the special chart side timer counter is executed by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

The contents of the normal play period table 312 are the same as the group of tables for low frequency support in the first embodiment (step S907), and the contents of the high probability play period table 316 are the same as the group of tables for high probability in the first embodiment (step S902).

In a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step S9209 with reference to the game turn period table 313 for the first stage time reduction, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game turn, or if the result of the win/lose determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game turn, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS contained in the first pending information or second pending information that triggered the execution of the current game turn is compared against the reach-corresponding table in the game turn period table 313 for the first stage time reduction, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from when the reach-corresponding table in the other play time period tables 312, 314 to 316 is referenced; specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding table in the play time period table 314 for the second stage time reduction is referenced, and a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding table in the play time period table 312 for normal play, the play time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, and the play time period table 316 for high probability are referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current play time.

If no jackpot result occurs in the current game round, and no miss reach display occurs, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the execution target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period of the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of the game round consumed using the second reserved information in the first stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the execution target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out. In addition, when the normal game round period table 312 is referenced, if a jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and four pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected, but if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and three or less pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected.

On the other hand, if the game round was started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target for execution of the game round and one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 when no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, or if the first reserved information is the target for execution of the game round and no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS contained in the first reserved information or second reserved information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared against the non-reach corresponding table in the game round period table 313 for the first stage time reduction, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the non-reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the non-reach display mode is different from the case where a non-reach compatible table in the other play round period tables is referenced, and specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a non-reach compatible table in the play round period table 314 for the second stage time reduction is referenced, and a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a non-reach compatible table in the play round period table 312 for normal play, the play round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, and the play round period table 316 for high probability are referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current play round.

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step S9209 with reference to the game round period table 314 for the second stage time reduction, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/loss judgment process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS included in the first pending information or the second pending information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the game round period table 314 for the second stage time reduction, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from the case where the reach-corresponding table in the other game round period tables 312, 313, 315, 316 is referenced, and specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when the reach-corresponding table in the other game round period tables 312, 313, 315, 316 is referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current game round.

If no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of the game round consumed using the second reserved information in the second stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

On the other hand, in the case where the second reserved information is the execution target of the game round when no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no reach-to-miss display occurs, and the game round is started in a situation where one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, or in the case where the first reserved information is the execution target of the game round when no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no reach-to-miss display occurs, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS contained in the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared with the non-reach-compatible table in the game round period table 314 for the second stage time reduction, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the non-reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the non-reach display mode is different from the case where a non-reach-compatible table in another game round period table is referenced, and specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when a non-reach-compatible table in another game round period table 312, 313, 315, 316 is referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current game round.

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step S9209 with reference to the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS included in the first pending information or the second pending information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from the case where the reach-corresponding table in the other game round period tables 312 to 314, 316 is referenced, and specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding table in the other game round period tables 312 to 314, 316 is referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current play round, and more specifically, a period of 30 seconds or more is selected as the variable display period for the play round.

In the case where no big win occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, regardless of the type of reserved information that triggered the start of the game round and the number of reserved information reserved and stored in the special chart reserved area 84a, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared with the non-reach-compatible table in the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the non-reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the non-reach display mode is different from the case where the non-reach-compatible table in the other game round period tables 312 to 314, 316 is referenced, and specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the non-reach-compatible table in the other game round period tables 312 to 314, 316 is referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period of the current game round, and more specifically, a period of 20 seconds or more is selected as the variable display period of the game round. The 20-second period is longer than the longest period (10 seconds) that can be selected when non-reach-compatible tables in other game play period tables 312-314, 316 are referenced.

With the above configuration, the variable display period of the number of play times in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is likely to be the shortest in the second stage, the next shortest in the first stage, and the longest in the third stage. As a result, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the variable display period of the number of play times is initially shorter than in the normal play state, and then the variable display period of the number of play times becomes shorter than before, and in the final play time, the variable display period of the number of play times becomes longer than at the beginning of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

In particular, in the first and second stages of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, if a jackpot result or a miss reach display does not occur, and if a game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target for execution of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current game round, whereas in the third stage, which is the final game round of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, even if a jackpot result or a miss reach display does not occur, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the game round by referring to the non-reach-compatible table in the game round period table 315 for the third stage time-saving state, regardless of the type of reserved information that triggered the start of the game round and the number of reserved information items reserved and stored in the special chart reserve area 84a. As a result, in the final game round in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, it is possible to reliably ensure a long variable display period for the game round, regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process for that game round, the type of reserved information that triggered the start of the game round, and the number of reserved information items stored in the special chart reserved area 84a.

Here, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss judgment process (step S805), it is invalidated unless it is the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, when the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the game round period tables 313 to 315 for the first to third stage time-saving, the time-saving result is treated the same as a miss result, making it possible to make the occurrence of the invalidated time-saving result less noticeable. Also, when a time-saving result is selected in the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving state ST3 is generated by the time-saving result, but even in this case, the variable display period of the game round is selected to be the same as the case of a miss result in which no reach display occurs, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result from the variable display period of the game round.

Figure 143 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead processing executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the look-ahead processing is executed instead of step S710 when the second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 in the reserved information acquisition process (Figure 19) in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

First, it is determined whether the second reserved information acquired before the currently acquired second reserved information, which was stored in the second special chart reserved area 112 and is not the target of the game round, or the first reserved information or the second reserved information stored in the special chart execution area 113 and is the target of the game round, corresponds to the occurrence of a jackpot result (step S9301). If a negative determination is made in step S9301, a process for determining a jackpot is executed (step S9302). In the process for determining a jackpot, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 included in the currently acquired second reserved information is compared with the second winning/losing table 122 for low probability corresponding to the current setting value, thereby determining whether the currently acquired second reserved information corresponds to a jackpot result. If the currently acquired second reserved information corresponds to a jackpot result (step S9303: YES), a read-ahead command corresponding to a jackpot is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S9304).

If the second reserved information acquired this time does not correspond to a jackpot result (step S9303: NO), a process for identifying the variable display period (FIG. 141) is executed (step S9305). The process content of the process for identifying the variable display period executed in this case is the same as the process content of the process for identifying the variable display period executed when a game round is started. Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display period identified in the process for identifying the variable display period corresponds to the occurrence of a specified reach (step S9306). If it corresponds to the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a specified reach (step S9306: YES), a read-ahead command corresponding to the specified reach is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S9307).

A "predetermined reach" is a reach display mode that occurs in a game that is longer than a predetermined variable display period (specifically, 15 seconds). When a jackpot result occurs, the variable display period of the game will definitely be longer than the predetermined variable display period (specifically, 15 seconds), so the predetermined reach will definitely occur in the game that results in a jackpot result.

Although the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach is a variable display period that can be selected in any of the first, second, and third stages in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the selection probability is different for each of the first, second, and third stages. Specifically, the probability that the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach is selected is set to be the highest in the third stage, the second highest in the first stage, and the lowest in the second stage. As already explained, when selecting the variable display period, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS in the reserved information that triggered the execution of the game round is compared with the game round period tables 312 to 316. However, if the probability that the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach is selected is different in the first to third stages, even if the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is the same, the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach may or may not be selected depending on which of the first to third stages the game round is targeted for execution.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9301 or a negative judgment is made in step S9306, a second hold command is sent to the audio/optical side MPU 93 (step S9308).

Figure 144 is a flowchart showing the time-saving performance control process executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. Note that the time-saving performance control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 milliseconds) in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

In the time-saving performance control process, it is determined whether or not a time-saving command has been received from the main MPU 82 (step S9401). As already explained, the time-saving command is sent from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93 in step S9115 of the time-saving subtraction process (Fig. 139). As already explained, the time-saving command has the value of the state determination counter 326 and the value of the state continuation counter 327 set. In other words, the type of stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 and the remaining number of times that stage will continue after one game round has ended and the time-saving progression process (Fig. 134) has been executed by the main MPU 82 are set in the time-saving command.

If a time-saving command has been received (step S9401: YES), the value of the state determination counter 326 set in the time-saving command is read (step S9402), and it is determined whether the read value of the state determination counter 326 has changed from the value of the state determination counter 326 set in the previously received time-saving command (step S9403). The value of the state determination counter 326 set in the previously received time-saving command is stored in the sound/light side RAM 95. If a positive determination is made in step S9403, a process of changing the base performance is executed (step S9404).

The base performance is the foundation performance executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and the base performance may be used as is in the game-round performance executed in a game round. In the first stage of the time-saving state ST1, the base performance of the first stage is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, the pattern display device 41 displays a character corresponding to the first stage in front of a background image corresponding to the first stage. When a game-round performance is executed in the first stage, a background image corresponding to the first stage is displayed, and a changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed in a situation where a character corresponding to the first stage is displayed.

In the process of changing the base performance, when it is determined that a change from the first stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 to the second stage has occurred, a process is executed so that the base performance of the second stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, the pattern display device 41 displays a character corresponding to the second stage in front of the background image corresponding to the second stage. When a game-time performance is executed in the second stage, a background image corresponding to the second stage is displayed, and a variable display of the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed in a situation in which the character display corresponding to the second stage is being performed. In addition, in the process of changing the base performance, when it is determined that a change from the second stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 to the third stage has occurred, a process is executed so that the base performance of the third stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, the pattern display device 41 displays a character corresponding to the third stage in front of the background image corresponding to the third stage. When a game play performance is executed in the third stage, a background image corresponding to the third stage is displayed, and the patterns in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a changing manner while a character corresponding to the third stage is displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S9403 or if the processing of step S9404 is executed, a count storage process is executed (step S9405). In the count storage process, the value of the state duration counter 327 set in the currently received time-saving command is set in the performance side state duration counter provided in the sound/light side RAM 95. This makes it possible for the sound/light side MPU 93 to determine the remaining number of continuations in the current stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

In the time-saving performance control process, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead command corresponding to a jackpot has been received from the main MPU 82 (step S9406). As already explained, the look-ahead command corresponding to a jackpot is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93 in step S9304 in the look-ahead process (FIG. 143). If a look-ahead command corresponding to a jackpot has been received (step S9406: YES), a reserve lottery process corresponding to a jackpot is executed (step S9407). The contents of the reserve lottery process corresponding to a jackpot will be explained later.

In the time-saving performance control process, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading command corresponding to a specified reach has been received from the main MPU 82 (step S9408). As already explained, the pre-reading command corresponding to a specified reach is sent from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light side MPU 93 in step S9307 in the pre-reading process (Figure 143). If a pre-reading command corresponding to a specified reach has been received (step S9408: YES), then, on the condition that the value of the performance side state continuation counter in the sound/light side RAM 95 is 5 or more (step S9409: NO), a reserve lottery process corresponding to the specified reach is executed (step S9410). The contents of the reserve lottery process corresponding to the specified reach will be explained later.

In the time-saving performance control process, it is determined whether or not a second hold command has been received from the main MPU 82 (step S9411). As already explained, the second hold command is sent from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light side MPU 93 in step S9308 in the look-ahead process (Figure 143). If the second hold command has been received (step S9411: YES), normal hold is selected (step S9412). Also, if a look-ahead command corresponding to a specified reach has been received and the value of the performance side state continuation counter in the sound/light side RAM 95 is 4 or less (steps S9408 and S9409: YES), the normal hold display is selected (step S9412).

When the processing of step S9407, step S9410, or step S9412 is executed, a process for setting an increase in reserved items is executed (step S9413). In the process for setting an increase in reserved items, a process for increasing the number of second reserved images G21, G22 in the second reserved display area 42b in the pattern display device 41 is executed. The second reserved images G21, G22 in the second reserved display area 42b are described below.

Figure 145 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. Note that in Figure 145, the display of the background images corresponding to each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 and the characters corresponding to each stage are omitted.

In addition to the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the state suggestion area 43, a second reserved display area 42b is set on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3. In the second reserved display area 42b, the number of second reserved images G21, G22 corresponding to the number of second reserved information are displayed. In other words, if the number of second reserved information stored in the reserved state is 0, the second reserved images G21, G22 are not displayed in the second reserved display area 42b. Also, if the number of second reserved information stored in the reserved state is 1, one second reserved image G21, G22 is displayed, if the number of second reserved information stored in the reserved state is 2, two second reserved images G21, G22 are displayed, if the number of second reserved information stored in the reserved state is 3, three second reserved images G21, G22 are displayed, and if the number of second reserved information stored in the reserved state is 4, four second reserved images G21, G22 are displayed. When multiple second reserved images G21, G22 are displayed, the multiple second reserved images G21, G22 are displayed side by side with a fixed interval. Also, when the number of reserved second information items increases, the second reserved images G21, G22 are displayed to increase toward the right, and when the second reserved information triggers the start of a game round and the number of reserved second information items decreases, the second reserved images G21, G22 are displayed to decrease toward the left.

When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives any of the big win-corresponding pre-reading command, the predetermined reach-corresponding pre-reading command, and the second reserve command in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, it increases the number of second reserved images G21, G22 in the second reserve display area 42b. Also, when a pre-reading win occurs in the reserve lottery process for the big win executed when a pre-reading command for the big win is received, or when a pre-reading win occurs in the reserve lottery process for the predetermined reach executed when a pre-reading command for the predetermined reach is received, it selects the special reserve display as the display mode of the second reserved images G21, G22 to be increased. In this case, the pre-reading win occurs with a 1/2 probability in the reserve lottery process for the big win, and with a 1/3 probability in the reserve lottery process for the predetermined reach. In addition, if the pre-reading winning is not obtained in the pre-reading lottery process for the jackpot that is executed when a pre-reading command for the jackpot is received, if the pre-reading winning is not obtained in the pre-reading lottery process for the specified reach that is executed when a pre-reading command for the specified reach is received, or if a second pre-reading command is received, the normal pre-reading display is selected as the display mode of the second pre-reading images G21, G22 to be increased.

In an example of the second reserved display area 42b in FIG. 145, the three second reserved images G21 from the left are in normal reserved display, and the one second reserved image G22 on the far right is in special reserved display. As already explained, in a game corresponding to a jackpot result, the variable display period is equal to or longer than a predetermined variable display period (specifically, 15 seconds), so a predetermined reach display mode occurs, and even in a game corresponding to a miss reach display, if the variable display period is equal to or longer than a predetermined variable display period, a predetermined reach display mode occurs. Then, when second reserved information corresponding to a jackpot result is obtained, or when second reserved information corresponding to a miss reach display that is equal to or longer than the predetermined variable display period is obtained, the second reserved images G21 and G22 can become special reserved displays. Therefore, by confirming that the second reserved image G22 in the special reserved display has appeared in the second reserved display area 42b, the player is confident that at least a predetermined reach display mode will occur in the game corresponding to that second reserved image G22, and hopes that a jackpot result will occur.

Here, even if the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a pre-read command corresponding to a predetermined reach in the time-saving performance control process (Fig. 144), if the value of the performance-side continuation counter in the sound/light side RAM 95 is 4 or less, that is, if the remaining number of continuations in the current stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is 4 or less, the normal reserve display is selected as the display mode of the second reserve image G21, G22 to be increased this time without executing the reserve lottery process (step S9410) corresponding to the predetermined reach. As already explained, when selecting the variable display period, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS in the reserve information that triggered the execution of the game round is compared with the game round period table 312 to 316, but since the probability of selecting the variable display period for the occurrence of a predetermined reach is different in the first to third stages, even if the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is the same, the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach may or may not be selected depending on which of the first to third stages the game round is targeted for execution.

In this case, even if the second reserved information acquired when the remaining number of continuations in the current stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is four or less corresponds to a variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach in the stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 at that time, when it is actually the target of execution of a game round, it may be a different stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 or a game state other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, and in such a case, there is a possibility that the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach will not be selected in the actual game round. In a situation where a mismatch may occur between the variable display period read ahead when the second reserved information is acquired and the variable display period selected in the game round in which the second reserved information is executed, if a special reserved display is executed in the second reserved image G21, G22 based on the content of the variable display period read ahead when the second reserved information is acquired, there is a risk of a mismatch occurring in which the predetermined reach does not actually occur in the game round of the second reserved information in which the special reserved display is executed, despite the special reserved display being executed. In response to this, if the current remaining number of continuations in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is four or less, even if a look-ahead command corresponding to a specific reach is received, the normal hold display is forcibly selected, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconsistencies.

In particular, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the value of the state duration counter 327 in which the remaining number of continuations in the current stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is stored is set in the time-saving command, and the time-saving command is transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the sound-light side MPU 93. Then, the sound-light side MPU 93 sets the value of the state duration counter 327 set in the time-saving command to the performance side state duration counter of the sound-light side RAM 95, and when a pre-reading command corresponding to a predetermined reach is received, if the value of the performance side state duration counter is 4 or less, the normal hold display is forcibly selected. As a result, when the sound-light side MPU 93 determines whether to forcibly select the normal hold display when a pre-reading command corresponding to a predetermined reach is received, it is not necessary to execute a process to derive the remaining number of continuations in the current stage from the remaining number of continuations in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, for example, and it is only necessary to refer to the performance side state duration counter in which the value of the state duration counter 327 set in the time-saving command is stored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconsistency.

Next, the manner in which the execution of the special hold display is restricted when a pre-reading command corresponding to a specified reach is received will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 146. Figure 146(a) shows the period in the first time-saving state ST1, Figure 146(b) shows the period in the third time-saving state ST3, Figure 146(c) shows the state of the state duration counter 327, Figure 146(d) shows the state of the state determination counter 326, and Figure 146(e) shows the period during which the execution of the special hold display is restricted when a pre-reading command corresponding to a specified reach is received.

First, we will explain the case when the first time-saving state ST1 is in effect.

At timing t1, the first time-saving state ST1 starts as shown in FIG. 146(a). In this case, the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage will continue, as shown in FIG. 146(c), and the state determination counter 326 is set to "1", which corresponds to the first stage, as shown in FIG. 146(d). Then, as the number of play times is repeatedly consumed in the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1, the value of the state duration counter 327 gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 146(c).

After that, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes equal to or less than 4 times, which is the number of times that the special hold display is restricted, and the look-ahead restriction period begins, as shown in FIG. 146(e). During the look-ahead restriction period, even if the audio/visual side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a specified reach, the display mode of the second hold images G21, G22, which begin to be displayed upon receiving the command, is forcibly changed to the normal hold display.

After that, at the timing of t3, the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 146(c), and the value of the state determination counter 326 is changed from "1" to "2" as shown in FIG. 146(d). As a result, the stage of the first time-saving state ST1 is changed from the first stage to the second stage. In this case, the state duration counter 327 is set to "79" and becomes a value of 5 or more, so the look-ahead restriction period is released as shown in FIG. 146(e). Therefore, when the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a predetermined reach, the special hold display can be selected as the display mode of the second hold images G21, G22, which start to be displayed upon receiving the command.

After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes equal to or less than 4, which is the number of times subject to the restriction of the special hold display, and the look-ahead restriction period begins, as shown in FIG. 146(e). During the look-ahead restriction period, even if the audio/video side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a specified reach, the display mode of the second hold images G21, G22, which begin to be displayed upon receipt of the command, is forcibly changed to the normal hold display.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0", and as shown in FIG. 146(d), the value of the state determination counter 326 is changed from "2" to "3". As a result, the stage of the first time-saving state ST1 is changed from the second stage to the third stage. In this case, the state duration counter 327 is set to "1", and even if it is changed to the third stage, the state where the value of the state duration counter 327 is 4 or less is maintained, so the look-ahead limit period is maintained as shown in FIG. 146(e). Therefore, even if the audio-visual side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a predetermined reach in a situation where the third stage is reached, the display mode of the second reserved images G21 and G22, which start to be displayed upon receiving the command, is forcibly changed to the normal reserved display.

After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 146(c), and the first time-saving state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 146(a), and the look-ahead restriction period is released as shown in FIG. 146(e). However, in the normal game state, the process for changing the display mode of the second reserved images G21, G22 to the special reserved display is not performed, so even if the second reserved information is acquired, the display mode of the second reserved images G21, G22 corresponding to the second reserved information is the normal reserved display. In addition, since the look-ahead restriction period is started at the stage where the remaining number of continuations becomes 4 or less in the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1, the normal game state will not start in a situation where the special reserved display is being performed as the second reserved images G21, G22 corresponding to the second reserved information that does not correspond to the jackpot result.

Next, we will explain the third time-saving state ST3.

At timing t7, the third time-saving state ST3 starts as shown in FIG. 146(b). In this case, the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage will continue, as shown in FIG. 146(c), and the state determination counter 326 is set to "1", which corresponds to the first stage, as shown in FIG. 146(d). Then, as the number of play times is repeatedly consumed in the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the state duration counter 327 gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 146(c).

After that, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes equal to or less than 4 times, which is the number of times that the special hold display is restricted, and the look-ahead restriction period begins, as shown in FIG. 146(e). During the look-ahead restriction period, even if the audio/visual side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a specified reach, the display mode of the second hold images G21, G22, which begin to be displayed upon receiving the command, is forcibly changed to the normal hold display.

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0", and as shown in FIG. 146(d), the value of the state determination counter 326 is changed from "1" to "2". As a result, the stage of the third time-saving state ST3 is changed from the first stage to the second stage. In this case, the state duration counter 327 is set to "29", which is a value of 5 or more, and the look-ahead restriction period is released as shown in FIG. 146(e). Therefore, when the audio-visual side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a predetermined reach, the special hold display can be selected as the display mode of the second hold images G21, G22, which begin to be displayed upon receipt of the command.

After that, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes equal to or less than 4 times, which is the number of times that the special hold display is restricted, and the look-ahead restriction period begins, as shown in FIG. 146(e). During the look-ahead restriction period, even if the audio/video side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a specified reach, the display mode of the second hold images G21, G22, which begin to be displayed upon receipt of the command, is forcibly changed to the normal hold display.

After that, at the timing of t11, the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 146(c), and the value of the state determination counter 326 is changed from "2" to "3" as shown in FIG. 146(d). As a result, the stage of the third time-saving state ST3 is changed from the second stage to the third stage. In this case, the state duration counter 327 is set to "1", and even if it is changed to the third stage, the state where the value of the state duration counter 327 is 4 or less is maintained, so the look-ahead limit period is maintained as shown in FIG. 146(e). Therefore, even if the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a look-ahead command corresponding to a predetermined reach in a situation where the third stage is reached, the display mode of the second reserved images G21 and G22, which start to be displayed upon receiving the command, is forcibly changed to the normal reserved display.

After that, at the timing of t12, the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 146(c), and the third time-saving state ST3 ends as shown in FIG. 146(a), and the look-ahead restriction period is released as shown in FIG. 146(e). However, in the normal game state, the process for changing the display mode of the second reserved images G21, G22 to the special reserved display is not performed, so even if the second reserved information is acquired, the display mode of the second reserved images G21, G22 corresponding to the second reserved information is the normal reserved display. In addition, since the look-ahead restriction period is started at the stage where the remaining number of continuations becomes 4 or less in the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3, the normal game state will not start in a situation where the special reserved display is being performed as the second reserved images G21, G22 corresponding to the second reserved information that does not correspond to the jackpot result.

The above-described embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

By setting the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third time-saving state ST3 as the time-saving states, it is possible to diversify the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In this case, the priority for the execution target is set so that the first time-saving state ST1 has the highest priority, the second time-saving state ST2 has the next highest priority, and the third time-saving state ST3 has the lowest priority. As a result, in a configuration in which the trigger for each of the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third time-saving state ST3 occurs at any timing, it is possible to determine the type of time-saving state ST1 to ST3 that is preferentially generated at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

Even if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result that triggers the third time-saving state ST3 is played in the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 is maintained, and even if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is played in the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2 from being ended midway due to the occurrence of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result.

In particular, since the first time-saving state ST1 is a high-probability mode on the normal side in the normal win/loss determination process, while the third time-saving state ST3 is a low-probability mode on the normal side in the normal win/loss determination process, the execution mode of the support mode in the first time-saving state ST1 is more advantageous for the player than the third time-saving state ST3. In this case, by maintaining the first time-saving state ST1 even if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the first time-saving state ST1, in which the execution mode of the support mode is advantageous.

When the maximum number of play times is reached in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 ends midway and the second time-saving state ST2 begins. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the second time-saving state ST2 over the third time-saving state ST3.

In particular, the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, while the third time-saving state ST3 has a continuation count of 50 times, so the second time-saving state ST2 is more advantageous than the third time-saving state ST3. In this case, by starting the second time-saving state ST2 when the ceiling number of play times has been consumed in the third time-saving state ST3, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the second time-saving state ST2, whose ending conditions are more advantageous to the player.

When the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, the first time-saving state ST1 is entered, and the first time-saving state ST1 ends when 100 play times have been played. Also, when 900 play times have been played as the ceiling number of times after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the second time-saving state ST2 is entered. Therefore, there is no chance that the second time-saving state ST2 will occur in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1. Therefore, even if the first time-saving state ST1 has a higher execution priority than the second time-saving state ST2, it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 where a chance for the second time-saving state ST2 occurs and the chance for the second time-saving state ST2 is nullified.

When the ceiling number of play times is consumed, the second time-saving state ST2 is started without the opening/closing execution mode, and when the play times corresponding to the time-saving result are played, the third time-saving state ST3 is started without the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that a situation has suddenly occurred in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34 than in the normal game state. In this case, when the second time-saving state ST2 is started or the third time-saving state ST3 is started, "1" is set in the second unit area 343 corresponding to the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal in the external output buffer 341, and the output state of the second jackpot signal through the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. As a result, even if a transition occurs to the time-saving state ST2 or ST3 without a transition to the open/close execution mode, the occurrence of such a transition can be detected by the hall computer HC of the amusement hall, so even if an act is performed to fraudulently create a state such as the time-saving state ST2 or ST3, the administrator of the amusement hall can be aware of this.

When the output state of the second jackpot signal becomes HIGH level due to the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3, the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched to LOW level after the ON duration of 500 milliseconds has elapsed, so the output state of the second jackpot signal becomes LOW level in the middle of the time-saving state ST2, ST3. This makes it possible to switch the second jackpot signal from LOW level to HIGH level for each of the multiple time-saving states ST2, ST3, even if multiple time-saving states ST2, ST3 occur in succession without a normal game state in between.

The ON duration is shorter than the minimum period required to play one round (e.g., 2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an opportunity to change the output state of the second jackpot signal to a new HI level when the output state of the second jackpot signal is at a HI level.

Even in the open/close execution mode, the second unit area 343 corresponding to the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal in the external output buffer 341 is set to "1", so that the output state of the second jackpot signal through the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal becomes HI level. This makes it possible to use the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to allow the hall computer HC of the gaming hall to know not only that the opening/closing execution mode has been entered, but also that the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3 has been entered.

In the opening and closing execution mode, the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a HI level from start to finish, whereas in the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3, the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from a HI level to a LOW level when the ON duration period has elapsed. As a result, in a configuration in which the output state of the second jackpot signal is set to a HI level whether a transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs or a transition to the time-saving states ST2 and ST3 occurs, the hall computer HC of the gaming hall can identify whether the corresponding state corresponds to the opening and closing execution mode or the time-saving states ST2 and ST3, depending on the period during which the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a HI level.

The external terminal board 331 is provided with an external terminal 332 for the first jackpot signal in addition to the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and the first jackpot signal output from the external terminal 332 is in a HI level output state during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result, and is in a LOW level output state in other situations. This allows an arcade with few signal paths that can be electrically connected to the external terminals 332-339 of one pachinko machine 10 to select the external terminal 332, 333 for the first jackpot signal or the external terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, whichever is more appropriate for managing the pachinko machine 10, as the one to be electrically connected to the hall computer HC.

When the number of play times corresponding to the ceiling number of times is consumed in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 ends midway and the second time-saving state ST2 starts, but even when the second time-saving state ST2 starts, the output state of the second jackpot signal remains at the HI level for the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds). Also, when the play times corresponding to the time-saving result end in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 ends midway and the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew, but even when the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew, the output state of the second jackpot signal remains at the HI level for the ON duration (specifically, 500 milliseconds). As a result, when new settings are made for the time-saving states ST2 and ST3, the output state of the second jackpot signal switches from the LOW level to the HI level, and it becomes possible for the hall computer HC to grasp that new settings have been made for the time-saving states ST2 and ST3.

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, multiple stages are set according to the range of the number of times the game has been played. In detail, the stages are the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage. When the game is started in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the stage is the first stage. The first stage continues until 20 times have been played in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. When the first stage ends in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the second stage begins. The second stage continues until 79 times have been played in the first time-saving state ST1, until 129 times have been played in the second time-saving state ST2, and until 29 times have been played in the third time-saving state ST3. When the second stage ends in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the third stage begins. The third stage ends when one play round has been played regardless of whether the player is in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. The final play round becomes the third stage regardless of whether the player is in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. The manner in which the execution content of the play round presentation changes depending on each of these stages. This makes it possible to diversify the execution content of the play round presentation in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 while matching it to the progress of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

The display period of the change in the number of play times in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is likely to be the shortest in the second stage, the next shortest in the first stage, and the longest in the third stage. This makes it possible to initially display the display period of the change in the number of play times in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 shorter than in the normal play state, then to subsequently display the display period of the change in the number of play times shorter than before, and in the final play time, to be longer than initially in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

In particular, in the first and second stages of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, if a jackpot result or a miss reach display does not occur, and if a game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target for execution of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current game round, whereas in the third stage, which is the final game round of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, even if a jackpot result or a miss reach display does not occur, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the game round by referring to the non-reach-compatible table in the game round period table 315 for the third stage time-saving state, regardless of the type of reserved information that triggered the start of the game round and the number of reserved information items reserved and stored in the special chart reserve area 84a. As a result, in the final game round in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, it is possible to reliably ensure a long variable display period for the game round, regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process for that game round, the type of reserved information that triggered the start of the game round, and the number of reserved information items stored in the special chart reserved area 84a.

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss judgment process (step S805), it is invalidated unless it is the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, when the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the game round period tables 313 to 315 for the first to third stage time-saving, the time-saving result is treated the same as a miss result, making it possible to make the occurrence of the invalidated time-saving result less noticeable. In addition, when a time-saving result is selected in the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving state ST3 is generated by the time-saving result, but even in this case, the variable display period of the game round is selected to be the same as the case of a miss result in which no reach display occurs, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result from the variable display period of the game round.

A state determination counter 326 is provided in the main RAM 84, and in the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1", in the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the state determination counter 326 is set to "2", and in the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the state determination counter 326 is set to "3". Then, in the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 141), the game number period tables 313 to 315 corresponding to the value of the state determination counter 326 are read out and the variable display period of the number of times of play is selected. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for selecting the variable display period of the number of times of play.

In the state determination counter 326, the information corresponding to the first stage, the information corresponding to the second stage, and the information corresponding to the third stage are set as numerical information with consecutive numbers from "1" to "3." This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above without setting a flag area individually for each of the information corresponding to the first stage, the information corresponding to the second stage, and the information corresponding to the third stage.

When reading out the play time period tables 313-315 corresponding to each stage of the time-saving state ST1-ST3 from the play time address table 311, the value of the state determination counter 326 is set as an offset value, and the offset value is added to the start address of the play time address table 311 to calculate the address corresponding to the play time period table 313-315 to be read. Then, the play time period tables 313-315 are read out based on the start address stored in the memory area corresponding to that address. As a result, in a play state other than the high probability state, the value indicating the play state stored in the state determination counter 326 is used as an offset value as it is, making it possible to read out the start address of the corresponding play time period table 312-315 from the play time address table 311. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for reading out the play time period tables 312-315 in each stage of the time-saving state ST1-ST3. In particular, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, a value corresponding to each stage is stored in the state determination counter 326, and since this value becomes the offset value as is, it is possible to read out the game play period tables 313 to 315 using information for identifying each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

When each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is started, the number of continuations corresponding to the stage to be started is set in the state continuation counter 327. The value set in the state continuation counter 327 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is played, and when the value of the state continuation counter 327 after subtraction becomes "0", if the current stage is the first or second stage, the game moves to the next stage, and if the current stage is the third stage, the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 end and the game moves to the normal game state. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for identifying the trigger for ending each stage in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

A time-saving command including the value of the state duration counter 327 is sent from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93. This enables the sound/light MPU 93 to grasp the progress of each stage, and to control the execution of the performance according to the progress of each stage.

The time-saving command includes not only information from the state duration counter 327, but also information from the state determination counter 326, which stores information indicating which stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 it is set to. This allows the sound/light side MPU 93 to determine which stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 it is in based on the time-saving command, and to determine the progress of the determined stage.

Even if the sound/light side MPU 93 receives a pre-read command corresponding to a predetermined reach in the time-saving performance control process (Fig. 144), if the value of the performance side continuation counter in the sound/light side RAM 95 is 4 or less, that is, if the remaining number of continuations in the current stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is 4 or less, the normal reserve display is selected as the display mode of the second reserve image G21, G22 to be increased this time without executing the reserve lottery process (step S9410) corresponding to the predetermined reach. When selecting the variable display period, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS in the reserve information that triggered the execution of the game round is compared with the game round period table 312 to 316, but if the probability of selecting the variable display period for the occurrence of a predetermined reach is different in the first to third stages, even if the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is the same, the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach may or may not be selected depending on which of the first to third stages the game round is targeted for execution.

In this case, even if the second reserved information acquired when the remaining number of continuations in the current stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is four or less corresponds to a variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach in the stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 at that time, when it is actually the target of execution of a game round, it may be a different stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 or a game state other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, and in such a case, there is a possibility that the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach will not be selected in the actual game round. In a situation where a mismatch may occur between the variable display period read ahead when the second reserved information is acquired and the variable display period selected in the game round in which the second reserved information is executed, if a special reserved display is executed in the second reserved image G21, G22 based on the content of the variable display period read ahead when the second reserved information is acquired, there is a risk of a mismatch occurring in which the predetermined reach does not actually occur in the game round of the second reserved information in which the special reserved display is executed, despite the special reserved display being executed. In response to this, if the current remaining number of continuations in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is four or less, even if a look-ahead command corresponding to a specific reach is received, the normal hold display is forcibly selected, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconsistencies.

In particular, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the value of the state duration counter 327 in which the remaining number of continuations in the current stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is stored is set in the time-saving command, and the time-saving command is transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the sound-light side MPU 93. Then, the sound-light side MPU 93 sets the value of the state duration counter 327 set in the time-saving command to the performance side state duration counter of the sound-light side RAM 95, and when a pre-reading command corresponding to a predetermined reach is received, if the value of the performance side state duration counter is 4 or less, the normal hold display is forcibly selected. As a result, when the sound-light side MPU 93 determines whether to forcibly select the normal hold display when a pre-reading command corresponding to a predetermined reach is received, it is not necessary to execute a process to derive the remaining number of continuations in the current stage from the remaining number of continuations in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, for example, and it is only necessary to refer to the performance side state duration counter in which the value of the state duration counter 327 set in the time-saving command is stored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconsistency.

<Alternative to the fifteenth embodiment>
(1) In the above fifteenth embodiment, the priority of the execution of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is configured such that the third time-saving state ST3 has a lower priority than the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2, but is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 147(a), the priority of the third time-saving state ST3 may be configured to be lower than the second time-saving state ST2, but higher than the first time-saving state ST1. In this case, as in the above first embodiment, even if a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the second time-saving state ST2, the occurrence of the time-saving result is invalidated and the second time-saving state ST2 is continued, and when the consumption of the ceiling number of game rounds is completed in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 ends and the second time-saving state ST2 starts, whereas when a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 ends and the third time-saving state ST3 starts. The support mode of the first time-saving state ST1 is the first high-frequency support mode, whereas the support mode of the third time-saving state ST3 is the second high-frequency support mode in which the expected rate of the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time is lower than that of the first high-frequency support mode. Therefore, in a situation where the remaining number of times that the first time-saving state ST1 continues is at least greater than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues, the player expects that the time-saving result will not occur, and in a situation where the remaining number of times that the first time-saving state ST1 continues is sufficiently less than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues, the player expects that the time-saving result will occur.

Incidentally, even if the execution priority of the third time-saving state ST3 is higher than that of the first time-saving state ST1, if an opening and closing execution mode occurs as a result of a jackpot, all time-saving states ST1 to ST3, including the third time-saving state ST3, will end temporarily. In this case, if a game round corresponding to a 5R low probability result is executed in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 will end midway due to the occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the first time-saving state ST1 will start anew.

In addition, instead of the above configuration, the priority of the third time-saving state ST3 may be lower than that of the first time-saving state ST1, but higher than that of the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, as in the first embodiment, even if a time-saving result occurs during the first time-saving state ST1, the occurrence of the time-saving result is nullified and the first time-saving state ST1 continues, whereas if a time-saving result occurs during the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 ends and the third time-saving state ST3 starts, and even if the ceiling number of play times is consumed during the third time-saving state ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 does not start and the third time-saving state ST3 continues.

(2) As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 147(b), there are a first time-saving result and a second time-saving result as time-saving results, and when the first time-saving result is obtained, a third A time-saving state ST31 similar to the third time-saving state ST3 in the first embodiment described above occurs, and when the second time-saving result is obtained, a third B time-saving state ST32 occurs in which the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode and the number of continuations is 110 times, which is a number greater than that of the third A time-saving state ST31. In this case, the execution priority of the third A time-saving state ST31 is set higher than that of the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third B time-saving state ST32, and the execution priority of the third B time-saving state ST32 is set lower than that of the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third A time-saving state ST31. Therefore, if a game corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third B time-saving state ST32, the third A time-saving state ST31 occurs, and even if a game corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third A time-saving state ST31, the occurrence of the second time-saving result is invalidated and the time-saving state ST1, ST2, ST31 up to that point is continued. In this case, in a situation in which the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third B time-saving state ST32 are in a state in which the remaining number of continuations is 50 or more, the player expects that the first time-saving result will not occur, and in a situation in which the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third A time-saving state ST31 are in a state in which the time-saving state ST1, ST2, ST31 ends and the normal game state is entered, the player expects that the second time-saving result will occur.

The third B time-saving state ST32 may be configured to be latent if a game round corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third A time-saving state ST31. In this case, if the time-saving state ST1, ST2, or ST31 to be executed ends while the third B time-saving state ST32 is latent, the latent third B time-saving state ST32 becomes the execution target, thereby making it possible to secure a long period of time in the time-saving states ST1 to ST32.

In addition, the priority of execution of the 3B time-saving state ST32 may be set higher than the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the 3A time-saving state ST31, and the priority of execution of the 3A time-saving state ST31 may be set lower than the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the 3B time-saving state ST32.

(3) When a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in the third time-saving state ST3, the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues is initialized to the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues. However, this is not limited to this, and when a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in the third time-saving state ST3, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the third time-saving state ST3 from continuing excessively.

(4) The ON duration during which the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a HI level when the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3 occurs is not limited to a configuration in which the ON duration is a period shorter than the shortest period of one game round. For example, the ON duration may be a period that is equal to or longer than the shortest period of one game round and shorter than the longest period of one game round. This makes it possible to ensure a long period during which the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a HI level when the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3 occurs. In addition, the ON duration may be a period that is equal to or longer than the longest period of one game round.

(5) When the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3 occurs, the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a HI level for the ON duration and then switched to a LOW level. However, this is not limited to this, and the output state of the second jackpot signal may be maintained at a HI level while the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3 continues.

(6) When one of the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 occurs, the output state of the second jackpot signal may be switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level, whereas when the other of the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 occurs, the output state of the second jackpot signal may be maintained at a LOW level.

(7) The ON duration during which the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a HI level may be different when the second time-saving state ST2 is initiated and when the third time-saving state ST3 is initiated. For example, the second time-saving state ST2 may be configured to have a longer ON duration than the third time-saving state ST3, and the third time-saving state ST3 may be configured to have a longer ON duration than the second time-saving state ST2. This allows the hall computer HC of the gaming hall to identify whether the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3 has occurred based on the period during which the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a HI level.

(8) The output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW to HI even when the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is initialized to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues by executing a game round corresponding to the time-saving result in the third time-saving state ST3. However, this is not limited to this. When a transition to the third time-saving state ST3 occurs in a normal game state, the output state of the second jackpot signal is switched from LOW to HI, whereas when the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is initialized to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues by executing a game round corresponding to the time-saving result in the third time-saving state ST3, the output state of the second jackpot signal may not be switched from LOW to HI. As a result, even if the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is initialized, the hall computer HC can grasp this as the occurrence of one third time-saving state ST3.

(9) The main RAM 84 is provided with a state determination counter 326 and a state duration counter 327, and information corresponding to the stages of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is set in the state determination counter 326, and the remaining number of times each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 continues is set in the state duration counter 327. However, this is not limited to the above, and the state determination counter 326 may not be provided, and the remaining number of times each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 continues may be set in the state duration counter 327. In this case, the type of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is identified based on the time-saving state flags 322 to 324, and the number of times that play has been performed in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is identified based on the state duration counter 327, making it possible to identify which stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 the current state corresponds to.

In addition, in this configuration, a time-saving command including information on the state duration counter 327 may be sent from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93. In this case, the sound/light MPU 93 identifies which stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 the current state corresponds to based on the type of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3 and the information on the state duration counter 327 included in the time-saving command, and executes a performance corresponding to the identified stage, so that the performance corresponding to each stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

(10) The address table 311 for play times is configured such that the information on the start addresses of each of the play time period tables 311 to 316 is set in the memory area of consecutive addresses, but this is not limiting. For example, the addresses of the memory areas in which the information on the start addresses of each of the play time period tables 311 to 316 is stored may be configured such that the difference in addresses between consecutive memory areas is n (an integer greater than 1). In this case, in step S9205 of the process of identifying the variable display period (FIG. 141), the value obtained by multiplying the value of the state determination counter 326 by n is identified as the offset value, and in step S9206, the offset value is added to the start address of the address table 311 for play times. Even with this configuration, it is possible to derive the offset value for deriving the start address of each of the play time period tables 311 to 316 using the value of the state determination counter 326.

(11) In a game round corresponding to a time-saving result, the variable display period of the game round may be determined by referring to a game round period table corresponding to the time-saving result. In this case, the variable display period of the game round may be determined regardless of the number of reserved pieces of first reserved information and second reserved information when determining the variable display period of the game round in the game round corresponding to the time-saving result, and further, the variable display period of the game round determined in this case may be set to a period longer than the shortest period of the game round (specifically, 3 seconds). This makes it possible to ensure a sufficient period for executing the presentation corresponding to the time-saving result in the game round corresponding to the time-saving result.

(12) The configuration for deriving the offset value of the address using the value of the state determination counter 326 may be applied to a configuration for specifying the variable display period of the number of times of play in other game states, rather than a configuration for specifying the variable display period of the number of times of play in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. For example, in a configuration in which stages that change according to the number of times of play are set in the high probability state and the variable display period of the number of times of play is selected in a manner corresponding to each stage, the offset value of the start address of the game turn period table corresponding to each stage may be derived using the value of the state determination counter 326. Also, in a configuration in which stages are set in the so-called AT state in a slot machine that change according to the number of times a game is played and the number of additional games is selected in a manner corresponding to each stage, the offset value of the start address of the lottery table corresponding to each stage may be derived using the value of the state determination counter 326.

(13) The sound/light side MPU 93 is configured not to execute the reserved lottery process corresponding to a predetermined reach (step S9410) when the value of the state continuation counter 327 included in the time-saving command is 4 or less, but in addition to this, it may also be configured not to execute the reserved lottery process corresponding to a jackpot (step S9407). As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of continuations in each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is 4 or less, not only the second reserved information corresponding to the predetermined reach display but also the second reserved information corresponding to the jackpot result will not be displayed as a special reserved display.

(14) The content of the effect that is regulated in the sound/light side MPU 93 according to the value of the state duration counter 327 included in the time-saving command is not limited to the look-ahead effect. For example, the effect that is subject to regulation may be an effect indicating that a jackpot result is confirmed, an effect indicating that a time-saving result is confirmed, a reach display in which a specific character is displayed, a so-called pseudo consecutive effect, or a so-called reserved consecutive effect.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the situation in which the third time-saving state ST3 can be set when the time-saving result is obtained is different from that of the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 148 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the setting process for the time-saving result is executed in step S8309 during the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game is a time-shortened result (step S9501: YES) and the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step S9502: NO), it is determined whether the first time-shortened state flag 322 or the second time-shortened state flag 323 is set to "1" (steps S9503 and S9504). In other words, it is determined whether the game is in either the first time-shortened state ST1 or the second time-shortened state ST2. If the game is not in either the first time-shortened state ST1 or the second time-shortened state ST2 (steps S9503 and S9504: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state or the third time-shortened state ST3, processing is executed in steps S9506 to S9510 to newly start the third time-shortened state ST3.

Specifically, both the first time-saving state flag 322 and the second time-saving state flag 323 are cleared to "0," and the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1" (step S9506). This starts the third time-saving state ST3. Then, the state duration counter 327 is set to "20," which is the number of times the first stage has continued (step S9507), and the state determination counter 326 is set to "1," which corresponds to the first stage (step S9508). Then, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9509), and a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S9510).

If it is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 (step S9503 or step S9504: YES), it is determined whether the remaining number of times that the current time-saving states ST1, ST2 continue is equal to or greater than 50 times, which is the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues (step S9505). Specifically, if the value of the state determination counter 326 is "3", a negative determination is made in step S9505, and if the value of the state determination counter 326 is "2" and the value of the state duration counter 327 is 48 or less, a negative determination is made in step S9505.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9505, the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps S9506 to S9510. As a result, if the current state is the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 is continued, and if the current state is the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 is continued.

If a negative judgment is made in step S9505, both the first time-saving state flag 322 and the second time-saving state flag 323 are cleared to "0", and the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1" (step S9506). As a result, if the current state is the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 is terminated midway and the third time-saving state ST3 is started, and if the current state is the second time-saving state ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 is terminated midway and the third time-saving state ST3 is started. After that, the state continuation counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage continues (step S9507), and the state judgment counter 326 is set to "1", which corresponds to the first stage (step S9508). After that, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9509), and a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S9510).

Figure 149 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. Note that the process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side MPU 82.

Steps S9601 to S9603 and steps S9612 to S9615 execute the same processing as steps S8801 to S8803 and steps S8812 to S8815 of the fluctuation pattern determination process (Figure 133) in the 15th embodiment described above.

If the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to a time-saving result (step S9604: YES), if the current game state is neither a high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1 nor the second time-saving state ST2, i.e., if the current game state is a normal game state or the third time-saving state ST3 (step S9605 and step S9606: NO), or if the current game state is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 but the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1, ST2 will continue is 50 or less (step S9606: YES, step S9607: NO), a process to determine the stopping pattern for suggesting time-saving is executed (step S9608). In addition, the sound/light side MPU 93 can determine whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3 based on the state designation command received from the main side MPU 82, and can further determine the remaining number of times the first and second time-saving states ST1 and ST2 will continue based on the number of times the change command is received after receiving the state designation command corresponding to the start of the first and second time-saving states ST1 and ST2.

In the process of determining the stop pattern for suggesting time-saving, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3") is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for suggesting time-saving, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of stop patterns corresponding to the time-saving result are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S9609).

On the other hand, if the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the game round to be started corresponds to a time-saving result (step S9604: YES), and the current game state is a high probability state (step S9605: YES), or if the current game state is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 and the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 continue is 51 or more (steps S9606 and S9607: YES), a stop pattern determination process for a non-missed reach is executed (step S9610). In the stop pattern determination process for a non-missed reach, a stop result is determined by lottery to be displayed as a stop result in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which is a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3"), and a combination of patterns other than the miss reach pattern combination, which is a combination of patterns that is not a miss reach pattern combination. Additionally, blue is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S9611).

Incidentally, in the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 148), step S9505 determines whether the remaining number of times the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 continues is 50 or more, whereas in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Fig. 149), step S9607 determines whether the remaining number of times the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 continues is 51 or more. This is because the fluctuation pattern determination process (Fig. 149) is a process executed when a game round starts, whereas the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 148) is a process executed when a game round ends, after the time-saving progress process (Fig. 134) in which the value of the state duration counter 327 is decremented by 1.

According to the above configuration, if a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, if the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1, ST2 continues is equal to or greater than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues, whereas if the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1, ST2 continues is less than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues, the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 ends in the middle and the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew. This makes it possible to continue the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 for as long as possible.

In a configuration in which the support mode of the first time-saving state ST1 is the first high-frequency support mode and the support mode of the third time-saving state ST3 is the second high-frequency support mode, if a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the current first time-saving state ST1 is continued if the remaining number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues is equal to or greater than the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, whereas if the remaining number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues is less than the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, the current first time-saving state ST1 is terminated in the middle and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. This makes it possible to prioritize the continuation of the high-frequency support mode, including the first and second high-frequency support modes, for as long as possible, over the continuation of the relatively advantageous first high-frequency support mode.

The second time-saving state ST2 is a second high-frequency support mode in which the support mode is the same as that of the third time-saving state ST3. Under such circumstances, if the remaining number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues is equal to or greater than the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, the second time-saving state ST2 continues, whereas if the remaining number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues is less than the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, the second time-saving state ST2 ends midway and the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew. This makes it possible to ensure that the time-saving states ST2 and ST3, which are the second high-frequency support modes, continue for as long as possible.

In the case of a time-saving result, if the game is in the normal game state, the third time-saving state ST3, or the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 and the remaining number of continuations after the game corresponding to the time-saving result is finished is less than 50, a combination of time-saving occurrence symbols ("1, 2, 3") is displayed as a static display on the active lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a red color is displayed as a static display in the state suggestion area 43. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state, or if the game is in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 and the remaining number of continuations after the game corresponding to the time-saving result is finished is 50 or more, even if a time-saving result is obtained, a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a static display on each active line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A combination of non-missing symbols is also displayed as a static display when the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss. A blue color is displayed as a static display in the state suggestion area 43.

The display area of the pattern display device 41 is larger than that of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and furthermore, the pattern display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the play area PA, while the special pattern display units 37a and 37b are located in the corners of the play area PA, so that the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. Also, the pattern display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach displays, whereas the special pattern display units 37a and 37b only display the changing patterns in a certain manner and display the stop results corresponding to the play results, so from this point of view too, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. In such circumstances, if the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, a combination of non-missing symbols that can be displayed as stopped in the case of a miss result is displayed on each of the activated lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it was selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in the case where a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to see the special chart display units 37a and 37b, it is possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

<Alternative to the sixteenth embodiment>
(1) When a game corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of times of continuation in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is continued, and if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is less than the number of times of continuation in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is greater than a reference number set as a number less than the number of times of continuation in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is continued, and if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is equal to or less than the reference number, the third time-saving state ST3 may be newly started. In addition, if the remaining number of times that the current time-saving states ST1, ST2 will continue is greater than a reference number that is set as a number greater than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 will continue, the current time-saving states ST1, ST2 may be continued, and if the remaining number of times that the current time-saving states ST1, ST2 will not exceed the reference number, the third time-saving state ST3 may be newly started.

(2) In a configuration in which a reference number of times is set that is less than the number of times the third time-shortening state ST3 continues as in (1) above, when a game play corresponding to the time-shortening result is executed in the third time-shortening state ST3, if the remaining number of times that the current third time-shortening state ST3 continues is greater than the reference number of times, and if the remaining number of times that the current third time-shortening state ST3 continues is equal to or less than the reference number of times, the third time-shortening state ST3 may be newly started.

(3) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of third time-saving states having different continuation times as the end condition are set as the third time-saving state ST3, and the plurality of third time-saving states are generated when a game round resulting in a corresponding type of time-saving result is executed. In this case, when a game round corresponding to a predetermined time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, if the remaining continuation times in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are equal to or greater than the continuation times of the third time-saving state corresponding to the predetermined time-saving result, the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are continued, and if the remaining continuation times in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are less than the continuation times of the third time-saving state corresponding to the predetermined time-saving result, the third time-saving state is newly started.

(4) The remaining number of times that the current time-saving states ST1, ST2 must continue in order to newly start the third time-saving state ST3 corresponding to the time-saving result may be different when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 and when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the second time-saving state ST2. For example, when a game corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1, if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current first time-saving state ST1 is more than a reference number set as a number less than the number of times of continuation in the third time-saving state ST3, the current first time-saving state ST1 is continued, and if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current first time-saving state ST12 is less than the reference number, the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started, while when a game corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the second time-saving state ST2, if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current second time-saving state ST2 is more than the number of times of continuation in the third time-saving state ST3, the current second time-saving state ST2 is continued, and if the remaining number of times of continuation in the current second time-saving state ST2 is less than the number of times of continuation in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 may be newly started. In this case, the first time-saving state ST1, in which the support mode is relatively advantageous, is more likely to be continued than the second time-saving state ST2, in which the support mode is relatively disadvantageous.

Seventeenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the end conditions of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 are different from those of the fifteenth embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the contents of the lottery results that can be selected by executing the win/lose determination process (step S805) will be described. Figure 150(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first win/lose table 361 at low probability when the setting value set to be used is "Setting 3", Figure 150(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second win/lose table 362 at low probability when the setting value set to be used is "Setting 3", and Figure 150(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a win/lose table 363 at high probability when the setting value set to be used is "Setting 3".

When the winning/losing determination process (step S805) is performed on the first reserved information, if the winning/losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the first winning/losing table 361 at low probability shown in FIG. 150(a) is referenced, and if the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning/losing table 363 at high probability shown in FIG. 150(c) is referenced. Also, when the winning/losing determination process (step S805) is performed on the second reserved information, if the winning/losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the second winning/losing table 362 at low probability shown in FIG. 150(b) is referenced, and if the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning/losing table 363 at high probability shown in FIG. 150(c) is referenced. Note that the winning/losing table 363 at high probability may be configured to correspond to each of the first reserved information and the second reserved information. This is similar to other embodiments.

In the first win/loss table 361 for low probability and the second win/loss table 362 for low probability, the lottery results are set as jackpot results, time-saving results, and loss results as in the first embodiment, and in addition, small win results are set as lottery results. In the win/loss table 363 for high probability, the lottery results are set as jackpot results, small win results, and loss results, but no time-saving results are set. The types of jackpot results that can be selected in the event of a jackpot result and the allocation probabilities are the same as in the first embodiment. Also, there is only one type of time-saving result, as in the fifteenth embodiment.

The small win result is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode, but does not trigger a transition to the win/loss lottery mode or the support mode. Therefore, if a small win result occurs in the normal game state, the normal game state continues after the open/close execution mode ends, if a small win result occurs in the high probability state, the high probability state continues after the open/close execution mode ends, if a small win result occurs in the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 continues after the open/close execution mode ends, if a small win result occurs in the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 continues after the open/close execution mode ends, and if a small win result occurs in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 continues after the open/close execution mode ends. In addition, in the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win result, the opening of the special electric winning device 32 occurs twice in a short period of time (specifically, one second). Therefore, the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode is about one to three. Even if an opening/closing execution mode occurs as a result of a small win, the ceiling number will not be set to the ceiling counter 325.

In the first win/loss table 361 at low probability shown in FIG. 150(a), the number of pieces of numerical information of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result is the same as the number of pieces of numerical information of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the time-saving result, and is greater than the number of pieces of numerical information of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the big win result. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result may be greater than the number of pieces of numerical information of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the time-saving result, or may be less. Also, the number of pieces of numerical information of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result may be less than the number of pieces of numerical information of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the big win result, or may be the same. Also, the first win/loss table 361 at low probability may be configured so that a small win result is not set. In addition, the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to small winning results is the same for setting values other than "Setting 3", the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to time-saving results is the same for setting values other than "Setting 3", and the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to big winning results increases with the higher the setting value.

In the second win/lose table 362 at low probability shown in FIG. 150(b), the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result is greater than the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the time-saving result, and is greater than the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the big win result. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result may be less than the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the time-saving result, or may be the same. Also, the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result may be less than the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the big win result, or may be the same. In addition, the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to small winning results is the same for setting values other than "Setting 3", the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to time-saving results is the same for setting values other than "Setting 3", and the number of numerical information pieces of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to big winning results increases with the higher the setting value.

In the high probability win/loss table 363 shown in FIG. 150(c), the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to small win results is greater than the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to big win results. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to small win results may be less than the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to big win results, or may be the same. The number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to small win results is the same for setting values other than "setting 3", and the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to big win results increases with the setting value.

In the first win/loss table 361 at low probability shown in FIG. 150(a), the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result is 100, whereas in the second win/loss table 362 at low probability shown in FIG. 150(b), the number of numerical information pieces of the win random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result is 2000. Therefore, when the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the probability of a small win result being selected is higher when the win/loss determination process (step S805) is performed on the second reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the second operating port 34 than when the win/loss determination process (step S805) is performed on the first reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the first operating port 33. Therefore, small wins are more likely to occur in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, in which the game is played with the aim of getting the game ball to enter the second actuation port 34 out of the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34, than in the normal game state, in which the game is played with the aim of getting the game ball to enter the first actuation port 33 out of the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34.

In the win/loss determination process (step S805), if it is determined that the numerical information of the win random number counter C1 included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information that is the subject of the current game round corresponds to a small win result as a result of referring to the first win/loss table 361 for low probability, the second win/loss table 362 for low probability, or the win/loss table 363 for high probability, then information for generating an opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the small win result after the current game round ends is stored in the main RAM 84. If the information is stored in the main RAM 84, a process is executed to start the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the small win result in the special chart determination process (FIG. 153) that is executed when the current game round ends.

Figure 151 is an explanatory diagram to explain the contents of the time-saving state set in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, there are a normal game state, a high probability state, a first time-saving state ST1, a second time-saving state ST2, and a third time-saving state ST3 as game states. The contents of the normal game state and the high probability state are the same as those of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. The first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 have the same occurrence triggers and support modes as those of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, but the ending conditions are different from those of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. Specifically, the first time-saving state ST1 ends when a jackpot result is obtained and an opening and closing execution mode is generated, and ends when 10 small win results are generated without a jackpot result or 100 game times are consumed. When 10 small win results are generated or 100 game times are consumed, the game enters the normal game state. The second time-saving state ST2 ends when a jackpot result is obtained and an opening and closing execution mode is generated, and ends when 15 small win results are generated without a jackpot result or 150 game times are consumed. When 15 small wins occur or 150 play times are consumed, the game enters the normal game state. The third time-saving state ST3 ends when a big win occurs and the open/close execution mode occurs, and when 5 small wins occur without a big win result or 50 play times are consumed. When 5 small wins occur or 50 play times are consumed, the game enters the normal game state.

Figure 152 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a first time-saving state flag 322, a second time-saving state flag 323, a third time-saving state flag 324, and a ceiling counter 325, as in the fifteenth embodiment. Also, instead of the state determination counter 326 and the state duration counter 327, the main RAM 84 is provided with a time-saving game count counter 365 and a time-saving small win count counter 366. In addition, in order to measure the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state, the main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability state counter, as in the first embodiment.

The time-saving game counter 365 is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times the game continues in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 by the main MPU 82, and the time-saving small win counter 366 is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times the small win results occur in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 by the main MPU 82. When the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, in the special power end processing (FIG. 129), in the above 15th embodiment, the state continuation counter 327 is set to "20" in step S8407, and the state determination counter 326 is set to "1" in step S8408. In this embodiment, instead of these processing, the time-saving game counter 365 is set to "100", which is the number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues, and the time-saving small win counter 366 is set to "10", which is the number of times the small win results occur in the first time-saving state ST1. In addition, when the remaining ceiling number measured by the ceiling counter 325 becomes "0", in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 (Figure 131), in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the state duration counter 327 is set to "20" in step S8606, and the state determination counter 326 is set to "1" in step S8607. However, in this embodiment, instead of these processes, the time-saving game count counter 365 is set to "150", which is the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 has continued, and the time-saving small win count counter 366 is set to "15", which is the number of times a small win result has occurred in the second time-saving state ST2. In addition, when the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends and the start setting of the third time-saving state ST3 is made in response to the time-saving result, the time-saving game count counter 365 is set to "50", which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, and the time-saving small win count counter 366 is set to "5", which is the number of times the small win result in the third time-saving state ST3 has occurred, in the setting process for the time-saving result described below (FIG. 155).

Figure 153 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S9701: YES), and the result of the current game is a jackpot (step S9702: YES), the jackpot process is executed (step S9703). In the jackpot process, the same processes as steps S8303 to S8307 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 128) in the 15th embodiment are executed.

If the result of the current game is not a big win (step S9702: NO), it is determined whether the result of the current game is a small win (step S9704). If the result of the current game is not a small win (step S9704: NO), the value of the special chart special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S9705). If the result of the current game is a small win (step S9704: YES), a small win process is executed to start the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the small win result (step S9706). In the small win process, information corresponding to the opening period for the small win result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special chart side timer counter, an opening command for the small win result is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93, and the value of the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 1. When the small win process is executed, in steps S609 to S612 in the special chart special electricity control process (FIG. 18), the special electricity winning device 32 is driven and controlled so that the opening for the small win result is completed and the opening occurs twice in a short period (specifically, 1 second) in the special electricity winning device 32. Also, since the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, this does not actually occur, but since the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electricity winning device 32 is set to 10, if 10 game balls enter the special electricity winning device 32, the special electricity winning device 32 is closed even if two short-term openings have not been completed, and the opening and closing execution mode ends. When the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the small win result ends, an ending period for the small win result (specifically, 1 second) occurs. The number of game balls that enter the special electricity winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the small win result is about 1 to 3.

When the processing of step S9705 or step S9706 is executed, the time-saving progress processing is executed in step S9707, the ceiling counter 325 subtraction processing is executed in step S9708, the time-saving result setting processing is executed in step S9709, and the high-probability progress processing is executed in step S9710. In the ceiling counter 325 subtraction processing, when the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more in a case where the high probability state is not established, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the ceiling counter 325 after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0", a process for setting the second time-saving state ST2 is executed. Specifically, the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1", the time-saving game count counter 365 is set to "150", and the time-saving small win count counter 366 is set to "15". In addition, in the high-probability progress processing, the same process as the high-probability progress processing in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment (FIG. 130) is executed. However, the counter that is to be decremented by 1 in step S8502 is the high probability state counter, and in step S8503 it is determined whether the high probability state counter is "0".

Figure 154 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress processing of step S9707 during the special chart confirmation process (Figure 153).

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and any of the first to third time-saving state flags 322 to 324 is set to "1" (step S9801: NO, step S9802: YES), the value of the time-saving play count counter 365 is decremented by 1 (step S9803). Also, if a small win has occurred in the current play (step S9804: YES), the value of the time-saving small win count counter 366 is decremented by 1 (step S9805).

After that, it is determined whether or not either the time-saving game counter 365 or the time-saving small win counter 366 is "0" (step S9806). If the value of the time-saving game counter 365 is "0" or the value of the time-saving small win counter 366 is "0" (step S9806: YES), a clearing process at the end of the time-saving is executed (step S9807). In the clearing process at the end of the time-saving, the first time-saving state flag 322, the second time-saving state flag 323, the third time-saving state flag 324, the time-saving game counter 365, and the time-saving small win counter 366 are each cleared to "0". This ends the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3. After that, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9808), and a state designation command indicating that the current first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 have ended is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S9809).

Figure 155 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result in step S9709 during the special chart confirmation process (Figure 153).

If the game result of the current game is a time-shortened result (step S9901: YES) and the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step S9902: NO), it is determined whether the first time-shortened state flag 322 or the second time-shortened state flag 323 is set to "1" (steps S9903 and S9904). In other words, it is determined whether the game is in either the first time-shortened state ST1 or the second time-shortened state ST2. If the game is not in either the first time-shortened state ST1 or the second time-shortened state ST2 (steps S9903 and S9904: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state or the third time-shortened state ST3, processing is executed in steps S9906 to S9910 to newly start the third time-shortened state ST3.

Specifically, both the first time-saving state flag 322 and the second time-saving state flag 323 are cleared to "0," and the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1" (step S9906). This starts the third time-saving state ST3. After that, the time-saving game counter 365 is set to "50," which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 has continued (step S9907), and the time-saving small win counter 366 is set to "5," which is the number of times the small win result has occurred in the third time-saving state ST3 (step S9908). After that, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S9909), and a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S9910).

If the current state is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 (step S9903 or step S9904: YES), the time-saving small win counter 366 is referenced to determine whether the number of remaining small win results in the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is equal to or greater than 5, which is the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 (step S9905).

If a positive judgment is made in step S9905, the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes of steps S9906 to S9910. As a result, if the current state is the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 is continued, and if the current state is the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 is continued. If a negative judgment is made in step S9905, the process is executed to newly start the third time-saving state ST3 shown in steps S9906 to S9910.

According to the above configuration, if a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, if the number of remaining small win results in the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is continued, whereas if the number of remaining small win results in the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is less than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is ended in the middle and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. This makes it possible to continue the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 for as long as possible.

In a configuration in which the support mode of the first time-saving state ST1 is the first high-frequency support mode and the support mode of the third time-saving state ST3 is the second high-frequency support mode, if a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the current first time-saving state ST1 is continued if the number of remaining small win results in the first time-saving state ST1 is equal to or greater than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, whereas if the number of remaining small win results in the first time-saving state ST1 is less than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the current first time-saving state ST1 is ended in the middle and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. This makes it possible to continue the high-frequency support mode, including the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, for as long as possible, rather than continuing the relatively advantageous first high-frequency support mode.

The second time-saving state ST2 is a second high-frequency support mode in which the support mode is the same as that of the third time-saving state ST3. Under such circumstances, if the number of remaining small win results in the second time-saving state ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 continues, whereas if the number of remaining small win results in the second time-saving state ST2 is less than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 ends midway and the third time-saving state ST3 starts anew. This makes it possible to ensure that the time-saving states ST2 and ST3, which are the second high-frequency support modes, continue as long as possible.

When a time-saving result is obtained, if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results after the end of the game round corresponding to the time-saving result in the normal game state, the third time-saving state ST3, or the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is less than five, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3") is displayed on the active lines L1 to L5 of any of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and red is displayed on the state suggestion area 43. On the other hand, if the high probability state is obtained, or if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results after the end of the game round corresponding to the time-saving result in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is five or more, a combination of non-reach-miss patterns is displayed on each active line L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, even if a time-saving result is obtained. A non-reach-miss pattern combination is a combination of patterns other than a combination of patterns corresponding to a big win result, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3"), and a miss-reach pattern combination. The state suggestion area 43 is displayed in blue. The above non-missing symbol combination is also displayed in a stopped state if the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss.

The display area of the pattern display device 41 is larger than that of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and furthermore, since the pattern display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the play area PA, while the special pattern display units 37a and 37b are located in the corners of the play area PA, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. Also, while the pattern display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach displays, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, as already explained, only display the changing patterns in a certain manner and the stop results corresponding to the game results, so from this point of view as well, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. In such circumstances, if the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, a combination of non-missing symbols that can be displayed as stopped in the case of a miss result is displayed on each of the activated lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it was selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in the case where a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to see the special chart display units 37a and 37b, it is possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

<Alternative to the seventeenth embodiment>
(1) Another form of the setting process for time-saving results will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the game result of the current game is a time-shortened result (step SA101: YES) and the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SA102: NO), it is determined whether the first time-shortened state flag 322 or the second time-shortened state flag 323 is set to "1" (step SA103, step SA104). In other words, it is determined whether the game is in either the first time-shortened state ST1 or the second time-shortened state ST2. If the game is not in either the first time-shortened state ST1 or the second time-shortened state ST2 (step SA103 and step SA104: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state or the third time-shortened state ST3, processing is executed in steps SA107 to SA111 to newly start the third time-shortened state ST3.

Specifically, both the first time-saving state flag 322 and the second time-saving state flag 323 are cleared to "0," and the third time-saving state flag 324 is set to "1" (step SA107). This starts the third time-saving state ST3. Then, the time-saving game counter 365 is set to "50," which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 has continued (step SA108), and the time-saving small win counter 366 is set to "5," which is the number of times the small win result has occurred in the third time-saving state ST3 (step SA109). Then, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SA110), and a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SA111).

If the game is in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 (step SA103 or step SA104: YES), the game refers to the time-saving small win counter 366 to determine whether the remaining number of occurrences of small win results in the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is equal to or greater than 5, which is the number of occurrences of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 (step SA105). Also, the game refers to the time-saving play counter 365 to determine whether the remaining number of continuations in the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is equal to or greater than 30, which is set as a reference number that is less than 50, which is the number of continuations in the third time-saving state ST3 (step SA106).

If a positive judgment is made in both step SA105 and step SA106, that is, if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is 5 or more and the remaining number of continuations is 30 or more, the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes of steps SA107 to SA111. As a result, if the current state is the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 is continued, and if the current state is the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 is continued.

If a negative judgment is made in either step SA105 or step SA106, i.e., if the remaining number of occurrences of small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than 5, or if the remaining number of continuations in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than 30, processing is executed to newly start the third time-saving state ST3 shown in steps SA107 to SA111.

According to the above configuration, if a time-saving result occurs in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, if the number of occurrences of the remaining small win results in the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of occurrences of the small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 and the remaining number of continuations is equal to or greater than a reference number that is less than the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is continued, whereas if the number of occurrences of the remaining small win results in the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is less than the number of occurrences of the small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 or if the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is less than the reference number, the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 is ended in the middle and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. This makes it possible to continue the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 as long as possible.

In a configuration in which the support mode of the first time-saving state ST1 is the first high-frequency support mode and the support mode of the third time-saving state ST3 is the second high-frequency support mode, if the number of remaining small win results in the first time-saving state ST1 is equal to or greater than the number of remaining small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 and the remaining number of times that the first time-saving state ST1 continues is equal to or greater than a reference number that is less than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues, the current first time-saving state ST1 is terminated midway and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started if the number of remaining small win results in the first time-saving state ST1 is less than the number of remaining small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 or if the remaining number of times that the first time-saving state ST1 continues is less than the reference number. This makes it possible to continue the high-frequency support mode, including the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, for as long as possible, rather than continuing the relatively advantageous first high-frequency support mode.

The second time-saving state ST2 is a second high-frequency support mode in which the support mode is the same as that of the third time-saving state ST3. In such circumstances, if the number of occurrences of the remaining small win results in the second time-saving state ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of occurrences of the small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 and the remaining number of continuations is equal to or greater than a reference number that is less than the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 is continued, whereas if the number of occurrences of the remaining small win results in the second time-saving state ST2 is less than the number of occurrences of the small win results in the third time-saving state ST3 or if the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than the reference number, the second time-saving state ST2 is terminated midway and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. This makes it possible to continue the time-saving states ST2 and ST3, which are the second high-frequency support modes, for as long as possible.

(2) When a game corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, if the number of remaining small wins in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of small wins in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are continued, and if the number of remaining small wins in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than the number of small wins in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if the number of remaining game times in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of game times in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are continued, and if the number of remaining game times in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than the number of game times in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 may be newly started.

Also, for example, if the number of remaining small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is greater than a reference number set as a number less than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 may be continued, and if the number of remaining small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than the reference number, the third time-saving state ST3 may be newly started. Also, if the number of remaining small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is greater than a reference number set as a number greater than the number of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 may be continued, and if the number of remaining small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than the reference number, the third time-saving state ST3 may be newly started.

In addition, in a configuration in which a reference number of times is set that is less than the number of times that small win results occur in the third time-saving state ST3 as described above, when a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in the third time-saving state ST3, if the number of times that the remaining small win results occur in the current third time-saving state ST3 is greater than the reference number, the current third time-saving state ST3 is continued, and if the number of times that the remaining small win results occur in the current third time-saving state ST3 is equal to or less than the reference number, the third time-saving state ST3 may be newly started.

(3) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of third time-saving states having different continuation times as the end condition are set as the third time-saving state ST3, and the plurality of third time-saving states are generated when a game round resulting in a corresponding type of time-saving result is executed. In this case, when a game round corresponding to a predetermined time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of occurrences of small win results in the third time-saving state corresponding to the predetermined time-saving result, the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are continued, and if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 is less than the number of occurrences of small win results in the third time-saving state corresponding to the predetermined time-saving result, the third time-saving state is newly started.

(4) The number of remaining small win results in the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 for newly starting the third time-saving state ST3 corresponding to the time-saving result may be different between when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 and when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the second time-saving state ST2. For example, when a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1, if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results in the current first time-saving state ST1 is more than a reference number set as a number less than the number of occurrences of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the current first time-saving state ST1 is continued, and if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results in the current first time-saving state ST12 is equal to or less than the reference number, the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. On the other hand, when a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in the second time-saving state ST2, if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results in the current second time-saving state ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of occurrences of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the current second time-saving state ST2 is continued, and if the number of remaining occurrences of small win results in the current second time-saving state ST2 is less than the number of occurrences of small win results in the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. In this case, the first time-saving state ST1, in which the support mode is relatively advantageous, is more likely to be continued than the second time-saving state ST2, in which the support mode is relatively disadvantageous.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the relationship between the value of the state determination counter 326 and the game state is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 157 is an explanatory diagram to explain the relationship between the value of the state determination counter 326 and the game state.

The status determination counter 326 is provided in the main RAM 84 as in the fifteenth embodiment, and its data capacity is 1 byte (8 bits). However, this is not limited to this, and the status determination counter 326 may have a data capacity of less than 1 byte, for example, 4 bits.

As shown in FIG. 157, when the value of the state determination counter 326 is "0", it corresponds to the normal game state. When the value of the state determination counter 326 is "1" to "3", it corresponds to the third time-saving state ST3, with "1" corresponding to the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3, "2" corresponding to the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3, and "3" corresponding to the third stage of the third time-saving state ST3. When the value of the state determination counter 326 is "4" to "6", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2, with "4" corresponding to the first stage of the second time-saving state ST2, "5" corresponding to the second stage of the second time-saving state ST2, and "6" corresponding to the third stage of the second time-saving state ST2. Furthermore, when the value of the state determination counter 326 is between "7" and "9", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1, with "7" corresponding to the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1, "8" corresponding to the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1, and "9" corresponding to the third stage of the first time-saving state ST1. Furthermore, when the value of the state determination counter 326 is "10", it corresponds to the high probability state.

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is 7 or more, the high probability table for the normal map side (step S406) is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display unit 38a is started (step S415), the short period of the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as control processes for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the value of the state determination counter 326 is between "1" and "6", the low probability table for the normal map side (step S405) is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display unit 38a is started (step S415), a short period of the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as control processes for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is "0", the low probability table for the normal map side (step S405) is read out when the normal map correct/incorrect determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map change start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the change display of the normal map display unit 38a is started (step S415), the long period for the normal map side is selected as the duration of the change display (step S413). In addition, steps S506 to S508 are executed as control processes for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a low expectation mode.

Figure 158 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", i.e., the ending period has elapsed (step SA201: YES), and the game result that triggered this opening and closing execution mode was a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result (step SA202: YES), the state determination counter 326 is set to "10" (step SA203), and the state duration counter 327 is set to "100", which is the number of times the high probability state has continued (step SA204). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability state that is the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode began.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode was a 5R low probability result (step SA202: NO), the state determination counter 326 is set to "7" (step SA205), and the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1 will continue (step SA206). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the first time-saving state ST1, which is a low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode began.

When the processing of step SA204 or step SA206 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step SA207). In this transmission process, if the game state transitions to a high probability state, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93, and if the game state transitions to the first time-saving state ST1, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. After that, the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SA208), and the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step SA209).

Figure 159 is a flowchart showing the high probability progression process executed in step S8311 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is "10" (step SA301: YES), that is, if the state is in a high probability state, the value of the state duration counter 327 is decremented by 1 (step SA302). If the value of the state duration counter 327 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step SA303: YES), this means that 100 play times, which is the high probability continuation number, have been consumed in the high probability state after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the state determination counter 326 is cleared to "0" (step SA304). This results in a normal play state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. After that, the outer end flag at the time of the high probability end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SA305), and a state designation command indicating that the high probability state has ended is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SA306).

Figure 160 is a flow chart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 executed in step S8310 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is "10" (step SA401: YES), i.e., if the state is in a high probability state, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 ends without executing the processes in steps SA402 and onwards. As with the fifteenth embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not subtracted in a game played in a high probability state, and the second time-shortened state ST2 does not occur because the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not subtracted.

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is not "10" (step SA401: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 (step SA403) on the condition that the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more (step SA402: YES). Then, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step SA404: YES), the state determination counter 326 is set to "4" (step SA405), and the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the first stage of the second time-saving state ST2 continues (step SA406). This results in the second time-saving state ST2, which is a low probability mode and a second high-frequency support mode. After that, the outer end flag in the main RAM 84 at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1" (step SA407), and a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SA408).

Figure 161 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step SA501: YES), it is determined whether the value of the state determination counter 326 is 4 or more, thereby determining whether the game state is one of the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, and the second time-saving state ST2 (step SA502). If the value of the state determination counter 326 is 4 or more (step SA502: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes from step SA503 onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process of a game executed in a situation in which the game is in the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, or the second time-saving state ST2, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result.

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is 3 or less (step SA502: NO), that is, if the game state is either the normal game state or the third time-saving state ST3, the state determination counter 326 is set to "1" (step SA503), and the state duration counter 327 is set to "20", which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues for the first stage (step SA504). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the third time-saving state ST3, which is a low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is started. After that, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SA505), and a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started is sent to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step SA506).

In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, in the case of a time-saving result, if it is the normal game state, the third time-saving state ST3, or the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, a time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is displayed on the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and red is displayed on the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and a time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is displayed on the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, if it is a high probability state, or if it is a game round other than the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, even if a time-saving result is obtained, a non-missing pattern combination is displayed on each active line L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. A non-missing pattern combination is a pattern combination other than the pattern combination corresponding to a jackpot result, the time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3"), and the miss-missing pattern combination. Blue is displayed on the state suggestion area 43. The above non-missing symbol combinations will also be displayed as stopped symbols if the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss.

The display area of the pattern display device 41 is larger than that of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and furthermore, since the pattern display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the play area PA, while the special pattern display units 37a and 37b are located in the corners of the play area PA, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. Also, while the pattern display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach displays, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, as already explained, only display the changing patterns in a certain manner and the stop results corresponding to the game results, so from this point of view as well, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. In such circumstances, if the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, a combination of non-missing symbols that can be displayed as stopped in the case of a miss result is displayed on each of the activated lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it was selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed on each of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in the case where a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to see the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, it is possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

Figure 162 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether or not "10" is set in the state determination counter 326 (step SA601). If "10" is set in the state determination counter 326 (step SA601: YES), that is, if the game state is a high probability state, the time-saving progress process ends without executing the processes from step SA602 onwards.

If the state determination counter 326 is not set to "10" and the value of the state determination counter 326 is 1 or more (step SA601: NO, step SA602: YES), that is, if the game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, a time-saving subtraction process is executed (step SA603). Figure 163 is a flowchart showing the time-saving subtraction process.

First, the value of the state duration counter 327 is decremented by 1 (step SA701). Then, if the value of the state duration counter 327 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step SA702: YES), the value of the state determination counter 326 is divided by "3" (step SA703). The time-saving subtraction process is executed when the value of the state determination counter 326 is between "1" and "9", so when the value of the state determination counter 326 is divided by "3", if it is in the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the remainder will be "1", if it is in the second stage, the remainder will be "2", and if it is in the third stage, the remainder will be "0". In addition, the value of the state determination counter 326 in the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1 is "7", the value of the state determination counter 326 in the first stage of the second time-saving state ST2 is "4", and the value of the state determination counter 326 in the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3 is "1", so in a situation where the remainder when divided by "3" is "1", if in the first time-saving state ST1, the quotient will be "2", if in the second time-saving state ST2, the quotient will be "1", and if in the third time-saving state ST3, the quotient will be "0".

After dividing the value of the state determination counter 326 by "3" in step SA703, it is determined whether the remainder of the division is "1" or not, thereby determining whether the state is in the first stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 (step SA704). If a positive determination is made in step SA704, the value of the state determination counter 326 is incremented by 1 (step SA705). As a result, if the current state is the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1, the value of the state determination counter 326 becomes "8" corresponding to the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1, if the current state is the first stage of the second time-saving state ST2, the value of the state determination counter 326 becomes "5" corresponding to the second stage of the second time-saving state ST2, and if the current state is the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the state determination counter 326 becomes "2" corresponding to the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3.

After that, if the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the state determination counter 326 by "3" in step SA703 is "2" (step SA706: YES), i.e., if the state is in the first time-saving state ST1, the state duration counter 327 is set to "79", which is the number of times the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1 continues (step SA707). Also, if the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the state determination counter 326 by "3" in step SA703 is "1" (step SA708: YES), i.e., if the state is in the second time-saving state ST2, the state duration counter 327 is set to "129", which is the number of times the second stage of the second time-saving state ST2 continues (step SA709). Also, if the quotient of dividing the value of the state determination counter 326 by "3" in step SA703 is "0" (step SA708: NO), i.e., if the state is the third time-saving state ST3, the state duration counter 327 is set to "29", which is the number of times the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3 has continued (step SA710).

If a negative judgment is made in step SA704, the remainder of the result of dividing the value of the state determination counter 326 by "3" in step SA703 is judged to be "2" or not, thereby judging whether or not the state is in the second stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 (step SA711). If a positive judgment is made in step SA711, the value of the state determination counter 326 is incremented by 1 (step SA712). As a result, if the current state is the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1, the value of the state determination counter 326 becomes "9" corresponding to the third stage of the first time-saving state ST1, if the current state is the second stage of the second time-saving state ST2, the value of the state determination counter 326 becomes "6" corresponding to the third stage of the second time-saving state ST2, and if the current state is the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the state determination counter 326 becomes "3" corresponding to the third stage of the third time-saving state ST3. Then, the state duration counter 327 is set to "1" which corresponds to the number of times the third stage of time-saving states ST1 to ST3 continues (step SA713).

When a negative judgment is made in step SA702, when the processing of step SA707 is executed, when the processing of step SA709 is executed, when the processing of step SA710 is executed, or when the processing of step SA713 is executed, the processing for sending the time-saving command in steps SA714 to SA716 to the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed. Specifically, the value of the state determination counter 326 is read (step SA714), and the value of the state duration counter 327 is read (step SA715). Then, a time-saving command in which the value of the state determination counter 326 read in step SA714 and the value of the state duration counter 327 read in step S715 are respectively set is sent to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step SA716). By receiving the time-saving command, the sound-light side MPU 93 grasps the progress status in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and controls the execution of the performance in a manner corresponding to the grasped result.

On the other hand, if the remainder of the result of dividing the value of the state determination counter 326 by "3" in step SA703 is "0" (step SA711: NO), that is, if the value of the state duration counter 327 after subtracting 1 in the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 becomes "0", the value of the state determination counter 326 is cleared to "0" (step SA717). In this case, the time-saving calculation process (FIG. 163) ends with the value of the state duration counter 327 being "0" and proceeds to step SA604 of the time-saving progress process (FIG. 162). Since the value of the state duration counter 327 is "0", a positive determination is made in step SA604, and the process for ending the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 in steps SA605 to SA607 is executed. Specifically, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SA605), and a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 have ended is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SA606).

Figure 164 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the process of determining the variable display period is executed in step S815 in the special chart variable start process (Figure 20).

First, the address table 311 for game play periods is read from the main ROM 83 (step SA801). After that, if the value of the state determination counter 326 is "0" (step SA802: YES), i.e., if the game state is a normal game state, the offset value of "0" is set in the general-purpose register of the main MPU 82 (step SA803). Also, if the value of the state determination counter 326 is "10" (step SA804: YES), i.e., if the game state is a high probability state, the offset value of "4" is set in the general-purpose register of the main MPU 82 (step SA805).

If the value of the state determination counter 326 is between "1" and "9" (step SA804: NO), that is, if the game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the value of the state determination counter 326 is divided by "3" (step SA806). If the remainder of the division is "0" (step SA807: YES), the remainder is changed to "3" (step SA808). If a negative determination is made in step SA807 or the processing of step SA808 is executed, the remainder value of the result of the processing of steps SA806 to SA808 is set as an offset value in the general-purpose register of the main MPU 82 (step SA809). In this case, if it is the first stage of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the value of the state determination counter 326 is either "1", "4", or "7", so the remainder of the result of division by "3" is "1", and the offset value is also "1". Also, if the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 are in the second stage, the value of the state determination counter 326 is either "2", "5", or "8", so the remainder of the division by "3" is "2", and the offset value is also "2". Also, if the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 are in the third stage, the value of the state determination counter 326 is either "3", "6", or "9", so the remainder of the division by "3" is "0", and the remainder is rewritten to "3" by executing the process of step SA808, and as a result, the offset value becomes "3".

When the processing of step SA803, step SA805 or step SA809 is executed, the offset value set in step SA803, step SA805 or step SA809 is added to the start address ("00A0H") of the address table 311 for game times read into the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 (step SA810). Then, the start address set in the memory area corresponding to the address after the addition in the address table 311 for game times is read (step SA811), and the game time period table 312 to 316 corresponding to the read start address is read into the master RAM 84 (step SA812). In this case, if "0" is set as the offset value in step SA803, the address calculated in step SA810 is "00A0H", so in step SA812, the normal game time period table 312 is read into the master RAM 84. Also, when "4" is set as the offset value in step SA805, the address calculated in step SA810 is "00A4H", so in step SA812, the high probability play time period table 316 is read into the main RAM 84. Also, when "1" is set as the offset value in step SA809, the address calculated in step SA810 is "00A1H", so in step SA812, the first stage time reduction play time period table 313 is read into the main RAM 84. Also, when "2" is set as the offset value in step SA809, the address calculated in step SA810 is "00A2H", so in step SA812, the second stage time reduction play time period table 314 is read into the main RAM 84. Also, if the offset value is set to "3" in step SA809, the address calculated in step SA810 will be "00A3H", so in step SA812 the play time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction is read into the main RAM 84.

Then, the selection process of the variable display period is executed by referring to the game round period tables 312 to 316 read in step SA812 (step SA813). In this case, since the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information in this embodiment, when the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is selected by referring to the game round period tables 312 to 316, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS becomes the numerical information of the variable type counter CS when the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of this game round is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 or the second special chart reserved area 112. Then, the information of the variable display period selected in step SA813 is set in the special chart side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step SA814). The update of the numerical information set in the special chart side timer counter is executed by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

With the above configuration, the state determination counter 326 can determine not only the type of each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, but also which of the normal game state, high probability state, first time-saving state ST1, second time-saving state ST2, and third time-saving state ST3 the player is currently in. As a result, in this embodiment, the high probability flag 321, first time-saving state flag 322, second time-saving state flag 323, and third time-saving state flag 324 provided in the main RAM 84 in the above fifteenth embodiment are not necessary, so the configuration of the main RAM 84 can be simplified.

In the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, a predetermined calculation process (steps SA806 to SA808) is performed on the value of the state determination counter 326 to derive an offset value, and the offset value is used to read the start address of the corresponding play-time period table 312 to 315 from the play-time period address table 311. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for reading the play-time period tables 313 to 315 in each stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

Nineteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution mode of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 165 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321 and a ceiling counter 325, as in the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, the main RAM 84 is provided with a time-saving target counter 371, a first time-saving state counter 372, a second time-saving state counter 373, a third time-saving state counter 374, and a time-saving continuation counter 375, instead of the first time-saving state flag 322, the second time-saving state flag 323, the third time-saving state flag 324, the state determination counter 326, and the state continuation counter 327.

The time-saving target counter 371 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to identify the type of time-saving state ST1 to ST3 that is the target of execution. When the high probability flag 321 is "1", it corresponds to a high probability state regardless of the value of the time-saving target counter 371. When the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0", it corresponds to a normal game state. When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", it corresponds to a first time-saving state ST1. When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2", it corresponds to a second time-saving state ST2. When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", it corresponds to a third time-saving state ST3.

When the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" or the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", that is, when it is in the high probability state or the first time-saving state ST1, the high probability table (step S406) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process of the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2" or "3", that is, when it is in the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0", that is, when the normal game state is in effect, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the long period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S413). In addition, steps S506 to S508 are executed as control processes for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a low expectation mode. As in the first to eighteenth embodiments, in the open/close execution mode, regardless of the game state before the open/close execution mode is started, the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407), the variable display of the normal map display section 38a, and the execution control of the normal power open state are performed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

The first time-saving state counter 372 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of times the first time-saving state ST1 will continue. The second time-saving state counter 373 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of times the second time-saving state ST2 will continue. The third time-saving state counter 374 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3 will continue.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 are forcibly terminated by executing the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. Therefore, the trigger for starting the first time-saving state ST1 does not occur in the middle of any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In addition, the number of times that the first time-saving state ST1 continues when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends is 100 times, and when the opening and closing execution mode is executed, a ceiling number of times (specifically 900 times) that is a number greater than the number of times that it continues is set. Therefore, the trigger for starting the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1. In addition, once the second time-saving state ST2 occurs once after the consumption of the ceiling number of game plays is completed, the trigger for starting the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur unless the ceiling number of times is set to the ceiling counter 325 when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result occurs or when the supply of operating power starts. Therefore, there is no chance that the second time-saving state ST2 will start during the second time-saving state ST2.

In contrast, in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, a game round corresponding to the time-saving result may be executed in the middle of the state, and a trigger to start the third time-saving state ST3 may occur. In addition, the consumption of the ceiling number of game rounds may be completed in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3, and a trigger to start the second time-saving state ST2 may occur. In this case, if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the execution target is not changed to the third time-saving state ST3, and the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 up to that point are continued, but the third time-saving state counter 374 is set to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues. In addition, if the consumption of the ceiling number of game rounds is completed in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3, the execution target is changed to the second time-saving state ST2, but the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is not cleared to "0". The information on the number of continuations set in the third time-saving state counter 374 is decremented by one each time a game is played, even if the third time-saving state ST3 is not the target of execution, but the other time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are the target of execution. In a situation in which information on one or more continuations is stored in the third time-saving state counter 374, when the other time-saving states ST1 and ST2 that were the target of execution are terminated, the third time-saving state ST3 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving state counter 374 at that time. On the other hand, when the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 becomes "0" in a situation in which the other time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are the target of execution, the latent third time-saving state ST3 is terminated without being the target of execution. Note that, when a game corresponding to the time-saving result is executed during the third time-saving state ST3, the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3 is reset in the third time-saving state counter 374, as in the above fifteenth embodiment.

The time-saving continuation counter 375 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the number of times that have been played in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 since any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 was newly started. Details will be described later, but in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the variable display period of the game round is determined in a manner corresponding to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375. Also, as in the first embodiment, the content of the presentation for the game round executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 in each game round may differ depending on the variable display period of the game round, so it can be said that in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the execution mode of the presentation for the game round is determined in a manner corresponding to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375.

Figure 166 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step SA901: YES), and if the game result that triggered this opening and closing execution mode is a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result (step SA902: YES), the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SA903), and the time-saving target counter 371 and each time-saving state counter 372 to 374 are cleared to "0" (step SA904). In addition, the high probability state counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "100", which is the number of times the high probability state continues (step SA905). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability state that is a high probability mode and a first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is started. As in the first embodiment, the value of the high probability state counter is decremented by one each time a game is played in the high probability state, and if the value of the high probability state counter after decrementing by one becomes "0", processing is executed to end the high probability state and transition to the normal game state.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode is a 5R low probability result (step SA902: NO), the high probability flag 321 is cleared to "0" (step SA906), and the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "1" (step SA907). In addition, the first time-saving state counter 372 is set to "100", which is the number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues, and the second time-saving state counter 373, the third time-saving state counter 374, and the time-saving continuation counter 375 are cleared to "0" (step SA908). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the first time-saving state ST1, which is a low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is started. In addition, even if the third time-saving state ST3 was latent before the opening and closing execution mode was started, the third time-saving state ST3 is not latent.

When the processing of step SA905 or step SA908 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step SA909). In this transmission process, if the game state transitions to a high probability state, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93, and if the game state transitions to the first time-saving state ST1, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. After that, the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SA910), and the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step SA911).

Figure 167 is a flow chart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 executed in step S8310 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB101: YES), i.e., if the game is in a high probability state, the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 is terminated without executing the processes in steps SB102 and onwards. As with the fifteenth embodiment above, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented in a game played in a high probability state, and as the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented, no ceiling time reduction occurs.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SB101: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 (step SB103) on the condition that the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more (step SB102: YES). Then, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step SB104: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "2" (step SB105), the second time-saving state counter 373 is set to "150", which is the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues, and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB106). This results in the second time-saving state ST2, which is a low probability mode and a second high-frequency support mode. After that, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB107), and a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB108).

Figure 168 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step SB201: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB202). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB202: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SB203. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game executed in a situation where the high probability state is present, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SB202: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more, and the current game state is determined to be one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 (step SB203). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SB203: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB204), the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB205), and the third time-saving state counter 374 is set to "50", which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues (step SB206). As a result, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3. In addition, in step SB205, the outer end flag is set to "1" when the time-saving effect occurs. If the outer end flag is set to "1" when the time-saving effect occurs, similar to the 15th embodiment described above, processing is executed for the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, and processing is executed for the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to a HI level.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB207). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SB203: YES), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3" or not, and whether the current game state is the third time-saving state ST3 or not (step SB208). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3" (step SB208: YES), the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB209). After that, the third time-saving state counter 374 is set to "50", which is the continuation number of the third time-saving state ST3 (step SB206). As a result, if a game corresponding to the time-saving result is executed during the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 will be newly started with the continuation number of the third time-saving state ST3 set to 50 times again. In addition, since the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0", the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3 also returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. After that, a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB207). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 execute a performance indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has newly started in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3.

Here, in the above-mentioned embodiments 15 to 18, even if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3 and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", so that the output state of the second jackpot signal becomes HI level for the ON duration when the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. However, in this embodiment, if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3 and the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started, the process of setting the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 to "1" (step SB205) is not executed, so that the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at LOW level even if the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started. However, this is not limited to this, and the output state of the second jackpot signal may be configured to be HIGH level for the ON duration when the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started, as in the above 15th to 18th embodiments. Also, a configuration in which the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at LOW level even when the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started, as in this embodiment, may be applied to the above 15th to 18th embodiments.

If a positive judgment is made in step SB203 that the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more, and a negative judgment is made in step SB208 that the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is not "3", this means that a game corresponding to the time-saving result has been executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, a process is executed in step SB206 to set the third time-saving state counter 374 to "50", which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, but a process is not executed to set the time-saving target counter 371 to "3", and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is maintained. Therefore, if a game corresponding to the time-saving result has been executed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the current time-saving states ST1 and ST2 are maintained, but the third time-saving state counter 374 is set to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues. In this case, when the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is the target for execution, the third time-saving state ST3 is not the target for execution but is lurking.

Even in this case where the third time-saving state ST3 is not a target for execution but is lurking, in step SB207 a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has lurked is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives this state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a presentation indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has lurked. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3 is not a target for execution but is lurking.

As described above, when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the high probability state, as in the fifteenth embodiment, the transition to the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result, the resetting of the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, and the latency of the third time-saving state ST3 do not occur. On the other hand, when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the normal game state, a transition to the third time-saving state ST3 occurs, when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the latency of the third time-saving state ST3 occurs, and when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the third time-saving state ST3, the resetting of the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues occurs. In this case, the stop result displayed on the special chart display units 37a and 37b during a game in which a time-saving result has been selected in the win/loss determination process does not change depending on whether or not a setting is made for the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result, whereas the stop result displayed on the pattern display unit 41 changes depending on whether or not a setting is made for the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result. This will be explained in detail below.

The game results that can be selected by the win/loss judgment process (step S805) and the jackpot allocation judgment process (step S807) include a 5R low probability result, a 5R high probability result, a 10R high probability result, a time-saving result, and a miss result. The stop results displayed as the confirmation display of the game round on the special chart display units 37a and 37b are "1" for a 5R low probability result, "2" for a 5R high probability result, "3" for a 10R high probability result, "4" for a time-saving result, and "-" for a miss result. These stop results do not change regardless of the game situation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can unambiguously grasp the game result of the game round by checking the stop results on the special chart display units 37a and 37b.

The stop result displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a confirmation of the number of play rounds does not change regardless of the game situation if it is a jackpot result or a miss result, but if it is a time-saving result, it changes depending on the game situation. This content will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 169. Figure 169 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. The process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side MPU 82.

If the currently received type command contains information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SB301: YES), a process for determining the stop pattern for the jackpot result is executed (step SB302), and red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SB303). The content of these processes is the same as steps S1402 and S1403 of the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a time-saving result (step SB304: YES), and if the current game state is a high probability state (step SB305: YES), a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach is executed (step SB306). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach, a lottery is performed to determine the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which are a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3"), a combination of latent patterns ("7, 8, 9") described later, and a combination of non-missed patterns that is a combination of patterns other than the combination of patterns for a miss reach. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SB307).

If the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the time-saving result (step SB304: YES), and the current state is the normal game state or the third time-saving state ST3, or if the current state is the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 but is the final game round (step SB308: NO), the third time-saving state ST3 will be newly started with the game round corresponding to the current time-saving result as a trigger, so a stop pattern determination process for time-saving suggestion is executed (step SB309). In the stop pattern determination process for time-saving suggestion, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In addition, in the stop pattern determination process for time-saving suggestion, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of time-saving occurrence patterns are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as a stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SB310).

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a time-saving result (step SB304: YES) and the current state is a game round other than the final game round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 (step SB308: YES), a stop pattern determination process for latent suggestion is executed (step SB311). In the stop pattern determination process for latent suggestion, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In addition, in the stop pattern determination process for latent suggestion, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of latent occurrence patterns are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as a stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SB312).

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to a loss result (step SB304: NO), a loss stop pattern determination process is executed (step SB313). In the loss stop pattern determination process, if the currently received variable command is set with variable display period information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to the occurrence of a reach display, a loss reach pattern combination is determined by lottery as a stop result to be stopped and displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, and the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the determined loss reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. In addition, in the process of determining the stop symbol for a loss, if the currently received variable command is set with variable display period information indicating that the currently started game round does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach display, the stop result in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of symbols that triggers a time-saving effect ("1, 2, 3"), a combination of symbols that triggers a latent effect ("7, 8, 9"), and a combination of symbols other than the combination of reach symbols for a loss are stopped and displayed is determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SB314).

When the processing of step SB303, step SB307, step SB310, step SB312 or step SB314 is executed, a pattern determination process is executed (step SB315). In the pattern determination process, a variation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps SB301 to SB314 and the information on the variation display period included in the currently received variation command is selected, and a variation pattern table corresponding to the selected variation pattern is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform the presentation of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game round.

Then, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step SB315 is sent to the display side MPU 103 (step SB316). The display side MPU 103 reads out a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read out display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 in the current game round and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SB301 to SB314 in the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 169).

As described above, when the game is in the normal game state or the third time-saving state ST3, or when the game is currently in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 but is in the final game round and a time-saving result is reached, a time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is displayed frozen on any of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and red is displayed frozen in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, as in the fifteenth to eighteenth embodiments, the stopped result of the pattern display device 41 makes it possible for the player to recognize that a transition to the third time-saving state ST3 has occurred or that the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues has been reset.

If a time-saving result occurs in a game round other than the final round of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, a combination of symbols that indicates a latent occurrence ("7, 8, 9") is displayed frozen on the active lines L1-L5 of one of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, and red is displayed frozen in the state suggestion area 43. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a latent third time-saving state ST3 has occurred based on the stopped result of the symbol display device 41.

When a time-saving result occurs in a high probability state, non-missing symbol combinations are displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3. Non-missing symbol combinations are symbol combinations other than those corresponding to a jackpot result, time-saving symbol combinations ("1, 2, 3"), latent symbol combinations ("7, 8, 9"), and miss-reach symbol combinations. Blue is displayed as a static color in the state suggestion area 43. The non-missing symbol combinations are also displayed as a static color when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss result.

The display area of the pattern display device 41 is larger than that of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and furthermore, since the pattern display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the play area PA, while the special pattern display units 37a and 37b are located in the corners of the play area PA, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. Also, while the pattern display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach displays, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, as already explained, only display the changing patterns in a certain manner and the stop results corresponding to the game results, so from this point of view as well, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. In such circumstances, if the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, a combination of non-missing symbols that can be displayed as a stop in the case of a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it was selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed on each of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in the case where a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to see the special chart display units 37a and 37b, it is possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

Figure 170 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB401). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB401: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes from step SB402 onward.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SB401: NO, step SB402: YES), that is, if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the first time-saving state counter 372 is decremented (step SB403), the second time-saving state counter 373 is decremented (step SB404), and the third time-saving state counter 374 is decremented (step SB405). In the decrement process of the first time-saving state counter 372, the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is 1 or more. In the decrement process of the second time-saving state counter 373, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is 1 or more. In the decrement process of the third time-saving state counter 374, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is 1 or greater.

Here, since the processing of steps SB403 to SB405 is executed regardless of the type of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3, in the first time-saving state ST1, not only is the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 decremented by 1 when one game round is executed, but also, if the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is 1 or more, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is decremented by 1, and in the second time-saving state ST2, not only is the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 decremented by 1 when one game round is executed, but also, if the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is 1 or more, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is decremented by 1. Therefore, in the case where the third time-saving state ST3 is latent in either the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 to be executed decremented by 1 when one game round is executed, but also, the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving state ST3 is decremented by 1. In this case, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3 becomes latent, when the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 to be executed end, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 may be 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST3 may be executed for the remaining number of times stored in the third time-saving state counter 374, following the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 up to that point. Also, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3 becomes latent, a situation may occur where the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 becomes "0" in the middle of the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 to be executed, and the third time-saving state ST3 ends while remaining latent.

After that, if the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1" (step SB406: YES), i.e., if the game is in the first time-saving state ST1, it is determined whether the number of play times for the continuation in the first time-saving state ST1 has been consumed by determining whether the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is "0" (step SB407). If a positive determination is made in step SB407, it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is 1 or more by determining whether the third time-saving state ST3 is lurking (step SB408).

If the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is 1 or more (step SB408: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST3 was latent in the first time-saving state ST1. In this case, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" (step SB409). As a result, the execution target is switched from the first time-saving state ST1 to the third time-saving state ST3, and the third time-saving state ST3 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving state counter 374. After that, a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB412). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the first time-saving state ST1 has ended and the latent third time-saving state ST3 has started. In addition, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB413). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0", the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3 returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started.

If the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is "0" (step SB408: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SB410). This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB411), a state designation command indicating that the first time-saving state ST1 has ended and transition to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB412), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB413).

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2" (step SB406: NO, step SB414: YES), i.e., if the game is in the second time-saving state ST2, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is determined to be "0" to determine whether the number of play times required for the second time-saving state ST2 has been played (step SB415). If a positive determination is made in step SB415, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is determined to be 1 or greater to determine whether the third time-saving state ST3 is lurking (step SB416).

If the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is 1 or more (step SB416: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST3 was latent in the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" (step SB417). As a result, the execution target is switched from the second time-saving state ST2 to the third time-saving state ST3, and the third time-saving state ST3 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving state counter 374. After that, a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB420). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has ended and the latent third time-saving state ST3 has started. In addition, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB421). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0", the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3 returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3 is newly started.

If the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is "0" (step SB416: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SB418). This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB419), a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has ended and transition has been made to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB420), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB421).

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3" (step SB406 and step SB414: NO), i.e., in the third time-saving state ST3, it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the number of play times for the continuation in the third time-saving state ST3 has been consumed (step SB422). If a positive determination is made in step SB422, the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SB423). This causes the game state to become the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB424), a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has ended and transitioned to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB425), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SB426).

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 171, the manner in which the third time-saving state ST3 is latent will be explained using the relationship with the second time-saving state ST2 as an example. FIG. 171(a) shows the period during which the second time-saving state ST2 is the target for execution, FIG. 171(b) shows the period during which the third time-saving state ST3 is the target for execution, FIG. 171(c) shows the timing when the value of the ceiling counter 325 becomes "0", FIG. 171(d) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends, FIG. 171(e) shows the state of the second time-saving state counter 373, and FIG. 171(f) shows the state of the third time-saving state counter 374.

At timing t1, in the normal game state, the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 171(d), and the third time-saving state ST3 begins as shown in FIG. 171(b). Also, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is set in the third time-saving state counter 374 as shown in FIG. 171(f). Then, as game rounds are repeatedly executed in the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 gradually decreases.

After that, at timing t2, which is midway through the third time-shortened state ST3, the ceiling number of play rounds is consumed and the value of the ceiling counter 325 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 171(c), and the execution target is switched from the third time-shortened state ST3 to the second time-shortened state ST2 as shown in FIG. 171(a) and FIG. 171(b). Also, as shown in FIG. 171(e), the number of times the second time-shortened state ST2 continues is set in the second time-shortened state counter 373. However, as shown in FIG. 171(f), the third time-shortened state counter 374 is not cleared to "0". As a result, the third time-shortened state ST3 becomes a latent state midway through. Then, as game rounds are repeatedly played in the second time-saving state ST2 in which the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 171(e), and the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 also gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 171(f).

After that, at timing t3, which is midway through the second time-saving state ST2, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 171(f). As a result, the latent third time-saving state ST3 ends while remaining latent.

After that, at timing t4, which is midway through the second time-saving state ST2, the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 171(d), and the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 will continue is set in the third time-saving state counter 374 as shown in FIG. 171(f). However, since the second time-saving state ST2 is in the middle of the second time-saving state ST2, the execution target remains in the second time-saving state ST2, and the third time-saving state ST3 is latent. Then, by repeatedly executing game rounds in the second time-saving state ST2 in which the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 171(e), and the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 also gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 171(f).

After that, at the timing of t5, which is the timing in the middle of the second time-saving state ST2 in which the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 171(d), and the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is reset in the third time-saving state counter 374 as shown in FIG. 171(f). However, since it is the middle of the second time-saving state ST2, the execution target is maintained in the second time-saving state ST2, and the third time-saving state ST3 continues to be latent. Then, by repeatedly executing game rounds in the second time-saving state ST2 in which the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 171(e), and the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 also gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 171(f).

After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 171(e). This ends the second time-saving state ST2 as shown in FIG. 171(a). Also, at the timing of t6, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 171(f), and the third time-saving state ST3 is in a latent state. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the third time-saving state ST3 becomes the execution target as shown in FIG. 171(b). The third time-saving state ST3 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving state counter 374 at this point. Then, as gameplay rounds are repeatedly executed in the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 gradually decreases, and at timing t7, as shown in FIG. 171(f), the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 becomes "0", and the third time-saving state ST3 ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 171(b).

Next, we will explain how the effects are executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. Figure 172 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 is not in effect (step SB501: NO), in step SB502, if the state is in a normal game state, the normal game round period table 312 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the state is in a high probability state, the high probability game round period table 316 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84.

If it is any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 (step SB501: YES), the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is incremented by 1 (step SB503). The time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" when the first time-saving state ST1 starts, the second time-saving state ST2 starts, the third time-saving state ST3 starts, a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed during the third time-saving state ST3 and the third time-saving state counter 374 is reset to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, and when the time-saving state ST1 or ST2 to be executed ends and the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the execution target when the third time-saving state ST3 is latent.

Then, it is determined whether the current game round is the last game round of the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3 (step SB504). Specifically, if the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1" and the first time-saving state ST1 is the target of execution, it is determined whether the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is "1". Also, if the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2" and the second time-saving state ST2 is the target of execution, it is determined whether the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is "1". Also, if the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3" and the third time-saving state ST3 is the target of execution, it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is "1". If the determination in step SB504 is positive, the game round period table 315 for the third stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step SB505).

If a negative judgment is made in step SB504, and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1" and the first time-saving state ST1 is the execution target (step SB506: YES), it is determined which stage in the first time-saving state ST1 the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 corresponds to (step SB507). When the first time-saving state ST1 starts, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0", and when one game round starts in the first time-saving state ST1, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is incremented by 1. In this case, if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is within the range of "1" to "20", it is the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1, and if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is within the range of "21" to "99", it is the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1.

If a negative judgment is made in step SB504, and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2" and the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target (step SB508: YES), it is determined which stage in the second time-saving state ST2 the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 corresponds to (step SB509). When the second time-saving state ST2 starts, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0", and when one game round starts in the second time-saving state ST2, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is incremented by 1. In this case, if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is within the range of "1" to "20", it is the first stage of the second time-saving state ST2, and if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is within the range of "21" to "149", it is the second stage of the second time-saving state ST2.

If a negative judgment is made in step SB504, and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3" and the third time-saving state ST3 is the execution target (step SB508: NO), it is determined which stage in the third time-saving state ST3 the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 corresponds to (step SB510). When the third time-saving state ST3 starts, when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed during the third time-saving state ST3 and the third time-saving state counter 374 is reset to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues, and when the third time-saving state ST3 is latent and the execution target time-saving states ST1 and ST2 end and the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the execution target, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0", and when one game round is started in the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is incremented by one. In this case, if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is within the range of "1" to "20", the third time-saving state ST3 will be in the first stage, and if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is within the range of "21" to "49", the third time-saving state ST3 will be in the second stage.

When the processing of step SB507, step SB509, or step SB510 is executed, a process is executed to read out the play time period table corresponding to the determined stage (step SB511). Specifically, if it is determined that the target is the first stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, the play time period table 313 for the first stage time-saving is read out from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if it is determined that the target is the second stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, the play time period table 314 for the second stage time-saving is read out from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84.

When the processing of step SB502, step SB505 or step SB511 is executed, the selection processing of the variable display period is executed by referring to the game round period table 312-316 read in these processing (step SB512). In this case, in this embodiment, since the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information, when the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is selected by referring to the game round period table 312-316, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS becomes the numerical information of the variable type counter CS when the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of this game round is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 or the second special chart reserved area 112. After that, the information of the variable display period selected in step SB512 is set in the special chart side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step SB513). The update of the numerical information set in the special chart side timer counter is executed by the timer update processing of step S210 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14).

The contents of the normal play time period table 312, the first stage time-saving play time period table 313, the second stage time-saving play time period table 314, and the high probability play time period table 316 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step SB512 with reference to the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round or a miss reach display occurs, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding tables in the other game round period tables 312 to 314, 316 are referenced. Specifically, a period of 30 seconds or more is selected as the variable display period for the game round. In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step SB512 with reference to the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, if a jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and a miss reach display does not occur, the variable display period at the end of the time reduction is selected regardless of the type of reserved information that triggered the start of the game round and the number of reserved information reserved and stored in the special chart reserved area 84a, and regardless of the numerical information of the variable type counter CS included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of the current game round. The variable display period at the end of the time-saving state is longer than the longest period that can be selected when a non-reach-compatible table in the other game-time period tables 312-314, 316 is referenced, and is specifically 30 seconds. In other words, in the final game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3 to be executed, regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process and the occurrence of a miss-reach display, a period of 30 seconds or more, which is longer than the longest period that can be selected when a non-reach-compatible table in the other game-time period tables 312-314, 316 is referenced, is selected as the variable display period of the game. As a result, in the final game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3 to be executed, sufficient time is secured for the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1-ST3 is ending.

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the change command sent from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93 includes not only the information on the change display period of the number of times played selected in step SB512, but also information indicating the type of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3, information indicating the type of stage in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3, and information on the value stored in the third time-saving state counter 374. As a result, the sound/light MPU 93 can grasp not only the information on the change display period of the number of times played, but also the type of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 to be executed and the type of stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 by the change command received from the main MPU 82, and can grasp whether the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, and if the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 will continue.

Figure 173 is a flowchart showing the pattern determination process executed in step SB315 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Figure 169) of the sound/light side MPU 93.

If the currently received fluctuation command does not have information indicating that the time-saving state is ST1 to ST3 (step SB601, step SB603, and step SB605: NO), other decision processing is executed (step SB610). In the other decision processing, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the content of the currently received fluctuation command and type command.

If the currently received variation command is set with information indicating that it corresponds to the first stage of the time-saving status ST1 to ST3 (step SB601: YES), a decision process for the first stage is executed (step SB602). In the decision process for the first stage, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the first stage. Specifically, a lottery process for executing the effect is executed with the type of effect and the selection probability of the effect corresponding to the first stage. In this case, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variation display period of the number of play times included in the variation command and the information on the game result included in the type command.

In the first stage determination process, a variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SB316 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 169), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SB301 to SB314 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 169).

If the currently received variation command is set with information indicating that it corresponds to the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 (step SB603: YES), a decision process for the second stage is executed (step SB604). In the decision process for the second stage, the execution mode of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the second stage. Specifically, a lottery process for executing the effect is executed with the type of effect corresponding to the second stage and the selection probability of the effect. In this case, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variation display period of the number of play times included in the variation command and the information on the game result included in the type command. In the decision process for the second stage, it is possible to select a type of effect that is not selected in the decision process for the first stage, and the selection probability is different for types of effects that can also be selected in the decision process for the first stage.

In the determination process for the second stage, a variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SB316 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 169), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SB301 to SB314 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 169).

If the currently received variation command is set with information indicating that it corresponds to the third stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 (step SB605: YES), the currently received type command is referenced to determine whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result or a time-saving result (step SB606). If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result or a time-saving result (step SB606: YES), a determination process for the final game round when not in a latent state is executed (step SB608). Also, if the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result or a time-saving result (step SB606: NO) and the third time-saving state ST3 is not in a latent state (step SB607: NO), a determination process for the final game round when not in a latent state is executed (step SB608). On the other hand, if the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result or a time-saving result (step SB606: NO) and the third time-saving state ST3 is lurking (step SB607: YES), a determination process for the final game round during the lurking state is executed (step SB609).

In the determination process for the final play round when not in a lurking state, if the current play round corresponds to a jackpot result, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and the type of jackpot result, and in a manner corresponding to the third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that enables the player to recognize that a jackpot result will occur, but does not include content that enables the player to recognize that the current play round is the final play round of time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and further does not include content that enables the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3 is in a lurking state even if the third time-saving state ST3 is in a lurking state. When an opening/closing execution mode occurs as a result of a jackpot, the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 are forcibly ended even if they are in the middle of the state, and the latent third time-saving state ST3 is also forcibly ended, so there is no need to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the current play round is the final play round of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and there is also no need to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3 is latent.

In the determination process for the final play round when not in a lurking state, if the current play round corresponds to the time-saving result, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner that corresponds to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and the time-saving result, and corresponds to the third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that enables the player to recognize that this is the final play round of the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3 and content that enables the player to recognize that a time-saving result will occur, but does not include content that enables the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3 is in a lurking state even if the third time-saving state ST3 is in a lurking state. If a time-saving result is obtained in the final game of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is set in the third time-saving state counter 374 regardless of whether the third time-saving state ST3 is in the latent state or not, and the third time-saving state ST3 that continues for the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is started, so there is no need to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3 is in the latent state.

In the determination process for the final play round when not in hiding, if the current play round does not correspond to either a jackpot result or a time-saving result, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command, which corresponds to the third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the final play round of the current time-saving state ST1-ST3, and a content that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1-ST3 has ended and a transition to a normal play state has occurred. In addition, in a play round where a reach-for-miss display occurs, after a combination of symbols corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1-Z3, a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the final play round of the current time-saving state ST1-ST3 and a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1-ST3 has ended and a transition to a normal play state has occurred is executed.

In the determination process for the final game round when not in a hidden state, the change pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read change pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a change pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SB316 in the change pattern determination process (Figure 169), a change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received change pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a change pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SB301 to SB314 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 169).

The determination process for the final game round during the latent state is executed on the condition that the current game round does not correspond to both the jackpot result and the time-saving result, and that the third time-saving state ST3 is latent. In the determination process for the final game round during the latent state, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the game round contained in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage. The execution content of the performance determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the final game round of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3, and also includes a content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3 will start. In addition, in the performance of the content that allows the player to recognize that this third time-saving state ST3 will start, information on the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 will continue, that is, information indicating the value stored at that time in the third time-saving state counter 374, is notified. This makes it possible to allow the player to recognize the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 will continue. In addition, in a game round where a miss reach display occurs, after a combination of symbols corresponding to the miss reach display is displayed frozen in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that this is the final game round of the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that the hidden third time-saving state ST3 will begin.

In the determination process for the final game round during the latent state, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read fluctuation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute the performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SB316 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Figure 169), a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute the display performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SB301 to SB314 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 169).

Next, the manner in which the effects are executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 174. FIG. 174(a) shows the period in which the first time-saving state ST1 is the execution target, FIG. 174(b) shows the period in which the third time-saving state ST3 is the execution target or the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, FIG. 174(c) shows the period in which the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 and ST3 is in, FIG. 174(d) shows the period in which the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 and ST3 is in, FIG. 174(e) shows the period in which the effect for the game round that is not latent is executed as the effect for the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 and ST3, and FIG. 174(f) shows the period in which the effect for the game round that is latent is executed as the effect for the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 and ST3 is in.

First, we will explain the case where the third time-saving state ST3 does not occur in the first time-saving state ST1.

At the timing of t1, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and the first time-saving state ST1 begins as shown in FIG. 174(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 174(c), the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1 is reached, and the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game. After that, at the timing of t2, the number of game rounds corresponding to the first stage in the first time-saving state ST1 is played, and the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1 ends and the second stage begins as shown in FIG. 174(c) and FIG. 174(d). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game.

After that, at the timing of t3, the number of play times corresponding to the second stage in the first time-saving state ST1 is consumed, and the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1 ends and the third stage begins as shown in FIG. 174(d). The third stage is the final play time of the first time-saving state ST1. In this case, the third time-saving state ST3 is not latent, and furthermore, no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in the final play time. Therefore, in the final play time from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the performance for the play time is executed in the execution mode of the performance corresponding to non-latency as shown in FIG. 174(e). Since the variable display period of the play time in the final play time is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period for executing a performance that allows the player to recognize that it is the final play time of the first time-saving state ST1.

Next, we will explain the case where no game round corresponding to the time-saving result occurs during the third time-saving state ST3.

At the timing of t5, the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends, and the third time-saving state ST3 begins as shown in FIG. 174(b). In this case, the game enters the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3 as shown in FIG. 174(c), and the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage for each game round. After that, at the timing of t6, the number of game rounds corresponding to the first stage in the third time-saving state ST3 is played, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3 ends and the game enters the second stage as shown in FIG. 174(c) and FIG. 174(d). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage for each game round.

After that, at the timing of t7, the number of play times corresponding to the second stage in the third time-saving state ST3 is consumed, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3 ends and the third stage begins, as shown in FIG. 174(d). The third stage is the final play time in the third time-saving state ST3. In this case, no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in the final play time. In the final play time from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, the performance for the play time is executed in a non-latent corresponding performance execution mode, as shown in FIG. 174(e). In the final play time, the variable display period of the play time is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process, so it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that it is the final play time in the third time-saving state ST3.

Next, we will explain the case where the third time-saving state ST3 becomes lurking in the first time-saving state ST1.

At the timing of t9, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and the first time-saving state ST1 begins as shown in FIG. 174(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 174(c), the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1 is reached, and the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game. After that, at the timing of t10, the number of game rounds corresponding to the first stage in the first time-saving state ST1 is played, and the first stage of the first time-saving state ST1 ends and the second stage begins as shown in FIG. 174(c) and FIG. 174(d). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game.

After that, at the timing of t11, the game round corresponding to the time-saving result ends, and the third time-saving state ST3 is latent in the first time-saving state ST1, as shown in FIG. 174(a) and FIG. 174(b). In this case, in each game round, the performance corresponding to the second stage is executed, and both the first time-saving state counter 372 and the third time-saving state counter 374 are decremented.

After that, at the timing of t12, the number of play times corresponding to the second stage in the first time-saving state ST1 is consumed, and the second stage of the first time-saving state ST1 ends and the third stage begins, as shown in FIG. 174(d). The third stage is the final play time of the first time-saving state ST1. In this case, the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, and furthermore, no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in the final play time. Therefore, in the final play time from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the performance for the play time is executed in the execution mode of the performance corresponding to the latent, as shown in FIG. 174(f). Since the variable display period of the play time in the final play time is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period for executing the performance that allows the player to recognize that it is the final play time of the first time-saving state ST1 and the performance that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3 is starting. In addition, in the presentation that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3 has begun, information on the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3 will continue, i.e., information indicating the value stored at that time in the third time-saving state counter 374, is notified.

At the timing of t13, the first time-saving state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 174(a), and the third time-saving state ST3 becomes the execution target as shown in FIG. 174(b). In this case, in the time-saving progress process (FIG. 170), when the process for making the latent third time-saving state ST3 the execution target is executed, the process for clearing the time-saving continuation counter 375 to "0" (step SB413, step SB421) is executed, and in the process for specifying the variable display period (FIG. 172), it is specified whether it corresponds to the first stage or the second stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 according to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375. Therefore, except when the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving state ST3 is 1, when the latent third time-saving state ST3 is started, it becomes the first stage. Therefore, at timing t13, the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3 is reached, as shown in FIG. 174(c), and the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage during each game.

The remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3, which is the target of execution at the timing of t13, continues is 17 times, which is less than the number of times that the third stage continues. Therefore, the final game round of the third time-saving state ST3 starts at the timing of t14 before the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375, which was cleared to "0" at the timing of t13, reaches a value corresponding to the second stage. In the final game round from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14, the performance for the game round is executed in the execution mode of the non-latent corresponding performance as shown in FIG. 174 (e). Since the variable display period of the game round for the final game round is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that it is the final game round of the third time-saving state ST3.

The embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a game play corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving state ST3 becomes latent. If the current time-saving state ST1, ST2 ends while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the execution target. This makes it possible to diversify the execution modes of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and to enable the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 to continue for a long time.

When a game round is played in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3 is latent while in the time-saving states ST1 and ST2, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 is subtracted by 1, thereby decreasing the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 will continue. Then, when the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1 while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the latent third time-saving state ST3 ends without being set as an execution target. This makes it possible to gradually approach the side where the end trigger of the third time-saving state ST3 occurs each time a game round is played while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, and to generate a situation where the latent third time-saving state ST3 ends without being set as an execution target.

When the time-saving state ST1 or ST2 to be executed ends while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the value of the third time-saving state counter 374 at that point in time becomes the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 to be executed subsequently will continue. As a result, when the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the target for execution, it becomes possible to start the third time-saving state ST3 from the intermediate number of times that corresponds to the number of times of play required from when the third time-saving state ST3 became latent until when it became the target for execution.

When the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target and the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is reset in the third time-saving state counter 374, and the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 continues is initialized to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving result that occurs when the third time-saving state ST3 is latent from going to waste.

When a game play corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in a situation in which the third time-saving state ST3 is in effect, the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues is reset in the third time-saving state counter 374, and the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3, which is the target of execution, is initialized to the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving result that occurs in a situation in which the third time-saving state ST3 is the target of execution from going to waste.

When the maximum number of play times is reached in the third time-saving state ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 does not go into a lurking state, but the third time-saving state ST3 goes into a lurking state and the second time-saving state ST2 starts. This makes it possible to prioritize the second time-saving state ST2 over the third time-saving state ST3.

When a game play corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the third time-saving state ST3 does not remain latent multiple times, but the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3 remains latent is initialized to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 remains latent by resetting the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues in the third time-saving state counter 374. This makes it possible to make the content of the latent time-saving state ST3 easy for players to understand.

When the third time-saving state ST3 is latent as a result of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result being executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the latent pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is displayed as the stopping result of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in that game round. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the third time-saving state ST3 is latent by utilizing the stopping result of the game round performance.

When a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the combination of latent symbols ("7, 8, 9") is displayed as the stopping result of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 in that game round. This makes it possible to make the player aware, by using the stopping result of the game round presentation, that the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 is in effect has been initialized to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 is in effect by resetting the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues in the third time-saving state counter 374.

When the time-saving states ST1 and ST2 to be executed end and the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the target for execution, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0." In the process of specifying the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 172), the game round period tables 313-315 corresponding to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 are read from the master ROM 83 to select the variable display period of the game round, but if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is "0," the game round period table 313 for the first stage time-saving is referenced, just as in the case where the game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed and the third time-saving state ST3 is started as it is. As a result, even if the third time-saving state ST3 is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations is less than the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3, by making the latent third time-saving state ST3 the target of execution, the determination manner of the presentation content for the game play presentation when the third time-saving state ST3 is started can be the same as the determination manner when the third time-saving state ST3 is started without going into a latent state.

In the final game round of the time-saving state ST1, ST2 in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, a determination process for the final game round during the latent state is executed on the condition that neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs. In the determination process for the final game round during the latent state, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the game round contained in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage. The execution content of the performance determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the final game round of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3, and also includes a content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3 will start. In addition, in the performance of the content that allows the player to recognize that this third time-saving state ST3 will start, information on the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 will continue, that is, information indicating the value stored at that time in the third time-saving state counter 374, is notified. This makes it possible to allow the player to recognize the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 will continue.

In the last play of the time-saving state ST1, ST2, a longer period than other play times in the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is likely to be selected as the variable display period of the play times, regardless of whether the third time-saving state ST3 is latent. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient period to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3 is about to start in the last play time of the time-saving state ST1, ST2 when the third time-saving state ST3 is latent. In addition, when determining the variable display period in the last play time of the time-saving state ST1, ST2, there is no need to change the determination mode depending on whether the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, so it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load for determining the variable display period of the play times.

Even if it is the last play in the time-saving state ST1 or ST2 when the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, if the last play corresponds to a jackpot result or a time-saving result, the effect that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3 has begun is not executed. This makes it possible to direct the player's attention to the effect for the play corresponding to the jackpot result or the time-saving result.

<Alternative to the 19th embodiment>
(1) When the consumption of the ceiling number of game times is completed in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 may be ended instead of being latent, and the second time-saving state ST2 may be newly started. Since the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation number of 150 times and the third time-saving state ST3 has a continuation number of 50 times, if the second time-saving state ST2 is started in the middle of the third time-saving state ST3, the remaining continuation number of the third time-saving state ST3 that is latent in the middle of the second time-saving state ST2 becomes 0 times. Therefore, even if the third time-saving state ST3 is ended when the second time-saving state ST2 is newly started, there is no effect on the transition mode of the game state.

(2) The third time-saving state ST3 may continue for a greater number of times than the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, as in the 19th embodiment, if the ceiling number of play times is reached during the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 goes into a latent state and enters the second time-saving state ST2. This may result in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3 still has one or more remaining times of continuation when the second time-saving state ST2 ends. This makes it possible for the latent third time-saving state ST3 to become eligible for execution again when the second time-saving state ST2 ends.

(3) If a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed during the third time-saving state ST3, the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues is initialized to the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3 continues. However, this is not limited to this, and if a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed during the third time-saving state ST3, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated.

(4) The third time-saving state ST3 may be configured to remain latent even if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed during the third time-saving state ST3. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the latent third time-saving state ST3 starts immediately after the third time-saving state ST3 ends.

(5) In the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 172), the selection mode of the variable display period of the last game round may be different depending on whether the third time-saving state ST3 is in a latent state when the last game round of the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is completed. For example, if the third time-saving state ST3 is in a latent state when the last game round of the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is completed, the variable display period of the last game round may be longer or more likely to be longer than when the third time-saving state ST3 is not in a latent state. In this case, it is possible to secure a longer period for executing the performance corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3 being in a latent state in the last game round. Also, if the third time-saving state ST3 is in a latent state when the last game round of the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is completed, the variable display period of the last game round may be shorter or more likely to be shorter than when the third time-saving state ST3 is not in a latent state. In this case, it is possible to end the final game round early and start the latent third time-saving state ST3 early.

(6) In the last game round of the time-saving state ST1, ST2 in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, if the third time-saving state ST3 that starts following the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is the last game round in the middle of the first stage, a notification may be executed to allow the player to recognize this, and if the third time-saving state ST3 that starts following the time-saving state ST1, ST2 is the last game round in the middle of the second stage, a notification may be executed to allow the player to recognize this. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the execution mode of the presentation of the third time-saving state ST3 is different from the execution mode when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the normal game state and the game transitions to the third time-saving state ST3.

(7) Even if the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the target for executing the game state, the game turn period table 315 for the third stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 in the final game turn to select the variable display period of the game turn. However, this is not limited to this, and if the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the target for executing the game state, the game turn period table 313, 314 corresponding to the stage according to the number of game turns executed in the third time-saving state ST3 may be read from the main ROM 83 to select the variable display period of the game turn, even in the final game turn.

<Twentieth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution mode of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 175 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a ceiling counter 325, and a state duration counter 327, as in the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, instead of the first time-saving state flag 322, the second time-saving state flag 323, the third time-saving state flag 324, and the state determination counter 326, the main RAM 84 is provided with a time-saving target counter 381, a second time-saving standby counter 382, a third time-saving standby counter 383, and a second time-saving priority flag 384.

The time-saving target counter 381 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the type of time-saving state ST1 to ST3 that is the target of execution. When the high probability flag 321 is "1", it corresponds to the high probability state regardless of the value of the time-saving target counter 381. When the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0" and the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is "0", it corresponds to the normal game state. When the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is "1", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1. When the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is "2", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2. When the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is "3", it corresponds to the third time-saving state ST3.

When the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" or the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is "1", that is, when it is in the high probability state or the first time-saving state ST1, the high probability table (step S406) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process of the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is "2" or "3", that is, when it is in the second time-saving state ST2 or the third time-saving state ST3, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0" and the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is "0", that is, when the normal game state is in effect, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the long period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S413). In addition, steps S506 to S508 are executed as control processes for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a low expectation mode. As in the first to nineteenth embodiments, in the open/close execution mode, regardless of the game state before the open/close execution mode is started, the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407), the variable display of the normal map display section 38a, and the execution control of the normal power open state are performed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

The second time-saving standby counter 382 is a counter in which information on the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues is set when the second time-saving state ST2 is kept lurking waiting for the second time-saving state ST2 to become an object of execution due to the completion of the ceiling number of play times (specifically, 900 play times) in the third time-saving state ST3. The third time-saving standby counter 383 is a counter in which information on the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is set when the third time-saving state ST3 is kept lurking waiting for the third time-saving state ST3 to become an object of execution due to the execution of play times corresponding to the time-saving results in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 are forcibly terminated by executing the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of a jackpot, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. Therefore, the trigger for starting the first time-saving state ST1 does not occur in the middle of any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In addition, the number of times that the first time-saving state ST1 continues when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends is 100 times, and when the opening and closing execution mode is executed, a ceiling number of times (specifically 900 times) that is a number greater than the number of times that it continues is set. Therefore, the trigger for starting the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1. In addition, once the second time-saving state ST2 occurs once after the consumption of the ceiling number of game plays is completed, the trigger for starting the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur unless the ceiling number of times is set to the ceiling counter 325 when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of a jackpot occurs or when the supply of operating power starts. Therefore, there is no chance that the second time-saving state ST2 will start during the second time-saving state ST2.

The information on the number of continuations set in the second time-saving standby counter 382 and the information on the number of continuations set in the third time-saving standby counter 383 is decremented by one each time a game is played in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3. In a situation where information on one or more continuations is stored in the second time-saving standby counter 382, if another time-saving state ST3 that was the target of execution up until that point ends, the second time-saving state ST2 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the second time-saving standby counter 382 at that point in time. In a situation where information on one or more continuations is stored in the third time-saving standby counter 383, if another time-saving state ST1 to ST3 that was the target of execution up until that point ends, the third time-saving state ST3 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving standby counter 383 at that point in time.

The second time-saving priority flag 384 is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify which of the latent second time-saving state ST2 and the latent third time-saving state ST3 is to be executed first when the third time-saving state ST3, which was the target of execution, ends when both the second time-saving standby counter 382 and the third time-saving standby counter 383 are 1 or more and both the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 are latent. If the second time-saving priority flag 384 is set to "1", the second time-saving state ST2 is to be executed first, and if the second time-saving priority flag 384 is not set to "1", the third time-saving state ST3 is to be executed first.

Figure 176 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step SB701: YES), and the game result that triggered this opening and closing execution mode was a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result (step SB702: YES), the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB703), and each time-saving standby counter 382, 383 is cleared to "0" (step SB704). In addition, the state duration counter 327 is set to "100", which is the number of times the high probability state continues (step SB705). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability state that is a high probability mode and a first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is started.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode is a 5R low probability result (step SB702: NO), the high probability flag 321 is cleared to "0" (step SB706), and the time-saving target counter 381 is set to "1" (step SB707). In addition, the state continuation counter 327 is set to "100", which is the number of times the first time-saving state ST1 has continued, and each time-saving standby counter 382, 383 is cleared to "0" (step SB708). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the first time-saving state ST1, which is a low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is started. In addition, by clearing each time-saving standby counter 382, 383 to "0," even if at least one of the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 was latent before the opening/closing execution mode was started, if the first time-saving state ST1 is started after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the latent time-saving states ST2, ST3 will end without being subject to execution.

When the processing of step SB705 or step SB708 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step SB709). In this transmission process, if the game state transitions to a high probability state, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93, and if the game state transitions to the first time-saving state ST1, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. After that, the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB710), and the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step SB711).

Figure 177 is a flow chart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 executed in step S8310 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB801: YES), i.e., if the game is in a high probability state, the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 is terminated without executing the processes in steps SB802 and onwards. As with the fifteenth embodiment described above, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented in a game played in a high probability state, and the second time-shortened state ST2 does not occur because the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SB801: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 (step SB803) on the condition that the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more (step SB802: YES). Then, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is 1 or more (step SB805). The situation in which the ceiling number of game plays is completed occurs in the normal game state or the third time-saving state ST3. Therefore, in step SB805, it is determined whether the current game state is the third time-saving state ST3 or not.

If a negative judgment is made in step SB805, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "2" (step SB806), and the state duration counter 327 is set to "150", which is the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 has continued (step SB807). This results in the second time-saving state ST2, which is a low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode. After that, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB808), and a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB809).

If a positive judgment is made in step SB805, that is, if the current game state is the third time-shortened state ST3, the second time-shortened standby counter 382 is set to "150", which is the number of times the second time-shortened state ST2 continues (step SB811). As a result, the second time-shortened state ST2 is in a latent state when the third time-shortened state ST3 is the target of execution.

Then, by judging whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is 1 or more, it is judged whether the next third time-saving state ST3 is already latent in the situation where the third time-saving state ST3 is the execution target (step SB812). If a negative judgment is made in step SB812, this means that the next third time-saving state ST3 is not latent in the situation where the third time-saving state ST3 is the execution target, so the second time-saving priority flag 384 is set to "1" (step SB813). On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SB812, this means that the next third time-saving state ST3 is already latent in the situation where the third time-saving state ST3 is the execution target, so the processing of step SB813 is not executed. In this case, the value of the second time-saving priority flag 384 is maintained at "0".

If a positive judgment is made in step SB812 or if the processing of step SB813 is executed, a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has entered a lurking state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB809). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has entered a lurking state. This allows the player to recognize that the second time-saving state ST2 has entered a lurking state, even though it is not the target of execution.

Figure 178 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game is a time-saving result (step SB901: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB902). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SB902: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes of step SB903 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process of a game executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SB902: NO), the time-saving target counter 381 is checked to see if the value is 1 or more to see if the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 (step SB903). If the time-saving target counter 381 is checked to see if the value is "0" (step SB903: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving target counter 381 is set to "3" (step SB904), the state duration counter 327 is set to "50", which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues (step SB905), and the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SB906). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB907). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is 1 or more (step SB903: YES), the third time-saving standby counter 384 is set to "50", which is the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues (step SB908). As a result, if the current situation is not the latent third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 becomes latent in a situation in which any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is the target for execution, and if the current situation is the latent third time-saving state ST3, the number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 continues is reset.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has become latent in a situation in which any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is the target of execution, or that the number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 will continue is reset, is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SB907). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the third time-saving state ST3 has become latent in a situation in which any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is the target of execution, or an effect indicating that the number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 will continue is reset.

When any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3 is the target for execution, if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed and the third time-saving state ST3 is in a latent state, or if the number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 continues is reset, the process of setting the outer end flag in the main RAM 84 at the time of time-saving occurrence to "1" (step SB906) is not executed, so in this situation the output state of the second jackpot signal is maintained at a LOW level. However, this is not limited to this, and in this situation the output state of the second jackpot signal may be configured to be a HI level for the ON duration.

In this embodiment, as in the 19th embodiment, when the third time-saving state ST3 is executed as a result of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result, a combination of time-saving occurrence symbols ("1, 2, 3") is displayed as a static display on any of the active lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in that game round, and red is displayed as a static display in the state suggestion area 43. Also, when the third time-saving state ST3 becomes latent as a result of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result, or when the number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3 continues is reset, a combination of latent occurrence symbols ("7, 8, 9") is displayed as a static display on any of the active lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in that game round, and red is displayed as a static display in the state suggestion area 43. Also, when the high probability state occurs and the time-saving result is invalidated, a combination of non-reach-out symbols is displayed as a static display on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the game round corresponding to the time-saving result. A non-missing combination of symbols is a combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result, the combination of symbols that cause a time-saving effect ("1, 2, 3"), the combination of symbols that cause a latent effect ("7, 8, 9"), and the combination of symbols that cause a miss. A blue color is displayed as a stopped state in the state suggestion area 43. The above non-missing combination of symbols is also displayed as a stopped state when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress processing executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation processing (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC101). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC101: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SC102.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 381 is 1 or more (step SC101: NO, step SC102: YES), i.e., if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the state duration counter 327 is decremented (step SC103), the second time-saving standby counter 382 is decremented (step SC104), and the third time-saving standby counter 383 is decremented (step SC105). In the decrement process of the state duration counter 327, the value of the state duration counter 327 is decremented by 1.

In the subtraction process of the second time-saving standby counter 382, the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is 1 or more. In addition, if the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", the second time-saving priority flag 384 is cleared to "0". However, in this embodiment, the second time-saving state ST2 can be latent only in the third time-saving state ST3, and the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues is 150 times and the number of times the third time-saving state ST3 continues is 50 times. Therefore, even if the third time-saving state ST3 that is the target of execution ends in a situation where both the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 are latent, and the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the target of execution first, when the third time-saving state ST3 ends, the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is 50 or more. Therefore, in the subtraction process of the second time-saving standby counter 382, the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 after subtracting 1 will not become "0", and if the second time-saving state ST2 is latent, the second time-saving state ST2 will definitely be executed after that.

In the decrement process of the third time-saving standby counter 383, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is 1 or greater. In addition, if the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 after decrementing by 1 becomes "0" and the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is 1 or greater, the second time-saving priority flag 384 is set to "1."

Here, since the processing of steps SC104 and SC105 is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, when the second time-saving state ST2 is in a latent state, not only is the value of the state duration counter 327 decremented by 1 when one game is played in the third time-saving state ST3 that is the target of execution, but also the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is decremented by 1. Also, when the third time-saving state ST3 is in a latent state, not only is the value of the state duration counter 327 decremented by 1 when one game is played in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 that is the target of execution, but also the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is decremented by 1. Also, when both the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 are in a latent state, not only is the value of the state duration counter 327 decremented by 1 when one game is played in the third time-saving state ST3 that is the target of execution, but also the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is decremented by 1 and the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is decremented by 1. Therefore, if at least one of the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, not only will the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 that are being executed be continued be decremented by one when one game round is played, but the remaining number of times that the latent time-saving states ST2 and ST3 are continued will also be decremented by one.

The second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, while the third time-saving state ST3 has a continuation count of 50 times. Therefore, if the second time-saving state ST2 becomes dormant during the third time-saving state ST3, even if the dormant third time-saving state ST3 becomes the target for execution first when the target third time-saving state ST3 ends, a situation will occur in which the third time-saving state ST3 that is the target for execution when the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is 1 or more ends and the dormant second time-saving state ST2 becomes the target for execution. This second time-saving state ST2 is executed for the remaining continuation count stored in the second time-saving standby counter 382.

The third time-saving state ST3 has a continuation count of 50 times, whereas the first time-saving state ST1 has a continuation count of 100 times and the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times. Therefore, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 to be executed ends, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 may be 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST3 may be executed for the remaining continuation count stored in the third time-saving standby counter 383 following the previous time-saving states ST1 to ST3. There may also be a situation where the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 becomes "0" midway through the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 to be executed, and the latent third time-saving state ST3 ends without being a target for execution.

Then, by determining whether the value of the state duration counter 327 is "0", it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 to be executed has ended (step SC106). If the value of the state duration counter 327 is "0" (step SC106: YES), it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is 1 or more (step SC107). If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is 1 or more (step SC107: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST3 is latent. In this case, by determining whether "1" is set to the second time-saving priority flag 384, it is determined whether the second time-saving state ST2 has entered a latent state before the latent third time-saving state ST3 (step SC108).

If the second time-saving priority flag 384 is not set to "1" (step SC108: NO), it means that the second time-saving state ST2 is not lurking, or even if the second time-saving state ST2 is lurking, the lurking of the second time-saving state ST2 occurred at a later timing than the lurking of the third time-saving state ST3. In this case, the time-saving target counter 381 is set to "3" (step SC109), and the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is set to the state continuation counter 327 (step SC110). As a result, the lurking third time-saving state ST3 becomes the execution target, and the third time-saving state ST3 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving standby counter 383. In addition, a clearing process is executed at the time of transition to the third time-saving state (step SC111). In the clearing process, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is cleared to "0". Furthermore, if the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is 1 or greater, the second time-saving priority flag 384 is set to "1."

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC118). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 to be executed are terminated, and a performance indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3 has started is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is "0" (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is 1 or greater (step SC112). If the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is 1 or greater (step SC112: YES), this means that the second time-saving state ST2 is latent. Furthermore, if a positive determination is made in step SC108, this means that the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 are latent, and the second time-saving state ST2 will be executed first.

In these cases, the time-saving target counter 381 is set to "2" (step SC113), and the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is set to the state duration counter 327 (step SC114). As a result, the latent second time-saving state ST2 becomes the execution target, and the second time-saving state ST2 is executed for the remaining number of durations stored in the second time-saving standby counter 384. In addition, a clearing process is executed at the time of transition to the second time-saving state (step SC115). In this clearing process, the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is cleared to "0". In addition, the second time-saving priority flag 384 is cleared to "0".

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent second time-saving state ST2 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC118). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that the third time-saving state ST3 to be executed ends, and a performance indicating that the latent second time-saving state ST2 has started is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is "0" and the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 is "0" (step SC107 and step SC112: NO), the time-saving target counter 381 is cleared to "0" (step SC116). This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the end of the time-saving in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SC117), and a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 have ended and transition has been made to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC118).

With the above configuration, when the ceiling number of play times is played in the third time-saving state ST3, the second time-saving state ST2 becomes latent. Also, when a play time corresponding to the time-saving result is played in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 becomes latent. Then, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3 that is the target of execution ends, the latent time-saving states ST2 and ST3 become the new targets of execution. This makes it possible to prevent a new opportunity to grant the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 from being invalidated when such an opportunity occurs during the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, and makes it possible to increase the opportunities for granting the time-saving states ST1 to ST3.

When a game round is played while the time-saving states ST2 and ST3 are in a latent state, not only is the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 that are being executed decremented by one, but the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST2 and ST3 that are in a latent state are also decremented by one. This makes it possible to prevent the period in which the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 are in a latent state from continuing for an excessively long period, even in a configuration that increases the opportunities for the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 to be granted as described above.

In the third time-saving state ST3, both the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 may be latent. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the time-saving states ST2 and ST3 are latent. Also, when both the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 are latent, the time-saving state ST2 or ST3 that was latent first becomes the starting target, so the start order of the latent time-saving states ST2 and ST3 becomes clear to the player.

<Alternative to the twentieth embodiment>
(1) When a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving state ST3 is not limited to a configuration in which it is initialized to the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3, and it may be a configuration in which, when a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed while the third time-saving state ST3 is latent, the occurrence of the time-saving result is invalidated.

(2) When the third time-saving state ST3 is latent and the maximum number of play times is reached, both the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 are latent. Even if a play time corresponding to the time-saving result is then played and the remaining number of play times for the latent third time-saving state ST3 is initialized to the number of play times for the third time-saving state ST3, when the time-saving states ST1 and ST3 to be executed end, the latent third time-saving state ST3 becomes the first to be executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in a situation where both the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST3 are latent, a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed and the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3 continues is initialized to the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3 continues, even if the latent third time-saving state ST3 has been latent before the latent second time-saving state ST2, when the time-saving states ST1 and ST3 to be executed have ended, the latent second time-saving state ST2 may be configured to be executed before the latent

<Twenty-first embodiment>
In this embodiment, the type of the third time-saving state is different from that of the 19th embodiment, and the execution mode of the time-saving state is different from that of the 19th embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the 19th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 19th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 180 is an explanatory diagram to explain the contents of the time-saving state set in this embodiment.

As in the 19th embodiment, the game states in this embodiment are the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, and the second time-saving state ST2. In addition, the third time-saving state is the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C. The contents of the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, and the second time-saving state ST2 are the same as in the 19th embodiment. In the following description, for convenience, the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are collectively referred to as the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C.

In the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C, the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, similar to the third time-saving state ST3 in the 19th embodiment. In the second high-frequency support mode, similar to the 15th embodiment, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is the low probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power opening state is the high expectation mode in which three long openings occur.

The 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C have different end conditions. Specifically, the 3A time-saving state ST3A ends and becomes a normal game state when 50 game times are consumed, the 3B time-saving state ST3B ends and becomes a normal game state when 100 game times are consumed, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C ends and becomes a normal game state when 130 game times are consumed. As described above, the support modes of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are common to the second high-frequency support mode, so that among the 3rd time-saving states, the 3C time-saving state ST3C, which has the highest number of continuations, is the most advantageous, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, which has the second highest number of continuations, is the next most advantageous, and the 3A time-saving state ST3A, which has the lowest number of continuations, is the least advantageous. In addition, like the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2, the third A to third C time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are forcibly terminated when the opening and closing execution mode is executed in response to a jackpot result.

The third A time-saving state ST3A is set at the end of a game in which the win/loss determination process and the time-saving allocation determination process are executed when the win/loss determination process (step S805) determines the time-saving result and the first time-saving allocation determination process (step S811) is executed thereafter. The third B time-saving state ST3B is set at the end of a game in which the win/loss determination process and the time-saving allocation determination process are executed when the win/loss determination process (step S805) determines the time-saving result and the second time-saving allocation determination process (step S811) is executed thereafter. The third C time-saving state ST3C is set at the end of a game in which the win/loss determination process and the time-saving allocation determination process are executed when the win/loss determination process (step S805) determines the time-saving result and the third time-saving allocation determination process (step S811) is executed thereafter.

Note that, without being limited to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, instead of the time-saving result, a first time-saving result, a second time-saving result, and a third time-saving result are set as the game result that can be selected in the win/loss determination process (step S805), and any one of the first to third time-saving results can be selected in the win/loss determination process. In this case, there is no need to execute the time-saving allocation determination process. Also, although the time-saving allocation determination process is configured to use the value of the type random number counter C2, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the value of a lottery counter that is used only in the time-saving allocation determination process is used.

Figure 180(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table 391 for the first special pattern referenced in the time-saving allocation determination process (step S811), and Figure 180(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving allocation table 392 for the second special pattern referenced in the time-saving allocation determination process (step S811).

In both the time-saving allocation table 391 for the first special symbol and the time-saving allocation table 392 for the second special symbol, the first time-saving result, the second time-saving result, and the third time-saving result are set as the types of time-saving results to be allocated. Therefore, in either a game round triggered by the first reserved information acquired based on the game ball entering the first operating port 33 or a game round triggered by the second reserved information acquired based on the game ball entering the second operating port 34, the first time-saving result, the second time-saving result, and the third time-saving result can each be generated.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), in the time-saving allocation table 391 for the first special chart, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 9" corresponds to the first time-saving result, the type random number counter C2 of "10 to 19" corresponds to the second time-saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "20 to 29" corresponds to the third time-saving result. In other words, when the time-saving allocation table 391 for the first special chart is referenced, the selection probability of the first time-saving result, the second time-saving result, and the third time-saving result is the same.

180(c), in the time-saving allocation table 392 for the second special chart, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 7" corresponds to the first time-saving result, the type random number counter C2 of "8 to 15" corresponds to the second time-saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "16 to 29" corresponds to the third time-saving result. In other words, when the time-saving allocation table 392 for the second special chart is referenced, the selection probability of the third time-saving result is the highest, and the selection probability of the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result are the same but lower than the selection probability of the third time-saving result. As already explained, the third C time-saving state ST3C, which occurs as a result of the third time-saving result, is more advantageous than the third A time-saving state ST3A, which occurs as a result of the first time-saving result, and the third B time-saving state ST3B, which occurs as a result of the second time-saving result. Therefore, when the time-saving allocation table 392 for the second special pattern is referenced, the selection of the 3A to 3C time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is more advantageous than when the time-saving allocation table 391 for the first special pattern is referenced.

It is not limited to the above configuration, and the time-saving allocation table 391 for the first special symbol may be referenced for both the game round triggered by the first reserved information and the game round triggered by the second reserved information, and the time-saving allocation table 392 for the second special symbol may be referenced for both the game round triggered by the first reserved information and the game round triggered by the second reserved information. In addition, the time-saving allocation table 392 for the second special symbol is not limited to a configuration in which the selection probability of the third time-saving result is set to be the highest, and may be a configuration in which the selection probability of the second time-saving result is set to be the highest, or a configuration in which the selection probability of the first time-saving result is set to be the highest, or a configuration in which the selection probabilities of the first to third time-saving results are the same or approximately the same.

Figure 181 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a ceiling counter 325, a time-saving target counter 371, and a time-saving continuation counter 375, as in the 19th embodiment. In addition, the main RAM 84 is provided with a time-saving state counter 386 and a third time-saving standby counter 387, instead of the first time-saving state counter 372, the second time-saving state counter 373, and the third time-saving state counter 374.

The time-saving target counter 371 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the type of time-saving state ST1 to ST3 that is the target of execution, as in the 19th embodiment. When the high probability flag 321 is "1", it corresponds to the high probability state regardless of the value of the time-saving target counter 371. When the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0", it corresponds to the normal game state. When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1. When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2. When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", it corresponds to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

When the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" or the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", that is, when it is in the high probability state or the first time-saving state ST1, the high probability table (step S406) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process of the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2" or "3", that is, when the second time-saving state ST2, the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, or the 3C time-saving state ST3C is in the 2nd time-saving state ST2, the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, or the 3C time-saving state ST3C, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S414). In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process of the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

When the value of the high probability flag 321 is "0" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0", that is, when the normal game state is in effect, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Figure 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the long period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display (step S413). In addition, steps S506 to S508 are executed as control processes for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Figure 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a low expectation mode. As in the first to twentieth embodiments, in the open/close execution mode, regardless of the game state before the open/close execution mode is started, the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407), the variable display of the normal map display section 38a, and the execution control of the normal power open state are performed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

The time-saving continuation counter 375 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the number of times that have been played in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C since any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C was newly started, as in the 19th embodiment. In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the variable display period of the game round is determined in a manner corresponding to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375. Also, as in the first embodiment, the content of the effects for the game rounds executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 in each game round may differ depending on the variable display period of the game round, so it can be said that in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the execution mode of the effects for the game round is determined in a manner corresponding to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375.

The time-saving state counter 386 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution will continue. The third time-saving standby counter 387 is a counter in which information on the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue is set when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is made to lie dormant by waiting for the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C to become the target of execution as a result of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result being executed in the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. The information on the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue is decremented by one each time a game round is executed in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C. Then, in a situation where information on one or more continuations is stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387, when another time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that was the subject of execution ends, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is executed for the remaining continuations stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387 at that time.

Figure 182 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step SC201: YES), and if the game result that triggered this opening and closing execution mode is a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result (step SC202: YES), the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC203), and the time-saving target counter 371, the time-saving state counter 386, and the third time-saving waiting counter 387 are cleared to "0" (step SC204). In addition, the high probability state counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "100", which is the number of times the high probability state continues (step SC205). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability state that is a high probability mode and a first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is started. As in the first embodiment, the value of the high probability state counter is decremented by one each time a game is played in the high probability state, and if the value of the high probability state counter after decrementing by one becomes "0", processing is executed to end the high probability state and transition to the normal game state.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode is a 5R low probability result (step SC202: NO), the high probability flag 321 is cleared to "0" (step SC206), and the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "1" (step SC207). In addition, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100", which is the number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is cleared to "0", and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SC208). As a result, the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the first time-saving state ST1, which is a low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, regardless of the game state before the opening and closing execution mode begins. In addition, even if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3B was latent before the opening and closing execution mode began, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3B is not latent.

When the processing of step SC205 or step SC208 is executed, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step SC209). In this transmission process, if the game state transitions to a high probability state, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93, and if the game state transitions to the first time-saving state ST1, a corresponding state designation command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. After that, the outer end flag at the end of the jackpot in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SC210), and the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step SC211).

Figure 183 is a flowchart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 executed in step S8310 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC301: YES), i.e., if the game is in a high probability state, the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 is terminated without executing the processes in steps SC302 and onward. As with the 19th embodiment above, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented in a game played in a high probability state, and as the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not decremented, no ceiling time reduction occurs.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SC301: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 (step SC303), provided that the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more (step SC302: YES). Then, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step SC304: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "2" (step SC305), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "150", which is the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues, and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SC306). This results in the second time-saving state ST2, which is a low probability mode and a second high-frequency support mode. After that, the outer end flag in the main RAM 84 at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1" (step SC307), and a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC308).

Here, even if the maximum number of play times has been played in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the processing of steps SC305-SC308 is executed to start the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not left lurking, but is ended midway. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the second time-saving state ST2 over the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving state ST2 is started, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is not cleared to "0". Therefore, when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in a state where it is latent and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is to be executed, if the ceiling number of play times is consumed, the second time-saving state ST2 is started while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is maintained in a state where it is latent. However, since the second time-saving state ST2 has a greater number of continuations than any of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends without being executed. However, this is not limited to this, and when the second time-saving state ST2 is started, the third time-saving standby counter 387 may be cleared to "0", and the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C may also end.

Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SC401: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC402). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC402: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SC403. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SC402: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more to determine whether the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SC403). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SC403: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SC404), the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SC405), and the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386 is executed (step SC406). In the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386, if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50", if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100", and if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130". As a result, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. In addition, in step SC405, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", but if the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", a process is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, as in the above fifteenth embodiment, and a process is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to a HI level for the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC407). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SC403: YES), it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is already in a latent state (step SC408). If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more (step SC408: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is already in a latent state. In this case, the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated as it is. As a result, when a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is already in a latent state, the time-saving result is invalidated.

If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is "0" (step SC408: NO), a setting process is executed for the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SC409). In the setting process for the third time-saving standby counter 387, if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "50", if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "100", and if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "130". As a result, if a game corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed during the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C will be latent, provided that the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not already latent. In addition, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C remains in the latent state in this case corresponds to the type of time-saving result that triggered the latent state.

Then, in step SC407, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not a target for execution but is instead in a latent state.

As described above, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the high probability state, the time-saving result is invalidated without transition to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by the time-saving result and without the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C occurring, as in the 19th embodiment. Also, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is already latent, the time-saving result is invalidated.

On the other hand, when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the normal game state, a transition to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C occurs, and when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in a situation where the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is in effect and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not in the latent state, the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C occurs. In this case, the stop result displayed on the special chart display unit 37a, 37b in the game round in which the time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process does not change depending on whether or not the setting for the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is made based on the time-saving result, whereas the stop result displayed on the pattern display device 41 changes depending on whether or not the setting for the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is made based on the time-saving result. This content will be explained in detail below.

The game results that can be selected by the winning/losing judgment process (step S805) and the various allocation judgment processes (steps S807 and S811) of the game round include a 5R low probability result, a 5R high probability result, a 10R high probability result, a first time-saving result, a second time-saving result, a third time-saving result, and a losing result. The stop results displayed as the confirmation display of the game round on the special chart display units 37a and 37b are "1" for a 5R low probability result, "2" for a 5R high probability result, "3" for a 10R high probability result, "4" for a first time-saving result, "5" for a second time-saving result, "6" for a third time-saving result, and "-" for a losing result. These stop results do not change regardless of the game situation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can unambiguously grasp the game result of the game round by checking the stop results on the special chart display units 37a and 37b.

The stop result displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a confirmation of the number of play rounds does not change regardless of the game situation if the result is a jackpot or a miss, but changes depending on the game situation if the result is one of the first to third time-saving results. This content will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 185. Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. The process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side MPU 82.

If the currently received type command contains information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SC501: YES), a process for determining the stop pattern for the jackpot result is executed (step SC502), and red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC503). The contents of these processes are the same as steps S1402 and S1403 of the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to the first to third time-saving results (step SC504: YES), and if the current game state is a high probability state (step SC505: YES), a process for determining a stop pattern for non-missed reach is executed (step SC506). In the process for determining a stop pattern for non-missed reach, a lottery is performed to determine the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which are the combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, the combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), the combination of latent patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and the combination of non-missed patterns that is a combination of patterns other than the combination of missed reach patterns. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC507).

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game round corresponds to the first to third time-saving results (step SC504: YES) and the current game state is the normal game state (step SC508: NO), a process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SC509). In the process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the combination of the first time-saving pattern ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the combination of the second time-saving pattern ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the combination of the third time-saving pattern ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for the time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third time-saving occurrence patterns selected as described above is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC510).

If the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the first to third time-saving results (step SC504: YES) and the current game state is the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C (step SC508: YES), it is determined whether the current game round is the final game round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has not yet entered a latent state or the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has entered a latent state is one, and it is determined whether the current game round has been started (step SC511). In addition, the sound and light side MPU 93 can determine whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, and whether the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in a latent state in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, based on the state designation command received from the main side MPU 82. Furthermore, it can determine whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is in its final game state based on the number of times that a change command is received after receiving a state designation command corresponding to the start of the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, and it can determine whether the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue is one based on the number of times that a change command is received after receiving a state designation command corresponding to the start of the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

If a positive judgment is made in step SC511, this means that the current game round has started in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, but when the current game round ends, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will start anew, triggered by the current first to third time-saving results. In this case, the process of determining the stop pattern for the time-saving indication, which has already been explained, is executed (step SC509), and red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC510).

If a negative judgment is made in step SC511, it is judged whether or not the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will become latent as a result of the first to third time-saving results (step SC512). The third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will become latent when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is in its final play round and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C becomes the target for execution when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C ends, when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is not in its final play round and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not latent, or when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is not in its final play round and the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will continue will be 0 when the current play round ends.

If the result of step SC512 is positive, a process for determining a stop pattern for latent suggestion is executed (step SC513). In the process for determining a stop pattern for latent suggestion, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first latent occurrence pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second latent occurrence pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third latent occurrence pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In the process for determining a stop pattern for latent suggestion, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combinations of the first to third latent occurrence patterns selected as described above are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC514).

Abe makes a negative judgment in step SC512, and the first to third time-saving results are invalidated. Therefore, a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach is executed (step SC506). As already explained, in the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach, the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 are determined by lottery, and include a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), a combination of patterns that latent occurs ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and a combination of patterns other than the miss-reach pattern combination, that is, a non-missed-reach pattern combination. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC507).

The stop result of the status suggestion area 43 determined in step SC507 may be changed depending on the type of the current time-saving result. For example, if the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result, green is selected as the stop result of the status suggestion area 43, if the current time-saving result is the second time-saving result, yellow is selected as the stop result of the status suggestion area 43, and if the current time-saving result is the third time-saving result, purple is selected as the stop result of the status suggestion area 43. This makes it possible to notify the type of the invalidated time-saving result by the stop result of the status suggestion area 43 even if the time-saving result is invalidated.

If the currently received type command is set with information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to a loss result (step SC504: NO), a loss stop pattern determination process is executed (step SC515). In the loss stop pattern determination process, if the currently received variable command is set with variable display period information indicating that the currently started game turn corresponds to the occurrence of a reach display, a loss reach pattern combination is determined by lottery as a stop result to be stopped and displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, and the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the determined loss reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for a loss, if the currently received variable command is set with information on the variable display period indicating that the currently started game round does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach display, the stop result in which the combination of patterns corresponding to the big win result, the time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), the latent pattern combination ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and the combination of patterns other than the combination of the loss reach pattern are stopped and displayed is determined by lottery. Also, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC516).

When the processing of step SC503, step SC507, step SC510, step SC514 or step SC516 has been executed, a pattern determination process is executed (step SC517). In the pattern determination process, a variation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps SC501 to SC516 and the information on the variation display period included in the currently received variation command is selected, and a variation pattern table corresponding to the selected variation pattern is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform the presentation of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game round.

Then, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step SC517 is sent to the display side MPU 103 (step SC518). The display side MPU 103 reads out a display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read out display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 in the current game round and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Fig. 185).

As described above, when the game is in the normal game state, or when the current game round is the final game round of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has not yet entered the latent state, or when the current game round is started with one remaining continuation in the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, if the first to third time-saving results are obtained, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is displayed frozen on any of the active lines L1-L5 of the pattern rows Z1-Z3, and red is displayed frozen in the state suggestion area 43. This allows the player to recognize that a transition to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred based on the stopped result of the pattern display device 41.

When the first to third time-saving results occur in a situation where the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are in effect, and the first to third time-saving results trigger the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C to occur, the latent pattern combination ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is displayed frozen on any of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and red is displayed frozen in the state suggestion area 43. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has occurred based on the stopped result of the pattern display device 41.

When a time-saving result occurs in a high probability state, or when a first to third time-saving result occurs in a time-saving state ST1 to ST3C state but the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by the first to third time-saving result does not occur, a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed on each active line L1 to L5 in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A combination of non-missing symbols is also displayed when the result of the hit/miss determination process is a miss. Additionally, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43.

The display area of the pattern display device 41 is larger than that of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and furthermore, since the pattern display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the play area PA, while the special pattern display units 37a and 37b are located in the corners of the play area PA, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. Also, while the pattern display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach displays, the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, as already explained, only display the changing patterns in a certain manner and the stop results corresponding to the game results, so from this point of view as well, the pattern display device 41 attracts more attention from players than the special pattern display units 37a and 37b. In such circumstances, if the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, a combination of non-missing symbols that can be displayed as a stop in the case of a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it was selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in the case where a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to see the special chart display units 37a and 37b, it is possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

Figure 186 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC601). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC601: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes from step SC602 onward.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SC601: NO, step SC602: YES), i.e., if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, a subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386 (step SC603) and a subtraction process of the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SC604) are executed. In the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is subtracted by 1. In the subtraction process of the third time-saving standby counter 387, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more.

Here, since the processing of step SC604 is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the value of the time-saving state counter 386 decremented by 1 when one play round is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the target of execution, but the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is also decremented by 1. Therefore, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the target of execution decremented by 1 when one play round is executed, but the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is also decremented by 1.

The first time-saving state ST1 has a continuation count of 100 times, the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, the thirdA time-saving state ST3A has a continuation count of 50 times, the thirdB time-saving state ST3B has a continuation count of 100 times, and the thirdC time-saving state ST3C has a continuation count of 130 times. Therefore, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 may be 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C may be executed for the remaining continuation count stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387 following the previous time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 may become "0" midway through the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C may end without being executed.

After that, by determining whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0", it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed has ended (step SC605). If the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SC605: YES), it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more (step SC606). If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more (step SC606: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent. In this case, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to the time-saving state counter 386 (step SC607), the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is cleared to "0" (step SC608), and the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" (step SC609). As a result, the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target for execution, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC612). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed to end, and for a performance indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started to be executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In addition, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SC613). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0," the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is newly started.

If the value of the third time-saving waiting counter 387 is "0" (step SC606: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SC610). This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the end of the time-saving in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SC611), a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have ended and transition has been made to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC612), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SC613).

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 187, the state in which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent will be explained using the relationship with the first time-saving state ST1 as an example. FIG. 187(a) shows the period in which the first time-saving state ST1 is the target of execution, FIG. 187(b) shows the period in which the third A time-saving state ST3A is the target of execution, FIG. 187(c) shows the period in which the third B time-saving state ST3B is the target of execution, FIG. 187(d) shows the period in which the third C time-saving state ST3C is the target of execution, FIG. 187(e) shows the timing at which the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends, FIG. 187(f) shows the timing at which the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends, FIG. 187(g) shows the timing at which the game round corresponding to the third time-saving result ends, and FIG. 187(h) shows the period in which the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more.

At the timing of t1, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R low probability result ends, and the first time-saving state ST1 begins as shown in FIG. 187(a). After that, at the timing of t2, which is midway through the first time-saving state ST1, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 187(e). In this case, since the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not latent, the number of times the third A time-saving state ST3A continues is set in the third time-saving standby counter 387 as shown in FIG. 187(h), and the third A time-saving state ST3A enters a latent state as shown in FIG. 187(b).

After that, at the timing t3 when the game is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the game round corresponding to the third time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 187(g). In this case, since the third A time-saving state ST3A is already latent, the latent third C time-saving state ST3C triggered by the third time-saving result does not occur, and the third time-saving result is invalidated.

After that, at timing t4, which is midway through the first time-saving state ST1, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 187(h). Therefore, the third time-saving state ST3A, which had been dormant as shown in FIG. 187(b), ends without becoming a target for execution. As a result, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are no longer dormant.

After that, at timing t5, which is midway through the first time-saving state ST1, the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 187(f). In this case, since the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not latent, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3B continues is set in the third time-saving standby counter 387 as shown in FIG. 187(h), and the third time-saving state ST3B becomes latent as shown in FIG. 187(c).

After that, at the timing of t6, the first time-saving state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 187(a). In this case, since the third time-saving state ST3B is latent as shown in FIG. 187(c), the third time-saving state ST3B starts at the timing of t6. However, the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3B will continue is not 100 times, but the number of times corresponding to the value stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387 at the timing of t6.

After that, at timing t7, which is midway through the third-B time-saving state ST3B, the game round corresponding to the third time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 187(g). In this case, since the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not latent, the number of times the third-C time-saving state ST3C continues is set in the third time-saving standby counter 387 as shown in FIG. 187(h), and the third-C time-saving state ST3C enters a latent state as shown in FIG. 187(d).

After that, at the timing t8 when the game is in the middle of the 3B time-saving state ST3B and the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 187(f). In this case, since the 3C time-saving state ST3C is already latent, the latent state of the 3B time-saving state ST3B triggered by the second time-saving result does not occur, and the second time-saving result is invalidated.

After that, at the timing of t9, the third B time-saving state ST3B ends as shown in FIG. 187(c). In this case, the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent as shown in FIG. 187(d), so the third C time-saving state ST3C starts at the timing of t9. However, the remaining number of times that the third C time-saving state ST3C will continue is not 130 times, but the number of times corresponding to the value stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387 at the timing of t9.

After that, at timing t10, the third time-saving state ST3C ends, as shown in FIG. 187(d). In this case, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not lurking, so the game state becomes the normal game state.

The embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The third time-saving state ST3A, the third time-saving state ST3B, and the third time-saving state ST3C are set as third time-saving states that occur when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is played. This makes it possible to diversify the types of the third time-saving state. Also, all of these third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C have the same support mode but different ending conditions. This makes it possible to diversify the types of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C while preventing the contents of these third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C from becoming difficult for players to understand.

The third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in a latent state not only when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, but also when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C to be latent in the time-saving states ST1-ST3C.

Even if multiple types of third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are set, only one of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C can be latent. This makes it possible to prevent the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C from being excessively latent.

Even if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is already latent, no settings related to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C are made for the first to third time-saving results, and the first to third time-saving results are invalidated. This makes it easier for players to understand the contents of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, and simplifies the processing configuration related to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

When the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent as a result of the execution of a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results in the time-saving states ST1-ST3C, the latent pattern combination ("5-6-7", "6-7-8", "7-8-9") is displayed as the stopping result of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in that game round. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent by utilizing the stopping result of the game round performance.

The contents of the combination of symbols that causes the latent occurrence differ depending on the type of the first to third time-saving results. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the latent target by using the stopping result of the game-run performance.

When the occurrence of the first to third time-saving results is nullified by executing a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C in a situation where the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, the stop results displayed in the game round are a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of symbols that generate time-saving results ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), a combination of symbols that generate latent patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and a combination of symbols that are not a combination of symbols that are a miss-reach symbols, that is, a combination of symbols that are a miss-reach symbol combination. The stop results are miss results, and are stop results that are also displayed in game rounds in which a miss-reach display does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the occurrence of the first to third time-saving results has been nullified from the stop results of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 displays a stop result corresponding to the nullification of the occurrence of the first to third time-saving results, and the special chart display areas 37a and 37b also display stop results corresponding to the first to third time-saving results. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to understand that a situation has occurred in which the occurrence of the first to third time-saving results has been nullified by visually checking the state suggestion area 43 or the special chart display areas 37a and 37b.

<Alternative to the 21st embodiment>
(1) The number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is less than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is the same as the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, and the number of times the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is greater than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, but the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C continue may be any number. For example, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C continue may all be less than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, may be greater than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, or may be greater than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues. In addition, some of the third time-shortening states ST3A to ST3C may be configured to have a continuation number that is equal to or greater than the continuation number of the second time-shortening state ST2.

(2) When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the corresponding third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. However, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to that time-saving result may be newly started, or when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing contents when the game rounds corresponding to the first to third time-saving results end in a situation where the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent are different from those of the twenty-first embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the twenty-first embodiment are explained. Note that the explanation of the same configurations as the twenty-first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SC701: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC702). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC702: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SC703. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SC702: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more to determine whether the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SC703). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SC703: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SC704), the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SC705), and the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386 is executed (step SC706). In the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386, if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50", if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100", and if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130". As a result, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. In addition, in step SC705, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", but if the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", a process is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, as in the above fifteenth embodiment, and a process is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal to a HI level.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC707). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SC703: YES), regardless of whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more, a setting process is executed for the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SC708). In the setting process for the third time-saving standby counter 387, if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "50", if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "100", and if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result, the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "130". As a result, if a game corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed during the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C will be latent regardless of whether the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are already latent. In addition, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C remains in the latent state in this case corresponds to the type of time-saving result that triggered the latent state.

Then, in step SC707, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is instead latent.

Figure 189 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. Note that the process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side MPU 82.

Steps SC801 to SC810 execute the same processing as steps SC501 to SC510 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Figure 185) in the 21st embodiment described above, and steps SC814 to SC817 execute the same processing as steps SC515 to SC518 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Figure 185) in the 21st embodiment described above.

If the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the first to third time-saving results (step SC804: YES) and the current game state is the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C (step SC808: YES), it is determined whether the current game round is the final game round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has not yet entered a latent state or the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has entered a latent state is one, and it is determined whether the current game round has been started (step SC811). In addition, the sound and light side MPU 93 can determine whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, and whether the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in a latent state in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, based on the state designation command received from the main side MPU 82. Furthermore, it can determine whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is in its final game state based on the number of times that a change command is received after receiving a state designation command corresponding to the start of the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, and it can determine whether the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue is one based on the number of times that a change command is received after receiving a state designation command corresponding to the start of the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

If a positive judgment is made in step SC811, it means that the current game round has started in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, but when the current game round ends, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will start anew, triggered by the current first to third time-saving results. In this case, a process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SC809). In the process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication, as in the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern row Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the combination of the first time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the combination of the second time-saving occurrence patterns ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the combination of the third time-saving occurrence patterns ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for the time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third time-saving occurrence patterns selected as described above is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. Also, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC810).

If a negative judgment is made in step SC811, a process for determining a stop pattern for a latent suggestion is executed (step SC812). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a latent suggestion, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first latent occurrence pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second latent occurrence pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third latent occurrence pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In the process for determining a stop pattern for a latent suggestion, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combinations of the first to third latent occurrence patterns selected as described above are determined by lottery. Then, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC813).

As described above, if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in the latent state, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is overwritten with the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues that corresponds to the time-saving result that has occurred this time. This makes it possible to prevent the first to third time-saving results from being invalidated if the first to third time-saving results occur while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in the latent state.

When the first to third time-saving results occur during the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C and the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is overwritten with the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues that corresponds to the currently occurring time-saving result, the combination of symbols that has occurred in the latency state is displayed frozen as a result of the game round being stopped on the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the number of times the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues has been overwritten.

<Alternative to the twenty-second embodiment>
(1) The number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is less than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is the same as the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, and the number of times the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is greater than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, but the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C continue may be any number. For example, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C continue may all be less than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, may be greater than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, or may be greater than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues. In addition, some of the third time-shortening states ST3A to ST3C may be configured to have a continuation number that is equal to or greater than the continuation number of the second time-shortening state ST2.

(2) When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the corresponding third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. However, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to that time-saving result may be newly started, or when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the manner in which the third time-shortening states ST3A to ST3C are hidden is different from that of the twenty-first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 190 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

As in the 21st embodiment, the main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a ceiling counter 325, a time-saving target counter 371, a time-saving continuation counter 375, a time-saving state counter 386, and a third time-saving standby counter 387. The main RAM 84 is also provided with a standby target counter 395.

The standby target counter 395 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent in the time-saving states ST1-ST3C. When the value of the standby target counter 395 is "1", the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent. When the value of the standby target counter 395 is "2", the third B time-saving state ST3B is latent. When the value of the standby target counter 395 is "3", the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent.

When a new latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs and a value is set in the standby target counter 395, the continuation number corresponding to the type of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that is the new latent target is set in the third time-saving standby counter 387. As in the 21st embodiment, the information on the continuation number set in the third time-saving standby counter 387 is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed in the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C. Then, in a situation where information on one or more continuation numbers is stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387, when another time-saving state ST1-ST3C that was the target for execution ends, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is executed for the remaining continuation number stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387 at that time.

Figure 191 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SC901: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC902). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SC902: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SC903. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SC902: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more to determine whether the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SC903). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SC903: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SC904), the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SC905), and the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386 is executed (step SC906). In the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386, if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50", if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100", and if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result, the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130". As a result, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. In addition, in step SC905, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", but if the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", a process is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, as in the above fifteenth embodiment, and a process is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal to a HI level.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SC907). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SC903: YES), the standby setting process is executed (step SC908). Figure 192 is a flowchart showing the standby setting process.

If the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result (step SD101: YES), it is determined whether the value of the standby target counter 395 is 2 or more (step SD102). In other words, it is determined whether the third B time-saving state ST3B or the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent. If the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not latent or the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent (step SD102: NO), the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "50" (step SD103), and the standby target counter 395 is set to "1" (step SD104). As a result, if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not latent, the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent, and if the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the third standby target counter 387 is reset to the number of times the third A time-saving state ST3A continues.

If the game result of the current game round is the second time-saving result (step SD105: YES), it is determined whether the value of the standby target counter 395 is "3" (step SD106). In other words, it is determined whether the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent. If the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not latent, or if the third A time-saving state ST3A or the third B time-saving state ST3B is latent (step SD106: NO), the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "100" (step SD107), and the standby target counter 395 is set to "2" (step SD108). As a result, if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not latent or if the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the third B time-saving state ST3B is latent, and if the third B time-saving state ST3B is latent, the number of times the third B time-saving state ST3B continues is reset in the third standby target counter 387.

If the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SD105: NO), the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "130" (step SD109), and the standby target counter 395 is set to "3" (step SD110). As a result, if the third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C are not latent or if the third A time-saving state ST3A or the third B time-saving state ST3B is latent, the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent, and if the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the third standby target counter 387 is reset to the number of times the third C time-saving state ST3C will continue.

That is, in this embodiment, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C are set with a priority when they become a latent target. Specifically, the third time-saving state ST3C, which has the highest number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, has the highest priority, the third time-saving state ST3B, which has the second highest number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, has the second highest priority, and the third time-saving state ST3A, which has the lowest number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, has the lowest priority. Therefore, when a game round corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A or the third time-saving state ST3B is latent, the latent target is changed to the third time-saving state ST3C, and when a game round corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A is latent, the latent target is changed to the third time-saving state ST3B. However, since the support mode of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are all the second high-frequency support mode, even if the type of the latent target 3rd time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is changed, the support mode of the latent target 3rd time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not changed, and only the number of continuations is changed. Also, even if a game round corresponding to the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result is executed in a situation where the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the first and second time-saving results are invalidated, and even if a game round corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed in a situation where the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent, the first time-saving result is invalidated.

In the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 191), after executing the standby setting process (step SC908), it is determined whether or not the information of the third time-saving standby counter 387 has been set in the standby setting process (step SC909). Note that in the standby setting process (FIG. 192), when the process of step SD103, step SD107, or step SD109 is executed, the corresponding information is set in the register of the main MPU 82, so it is determined in step SC909 whether or not the information has been set.

If information has not been set to the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SC909: NO), that is, if the current time-saving result is invalidated, the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated. On the other hand, if information has been set to the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SC909: YES), a state designation command transmission process is executed (step SC907). In this transmission process, if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not latent and the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C occurs, a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has occurred is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the latent target. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not an execution target but is in a latent state. In addition, in the transmission process, when the type of the latent target third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is changed or the number of times the latent target third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues is reset, a state designation command indicating that the latent reset of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has occurred is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to perform an effect indicating that the latent reset of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the target of the latent reset. This allows the player to recognize that the latent reset of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has occurred.

Figure 193 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. Note that the process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side MPU 82.

Steps SD201 to SD210 execute the same processing as steps SC501 to SC510 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (FIG. 185) in the 21st embodiment described above, and steps SD216 to SD219 execute the same processing as steps SC515 to SC518 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (FIG. 185) in the 21st embodiment described above.

If the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the first to third time-saving results (step SD204: YES) and the current game state is the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C (step SD208: YES), it is determined whether the current game round is the final game round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has not yet entered a latent state or the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has entered a latent state is one, and it is determined whether the current game round has been started (step SD211). In addition, the sound and light side MPU 93 can determine whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, and whether the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in a latent state in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, based on the state designation command received from the main side MPU 82. Furthermore, it can determine whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is in its final game state based on the number of times that a change command is received after receiving a state designation command corresponding to the start of the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, and it can determine whether the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue is one based on the number of times that a change command is received after receiving a state designation command corresponding to the start of the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

If step SD211 is judged positive, it means that the current game round has started in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, but when the current game round ends, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will start anew triggered by the current first to third time-saving results. In this case, a process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SD209). In the process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication, as in the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern row Z1-Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the combination of the first time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the combination of the second time-saving occurrence patterns ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the combination of the third time-saving occurrence patterns ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop symbols for time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third time-saving occurrence symbols selected as described above is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. Also, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SD210).

If a negative judgment is made in step SD211, a latent judgment process is executed to judge whether or not a setting related to latent occurs in the main MPU 82 (step SD212). In the latent judgment process, first, it is judged whether or not latent of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C occurs. Specifically, it is judged whether or not the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is to be executed when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is the final play round, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not latent when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is not the final play round, or the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue will be 0 when the current play round ends. It is also judged whether or not the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is to be changed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third time-saving result occurs when the third A time-saving state ST3A or the third B time-saving state STB is latent, or the second time-saving result occurs when the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent. It is also determined whether or not the information on the number of continuations is reset to the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main MPU 82. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first time-saving result occurs when the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the second time-saving result occurs when the third B time-saving state ST3B is latent, or the third time-saving result occurs when the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent.

When it is determined in the latent judgment process that a setting related to latent occurs in the main MPU 82 (step SD213: YES), a stop pattern determination process for latent suggestion is executed (step SD214). In the latent suggestion stop pattern determination process, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first latent occurrence pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second latent occurrence pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third latent occurrence pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the symbols to be stopped for latent indication, the pay lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third symbols selected as described above is stopped are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SD215).

When it is determined in the latent judgment process that the setting for latent does not occur in the main MPU 82 (step SD213: NO), the current time-saving result is invalidated. Therefore, the stop pattern determination process for non-missed reach is executed (step SD206). In the stop pattern determination process for non-missed reach, as in the 21st embodiment, the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 are determined by lottery, and include the combination of patterns corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), the combination of patterns that cause latent hits ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and the combination of patterns other than the miss-reach pattern combination, that is, the non-missed-reach pattern combination. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SD207).

The stop result of the status suggestion area 43 determined in step SD207 may be changed depending on the type of the current time-saving result. For example, if the current time-saving result is the first time-saving result, green is selected as the stop result of the status suggestion area 43, if the current time-saving result is the second time-saving result, yellow is selected as the stop result of the status suggestion area 43, and if the current time-saving result is the third time-saving result, purple is selected as the stop result of the status suggestion area 43. This makes it possible to notify the type of the invalidated time-saving result by the stop result of the status suggestion area 43 even if the time-saving result is invalidated.

Figure 194 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD301). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD301: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes from step SD302 onward.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SD301: NO, step SD302: YES), i.e., if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, a subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386 (step SD303) and a subtraction process of the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SD304) are executed. In the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is subtracted by 1. In the subtraction process of the third time-saving standby counter 387, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more.

Here, since the processing of step SD304 is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the value of the time-saving state counter 386 decremented by 1 when one game turn is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the target of execution, but the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is also decremented by 1. Therefore, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the target of execution decremented by 1 when one game turn is executed, but the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is also decremented by 1.

The first time-saving state ST1 has a continuation count of 100 times, the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, the thirdA time-saving state ST3A has a continuation count of 50 times, the thirdB time-saving state ST3B has a continuation count of 100 times, and the thirdC time-saving state ST3C has a continuation count of 130 times. Therefore, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 may be 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C may be executed for the remaining continuation count stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387 following the previous time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 may become "0" midway through the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C may end without being executed.

After that, on the condition that the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is "0" (step SD305: YES), the standby target counter 395 in the main RAM 395 is cleared to "0" (step SD306). As a result, when the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues becomes "0", the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes not latent.

After that, by determining whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0", it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed has ended (step SD307). If the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SD307: YES), it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more (step SD308). If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more (step SD308: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in a latent state. In this case, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to the time-saving state counter 386 (step SD309), the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is cleared to "0" (step SD310), and the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" (step SD311). As a result, the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target for execution, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD314). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed to end, and for a performance indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started to be executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In addition, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD315). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0," the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is newly started.

If the value of the third time-saving waiting counter 387 is "0" (step SD308: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SD312). This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SD313), a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have ended and the transition to the normal game state has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD314), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD315).

As described above, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is set to have a priority as a target for latency, and when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in latency, if the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has a higher priority than the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result, the current time-saving result is invalidated, and if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result has a higher priority than the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, the latency target is switched to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result. This makes it possible to make the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C with a higher priority the latency target.

When a time-saving result corresponding to a third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C having a higher priority than the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs during the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C and the latency target third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is switched, the combination of latent patterns is stopped and displayed as a result of stopping the game round on the pattern display device 41. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the latency target third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has been switched.

When a time-saving result corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs during the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C and the number of continuations is reset in the third time-saving standby counter 387, the combination of symbols that has occurred in the latency state is displayed as a result of stopping the game round on the symbol display device 41. This allows the player to recognize that the number of continuations of the latency third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has been reset.

If a time-saving result corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C with a lower priority than the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs during the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C and the time-saving result is invalidated, a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3. A combination of non-missing symbols is also displayed when the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated despite having been selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in the case where a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to see the special chart display units 37a and 37b, it is possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

<Alternative to the 23rd embodiment>
(1) The number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is less than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is the same as the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, and the number of times the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is greater than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, but the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C continue may be any number. For example, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C continue may all be less than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, may be greater than the number of times the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, or may be greater than the number of times the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues. In addition, some of the third time-shortening states ST3A to ST3C may be configured to have a continuation number that is equal to or greater than the continuation number of the second time-shortening state ST2.

(2) When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the corresponding third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. However, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to that time-saving result may be newly started, or when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated.

(3) The priority of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C as targets for incubation is configured as follows: the third time-saving state ST3C is the highest, the third time-saving state ST3B is the next highest, and the third time-saving state ST3A is the lowest; however, this is not limited to the above, and the third time-saving state ST3A may be configured as the highest, the third time-saving state ST3B is the next highest, and the third time-saving state ST3C is the lowest, or the third time-saving state ST3B is configured as the highest, the third time-saving state ST3C is the next highest, and the third time-saving state ST3A is the lowest.

<Twenty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the standby setting process executed in step SC908 in the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 191) is different from that of the 23rd embodiment. The configuration different from the 23rd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 23rd embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 195 is a flowchart showing the standby setting process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that in this embodiment, the standby target counter 395 is not provided in the main RAM 84.

If the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result (step SD401: YES), it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is equal to or greater than the value of the number of times the third-A time-saving state ST3A corresponding to the first time-saving result continues (step SD402). If the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not in a latent state or if the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is less than the number of times the third-A time-saving state ST3A continues (step SD402: NO), the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "50", which corresponds to the number of times the third-A time-saving state ST3A continues (step SD403). As a result, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, which has a number of times of 50, becomes in a latent state.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SD402, this standby setting process is terminated without executing the process of step SD403. Therefore, if the first time-saving result occurs in a situation where the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is equal to or greater than the number of times that the thirdA time-saving state ST3A continues, the current first time-saving result is invalidated without any settings being made for the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

If the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result (step SD404: YES), it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is equal to or greater than the value of the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3B corresponding to the second time-saving result continues (step SD405). If the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not in a latent state, or if the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is less than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3B continues (step SD405: NO), the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "100" corresponding to the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3B continues (step SD406). As a result, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, which has a number of times of 100, becomes in a latent state.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SD405, this standby setting process is terminated without executing the process of step SD406. Therefore, if a second time-saving result occurs in a situation where the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is equal to or greater than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3B continues, the current second time-saving result is invalidated without any settings being made for the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

If the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SD404: NO), the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to "130", which corresponds to the number of times the third time-saving state ST3B has continued (step SD407). This puts the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, which has a continuation number of 130 times, into a latent state.

With the above configuration, when a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in the latent state, if the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues is less than the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues corresponding to the currently occurring time-saving result, the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues corresponding to the currently occurring time-saving result is set in the third time-saving standby counter 387. As a result, when the first to third time-saving results occur while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is in the latent state, it is possible to maximize the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues.

In the process of determining the variation pattern (Fig. 193), similarly to the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results occurs during the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the execution target in response to the first to third time-saving results, a process of determining a stop pattern for suggesting time-saving (step SD209) is executed, and red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SD210), and the first to third time-saving If the result triggers the setting of the number of continuations to the third time-saving waiting counter 387, a process for determining a stop pattern for a latent indication (step SD214) is executed and red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SD210), and if the first to third time-saving results are invalidated, a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach (step SD206) is executed and blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SD207).

<Twenty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the type of the third time-saving state is different from that of the twenty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-third embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-third embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 196 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode in this embodiment.

As in the 23rd embodiment, when the normal play win/loss determination process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not the normal play will be released, there are a high probability mode on the normal play side and a low probability mode on the normal play side as the determination modes. In the low probability mode on the normal play side, the probability of winning the electric role release in one normal play win/loss determination process is 1/2, while in the high probability mode on the normal play side, the probability of winning the electric role release in one normal play win/loss determination process is 4/5.

When the normal map hit/miss judgment process is executed, the display of the changing pattern will start on the normal map display unit 38a. In this case, the normal map change period, which is the duration of the change display round during which the changing display of the pattern is executed on the normal map display unit 38a, is a long period, a medium period, and a short period, which are different periods. The long period is 10 seconds, the medium period is 5 seconds, and the short period is 1 second. The shorter the period, the shorter the shortest period between one normal power open state and the next normal power open state, so when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously launched in the same manner into the game area, the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state per unit time will be relatively high.

The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the variable periods of the normal map are fixed, and instead of a situation in which a long-term setting, a medium-term setting, and a short-term setting are each set, a configuration may be used in which a situation in which the average period is the longest when a period is selected by lottery from among multiple types of periods, a situation in which the average period is the next longest, and a situation in which the average period is the shortest are set. This is similar to other embodiments.

When the normal map display section 38a ends a change display round, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process that triggered the execution of the change display round. In this case, if the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a miss, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the miss result, and no transition to the normal power open state occurs. If the normal map side reserved information is stored in the normal map reserved area 84c, a new normal map hit/miss judgment process is executed on the reserved information on the normal map side, and a new change display round is started in the normal map display section 38a. On the other hand, if the result of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a result corresponding to a win in the electric role release, the normal map display section 38a displays a stop result corresponding to the win result, and a transition to the normal power open state occurs.

As execution modes of the normal power opening state, there are a high expectation mode, a medium expectation mode, and a low expectation mode so that the expectation of the game ball entering the normal power role 34a is different. In the low expectation mode, a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As in the first embodiment, the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, so when a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once, the game ball does not enter the second operating port 34 basically, and even if it does, the number of balls that enter is about one. In addition, the normal power opening state also ends when the number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal power side. However, when a short opening occurs once, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is about one, so the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side will not enter the second operating port 34.

In the medium expectation mode, the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs twice. The long opening lasts for two seconds. Since the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, when the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, about three game balls can enter the second operating port 34. In the normal power opening state of the medium expectation mode, the long opening occurs twice, with an interval period (specifically, one second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in a closed state. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the medium expectation mode occurs, about six game balls can enter the second operating port 34. As mentioned above, the normal power open state also ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit on the normal power side. However, if a long open occurs twice, as mentioned above, even if game balls enter the second operating port 34, it will only be around 6 balls, so the upper limit on the normal power side will not be reached in the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long opening is two seconds. Since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, when the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, about three game balls can enter the second operating port 34. In the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times, with an interval period (specifically, one second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in a closed state. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter the second operating port 34. As described above, the normal power opening state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit number on the normal power side, which is 10. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, an event may occur in which the normal power opening state ends when the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side enters the second operating port 34.

In the configuration in which the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process, the fluctuation period of the normal map in the normal map display unit 38a, and the execution mode of the normal power open state are set as described above, the support modes are set as low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode, third high-frequency support mode, fourth high-frequency support mode, and fifth high-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is long, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a low-expectation mode in which one short opening occurs. In the first high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a high-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high-expectation mode in which three long openings occur. In the second high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low-probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high-expectation mode in which three long openings occur. In the third high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low probability mode on the normal map side, the normal map fluctuation period is a medium period, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a medium expectation mode in which two long opens occur. In the fourth high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low probability mode on the normal map side, the normal map fluctuation period is a short period, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a medium expectation mode in which two long opens occur. In the fifth high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map hit/miss judgment process is a low probability mode on the normal map side, the normal map fluctuation period is a medium period, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high expectation mode in which three long opens occur.

When the launch of game balls continues in the same manner so that a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs, the expectation of the proportion of the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 being in an open state per unit time is highest in the first high frequency support mode, next highest in the second high frequency support mode, next highest in the fifth high frequency support mode, next highest in the fourth high frequency support mode, next highest in the third high frequency support mode, and lowest in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the low frequency support mode, the execution mode of the normal power open state is a low expectation mode, so in the low frequency support mode, almost no game balls enter the second operating port 34, whereas in the first to fifth high frequency support modes, the execution mode of the normal power open state is a medium expectation mode or a high expectation mode, so in the first to fifth high frequency support modes, it can be expected that game balls will enter the second operating port 34 more than the upper limit number of second reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 112.

Figure 196 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state set in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment, the game states include a normal game state, a high probability state, a first time-saving state ST1, and a second time-saving state ST2. In addition to these, there are also a third A time-saving state ST41, a third B time-saving state ST42, and a third C time-saving state ST43.

The 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 have different types of support modes. Specifically, the 3A time-saving state ST41 is the third high-frequency support mode, the 3B time-saving state ST42 is the fourth high-frequency support mode, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 is the fifth high-frequency support mode. In addition, the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 have different end conditions. Specifically, the 3A time-saving state ST41 ends and becomes the normal game state when 50 game rounds have been played, the 3B time-saving state ST42 ends and becomes the normal game state when 100 game rounds have been played, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 ends and becomes the normal game state when 130 game rounds have been played.

As described above, if the game balls are continuously shot in the same manner so that the balls enter the through gate 35, the expected rate of the open state of the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 per unit time is 5th high frequency support mode > 4th high frequency support mode > 3rd high frequency support mode. Therefore, among the 3rd time-saving states ST41 to 43, the 3rd time-saving state ST43 is the most advantageous, the 3rd time-saving state ST42 is the next most advantageous, and the 3rd time-saving state ST41 is the least advantageous. Note that the 3rd time-saving states ST41 to ST43 are forcibly terminated when the opening/closing execution mode is executed in response to a jackpot result, just like the 1st time-saving state ST1 and the 2nd time-saving state ST2.

The 3A time-saving state ST41 is set at the end of the game in which the win/loss determination process and the time-saving allocation determination process are executed when the win/loss determination process (step S805) determines the time-saving result and the first time-saving allocation determination process (step S811) is executed thereafter. The 3B time-saving state ST42 is set at the end of the game in which the win/loss determination process and the time-saving allocation determination process are executed when the win/loss determination process (step S805) determines the time-saving result and the second time-saving allocation determination process (step S811) is executed thereafter. The 3C time-saving state ST43 is set at the end of the game in which the win/loss determination process and the time-saving allocation determination process are executed when the win/loss determination process (step S805) determines the time-saving result and the third time-saving allocation determination process (step S811) is executed thereafter.

When the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1 as in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "2", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2 as in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment. Also, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", it corresponds to the 3A time-saving state ST41, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "4", it corresponds to the 3B time-saving state ST42, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "5", it corresponds to the 3C time-saving state ST43.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", that is, when the 3A time-saving state ST41 is in effect, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the medium period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display. Also, in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, instead of step S509, a process of setting the normal open counter to "2" is executed as a control process for the normal power open state, and steps S510 and S511 are executed, causing the normal power open state to become a medium expectation mode.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "4", that is, when it is in the 3B time-saving state ST42, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display. Also, in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, instead of step S509, a process of setting the normal open counter to "2" is executed as a control process of the normal power open state, and steps S510 and S511 are executed, so that the normal power open state becomes a medium expectation mode.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "5", that is, when it is in the 3C time-saving state ST43, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the medium period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display. In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

Figure 197 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SD501: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD502). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD502: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SD503. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SD502: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more, and the current game state is determined to be one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST43 (step SD503). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SD503: NO), that is, the game state is the normal game state, and if the game result of this game is the first time-saving result (step SD504: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD505), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50" (step SD506). As a result, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third A time-saving state ST41. Also, if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result (step SD507: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "4", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD508), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100" (step SD509). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3B time-saving state ST42. Also, if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SD507: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "5", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD510), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130" (step SD512). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3C time-saving state ST43.

When the processing of step SD506, step SD509, or step SD511 is executed, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SD512). If the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", similar to the 15th embodiment described above, processing is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration for the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and processing is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to a HI level for the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD513). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 and a presentation indicating the type of the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SD503: YES), a standby setting process is executed (step SD514). The contents of the standby setting process are the same as those of the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment. Even in this embodiment, the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 has a priority when it is a latent target. Specifically, the third time-saving state ST43, which has the most advantageous support mode and the greatest number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, has the highest priority, the third time-saving state ST42, which has the second advantageous support mode and the second greatest number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, has the second highest priority, and the third time-saving state ST41, which has the least advantageous support mode and the least number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, has the lowest priority. Therefore, when a game round corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed in a situation where the third A time-saving state ST41 or the third B time-saving state ST42 is latent, the latent target is changed to the third C time-saving state ST43, and when a game round corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed in a situation where the third A time-saving state ST41 is latent, the latent target is changed to the third B time-saving state ST42. Also, even if a game round corresponding to the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result is executed in a situation where the third C time-saving state ST43 is latent, the first and second time-saving results are invalidated, and even if a game round corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed in a situation where the third B time-saving state ST42 is latent, the first time-saving result is invalidated.

In the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 197), after executing the standby setting process (step SD514), it is determined whether or not information on the third time-saving standby counter 387 has been set in the standby setting process (step SD515). If information has not been set in the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SD515: NO), i.e., if the current time-saving result has been invalidated, the time-saving result setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the information of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set (step SD515: YES), a state designation command transmission process is executed (step SD513). In this transmission process, when the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 is not latent and the latent state of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 occurs, a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 has occurred is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the latent state of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 has occurred and a performance indicating the type of the latent state of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43. This enables the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 is not a target for execution but is latent. In addition, in the transmission process, when the type of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 that is the target of the latency is changed or the number of times that the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 that is the target of the latency is reset, a state designation command indicating that the latency of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latency of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 has been reset and an effect indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 that is the target of the latency reset. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the latency of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 has been reset.

In this embodiment, the sound/light side MPU 93 executes the process of determining the variation pattern in the same manner as in the 23rd embodiment. In other words, if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results has started in the time-saving states ST1 to ST43, but the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 is newly started with the first to third time-saving results as a trigger when the current game round ends, the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SD209). In the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, as in the 23rd embodiment, the combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second time-saving pattern combination ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third time-saving pattern combination ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combinations of the first to third time-saving patterns selected as described above are determined by lottery. In addition, red is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SD210).

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST43, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and a setting related to latent play occurs in the main MPU 82, a process for determining a stop pattern for latent play is executed (step SD214). In the process for determining a stop pattern for latent play, a combination of latent play patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving play result, the first latent play pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving play result, the second latent play pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving play result, the third latent play pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the symbols to be stopped for indicating latent occurrence, the pay lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third symbols to be stopped and displayed as selected above are determined by lottery. Also, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SD215).

In the time-saving state ST1 to ST43, when the game corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and the current time-saving result is invalidated, a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach is executed (step SD206). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach, as in the 21st embodiment, the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 are determined by lottery, and include a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), a combination of patterns that are latent occurrences ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and a combination of patterns other than the combination of patterns that are a miss reach, that is, a combination of patterns that are not a miss reach pattern. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SD207).

Figure 198 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD601). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD601: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes from step SD602 onward.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SD601: NO, step SD602: YES), i.e., if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST43, a subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386 (step SD603) and a subtraction process of the third time-saving standby counter 387 (step SD604) are executed. In the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is subtracted by 1. In the subtraction process of the third time-saving standby counter 387, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more.

Here, since the processing of step SD604 is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST43, when the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 are latent, not only is the value of the time-saving state counter 386 decremented by 1 when one game turn is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST43 that are the target of execution, but the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is also decremented by 1. Therefore, when the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 are latent, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 to ST43 that are the target of execution decremented by 1 when one game turn is executed, but the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 is also decremented by 1.

The first time-saving state ST1 has a continuation count of 100 times, the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, the third-A time-saving state ST41 has a continuation count of 50 times, and the third-B time-saving state ST
Since the third C time-saving state ST42 has a continuation count of 100 times and the third C time-saving state ST43 has a continuation count of 130 times, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 becomes latent, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST43 to be executed is ended, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 may be 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 may be executed for the remaining continuation count stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387 in succession to the previous time-saving state ST1 to ST43, and a situation may also occur in which the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 becomes “0” midway through the time-saving state ST1 to ST43 to be executed, and the latent third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 ends without becoming a target for execution.

After that, on the condition that the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is "0" (step SD605: YES), the standby target counter 395 in the main RAM 395 is cleared to "0" (step SD606). As a result, when the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 continues becomes "0", the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 becomes not latent.

After that, by determining whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0", it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST43 to be executed has ended (step SD607). If the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SD607: YES), it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more (step SD608). If the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more (step SD608: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 is in a latent state. In this case, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is set to the time-saving state counter 386 (step SD609), the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is cleared to "0" (step SD610), and the value obtained by adding "2" to the value of the standby target counter 395 is set to the time-saving target counter 371 (step SD611). As a result, the latent third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 becomes the execution target, and the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387. After that, the standby target counter 395 is cleared to "0" (step SD612).

When the 3A time-saving state ST41 is latent, the value of the waiting target counter 395 is "1", when the 3B time-saving state ST42 is latent, the value of the waiting target counter 395 is "2", and when the 3C time-saving state ST43 is latent, the value of the waiting target counter 395 is "3". Therefore, in step SD611, the value of the waiting target counter 395 is added to "2" and the result is set to the time-saving target counter 371. When the latent 3A time-saving state ST41 becomes the execution target, the value of the time-saving target counter 371 becomes "3", when the latent 3B time-saving state ST42 becomes the execution target, the value of the time-saving target counter 371 becomes "4", and when the latent 3C time-saving state ST43 becomes the execution target, the value of the time-saving target counter 371 becomes "5".

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST41-ST43 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD615). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the target time-saving state ST1-ST43 to end and the latent third time-saving state ST41-ST43 to start to be performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In addition, it clears the time-saving continuation counter 375 to "0" (step SD616). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0," the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 is newly started.

If the value of the third time-saving waiting counter 387 is "0" (step SD608: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SD613). This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the end of the time-saving in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SD614), a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST43 have ended and the transition to the normal game state has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD615), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD616).

As described above, the multiple types of third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 not only differ in the number of continuations that are the end conditions, but also in the support modes. This makes it possible to diversify the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43.

A priority is set for the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 as a target for latency, and when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed while the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 is in latency, if the latency of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 has a higher priority than the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 corresponding to the currently occurring time-saving result, the currently occurring time-saving result is invalidated, and if the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 corresponding to the currently occurring time-saving result has a higher priority than the latency of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43, the latency target is switched to the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 corresponding to the currently occurring time-saving result. This makes it possible to make the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43, which has a higher priority, the latency target.

Of the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, the third time-saving state ST43, which has the highest support mode advantage, has the highest priority, the third time-saving state ST42, which has the next highest support mode advantage, has the next highest priority, and the third time-saving state ST41, which has the lowest support mode advantage, has the lowest priority. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, which have relatively high advantages, to be executed.

When a time-saving result corresponding to a third time-saving state ST41-ST43 with a higher priority than the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 occurs during the latency of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 and the latency target third time-saving state ST41-ST43 is switched, the combination of latent patterns is displayed as a result of stopping the game round on the pattern display device 41. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the latency target third time-saving state ST41-ST43 has been switched.

When a time-saving result corresponding to the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 occurs during the latency of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 and the number of continuations is reset in the third time-saving standby counter 387, the combination of latent patterns is displayed as a result of stopping the game round on the pattern display device 41. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the number of continuations of the latent third time-saving state ST41-ST43 has been reset.

If a time-saving result corresponding to the third time-saving state ST41-ST43, which has a lower priority than the third time-saving state ST41-ST43, occurs during latency in the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 and the time-saving result is invalidated, a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed on each of the active lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3. A combination of non-missing symbols is also displayed when the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated despite having been selected.

In the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43, even if a combination of non-missing symbols that is displayed as a stop result even when the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 as described above, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In other words, in the case of a time-saving result that does not trigger the setting of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43, blue is displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of a miss result, red is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in a situation where the special chart display units 37a and 37b are difficult to see for the manager of the game hall, if a combination of non-missing symbols is displayed as a stop result on each of the active lines L1 to L5 of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41, it becomes possible to know whether it is a time-saving result or a miss result by checking the state suggestion area 43.

<Alternative to the twenty-fifth embodiment>
(1) The third A time-saving state ST41, the third B time-saving state ST42, and the third C time-saving state ST43 are configured to have different types of support modes and different continuation counts that serve as termination conditions, but this is not limited to the above, and the third A time-saving state ST41, the third B time-saving state ST42, and the third C time-saving state ST43 may be configured to have different types of support modes but the same continuation count that serves as an termination condition.

(2) Of the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43, the 3C time-saving state ST43 in which the support mode is most advantageous has the greatest number of continuations, but this is not limited thereto, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 in which the support mode is most advantageous may have the fewest number of continuations, or the 3A time-saving state ST41 in which the support mode is least advantageous may have the greatest number of continuations.

(3) The termination conditions for the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 are all configured to be that a number of game rounds that trigger the termination are executed, but the termination conditions for the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 may be that a number of small win results that trigger the termination are generated, and the number of times that trigger the termination is different for each of the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the manner in which the third time-shortening states ST3A to ST3C are hidden is different from that of the twenty-first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 199 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

As in the 21st embodiment, the main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a ceiling counter 325, a time-saving target counter 371, a time-saving continuation counter 375, and a time-saving state counter 386. In addition, instead of the third time-saving standby counter 387, the main RAM 84 is provided with a third A time-saving standby counter 401, a third B time-saving standby counter 402, and a third C time-saving standby counter 403.

The 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 82 that the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C and the remaining number of times that the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A will continue. The 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 82 that the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C and the remaining number of times that the latent 3B time-saving state ST3B will continue. The 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 82 that the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C and the remaining number of times that the latent 3C time-saving state ST3C will continue.

The information on the number of continuations set in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401, the information on the number of continuations set in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, and the information on the number of continuations set in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. When one of the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 stores information on one or more continuations and another time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that was the target of execution ends, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that stores information on one or more continuations becomes the target of execution, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the target of execution is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the corresponding time-saving standby counters 401 to 403. In addition, when multiple time-saving standby counters 401-403 store information on one or more continuation counts, if another time-saving state ST1-ST3C that was the target of execution ends, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C with the higher priority among the third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C corresponding to the time-saving standby counters 401-403 that store information on one or more continuation counts becomes the target of execution, and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the target of execution is executed for the remaining continuation counts stored in the corresponding time-saving standby counters 401-403.

Figure 200 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SD701: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD702). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD702: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SD703. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SD702: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or greater to determine whether the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SD703). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SD703: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD704), and the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SD705). If the outer end flag is set to "1" when the time-saving feature occurs, similar to the 15th embodiment described above, processing is performed on the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, and processing is performed on the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to a HI level.

After that, if the game result of the current game round is the first time-saving result (step SD706: YES), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50" (step SD707). Also, if the game result of the current game round is the second time-saving result (step SD708: YES), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100" (step SD709). Also, if the game result of the current game round is the third time-saving result (step SD708: NO), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130" (step SD710). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

When the processing of step SD707, step SD709, or step SD710 is executed, a state designation command indicating a transition from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD711). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating a transition from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SD703: YES), and if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result (step SD712: YES), set the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 to "50" (step SD713). As a result, in a situation where the 3A time-saving state ST3A is not latent, the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent due to the first time-saving result, and in a situation where the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is reset to the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 due to the first time-saving result. Also, if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result (step SD714: YES), set the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 to "100" (step SD715). As a result, in a situation where the 3B time-saving state ST3B is not latent, the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent due to the second time-saving result, and in a situation where the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent, the second time-saving result is triggered and the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is reset to the 3B time-saving standby counter 402. Also, if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SD714: NO), the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to "130" (step SD716). As a result, in a situation where the 3C time-saving state ST3C is not latent, the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent due to the third time-saving result, and in a situation where the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the third time-saving result is triggered and the number of times the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is reset to the 3C time-saving standby counter 403.

When the processing of step SD713, step SD715, or step SD716 is executed, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD711). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is still latent.

When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the high probability state, the time-saving result is invalidated without transition to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by the time-saving result, or the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, as in the 21st embodiment described above.

In this embodiment, the processing contents of the process of determining the variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU 93 are the same as the process of determining the variation pattern in the 22nd embodiment (Fig. 189). In other words, if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results has started in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A, but the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is newly started with the first to third time-saving results as a trigger when the current game round ends, a process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SC809). In the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second time-saving pattern combination ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third time-saving pattern combination ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combination of the first to third time-saving patterns selected as described above are determined by lottery. In addition, red is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC810).

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and a setting related to latency occurs in the main MPU 82, a process for determining a stop pattern for latency suggestion is executed (step SC812). In the process for determining a stop pattern for latency suggestion, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first latent occurrence pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second latent occurrence pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third latent occurrence pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop symbols for latent indication, the pay lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third latent occurrence symbols selected as described above is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SC813).

In the time-saving state ST1 to ST3A, when the game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and the current time-saving result is invalidated because the game state is a high probability state, a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach is executed (step SC806). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach, the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 are determined by lottery, and include a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), a combination of patterns that are latent occurrences ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and a combination of patterns other than the combination of patterns that are a miss reach, that is, a non-missed reach pattern combination. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC807).

Figure 201 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progression process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD801). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SD801: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes from step SD802 onward.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SD801: NO, step SD802: YES), that is, if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386 (step SD803), the subtraction process of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 (step SD804), the subtraction process of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 (step SD805), and the subtraction process of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 (step SD806) are executed. In the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is subtracted by 1. In the subtraction process of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401, the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is 1 or more. In the subtraction process of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more. In the subtraction process of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403, the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more.

Here, since the processing of steps SD804 to SD806 is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the value of the time-saving state counter 386 decremented by 1 when one play is performed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the subject of execution, but the values of the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 corresponding to the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are also decremented by 1. Therefore, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the subject of execution decremented by 1 when one play is performed, but the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is also decremented by 1.

The first time-saving state ST1 has a continuation count of 100 times, the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, the third-A time-saving state ST3A has a continuation count of 50 times, the third-B time-saving state ST3B has a continuation count of 100 times, and the third-C time-saving state ST3C has a continuation count of 130 times. Therefore, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends, the time-saving standby counters 401 to 4 A situation may occur in which the value of .03 is 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is executed following the previous time-saving state ST1-ST3C for the remaining number of continuations stored in the corresponding time-saving standby counters 401-403, and a situation may also occur in which the value of the time-saving standby counters 401-403 becomes "0" midway through the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends without becoming the target for execution.

Then, by judging whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0", it is judged whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed has ended (step SD807). If the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SD807: YES), it is judged whether the value of any of the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 is 1 or more (step SD808). If the value of any of the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 is 1 or more (step SD808: YES), it means that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent. In this case, the third time-saving setting process is executed (step SD809). FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the third time-saving setting process.

First, it is determined whether the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more (step SD901). Then, if the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more (step SD901: YES), the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to the time-saving state counter 375 (step SD902), and the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is cleared to "0" (step SD903). As a result, the 3C time-saving state ST3C that was in the latent state becomes the execution target, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403. In this case, the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 and the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 are not cleared to "0", so that if at least one of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 and the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 has a value of 1 or more, that state is maintained.

If the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is "0" (step SD901: NO), it is determined whether the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more (step SD904). Then, if the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more (step SD904: YES), the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is set to the time-saving state counter 375 (step SD905), and the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is cleared to "0" (step SD906). As a result, the 3B time-saving state ST3B that was in the dormant state becomes the execution target, and the 3B time-saving state ST3B is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402. In this case, the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is not cleared to "0", so if the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is 1 or more, that state is maintained.

If the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is "0" (step SD904: NO), this means that among the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403, only the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is equal to or greater than 1. In this case, the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is set in the time-saving state counter 375 (step SD907), and the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is cleared to "0" (step SD908). As a result, the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A becomes the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST3A is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401.

When the processing of step SD903, step SD906, or step SD908 is executed, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" (step SD909). As a result, the execution mode of the support mode corresponds to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

In other words, in this embodiment, each of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C can be a target for latency at the same time, but when multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are in a latency state and the target time-saving state ST1 to ST3C ends, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that switches from latency to the target for execution is determined according to the priority at the time of latency activation. Specifically, the third time-saving state ST3C, which has the greatest number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, has the highest priority, the third time-saving state ST3B, which has the second greatest number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, has the next highest priority, and the third time-saving state ST3A, which has the least number of continuations among the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, has the lowest priority. Therefore, when the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent, even if the 3A time-saving state ST3A or the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent before the 3C time-saving state ST3C, the 3C time-saving state ST3C is the first to be executed. Also, when the 3C time-saving state ST3C is not latent and the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent, even if the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent before the 3B time-saving state ST3B, the 3B time-saving state ST3B is the first to be executed. Also, the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A is the first to be executed on the condition that the 3B time-saving state ST3B and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are not latent.

In the time-saving progress process (Fig. 201), after executing the third time-saving setting process (step SD809), a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD812). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed has ended and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started. In addition, it clears the time-saving continuation counter 375 to "0" (step SD813). Since the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0", the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is newly started.

If the values of the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 are all "0" (step SD808: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SD810). This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SD811), a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have ended and transition to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SD812), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SD813).

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 203, the manner in which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent will be explained using the relationship with the first time-saving state ST1 as an example. FIG. 203(a) shows the period when the first time-saving state ST1 is the target for execution, FIG. 203(b) shows the period when the third A time-saving state ST3A is the target for execution, FIG. 203(c) shows the period when the third B time-saving state ST3B is the target for execution, FIG. 203(d) shows the period when the third C time-saving state ST3C is the target for execution, FIG. 203(e) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends, FIG. 203(f) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends, FIG. 203(g) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the third time-saving result ends, FIG. 203(h) shows the period when the value of the third A time-saving standby counter 401 is 1 or more, FIG. 203(i) shows the period when the value of the third B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more, and FIG. 203(j) shows the period when the value of the third C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more.

First, let us explain the first example pattern.

At time t1, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R low probability result ends, and the first time-saving state ST1 begins as shown in FIG. 203(a). After that, at time t2, which is midway through the first time-saving state ST1, the game round corresponding to the third time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(g). In this case, the number of times the third C time-saving state ST3C continues is set in the third C time-saving standby counter 403 as shown in FIG. 203(j), and the third C time-saving state ST3C enters a latent state.

After that, at timing t3, which is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and in a situation where the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 203(h), the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is set in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401, and the 3A time-saving state ST3A goes into a latent state. In other words, in this situation, the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3C time-saving state ST3C go into a latent state.

After that, at timing t4, which is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and in which both the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are latent, the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 203(i), the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is set in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, and the 3B time-saving state ST3B goes into a latent state. In other words, in this situation, the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C go into a latent state.

After that, at the timing of t5, the first time-saving state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 203(a). In this case, the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are in a latent state as shown in FIG. 203(h) to FIG. 203(j), but since the 3C time-saving state ST3C has the highest priority when the latent state is activated, the 3C time-saving state ST3C starts at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 203(d). However, the remaining number of times that the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is not 130 times, but the number of times that corresponds to the value stored in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 at the timing of t5. Also, even if the 3C time-saving state ST3C starts, the latent state of the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3B time-saving state ST3B is maintained as shown in FIG. 203(h) and FIG. 203(i).

After that, at timing t6, which is midway through the 3C time-saving state ST3C, the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 203(h). Therefore, the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A ends without becoming a target for execution. As a result, only the 3B time-saving state ST3B remains latent.

After that, at the timing of t7, the 3C time-saving state ST3C ends as shown in FIG. 203(d). In this case, since the 3B time-saving state ST3B is in a latent state as shown in FIG. 203(i), the 3B time-saving state ST3B starts at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 203(c). However, the remaining number of times that the 3B time-saving state ST3B will continue is not 100 times, but the number of times corresponding to the value stored in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 at the timing of t7. After that, the 3B time-saving state ST3B ends at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 203(c).

Next, we will explain the second example pattern.

At time t9, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R low probability result ends, and the first time-saving state ST1 begins as shown in FIG. 203(a). After that, at time t10, which is midway through the first time-saving state ST1, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(e). In this case, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is set in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 as shown in FIG. 203(h), and the 3A time-saving state ST3A enters a latent state.

After that, at timing t11, when the game is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(e). In this case, the third A time-saving state ST3A is already latent, but the number of times the third A time-saving state ST3A continues (specifically, 50 times) is reset in the third A time-saving standby counter 401.

After that, at timing t12, which is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and in a situation where the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 203(i), the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is set in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, and the 3B time-saving state ST3B goes into a latent state. In other words, in this situation, the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3B time-saving state ST3B go into a latent state.

After that, at timing t13, which is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and in which the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3B time-saving state ST3B are latent, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(e). In this case, the 3A time-saving state ST3A is already latent, but the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues (specifically, 50 times) is reset in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401.

After that, at the timing of t14, the first time-saving state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 203(a). In this case, the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3B time-saving state ST3B are in a latent state as shown in FIG. 203(h) and FIG. 203(i). However, since the priority of the 3B time-saving state ST3B is higher than that of the 3A time-saving state ST3A when the latent state is activated, the 3B time-saving state ST3B starts at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 203(c). However, the remaining number of times that the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is not 100 times, but the number of times that corresponds to the value stored in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 at the timing of t14. Also, even if the 3B time-saving state ST3B starts, the latent state of the 3A time-saving state ST3A is maintained as shown in FIG. 203(h).

After that, at times t15 and t16, when the game is in the middle of the 3B time-saving state ST3B and the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 203(e). In this case, the 3A time-saving state ST3A is already latent, but the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues (specifically, 50 times) is reset in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 at times t15 and t16.

After that, at the timing of t17, the 3B time-saving state ST3B ends as shown in FIG. 203(c). In this case, since the 3A time-saving state ST3A is in a latent state as shown in FIG. 203(h), the 3A time-saving state ST3A starts at the timing of t17 as shown in FIG. 203(b). However, the remaining number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is not 50 times, but the number of times corresponding to the value stored in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 at the timing of t17. After that, the 3A time-saving state ST3A ends at the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 203(b).

The above-described embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

In the main RAM 84, a 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is provided corresponding to the 3A time-saving state ST3A, a 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is provided corresponding to the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and a 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is provided corresponding to the 3C time-saving state ST3C. Then, when a game corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is set in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401, and the 3A time-saving state ST3A becomes latent. When a game corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is set in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, and the 3B time-saving state ST3B becomes latent. When a game corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the number of times the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is set in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C becomes latent. This allows multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C to be latent at the same time, making it possible to secure a long period of time in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C.

If multiple third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C are latent when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed ends, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C to be executed is selected according to the execution priority regardless of the order in which the latent states occurred. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C with a high predetermined priority to be executed.

In a configuration in which the number of times that the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is 130, the number of times that the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is 100, and the number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is 50, the priority when it becomes the target for execution from the latent state is set to the 3C time-saving state ST3C with the highest priority, the 3B time-saving state ST3B with the next highest priority, and the 3A time-saving state ST3A with the lowest priority. This makes it possible to prioritize the 3C time-saving states ST3A to ST3C with the highest initial number of times that they continue as targets for execution.

There will be no simultaneous latency of multiple third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C of the same type, and only one of each type of third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C can be inactive. This makes it possible to prevent excessive latency of the third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C.

When a certain third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is already in a latent state and a time-saving result of a type corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs, the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is initialized to the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues. This makes it possible to maximize the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues, and also makes it possible to prevent the first to third time-saving results that occurred in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C from being invalidated.

<Alternative to the twenty-sixth embodiment>
(1) The second time-shortening state ST2 may also be configured to be able to be latent. In this case, a second time-shortening standby counter may be provided in the main RAM 84, and when the number of play times of the ceiling number of times is consumed in the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C, the second time-shortening state ST2 may be configured to be latent by setting the number of times of continuation of the second time-shortening state ST2 in the second time-shortening standby counter. In this case, when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C and the second time-shortening state ST2 are latent, the second time-shortening state ST2 may be configured to be executed preferentially regardless of the order of occurrence, the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C may be configured to be executed preferentially regardless of the order of occurrence, or the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C may be configured to be executed according to the order of occurrence.

(2) The configuration is not limited to one in which all of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C can be latent, and a configuration may be adopted in which some of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C can be latent, but the remaining 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C cannot be latent. In this case, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will be latent depending on the type of time-saving result, and its occurrence will be invalidated depending on the type of time-saving result.

(3) The number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is less than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, the number of times that the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is the same as the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, and the number of times that the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is greater than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, but the number of times that these 3rd time-saving states ST3A to ST3C continue is arbitrary. For example, the number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C all continue may be less than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, may be greater than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, or may be greater than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues. In addition, some of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C may be configured to continue for a number of times longer than the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues.

(4) When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the corresponding third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. However, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to that time-saving result may be newly started, or when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated.

(5) The main RAM 84 may be configured to have two or more of the third A time-saving standby counters 401, the third B time-saving standby counters 402, and the third C time-saving standby counters 403. In this case, it may be possible that multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the two or more third time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 are in a state of being latent at the same time. The main RAM 84 may also be configured to have two or more of the third A time-saving standby counters 401, the third B time-saving standby counters 402, and the third C time-saving standby counters 403. In this case, it may be possible that multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C of the same type are in a state of being latent at the same time.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the type of the third time-saving state is different from that of the twenty-sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-sixth embodiment will be basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the types of support modes are the same as in the 25th embodiment, and are six types: low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode, third high-frequency support mode, fourth high-frequency support mode, and fifth high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 196(a)). The contents of these support modes are the same as in the 25th embodiment. In addition, the types of time-saving states are the same as in the 25th embodiment, and are five types: first time-saving state ST1, second time-saving state ST2, 3A time-saving state ST41, 3B time-saving state ST42, and 3C time-saving state ST43 (see FIG. 196(b)). The contents of these time-saving states ST1 to ST43 are the same as in the 25th embodiment.

When the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1 as in the 26th embodiment, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "2", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2 as in the 26th embodiment. Also, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", it corresponds to the 3A time-saving state ST41, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "4", it corresponds to the 3B time-saving state ST42, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "5", it corresponds to the 3C time-saving state ST43.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", that is, when the 3A time-saving state ST41 is in effect, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the medium period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display. Also, in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, instead of step S509, a process of setting the normal open counter to "2" is executed as a control process for the normal power open state, and steps S510 and S511 are executed, causing the normal power open state to become a medium expectation mode.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "4", that is, when it is in the 3B time-saving state ST42, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss judgment process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the short period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display. Also, in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, instead of step S509, a process of setting the normal open counter to "2" is executed as a control process of the normal power open state, and steps S510 and S511 are executed, so that the normal power open state becomes a medium expectation mode.

When the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "5", that is, when it is in the 3C time-saving state ST43, the low probability table (step S405) on the normal map side is read out when the normal map hit/miss determination process (step S407) is executed in the normal map fluctuation start process (Fig. 16) of the master MPU 82, and when the fluctuation display of the normal map display section 38a is started (step S415), the medium period on the normal map side is selected as the duration of the fluctuation display. In addition, steps S509 to S511 are executed as the control process for the normal power open state in the normal map confirmation process (Fig. 17) of the master MPU 82, and the normal power open state becomes a high expectation mode.

Figure 204 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SE101: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE102). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE102: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SE103. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SE102: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more to determine whether the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST43 (step SE103). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SE103: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SE104). If the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", as in the 15th embodiment, a process is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, and a process is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal to a HI level.

After that, if the game result of this game is the first time-saving result (step SE105: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE106), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50" (step SE107). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3A time-saving state ST41. Also, if the game result of this game is the second time-saving result (step SE108: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "4", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE109), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100" (step SE110). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3B time-saving state ST42. Furthermore, if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SE108: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "5", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE111), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130" (step SE112). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the third C time-saving state ST43.

When the processing of step SE107, step SE110, or step SE112 is executed, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE113). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 and a presentation indicating the type of the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE103: YES), and if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result (step SE114: YES), set the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 to "50" (step SE115). As a result, in a situation where the 3A time-saving state ST41 is not latent, the 3A time-saving state ST41 is latent due to the first time-saving result, and in a situation where the 3A time-saving state ST41 is latent, the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is reset to the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST41 continues due to the first time-saving result. Also, if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result (step SE116: YES), set the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 to "100" (step SE117). As a result, in a situation where the 3B time-saving state ST42 is not latent, the 3B time-saving state ST42 is latent due to the second time-saving result, and in a situation where the 3B time-saving state ST42 is latent, the second time-saving result is triggered and the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST42 continues is reset to the 3B time-saving standby counter 402. Also, if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SE116: NO), the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to "130" (step SE118). As a result, in a situation where the 3C time-saving state ST43 is not latent, the 3C time-saving state ST43 is latent due to the third time-saving result, and in a situation where the 3C time-saving state ST43 is latent, the third time-saving result is triggered and the number of times the 3C time-saving state ST43 continues is reset to the 3C time-saving standby counter 403.

When the processing of step SE115, step SE117, or step SE118 is executed, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST41-ST43 has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE113). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST41-ST43 has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST41-ST43. This enables the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 is not an execution target but is in a latent state.

When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the high probability state, the time-saving result is invalidated without transition to the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 triggered by the time-saving result, and without the latent state of the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 occurring, as in the 26th embodiment described above.

In this embodiment, the processing contents of the process of determining the variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU 93 are the same as the process of determining the variation pattern in the above 22nd embodiment (Fig. 189). In other words, if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results has started in the time-saving states ST1 to ST43, but the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 is newly started with the first to third time-saving results as a trigger when the current game round ends, a process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SC809). In the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, as in the above 21st embodiment, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second time-saving pattern combination ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third time-saving pattern combination ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combinations of the first to third time-saving patterns selected as described above are determined by lottery. In addition, red is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC810).

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST43, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and a setting related to latency occurs in the main MPU 82, a process for determining a stop pattern for latency suggestion is executed (step SC812). In the process for determining a stop pattern for latency suggestion, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first latent occurrence pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second latent occurrence pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third latent occurrence pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop symbols for latent indication, the pay lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third latent occurrence symbols selected as described above is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SC813).

In the time-saving state ST1 to ST43, when the game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and the current time-saving result is invalidated because the game state is a high probability state, a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach is executed (step SC806). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach, the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 are determined by lottery, and include a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), a combination of patterns that are latent occurrences ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and a combination of patterns other than the combination of patterns that are a miss reach, that is, a non-missed reach pattern combination. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC807).

Figure 205 is a flowchart showing the third time-saving setting process in this embodiment, which is executed in step SD809 of the time-saving progress process (Figure 201).

First, it is determined whether the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more (step SE201). Then, if the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more (step SE201: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "5" (step SE202), the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to the time-saving state counter 375 (step SE203), and the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is cleared to "0" (step SE204). As a result, the 3C time-saving state ST43 that was in the dormant state becomes the execution target, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403.

If the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is "0" (step SE201: NO), it is determined whether the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more (step SE205). Then, if the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more (step SE205: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "4" (step SE206), the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is set to the time-saving state counter 375 (step SE207), and the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is cleared to "0" (step SE208). As a result, the 3B time-saving state ST42 that was in the dormant state becomes the execution target, and the 3B time-saving state ST42 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402.

If the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is "0" (step SE205: NO), this means that only the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is equal to or greater than 1 among the time-saving standby counters 401-403. In this case, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" (step SE209), the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is set to the time-saving state counter 375 (step SE210), and the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is cleared to "0" (step SE211). As a result, the 3A time-saving state ST41 that was in the dormant state becomes the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST41 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401.

In other words, in this embodiment, each of the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 can be a target for latency at the same time, but when multiple third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 are in a latency state and the target time-saving state ST1 to ST43 ends, the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 that switches from latency to the target for execution is determined according to the priority at the time of latency activation. Specifically, the third time-saving state ST43, which has the highest support mode advantage among the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, has the highest priority, the third time-saving state ST42, which has the next highest support mode advantage among the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, has the next highest priority, and the third time-saving state ST41, which has the lowest support mode advantage among the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43, has the lowest priority. Therefore, when the 3C time-saving state ST43 is latent, even if the 3A time-saving state ST41 or the 3B time-saving state ST42 exists before the 3C time-saving state ST43, the 3C time-saving state ST43 is the first to be executed. Also, when the 3C time-saving state ST43 is not latent and the 3B time-saving state ST42 is latent, even if the 3A time-saving state ST41 exists before the 3B time-saving state ST42, the 3B time-saving state ST42 is the first to be executed. Also, the latent 3A time-saving state ST41 is the first to be executed on the condition that the 3B time-saving state ST42 and the 3C time-saving state ST43 are not latent.

The multiple types of third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 not only differ in the number of continuations that are the end conditions, but also in the support modes. This makes it possible to diversify the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43.

<Alternative to the 27th embodiment>
(1) The third A time-saving state ST41, the third B time-saving state ST42, and the third C time-saving state ST43 are configured to have different types of support modes and different continuation counts that serve as termination conditions, but this is not limited to the above, and the third A time-saving state ST41, the third B time-saving state ST42, and the third C time-saving state ST43 may be configured to have different types of support modes but the same continuation count that serves as an termination condition.

(2) Of the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43, the 3C time-saving state ST43 in which the support mode is most advantageous has the greatest number of continuations, but this is not limited thereto, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 in which the support mode is most advantageous may have the fewest number of continuations, or the 3A time-saving state ST41 in which the support mode is least advantageous may have the greatest number of continuations.

(3) The termination conditions for the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 are all configured to be that a number of game rounds that trigger termination are executed, but the termination conditions for the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43 may be that a number of small win results that trigger termination are generated, and the number of times that trigger termination is different for each of the 3A time-saving state ST41, the 3B time-saving state ST42, and the 3C time-saving state ST43.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the criteria for activating the latent state when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends in a situation where multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent are different from those in the above-mentioned 26th embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the above-mentioned 26th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 26th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 206(a) is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a ceiling counter 325, a time-saving target counter 371, a time-saving continuation counter 375, a time-saving state counter 386, a 3A time-saving standby counter 401, a 3B time-saving standby counter 402, and a 3C time-saving standby counter 403, as in the 26th embodiment. The main RAM 84 is also provided with an occurrence order storage area 405.

Figure 206 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the generation order storage area 405.

The occurrence order memory area 405 is a memory area for the main MPU 82 to specify the order in which multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3B have occurred as latent targets in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A. In the occurrence order memory area 405, numbers indicating the occurrence order are set in consecutive numbers from "1" to "3", and a storage area is provided for storing information on the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C that are latent targets in a one-to-one correspondence with the data on each occurrence order. When a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C in a situation in which none of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that corresponds to that time-saving result is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1". In addition, when a game round with a time-saving result corresponding to a type of third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C different from the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the target of lurking in that situation is executed, information indicating the type of third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that corresponds to that time-saving result is stored in a storage area that corresponds to the order of "2". In addition, when a game round with a time-saving result corresponding to a type of third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C different from the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the target of lurking in that situation is executed, information indicating the type of third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that corresponds to that time-saving result is stored in a storage area that corresponds to the order of "3".

If the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues becomes 0 before the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed ends, a process is executed to shift the information in the occurrence order storage area 405. Specifically, if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C whose remaining number of times that it continues becomes 0 during latency is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1" in the occurrence order storage area 405, the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", and the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0". If the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, in which the remaining number of continuations during the latency period has become 0, is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number "2" in the occurrence order storage area 405, the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the number "1" is maintained as is, while the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the number "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the number "2", and the storage area corresponding to the number "3" is cleared to "0".

When the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed end while the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1" in the generation order storage area 405 become the execution target. In addition, a process of shifting the information in the generation order storage area 405 is executed. Specifically, the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", and the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0".

Figure 207 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SE301: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE302). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE302: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes of step SE303 and onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process of a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SE302: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or greater to determine whether the current gaming state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SE303). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SE303: NO), that is, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE304), and the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SE305). If the outer end flag is set to "1" when the time-saving feature occurs, similar to the 15th embodiment described above, processing is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration for the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and processing is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to a HI level for the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal.

After that, if the game result of the current game round is the first time-saving result (step SE306: YES), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50" (step SE307). Also, if the game result of the current game round is the second time-saving result (step SE308: YES), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100" (step SE309). Also, if the game result of the current game round is the third time-saving result (step SE308: NO), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130" (step SE310). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

When the processing of step SE307, step SE309, or step SE310 is executed, a state designation command indicating a transition from the normal game state to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE311). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating a transition from the normal game state to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE303: YES), and if the game result of the current game round is the first time-saving result (step SE312: YES), it is determined whether the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent (step SE313). If the 3A time-saving state ST3A is already latent (step SE313: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated as is. In other words, even if a game round corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed while the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the first time-saving result is invalidated.

If the 3A time-saving state ST3A is not in a latent state (step SE313: NO), the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is set to "50" (step SE314). This puts the 3A time-saving state ST3A in a latent state.

Then, a setting process is executed for the generation order storage area 405 (step SE315). In this setting process, information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A is stored in the storage area corresponding to the forward order of the order information among the storage areas in the generation order storage area 405 in which information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not stored. In this case, if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not stored in all storage areas, information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is stored only in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1" and the order of "2", information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3".

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE316). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A has occurred. This allows the player to recognize that the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A has occurred, even though it is not the target of execution.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE303: YES) and the game result of the current game round is the second time-saving result (step SE317: YES), it is determined whether the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more to determine whether the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent (step SE318). If the 3B time-saving state ST3B is already latent (step SE318: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated as is. In other words, even if a game round corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed while the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent, the second time-saving result is invalidated.

If the 3B time-saving state ST3B is not in a latent state (step SE318: NO), the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is set to "100" (step SE319). This puts the 3B time-saving state ST3B in a latent state.

Then, a setting process is executed for the generation order storage area 405 (step SE320). In this setting process, information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3B is stored in the storage area corresponding to the forward order of the order information among the storage areas in the generation order storage area 405 in which information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not stored. In this case, if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not stored in all storage areas, information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3B is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is stored only in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3B is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1" and the order of "2", information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3B is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3".

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the 3B time-saving state ST3B has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE321). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that an effect indicating that the latent state of the 3B time-saving state ST3B has occurred is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. This allows the player to recognize that the 3B time-saving state ST3B has entered a latent state, although it is not the target of execution.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE303: YES) and the game result of the current game round is the third time-saving result (step SE317: NO), it is determined whether the value of the third C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more to determine whether the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent (step SE322). If the third C time-saving state ST3C is already latent (step SE322: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated as is. In other words, even if a game round corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed while the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the third time-saving result is invalidated.

If the third C time-saving state ST3C is not in a latent state (step SE322: NO), the third C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to "130" (step SE323). This puts the third C time-saving state ST3C in a latent state.

Then, a setting process is executed for the occurrence order storage area 405 (step SE324). In this setting process, information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the forward order of the order information among the storage areas in the occurrence order storage area 405 in which information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not stored. In this case, if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not stored in all storage areas, information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is stored only in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and if information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "1" and the order of "2", information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3".

After that, a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the 3C time-saving state ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE325). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that an effect indicating that the latent state of the 3C time-saving state ST3C has occurred is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. This allows the player to recognize that the 3C time-saving state ST3C has entered a latent state, although it is not the target of execution.

In this embodiment, the processing contents of the process of determining the variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU 93 are the same as the process of determining the variation pattern in the 21st embodiment (Fig. 185). In other words, if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results has started in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A, but the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is newly started with the first to third time-saving results as a trigger when the current game round ends, a process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SC509). In the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second time-saving pattern combination ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third time-saving pattern combination ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combinations of the first to third time-saving patterns selected as described above are determined by lottery. In addition, red is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC510).

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and a setting related to latency occurs in the main MPU 82, a process for determining a stop pattern for suggesting latency is executed (step SC513). In the process for determining a stop pattern for suggesting latency, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first latent occurrence pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second latent occurrence pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third latent occurrence pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop symbols for latent indication, the activated lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third latent occurrence symbols selected as described above is stopped are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SC514).

When the first to third time-saving results are obtained in a high probability state, or when the first to third time-saving results are obtained in a time-saving state ST1 to ST3C state but the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by the first to third time-saving results does not occur, a process for determining a stop pattern for a non-miss is executed (step SC506). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-miss, a lottery is performed to determine the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which are the combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, the combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), the combination of patterns that latent occurs ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and the combination of patterns that are not the combination of patterns that are the miss reach patterns, that is, the non-miss reach pattern combinations. Additionally, blue is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC507).

Figure 208 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE401). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE401: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SE402.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE401: NO, step SE402: YES), that is, if it is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386 (step SE403), the subtraction process of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 (step SE404), the subtraction process of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 (step SE405), and the subtraction process of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 (step SE406) are executed. In the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 386, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is subtracted by 1. In the subtraction process of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401, the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is 1 or more. In the subtraction process of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more. In the subtraction process of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403, the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more.

Here, since the processing of steps SE404 to SE406 is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the value of the time-saving state counter 386 decremented by 1 when one play is performed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the subject of execution, but the values of the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 corresponding to the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are also decremented by 1. Therefore, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the subject of execution decremented by 1 when one play is performed, but the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is also decremented by 1.

The first time-saving state ST1 has a continuation count of 100 times, the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, the third-A time-saving state ST3A has a continuation count of 50 times, the third-B time-saving state ST3B has a continuation count of 100 times, and the third-C time-saving state ST3C has a continuation count of 130 times. Therefore, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends, the time-saving standby counters 401 to 4 A situation may occur in which the value of .03 is 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is executed following the previous time-saving state ST1-ST3C for the remaining number of continuations stored in the corresponding time-saving standby counters 401-403, and a situation may also occur in which the value of the time-saving standby counters 401-403 becomes "0" midway through the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends without becoming the target for execution.

Then, it is determined whether an opportunity to update the generation order storage area 405 has occurred (step SE407). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of any of the 3A to 3C time-saving standby counters 401 to 403, which had a value of 1 or more, has become "0" as a result of the processing of steps SE404 to SE406 being executed. If there is a time-saving standby counter 401 to 403 that has become "0" by subtracting 1 (step SE407: YES), it is determined that an opportunity to update the generation order storage area 405 has occurred, and an update process for the generation order storage area 405 is executed (step SE408). In this update process, a storage area in which information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3B corresponding to the time-saving standby counters 401 to 403 that have become "0" by subtracting 1 in the generation order storage area 405 is stored is cleared to "0". Furthermore, if the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order "1", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order "2" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order "1", and the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order "3" is cleared to "0". Furthermore, if the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order "2", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order "3" is cleared to "0".

When a negative determination is made in step SE407 or when the processing of step SE408 is executed, it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed has ended by determining whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SE409). When the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SE409: YES), it is determined whether information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the sequence of "1" in the occurrence order storage area 405 (step SE410).

If a positive judgment is made in step SE410, this means that a latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C exists. In this case, a setting process is first executed for the time-saving state counter 386 (step SE411). In the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386, information on the type of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C stored in the storage area corresponding to the sequence of "1" in the occurrence order memory area 405 is identified. Then, the values of the time-saving standby counters 401-403 corresponding to that type of third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C are set in the time-saving state counter 386, and then the time-saving standby counters 401-403 are cleared to "0." Specifically, if information on the type of 3A time-saving state ST3A is stored in the storage area with the order "1", the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is set in the time-saving state counter 386 and then the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is cleared to "0", if information on the type of 3B time-saving state ST3B is stored in the storage area with the order "1", the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is set in the time-saving state counter 386 and then the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is cleared to "0", if information on the type of 3C time-saving state ST3C is stored in the storage area with the order "1", the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is set in the time-saving state counter 386 and then the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is cleared to "0".

Then, the setting process of the time-saving target counter 371 is executed (step SE412). In the setting process of the time-saving target counter 371, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. As a result, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the execution target. In addition, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the execution target is executed for the number of continuations corresponding to the value set in the time-saving state counter 386 in step SE411.

Then, an update process of the generation order storage area 405 is executed (step SE413). In this update process, the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the sequence "2" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the sequence "1", and the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the sequence "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the sequence "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the sequence "3" is cleared to "0".

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE416). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed to end, and for a performance indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started to be executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In addition, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE417). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0," the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is newly started.

If a negative judgment is made in step SE410, the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SE414). This causes the game state to change to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SE415), a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have ended and the game has transitioned to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE416), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE417).

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 209, the manner in which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent will be explained using the relationship with the first time-saving state ST1 as an example. FIG. 209(a) shows the period when the first time-saving state ST1 is the target for execution, FIG. 209(b) shows the period when the third A time-saving state ST3A is the target for execution, FIG. 209(c) shows the period when the third B time-saving state ST3B is the target for execution, FIG. 209(d) shows the period when the third C time-saving state ST3C is the target for execution, FIG. 209(e) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends, FIG. 209(f) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends, FIG. 209(g) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the third time-saving result ends, FIG. 209(h) shows the period when the value of the third A time-saving standby counter 401 is 1 or more, FIG. 209(i) shows the period when the value of the third B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more, and FIG. 209(j) shows the period when the value of the third C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more.

At time t1, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R low probability result ends, and the first time-saving state ST1 begins as shown in FIG. 209(a). After that, at time t2, which is midway through the first time-saving state ST1, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 209(e). In this case, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is set in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 as shown in FIG. 209(h), and the 3A time-saving state ST3A enters a latent state.

After that, at timing t3, which is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and in a situation where the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the game round corresponding to the second time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 209(f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 209(i), the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is set in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, and the 3B time-saving state ST3B goes into a latent state. In other words, in this situation, the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3B time-saving state ST3B go into a latent state.

After that, at timing t4, which is in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 and in which both the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3B time-saving state ST3B are latent, the game round corresponding to the third time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 209(g). In this case, as shown in FIG. 209(j), the number of times the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is set in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C goes into a latent state. In other words, in this situation, the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C go into a latent state.

After that, at the timing of t5, the first time-saving state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 209(a). In this case, the third A time-saving state ST3A, the third B time-saving state ST3B, and the third C time-saving state ST3C are in a latent state as shown in FIG. 209(h) to FIG. 209(j), but the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, which occurred first, is the first to be executed, so the third A time-saving state ST3A starts at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 209(b). However, the remaining number of times that the third A time-saving state ST3A continues is not 50 times, but the number of times that corresponds to the value stored in the third A time-saving standby counter 401 at the timing of t5. Also, even if the third A time-saving state ST3A starts, the latent state of the third B time-saving state ST3B and the third C time-saving state ST3C is maintained as shown in FIG. 209(i) and FIG. 209(j).

After that, at the timing of t6, the 3A time-saving state ST3A ends as shown in FIG. 209(b). In this case, the 3B time-saving state ST3B and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are in a latent state as shown in FIG. 209(i) and FIG. 209(j), but the 3B time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, which occurred first, are the targets of execution first, so the 3B time-saving state ST3B starts at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 209(c). However, the remaining number of times that the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is not 100 times, but the number of times that corresponds to the value stored in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 at the timing of t6. Also, even if the 3B time-saving state ST3B starts, the latent state of the 3C time-saving state ST3C is maintained as shown in FIG. 209(j).

After that, at the timing t7 when the game is in the middle of the 3B time-saving state ST3B and the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 209(e). In this case, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is set in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 as shown in FIG. 209(h), and the 3A time-saving state ST3A becomes latent.

After that, at the timing t8, which is a timing in the middle of the 3B time-saving state ST3B and when both the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are latent, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 209(e). In this case, since the 3A time-saving state ST3A is already latent as shown in FIG. 209(h), the first time-saving result is invalidated.

After that, at the timing of t9, the 3B time-saving state ST3B ends as shown in FIG. 209(c). In this case, the 3A time-saving state ST3A and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are in a latent state as shown in FIG. 209(h) and FIG. 209(j), but the 3C time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, which occurred first, are the targets of execution first, so the 3C time-saving state ST3C starts at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 209(d). However, the remaining number of times that the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is not 130 times, but the number of times corresponding to the value stored in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 at the timing of t9. Also, even if the 3C time-saving state ST3C starts, the latent state of the 3A time-saving state ST3A is maintained as shown in FIG. 209(h).

After that, at timing t10, which is a timing when the game is in the middle of the 3C time-saving state ST3C and the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the game round corresponding to the first time-saving result ends as shown in FIG. 209(e). In this case, the 3A time-saving state ST3A is already latent as shown in FIG. 209(h), so the first time-saving result is invalidated.

After that, at timing t11, which is midway through the 3C time-saving state ST3C, the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 209(h). Therefore, the latent 3A time-saving state ST3A ends without becoming a target for execution. After that, at timing t12, the 3C time-saving state ST3C ends as shown in FIG. 209(d).

The above-described embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

If multiple third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C are latent when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed ends, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that became latent first is set as the execution target first. This makes it possible to set the latent third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C as the execution target in the order in which they became latent.

There will be no simultaneous latency of multiple third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C of the same type, and only one of each type of third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C can be inactive. This makes it possible to prevent excessive latency of the third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C.

When a certain third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is already in a latent state and a time-saving result of a type corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs, the time-saving result is invalidated. This makes it possible to avoid complicated handling of the order in which the latent states occur in a configuration in which the latent third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C are executed in the order in which they occurred.

<Alternative to the 28th embodiment>
(1) Fig. 210 is a flow chart showing another example of the time-saving result setting process in the 28th embodiment. Steps SE501 to SE511 execute the same processes as steps SE301 to SE311 in the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 207) in the 28th embodiment.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE503: YES), and if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result (step SE512: YES), regardless of whether the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is 1 or more, the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is set to "50" (step SE513), a setting process is executed in the occurrence order storage area 405 (step SE514), and a state designation command indicating that the 3A time-saving state ST3A has been latent is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE515). In other words, if a game corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed while the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is reset to the 3A time-saving standby counter 401. Furthermore, in the setting process in the occurrence order storage area 405 in step SE514, if the first time-saving result occurs when the 3A time-saving state ST3A is not in a latent state, the same process as step SE315 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment (FIG. 207) is executed.

On the other hand, when the first time-saving result occurs while the third A time-saving state ST3A is in the latent state, first, the storage area in which the information on the type of the third A time-saving state ST3A is stored in the occurrence order storage area 405 is cleared to "0". If the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", and the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0". If the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0". Then, the information on the type of the third A time-saving state ST3A is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order that is the frontmost among the storage areas in which the types of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not stored. As a result, if the first time-saving result occurs while the third A time-saving state ST3A is latent, the order of occurrence of the third A time-saving state ST3A is set to be later than the order of occurrence of the other third time-saving states ST3B and ST3C that were already latent when the first time-saving result newly occurs.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE503: YES) and the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result (step SE516: YES), regardless of whether the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more, the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is set to "100" (step SE517), a setting process is executed in the occurrence order storage area 405 (step SE518), and a state designation command indicating that the 3B time-saving state ST3B has been latent is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE519). In other words, if a game corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed while the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent, the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is reset in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402. Furthermore, in the setting process in the occurrence order storage area 405 in step SE518, if the second time-saving result occurs when the third B time-saving state ST3B is not in a latent state, the same process as step SE320 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment (FIG. 207) is executed.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving result occurs while the third-B time-saving state ST3B is in the latent state, first, the storage area in which the information on the type of the third-B time-saving state ST3B is stored in the occurrence order storage area 405 is cleared to "0". If the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", and the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0". If the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0". Then, the information on the type of the third-B time-saving state ST3B is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order that is the frontmost among the storage areas in which the types of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not stored. As a result, if the second time-saving result occurs while the third B time-saving state ST3B is latent, the occurrence order of the third B time-saving state ST3B is set to be later than the occurrence order of the other third time-saving states ST3A and ST3C that were already latent when the second time-saving result newly occurs.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE503: YES) and the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SE516: NO), regardless of whether the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more, the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to "130" (step SE520), a setting process is executed in the occurrence order storage area 405 (step SE521), and a state designation command indicating that the 3C time-saving state ST3C has been latent is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE522). In other words, if a game corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed while the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the number of continuations of the 3C time-saving state ST3C is reset in the 3C time-saving standby counter 403. Furthermore, in the setting process in the occurrence order storage area 405 in step SE521, if the third time-saving result occurs when the third C time-saving state ST3C is not in a latent state, the same process as step SE324 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment (FIG. 207) is executed.

On the other hand, when the third time-saving result occurs while the third time-saving state ST3C is in the latent state, first, the storage area in which the information on the type of the third time-saving state ST3C is stored in the occurrence order storage area 405 is cleared to "0". If the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "2" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "1", and the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0". If the storage area cleared to "0" is the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the order of "2", and then the storage area corresponding to the order of "3" is cleared to "0". Then, the information on the type of the third time-saving state ST3C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the order that is the frontmost among the storage areas in which the types of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not stored. As a result, if a third time-saving result occurs while the third C time-saving state ST3C is latent, the occurrence order of the third C time-saving state ST3C is set to be later than the occurrence order of the other third time-saving states ST3A and ST3B that were already latent when the third time-saving result newly occurs.

In the above-mentioned alternative embodiment, when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in a latent state while the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is being executed, if a game round with a time-saving result corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is executed, the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is reset to the corresponding time-saving standby counter 401-403. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving result from being invalidated when a time-saving result corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs.

When a time-saving result corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs and the information on the number of continuations is reset in the time-saving standby counters 401-403 corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that is the subject of the reset is treated as having a later occurrence order than the other third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C that are latent at that time. This makes it possible to prevent the opportunity for the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that became the subject of the later latent state to be executed from disappearing due to the repeated occurrence of the time-saving result corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that became the subject of the earlier latent state.

(2) FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing another form of the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment. Steps SE601 to SE611 execute the same process as steps SE301 to SE311 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment (FIG. 207).

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE603: YES), and if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result (step SE612: YES), the value of the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is determined to be 1 or more to determine whether the 3A time-saving state ST3A is already in a latent state (step SE613). If the 3A time-saving state ST3A is not in a latent state (step SE613: NO), a setting process is executed in the occurrence order memory area 405 (step SE614), the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is set to "50" (step SE615), and a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the 3A time-saving state ST3A has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE616). The setting process in the generation order storage area 405 in step SE614 executes the same process as step SE315 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment (FIG. 207).

On the other hand, if the 3A time-saving state ST3A is already in the latent state (step SE613: YES), the 3A time-saving standby counter 401 is set to "50" (step SE615) without executing the setting process in the occurrence order storage area 405 in step SE614, and a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the 3A time-saving state ST3A has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE616). In other words, if the first time-saving result occurs while the 3A time-saving state ST3A is in the latent state, the number of times the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is reset in the 3A time-saving standby counter 401, but the occurrence order of the latent state of the 3A time-saving state ST3A is not changed.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE603: YES) and the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result (step SE617: YES), it is determined whether the value of the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether the 3B time-saving state ST3B is already in a latent state (step SE618). If the 3B time-saving state ST3B is not in a latent state (step SE618: NO), a setting process is executed in the occurrence order memory area 405 (step SE619), the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is set to "100" (step SE620), and a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the 3B time-saving state ST3B has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE621). The setting process in the generation order storage area 405 in step SE619 executes the same process as step SE320 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment (FIG. 207).

On the other hand, if the 3B time-saving state ST3B is already in the latent state (step SE618: YES), the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 is set to "100" (step SE620) without executing the setting process in the occurrence order storage area 405 in step SE619, and a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the 3B time-saving state ST3B has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE621). In other words, if the second time-saving result occurs while the 3B time-saving state ST3B is in the latent state, the number of times the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is reset in the 3B time-saving standby counter 402, but the occurrence order of the latent state of the 3B time-saving state ST3B is not changed.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE603: YES) and the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SE617: NO), it is determined whether the value of the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether the 3C time-saving state ST3C is already latent (step SE622). If the 3C time-saving state ST3C is not latent (step SE622: NO), a setting process is executed in the generation order memory area 405 (step SE623), the 3C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to "130" (step SE624), and a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the 3C time-saving state ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE625). The setting process in the generation order storage area 405 in step SE623 executes the same process as step SE324 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment (FIG. 207).

On the other hand, if the third C time-saving state ST3C is already in the latent state (step SE622: YES), the third C time-saving standby counter 403 is set to "130" (step SE624) without executing the setting process in the occurrence order storage area 405 in step SE623, and a state designation command indicating that the latent state of the third C time-saving state ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE625). In other words, if the third time-saving result occurs while the third C time-saving state ST3C is in the latent state, the number of times the third C time-saving state ST3C continues is reset in the third C time-saving standby counter 403, but the occurrence order of the latent state of the third C time-saving state ST3C is not changed.

In the above-mentioned alternative embodiment, when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in a latent state while the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is being executed, if a game round with a time-saving result corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is executed, the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is reset to the corresponding time-saving standby counter 401-403. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving result from being invalidated when a time-saving result corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs.

Even if a time-saving result corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs and the information on the number of continuations is reset in the time-saving standby counters 401-403 corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the order of occurrence of the reset third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C relative to the other latent third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C at that time is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving result corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C from being invalidated when it occurs, while not changing the order of the latent third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C at the time of latent activation.

(3) In this alternative embodiment, the types of support modes are the same as in the 25th embodiment, and include six types: low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode, third high-frequency support mode, fourth high-frequency support mode, and fifth high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 196(a)). The contents of these support modes are the same as in the 25th embodiment. The types of time-saving states are also the same as in the 25th embodiment, and include five types: first time-saving state ST1, second time-saving state ST2, 3A time-saving state ST41, 3B time-saving state ST42, and 3C time-saving state ST43 (see FIG. 196(b)). The contents of these time-saving states ST1 to ST43 are the same as in the 25th embodiment.

When the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1 as in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "2", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2 as in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment. Also, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", it corresponds to the 3A time-saving state ST41, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "4", it corresponds to the 3B time-saving state ST42, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "5", it corresponds to the 3C time-saving state ST43.

Figure 212 is a flow chart showing another form of the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment. Steps SE714 to SE727 execute the same process as steps SE312 to SE325 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 28th embodiment ( Figure 207 ).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SE701: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE702). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE702: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes of step SE703 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process of a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SE702: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more to determine whether the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST43 (step SE703). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SE703: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SE704). If the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", as in the 15th embodiment, a process is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, and a process is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal to a HI level.

After that, if the game result of the current game is the first time-saving result (step SE705: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE706), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50" (step SE707). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3A time-saving state ST41. Also, if the game result of the current game is the second time-saving result (step SE708: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "4", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE709), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100" (step SE710). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3B time-saving state ST42. Furthermore, if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SE708: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "5", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE711), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130" (step SE712). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the third C time-saving state ST43.

When the processing of step SE707, step SE710, or step SE712 is executed, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE713). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 and a presentation indicating the type of the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43.

In the process for setting the time-saving target counter 371 in step SE412 of the time-saving progress process (Fig. 208), if the 3A time-saving state ST3A becomes the target for execution from a latent state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3", if the 3B time-saving state ST3B becomes the target for execution from a latent state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "4", and if the 3C time-saving state ST3C becomes the target for execution from a latent state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "5".

According to the above configuration, the multiple types of third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 not only differ in the number of continuations that are the end conditions, but also in the support modes. This makes it possible to diversify the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43.

(4) The configuration is not limited to one in which all of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C can be latent, and a configuration may be adopted in which some of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C can be latent, but the remaining 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C cannot be latent. In this case, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C will be latent depending on the type of time-saving result, and their occurrence will be invalidated depending on the type of time-saving result.

(5) The number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is less than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, the number of times that the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is the same as the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, and the number of times that the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is greater than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, but the number of times that these 3rd time-saving states ST3A to ST3C continue is arbitrary. For example, the number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C all continue may be less than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, may be greater than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, or may be greater than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues. In addition, some of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C may be configured to continue for a number of times longer than the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues.

(6) When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the corresponding third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. However, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to that time-saving result may be newly started, or when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated.

<Twenty-ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the manner in which the third time-shortening states ST3A to ST3C are hidden is different from that of the twenty-first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 213 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a ceiling counter 325, a time-saving target counter 371, a time-saving continuation counter 375, and a time-saving state counter 386, as in the 21st embodiment. In addition, the main RAM 84 is provided with a first waiting counter 406, a second waiting counter 407, and a third waiting counter 408, instead of the third time-saving waiting counter 387.

The first standby counter 406, the second standby counter 407, and the third standby counter 408 are counters for the main MPU 82 to determine whether any of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is latent and the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C will continue. In a situation where any of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A is the execution target and the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not latent, when a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed, the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the executed time-saving result will continue is set in the first standby counter 406. In addition, in a situation where the value of the first standby counter 406 is 1 or more, when a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed, the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the executed time-saving result will continue is set in the second standby counter 407. In addition, in a situation where the value of the first standby counter 406 is 1 or more and the value of the second standby counter 407 is 1 or more, if a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed, the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the executed time-saving result is set in the third standby counter 408. In a situation where all the values of the first to third standby counters 406 to 408 are 1 or more, if a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed, the time-saving result is invalidated.

As described above, the number of times the continuations are set to the first to third standby counters 406 to 408 is determined in the order in which the time-saving results occur, regardless of the type of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. Therefore, it is possible that the number of times the continuations of the same type of third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C are set to multiple standby counters 406 to 408, and it is also possible that the number of times the continuations of different types of third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are set to all standby counters 406 to 408.

The information on the number of continuations set in the first standby counter 406, the information on the number of continuations set in the second standby counter 407, and the information on the number of continuations set in the third standby counter 408 are decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C. If the remaining number of continuations in the first standby counter 406 or the second standby counter 407 becomes 0 before the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends, a process is executed to shift the information of the standby counters 406 to 408. Specifically, if the value of the first standby counter 406 becomes "0", the value of the second standby counter 407 is shifted to the first standby counter 406, and the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0". In addition, when the value of the second standby counter 407 becomes "0", the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0".

When the information of the number of continuations of 1 or more is stored in the first standby counter 406, if another time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that was the target of execution is terminated, the value of the first standby counter 406 is set to the time-saving state counter 386. As a result, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C whose information of the number of continuations was stored in the first standby counter 406 becomes the target of execution, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that became the target of execution is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the corresponding first standby counter 406. In addition, after setting the value to the time-saving state counter 386, a process of shifting the information of the standby counters 406 to 408 is executed. Specifically, the value of the second standby counter 407 is shifted to the first standby counter 406, and the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0".

Figure 214 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is any one of the first to third time-saving results (step SE801: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE802). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE802: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes of step SE803 and onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process of a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SE802: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or greater to determine whether the current gaming state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SE803). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SE803: NO), that is, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE804), and the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SE805). If the outer end flag is set to "1" when the time-saving feature occurs, similar to the 15th embodiment described above, processing is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration for the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and processing is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to a HI level for the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal.

After that, if the game result of the current game round is the first time-saving result (step SE806: YES), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50" (step SE807). Also, if the game result of the current game round is the second time-saving result (step SE808: YES), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100" (step SE809). Also, if the game result of the current game round is the third time-saving result (step SE808: NO), the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130" (step SE810). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

When the processing of step SE807, step SE809, or step SE810 is executed, a state designation command indicating a transition from the normal game state to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE811). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing so that a presentation indicating a transition from the normal game state to the third time-shortened state ST3A-ST3C is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE803: YES), and if the value of the first standby counter 406 is "0" (step SE812: NO), the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result is continued is set in the first standby counter 406 (step SE813). Specifically, if the result is the first time-saving result, "50" corresponding to the third A time-saving state ST3A is set in the first standby counter 406, if the result is the second time-saving result, "100" corresponding to the third B time-saving state ST3B is set in the first standby counter 406, and if the result is the third time-saving result, "130" corresponding to the third C time-saving state ST3C is set in the first standby counter 406.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE814). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is in a latent state.

If the value of the first standby counter 406 is 1 or more (step SE812: YES), and if the value of the second standby counter 407 is "0" (step SE815: NO), the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result is continued is set in the second standby counter 407 (step SE816). Specifically, if the result is the first time-saving result, the second standby counter 407 is set to "50" corresponding to the third A time-saving state ST3A, if the result is the second time-saving result, the second standby counter 407 is set to "100" corresponding to the third B time-saving state ST3B, and if the result is the third time-saving result, the second standby counter 407 is set to "130" corresponding to the third C time-saving state ST3C.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-shortening state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE817). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-shortening state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-shortening state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-shortening state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is instead latent.

If the value of the second standby counter 407 is 1 or more (step SE815: YES), and if the value of the third standby counter 408 is "0" (step SE818: NO), the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result is continued is set in the third standby counter 408 (step SE819). Specifically, if the result is the first time-saving result, the third standby counter 408 is set to "50" corresponding to the third A time-saving state ST3A, if the result is the second time-saving result, the third standby counter 408 is set to "100" corresponding to the third B time-saving state ST3B, and if the result is the third time-saving result, the third standby counter 408 is set to "130" corresponding to the third C time-saving state ST3C.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE820). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is instead latent.

On the other hand, if all the values of the first to third standby counters 406 to 408 are 1 or greater (step SE818: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated. In this case, the current time-saving result is invalidated without any settings related to latency being made as a result of the current time-saving result.

In this embodiment, the processing contents of the process of determining the variation pattern in the sound/light side MPU 93 are the same as the process of determining the variation pattern in the 22nd embodiment (Fig. 189). In other words, if a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results has started in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A, but the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is newly started with the first to third time-saving results as a trigger when the current game round ends, a process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication is executed (step SC809). In the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5") is selected as the stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first time-saving pattern combination ("1, 2, 3") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second time-saving pattern combination ("2, 3, 4") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third time-saving pattern combination ("3, 4, 5") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop pattern for time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combination of the first to third time-saving patterns selected as described above are determined by lottery. In addition, red is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC810).

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3A, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and a setting related to latency occurs in the main MPU 82, a process for determining a stop pattern for latency suggestion is executed (step SC812). In the process for determining a stop pattern for latency suggestion, a combination of latent occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In this case, if the current result is the first time-saving result, the first latent occurrence pattern combination ("5, 6, 7") is selected, if the current result is the second time-saving result, the second latent occurrence pattern combination ("6, 7, 8") is selected, and if the current result is the third time-saving result, the third latent occurrence pattern combination ("7, 8, 9") is selected. In addition, in the process of determining the stop symbols for latent indication, the activated lines L1 to L5 on which the combination of the first to third latent occurrence symbols selected as described above is stopped and displayed are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step SC813).

In the time-saving state ST1-ST3A, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is started and the current time-saving result is invalidated because the game state is in a high probability state, or when the current time-saving result is invalidated because all values of the first to third standby counters 406-408 are 1 or more at the end of the current game round, a stop pattern determination process for a non-missed reach is executed (step SC806). In the stop pattern determination process for a non-missed reach, a stop result is determined by lottery to be displayed as a stop result in the pattern rows Z1-Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which are a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3", "2, 3, 4", "3, 4, 5"), a combination of patterns that are potential occurrence patterns ("5, 6, 7", "6, 7, 8", "7, 8, 9"), and a combination of patterns that is a non-missed reach pattern combination other than the miss reach pattern combination. Additionally, blue is selected as the stop result for the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SC807).

Figure 215 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE901). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SE901: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes from step SE902 onward.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SE901: NO, step SE902: YES), that is, if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the time-saving state counter 386 is decremented (step SE903), the first standby counter 406 is decremented (step SE904), the second standby counter 407 is decremented (step SE905), and the third standby counter 408 is decremented (step SE906). In the decrement process of the time-saving state counter 386, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is decremented by 1. In the decrement process of the first standby counter 406, the value of the first standby counter 406 is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the first standby counter 406 is 1 or more. In the subtraction process of the second standby counter 407, the value of the second standby counter 407 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the second standby counter 407 is 1 or greater. In the subtraction process of the third standby counter 408, the value of the third standby counter 408 is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the value of the third standby counter 408 is 1 or greater.

Here, since the processing of steps SE904 to SE906 is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the value of the time-saving state counter 386 decremented by 1 when one play is performed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the subject of execution, but the values of the standby counters 406 to 408 corresponding to the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are also decremented by 1. Therefore, when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the subject of execution decremented by 1 when one play is performed, but the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is also decremented by 1.

The first time-saving state ST1 has a continuation count of 100 times, the second time-saving state ST2 has a continuation count of 150 times, the thirdA time-saving state ST3A has a continuation count of 50 times, the thirdB time-saving state ST3B has a continuation count of 100 times, and the thirdC time-saving state ST3C has a continuation count of 130 times. Therefore, depending on the timing when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed ends, the value of the first standby counter 406 may be 1 or more, and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C may be executed for the remaining continuation count stored in the first standby counter 406, following the time-saving state ST1-ST3C up to that point. In addition, the value of the standby counters 406-408 may become "0" midway through the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C may end without being executed.

Then, it is determined whether a shift trigger for the standby counters 406 to 408 has occurred (step SE907). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the first standby counter 406, which had a value of 1 or more, has become "0" as a result of the processing of step SE904 being executed. If the determination is positive, the shift processing for the standby counters 406 to 408 is executed (step SE908). In this case, the value of the second standby counter 407 is shifted to the first standby counter 406, and the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0". It is also determined whether the value of the second standby counter 407, which had a value of 1 or more, has become "0" as a result of the processing of step SE905 being executed. If the determination is positive, the shift processing for the standby counters 406 to 408 is executed (step SE908). In this case, the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step SE907 or if the processing of step SE908 is executed, it is judged whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed has ended by judging whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SE909). If the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "0" (step SE909: YES), it is judged whether the value of the first standby counter 406 is 1 or more (step SE910).

If a positive judgment is made in step SE910, it means that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is present in the latent state. In this case, first, a setting process is executed for the time-saving state counter 386 (step SE911). In the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386, the value of the first standby counter 406 is set to the time-saving state counter 386. Then, a setting process for the time-saving target counter 371 is executed (step SE912). In the setting process for the time-saving target counter 371, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. As a result, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the execution target. In addition, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the execution target is executed for the number of continuations corresponding to the value set in the time-saving state counter 386 in step SE911. Then, a shift process for the standby counters 406 to 408 is executed (step SE913). In this shift process, the value of the second standby counter 407 is shifted to the first standby counter 406, and the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0."

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE916). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed to end, and for a performance indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started to be executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In addition, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE917). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0," the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is newly started.

If a negative judgment is made in step SE910, the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SE914). This causes the game state to change to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SE915), a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have ended and transition has been made to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SE916), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SE917).

The above-described embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

The main RAM 84 is provided with a first standby counter 406, a second standby counter 407, and a third standby counter 408. When a game corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, information on the number of times the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the time-saving results continue is stored in the order of the first standby counter 406 → the second standby counter 407 → the third standby counter 408. As a result, regardless of whether the same type of third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is already in a latent state, multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are in a latent state according to the order in which the time-saving results occur. As a result, it is possible to diversify the combinations of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C that are the targets of the latent state when multiple third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are in a latent state at the same time.

When the information on the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in effect is set in all of the first through third standby counters 406-408, and a game play corresponding to the first through third time-saving results is executed, the time-saving results are invalidated. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration in a configuration in which multiple third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C can be inactive at the same time.

If multiple third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C are latent when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed ends, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that became latent first is set as the execution target first. This makes it possible to set the latent third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C as the execution target in the order in which they became latent.

<Alternative to the twenty-ninth embodiment>
(1) Fig. 216 is a flow chart showing another form of the time-saving result setting process in the 29th embodiment. Steps SF101 to SF111 execute the same process as steps SE801 to SE811 in the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 214) in the 29th embodiment. Steps SF112 to SF120 execute the same process as steps SE812 to SE820 in the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 214) in the 29th embodiment.

When a game play corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed during execution of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, and all values of the first to third standby counters 406 to 408 are 1 or greater (step SF118: YES), a shift process of the standby counters 406 to 408 is executed (step SF121). In this shift process, the value of the second standby counter 407 is shifted to the first standby counter 406, and the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0".

Then, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result is continued is set in the third standby counter 408 (step SF122). Specifically, if the result is the first time-saving result, the third standby counter 408 is set to "50" corresponding to the third A time-saving state ST3A, if the result is the second time-saving result, the third standby counter 408 is set to "100" corresponding to the third B time-saving state ST3B, and if the result is the third time-saving result, the third standby counter 408 is set to "130" corresponding to the third C time-saving state ST3C.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF123). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is instead latent.

According to the above configuration, when a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed while the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are being executed, and all values of the first to third standby counters 406 to 408 are 1 or greater, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the earliest to become the latent target is invalidated, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that corresponds to the current time-saving result becomes the last to be executed and becomes the latent target. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is set as the latent target in response to a time-saving result.

(2) FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing another form of the setting process for the time-saving result in the 29th embodiment. Steps SF201 to SF211 execute the same process as steps SE801 to SE811 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 29th embodiment (FIG. 214).

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SF203: YES), and if the value of the third standby counter 408 is "0" (step SF212: NO), a setting process is executed for the standby counters 406 to 408 (step SF213). In the setting process for the standby counters 406 to 408, if the value of the first standby counter 406 is "0", the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result is set to the first standby counter 406, if the value of the first standby counter 406 is 1 or more and the value of the second standby counter 407 is "0", the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result is set to the second standby counter 407, and if the values of the first standby counter 406 and the second standby counter 407 are each 1 or more, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result is set to the third standby counter 408.

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF214). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is still latent.

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SF203: YES) and the value of the third standby counter 408 is 1 or more (step SF212: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a standby counter 406-408 whose value is less than the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result continues (step SE215). If a negative determination is made in step SE215, the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated. In this case, the current time-saving result is invalidated.

If the positive judgment is made in step SE215, the standby counter 406-409 with the smallest number of continuations is set to the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result (step SE216). As a result, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result becomes the new latency target, replacing the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C with the smallest remaining number of continuations among the multiple latency third time-saving states ST3A-ST3C. In addition, the order in which the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the latency target is the order in which the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the latency target is the order in which the previous latency target third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the overwrite target is the order in which the previous latency target is the latency target. However, this is not limited to this, and the shift process of the standby counters 406-408 may be performed so that the order in which the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the latency target is the last order.

After that, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF217). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has occurred and an effect indicating the type of the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not an execution target but is still latent.

According to the above configuration, when a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed in a situation where all the values of the standby counters 406 to 408 are 1 or more, if there is a standby counter 406 to 408 whose value is less than the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the current time-saving result becomes the new latent target instead of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C with the smallest remaining number of continuations among the multiple latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C. This makes it possible to maximize the remaining number of continuations of the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

(3) FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing another form of the time-saving progress processing in the 29th embodiment. Steps SF301 to SF308 execute the same processing as steps SE901 to SE908 in the time-saving progress processing in the 29th embodiment (FIG. 215).

If the value of the time-saving state counter 386 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step SF309: YES), it is determined whether the value of the first standby counter 406 is 1 or more (step SF310). If a positive determination is made in step SF310, it means that a latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C exists. In this case, the standby counters 406 to 408 to which the continuation count corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C with a higher priority is set are identified (step SF311). Specifically, if only the first standby counter 406 has a value of 1 or more and the second standby counter 407 and the third standby counter 408 have values of "0", the first standby counter 406 is identified. In addition, when the value of two or more standby counters 406-408 is 1 or more, the type of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that triggered the setting of the continuation number to the standby counters 406-408 is grasped, and the standby counter 406-408 to which the continuation number of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C of the highest priority type is set is identified. In this case, when there are multiple standby counters 406-408 to which the continuation number of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C of the highest priority type is set, the standby counter 406-408 that is the earliest to be executed among the standby counters 406-408 is identified. The above priority is set so that the third A time-saving state ST3A with the fewest continuation number is the highest, the third B time-saving state ST3B with the next fewest continuation number is the next highest, and the third C time-saving state ST3C with the greatest continuation number is the lowest, but this order may be reversed or may be other orders.

In addition, in this alternative embodiment, when the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is set in the standby counters 406-408 in the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 214), information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is also set in the standby counters 406-408, and when the shift process of the standby counters 406-408 is executed, information on the type of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that triggered the setting is also shifted along with information on the remaining number of times it continues.

Then, a setting process is executed for the time-saving state counter 386 (step SF312). In the setting process for the time-saving state counter 386, the values of the standby counters 406 to 408 identified in step SF311 are set in the time-saving state counter 386. Then, a setting process for the time-saving target counter 371 is executed (step SF313). In the setting process for the time-saving target counter 371, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. As a result, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the execution target. In addition, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the execution target is executed for the number of continuations corresponding to the value set in the time-saving state counter 386 in step SF312. Then, a shift process for the standby counters 406 to 408 is executed (step SF314). In this shift process, if the first standby counter 406 is identified in step SF311, the value of the second standby counter 407 is shifted to the first standby counter 406, and the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0"; if the second standby counter 407 is identified in step SF311, the value of the third standby counter 408 is shifted to the second standby counter 407, and then the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0"; if the third standby counter 408 is identified in step SF311, the third standby counter 408 is cleared to "0".

Then, a state designation command indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF317). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed to end, and for a performance indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has started to be executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In addition, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SF318). Because the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0," the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times of play in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C returns to the determination mode when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is newly started.

If a negative judgment is made in step SF310, the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SF315). This causes the game state to change to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SF316), a state designation command indicating that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have ended and transition has been made to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF317), and the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SF318).

The above configuration makes it possible to target the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C for execution according to a predetermined priority.

(4) In this alternative embodiment, the types of support modes are the same as in the 25th embodiment, and are six types: low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode, third high-frequency support mode, fourth high-frequency support mode, and fifth high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 196(a)). The contents of these support modes are the same as in the 25th embodiment. The types of time-saving states are also the same as in the 25th embodiment, and are five types: first time-saving state ST1, second time-saving state ST2, 3A time-saving state ST41, 3B time-saving state ST42, and 3C time-saving state ST43 (see FIG. 196(b)). The contents of these time-saving states ST1 to ST43 are the same as in the 25th embodiment.

When the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1 as in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "2", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2 as in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment. Also, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", it corresponds to the 3A time-saving state ST41, when the time-saving target counter 371 is "4", it corresponds to the 3B time-saving state ST42, and when the time-saving target counter 371 is "5", it corresponds to the 3C time-saving state ST43.

In this alternative embodiment, when the number of times the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 continues is set in the standby counters 406-408 in the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 214), information indicating the type of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 is also set in the standby counters 406-408, and when the shift process of the standby counters 406-408 is executed, information on the type of the third time-saving state ST41-ST43 that triggered the setting is also shifted along with information on the remaining number of times it continues.

Figure 219 is a flow chart showing another form of the setting process for the time-saving result in the 29th embodiment. Steps SE414 to SE422 execute the same process as steps SE812 to SE820 in the setting process for the time-saving result in the 29th embodiment (Figure 214).

If the game result of the current game round is any of the first to third time-saving results (step SF401: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SF402). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SF402: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps SF403 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST41 to ST43 triggered by that time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SF402: NO), the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is determined to be 1 or more to determine whether the current game state is one of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST43 (step SF403). If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SF403: NO), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SF404). If the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", as in the 15th embodiment, a process is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration, and a process is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal to a HI level.

After that, if the game result of this game is the first time-saving result (step SF405: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SF406), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "50" (step SF407). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3A time-saving state ST41. Also, if the game result of this game is the second time-saving result (step SF408: YES), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "4", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SF409), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "100" (step SF410). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the 3B time-saving state ST42. Furthermore, if the game result of the current game is the third time-saving result (step SF408: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "5", the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" (step SF411), and the time-saving state counter 386 is set to "130" (step SF412). This causes the game state to transition from the normal game state to the third C time-saving state ST43.

When the processing of step SF407, step SF410, or step SF412 is executed, a state designation command indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF413). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a presentation indicating that the normal game state has been transitioned to the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43 and a presentation indicating the type of the third time-shortened state ST41-ST43.

In the process for setting the time-saving target counter 371 in step SE912 of the time-saving progress process (Fig. 215), if the 3A time-saving state ST3A becomes the target for execution from a latent state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3", if the 3B time-saving state ST3B becomes the target for execution from a latent state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "4", and if the 3C time-saving state ST3C becomes the target for execution from a latent state, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "5".

According to the above configuration, the multiple types of third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 not only differ in the number of continuations that are the end conditions, but also in the support modes. This makes it possible to diversify the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43.

(5) The number of standby counters 406-408 is not limited to three, but may be two, four, five, six or more.

(6) In a situation where all of the standby counters 406-408 are 1 or greater, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed, if there exists a standby counter 406-408 to which a value corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C with a lower priority than the priority of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is set, the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to the currently occurring time-saving result is set to the standby counter 406-408 to which a value corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C with the lowest priority is set.

(7) The configuration is not limited to one in which all of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C can be latent, and a configuration may be adopted in which some of the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C can be latent, but the remaining 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C cannot be latent. In this case, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C will be latent depending on the type of time-saving result, and their occurrence will be invalidated depending on the type of time-saving result.

(8) The number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A continues is less than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, the number of times that the 3B time-saving state ST3B continues is the same as the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, and the number of times that the 3C time-saving state ST3C continues is greater than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, but the number of times that these 3rd time-saving states ST3A to ST3C continue is arbitrary. For example, the number of times that the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C all continue may be less than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues, may be greater than the number of times that the 1st time-saving state ST1 continues and less than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues, or may be greater than the number of times that the 2nd time-saving state ST2 continues. In addition, some of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C may be configured to continue for a number of times longer than the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues.

(9) When a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the corresponding third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. However, when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C corresponding to that time-saving result may be newly started, or when a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, the occurrence of the time-saving result may be invalidated.

Thirtieth embodiment
In this embodiment, the end conditions of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 are different from those of the 19th embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the 19th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 19th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 220 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the 25th embodiment, the normal map fluctuation period, which is the duration of the fluctuation display round during which the image fluctuation display is executed in the normal map display section 38a, is a long period, a medium period, and a short period, which are different periods. The long period is 10 seconds, the medium period is 5 seconds, and the short period is 1 second. The shorter the period, the shorter the shortest period between one normal power open state and the next normal power open state, so when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously launched in a similar manner into the game area, the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an open state per unit time is relatively high.

In this embodiment, as in the 25th embodiment, there are a high expectation mode, a medium expectation mode, and a low expectation mode as execution modes of the normal power opening state, so that the expectation of the game ball entering the normal power role 34a is different. In the low expectation mode, a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As in the first embodiment, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so when a short opening of the normal power role 34a occurs once, the game ball does not basically enter the second operating port 34, and even if it does, the number of balls that enter is about one. In addition, the normal power opening state also ends when the number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal power side. However, when a short opening occurs once, even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34 as described above, it is about one, so the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side will not enter the second operating port 34.

In the medium expectation mode, the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs twice. The long opening lasts for two seconds. Since the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, when the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, about three game balls can enter the second operating port 34. In the normal power opening state of the medium expectation mode, the long opening occurs twice, with an interval period (specifically, one second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in a closed state. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the medium expectation mode occurs, about six game balls can enter the second operating port 34. As mentioned above, the normal power open state also ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit on the normal power side. However, if a long open occurs twice, as mentioned above, even if game balls enter the second operating port 34, it will only be around 6 balls, so the upper limit on the normal power side will not be reached in the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long opening is two seconds. Since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, when the long opening of the normal power device 34a occurs once, about three game balls can enter the second operating port 34. In the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times, with an interval period (specifically, one second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in a closed state. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter the second operating port 34. As described above, the normal power opening state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit number on the normal power side, which is 10. Therefore, when the normal power opening state of the high expectation mode occurs, an event may occur in which the normal power opening state ends when the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side enters the second operating port 34.

In the configuration in which the judgment mode of the normal map correctness judgment process, the fluctuation period of the normal map in the normal map display unit 38a, and the execution mode of the normal power open state are set as described above, the low frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the medium frequency support mode are set as support modes. In the low frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map correctness judgment process is a low probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is long, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a low expectation mode in which one short opening occurs. In the first high frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map correctness judgment process is a high probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high expectation mode in which three long openings occur. In the second high frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal map correctness judgment process is a low probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is short, and the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high expectation mode in which three long openings occur. In medium frequency support mode, the judgment mode for the normal map hit/miss judgment process will be the low probability mode for the normal map, the fluctuation period of the normal map will be a medium period, and the execution mode for the normal power opening state will be a medium expectation mode in which two long openings occur.

When the launch of game balls continues in the same manner so that a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs, the expectation of the proportion of the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 being in an open state per unit time is highest in the first high frequency support mode, next highest in the second high frequency support mode, next highest in the medium frequency support mode, and lowest in the low frequency support mode. In addition, since the execution mode of the normal power open state in the low frequency support mode is a low expectation mode, in the low frequency support mode, game balls hardly enter the second operating port 34, whereas in the first, second high frequency support mode, and medium frequency support mode, the execution mode of the normal power open state is a high expectation mode or a medium expectation mode, so in the first, second high frequency support mode, and medium frequency support mode, game balls can be expected to enter the second operating port 34 more than the upper limit number of second reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 112.

Figure 220 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the time-saving state set in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the 19th embodiment, there are a normal game state, a high probability state, a first time-saving state ST1, a second time-saving state ST2, and a third time-saving state ST5 as game states. The contents of the normal game state, the high probability state, the first time-saving state ST1, and the second time-saving state ST2 are the same as those in the 19th embodiment. The third time-saving state ST5 occurs when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed, and the support mode becomes a medium frequency support mode. In addition, the third time-saving state ST5 ends when a jackpot result is obtained and an open/close execution mode is generated, and ends when five small jackpot results occur without a jackpot result, or when 30 game rounds are consumed. The contents of the small jackpot result are the same as those in the 17th embodiment.

Figure 221 is an explanatory diagram to explain the memory areas of the main RAM 84 used to control the game state.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability flag 321, a ceiling counter 325, a time-saving target counter 371, a first time-saving state counter 372, and a second time-saving state counter 373, as in the 19th embodiment. Also, instead of the third time-saving state counter 374, the main RAM 84 is provided with a third time-saving small win counter 411 and a third time-saving game counter 412. Note that, in order to measure the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state, the main RAM 84 is provided with a high probability state counter, as in the first embodiment.

The third time-saving small win counter 411 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to measure the number of remaining small wins in the third time-saving state ST5, and the third time-saving play counter 412 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to measure the remaining number of continuations in the third time-saving state ST5. When the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result ends, in the special power end process (Fig. 166), in step SA908, the first time-saving state counter 372 is set to "100", and the second time-saving state counter 373, the third time-saving small win counter 411, and the third time-saving play counter 412 are cleared to "0".

Figure 222 is a flow chart showing the decrement process of the ceiling counter 325 executed in step S8310 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SF501: YES), that is, in the high probability state, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 is terminated without executing the process from step SF502 onwards. If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SF501: NO), that is, the game state is any of the normal game state, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST5, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 (step SF503) on the condition that the value of the ceiling counter 325 is 1 or more (step SF502: YES). Then, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step SF504: YES), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3" or not, and it is determined whether the third time-saving state ST5 is or not (step SF505). As with the 19th embodiment, the maximum number of play times will not be reached during the first time-saving state ST1.

If it is not the third time-saving state ST5 (step SF505: NO), the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "2" (step SF506), and the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SF507). In addition, the second time-saving state counter 373 is set to "150", which is the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues (step SF508). This results in the second time-saving state ST2, which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. After that, a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has started is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF509).

On the other hand, if the third time-saving state ST5 is reached (step ST505: YES), the second time-saving state counter 373 is set to "150", which is the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 has continued, without executing the processes of steps ST506 and SF507 (step SF508). As a result, the second time-saving state ST2 is in a latent state in a situation in which the third time-saving state ST5 is the execution target. In other words, in this embodiment, the third time-saving state ST3 is set to have a higher execution priority than the second time-saving state ST2. After that, a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 is in a latent state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF509).

Figure 223 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time-saving result executed in step S8309 of the special chart determination process (Figure 128).

If the game result of the current game round is a time-saving result (step SF601: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SF602). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SF602: YES), the setting process for this time-saving result is terminated without executing the processes in steps SF603 and onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process for a game round executed in a situation where a high probability state exists, the time-saving result is invalidated without setting the third time-saving state ST3 triggered by the time-saving result.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SF602: NO), and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "0" (step SF603: YES), the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SF604). In other words, if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in a situation other than the time-saving state ST1, ST2, or ST5, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is set to "1", and if a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in a situation in the time-saving state ST1, ST2, or ST5, the outer end flag at the time of time-saving occurrence is not set to "1". If the outer end flag is set to "1" when the time-saving feature occurs, similar to the 15th embodiment described above, processing is executed to set the output state of the second jackpot signal to a HI level for the ON duration for the outer end terminal 333 for the second jackpot signal, and processing is executed to set the output state of the advantageous state signal to a HI level for the outer end terminal 334 for the advantageous state signal.

When a negative judgment is made in step SF603 or when the process of step SF604 is executed, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "3" (step SF605). In addition, the third time-saving small win counter 411 is set to "5", which is the number of times that a small win result occurs in the third time-saving state ST5 (step SF606), and the third time-saving play count counter 412 is set to "30", which is the number of times that the third time-saving state ST5 continues (step SF607). In other words, not only in the case of a normal play state, but also in the case of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving state ST5 becomes the execution target when a play round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed. In this way, in this embodiment, the third time-saving state ST3 is set to have a higher execution priority than the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2.

Even if a time-saving result occurs in the first time-saving state ST1 and the third time-saving state ST5 becomes the target for execution, the first time-saving state counter 372 is not cleared to "0", so the first time-saving state ST1 becomes a latent state in a situation where the third time-saving state ST5 is the target for execution. Also, even if a time-saving result occurs in the second time-saving state ST2 and the third time-saving state ST5 becomes the target for execution, the second time-saving state counter 373 is not cleared to "0", so the second time-saving state ST2 becomes a latent state in a situation where the third time-saving state ST5 is the target for execution.

When a time-saving result occurs in the third time-saving state ST5, the third time-saving small win counter 411 is reset to "5", which is the number of times that a small win result has occurred in the third time-saving state ST5, and the third time-saving play counter 412 is reset to "30", which is the number of times that the third time-saving state ST5 continues. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving result from being invalidated even if it occurs in the third time-saving state ST5.

After that, if a time-saving result occurs in a game state other than the third time-saving state ST5, a state designation command indicating a transition to the third time-saving state ST5 is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93, and if a time-saving result occurs in the third time-saving state ST5, a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST5 has been reset is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF608). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, in the former case, it executes processing so that an effect indicating a transition to the third time-saving state ST5 is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and in the latter case, it executes processing so that an effect indicating that the third time-saving state ST5 has been reset is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

In this embodiment, when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in a game state other than the high probability state, a transition to the third time-saving state ST5 or a reset of the third time-saving state ST5 occurs. Therefore, when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in a game state other than the high probability state, the process for determining the variation pattern (FIG. 169) executes a process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication (step SB309). In the process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication, a combination of time-saving occurrence patterns ("1, 2, 3") is selected as a stop result to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. In addition, in the process for determining a stop pattern for time-saving indication, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of time-saving occurrence patterns are determined by lottery. In addition, red is selected as a stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SB310).

On the other hand, when a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in a high probability state, the time-saving result is invalidated. Therefore, when a game round corresponding to a time-saving result is executed in a high probability state, a process for determining a variation pattern (FIG. 169) for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach is executed (step SB306). In the process for determining a stop pattern for a non-missed reach, a lottery is used to determine the stop results to be displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, which are a combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot result, a combination of time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3"), and a combination of patterns other than the miss-reach pattern combination, that is, a non-missed-reach pattern combination. In addition, blue is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step SB307).

Figure 224 is a flowchart showing the time-saving progress process executed in step S8308 of the special chart confirmation process (Figure 128).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SF701). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SF701: YES), the time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step SF702.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is 1 or more (step SF701: NO, step SF702: YES), that is, if it is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1, ST2, ST5, the first time-saving state counter 372 is decremented (step SF703), the second time-saving state counter 373 is decremented (step SF704), and the third time-saving game number counter 412 is decremented (step SF705). In the decrement process of the first time-saving state counter 372, the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is 1 or more. In the decrement process of the second time-saving state counter 373, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is 1 or more. In the subtraction process of the third time-saving play counter 412, if the value of the third time-saving play counter 412 is 1 or more, the value of the third time-saving play counter 412 is subtracted by 1. After that, if a small win has occurred in the current play (step SF706: YES), the value of the third time-saving small win counter 411 is subtracted by 1 (step SF707).

Here, since the processing of steps SF703 to SF705 is executed regardless of the type of the current time-saving state ST1, ST2, ST5, when one game round is executed in the third time-saving state ST5, not only is the value of the third time-saving game number counter 412 decremented by 1, but if the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is 1 or more, the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is 1 or more, the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is decremented by 1. Therefore, when the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is latent in the third time-saving state ST5, not only is the remaining number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3 that is the execution target decremented by 1 when one game round is executed, but the remaining number of continuations of the latent first time-saving state ST1 or second time-saving state ST2 is also decremented by 1. In this case, a situation may occur in which the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 or the second time-saving state counter 373 becomes "0" during the third time-saving state ST5 being executed, and the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 ends while remaining latent.

When a negative judgment is made in step SF706 or when the processing of step SF707 is executed, it is judged whether or not it is the first time-saving state ST1 by judging whether or not the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1" (step SF708). When it is the first time-saving state ST1 (step SF708: YES), it is judged whether or not the number of play times for the continuation in the first time-saving state ST1 has been consumed by judging whether or not the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is "0" (step SF709). When a positive judgment is made in step SF709, the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SF711). This makes the game state a normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SF711), and a state designation command indicating that the first time-saving state ST1 has ended and transitioned to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF712).

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2" (step SF713: YES), i.e., in the second time-saving state ST2, it is determined whether the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the number of play times for the continuation in the second time-saving state ST2 has been consumed (step SF714). If a positive determination is made in step SF714, the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SF715). This changes the play state to the normal play state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SF716), and a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has ended and transitioned to the normal play state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF717).

If the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3" (step SF713: NO), that is, in the third time-saving state ST3, it is determined whether the third time-saving small win counter 411 and the third time-saving game count counter 412 are "0" or not, thereby determining whether the end condition of the third time-saving state ST5 is met (step SF718). If the end condition of the third time-saving state ST5 is met (step SF718: YES), it is determined whether the value of the first time-saving state counter 372 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether the first time-saving state ST1 is in a latent state (step SF719). If the positive determination is made in step SF719, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "1" (step SF720). As a result, the first time-saving state ST1 that was the latent target becomes the execution target. In addition, the first time-saving state ST1 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the first time-saving state counter 372.

Then, a state designation command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 indicating that the first time-saving state ST1, which was the target of latency, has become the target of execution (step SF725). When the sound/light side 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the first time-saving state ST1, which was the target of latency once again becoming the target of execution due to the third time-saving state ST5 being executed with priority as a result of the occurrence of a time-saving result during the target of execution.

If a negative judgment is made in step SF719, it is judged whether the second time-saving state ST2 is in a latent state by judging whether the value of the second time-saving state counter 373 is 1 or more (step SF721). If a positive judgment is made in step SF721, the time-saving target counter 371 is set to "2" (step SF722). As a result, the latent second time-saving state ST2 becomes the execution target. Furthermore, the second time-saving state ST2 is executed for the remaining number of continuations stored in the second time-saving state counter 373.

Then, a state designation command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 indicating that the second time-saving state ST2, which was the target of latency, has become the target of execution (step SF725). When the sound/light side 93 receives the state designation command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance indicating that the second time-saving state ST2, which was the target of latency once, has become the target of execution again because the third time-saving state ST5 was executed with priority due to the occurrence of a time-saving result during the target of execution.

If a negative judgment is made in step SF721, the time-saving target counter 371 is cleared to "0" (step SF723). This causes the game state to change to the normal game state. In addition, the outer end flag at the time of the end of the time-saving in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SF724), and a state designation command indicating that the third time-saving state ST5 has ended and transition has been made to the normal game state is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SF725).

According to the above configuration, when a game corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 that was the execution target is hidden, and the third time-saving state ST5 is executed. The third time-saving state ST5 is less advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2. Therefore, in a situation where the remaining number of continuations in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is equal to or greater than the number of continuations in the third time-saving state ST5, the player will expect that the time-saving result will not occur. On the other hand, since the third time-saving state ST5 is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, in a situation where the remaining number of continuations in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is small, the player will expect that the time-saving result will occur. In other words, it is possible to create a situation in which the player expects that the time-saving result will not occur and a situation in which the player expects that the time-saving result will occur, depending on the remaining number of times the game continues in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, which makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

When the third time-saving state ST5 becomes the target of execution by executing a game round corresponding to the time-saving result during the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 that was the target of execution becomes a latent state, and then when the third time-saving state ST5 to be executed ends, if the remaining number of continuations of the latent first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is 1 or more, the latent first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 becomes the target of execution again. In this case, the third time-saving state ST5 ends when 30 game rounds are consumed and also ends when five small win results occur, so if five small win results occur early, the third time-saving state ST5 ends before 30 game rounds are consumed, and the latent first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is resumed. Therefore, the player can expect a small win to occur in the third time-saving state ST5, when the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is in the latent state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

<Alternative to the 30th embodiment>
(1) Fig. 225(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining another form of the time-saving state. In this another form, a first time-saving state ST1 and a second time-saving state ST2 are set as the time-saving state, and a third-A time-saving state ST61, a third-B time-saving state ST62, and a third-C time-saving state ST63 are set instead of the third time-saving state ST5.

The 3A time-saving state ST61 occurs when a game corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed, as in the 21st embodiment, and the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. The 3A time-saving state ST61 ends when a jackpot result is obtained and an open/close execution mode is generated, and ends when 100 game times are consumed without a jackpot result being generated. The 3B time-saving state ST62 occurs when a game corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed, as in the 21st embodiment, and the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. The 3B time-saving state ST62 ends when a jackpot result is obtained and an open/close execution mode is generated, and ends when 20 small win results are generated without a jackpot result being generated. The 3C time-saving state ST63 occurs when a game corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed, as in the 21st embodiment, and the support mode becomes the medium-frequency support mode. In addition, the 3C time-saving state ST63 ends when a big win occurs and the open/close execution mode occurs, and also ends when five small wins occur without a big win, or when 30 play times are consumed.

Of the third time-saving states ST61 to ST63, the third-B time-saving state ST62 is the most advantageous, the third-A time-saving state ST61 is the next most advantageous, and the third-C time-saving state ST63 is the least advantageous. On the other hand, the priority of the execution target is the third-C time-saving state ST63, the third-A time-saving state ST61 is the next most advantageous, and the third-B time-saving state ST62 is the least advantageous. Note that in this alternative embodiment, even if a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving state ST61 to ST63 corresponding to that time-saving result remains latent, and the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 being executed remains as the execution target.

Even if a game round corresponding to the first or second time-saving result is executed in the middle of the 3C time-saving state ST63, the 3C time-saving state ST63 continues to be the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST61 or the 3B time-saving state ST62 corresponding to the time-saving result that occurred becomes the latent target. Also, if a game round corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed in the middle of the 3A time-saving state ST61 or the 3B time-saving state ST62, the 3C time-saving state ST63 becomes the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST61 or the 3B time-saving state ST62 that was the execution target until then becomes the latent target. In these cases, if the third C time-saving state ST63 ends before the end condition of the latent third A time-saving state ST61 or the latent third B time-saving state ST62 is met, the latent third A time-saving state ST61 or the latent third B time-saving state ST62 will become the execution target, so the player will expect the relatively less advantageous third C time-saving state ST63 to end early.

(2) FIG. 225(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining another form of the time-saving state. In this another form, the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2 are set as the time-saving state, and the third A time-saving state ST71, the third B time-saving state ST72, and the third C time-saving state ST73 are set instead of the third time-saving state ST5.

The 3A time-saving state ST71 occurs when a game corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed, as in the 21st embodiment, and the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. The 3A time-saving state ST71 ends when a jackpot result occurs and an open/close execution mode occurs, and ends when 100 game times are consumed without a jackpot result occurring. The 3B time-saving state ST72 occurs when a game corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed, as in the 21st embodiment, and the support mode becomes the medium-frequency support mode. The 3B time-saving state ST72 ends when a jackpot result occurs and an open/close execution mode occurs, and ends when 20 normal power open states occur without a jackpot result occurring. The 3C time-saving state ST73 occurs when a game corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed, as in the 21st embodiment, and the support mode becomes the medium-frequency support mode. In addition, the 3C time-saving state ST73 ends when a big win occurs and the open/close execution mode occurs, and also ends when five small wins occur without a big win.

Of the third time-saving states ST71 to ST73, the third A time-saving state ST71 is the most advantageous, the third B time-saving state ST72 is the next most advantageous, and the third C time-saving state ST73 is the least advantageous. On the other hand, the priority of the execution target is the third C time-saving state ST73, the third B time-saving state ST72 is the next most advantageous, and the third A time-saving state ST71 is the least advantageous. Note that in this alternative embodiment, even if a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed in the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving state ST71 to ST73 corresponding to that time-saving result remains latent, and the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 being executed remains the execution target.

Even if a game round corresponding to the first or second time-saving result is executed in the middle of the 3C time-saving state ST73, the 3C time-saving state ST73 continues to be the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST71 or the 3B time-saving state ST72 corresponding to the time-saving result that occurred becomes the latent target. Also, if a game round corresponding to the third time-saving result is executed in the middle of the 3A time-saving state ST71 or the 3B time-saving state ST72, the 3C time-saving state ST73 becomes the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST71 or the 3B time-saving state ST72 that was the execution target until then becomes the latent target. In these cases, if the third C time-saving state ST73 ends before the end condition of the latent third A time-saving state ST71 or third B time-saving state ST72 is met, the latent third A time-saving state ST71 or third B time-saving state ST72 will become the execution target, so the player will expect the relatively less advantageous third C time-saving state ST73 to end early.

Even if a game round corresponding to the first time-saving result is executed during the 3B time-saving state ST72, the 3B time-saving state ST72 continues to be the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST71 corresponding to the time-saving result that occurred becomes the latent target. Also, if a game round corresponding to the second time-saving result is executed during the 3A time-saving state ST71, the 3B time-saving state ST72 becomes the execution target, and the 3A time-saving state ST71 that was the execution target until then becomes the latent target. In these cases, if the 3B time-saving state ST72 ends before the end condition of the 3A time-saving state ST71 that is the latent target is met, the 3A time-saving state ST71 that is the latent target becomes the execution target, so the player will expect the 3B time-saving state ST72, which is relatively less advantageous, to end early.

Thirty-first embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the performance in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are different from those of the twenty-first embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the twenty-first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figures 226(a) to 226(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the effects executed by the pattern display device 41 in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C.

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, a first stage, a second stage, and a third stage are set as groups for differentiating the execution mode of the presentation according to the number of times played, as in the above-mentioned 21st embodiment. The first stage is set as the range from the start of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C until 20 times played are played, regardless of whether it is the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, the third-A time-saving state ST3A, the third-B time-saving state ST3B, or the third-C time-saving state ST3C. The third stage is set as the last play of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, regardless of whether it is the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, the third-A time-saving state ST3A, the third-B time-saving state ST3B, or the third-C time-saving state ST3C. The second stage is set as the range of play times from the end of the first stage to the execution of the third stage, regardless of whether it is the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, the third A time-saving state ST3A, the third B time-saving state ST3B, or the third C time-saving state ST3C. In other words, the number of play times in the first stage and the number of play times in the third stage are the same in all time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, while the number of play times in the second stage differs depending on the type of time-saving state ST1 to ST3C.

Figure 226 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in the first stage of each time-saving state ST1 to ST3C. The execution mode of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in the first stage is common to all of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. Specifically, as the execution mode of the effect in the first stage, the pattern display device 41 displays a moving image in which the character image G32 for the first stage is moving in front of the background image G31 for the first stage. In addition, the pattern display area G33 and the number of times played area G34 are displayed so as to be in front of the background image G31 for the first stage and the character image G32 for the first stage.

In the pattern display area G33, three pattern rows are set in which the pattern is changed, and the pattern is changed in each game. The types of patterns displayed in these pattern rows, the reach display according to the lottery result of the game, and the stop result of the pattern according to the lottery result of the game are the same as those described with reference to Figures 4 and 5 in the first embodiment. In this case, when the reach display is performed, the pattern may be changed in a state in which the background image G31 for the first stage and the character image G32 for the first stage are not displayed and the pattern display area G33 is displayed on the entire display surface of the pattern display device 41, and in addition to or instead of that, a moving image for the reach display may be displayed in a state in which the background image G31 for the first stage and the character image G32 for the first stage are not displayed. Although not shown, the pattern display area G33 displays the first reserved display area 42a, the second reserved display area 42b, and the state suggestion area 43 as shown in Figure 4(b) in the first embodiment. However, at least a portion of the first pending display area 42a, the second pending display area 42b, and the status suggestion area 43 may be configured to be displayed in an area different from the pattern display area G33 on the pattern display device 41.

The number of times played area G34 displays the total number of times played in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C. Each time a new play is started, the number of times played displayed in the number of times played area G34 is incremented by 1. When the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target for execution, the total number of times played in the number of times played area G34 may be cleared to 0, or the number of newly executed play times may be added to the total number of play times up to that point without being cleared to 0.

Figure 226 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in the second stage of each time-saving state ST1 to ST3C. The execution mode of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in the second stage is common to all of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. Specifically, as the execution mode of the effect in the second stage, the pattern display device 41 displays a moving image in which the character image G36 for the second stage moves in front of the background image G35 for the second stage. In addition, the pattern display area G33 and the number of times consumed area G34 are displayed so as to be in front of the background image G35 for the second stage and the character image G36 for the second stage. The contents of the pattern display area G33 and the number of times consumed area G34 are the same as those in the first stage.

Figure 226 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in the third stage of each time-saving state ST1 to ST3C in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not latent. The execution mode of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in the third stage is common to all time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. Specifically, as the execution mode of the effect in the third stage, the pattern display device 41 displays a moving image in which the character image G38 for the third stage moves in front of the background image G37 for the third stage. In addition, the pattern display area G33 and the final suggestion area G39 are displayed so as to be in front of the background image G37 for the third stage and the character image G38 for the third stage. The contents of the pattern display area G33 are the same as those in the first and second stages. In the final suggestion area G39, a display is made suggesting that the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C will end when the current game round is consumed (specifically, the display of "END"). A player who sees the final suggestion area G39 can understand that the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C will end in this play round.

In this embodiment, as in the above 21st embodiment, when any of the first to third time-saving results occurs in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the type of time-saving result becomes latent. When the last game round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C currently being executed ends while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C starts as is, provided that no jackpot result occurs in the last game round. In this case, in the last game round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C currently being executed, the presentation is executed in a manner that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will start.

Figure 227 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 when the last game of each time-saving state ST1 to ST3C in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent does not result in a jackpot. The execution mode of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in this situation is common regardless of which of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is the execution target, and is also common regardless of which of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is latent. Specifically, as the execution mode of the effect during the time-saving continuation, the pattern display device 41 displays a moving image in which the character image G42 for time-saving continuation is moving in front of the background image G41 for time-saving continuation. In addition, the pattern display area G33 and the continuation suggestion area G43 are displayed so as to be in front of the background image G41 for time-saving continuation and the character image G42 for time-saving continuation. The content of the pattern display area G33 is the same as in the first, second, and third stages. In the continuation suggestion area G43, even after the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C ends in the current play round, a display is displayed suggesting that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will start (specifically, the display "It's still going on"). A player who sees the continuation suggestion area G43 can understand that even if the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C ends in the current play round, the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will start, and the time-saving state ST1-ST3C will continue.

As described above, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends while the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C to be executed starts, but even if it is latent, the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue is subtracted each time a game round is played. When the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target for execution, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends when the remaining number of game rounds at that time have been played. When the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target for execution, the performance at the start is the first stage regardless of the remaining number of times that it continues, and the first stage ends when 20 game rounds have been played, and the second stage begins. In this case, the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will continue is less than the original number of times, so the final game turn of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will occur midway through the first stage or the second stage. In the final game turn, the presentation is executed in a manner that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will end with a number of turns less than the original number of times.

Figure 227 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect in the pattern display device 41 that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will end with fewer times than the original number of times. The execution mode of the effect executed by the pattern display device 41 in this situation is common regardless of which of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C is the execution target. Specifically, as the execution mode of the effect at the time of the mid-way end, the pattern display device 41 displays a moving image in which the character image G44 for the mid-way end is moving. In addition, the pattern display area G33 and the mid-way end suggestion area G45 are displayed so as to exist in front of the character image G44 for the mid-way end. The content of the pattern display area G33 is the same as in the first stage, second stage, and third stage. In the mid-way end suggestion area G45, a display is made suggesting that the current third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will end with the current play even if it is in the middle of the first stage or the middle of the second stage (specifically, a display of "This is the end"). A player who sees the mid-game end indication area G45 can understand that the current third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will end in this game even if the player is in the middle of the first or second stage.

Figure 228 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the sound/light side RAM 95 used by the sound/light side MPU 93 to control the execution of the above-mentioned effects in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C.

The sound/light side RAM 95 is provided with a time-saving flag 415, a performance side time-saving continuation counter 416, and a post-latency execution flag 417. The time-saving flag 415 is a flag for the sound/light side MPU 93 to identify that the current state is the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and the time-saving flag 415 is set to "1" when a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C has started is received from the main side MPU 82, and the time-saving flag 415 is cleared to "0" when a state designation command indicating that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C has ended is received from the main side MPU 82.

The presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is a counter for the sound/light-emitting side MPU 93 to determine the number of times a game has been played in a newly started time-saving state ST1-ST3C. When a time-saving state ST1-ST3C is started from a game state other than the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is cleared to "0." Also, when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed ends and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C becomes the target to be executed while the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is cleared to "0." Each time a game is played in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is incremented by one. The sound/light side MPU 93 determines that the game is in the first stage when the value of the presentation side time-saving continuation counter 416 is 20 or less, and determines that the game is in the second stage when the game is not the last play in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C and the value of the presentation side time-saving continuation counter 416 is 21 or more.

The post-latency execution flag 417 is a flag for the sound/light side MPU 93 to identify that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C to be executed has changed from a latent state to a state to be executed. When a state designation command is received from the main side MPU 82 indicating that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that was the latent state has started, the post-latency execution flag 417 is set to "1", and when a state designation command is received from the main side MPU 82 indicating that the time-saving states ST1-ST3C have ended, the post-latency execution flag 417 is cleared to "0".

Figure 229 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is not being reached (step SF801: NO), in step SF802, if the game is in a normal game state, the normal game repetition period table 312 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the game is in a high probability state, the high probability game repetition period table 316 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. The contents of the normal game repetition period table 312 and the high probability game repetition period table 316 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

If it is any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SF801: YES), the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the main RAM 84 is incremented by 1 (step SF803). As in the 21st embodiment, the time-saving continuation counter 375 is cleared to "0" when the first time-saving state ST1 starts, the second time-saving state ST2 starts, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C starts, and when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the execution target when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent and ends.

Then, it is determined whether the current game round is the last game round in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SF804). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84 is "1". As in the 21st embodiment, the time-saving state counter 386 is a counter that allows the main MPU 82 to identify the remaining number of times the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution will continue. If a positive determination is made in step SF804, the game round period table 315 for the third stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step SF805).

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step SF809 described later with reference to the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round or a miss reach display occurs, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding tables in the other game round period tables 312 to 314, 316 are referenced. Specifically, a period of 30 seconds or more is selected as the variable display period for the game round. In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step SF809 described later with reference to the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, if a jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and a miss reach display does not occur, the variable display period at the end of the time reduction is selected regardless of the type of reserved information that triggered the start of the game round and the number of reserved information reserved and stored in the special chart reserved area 84a, and regardless of the numerical information of the variable type counter CS included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of the current game round. The variable display period at the end of the time-saving is longer than the longest period that can be selected when a non-reach-compatible table in the other game-time period tables 312-314, 316 is referred to, specifically, 30 seconds. In other words, in the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed, regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process and the occurrence or non-occurrence of a miss-reach display, a period of 30 seconds or more, which is longer than the longest period that can be selected when a non-reach-compatible table in the other game-time period tables 312-314, 316 is referred to, is selected as the variable display period of the game. As a result, in the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed, sufficient time is secured for the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is ending. Then, in the final game in which sufficient time has been secured, the normal third stage presentation as shown in FIG. 226(c), the third stage presentation for continuing the time-saving feature as shown in FIG. 227(a), or the third stage presentation for ending the game midway as shown in FIG. 227(b) will be executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step SF804, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is judged to be 20 or less to judge whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is the first stage or not (step SF806). As already explained, the first stage is set as the range from the start of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to the consumption of 20 game rounds, regardless of whether it is the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, the third A time-saving state ST3A, the third B time-saving state ST3B, or the third C time-saving state ST3C. This is also the case for the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the execution target from the latent state. If a positive judgment is made in step SF806, the game round period table 313 for the first stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step SF807). The contents of the game round period table 313 for the first stage time-saving are the same as those in the above fifteenth embodiment. In the first stage of play, the first stage presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 226(a).

If a negative judgment is made in step SF806, this means that the game is not the last play in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed, and it is not the first stage either, so it is in the second stage. In this case, the play time period table 314 for the second stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step SF808). The contents of the play time period table 314 for the second stage time-saving are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment described above. In the second stage play, the second stage presentation as shown in FIG. 226(b) is executed.

When the processing of step SF802, step SF805, step SF807 or step SF808 is executed, the variable display period selection process is executed by referring to the game round period table 312-316 read in these processes (step SF809). Since the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information, when the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is selected by referring to the game round period table 312-316, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS becomes the numerical information of the variable type counter CS when the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of this game round is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 or the second special chart reserved area 112. After that, the information of the variable display period selected in step SF809 is set in the special chart timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step SF810). The numerical information set in the special drawing timer counter is updated by the timer update process in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 14).

Incidentally, the information on the variable display period selected in step SF809 is set in the variable command in step S816 of the special chart variable start process (Figure 20) and transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. In addition, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the variable command transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the sound/light side MPU 93 contains not only the information on the variable display period of the number of play rounds selected in step SF809, but also the information on the value stored in the time-saving state counter 386 and the information on the value stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387. As a result, the sound/light side MPU 93 can grasp not only information about the variable display period of the number of times played, but also the type of time-saving state ST1-ST3C being executed and the type of stage of that time-saving state ST1-ST3C, based on the variable command received from the main side MPU 82, and can grasp information about whether or not the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, and if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will continue.

Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the performance control process executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. Note that the performance control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 milliseconds) in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C.

First, it is determined whether a state designation command has been received from the main MPU 82 (step SF901). As in the 21st embodiment, the state designation command is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93 when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is newly started in a situation other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and a game state other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is entered, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C to be latent starts, or when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent.

If a state designation command has been received (step SF901: YES), it is determined whether information corresponding to a new start of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is set in the state designation command (step SF902). If a positive determination is made in step SF902, the time-saving flag 415 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is set to "1" (step SF903). In addition, the value of the performance side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0" (step SF904).

Then, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the newly started time-saving state ST1-ST3C is the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that was the latent target is set in the state designation command received this time (step SF905). In other words, when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is started, the main side MPU 82 sends a state designation command to the sound-light side MPU 93, but when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed ends and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is started in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, information indicating that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has been started as the execution target is set in the state designation command. When the information is set in the received state designation command, the sound-light side MPU 93 makes a positive determination in step SF905. When a positive determination is made in step SF905, the sound-light side RAM 95 sets the latent execution flag 417 to "1" (step SF906).

When a state designation command in which information corresponding to the end of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is set is received from the main MPU 82 (step SF907: YES), the time-saving in progress flag 415 is cleared to "0" (step SF908). The execution after latency flag 417 is also cleared to "0" (step SF909). Note that, as in the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, even if the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed end in a situation in which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, the state designation command in which information corresponding to the end of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is set is not transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the sound-light MPU 93.

In the performance control process (Figure 230), it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 82 (step SF910). If a change command and a type command have not been received (step SF910: NO), other processing is executed (step SF912). In the other processing, processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 82 is executed.

If a variation command and a type command have been received (step SF910: YES), a variation pattern determination process is executed (step SF911). The process contents of the variation pattern determination process are the same as the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 185) in the 21st embodiment described above, except for the process contents of the pattern determination process in step SC517.

Figure 231 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the pattern determination process in this embodiment.

First, it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is present by determining whether the time-saving state flag 415 is set to "1" (step SG101). If the value of the time-saving state flag 415 is "0" and the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is not present (step SG101: NO), other decision processing is executed (step SG102). In the other decision processing, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the content of the currently received variation command and type command.

If the time-saving flag 415 is set to "1" and the game is in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C (step SG101: YES), the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light RAM 95 is incremented by 1 (step SG103). As a result, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is incremented by 1 each time a new game round is started.

Then, it is determined whether the information corresponding to the value of the time-saving state counter 386 of the main RAM 84 included in the currently received variation command corresponds to the last play of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed (step SG104). If the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is not the last play (step SG104: NO), it is determined whether the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is 20 or less, thereby determining whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is in the first stage (step SG105). If the determination is positive in step SG105, a determination process for the first stage is executed (step SG106). In the determination process for the first stage, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the first stage. Specifically, a lottery process for the execution of the performance is executed with the type of performance and the selection probability of the performance corresponding to the first stage. In this case, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variation display period of the play count included in the variation command and the information on the game result included in the type command.

In the first stage determination process, a variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a situation where the display effect shown in FIG. 226(a) is being executed, if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, if the game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the effect corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, the effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, the effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the game round are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

If the value of the production side time-saving continuation counter 416 is 21 or more (step SG105: NO), this means that it is the second stage, so a decision process for the second stage is executed (step SG107). In the decision process for the second stage, the execution content of the production is determined in a manner corresponding to the second stage. Specifically, a lottery process for executing the production is executed with the type of production and the selection probability of the production corresponding to the second stage. In this case, the execution content of the production is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the number of times of play included in the variation command and the information on the game result included in the type command.

In the determination process for the second stage, a variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a situation where the display effect shown in FIG. 226(b) is being executed, if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, if the game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the effect corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, the effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, the effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the game round are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

If the current game round is the last game round in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is being executed (step SG104: YES), the type command received this time is referenced to determine whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SG108). If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SG108: YES), the first determination process for the final game round is executed (step SG112).

If the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result (step SG108: NO) and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not lurking (step SG109: NO), the type command received this time is referenced to determine whether the current game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results (step SG110). If the current game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results (step SG110: YES), the first determination process for the final game round is executed (step SG112).

If the current game round does not correspond to any of the first to third time-saving results (step SG110: NO) and the post-latency execution flag 417 is not set to "1" (step SG111: NO), the first determination process for the final game round is executed (step SG112). If the current game round does not correspond to any of the first to third time-saving results (step SG110: NO) and the post-latency execution flag 417 is set to "1" (step SG111: YES), the second determination process for the final game round is executed (step SG113). On the other hand, if the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result (step SG108: NO) and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent (step SG109: YES), the determination process during latency is executed (step SG114).

In the first determination process for the final play round (step SG112), if the current play round corresponds to a jackpot result, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and the type of jackpot result, which corresponds to the normal third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that enables the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C and content that enables the player to recognize that a jackpot result will occur, but does not include content that enables the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in latent status even if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in latent status. If an opening/closing execution mode occurs as a result of a big win, the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is forcibly ended even if it is in the middle of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is also forcibly ended, so there is no need to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent.

In the first determination process for the final play round (step SG112), if the current play round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the normal third stage, which corresponds to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and the first to third time-saving results. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C and a content that allows the player to recognize that any of the first to third time-saving results will occur. Note that, if any of the first to third time-saving results will occur in the last play round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, a positive determination is made in step SG109, so that the first determination process for the final play round (step SG112) is not executed, but the determination process during the latent state (step SG114) is executed.

In the first determination process for the final play round (step SG112), if the current play round does not correspond to either the jackpot result or the first to third time-saving results, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner that corresponds to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and corresponds to the normal third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the current time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, and also includes content that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have ended and a transition to a normal play state has occurred.

In the first determination process (step SG112) for the final game round, the variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute the variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute the display performance of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a situation where a display effect as shown in FIG. 226(c) is being executed, if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, if the game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the effect corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, the effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, the effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the game round are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

The second determination process for the final game round (step SG113) is executed under the conditions that the current game round does not correspond to both the jackpot result and the first to third time-saving results, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not lurking, and it is the last game round in the event that the lurking third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the execution target. In the second determination process for the final game round (step SG113), the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the game round contained in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage for midway termination. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game round in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and includes a content that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C will end even though it is in the middle of the first or second stage.

In the second determination process (step SG113) for the final game round, the variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute the variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute the display performance of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a situation where a display effect such as that shown in FIG. 227(b) is being executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, an effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, an effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 in that game round and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

The process for determining the latent state (step SG114) is executed on the condition that the current play round does not correspond to a jackpot result and that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. In the process for determining the latent state (step SG114), the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage for the time-saving continuation. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C, and also includes content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will begin.

In the determination process during the latent state (step SG114), the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read fluctuation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute the performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute the display performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a situation where a display effect such as that shown in FIG. 227(a) is being executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, an effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, an effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 in that game round and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

Next, the manner in which the effects in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are executed will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 232. FIG. 232(a) shows the period during which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are executed, FIG. 232(b) shows the period during which the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, that is, the period during which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, FIG. 232(c) shows the period during which the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is executed, FIG. 232(d) shows the period during which the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is executed, FIG. 232(e) shows the period during which the normal third stage effect is executed as the effect for the game round, FIG. 232(f) shows the period during which the third stage effect for the time-saving continuation is executed as the effect for the game round, and FIG. 232(g) shows the period during which the third stage effect for the midway end is executed as the effect for the game round.

First, we will explain the case where the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is started from the normal game state and the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C does not occur. Note that the execution mode of the presentation is the same when the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target and the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C does not occur.

At the timing of t1, a game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends in the normal game state, and as shown in FIG. 232(a), a third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C of the type corresponding to that time-saving result begins. In this case, as shown in FIG. 232(c), the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is reached, and the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game round. After that, at the timing of t2, the number of game rounds corresponding to the first stage in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is completed, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the second stage begins, as shown in FIG. 232(c) and FIG. 232(d). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game round.

After that, at the timing of t3, the number of play times corresponding to the second stage in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is completed, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends and the third stage begins, as shown in FIG. 232(d). The third stage is the last play time in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. In this case, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not lurking. Therefore, in the last play time from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the performance for the play time is executed in the normal execution mode of the performance of the third stage, as shown in FIG. 232(e). Since the variable display period of the play time for the last play time is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that it is the last play time in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

Next, we will explain the case where a new third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. Note that the execution mode of the performance is the same when the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs in latent state.

At the timing of t5, the game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends in the normal game state, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of the type corresponding to that time-saving result starts as shown in FIG. 232(a). In this case, the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is reached as shown in FIG. 232(c), and the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game round. After that, the number of game rounds corresponding to the first stage in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is completed at the timing of t6, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends and the second stage begins as shown in FIG. 232(c) and FIG. 232(d). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game round.

After that, at the timing of t7, the game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and a new third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C as shown in Figures 232(a) and 232(b). In this case, in each game round, the performance corresponding to the second stage is executed, and both the time-saving state counter 386 and the third time-saving standby counter 387 are decremented.

After that, at the timing of t8, the number of play rounds corresponding to the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that is the target of execution is completed, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the third stage begins, as shown in FIG. 232(d). The third stage is the last play round of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. In this case, a new third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is lurking, and furthermore, no jackpot result occurs in that last play round. Therefore, in the last play round from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the performance for the play round is executed in the execution mode of the performance of the third stage for the continuation of the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 232(f). Since the variable display period for the final play round will be 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process, it is possible to ensure a sufficient period of time for executing a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the final play round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C and for executing a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is about to begin.

At the timing of t9, as shown in Fig. 232(a) and Fig. 232(b), the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the target of execution ends, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target of execution. In this case, in the time-saving progress process (Fig. 186), when a process for making the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C the target of execution is executed, a process for clearing the time-saving continuation counter 375 to "0" (step SC613) is executed, and in the process for specifying the variable display period (Fig. 229), it is specified whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C corresponds to the first stage or the second stage according to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375. Therefore, except when the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues is 1, when the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is started regardless of the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues, the execution content of the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) corresponds to the first stage. Also, when a state designation command is received in which information corresponding to the fact that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has become the execution target is set, a process of clearing the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 to "0" (step SF904) is executed in the performance control process (FIG. 230) of the sound/light side MPU 93, and in the pattern determination process (FIG. 231), it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C corresponds to the first stage or the second stage according to the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416. Therefore, except when the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is 1 time, when the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C starts, regardless of the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues, the execution content of the pattern determination process (FIG. 231) in the sound/light side MPU 93 corresponds to the first stage. In other words, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 232(c), the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is reached, and the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game.

After that, at timing t10, the game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and a new third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C as shown in Figures 232(a) and 232(b). In this case, in each game round, the performance corresponding to the first stage is executed, and both the time-saving state counter 386 and the third time-saving standby counter 387 are decremented.

The remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that was the target of execution at the timing of t9 continues is 17 times, which is less than the number of times that the first stage continues. Therefore, the final game round of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C starts at the timing of t11 before the values of the time-saving continuation counter 375 and the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416, which were cleared to "0" at the timing of t9, reach the value corresponding to the second stage. In this case, a new third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is lurking, and furthermore, no jackpot result occurs in the final game round. Therefore, in the final game round from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, the performance for the game round is executed in the execution mode of the performance of the third stage for time-saving continuation, as shown in FIG. 232(f). Since the variable display period for the final play round will be 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process, it is possible to ensure a sufficient period of time for executing a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the final play round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C and for executing a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is about to begin.

At the timing of t12, as shown in Fig. 232(a) and Fig. 232(b), the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that was the target of execution ends, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C becomes the target of execution. In this case, in the time-saving progress process (Fig. 186), when the process for making the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C the target of execution is executed, the process for clearing the time-saving continuation counter 375 to "0" (step SC613) is executed, and in the process for specifying the variable display period (Fig. 229), it is specified whether the time-saving state ST1-ST3C corresponds to the first stage or the second stage according to the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375. Therefore, except when the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues is 1, when the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is started regardless of the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C continues, the execution content of the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) corresponds to the first stage. Also, when a state designation command is received in which information corresponding to the fact that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has become the execution target is set, a process of clearing the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 to "0" (step SF904) is executed in the performance control process (FIG. 230) of the sound/light side MPU 93, and in the pattern determination process (FIG. 231), it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C corresponds to the first stage or the second stage according to the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416. Therefore, except when the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is 1 time, when the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C starts, regardless of the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues, the execution content of the pattern determination process (FIG. 231) in the sound/light side MPU 93 corresponds to the first stage. In other words, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 232(c), the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is reached, and the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game.

After that, at timing t13, the number of play times corresponding to the first stage in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is completed, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the second stage begins, as shown in Figures 232(c) and 232(d). In this case, the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each play time.

The remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the target of execution at the timing of t12 is 35 times, which is more than the number of times that the first stage continues and less than the total number of times that the first stage continues and the second stage continues. Therefore, the final game round of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is started at the timing of t14 before the values of the time-saving continuation counter 375 and the performance side time-saving continuation counter 416 that are cleared to "0" at the timing of t12 reach the value corresponding to the end of the second stage. In this case, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not in a lurking state, and furthermore, in the final game round, a jackpot result and a first to third time-saving result do not occur. However, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the target of execution has changed from a lurking state to a target of execution, and as described above, the final game round occurs before the number of times that the second stage ends. Therefore, in the last game round between t14 and t15, the game round presentation is executed in the execution mode of the third stage presentation for midway termination, as shown in FIG. 232(g). Since the variable display period of the last game round is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period for the presentation of the content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C, and the presentation of the content that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will end before the number of continuations corresponding to the end of the second stage is reached.

The above-described embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

In the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, the sound/light side MPU 93 executes a determination process for the latent state, provided that no jackpot result occurs. In the determination process for the latent state, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the game number included in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage for the time-saving continuation. The execution content of the performance determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and also includes a content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will start. As a result, by making the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C the execution target, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C will continue without ending.

In the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, a longer period than other game times in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game times, regardless of whether the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient period to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will start in the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent. In addition, when the variable display period is determined by the main MPU 82 in the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, there is no need to change the determination mode depending on whether the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, so it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load for determining the variable display period of the game times in the main MPU 82.

Even if it is the last play in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, if the last play corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has begun is not executed. This makes it possible to direct the player's attention to the effect for the play corresponding to the jackpot result.

In the last game round of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the execution target from the latent target, if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is not latent at that time, and the last game round does not correspond to either the big win result or the first to third time-saving results, the second determination process for the final game round is executed in the sound/light side MPU 93. In the second determination process for the final game round, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the game round contained in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage for mid-way termination. The execution content of the performance determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game round of the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C, and includes a content that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C will end even if the first or second stage is in progress. This makes it possible to allow the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C will end even if the first or second stage is in progress.

When a new time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is started, the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light RAM 95 is cleared to "0" even if the newly started time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the target of latency until then. This makes it possible to standardize the execution mode of the performance so that the first stage performance starts when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is newly started, and makes it possible to reduce the processing load. However, in this configuration, in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the target of execution from the latency target, the remaining number of continuations is subtracted due to the consumption of the game rounds in the latency state, so that the last game round is played in the middle of the first or second stage. In response to this, as described above, in the final game round, the presentation is executed in a manner that corresponds to the third stage for midway termination, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends in the middle of the first or second stage.

In the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, a longer period than other game times in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game times, regardless of whether the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the execution target from the latent target. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient period to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will end in the middle of the first or second stage in the last game of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the execution target from the latent target. In addition, when the variable display period is determined by the main MPU 82 in the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, there is no need to change the determination mode depending on whether the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the execution target from the latent target, so it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load for determining the variable display period of the game times in the main MPU 82.

Even if the last play round of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that became the execution target from the hidden target is the last play round, if the last play round corresponds to a jackpot result or one of the first to third time-saving results, the effect that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will end in the middle of the first or second stage is not executed. This makes it possible to direct the player's attention to the effect for the play round that corresponds to the jackpot result or one of the first to third time-saving results.

<Alternative to the Thirty-First Embodiment>
(1) When the latent third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C becomes an execution target, an effect corresponding to the third stage for midway termination is executed in the last game of the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C. In addition to or instead of this, when the latent third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C becomes an execution target, an effect indicating that the state has become an execution target from the latent state is executed in the first game of the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C, or when the state has become an execution target from the latent state in a game midway through the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C, an effect indicating that the state has become an execution target from the latent state is executed in the first game of the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C may be executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed to indicate that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has become an execution target from a latent state in each game from the first game to an intermediate game in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed to indicate that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has become an execution target from a latent state in each game from an intermediate game to a final game, or a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed to indicate that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has become an execution target from a latent state in all game times of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. In this manner, in a configuration in which an effect is executed to indicate that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has become an execution target from a latent state in a game other than the final game, the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become an execution target from a latent state may be notified to the player.

(2) In the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229), the variable display period may be longer or more likely to be longer in the last game of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the target of execution from the latent state than in the last game of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the target of execution from a situation other than the time-saving state ST1-ST3C. In this case, it is possible to secure a longer period for executing the effect corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the target of execution from the latent state in the last game. Also, the variable display period may be shorter or more likely to be shorter in the last game of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the target of execution from a situation other than the time-saving state ST1-ST3C. In this case, it is possible to end the last game earlier.

(3) In the final play round of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has been activated from the latent state, the play round period table 315 for the third stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 to select the variable display period of the play round. However, this is not limited to this, and even in the final play round of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has been activated from the latent state, the play round period table 313, 314 corresponding to the stage according to the number of play rounds executed in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C may be read from the main ROM 83 to select the variable display period of the play round.

(4) The configuration in which the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the third stage for midway termination in the last play of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that has become the target of execution from the latent state as in the 31st embodiment above may be applied to play states other than the time-saving states ST1-ST3C. For example, in a configuration in which a trigger for the occurrence of a high probability state occurs in the middle of a high probability state in which the probability of a jackpot result becomes a high probability mode that is higher than the low probability mode in the hit/miss determination process, a high probability state corresponding to the trigger is latent, the effect may be executed in a manner corresponding to the third stage for midway termination in the last play of the high probability state that has become the target of execution from the latent state.

(5) In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the remaining number of times the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C will continue may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. In this case, when the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target for execution, the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue at that time will be displayed on the pattern display device 41.

Thirty-second embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the performance in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are different from those of the above-mentioned 31st embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the above-mentioned 31st embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 31st embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned 21st embodiment and 31st embodiment, when any of the first to third time-saving results occurs in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes latent. Also, when a game round is consumed in a state in which the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, not only the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the target of execution continue but also the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the target of the latent state continue is subtracted. In this case, if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C becomes latent, if the number of times that latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is equal to or less than the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C that is the currently targeted execution target continues, the execution mode of the presentation related to the time-saving state ST1-ST3C will not be changed, but if the number of times that latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is greater than the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C that is the currently targeted execution target continues, the execution mode of the presentation corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will be changed.

However, even if the execution mode of the performance corresponding to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the target of latency is changed in this way, not only the execution mode of the hit/miss judgment process and the control mode of the support mode, but also the execution content of the specific process of the variable display period (Fig. 229) are not changed in the master MPU 82. In other words, when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that can be executed after the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C ends is latent in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, the processing content related to the execution control of the performance in the master MPU 82 is not changed, whereas the processing content related to the execution control of the performance in the sound-and-light side MPU 93 is changed. Specifically, when the latency of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C occurs in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the master RAM 84 is not cleared to "0" and the stored numerical information is maintained, whereas the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound-and-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0".

In a situation where the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is in the first stage, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that can be executed after the end of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C becomes latent, in the first game round after the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes latent, the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (Fig. 229) is executed in the first stage mode, and the pattern determination process in the sound/light MPU 93 (Fig. 235) is also executed in the first stage mode. However, as the game round is played, in a situation where the value of the performance side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light RAM 95 is a value corresponding to the first stage, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the main RAM 84 first becomes a value corresponding to the second stage. In this case, the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (Fig. 229) is executed in the second stage, while the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (Fig. 235) is executed in the first stage. Note that this type of performance execution state also occurs when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed is in the second stage and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that can be executed after the time-saving state ST1-ST3C ends is in a latent state.

As the game rounds are played thereafter, not only the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the main RAM 84 but also the value of the presentation side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light RAM 95 will become values corresponding to the second stage. In this case, the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (Fig. 229) is executed in the second stage mode, and the pattern determination process in the sound/light MPU 93 (Fig. 235) is also executed in the second stage mode.

As the game round is played thereafter, in a situation where the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 of the sound/light RAM 95 is a value corresponding to the second stage, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 of the main RAM 84 first becomes a value corresponding to the third stage. In this case, the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is executed in the third stage, while the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is executed in the second stage. Note that, in a situation where the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is in the second stage and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that can be executed after the end of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is in a latent state, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 of the main RAM 84 may first become a value corresponding to the third stage when the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 of the sound/light RAM 95 is a value corresponding to the first stage as a result of the game round being played thereafter. In this case, the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is executed in a third-stage manner, while the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is executed in a first-stage manner.

The game round in which the master MPU 82 has performed the execution control of the third stage of the presentation is the last game round of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the targets of the control of the support mode in the master MPU 82. When the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the targets of the execution end in a situation in which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the master RAM 84 is cleared to "0". Therefore, when the value of the presentation side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is a value corresponding to the second stage, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the master RAM 84 becomes a value corresponding to the first stage. In this case, the process of specifying the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is executed in the first stage mode, while the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is executed in the second stage mode.

As the game continues, the value of the presentation side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 may become a value corresponding to the third stage before the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the main RAM 84 becomes a value corresponding to the third stage (i.e., a value corresponding to the first or second stage). However, in the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution, the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (Fig. 229) is executed in the third stage mode regardless of the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the main RAM 84. Therefore, even if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has become the target of execution from the latent target is in the last game, the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (Fig. 229) is executed in the third stage mode and the pattern determination process in the sound/light side MPU 93 (Fig. 235) is executed in the third stage mode.

As described above, in this embodiment, as a mode of control of the execution of the performance in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C,
The process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the first stage, and the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the second stage.
The process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the second stage, and the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the second stage.
The process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the third stage, and the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the third stage.
Not only each pattern,
The process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the second stage, and the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the first stage.
The process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the third stage, and the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the first stage.
The process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the first stage, and the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the second stage.
The process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the third stage, and the process of determining the pattern in the sound/light MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the second stage.
In correspondence with each of these situations, various tables that are referenced for controlling the execution of the effects in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are stored in advance in the sound/light side ROM 94.

Figure 233 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the sound/light side ROM 94 that is referenced to control the execution of the performance in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C.

The sound-light side ROM 94 is provided with a first stage table 421 corresponding to the first stage period, a first stage table 422 corresponding to the second stage period, a first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period, a second stage table 424 corresponding to the first stage period, a second stage table 425 corresponding to the second stage period, a second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period, and a third stage table 427. The first stage table 421 corresponding to the first stage period is referenced when the process of specifying the variable display period in the main side MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the first stage and the process of determining the pattern in the sound-light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the first stage. The first stage table 422 corresponding to the second stage period is referenced when the process of specifying the variable display period in the main side MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the second stage and the process of determining the pattern in the sound-light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the first stage. The first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period is referenced when the process of specifying the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the third stage and the process of determining the pattern in the sound-light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the first stage. The second stage table 424 corresponding to the first stage period is referenced when the process of specifying the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the first stage and the process of determining the pattern in the sound-light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the second stage. The second stage table 425 corresponding to the second stage period is referenced when the process of specifying the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is the second stage and the process of determining the pattern in the sound-light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is the second stage. The second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period is referenced when the process of identifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is in the third stage and the process of determining the pattern in the sound-light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is in the second stage. The third stage table 427 is referenced when the process of identifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is in the third stage and the process of determining the pattern in the sound-light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is in the third stage.

In each of the above tables 421-427, data is set for determining by lottery the presentation of the time-saving states ST1-ST3C in the corresponding situation. By referring to the tables 421-427 corresponding to the situation in the time-saving states ST1-ST3C in the sound/light side MPU 93, the presentation corresponding to the stage grasped in the sound/light side RAM 95 is executed with the execution content corresponding to the variable display period determined by the lottery mode corresponding to the stage grasped in the main side MPU 82.

Here, in the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (Fig. 229), regardless of whether the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent or not, a longer variable display period is likely to be selected than in the case of other stages in the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed. However, as described above, if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent in the middle of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0", so even if the main MPU 82 executes the process of specifying the variable display period (Fig. 229) in a manner corresponding to the third stage and selects a long variable display period, the sound-light side MPU 93 may execute the performance corresponding to the first stage or the second stage. In this case, the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period and the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period are pre-stored in the sound-light side ROM 94 as described above. This makes it possible for the performance corresponding to the first or second stage to be executed with the execution content corresponding to the long variable display period, even if the main MPU 82 selects a long variable display period corresponding to the third stage in a situation where the sound/light side MPU 93 is controlling the execution of the performance corresponding to the first or second stage.

Figure 234 is a flowchart showing the performance control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93. Note that the performance control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 milliseconds) in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C.

First, it is determined whether a state designation command has been received from the main MPU 82 (step SG201). As in the above 21st embodiment, the state designation command is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93 when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is newly started in a situation other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and a game state other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is entered, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C to be latent starts, or when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent.

If a state designation command is received (step SG201: YES), it is determined whether information corresponding to a new start of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is set in the state designation command (step SG202). In step SG202, if the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is newly started in a game state other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, a positive determination is made, and if the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that was the target of execution ends and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the target of latency starts, a negative determination is made. If a positive determination is made in step SG202, the time-saving flag 415 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is set to "1" (step SG203). In addition, the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0" (step SG204). As a result, the content of the stage when the sound/light side MPU 93 determines the execution content of the performance is initialized to the first stage.

When a state designation command is received from the main MPU 82 in which information corresponding to the fact that a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results has been executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has been put into a lurking state is set (step SG205: YES), it is determined whether the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is equal to or greater than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has been put into a lurking state this time (step SG206). As in the 21st embodiment, the number of times that the third A time-saving state ST3A has been put into a lurking state is 50 times, the number of times that the third B time-saving state ST3B has been put into a lurking state is 100 times, and the number of times that the third C time-saving state ST3C has been put into a lurking state is 130 times. Therefore, if the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent this time, if the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed continue is 50 or more, a positive judgment is made in step SG206, and if it is less than 50, a negative judgment is made in step SG206. Also, if the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent this time, if the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed continue is 100 or more, a positive judgment is made in step SG206, and if it is less than 100, a negative judgment is made in step SG206. Also, if the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent this time, if the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed continue is 130 or more, a positive judgment is made in step SG206, and if it is less than 130, a negative judgment is made in step SG206. In addition, when the main MPU 82 sends a variable command in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C as in the 31st embodiment, the variable command is set to the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84, i.e., the information on the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution continues, so that the audio-visual MPU 93 can grasp the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution continues based on the information included in the variable command.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG206, the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light RAM 95 is cleared to "0" (step SG207). As a result, even if the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is in the middle of being executed, the content of the stage when the sound/light MPU 93 determines the execution content of the performance is initialized to the first stage.

In the performance control process (Figure 234), it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 82 (step SG208). If a change command and a type command have not been received (step SG208: NO), other processing is executed (step SG210). In other processing, processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 82 is executed. For example, if a state designation command in which information corresponding to the end of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is set has been received from the main MPU 82, the time-saving in progress flag 415 is cleared to "0".

If a variation command and a type command have been received (step SG208: YES), a variation pattern determination process is executed (step SG209). The process contents of the variation pattern determination process are the same as the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 185) in the 21st embodiment, except for the process contents of the pattern determination process in step SC517.

Figure 235 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the pattern determination process in this embodiment.

First, it is determined whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is present by determining whether the time-saving state flag 415 is set to "1" (step SG301). If the value of the time-saving state flag 415 is "0" and the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is not present (step SG301: NO), other decision processing is executed (step SG302). In the other decision processing, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the content of the currently received variation command and type command.

If the time-saving flag 415 is set to "1" and the game is in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C (step SG301: YES), the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light RAM 95 is incremented by 1 (step SG303). As a result, in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is incremented by 1 each time a new game round is started.

After that, by determining whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 of the main RAM 84 included in the currently received fluctuation command is "1" and the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 of the main RAM 84 included in the currently received fluctuation command is 1 or less, it is determined whether this is the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not latent (step SG304). Since the subtraction of the value of the time-saving state counter 386 and the subtraction of the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 when one game round is consumed are executed when the game round ends, when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "1" at the time when the fluctuation command is transmitted, it means that this is the last game round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution, and when the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is "1" at the time when the fluctuation command is transmitted, it means that this is the game round in which the remaining number of continuations of the currently latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is 0. In other words, in step SG303, it is determined whether or not this is the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is not latent. In addition to the information on the variable display period of the game selected in the process of specifying the variable display period (FIG. 229), each information of the value of the time-saving target counter 371, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375, the value of the time-saving state counter 386, and the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main RAM 84 is set.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG304, it is judged whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is the first stage by judging whether the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 is 20 or less (step SG305). If a positive judgment is made in step SG305, a determination process for the first stage is executed (step SG306). In the determination process for the first stage, it is judged which stage the specific process of the variable display period currently executed in the main MPU 82 (Figure 229) corresponds to, based on the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 and the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84 contained in the currently received variable command. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "1", it is determined that the process for determining the variable display period (FIG. 229) has been performed in a manner corresponding to the third stage, and when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is not "1", if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is 20 or less, it is determined that the process for determining the variable display period (FIG. 229) has been performed in a manner corresponding to the first stage, while if the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is 21 or more, it is determined that the process for determining the variable display period (FIG. 229) has been performed in a manner corresponding to the second stage. Note that, in the main MPU 82, as in the 31st embodiment, when the process for determining the variable display period (FIG. 229) is started in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 is incremented by 1.

In the determination process for the first stage (step SG306), if it is determined that the variable display period specification process (FIG. 229) executed this time in the master MPU 82 is executed in correspondence with the first stage, the first stage table 421 corresponding to the first stage period is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the variable display period information of the game round included in the current variation command and the game result information included in the current type command in the read first stage table 421 corresponding to the first stage period, the variation pattern table to be referred to in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variation pattern table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. Also, if it is determined that the variable display period specification process (FIG. 229) executed this time in the master MPU 82 is executed in correspondence with the second stage, the first stage table 422 corresponding to the second stage period is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the information on the variable display period of the game round included in the current variable command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the first stage table 422 corresponding to the read second stage period, the variable pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variable pattern table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. Also, when it is determined that the variable display period specification process (FIG. 229) executed this time in the main MPU 82 is executed in correspondence with the third stage, the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the information on the variable display period of the game round included in the current variable command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the read first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period, the variable pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variable pattern table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95.

The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the variation pattern table read out as described above, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform the presentation of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. Also, in step SC518 of the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to that variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads out a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read out display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to perform a display presentation of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a state where a display effect corresponding to the first stage is being executed, if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, if the game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the effect corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, the effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, the effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the game round are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

Here, when the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period is referred to, if none of the jackpot result, the first to third time-saving results, and the miss reach display occurs, the pattern display device 41 executes the performance for the game round corresponding to a complete miss, even though the main MPU 82 selects a relatively long variable display period of 30 seconds or more. Therefore, in this embodiment, although there is only one game round in this situation, the pattern display device 41 starts a new variable display of the pattern, stops the variable display of the pattern, and displays the stop result, and a predetermined number of pseudo-variable rounds (for example, three times) occur. All of the stop results in the predetermined number of pseudo-variable rounds are stop results corresponding to a complete miss, and the stop result in the last pseudo-variable round is the stop result determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185) in that game round. This makes it possible to prevent the game round corresponding to a complete miss from continuing in a monotonous state over a long variable display period.

The pseudo fluctuation times may occur in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C even in situations other than those described above, and may also occur in game states other than the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. In this case, if the pseudo fluctuation times occur more than a predetermined number of times in one game, the expectation of a jackpot result may be higher than if the pseudo fluctuation times occur less than the predetermined number of times in one game. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the pseudo fluctuation times, and by referring to the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot result from being excessively high when a predetermined number of pseudo fluctuation times occur.

If the value of the presentation side time-saving continuation counter 416 is 21 or more (step SG305: NO), this means that it is in the second stage, so a decision process for the second stage is executed (step SG307). In the decision process for the second stage, a decision is made as to which stage the currently executed variable display period specific process (FIG. 229) in the main MPU 82 corresponds, based on the value of the time-saving continuation counter 375 and the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84 contained in the currently received variable command. The content of this decision is the same as in the case of the first stage decision process (step SG306).

In the determination process for the second stage (step SG307), if it is determined that the process for specifying the variable display period currently executed in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is executed in correspondence with the first stage, the second stage table 424 corresponding to the first stage period is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the information on the variable display period of the game round included in the current variable command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the read second stage table 424 corresponding to the first stage period, the variable pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variable pattern table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. Also, if it is determined that the process for specifying the variable display period currently executed in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 229) is executed in correspondence with the second stage, the second stage table 425 corresponding to the second stage period is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the information on the variable display period of the game round included in the current variable command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the read second stage table 425 corresponding to the second stage period, the variable pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variable pattern table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. Also, when it is determined that the variable display period specification process (FIG. 229) executed this time in the main MPU 82 is executed in correspondence with the third stage, the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the information on the variable display period of the game round included in the current variable command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the read second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period, the variable pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variable pattern table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95.

The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the variation pattern table read out as described above, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform the presentation of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. Also, in step SC518 of the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to that variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads out a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read out display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to perform a display presentation of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a state where a display effect corresponding to the second stage is being executed, if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, if the game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the effect corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, the effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, the effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the game round are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

Here, when the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period is referred to, if none of the jackpot result, the first to third time-saving results, and the miss reach display occurs, the pattern display device 41 executes the performance for the game round corresponding to a complete miss, even though the main MPU 82 selects a relatively long variable display period of 30 seconds or more. Therefore, in this embodiment, although there is only one game round in this situation, the pattern display device 41 starts a new variable display of the pattern, stops the variable display of the pattern, and displays the stop result, and a predetermined number of pseudo-variable rounds (for example, three times) occur. All of the stop results in the predetermined number of pseudo-variable rounds are stop results corresponding to a complete miss, and the stop result in the last pseudo-variable round is the stop result determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variable pattern (FIG. 185) in that game round. This makes it possible to prevent the game round corresponding to a complete miss from continuing in a monotonous state over a long variable display period.

The pseudo fluctuation times may occur in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C even in situations other than those described above, and may also occur in game states other than the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. In this case, if the pseudo fluctuation times occur more than a predetermined number of times in one game, the expectation of a jackpot result may be higher than if the pseudo fluctuation times occur less than the predetermined number of times in one game. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the pseudo fluctuation times, and by referring to the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot result from being excessively high when a predetermined number of pseudo fluctuation times occur.

If this is the last game round of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are to be executed when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not lurking (step SG304: YES), a determination process for the third stage is executed (step SG308). In the determination process for the third stage, the third stage table 427 is read from the sound/light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group that corresponds to the combination of the information on the variation display period of the game round included in the current variation command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the read third stage table 427, a variation pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variation pattern table is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95.

The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the variation pattern table read out as described above, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform the presentation of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC516 of the variation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads out a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to perform a display presentation of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, in a situation where a display effect corresponding to the third stage is being executed, if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, if the game round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the effect corresponding to the first to third time-saving results is executed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach-for-miss display, the effect corresponding to the reach-for-miss display is executed, and if the game round corresponds to a complete miss, the effect corresponding to a complete miss is executed. Also, the stop result to be displayed in the pattern display area G33 of the pattern display device 41 and the stop result to be displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the game round are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (FIG. 185).

Next, the manner in which the effects are executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 236. FIG. 236(a) shows the period during which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are executed, FIG. 236(b) shows the timing at which any one of the first to third time-saving results ends, FIG. 236(c) shows the period during which the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, i.e., the period during which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, FIG. 232(d) shows the period during which the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is in effect, FIG. 232(e) shows the period during which the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is in effect, and FIG. 232(f) shows the period during which the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is in effect.

First, we will explain the case where the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is started from the normal game state and the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C does not occur. Note that the execution mode of the presentation is the same when the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target and the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C does not occur.

At the timing of t1, in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 236(b), a game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and as shown in FIG. 236(a), a third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C of the type corresponding to that time-saving result begins. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236(d), the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is reached, and the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game round. After that, at the timing of t2, the number of game rounds corresponding to the first stage in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is completed, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the second stage begins, as shown in FIG. 236(d) and FIG. 236(e). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game round.

After that, at the timing of t3, the number of play times corresponding to the second stage in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is completed, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends and the third stage begins, as shown in Figures 236 (e) and 236 (f). The third stage is the last play time in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. This last play time is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, as shown in Figure 236 (f). Since the variable display period of the play time for this last play time is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play time in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

Next, we will explain the case where a new third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. Note that the execution mode of the performance is the same when the first time-saving state ST1 or the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs in latent state.

At the timing of t5, in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 236(b), a game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and as shown in FIG. 236(a), a third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C of the type corresponding to that time-saving result begins. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236(d), the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is reached, and the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game round. After that, at the timing of t6, the number of game rounds corresponding to the first stage in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is completed, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the second stage begins, as shown in FIG. 236(d) and FIG. 236(e). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game round.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 236(b), the game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and as shown in FIG. 236(a) and FIG. 236(c), a new third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. In this case, the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is greater than the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that is the execution target continues. Therefore, as the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0," the execution mode of the performance in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C determined by the sound/light side MPU 93 is changed from the second stage to the first stage as shown in FIG. 236(d) and FIG. 236(e).

After that, at timing t8, the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 reaches a value corresponding to the consumption of the number of play times corresponding to the first stage, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends and the second stage begins, as shown in Figures 236(d) and 236(e). In this case, the presentation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage for each play time.

After that, at the timing of t9, the last game round of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that is the target of execution ends, and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that was the target of lurking becomes the new target of execution as shown in FIG. 236(c). In this case, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues for the remaining number of continuations updated by the number of game rounds executed in the situation where it was the target of lurking. However, since the value of the presentation-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is maintained without being cleared to "0" at the timing of t9, the execution mode of the presentation in the time-saving states ST1-ST3C determined by the sound/light side MPU 93 is maintained in the second stage as shown in FIG. 236(e).

After that, at the timing of t10, the number of play times corresponding to the second stage in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is completed, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends and the third stage begins, as shown in Figures 236 (e) and 236 (f). The third stage is the last play time in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C. This last play time is executed from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in Figure 236 (f). Since the variable display period of the play time for this last play time is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play time in the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

The above-described embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

When the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C becomes latent, if the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is equal to or less than the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C that is the currently targeted execution target continues, the execution mode of the performance related to the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is not changed, but if the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is greater than the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C that is the currently targeted execution target continues, the execution mode of the performance is changed to that corresponding to the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. As a result, in a situation in which the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C can become the target for execution when the time-saving state ST1-ST3C that is the target for execution ends, it is possible to provide the player with a performance according to the number of times each game is played from when the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C becomes latent until the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C becomes the target for execution and ends.

When the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent in the time-saving states ST1-ST3C, the mode of control of the execution of the presentation in the sound/light side MPU 93 is changed to the first stage, but the mode of execution of the specific process (Fig. 229) of the variable display period in the main side MPU 82 is not changed. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above without affecting the efficiency of the number of play times.

When the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, the execution mode of the process for determining the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (Fig. 229) does not change, whereas in a configuration in which the mode of the execution control of the performance in the sound/light side MPU 93 is changed to the first stage, the stage in the process for determining the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (Fig. 229) and the stage of the execution control of the performance in the sound/light side MPU 93 may not match. In response to this, the sound/light side ROM 94 prestores a table that is referenced to determine the content of the performance so that there is a one-to-one correspondence with the combination patterns of the stages in the process for determining the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (Fig. 229) and the stages of the execution control of the performance in the sound/light side MPU 93. This makes it possible to execute the performance in a mode that corresponds to the combination pattern of each of the above stages.

When the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period or the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period is referenced, if none of the jackpot result, the first to third time-saving results, and the miss reach display occurs, the pattern display device 41 will execute the performance for a game round corresponding to a complete miss, even though the main MPU 82 selects a relatively long variable display period of 30 seconds or more. In contrast, in such a situation, although there is only one game round, the pattern display device 41 will generate a predetermined number of pseudo-variable rounds (e.g., three times) in which the variable display of the patterns is newly started, the variable display of the patterns is stopped, and the stop result is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the game round corresponding to a complete miss from continuing in a monotonous state over a long variable display period.

<Alternative to the Thirty-Second Embodiment>
(1) When the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period or the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period is referred to in the pattern determination process (FIG. 235) in the sound/light side MPU 93, even if the occurrence of the miss reach display is not selected in the main side MPU 82 in the game round in which the result of the hit/miss judgment process is a miss result, the execution of the miss reach display may be selected. When the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period or the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period is referred to, the main side MPU 82 refers to the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction and selects a long period as the variable display period of the game round, while the sound/light side MPU 93 selects the performance corresponding to the first stage or the second stage. In such a situation, by actively executing the miss reach display, it is possible to prevent the game round corresponding to a complete miss from continuing in a monotonous state over a long variable display period.

(2) When the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, not only is the mode of the execution control of the presentation in the sound/light side MPU 93 changed to the first stage, but the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times played in the main side MPU 82 may also be changed to the first stage. Specifically, when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, not only is the time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 cleared to "0", but the time-saving continuation counter 375 in the main side RAM 84 may also be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to set the mode of the execution control of the presentation to the first stage when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, including the determination mode of the variable display period of the number of times played.

(3) When the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, the effect-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is not cleared to "0", but an effect indicating that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent may be executed. In this case, the effect may be executed when the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is greater than the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed is to be continued, or the effect may be executed regardless of whether the number of times that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C continues is greater than the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1-ST3C to be executed is to be continued.

(4) In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, even if a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, the time-saving result is invalidated. However, this is not limited to this, and if a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results is executed in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the number of continuations of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the time-saving result may be set in the third time-saving standby counter 387. In this case, by clearing the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 of the sound/light-side RAM 95 to "0" when the continuation number is set, it is possible to set the mode of execution control of the performance in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to the first stage when the continuation number is set.

(5) The configuration in which the mode of the control of the execution of the presentation becomes the first stage when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C as in the 32nd embodiment above may be applied to game states other than the time-saving states ST1-ST3C. For example, in a configuration in which a trigger for the occurrence of a high probability state occurs during a high probability state in which the probability of a jackpot result becomes a high probability mode that is higher than the low probability mode in the hit/miss determination process, a high probability state corresponding to the trigger is latent, the mode of the control of the execution of the presentation may be the first stage when the high probability state is latent in the high probability state.

(6) In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the remaining number of times the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C will continue may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. In this case, when a game play corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results ends in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C corresponding to the time-saving result is in a latent state, and the number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue is greater than the remaining number of times the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C being executed is to continue, the display of the remaining number of times the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C being executed is terminated, and the display of the remaining number of times the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C being the latent state this time is to continue may be started on the pattern display device 41.

Thirty-third embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution contents of the specific processing of the variable display period executed by the main MPU 82 are different from those of the 32nd embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the 32nd embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 32nd embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 237(a) is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82, Figure 237(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the main ROM 83, and Figure 237(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the sound-light ROM 94.

If the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is not in effect (step SG401: NO), in step SG402, if the game is in a normal game state, the normal game repetition period table 312 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the game is in a high probability state, the high probability game repetition period table 316 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. The contents of the normal game repetition period table 312 and the high probability game repetition period table 316 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

If it is any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SG401: YES), it is determined whether the current play is the last play in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C (step SG403). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84 is "1". As in the 21st embodiment, the time-saving state counter 386 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the remaining number of times the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed will continue. If a positive determination is made in step SG403, the play-time period table 315 for the third stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step SG404). The contents of the play-time period table 315 for the third stage time-saving are the same as those in the 32nd embodiment.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG403, the shared play time period table 431 provided in the main ROM 83 is read into the main RAM 84 as shown in FIG. 237(b) (step SG405). In other words, for play times other than the last play time in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the subject of execution, the shared play time period table 431 is referenced when the main MPU 82 determines the variable display period of the play time.

When the processing of step SG402, step SG404 or step SG405 is executed, the selection process of the variable display period is executed by referring to the game round period table 312, 315, 316, 431 read in these processes (step SG406). Since the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information, when the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is selected by referring to the game round period table 312, 315, 316, 431, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS becomes the numerical information of the variable type counter CS when the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of this game round is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 or the second special chart reserved area 112. After that, the information of the variable display period selected in step SG406 is set in the special chart timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step SG407). The numerical information set in the special drawing timer counter is updated by the timer update process in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 14).

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step SG406 with reference to the combined game round period table 431, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/loss determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS included in the first pending information or the second pending information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared with the reach-corresponding table in the combined game round period table 431 to read out the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode. In this case, the selection process of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from the case where the reach-corresponding table in the other game round period tables 312, 315, 316 is referenced, and specifically, a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding table in the normal game round period table 312, the third stage time-saving game round period table 315, and the high probability game round period table 316 is referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current game round.

If no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of playing a game round triggered by the second reserved information in a game round other than the last game round in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3. Also, even if any of the first to third time-saving results occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out.

On the other hand, in the case where the second reserved information is the execution target of the game round when no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no reach-to-miss display occurs, and the game round is started in a situation where one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserve area 112, or in the case where the first reserved information is the execution target of the game round when no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no reach-to-miss display occurs, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS contained in the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared with the non-reach-compatible table in the combined game round period table 431, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the non-reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the non-reach display mode is different from the case where a non-reach-compatible table in another game round period table is referenced, and specifically, a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a non-reach-compatible table in the normal game round period table 312, the third-stage time-saving game round period table 315, and the high probability game round period table 316 is referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current game round.

As described above, in the process of determining the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 237(a)), regardless of whether the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is in the first or second stage, the common game play period table 431 is referenced. In response to this, the sound/light ROM 94 does not have a first stage table 421 corresponding to the first stage period and a first stage table 422 corresponding to the second stage period in the above 32nd embodiment, as shown in FIG. 237(c), but instead has a common first stage table 432, and further, the second stage table 424 corresponding to the first stage period and the second stage table 425 corresponding to the second stage period in the above 32nd embodiment, but instead has a common second stage table 433.

The shared first stage table 432 is referenced when the shared play time period table 431 is referenced in the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 237(a)) and the pattern determination process in the sound/light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is in the first stage. In other words, in the first stage determination process (step SG306) in the pattern determination process (FIG. 235) of the sound/light side MPU 93, if the shared play time period table 431 is referenced in the process of specifying the variable display period currently executed in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 237(a)), the shared first stage table 432 is read from the sound/light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the information on the variable display period of the game round included in the current variable command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the read-out compatible first stage table 432, the variable pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variable pattern table is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. Note that in the first stage determination process (step SG306), when the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction is referenced in the variable display period specification process (FIG. 237(a)) executed this time in the main MPU 82, the first stage table 423 corresponding to the third stage period is referenced to determine the variable pattern table by lottery, which is the same as the above 32nd embodiment.

The shared second stage table 433 is referenced when the shared play time period table 431 is referenced in the process of specifying the variable display period in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 237(a)) and the pattern determination process in the sound/light side MPU 93 (FIG. 235) is in the second stage. In other words, in the determination process for the second stage (step SG307) in the pattern determination process (FIG. 235) of the sound/light side MPU 93, if the shared play time period table 431 is referenced in the process of specifying the variable display period currently executed in the master MPU 82 (FIG. 237(a)), the shared second stage table 433 is read from the sound/light side ROM 94. Then, from the data group corresponding to the combination of the information on the variable display period of the game round included in the current variable command and the information on the game result included in the current type command in the read-out compatible second stage table 433, the variable pattern table to be referenced in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the determined variable pattern table is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. Note that in the determination process for the second stage (step SG307), if the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction is referenced in the process of specifying the variable display period currently executed by the main MPU 82 (FIG. 237(a)), the variable pattern table is determined by lottery by referring to the second stage table 426 corresponding to the third stage period, which is the same as the above 32nd embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the determination mode of the variable display period of the game times in the main MPU 82 is the same regardless of whether it is the first stage or the second stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C. As a result, even if the execution mode of the performance is changed by executing a game time corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results in the middle of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C being latent, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy from occurring between the determination mode of the variable display period of the game times in the main MPU 82 and the determination mode of the execution content of the performance in the sound-light side MPU 93, except for the last game time of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the execution target. In this case, in the above-mentioned 32nd embodiment, the sound-light side ROM 94 is configured to store the first stage table 421 corresponding to the first stage period and the first stage table 422 corresponding to the second stage period separately, but in this embodiment, it is sufficient to store the first stage table 432 corresponding to both stages in the sound-light side ROM 94. In addition, in the above-mentioned 32nd embodiment, the second stage table 424 corresponding to the first stage period and the second stage table 425 corresponding to the second stage period are individually stored in the sound-light side ROM 94, but in this embodiment, it is sufficient to store the shared second stage table 433 in the sound-light side ROM 94. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required in the sound-light side ROM 94.

<Thirty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the performance control process executed by the sound/light side MPU 93 are different from those of the 32nd embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the 32nd embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 32nd embodiment is basically omitted.

The 32nd embodiment is based on the 21st embodiment, and even if a game corresponding to any of the 1st to 3rd time-saving results is executed in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C in which the 3rd time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is already latent, the occurrence of the time-saving result is invalidated. In contrast, this embodiment is based on the 26th embodiment, and therefore in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, the 3A time-saving state ST3A, the 3B time-saving state ST3B, and the 3C time-saving state ST3C are each independently latent, and when a time-saving result corresponding to the already latent type of the 3rd time-saving state ST3A to ST3C occurs, the remaining number of continuations of that type of the 3rd time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is reset. In response to the configuration in which multiple 3rd time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are overlappingly latent, the processing configuration of the presentation control processing in the sound and light side MPU 93 is different from that of the 32nd embodiment.

Figure 238 is a flowchart showing the performance control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 93.

First, it is determined whether a state designation command has been received from the main MPU 82 (step SG501). As in the 32nd embodiment, the state designation command is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the sound/light MPU 93 when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is newly started in a situation other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and a game state other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is entered, when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C to be latent starts, or when a game round corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent.

If a state designation command is received (step SG501: YES), it is determined whether information corresponding to a new start of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is set in the state designation command (step SG502). In step SG502, if the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is newly started in a game state other than the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, a positive determination is made, and if the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that was the target of execution ends and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the target of latency starts, a negative determination is made. If a positive determination is made in step SG502, the time-saving flag 415 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is set to "1" (step SG503). In addition, the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0" (step SG504). As a result, the content of the stage when the sound/light side MPU 93 determines the execution content of the performance is initialized to the first stage.

When a state designation command is received from the main MPU 82 in which information corresponding to the fact that a game round corresponding to any of the first to third time-saving results has been executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C has been put into a lurking state is set (step SG505: YES), it is determined whether the remaining number of times that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is equal to or greater than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that has been put into a lurking state this time (step SG506). As in the 26th embodiment, the number of times that the third-A time-saving state ST3A has been put into a lurking state is 50 times, the number of times that the third-B time-saving state ST3B has been put into a lurking state is 100 times, and the number of times that the third-C time-saving state ST3C has been put into a lurking state is 130 times. Therefore, if the 3A time-saving state ST3A is latent this time, if the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed continue is 50 or more, a positive judgment is made in step SG506, and if it is less than 50, a negative judgment is made in step SG506. Also, if the 3B time-saving state ST3B is latent this time, if the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed continue is 100 or more, a positive judgment is made in step SG506, and if it is less than 100, a negative judgment is made in step SG506. Also, if the 3C time-saving state ST3C is latent this time, if the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C to be executed continue is 130 or more, a positive judgment is made in step SG506, and if it is less than 130, a negative judgment is made in step SG506. In addition, when the main MPU 82 sends a variable command in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C as in the 31st embodiment, the variable command is set to the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84, i.e., the information on the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the target of execution can continue, so that the audio-visual MPU 93 can grasp the remaining number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are the target of execution can continue based on the information included in the variable command.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG506, it is judged whether a third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of a type different from the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of the type that is the current target of latency is already a target of latency, and if it is already a target of latency, it is judged whether the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of the type that is already a target of latency is equal to or greater than the number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of the current target of latency is (step SG507). Note that when the main side MPU 82 transmits a fluctuation command in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, it sets the values of the third A time-saving standby counter 401, the third B time-saving standby counter 402, and the third C time-saving standby counter 403 of the main side RAM 84 to the fluctuation command, so that the sound/light side MPU 93 can grasp the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of the type that is already a target of latency is already a target of latency based on the information contained in the fluctuation command.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG507, the value of the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light RAM 95 is cleared to "0" (step SG508). As a result, even if the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is in the middle of being executed, the content of the stage when the sound/light MPU 93 determines the execution content of the performance is initialized to the first stage.

In the performance control process (Figure 238), it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command have been received from the master MPU 82 (step SG509). If a change command and a type command have not been received (step SG509: NO), other processing is executed (step SG511). In other processing, processing corresponding to the command received from the master MPU 82 is executed. For example, if a state designation command in which information corresponding to the end of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is set has been received from the master MPU 82, the time-saving in progress flag 415 is cleared to "0".

If a variation command and a type command have been received (step SG509: YES), a variation pattern determination process is executed (step SG510). The content of the variation pattern determination process is the same as that of step SG209 of the performance control process (FIG. 234) in the 32nd embodiment.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which multiple types of third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are overlappingly latent in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, if a third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of a different type from the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the latent target when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is already latent, if the number of continuations of the newly latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is greater than the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed and greater than the remaining number of continuations of the already latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, the performance-side time-saving continuation counter 416 in the sound/light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to ensure that the content of the performance from the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C ends and the normal game state is restored, including the portion of the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that will subsequently become the target of execution, will have continuity from the point in time when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the target of execution at the end of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C becomes the target of execution.

<Thirty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the performance in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are different from those of the twenty-first embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the twenty-first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, a first stage, a second stage, and a third stage are set as groups for differentiating the execution mode of the presentation according to the number of times played, as in the above-mentioned 21st embodiment. The first stage is set as the range from the start of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C until 20 times played are played, regardless of whether it is the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, the third-A time-saving state ST3A, the third-B time-saving state ST3B, or the third-C time-saving state ST3C. The third stage is set as the last play of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, regardless of whether it is the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, the third-A time-saving state ST3A, the third-B time-saving state ST3B, or the third-C time-saving state ST3C. The second stage is set as the range of play times from the end of the first stage to the execution of the third stage, regardless of whether it is the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, the third A time-saving state ST3A, the third B time-saving state ST3B, or the third C time-saving state ST3C. In other words, the number of play times in the first stage and the number of play times in the third stage are common to all time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, while the number of play times in the second stage differs depending on the type of time-saving state ST1 to ST3C. In this case, in this embodiment, the main MPU 82 grasps the stage of the presentation of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C based on the remaining number of time-saving states ST1 to ST3C that are measured by the time-saving state counter 386 of the main RAM 84. Note that, since the stage of the presentation of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is grasped based on the value of the time-saving state counter 386, the main RAM 84 does not have a time-saving continuation counter 375 in this embodiment.

As in the 21st embodiment, when the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are started in a situation where the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are not in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, the number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C continue is set in the time-saving state counter 386, and when the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed ends and the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target to be executed in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main RAM 84 is set in the time-saving state counter 386. Then, when one game round ends, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is decremented by 1 in step SC603 of the time-saving progress process (FIG. 186). In addition, if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is lurking, when one game play is performed in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C that is the target of execution, the time-saving progress process (FIG. 186) decrements not only the value of the time-saving state counter 386 but also the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 by one.

Figure 239 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the remaining number of times the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are continued, as measured by the time-saving state counter 386, and the type of stage grasped by the main MPU 82. The main MPU 82 executes the process of grasping the stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C in the process of identifying the variable display period (Figure 240), and the process of identifying the variable display period (Figure 240) is executed by the main MPU 82 when a game round starts. In contrast, the process of decrementing the value of the time-saving state counter 386 by 1 based on the execution of one game round is executed in the process for progressing the time-saving state when a game round ends, as described above (Figure 186).

239, when the first time-saving state ST1 or the third time-saving state ST3B is the target of execution, the main MPU 82 identifies the first stage when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is between "81" and "100", identifies the second stage when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is between "2" and "80", and identifies the third stage when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "1". When the second time-saving state ST2 is the target of execution, the main MPU 82 identifies the first stage when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is between "131" and "150", identifies the second stage when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is between "2" and "130", and identifies the third stage when the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "1". When the 3A time-saving state ST3A is the target of execution, the main MPU 82 identifies the time-saving state counter 386 as being in the first stage when the value is between "31" and "50", identifies the time-saving state counter 386 as being in the second stage when the value is between "2" and "30", and identifies the time-saving state counter 386 as being in the third stage when the value is "1". When the 3C time-saving state ST3C is the target of execution, the main MPU 82 identifies the time-saving state counter 386 as being in the first stage when the value is between "111" and "130", identifies the time-saving state counter 386 as being in the second stage when the value is between "2" and "110", and identifies the time-saving state counter 386 as being in the third stage when the value is "1".

As in the twenty-first embodiment, the master MPU 82 determines the type of time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution based on the value of the time-saving target counter 371 in the master RAM 84. In this case, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving target counter 371 differs not only among the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, but also among the third A time-saving state ST3A, the third B time-saving state ST3B, and the third C time-saving state ST3C. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "1", it corresponds to the first time-saving state ST1, when the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "2", it corresponds to the second time-saving state ST2, when the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "3", it corresponds to the third A time-saving state ST3A, when the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "4", it corresponds to the third B time-saving state ST3B, and when the value of the time-saving target counter 371 is "5", it corresponds to the third C time-saving state ST3C.

Figure 240 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is not being reached (step SG601: NO), in step SG602, if the game is in a normal game state, the normal game repetition period table 312 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the game is in a high probability state, the high probability game repetition period table 316 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. The contents of the normal game repetition period table 312 and the high probability game repetition period table 316 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

If the game is in any of the first to third time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SG601: YES), the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84 is judged to be "1" to judge whether the current game round is the last game round in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C (step SG603). If a positive judgment is made in step SG603, the game round period table 315 for the third stage time-saving is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step SG604). The contents of the game round period table 315 for the third stage time-saving are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG603, it is judged whether the first time-saving state ST1 is the execution target by judging whether the value of the time-saving target counter 371 in the main RAM 84 is "1" (step SG605). If the first time-saving state ST1 is the execution target (step SG605: YES), a stage identification process corresponding to the first time-saving state ST1 is executed (step SG606). In this identification process, if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "81" to "100", it is identified as the first stage, and if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "2" to "80", it is identified as the second stage.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG605, it is judged whether the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target by judging whether the value of the time-saving target counter 371 in the main RAM 84 is "2" (step SG607). If the second time-saving state ST2 is the execution target (step SG607: YES), a stage identification process corresponding to the second time-saving state ST2 is executed (step SG608). In this identification process, if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "131" to "150", it is identified as the first stage, and if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "2" to "130", it is identified as the second stage.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG607, it is judged whether the value of the time-saving target counter 371 in the main RAM 84 is "3" to judge whether the 3A time-saving state ST3A is the execution target (step SG609). If the 3A time-saving state ST3A is the execution target (step SG609: YES), a stage identification process corresponding to the 3A time-saving state ST3A is executed (step SG610). In this identification process, if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "31" to "50", it is identified as the first stage, and if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "2" to "30", it is identified as the second stage.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG609, it is judged whether the value of the time-saving target counter 371 in the main RAM 84 is "4" to judge whether the 3B time-saving state ST3B is the execution target (step SG611). If the 3B time-saving state ST3B is the execution target (step SG611: YES), a stage identification process corresponding to the 3B time-saving state ST3B is executed (step SG612). In this identification process, if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "81" to "100", it is identified as the first stage, and if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is "2" to "80", it is identified as the second stage.

If a negative judgment is made in step SG611, this means that the value of the time-saving target counter 371 in the main RAM 84 is "5" and the 3C time-saving state ST3C is the target for execution. In this case, a stage identification process corresponding to the 3C time-saving state ST3C is executed (step SG613). In this identification process, if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is between "111" and "130", it is identified as the first stage, and if the value of the time-saving state counter 386 is between "2" and "110", it is identified as the second stage.

When the processing of step SG606, step SG608, step SG610, step SG612, or step SG613 is executed, a process is executed to read out a play time period table corresponding to the determined stage (step SG614). Specifically, when it is determined that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is the first stage, the play time period table 313 for the first stage time-saving is read out from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and when it is determined that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C to be executed is the second stage, the play time period table 314 for the second stage time-saving is read out from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. The contents of the play time period table 313 for the first stage time-saving and the play time period table 314 for the second stage time-saving are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

When the processing of step SG602, step SG604, or step SG614 is executed, the selection processing of the variable display period is executed by referring to the game round period table 312-316 read in these processes (step SG615). Since the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information, when the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is selected by referring to the game round period table 312-316, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS becomes the numerical information of the variable type counter CS when the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of this game round is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 or the second special chart reserved area 112. After that, the information of the variable display period selected in step SG615 is set in the special chart side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step SG616). The update of the numerical information set in the special chart side timer counter is executed by the timer update processing of step S210 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14).

In addition, the information on the variable display period selected in step SG615 is set in the variable command in step S816 of the special chart variable start process (FIG. 20) and transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. In addition, in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, the variable command transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the sound-light side MPU 93 is set with not only the information on the variable display period of the number of times of play selected in step SG615, but also information corresponding to the type of stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution grasped in steps SG603 to SG613, information on the value stored in the time-saving state counter 386, and information on the value stored in the third time-saving standby counter 387. As a result, the sound-light side MPU 93 can grasp not only the information on the variable display period of the number of times of play, but also whether or not it is in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and can grasp the type of stage of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C that is the target of execution, by the variable command received from the main side MPU 82. It is also possible to know whether the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in a latent state, and if the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is in a latent state, to know the remaining number of times the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will continue.

Figure 241 is a flowchart showing the pattern determination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the audio-visual side MPU 93.

If the currently received fluctuation command does not have information indicating that the time-saving state is ST1 to ST3C (step SG701, step SG703, and step SG705: NO), other decision processing is executed (step SG710). In the other decision processing, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the content of the currently received fluctuation command and type command.

If the currently received variation command is set with information indicating that it corresponds to the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SG701: YES), a decision process for the first stage is executed (step SG702). In the decision process for the first stage, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the first stage. Specifically, a lottery process for executing the effect is executed with the type of effect and the selection probability of the effect corresponding to the first stage. In this case, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variation display period of the number of play times included in the variation command and the information on the game result included in the type command.

In the first stage determination process, a variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 185).

If the currently received variation command is set with information indicating that it corresponds to the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SG703: YES), a decision process for the second stage is executed (step SG704). In the decision process for the second stage, the execution mode of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the second stage. Specifically, a lottery process for executing the effect is executed with the type of effect corresponding to the second stage and the selection probability of the effect. In this case, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variation display period of the number of play times included in the variation command and the information on the game result included in the type command. In the decision process for the second stage, it is possible to select a type of effect that was not selected in the decision process for the first stage, and the selection probability is different for types of effects that can also be selected in the decision process for the first stage.

In the determination process for the second stage, a variation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a variation pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the variation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 185).

If the currently received variation command is set with information indicating that it corresponds to the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C (step SG705: YES), the currently received type command is referenced to determine whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SG706). If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SG706: YES), a determination process for the final game round when not in a latent state is executed (step SG708). Also, if the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result (step SG706: NO) and the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not in a latent state (step SG707: NO), a determination process for the final game round when not in a latent state is executed (step SG708). On the other hand, if the current play round does not correspond to a jackpot result (step SG706: NO) and the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is lurking (step SG707: YES), a determination process for the final play round during the lurking state is executed (step SG709).

In the determination process for the final play round when not in a lurking state, if the current play round corresponds to a jackpot result, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and the type of jackpot result, and in a manner corresponding to the third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that enables the player to recognize that a jackpot result will occur, but does not include content that enables the player to recognize that the current play round is the last play round in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, and further does not include content that enables the player to recognize that the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are in a lurking state even if the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are in a lurking state. If an opening/closing execution mode occurs as a result of a jackpot, the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is forcibly ended even if it is in the middle of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, and the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is also forcibly ended, so there is no need to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the current play round is the last play round in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, and further there is no need to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent.

In the determination process for the final play round when not in hiding, if the current play round corresponds to any of the first to third time-saving results, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner that corresponds to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and the time-saving result, and corresponds to the third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and content that allows the player to recognize that a time-saving result will occur.

In the determination process for the final play round when not in hiding, if the current play round does not correspond to either a jackpot result or a time-saving result, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command, which corresponds to the third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and a content that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C will end and transition to the normal play state. In addition, in a play round where a reach-to-miss display occurs, after a combination of symbols corresponding to the reach-to-miss display is stopped and displayed, a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C and a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C will end and transition to the normal play state are executed.

In the determination process for the final game round when not in a hidden state, the change pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read change pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute a change pattern performance corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the change pattern determination process (Figure 185), a change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received change pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute a display performance of a change pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 185).

The determination process for the final game round during the latent state is executed on the condition that the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result and that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent. In the determination process for the final game round during the latent state, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the game round contained in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage. The execution content of the performance determined in this case includes a content that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game round of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C and a content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will start. In addition, in the performance of the content that allows the player to recognize that this third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will start, information on the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue, that is, information indicating the value stored at that time in the third time-saving standby counter 387, is notified. This makes it possible to allow the player to recognize the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue. In addition, in a game in which a miss reach display occurs, after the symbol combination corresponding to the miss reach display is stopped and displayed, an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game in the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C, and an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that the hidden third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will start.

In the determination process for the final game round during the latent state, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the execution content of the performance determined as described above is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95. The sound/light side MPU 93 controls the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read fluctuation pattern table, thereby causing the display light-emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to execute the performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In addition, in step SC518 in the fluctuation pattern determination process (Figure 185), a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern table is sent to the display side MPU 103. The display side MPU 103 reads a display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to execute the display performance of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 during that game round and the stop results displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are the stop results determined in steps SC501 to SC516 in the process of determining the variation pattern (Figure 185).

Next, the manner in which the effects are executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 242. FIG. 242(a) shows the period during which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are executed, FIG. 242(b) shows the timing when any one of the first to third time-saving results ends, FIG. 242(c) shows the period during which the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, i.e., the period during which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent, FIG. 242(d) shows the period during which the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is in progress, FIG. 242(e) shows the period during which the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is in progress, and FIG. 242(f) shows the period during which the third stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is in progress.

At the timing of t1, in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 242(b), a game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and as shown in FIG. 242(a), a third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C of the type corresponding to that time-saving result begins. In this case, as shown in FIG. 242(d), the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is reached, and the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each game round. After that, at the timing of t2, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84, i.e., the remaining number of continuations, becomes the number corresponding to the end of the first stage, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends and the second stage begins, as shown in FIG. 242(d) and FIG. 242(e). In this case, the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game round.

After that, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 242(b), the game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and a new third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C enters a latent state in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C as shown in FIG. 242(a) and FIG. 242(c). In this case, even if the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs, it is maintained in the second stage as shown in FIG. 242(e).

After that, at the timing of t4, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84, i.e., the remaining number of continuations, reaches the number corresponding to the end of the second stage, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the third stage begins, as shown in Figures 242(e) and 242(f). The third stage is the last game round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This last game round is executed from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, as shown in Figure 242(f). Since the variable display period of the game round for this last game round is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. Furthermore, the final play round not only includes content that allows the player to recognize that it is the final play round of the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C, but also includes content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will begin. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will begin.

At the timing of t5, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the target of execution ends, but as shown in FIG. 242(c), the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, so the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target of execution. In this case, the remaining number of times that the newly executed third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will continue has ended the range corresponding to the first stage in relation to the number of times that the game was executed in the latent state, and has entered the range corresponding to the second stage. Then, the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C are set to a stage type that corresponds to the remaining number of times that the time-saving state counter 386 of the main RAM 84 measures. Therefore, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that was the target of lurking at the timing of t5 becomes the new target of execution, but because this is the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C as shown in FIG. 242(e), the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each game.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 242(b), the game round corresponding to one of the first to third time-saving results ends, and a new third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C enters a latent state in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C as shown in FIG. 242(a) and FIG. 242(c). In this case, even if the latent state of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C occurs, it is maintained in the second stage as shown in FIG. 242(e).

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84, i.e., the remaining number of continuations, reaches the number corresponding to the end of the second stage, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the third stage begins, as shown in Figures 242(e) and 242(f). The third stage is the last game round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This last game round is executed from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, as shown in Figure 242(f). Since the variable display period of the game round for this last game round is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss determination process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the last game round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. Furthermore, the final play round not only includes content that allows the player to recognize that it is the final play round of the current time-saving state ST1-ST3C, but also includes content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will begin. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will begin.

At the timing of t8, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the target of execution will end, but since the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 is 1 or more and the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent as shown in FIG. 242(c), the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will be the target of execution. In this case, the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that is the newly targeted for execution will be in a range corresponding to the first stage in relation to the number of times of play that was executed in the latent state. Then, in the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, the stage type corresponding to the remaining number of times of continuation measured by the time-saving state counter 386 of the main RAM 84 is set. Therefore, the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the target of execution at the timing of t8 will be the new target of execution, but since it is the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C as shown in FIG. 242(d), the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the first stage in each play. However, the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C that is the target of execution has already had the remaining number of times reduced by t8 because the game has been played in a latent state. Therefore, the first stage set this time will end if fewer than 20 game times have been played.

After that, at timing t9, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84, i.e., the number of remaining continuations, reaches the number corresponding to the end of the first stage, and the first stage of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C ends and the second stage begins, as shown in Figures 242(d) and 242(e). In this case, the performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the second stage in each play round.

After that, at the timing of t10, the value of the time-saving state counter 386 in the main RAM 84, i.e., the remaining number of continuations, reaches the number corresponding to the end of the second stage, and the second stage of the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C ends and the third stage begins, as shown in FIG. 242(e) and FIG. 242(f). The third stage is the last play round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C. This last play round is executed from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 242(f). Since the variable display period of the last play round is 30 seconds or more regardless of the result of the win/loss judgment process, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize that this is the last play round in the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C.

According to the above configuration, the type of stage of the presentation in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C is not determined according to the number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C have been played since they were started, but is determined according to the number of times that the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C remain in play. As a result, even if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that was the latent target becomes the target for execution when a certain number of remaining times have been consumed, the stage of the presentation is determined according to the number of remaining times at that time. Therefore, even if the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C becomes the target for execution from the latent target, the presentation corresponding to the third stage is not executed in the last play regardless of the content of the presentation stage up to that point, but rather it is possible to execute the presentation corresponding to the third stage after the presentation corresponding to the second stage has been executed to a certain extent.

In the final play round of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C when the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, a determination process for the final play round during the latent state is executed on the condition that a jackpot result does not occur. In the determination process for the final play round during the latent state, the execution content of the presentation is determined in a manner corresponding to the information on the variable display period of the play round contained in the variable command and corresponding to the third stage. The execution content of the presentation determined in this case includes content that allows the player to recognize that this is the final play round of the current time-saving state ST1 to ST3C, and also includes content that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will be started. This makes it possible to make the player recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C will be started.

In the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, a longer period than other game times in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C is likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game times, regardless of whether the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient period to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C will start in the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent. In addition, when determining the variable display period in the last game of the time-saving state ST1-ST3C, there is no need to change the determination mode depending on whether the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, so it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load for determining the variable display period of the game times.

Even if it is the last play in the time-saving state ST1-ST3C when the third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C is latent, if the last play corresponds to a jackpot result, the effect that allows the player to recognize that the latent third time-saving state ST3A-ST3C has begun is not executed. This makes it possible to direct the player's attention to the effect for the play corresponding to the jackpot result.

<Alternative to the Thirty-fifth Embodiment>
(1) In the process of specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82 (FIG. 240), the selection mode of the variable display period of the last game round may be different depending on whether the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is in a latent state when the last game round of the time-shortening state ST1 to ST3C is completed. For example, if the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is in a latent state when the last game round of the time-shortening state ST1 to ST3C is completed, the variable display period of the last game round may be longer or more likely to be longer than when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is not in a latent state. In this case, it is possible to secure a longer period for executing the performance corresponding to the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C being in a latent state in the last game round. In addition, when the last game round of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C ends and the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are in a latent state, the variable display period of the last game round may be shorter or more likely to be shorter than when the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are not in a latent state. In this case, it is possible to end the last game round early and start the latent third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C early.

(2) In the last game of the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C in a situation where the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is latent, if the mode of execution control of the effect of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that starts following the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is the first stage, a notification is executed to allow the player to recognize it, and if the mode of execution control of the effect of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C that starts following the time-saving state ST1 to ST3C is the second stage, a notification is executed to allow the player to recognize it. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the execution mode of the effect of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C is different from the execution mode when the game corresponding to the time-saving result is executed in the normal game state and the game transitions to the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C.

(3) The manner in which the variable display period of the number of times of play in the main MPU 82 is determined corresponds to the remaining number of times of continuation in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, while the manner in which the performance is executed in the sound-and-light MPU 93 is controlled corresponds to the number of times of play executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. Conversely, the manner in which the variable display period of the number of times of play in the main MPU 82 is determined corresponds to the number of times of play executed in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C, while the manner in which the performance is executed in the sound-and-light MPU 93 is controlled corresponds to the remaining number of times of continuation in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C.

(4) The configuration in which the execution control of the presentation is performed in a manner corresponding to the remaining number of times to continue in the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C as in the 35th embodiment above may be applied to game states other than the time-saving states ST1 to ST3C. For example, the configuration may be such that the execution control of the presentation is performed in a manner corresponding to the remaining number of times to continue in a high probability state in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode in the hit/miss determination process than in the low probability mode.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the execution control of the time-saving state are different from those of the fifteenth embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

In the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third time-saving state ST3 were set as the time-saving state, but in this embodiment, the third time-saving state ST3 is not set, and the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2 are set. Since the third time-saving state ST3 is not set, the time-saving result is not set as a result of the hit/miss judgment process. The first time-saving state ST1 is entered when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. The contents of the first time-saving state ST1 are the same as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. Also, the second time-saving state ST2 is entered when the number of times of play executed without the occurrence of a jackpot result reaches the ceiling number, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. The contents of the second time-saving state ST2 are the same as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment.

Figure 243 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If the value of the special image side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step SG801: YES), and the result of the current game is a jackpot (step SG802: YES), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special image side timer counter (step SG803), and an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SG804). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the performance corresponding to the opening period to be performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

Then, the value of the ceiling counter 325 in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step SG805). In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is cleared to "0" when the game round corresponding to the big win result ends and the open/close execution mode starts. In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is also cleared to "0" when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 starts and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed.

Then, the outer end flag at the start of the jackpot, which is provided in the main RAM 84, is set to "1" (step SG806). In addition, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step SG807). As a result, the value of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "3", which corresponds to the special electricity start process (step S609).

If the game result of this game is not a jackpot result (step SG802: NO), the first time-saving progression process is executed in step SG808, the second time-saving progression process is executed in step SG809, the ceiling time-saving setting process is executed in step SG810, and the high probability progression process is executed in step SG811. In the first time-saving progression process in step SG808, if the first time-saving state ST1 is in the first time-saving state ST1, the value of the state duration counter 327 in the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. In addition, if a transition to the first time-saving state ST1 occurs, the number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues is set in the state duration counter 327 and the first time-saving state flag 322 in the main RAM 84 is set to "1". If the value of the state duration counter 327 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", a process for ending the first time-saving state ST1 is executed. Specifically, the first time-saving state flag 322 is cleared to "0". This changes the game state to the normal game state. In addition, the high probability progression process in step SG811 executes the same process as the high probability progression process in the 15th embodiment (FIG. 130). After executing the processes in steps SG808 to SG811, the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step SG812). This sets the value of the special chart special electricity counter to "0", which corresponds to the special chart variation start process (step S606).

Figure 244 is a flowchart showing the ceiling time-saving setting process executed in step SG810 of the special chart determination process (Figure 243).

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SG901). Then, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SG901: YES), the process for setting the ceiling time-saving state is terminated without executing the processes in steps SG902 and onward. In other words, in a game played in a high probability state, the value of the ceiling counter 325, which will be described later, is not incremented, and the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur because the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not incremented.

Here, in the special pattern determination process (Fig. 243), as already explained, the ceiling time-saving setting process (Fig. 244) is executed before the high probability progression process (step SG811). As a result, in the last game in the high probability state, the value of the state duration counter 327 is subtracted by 1 in the high probability progression process (step SG811) and the value of the state duration counter 327 becomes "0", and the ceiling time-saving setting process (Fig. 244) is executed before the high probability flag 321 is cleared to "0". Then, when the ceiling time-saving setting process (Fig. 244) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag 321 is still set to "1", so the ceiling counter 325 is not added. Therefore, in the game in which the win/loss determination process was executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability state, it is possible to prevent the ceiling counter 325 from being added. In addition, this effect can be achieved by setting the processing order so that the ceiling time-saving setting process (Fig. 244) is executed before the high probability progression process (step SG811) during the special chart determination process (Fig. 243).

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" (step SG901: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 325 is below the occurrence reference value of the second time-saving state ST2 (step SG902). The occurrence reference value of the second time-saving state ST2 is set to "900", but the occurrence reference value is arbitrary. If the value of the ceiling counter 325 is equal to or greater than the occurrence reference value of the second time-saving state ST2 (step SG902: NO), the ceiling time-saving setting process is terminated without executing the processes in steps SG903 and thereafter. The process of clearing the ceiling counter 325 to "0" occurs when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, as already explained, and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, or when the opening/closing execution mode is started in response to a jackpot result, and does not occur otherwise. On the other hand, the second time-saving state ST2 occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 325 after adding 1 reaches the occurrence reference value of the second time-saving state ST2. In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 is equal to or greater than the threshold value for the second time-saving state ST2 (step SG902: NO), the process for setting the ceiling time-saving state ends without executing the process from step SG903 onwards. As a result, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after adding 1 becomes the threshold value for the second time-saving state ST2, the second time-saving state ST2 occurs, and the second time-saving state ST2 ends without a jackpot result and the normal game state is entered, the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur even if the game is played repeatedly without a jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent the second time-saving state ST2 from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 325 is below the threshold value for the second time-saving state ST2 (step SG902: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 325 is incremented by 1 (step SG903), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 325 after incrementing by 1 is the threshold value for the second time-saving state ST2 (step SG904). If the value of the ceiling counter 325 is the threshold value for the second time-saving state ST2 (step SG904: YES), the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1" (step SG905). As a result, if the total number of times played in the normal game state or the first time-saving state ST1 reaches the threshold number without a jackpot result occurring after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the second time-saving state ST2, which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode, is entered.

As already explained, in the high probability state, a positive judgment is made in step SG901 and the processing from step SG902 onwards is not executed, so the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur in the high probability state. Also, since the occurrence reference value for the second time-saving state ST2 is set to a number of times greater than the number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues, and the value of the ceiling counter 325 is cleared to "0" when a jackpot result occurs, the consumption of the ceiling number of play times will not occur during the first time-saving state ST1.

Then, the outer end flag for the time-saving occurrence provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SG906). In addition, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step SG907). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 has started is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it executes a process to execute a performance indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 is started by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After the performance indicating that the second time-saving state ST2 is newly started is finished, the sound/light side MPU 93 executes a process to execute a base performance of the first stage of the second time-saving state ST2 by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, in the pattern display device 41, a character corresponding to the first stage is displayed in front of the background image corresponding to the first stage.

Figure 245 is a flowchart showing the second time-saving progression process executed in step SG809 of the special chart determination process (Figure 243).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SH101). If the high probability flag 321 is set to "1" (step SH101: YES), the second time-saving progress process is terminated without executing the processes from step SH102 onward.

If the high probability flag 321 is not set to "1" and the second time-saving state flag 323 is set to "1" (step SH102: YES), that is, if the second time-saving state ST2 is in effect, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is incremented by 1 (step SH103). The second time-saving state ST2 occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 325 reaches "900", which is the occurrence reference value for the second time-saving state ST2. However, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is cleared to "0" only when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, or when the opening/closing execution mode is started in response to a jackpot result. Therefore, when the second time-saving state ST2 is started, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is the occurrence reference value. Also, in the ceiling time-saving setting process (FIG. 244), if the value of the ceiling counter 325 is equal to or greater than the occurrence reference value, the process of incrementing by 1 is not executed. Therefore, each time a game is played in the second time-saving state ST2, "1" is added to the ceiling counter 325, which was set to the occurrence reference value at the start of the second time-saving state ST2.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 325 after adding 1 in step SH103 has reached the termination reference value (step SH104). The termination reference value is the sum of the occurrence reference value of the second time-saving state ST2 and the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues. Specifically, the occurrence reference value of the second time-saving state ST2 is "900" as described above, and the number of times the second time-saving state ST2 continues is "150" as in the fifteenth embodiment above, so the termination reference value is the sum of these, that is, "1050."

If a positive judgment is made in step SH104, the second time-saving state flag 323 is cleared to "0" (step SH105). This ends the second time-saving state ST2 and the normal game state is entered. After that, the outer end flag at the time of the time-saving end provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step SH106). In addition, a transmission process of the state designation command is executed (step SH107). In this transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the current second time-saving state ST2 has ended is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93. By receiving this state designation command, the sound/light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the presentation corresponding to the second time-saving state ST2 in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the presentation corresponding to the normal game state.

Figure 246 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the address table 311 for play times is read from the main ROM 83 (step SH201). The address table 311 for play times has consecutive addresses set from "00A0H" to "00A5H" with the start address being "00A0H" and the end address being "00A5H". Note that "H" indicates a hexadecimal number. The memory area corresponding to each address in the address table 311 for play times is set with information on the start address that has the smallest address value among the memory areas of the main ROM 83 in which the play time table to be referenced is pre-stored.

Specifically, the memory area corresponding to "00A0H", which is the start address in the address table 311 for game play periods, is set with information on the start address of the memory area in which the normal game play period table 312, which is referenced in the normal game play state, is stored. The memory area corresponding to the next address "00A1H" in the address table 311 for game play periods is set with information on the start address of the memory area in which the first stage game play period table 313, which is referenced in the first stage in the second time-saving state ST2, is stored. The memory area corresponding to the next address "00A2H" in the address table 311 for game play periods is set with information on the start address of the memory area in which the second stage game play period table 314, which is referenced in the second stage in the second time-saving state ST2, is stored. In addition, the memory area corresponding to the next address "00A3H" in the game time address table 311 stores information on the start address of the memory area in which the game time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, which is referenced when the game is in the third stage in the second time reduction state ST2, is stored. In addition, the memory area corresponding to the next address "00A4H" in the game time address table 311 stores information on the start address of the memory area in which the game time period table 316 for high probability, which is referenced when the game is in the high probability state, is stored. In addition, the memory area corresponding to the end address "00A5H" in the game time address table 311 stores information on the start address of the memory area in which the game time period table for the first time reduction state, which is referenced when the game is in the first time reduction state ST1, is stored.

The contents of the normal play time period table 312, the first stage time-saving play time period table 313, the second stage time-saving play time period table 314, the third stage time-saving play time period table 315, and the high probability play time period table 316 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

In a situation where the selection process for the variable display period is executed in step SH216 described below with reference to the game turn period table for the first time-saving state, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game turn, or if the result of the win/lose determination process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of a miss reach display and a miss reach display occurs in the current game turn, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS contained in the first pending information or second pending information that triggered the execution of the current game turn is compared against the reach-corresponding table in the game turn period table for the first time-saving state, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from when the reach-corresponding table in the other play time period tables 312 to 316 is referenced. Specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding table in the play time period table 313 for the first stage time reduction is referenced, and a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the reach-corresponding tables in the play time period table 312 for normal play, the play time period table 314 for the second stage time reduction, the play time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, and the play time period table 316 for high probability are referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current play.

If no jackpot result occurs in the current game round, and no miss reach display occurs either, and if the game round was started in a situation where the second reserved information is the execution target for the game round and two or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special chart side is read out as the variable display period for the current game round. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of playing the game round triggered by the second reserved information in the first time-saving state ST1. In addition, when the game round period table for the first time-saving state is referenced, if a jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target for the game round and four pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected, but if the game round is started in a situation where the second reserved information is the target for the game round and three or less pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected.

On the other hand, if the game round was started in a situation where no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, and the second reserved information is the target for the game round and one piece of second reserved information is stored in the second special chart reserved area 112, or if the game round was started in a situation where no jackpot result occurs in the current game round and no miss reach display occurs, and the first reserved information is the target for the game round, then the numerical information of the variable type counter CS contained in the first reserved information or second reserved information that triggered the execution of the current game round is compared against the non-reach corresponding table in the game round period table for the first time-saving state, thereby reading out information on the variable display period of the non-reach display mode. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the non-reach display mode is different from the case where a non-reach compatible table in the other play time period tables is referenced, and specifically, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a non-reach compatible table in the play time period table 313 for the first stage time reduction is referenced, and a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a non-reach compatible table in the play time period table 312 for normal play, the play time period table 314 for the second stage time reduction, the play time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction, and the play time period table 316 for high probability are referenced. In this case, a period longer than the shortest period on the special chart side (specifically, 3 seconds) is selected as the variable display period for the current play time.

In the process of determining the variable display period (FIG. 246), after reading out the address table 311 for the game play period in step SH201, if the high probability flag 321 is set to "1", i.e., if the game state is a high probability state (step SH202: YES), an offset value of "4" is set in the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 (step SH203). Also, if the first time-saving state flag 322 is set to "1", i.e., if the game state is the first time-saving state ST1 (step SH204: YES), an offset value of "5" is set in the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 (step SH205). Also, when "1" is not set in any of the high probability flag 321, the first time-shortened state flag 322, and the second time-shortened state flag 323, i.e., when the game state is the normal game state (step SH206: NO), the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 is set to "0" as an offset value (step SH207). Also, when "1" is set in the second time-shortened state flag 323, i.e., when the game state is the second time-shortened state ST2 (step SH206: YES), if the value of the ceiling counter 325 is equal to or greater than the occurrence reference value for the second time-shortened state ST2 (specifically, "900") and equal to or less than the first reference value (specifically, "919") (step SH208: YES), the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 is set to "1" as an offset value (step SH209), and the value of the ceiling counter 325 is equal to or greater than the occurrence reference value for the first time-shortened state ST2 (specifically, "919") (step SH208: YES). If the value is greater than the reference value (specifically, "919") and less than or equal to the second reference value (specifically, "1048") (step SH210: YES), an offset value of "2" is set in the general-purpose register of the main MPU 82 (step SH211); if the value of the ceiling counter 325 is greater than the second reference value (specifically, "1048") (step SH210: NO), an offset value of "3" is set in the general-purpose register of the main MPU 82 (step SH212).

When the processing of step SH203, step SH205, step SH207, step SH209, step SH211, or step SH212 is executed, the offset value set in step SH203, step SH205, step SH207, step SH209, step SH211, or step SH212 is added to the start address ("00A0H") of the address table for game times 311 read into the general-purpose register of the master MPU 82 (step SH213). Then, the start address set in the memory area in the address table for game times 311 corresponding to the address after the addition in step SH213 is read (step SH214), and the game time table corresponding to the read start address is read into the master RAM 84 (step SH215).

In this case, if "4" is set as the offset value in step SH203, the address calculated in step SH213 is "00A4H", and therefore the high probability play time period table 316 is read into the main RAM 84 in step SH215. Also, if "5" is set as the offset value in step SH205, the address calculated in step SH213 is "00A5H", and therefore the play time period table for the first time-saving state is read into the main RAM 84 in step SH215. Also, if "0" is set as the offset value in step SH207, the address calculated in step SH213 is "00A0H", and therefore the normal play time period table 312 is read into the main RAM 84 in step SH215. Also, if "1" is set as the offset value in step SH209, the address calculated in step SH213 is "00A1H", so the first stage time-saving play period table 313 is read into the main RAM 84 in step SH215. Also, if "2" is set as the offset value in step SH211, the address calculated in step SH213 is "00A2H", so the second stage time-saving play period table 314 is read into the main RAM 84 in step SH215. Also, if "3" is set as the offset value in step SH212, the address calculated in step SH213 is "00A3H", so the third stage time-saving play period table 315 is read into the main RAM 84 in step SH215.

Then, the selection process of the variable display period is executed by referring to the game round period tables 312 to 316 read in step SH215 (step SH216). In this case, since the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is included in the first reserved information or the second reserved information in this embodiment, when the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is selected by referring to the game round period tables 312 to 316, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS becomes the numerical information of the variable type counter CS when the first reserved information or the second reserved information that triggered the execution of this game round is stored in the first special chart reserved area 111 or the second special chart reserved area 112. Then, the information of the variable display period selected in step SH216 is set in the special chart side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step SH217). The numerical information set in the special chart side timer counter is updated by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

The embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The ceiling counter 325 provided in the main RAM 84 to measure the consumption of the ceiling number of game times that triggers the occurrence of the second time-saving state ST2 is incremented by one each time a game time is consumed in a game state that is not a high probability state. When the value of the ceiling counter 325 after incrementing by one reaches the occurrence reference value for the second time-saving state ST2 (specifically, "900"), the game state transitions to the second time-saving state ST2. Even if the game transitions to the second time-saving state ST2, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not cleared to "0", and the ceiling counter 325 is not cleared to "0" until the opening and closing execution mode is generated as a result of a jackpot in a situation in which the start of operating power to the main MPU 82 does not occur anew. As a result, when the ceiling number of game times is consumed and a transition to the second time-saving state ST2 occurs, even if the second time-saving state ST2 ends without a jackpot result, the transition to the second time-saving state ST2 does not occur unless the opening and closing execution mode is subsequently generated and the consumption of the ceiling number of game times is further performed again. This makes it possible to prevent the frequency of transitions to the second time-saving state ST2 from becoming too high.

In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is incremented by 1 each time a game is played in the second time-saving state ST2. Then, when the value of the ceiling counter 325 after incrementing by 1 reaches the termination reference value, the second time-saving state ST2 ends. This makes it possible to use the ceiling counter 325 as a counter for identifying the termination trigger in the second time-saving state ST2 in a configuration in which the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not cleared to "0" even if a transition to the second time-saving state ST2 occurs in order to prevent repeated transitions to the second time-saving state ST2 without the opening/closing execution mode occurring. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main RAM 84 required for controlling the execution of the second time-saving state ST2.

The value of the ceiling counter 325 is incremented by 1 each time a game is played in the second time-saving state ST2. If the value of the ceiling counter 325 is equal to or greater than the threshold value for the occurrence of the second time-saving state ST2 and equal to or less than the first threshold value, the performance of the second time-saving state ST2 is in the first stage, if the value of the ceiling counter 325 is greater than the first threshold value and equal to or less than the second threshold value, the performance of the second time-saving state ST2 is in the second stage, and if the value of the ceiling counter 325 is greater than the second threshold value, the performance of the second time-saving state ST2 is in the third stage. This makes it possible to use the ceiling counter 325 as a counter for identifying the stage of the performance in the second time-saving state ST2 in a configuration in which the value of the ceiling counter 325 is not cleared to "0" even if a transition to the second time-saving state ST2 occurs in order to prevent the transition to the second time-saving state ST2 from being repeated without the opening/closing execution mode occurring. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main RAM 84 required for controlling the execution of the second time-saving state ST2.

<Alternative to the Thirty-Sixth Embodiment>
(1) The ceiling counter 325 for identifying the occurrence trigger of the second time-shortening state ST2 is incremented by one each time a game is played in a situation that is not in a high probability state, and if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after incrementing by one becomes the occurrence reference value for the second time-shortening state ST2, a transition to the second time-shortening state ST2 occurs, and further, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is incremented by one each time a game is played in the second time-shortening state ST2, and the execution control of the presentation and the determination of the termination trigger of the second time-shortening state ST2 are performed according to the value of the ceiling counter 325, but this configuration may be applied to the execution control of a game state different from the second time-shortening state ST2. For example, the above configuration may be applied to the execution control of a high probability state in which the probability of a jackpot result in the hit/miss determination process becomes a high probability mode in which the probability is higher than that in the low probability mode. In other words, the ceiling counter 325 is incremented by one each time a game round is executed when the game is not in a high probability state, and if the value of the ceiling counter 325 after incrementing by one becomes the reference value for the occurrence of the high probability state, a transition to the high probability state occurs.Furthermore, even in the high probability state, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is incremented by one each time a game round is executed, and the execution of the presentation is controlled and the trigger for ending the high probability state is determined depending on the value of the ceiling counter 325.

(2) The value of the ceiling counter 325 is increased by 1 each time a game is played in a state other than the high probability state, but this additional value is arbitrary. Also, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is increased by 1 each time a game is played in the second time-saving state ST2, but this additional value is arbitrary.

(3) In the second time-saving state ST2, the ceiling counter 325 is configured to be used to measure the number of times a game has been played in the second time-saving state ST2, but this is not limited thereto. In the second time-saving state ST2, the ceiling counter 325 may be configured to be used to measure the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34, or to measure the number of times a miss reach display has occurred in the second time-saving state ST2. In these cases, the manner of execution control of the presentation in the second time-saving state ST2 may be changed depending on the number of times that the measurement is performed. Even in this manner, even if the ceiling counter 325 is configured to be used for purposes other than measuring the number of times a game has been played in the second time-saving state ST2, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state ST2 from being triggered again in a situation where an opportunity to clear the ceiling counter 325 to "0" has not occurred by making the value of the ceiling counter 325 not fall below the threshold value for the second time-saving state ST2.

(4) The timing at which the ceiling counter 325 is cleared to "0" upon occurrence of the open/close execution mode is not limited to the start of the open/close execution mode, and may be during the open/close execution mode or when the open/close execution mode ends. In addition, the ceiling counter 325 is not limited to the configuration in which the ceiling counter 325 is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, and may be configured to clear "0" when the supply of operating power is started in a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, or may be configured to clear "0" when the supply of operating power is started and an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84.

(5) In a configuration in which the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtractive, the value of the ceiling counter 325 may be used in a subtractive manner for the execution of game rounds even after transition to the second time-shortening state ST2. In other words, when an open/close execution mode occurs as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (specifically, "900") is set in the ceiling counter 325, and the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 each time a game round is executed in a situation that is not a high probability state, and when the value of the ceiling counter 325 becomes "0", the game state is transitioned to the second time-shortening state ST2. Also, when a game round is executed in the second time-shortening state ST2, the value of the ceiling counter 325 is subtracted by 1 under a situation in which the carry flag is set to "1". Then, the value of the ceiling counter 325 under a situation in which the carry flag is set to "1" is used to control the execution of the performance in the second time-shortening state ST2 and to identify the timing for ending the second time-shortening state ST2. In addition, the carry flag is set to "1" and is maintained until the value of the ceiling counter 325 is cleared to "0," and if the carry flag is set to "1," further transition to the second time-saving state ST2 is prevented.

Thirty-seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the control content for controlling the progress of the game is different from that of the thirteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, various controls executed by the main MPU 82 using programs are distinguished between specific control and non-specific control. That is, the main MPU 82 is provided with a specific control processing unit 221 as a function for executing specific control processing, and a non-specific control processing unit 222 as a function for executing non-specific control processing (see FIG. 79). In the main ROM 83, the addresses of the areas in which the programs for specific control and data for specific control are stored are clearly distinguished from the addresses of the areas in which the programs for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored (see FIG. 76). In the main RAM 84, the address ranges of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control used in specific control are clearly distinguished from the address ranges of the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control used in non-specific control (see FIG. 77).

Figure 247 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various areas 251 to 255, 441, and 442 of the work area 213 for non-specific control.

As in the thirteenth embodiment, the non-specific control work area 213 is provided with a normal counter 251, a calculation result storage area 252, a display target setting area 253, a switching timing counter 254, and a display target counter 255. Each counter 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode are not in effect. The calculation result storage area 252 is an area for storing a base value, which is information on the management result of the game history calculated using the normal counter area 251. The display target setting area 253 stores the base values to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 of the calculation result storage area 252. The switching timing counter 254 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine that it is time to switch the base values to be notified in the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 of the calculation result storage area 252. The display target counter 255 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine the base values to be notified in the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 of the calculation result storage area 252.

The work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with a total winning number counter 441 and a forced transition flag 442. The total winning number counter 441 is a counter for measuring a predetermined difference in the number of balls until a predetermined end trigger occurs. The predetermined difference in ball number is the number of balls that is the increase in the difference in ball number from the specific reference value until the predetermined termination trigger, when the difference in ball number is calculated by subtracting the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA until the predetermined termination trigger occurs (the total number of game balls that enter the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 and are discharged from the game area PA) from the total number of game balls until the predetermined termination trigger occurs (the total number of game balls that enter the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34). The predetermined termination trigger occurs when the game moves from a high probability state, which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, or a time-saving state, which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, to a normal game state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. The predetermined end trigger also occurs when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total acquisition counter 441 reaches or exceeds 12,000, which is the end reference number. When the predetermined end trigger occurs and a transition to a normal game state occurs, which is not an open/close execution mode but a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, the value of the total acquisition counter 441 is cleared to "0". The value of the total acquisition counter 441 is also cleared to "0" when the value of the total acquisition counter 441 becomes negative. The value of the total acquisition counter 441 is also cleared to "0" when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. The process for measuring the predetermined difference in the number of balls using the total acquisition counter 441 and the process for clearing the value of the total acquisition counter 441 to "0" are executed by a non-specific control process using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

The forced transition flag 442 is a flag that is set to "1" when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches or exceeds 12,000 balls, which is the reference number for ending. The process of setting the forced transition flag 442 to "1" is executed by non-specific control processing using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. When the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" and identified in a situation where a return to normal is possible in the specific control processing using a program for specific control and data for specific control, processing for transitioning to a normal game state is executed in the specific control processing. Then, when the occurrence of the transition to the normal game state is identified in the non-specific control processing using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control, the value of the forced transition flag 442 is cleared to "0" in the non-specific control processing.

Figure 248 is a time chart showing how a predetermined difference in the number of balls is measured using the total winning number counter 441. The horizontal axis is the elapsed time, and the vertical axis is the difference in the number of balls after the start of the game.

At the timing of t1, the operation of the launch operation device 28 is started to start the game, and game balls are launched towards the game area PA and supplied to the game area PA. In this case, since the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA is greater than the number of prize balls, the difference in the number of balls, which is the difference between the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA and the total number of prize balls, falls below the initial value of "0" immediately before the start of play and becomes a negative value. The total winning number counter 441 is cleared to "0" when it becomes a negative value, so the value of "0" is maintained.

After that, at the timing of t2, the game round resulting in a jackpot ends and the open/close execution mode occurs, so that the total number of prize balls becomes greater than the total number of balls supplied, and the difference in the number of balls changes from a decrease to an increase. In this case, since the total number of prize balls counter 441 is "0" at the timing of t2, from the timing of t2 onwards, when the total number of prize balls is greater than the total number of balls supplied, the value of the total number of prize balls counter 441 becomes greater than 1 and increases.

After that, the open/close execution mode ends at the timing of t3, but the high probability state occurs, and although the increase in the number of difference balls per unit time is lower than before, the increase in the number of difference balls is maintained. Then, the open/close execution mode occurs from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the high probability state occurs from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and the open/close execution mode occurs from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7. In this case, the number of difference balls continues to increase from the timing of t3 to the timing of t7, and the value of the total winning number counter 441 also continues to increase.

At the timing ta, which is a timing during the opening and closing execution mode executed from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the predetermined difference number of balls measured by the total acquisition number counter 441 reaches the end reference number K (specifically, 12,000 balls). In this case, since the specific reference value, which is the minimum value of the difference number of balls, is the difference number of balls at the timing t2, the state in which the total acquisition number counter 441 is cleared to "0" at the timing t2 is the state in which the predetermined difference number of balls was finally set to the initial value of 0 before the occurrence of the predetermined end trigger. Then, the predetermined difference number of balls, which is the increase from the initial value of 0, reaches the end reference number K (specifically, 12,000 balls) at the timing ta. When the predetermined difference number of balls measured by the total acquisition number counter 441 reaches the end reference number K (specifically, 12,000 balls), the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1", and when the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1", a transition to the normal game state occurs in a normal return possible situation. The circumstances under which normal recovery is possible will be explained later.

Next, the first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing. Note that, among the processing of steps SH301 to SH322 in the first timer interrupt processing, the processing other than the fraud detection processing called and executed in step SH310 and the second management processing called and executed in step SH322 is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control, and the fraud detection processing and the second management processing are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps SH301 to SH304 execute the same processing as steps S5501 to S5504 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the 13th embodiment. Also, steps SH306 to SH322 execute the same processing as steps S5505 to S5521 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the 13th embodiment.

After executing the fluctuation counter update process (step SH304) and before executing the process of determining whether the game stop flag or the launch processing flag is set to "1" (step SH306), the normal return flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step SH305). The normal return flag is a flag for determining whether the process of transitioning to the normal game state has been executed in the specific control process in response to the forced transition flag 442 being set to "1" in the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82. The process of setting the normal return flag to "1" in the specific control process is executed in the special chart special power control process of step SH315, and the process of determining that the normal return flag is set to "1" in the non-specific control process and the process of clearing the total acquisition counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 to "0" when the normal return flag is set to "1" are executed in the second management process of step SH322. In other words, even if the process of clearing the normal return flag to "0" is executed in step SH305 each time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 249) is started, if the normal return flag is set to "1" in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 249), before the process of clearing the normal return flag to "0" is executed, the process of identifying that the normal return flag is set to "1" in the non-specific control process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 249) and the process of clearing the total acquisition number counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 to "0" if the normal return flag is set to "1" are executed.

Figure 250 is a flowchart showing the check process in this embodiment that is executed by the master MPU 82. The check process is executed in step S6809 of the second management process (Figure 107) of step SH322 in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 249). Note that the processes of steps SH401 to SH407 in the check process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the master MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the check process, if the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step SH401: NO), is not in the open/close execution mode (step SH402: NO), and is not in the high-frequency support mode (step SH403: NO), the normal entry management process (step SH404) is executed. The contents of the normal entry management process are the same as those of the normal entry management view (Figure 109) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH402, if a positive judgment is made in step SH403, or if the processing of step SH404 is executed, a total number of winning management processing is executed (step SH405). In other words, the normal winning management processing (step SH404) is not executed in the open/close execution mode or the high frequency support mode, but is executed when neither the open/close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is selected, whereas the total number of winning management processing (step SH405) is executed not only when neither the open/close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is selected, but also when the open/close execution mode or the high frequency support mode is selected.

On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step SH401: YES), the total winning number management process (step SH405) is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined difference in balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 from being affected even if the difference in balls changes due to placing game balls in the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 with the front door frame 14 in the open state. However, this is not limited to this, and the total winning number management process (step SH405) may be executed even when the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

If a positive determination is made in step SH401, or if the processing of step SH405 is executed, a result calculation process (step SH406) and a display process (step SH407) are executed. The processing content of the result calculation process is the same as the result calculation process (FIG. 110) in the thirteenth embodiment, and the processing content of the display process is the same as the display process (FIG. 116) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Figure 251 is a flowchart showing the total acquisition number management process executed in step SH405 of the check process (Figure 250). Note that the processes of steps SH501 to SH516 in the total acquisition number management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH501). If the normal return flag is not set to "1" (step SH501: NO), it is determined whether the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SH502). If the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" (step SH502: YES), this means that the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total acquisition counter 441 in the work area 213 for non-specific control has already reached the end reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls), so the processing of managing the total acquisition number is terminated without executing the processing from step SH503 onwards.

If the forced transition flag 442 is not set to "1" (step SH502: NO), it is determined whether any of the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special line winning confirmation flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, and the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH503). If the first winning confirmation flag is set to "1", it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the first winning port detection sensor 231a. If the second winning confirmation flag is set to "1", it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the second winning port detection sensor 232a. If the third winning confirmation flag is set to "1", it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning port 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the third winning port detection sensor 233a. When the special electric winning confirmation flag is set to "1", it means that a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32 and one game ball has been properly detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. When the first operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1", it means that a winning has occurred in the first operation port 33 and one game ball has been properly detected by the first operation port detection sensor 235a. When the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1", it means that a winning has occurred in the second operation port 34 and one game ball has been properly detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a.

If the result of the positive judgment in step SH503 is positive, the addition process of the total winning number counter 441 is executed (step SH504). In the addition process of the total winning number counter 441, when the first winning confirmation flag is set to "1", the result of subtracting the number of game balls that entered the general winning port 31 as the trigger of the prize ball from the number of prize balls that is 10 when one game ball enters the general winning port 31 is added to the total winning number counter 441. Also, when the second winning confirmation flag is set to "1", the result of subtracting the number of game balls that entered the general winning port 31 as the trigger of the prize ball from the number of prize balls that is 10 when one game ball enters the general winning port 31 is added to the total winning number counter 441. In addition, when the third winning confirmation flag is set to "1", "9" is calculated by subtracting 1, which is the number of game balls that entered the general winning port 31 as the trigger for the winning ball, from 10, which is the number of winning balls when one game ball enters the general winning port 31, and adding it to the total winning number counter 441. In addition, when the special electric winning confirmation flag is set to "1", "14" is calculated by subtracting 1, which is the number of game balls that entered the special electric winning device 32 as the trigger for the winning ball, from 15, which is the number of winning balls when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, and adding it to the total winning number counter 441. In addition, when the first operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1", the total winning number counter 441 is added with "2", which is the result of subtracting 1, which is the number of game balls that entered the first operation port 33 as the trigger for the winning ball, from 3, which is the number of winning balls when one game ball enters the first operation port 33. In addition, when the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1", the total winning number counter 441 is added with "1", which is the result of subtracting 1, which is the number of game balls that entered the second operation port 34 as the trigger for the winning ball, from 2, which is the number of winning balls when one game ball enters the second operation port 34.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls is 10 when one game ball enters the general winning port 31, 15 when one game ball enters the special winning device 32, 3 when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, and 2 when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. However, as in the first embodiment, the number of prize balls may be one when one game ball enters the first operating port 33. In this case, the number of game balls paid out for one game ball entering the first operating port 33 is one, resulting in an increase or decrease of zero, so even if the first operating winning confirmation flag is set to "1", the value of the total winning number counter 441 may not be updated. As in the first embodiment, the number of prize balls may be one when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. In this case, the number of game balls paid out in response to one game ball entering the second actuation port 34 will be one, resulting in an increase or decrease of zero, so even if the second actuation winning confirmation flag is set to "1", the value of the total winnings counter 441 may not be updated.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH503, or if the processing of step SH504 is executed, it is judged whether the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH505). If the out confirmation flag is set to "1", it means that a game ball has entered the out port 24a and one game ball has been normally detected by the out port detection sensor 237a.

In addition, the information of the first winning confirmation flag, second winning confirmation flag, third winning confirmation flag, special line winning confirmation flag, first activation winning confirmation flag, second activation winning confirmation flag, and out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is read out in the total winning number management process (Figure 251) included in the non-specific control processing, but the information for these flags is not updated in the total winning number management process (Figure 251). The process of clearing these flags to "0" or setting them to "1" is executed in the ball entry detection process (Figure 91) included in the specific control processing, as in the thirteenth embodiment above.

If the out confirmation flag is set to "1" (step SH505: YES), the value of the total acquisition counter 441 is decremented by 1 (step SH506). Then, if the value of the total acquisition counter 441 after decrementing by 1 falls below "0" (step SH507: NO), the value of the total acquisition counter 441 is cleared to "0" (step SH508). As a result, if the value of the total acquisition counter 441 falls below "0" after decrementing, the value of the total acquisition counter 441 is cleared to "0" and maintained at "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step SH505, if a positive judgment is made in step SH507, or if the processing of step SH508 is executed, it is judged whether the predetermined difference number of balls measured by the total acquisition number counter 441 is equal to or greater than the end reference number of 12,000 (step SH509). If the predetermined difference number of balls is equal to or greater than the end reference number (step SH509: YES), the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SH510). In addition, a forced transition command indicating that the forced transition flag 442 has been set to "1" is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SH511). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the forced transition command, it controls the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 so that an ending performance according to the situation at that time is executed.

If the negative judgment is made in step SH509, it is judged whether the predetermined difference number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 is equal to or greater than 10,000 balls, which is the notification reference number, which is less than the end reference number of 12,000 balls (step SH512). If the predetermined difference number of balls is equal to or greater than the notification reference number (step SH512: YES), a pre-transition command indicating that the predetermined difference number of balls may reach the end reference number is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SH513). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the pre-transition command, it controls the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 so that a pre-transition notification is executed, indicating that the predetermined difference number of balls may reach the end reference number. In addition, as an external output process (step SH514), a signal corresponding to the predetermined difference number of balls being equal to or greater than the notification reference number is externally output to the management computer of the game hall.

On the other hand, if the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH501: YES), the value of the total winning number counter 441 is cleared to "0" (step SH515), and the forced transition flag 442 is cleared to "0" (step SH516). Since the normal return flag is set to "1" when a transition to a normal game state occurs rather than an opening and closing execution mode, when a transition to a normal game state occurs rather than an opening and closing execution mode, the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 becomes the initial value "0", and the forced transition flag 442 is cleared to "0".

Next, we will explain the process for transitioning to the normal game state based on the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control being set to "1", and the process for setting the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control to "1" when transitioning to the normal game state occurs following the end of the high probability state or time-saving state.

Figure 252 is a flowchart showing the special chart change start process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. The special chart change start process is executed by the special chart special power control process (step SH315) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 249). Note that the processes of steps SH601 to SH608 in the special chart change start process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SH601: YES), high probability termination processing is executed (step SH602). In the high probability termination processing, both the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the high probability state counter 133 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state is a high probability state, it becomes a normal game state.

After that, the high-frequency support end process is executed (step SH603). In the high-frequency support end process, the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state was in the time-saving state, it becomes the normal game state.

After that, the process of ending the high reach state is executed (step SH604). In the process of ending the high reach state, the high reach state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". This ends the high reach state.

Then, the process of setting the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step SH605). In the process of setting the ceiling counter 131, similar to step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13), the information of the fixed ceiling number of 500 is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the work area 211 for specific control. Then, the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH606).

When a negative judgment is made in step SH601, or when the processing of step SH606 is executed, on the condition that the first reserved information or the second reserved information is stored in the first and second special chart reserved areas 111 and 112 (step SH607: YES), processing for starting a game round is executed (step SH608). In the processing for starting a game round, the processing of steps S802 to S818 of the special chart change start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed.

Figure 253 is a flowchart showing the process during special drawing confirmation in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. The process during special drawing confirmation is executed by the special drawing special power control process (step SH315) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 249). Note that the processes of steps SH701 to SH713 in the process during special drawing confirmation are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step SH701: YES), and the result of the current round of play is a jackpot (step SH702: YES), the opening and closing execution mode start process is executed (step SH703). In the opening and closing execution mode start process, the processes of steps S1003 to S1007 of the special chart confirmation process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed. In this way, if the result of the current round of play is a jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode start process is executed regardless of whether the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1". As a result, even if the predetermined difference in ball count reaches the end reference number while the round of play corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the opening and closing execution mode is executed with the round of play corresponding to the jackpot result as a trigger.

If the game result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step SH702: NO), it is determined whether the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SH704). If the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" (step SH704: YES), high probability termination processing is executed (step SH705). In the high probability termination processing, both the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the high probability state counter 133 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state was a high probability state, it becomes a normal game state.

After that, the high-frequency support end process is executed (step SH706). In the high-frequency support end process, the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state was in the time-saving state, it becomes the normal game state.

After that, the process of ending the high reach frequency state is executed (step SH707). In the process of ending the high reach frequency state, the high reach frequency state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". This ends the high reach frequency state.

Then, the process of setting the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step SH708). In the process of setting the ceiling counter 131, similar to step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13), the information of the fixed ceiling number of 500 is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the work area 211 for specific control. Then, the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH709).

If a negative judgment is made in step SH704, a state transition process at the end of a game round is executed (step SH710). In the state transition process at the end of a game round, the process of steps S1008 to S1012 of the special chart determination process in the first embodiment (FIG. 22) is executed. Then, as a result of executing the state transition process at the end of the game round, if a transition occurs from a high probability state to a normal game state or a transition occurs from a time-saving state to a normal game state (step SH711: YES), the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH712). If the normal return flag is set to "1", as already explained, a positive judgment is made in step SH501 in the total acquisition management process (FIG. 251), and the value of the total acquisition counter 441 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SH515). As a result, even if the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning counter 441 has not reached the ending reference number of 12,000, if the game state becomes a normal game state rather than an open/close execution mode, the value of the total winning counter 441 is cleared to "0" and the predetermined difference in the number of balls becomes the initial value of 0.

If the processing of step SH709 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step SH711, or if the processing of step SH712 is executed, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step SH713).

Figure 254 is a flowchart showing the special call end process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. The special call end process is executed by the special call control process (step SH315) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 249). Note that the processes of steps SH801 to SH809 in the special call end process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", i.e., the ending period has elapsed (step SH801: YES), it is determined whether the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SH802). If the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" (step SH802: YES), high probability termination processing is executed (step SH803). In the high probability termination processing, both the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the high probability state counter 133 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state was a high probability state, it becomes a normal game state.

After that, the high-frequency support end process is executed (step SH804). In the high-frequency support end process, the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state was in the time-saving state, it becomes the normal game state.

After that, the process of ending the high reach state is executed (step SH805). In the process of ending the high reach state, the high reach state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". This ends the high reach state.

Then, the process of setting the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step SH806). In the process of setting the ceiling counter 131, similar to step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13), the information of the fixed ceiling number of 500 is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the work area 211 for specific control. Then, the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SH807).

If a negative judgment is made in step SH802, state transition processing at the end of the special call is executed (step SH808). In the state transition processing at the end of the special call, the processing of steps S1102 to S1109 of the special call end processing in the first embodiment (FIG. 23) is executed. If the processing of step SH807 is executed, or if the processing of step SH808 is executed, the value of the special call counter is cleared to "0" (step SH809).

When the forced transition flag 442 is not set to "1", the state transition process when the special power ends (step SH808) is executed, and when the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1", the process to transition to the normal game state of steps SH803 to SH807 is executed, but since the state transition process when the special power ends (step SH808) is not executed, a transition to the normal game state occurs when the opening and closing execution mode ends when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode.

As described above, the normal return possible situation that allows transition to the normal game state when the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" by the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaching the end reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls) is triggered is a situation in which neither a game round nor the open/close execution mode is being executed, a game round resulting in a time-saving result or a miss result has ended, or the open/close execution mode has ended. Therefore, if the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" during the execution of a game round, transition to the normal game state is put on hold. Then, if the game round corresponds to a time-saving result or a miss result, transition to the normal game state is made when the game round ends, and if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, transition to the normal game state is made when the open/close execution mode executed following the game round ends. Also, if the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" during the execution of the open/close execution mode, transition to the normal game state is put on hold, and transition to the normal game state is made when the open/close execution mode ends.

Figure 255 is a flowchart showing the ending control process executed by the audio/light side MPU 93. The ending control process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether a forced transition command has been received from the main MPU 82 (step SH901). As already explained, the forced transition command is sent in step SH511 when it is determined in the total acquisition count management process (FIG. 251) in the main MPU 82 that the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total acquisition count counter 441 has reached the end reference number of 12,000.

If a forced transition command is received (step SH901: YES), and if the game corresponding to the time-saving result or the miss result is being executed (step SH902: YES, step SH903: NO), the first ending table is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95 (step SH904). If the forced transition flag 442 in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" during the execution of the game corresponding to the time-saving result or the miss result, a process is executed to transition to the normal game state when the game corresponding to the time-saving result or the miss result ends. The first ending table is set with data for causing the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a first ending performance that allows the player to recognize that the game state will be transitioned to the normal game state based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the ending reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls) during the remaining duration until the game corresponding to the time-saving result or the miss result ends. The first ending performance is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, by controlling the execution of the performance according to the first ending table.

In the first ending performance in the pattern display device 41, when the game round ends, a combination of first normal return patterns (for example, "2, 4, 6") that is not displayed as a stop is displayed in each of the big win result, the time-saving result, the loss result in which a loss reach occurs, and the loss result in which a loss reach does not occur. This combination of stop patterns also makes it possible for the player to recognize that the game will transition to a normal game state based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the end reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls). On the other hand, in the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b, which is the target of the game round, the stop result selected in the stop result setting process (steps S809, S813, S814) based on the results of the win/loss determination process (step S805), the allocation determination process for the big win (step S807), and the allocation determination process for the time-saving (step S811) when the current game round starts is displayed as a stop. As a result, even if the game transitions to the normal game state because the number of balls difference has reached the ending reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls), the manager of the game hall can grasp the game result determined at the start of the current game round by checking the special chart display units 37a and 37b that are the targets of the game round. Also, the first ending performance ends when a new game round starts.

If a forced transition command has been received (step SH901: YES), and if the game corresponding to the jackpot result is currently being played (step SH902: YES, step SH903: YES), the second ending table is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95 (step SH905). As already explained, if the forced transition flag 442 in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" during the game corresponding to the jackpot result, when the game corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open/close execution mode executed subsequently thereto ends, processing is executed to transition to the normal game state. The second ending table is set with data for causing the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a second ending presentation that allows the player to recognize that the game will transition to a normal game state based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the ending reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls) during the remaining duration until the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result and the duration of the open/close execution mode. The second ending presentation is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 as the presentation is controlled according to the second ending table.

In the second ending performance in the pattern display device 41, when the game round ends, a combination of second normal return patterns (for example, "4, 6, 8") that is not displayed as a stop is displayed in each of the big win result, the time-saving result, the loss result in which a loss reach occurs, and the loss result in which a loss reach does not occur. This combination of stop patterns also makes it possible to make the player recognize that the normal game state will be entered after the opening and closing execution mode ends, based on the fact that the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the end reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls). On the other hand, in the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b, which is the target of the game round, the stop result selected in the stop result setting process (steps S809, S813, S814) is displayed as a stop based on the results of the win/loss determination process (step S805), the allocation determination process for the big win (step S807), and the allocation determination process for the time-saving (step S811) when the current game round starts. As a result, even if the game transitions to the normal game state after the open/close execution mode ends because the predetermined ball difference number has reached the ending reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls), the manager of the game hall can grasp the game result determined at the start of the current game round by checking the special chart display units 37a and 37b that are the targets of the game round. Also, the second ending performance ends when a new game round begins.

If a forced transition command is received (step SH901: YES), and if the current opening and closing execution mode is being executed (step SH902: NO, step SH906: YES), the third ending table is read from the sound and light side ROM 94 to the sound and light side RAM 95 (step SH907). As already explained, if the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" during the opening and closing execution mode, a process is executed to transition to a normal game state when the opening and closing execution mode is terminated. The third ending table is set with data for causing the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a third ending performance that allows the player to recognize that the game state will be transitioned to the normal game state based on the fact that the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the ending reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls) during the remaining duration of the opening and closing execution mode. The third ending performance is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, by controlling the execution of the performance according to the third ending table. The third ending performance ends when a new game round starts.

If a forced transition command is received (step SH901: YES), and if neither the game round nor the open/close execution mode is being executed this time (step SH902: NO, step SH906: NO), the fourth ending table is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95 (step SH908). As already explained, when neither the game round nor the open/close execution mode is being executed, if the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1", a process for transitioning to the normal game state is executed at that time. The fourth ending table is set with data for causing the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute the fourth ending performance that allows the player to recognize that the game will transition to the normal game state based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the ending reference number (specifically, 12,000 balls). The fourth ending performance is executed by controlling the execution of the performance according to the fourth ending table, and is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. The fourth ending performance ends when a new game round begins.

If a forced transition command has not been received (step SH901: NO), it is determined whether a pre-transition command has been received from the main MPU 82 (step SH909). As already explained, the pre-transition command is sent in step SH513 when it is determined that the predetermined difference number of balls measured by the total acquisition counter 441 has reached the notification reference number of 10,000 in the total acquisition number management process (FIG. 251) in the main MPU 82. If a pre-transition command has been received (step SH909: YES) and a pre-transition notification is not being executed (step SH910: NO), a pre-transition notification table is read from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95 (step SH911). The pre-transition notification table is set with data for causing the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute a pre-transition notification indicating that the predetermined difference number of balls may reach the end reference number. The execution of the presentation is controlled according to the pre-transition notification table, and a pre-transition notification is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. The pre-transition notification ends when the supply of operating power to the presentation side MPU 93 is stopped, when a forced transition command is received from the main side MPU 82, or when a transition to the normal game state occurs before the forced transition command is received.

When the processing of step SH904, step SH905, step SH907, step SH908 or step SH911 has been executed, a command transmission process is executed (step SH912). In the command transmission process, a command corresponding to the table read out in step SH904, step SH905, step SH907, step SH908 or step SH911 is transmitted to the display side MPU 103. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that a performance or notification corresponding to the current table read out to the sound/light side RAM 95 is executed. In this case, when a pre-transition notification is executed, a "△" is displayed on the corner side of the pattern display device 41.

Figure 256 is a flowchart showing the first management process in this embodiment, which is executed by the master MPU 82. Note that the first management process is executed in step S4927 in the main process (Figure 81) as in the thirteenth embodiment. Also, the processes in steps SI101 to SI117 in the first management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the master MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps SI101 to SI109 execute the same processing as steps S5201 to S5209 of the first management process (Figure 85) in the 13th embodiment described above, and steps SI111 to SI117 execute the same processing as steps S5210 to S5216 of the first management process (Figure 85) in the 13th embodiment described above.

In step SI110, which is after the processing of step SI109 is executed but before the processing of step SI111 is executed, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0." This resets the predetermined difference in the number of balls to its initial value of 0.

The first management process (FIG. 256) is executed in step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81). The process of step S4927 is executed after any of the setting confirmation process (step S4913), setting value update process (step S4916), and RAM clear process (step S4919) are executed when the supply of operating power starts, and is executed even if none of the setting confirmation process (step S4913), setting value update process (step S4916), and RAM clear process (step S4919) are executed. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 starts, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 is cleared to "0" regardless of the process executed when the supply of operating power starts, and the predetermined difference number of balls becomes the initial value of 0.

In particular, if neither the setting value update process (step S4916) nor the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed, the game state when a game is played thereafter will be the game state that was in place immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was previously stopped. In other words, if the game state was a high probability state immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped, the game state after the supply of operating power is resumed will also be a high probability state, and the remaining number of times that the high probability state will continue will also be carried over. In addition, if the game state was a time-saving state immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped, the game state after the supply of operating power is resumed will also be a time-saving state, and the remaining number of times that the time-saving state will continue will also be carried over. In contrast, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, even if neither the setting value update process (step S4916) nor the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed, the value of the total acquisition counter 441 is cleared to "0" and the predetermined difference number of balls becomes the initial value of 0. Therefore, even if the high probability state or time-saving state is continued after the supply of operating power is resumed, the predetermined difference number of balls will start from the initial value of 0. Therefore, by temporarily stopping the supply of operating power during the high probability state or time-saving state and then resuming the supply of operating power, it is possible to continue the high probability state or time-saving state while preventing the predetermined difference number of balls from reaching the end standard number of 12,000.

As already explained, when the predetermined difference number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches 10,000 balls, which is the notification reference number, a pre-transition notification is executed and a signal corresponding to the predetermined difference number of balls being equal to or greater than the notification reference number is output to the management computer of the game hall. When the game hall confirms the pre-transition notification or confirms that the external output has been made, if it does not want the predetermined difference number of balls to reach the end reference number and transition to the normal game state to occur, it simply turns the power switch from OFF to ON and does not perform setting change operations or RAM clear operations when the power switch is ON. On the other hand, if it does want the predetermined difference number of balls to reach the end reference number and transition to the normal game state to occur, it simply does not need to turn the power switch from OFF to ON.

Next, the transition to the normal game state when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 257. FIG. 257(a) shows the period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82, FIG. 257(b) shows the period during which a game round is being executed, FIG. 257(c) shows the period during which the open/close execution mode is being executed, FIG. 257(d) shows the period during which the high probability state or the time-saving state is in effect, FIG. 257(e) shows the timing when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number, FIG. 257(f) shows the period during which the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1", FIG. 257(g) shows the timing when the process of clearing the value of the total winning number counter 441 to "0" is executed, and FIG. 257(h) shows the timing when the transition to the normal game state occurs based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the end reference number.

First, we will explain the case where a transition to the normal game state occurs before the specified difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 257(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. In this case, the first management process (FIG. 256) of step S4927 in the main process (FIG. 81) of the main MPU 82 is executed, and the value of the total winnings counter 441 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(g). After that, a game round is executed from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in FIG. 257(b), and since that game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the opening and closing execution mode is executed from timing t3 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 257(c). Then, at timing t4 when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the high probability state or time-saving state is entered.

After that, a game round is executed from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 257(b), and since that game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the opening and closing execution mode is executed from timing t6 to timing t7 as shown in FIG. 257(c). Then, at timing t8 after the opening and closing execution mode ends, as shown in FIG. 257(d), if the high probability state was in a high probability state, the game state transitions to a normal game state, and if the time-saving state was in a time-saving state, the time-saving state ends and the game state transitions to a normal game state. In this case, at timing t8, the value of the total winnings counter 441 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(g).

Next, we will explain what happens when the specified difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number during the opening and closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 257(b), a game round is executed from timing t9 to timing t10, and since that game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the opening and closing execution mode is started at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 257(c). In this case, since the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the ending reference number at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 257(e), the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 257(f). However, since the opening and closing execution mode is still in effect at timing t11, the process of transitioning to the normal game state is not executed.

Then, at the timing of t12, the opening and closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 257(c). In this case, since the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 257(f), the game transitions to the normal game state at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 257(d) and FIG. 257(h) regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode. Also, at the timing of t12, the value of the total winnings counter 441 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(g), and the forced transition flag 442 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(f).

Next, we will explain the case where the specified difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number in the middle of a game corresponding to a time-saving result or a miss result.

At the timing of t13, the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 257(c). In this case, the game state is maintained in the high probability state or time-saving state as shown in FIG. 257(d). After that, at the timing of t14, a game round starts as shown in FIG. 257(b). The game round corresponds to a time-saving result or a miss result. At the timing of t15 during the execution of the game round, as shown in FIG. 257(e), the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number, and therefore, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 257(f), the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1". However, since the game round is still in progress at the timing of t15, the process of transitioning to the normal game state is not executed.

Then, at timing t16, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 257(b). In this case, because the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 257(f), the game transitions to the normal game state as shown in FIG. 257(d) and FIG. 257(h) at timing t16. Also, at timing t16, the value of the total winnings counter 441 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(g), and the forced transition flag 442 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(f).

Next, we will explain what happens when the specified difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number midway through a game that corresponds to a jackpot result.

At the timing of t17, the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 257(c). In this case, the game state is maintained in the high probability state or time-saving state as shown in FIG. 257(d). After that, at the timing of t18, a game round starts as shown in FIG. 257(b). This game round corresponds to a jackpot result. At the timing of t19 during the execution of this game round, the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the ending reference number as shown in FIG. 257(e), so that at the timing of t19, the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 257(f). However, since the game round is still in progress at the timing of t19, the process of transitioning to the normal game state is not executed.

After that, at the timing of t20, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 257(b). Since the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 257(f), but the open/close execution mode starts as shown in FIG. 257(c). After that, at the timing of t21, the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 257(c). In this case, since the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 257(f), the game transitions to the normal game state as shown in FIG. 257(d) and FIG. 257(h) at the timing of t21. Also, at the timing of t21, the value of the total winnings counter 441 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(g), and the forced transition flag 442 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 257(f).

The embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number, the game enters the normal game state in a situation where a return to normal is possible, even if the game is in a high probability state or time-saving state. This makes it possible to prevent excessive profits from being awarded to the player.

Even if the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number and the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1", a transition to the normal game state will not occur until a situation in which a return to normal is possible is reached. This makes it possible to make the transition to the normal game state occur at a predetermined timing in a configuration in which the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number at any timing.

If the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number during the opening and closing execution mode, a transition to the normal game state occurs when the opening and closing execution mode ends. This makes it possible to prevent the profits from the opening and closing execution mode that are occurring at that time from being lost, even if the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number.

If the specified number of balls difference reaches the end reference number during a game round, the game round will not end midway, but will continue until the initial duration has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent an incident in which a game round ends midway, causing confusion for the player.

If the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number during a play round corresponding to a jackpot result, that play round ends, and when the open/close execution mode triggered by that play round ends, a transition to the normal play state occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the profits of the open/close execution mode corresponding to that jackpot result from being lost, even if the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, if the occurrence of the jackpot result has been identified by the win/loss determination process.

The measurement of the predetermined difference in the number of balls using the total winning number counter 441 is executed as a non-specific control process. This makes it possible to measure the predetermined difference in the number of balls without increasing the program capacity and data capacity of the specific control process.

In a configuration in which the measurement of the predetermined difference in the number of balls is performed by non-specific control processing, the processing for transitioning to the normal game state based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the termination reference number is executed by specific control processing. This makes it possible to execute the transition management of the game state by specific control processing in a configuration in which the measurement of the predetermined difference in the number of balls is executed by non-specific control processing, thereby suppressing the increase in the program capacity and data capacity of the specific control processing.

In the non-specific control process, the results of balls entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a are managed as a game history, and the game history is used to calculate a base value. In the non-specific control process, the results of balls entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a are used to measure a predetermined difference in the number of balls. This makes it possible to measure the predetermined difference in the number of balls using the configuration for managing the game history.

When the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number and the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1", an ending performance is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a transition to the normal game state will occur when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 is cleared to "0" regardless of whether the setting confirmation process (step S4913), the setting value update process (step S4916), or the RAM clear process (step S4919) has been executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 is cleared to "0" regardless of the process executed when the supply of operating power started, and the predetermined difference number of balls becomes the initial value of 0.

In particular, if neither the setting value update process (step S4916) nor the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed, the game state when a game is played thereafter will be the game state that was in place immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped. In other words, if the game state was a high probability state immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped, the game state after the supply of operating power is resumed will also be a high probability state, and the remaining number of times that the high probability state will continue will also be carried over. In addition, if the game state was a time-saving state immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped, the game state after the supply of operating power is resumed will also be a time-saving state, and the remaining number of times that the time-saving state will continue will also be carried over. In contrast, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, even if neither the setting value update process (step S4916) nor the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed, the value of the total acquisition counter 441 is cleared to "0" and the predetermined difference number of balls becomes the initial value of 0. Therefore, even if the high probability state or time-saving state is continued after the supply of operating power is resumed, the predetermined difference number of balls will start from the initial value of 0. Therefore, by temporarily stopping the supply of operating power during the high probability state or time-saving state and then resuming the supply of operating power, it is possible to continue the high probability state or time-saving state while preventing the predetermined difference number of balls from reaching the end standard number of 12,000.

When the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the notification reference number, which is a number that is less than the end reference number, a pre-transition notification is executed and a signal corresponding to the predetermined difference in the number of balls being equal to or greater than the notification reference number is output to the management computer of the game hall. When the game hall confirms the pre-transition notification or confirms that the external output has been made, if it does not want the predetermined difference in the number of balls to reach the end reference number and transition to the normal game state to occur, it simply turns the power switch from OFF to ON and does not perform setting change operations or RAM clear operations when the power switch is ON. On the other hand, if it does want the predetermined difference in the number of balls to reach the end reference number and transition to the normal game state to occur, it simply does not need to turn the power switch from OFF to ON.

<Thirty-eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the normal return possible situations include a situation where neither the game round nor the open/close execution mode is being executed, a situation where the game round resulting in a time-saving result or a miss result is finished, and a situation where the open/close execution mode is finished, as well as a situation where the round game is finished in the open/close execution mode, which is different from the above-mentioned 37th embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the above-mentioned 37th embodiment will be explained. Note that the explanation of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 37th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 258 is a flowchart showing the special line opening process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the processing of steps SI201 to SI211 in the special line opening process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, the closure determination process is executed in the same manner as step S6301 of the special line open process (FIG. 97(b)) in the 13th embodiment (step SI201). In the closure determination process, if the special line winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", that is, if a win has occurred in the special line winning device 32, the value of the winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1. If the value of the winning counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the special line winning device 32 has been met. In addition, if a win has not occurred in the special line winning device 32 or the value of the winning counter is not "0", it is determined whether the open duration of the round game has elapsed by determining whether the value of the special chart side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". If the value of the special chart side timer counter is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the special line winning device 32 has been met.

If the closing condition of the special electric winning device 32 is met (step SI202: YES), a closing setting process is executed (step SI203). In the closing setting process, the special electric winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b.

Then, it is determined whether the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SI204). If the forced transition flag 442 is not set to "1" (step SI204: NO), normal post-closing processing is executed (step SI205). In the normal post-closing processing, the processing of steps S6304 to S6307 of the special line opening processing in the 13th embodiment (Figure 97 (b)) is executed.

If the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" (step SI204: YES), high probability termination processing is executed (step SI206). In the high probability termination processing, both the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the high probability state counter 133 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state was a high probability state, it will return to the normal game state.

After that, the high-frequency support end process is executed (step SI207). In the high-frequency support end process, the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag in the work area 211 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the value of the time-saving state counter 134 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the game state was in the time-saving state, it becomes the normal game state.

After that, the high reach frequency state termination process is executed (step SI208). In the high reach frequency state termination process, the high reach frequency state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". This ends the high reach frequency state.

Then, the setting process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step SI209). In the setting process of the ceiling counter 131, similar to step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13), the information of the fixed ceiling number of 500 is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the work area 211 for specific control. Then, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" so that the special chart fluctuation start process is executed in the next special chart special electricity control process (step SH315) (step SI210), and the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SI211).

According to the above configuration, if the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number in the middle of a round play in the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode ends at the timing when the round play in progress ends, and a transition to the normal game state occurs. This allows the transition to the normal game state to occur early because the transition to the normal game state occurs even in the middle of the opening and closing execution mode, and the transition to the normal game state is delayed until the round play in progress ends, so that profits from the round play in progress can be secured.

<Thirty-ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the timing of transition to the normal game state when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured using the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number is different from that of the 37th embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the 37th embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 37th embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 259 is a flowchart showing the special picture special electricity control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the processes of steps SI301 to SI317 in the special picture special electricity control process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

When the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SI301: YES), a forced termination process is executed (step SI302). In the forced termination process, if a game round is being executed, a process for terminating the game round midway is executed. Specifically, the game round is terminated in a state in which the display of the pattern change in the special pattern display unit 37a, 37b that is the target of the game round is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the result. In addition, by transmitting a forced termination command for the game round to the sound and light side MPU 93, the performance for the game round in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 is terminated midway. In this case, the pattern display device 41 may be configured to execute a notification indicating that the performance for the game round is terminated when the predetermined difference ball number reaches the termination reference number. In addition, in the forced termination process, if the open/close execution mode is being executed, a process for terminating the open/close execution mode midway is executed. Specifically, the special electric winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b. Also, a forced termination command for the open/close execution mode is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 to terminate the performance for the open/close execution mode in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, the pattern display device 41 may be configured to issue a notification indicating that the performance for the open/close execution mode will end when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number.

Then, normal return processing is executed (step SI303). In the normal return processing, the same processing as steps SH602 to SH605 of the special chart variation start processing (FIG. 252) in the 37th embodiment is executed. As a result, even if the gaming state is in a high probability state, it becomes a normal gaming state, and even if the gaming state is in a time-saving state, it becomes a normal gaming state. In addition, the high reach frequency state ends, and information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the work area 211 for specific control.

Then, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" so that the special chart change start process is executed in this special chart special electricity control process (Fig. 259) (step SI304). In addition, the normal return flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SI305).

If a negative determination is made in step SI301, or if the processing of step SI305 is executed, the processing of steps SI306 to SI317 is executed. In steps SI306 to SI317, the same processing as steps S601 to S612 of the special chart special call control processing (Figure 18) in the first embodiment is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, even if the game is in the middle of a round, the game ends and the game returns to the normal game state, and even if the game is in the middle of the open/close execution mode, the open/close execution mode ends and the game returns to the normal game state. This makes it possible to immediately end a situation in which the player's balls could increase when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number.

<Fortieth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the process executed when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number is different from that of the 37th embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the 37th embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 37th embodiment is basically omitted.

In the 37th embodiment, the end reference number was set to 12,000 balls, but in this embodiment, the end reference number is set to 100,000 balls. In addition, in the 37th embodiment, the value of the total winning number counter 441 is cleared to "0" when the high probability state or time-saving state ends and a transition to the normal game state occurs without the predetermined difference number of balls reaching the end reference number, but in this embodiment, the value of the total winning number counter 441 is not cleared to "0" when the high probability state or time-saving state ends and a transition to the normal game state occurs without the predetermined difference number of balls reaching the end reference number.

The predetermined difference number of balls reaching 12,000 can occur when the open/close execution mode occurs repeatedly in a high probability state or time-saving state without an intervening transition to the normal game state, but the predetermined difference number of balls reaching 100,000 basically cannot occur when the open/close execution mode occurs repeatedly in a high probability state or time-saving state without an intervening transition to the normal game state. Therefore, the predetermined difference number of balls reaching the ending standard number of 100,000 occurs when a large number of consecutive winning periods occur in a situation where the number of game balls released in the normal game state is small, assuming that one consecutive winning period is the period from when the open/close execution mode occurs to when the transition to the normal game state occurs.

As described above, when the high probability state or time-saving state ends and a transition to the normal game state occurs without the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the end reference number, the value of the total winning number counter 441 is not cleared to "0". Therefore, for example, if the first player stops playing with the predetermined difference in the number of balls at 30,000, the next player causes a consecutive winning period to occur and the predetermined difference in the number of balls is 60,000 including the previous player's, and the next player causes a consecutive winning period to occur and the predetermined difference in the number of balls is 95,000 including the previous player's, the next player will increase his/her balls by 5,000, so the predetermined difference in the number of balls will reach the end reference number of 100,000. In this embodiment, details will be described later, but if the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number of 100,000, the progress of the game is blocked.

In the 37th embodiment, the notification reference number was set to 10,000, but in this embodiment, the notification reference number is set to 90,000. Also, in the 37th embodiment, when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the notification reference number, a pre-transition notification indicating that the predetermined difference number of balls may reach the end reference number is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, but in this embodiment, when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the notification reference number, a pre-end notification indicating that the progress of the game may be blocked is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

In the above 37th embodiment, a normal return flag is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and in the total acquisition number management process (Fig. 251), if the normal return flag is set to "1", the total acquisition number counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 are both cleared to "0". However, in this embodiment, a normal return flag is not provided, and the total acquisition number management process (Fig. 251) does not include the processes of steps SH501, SH516, and SH517.

Figure 260 (a) is a flowchart showing the special chart change start processing in this embodiment executed by the master MPU 82. The special chart change start processing is executed by the special chart special power control processing (step SH315) of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 249). Note that the processing of steps SI401 to SI405 in the special chart change start processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the master MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SI401: YES), the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SI402). In the first timer interrupt process (Figure 249), as in the 37th embodiment, if both the game stop flag and the launch processing in progress flag are not set to "1", not only the processes of steps SH301 to SH304 but also the processes of steps SH307 to SH322 are executed. In other words, the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 249) includes a power outage monitoring processing (step SH301) which monitors for the occurrence of a power outage and, if a power outage is identified, sets the power outage flag to "1" and waits until the supply of operating power is completely cut off, a processing for updating various random numbers (steps SH302 to SH304), and a second management processing (step SH322), as well as processing for progressing the game, such as a ball entry detection processing (step SH309), a launch control processing (step SH313), a special chart special power control processing (step SH315), a normal chart normal power control processing (step SH316), and a payout output processing (step SH319), and these processing are executed if both the game stop flag and the launch processing in progress flag are not set to "1". On the other hand, if the game stop flag is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step SH306, and the occurrence of a power outage is monitored, and if a power outage is identified, the power outage flag is set to "1" and the power outage monitoring process (step SH301) is executed to wait until the supply of operating power is completely cut off, processes for updating various random numbers (steps SH302 to SH304), and a second management process (step SH322) are executed, but processes for progressing the game, such as the ball entry detection process (step SH309), launch control process (step SH313), special chart special power control process (step SH315), normal chart normal power control process (step SH316), and payout output process (step SH319), are not executed.

With the above configuration, when the game stop flag is set to "1" based on the fact that the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured using the total winning number counter 441 has reached the end reference number, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding thereafter. In particular, since the launch control process (step SH313) is not executed, even if the launch operation device 28 is operated, the game balls are not launched toward the game area PA, making it impossible to play the game. Also, since the payout output process (step SH319) is not executed, it is possible to prevent subsequent prize ball instructions from being issued. On the other hand, since the power outage monitoring process (step SH301) is executed, it is possible to execute a power outage process for a power outage even if a power outage occurs in a situation in which the progress of the game is blocked. In the power outage process, the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the specific control work area 211, so that when the supply of operating power is resumed again, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 84 from being identified.

The state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" will not be cleared to "0" unless a "setting change operation" is performed and the setting value update process (Fig. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above. As a result, when the progress of the game is blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number, it is necessary to turn the power switch OFF once so that the supply of operating power is stopped, and then turn the power switch ON while performing the "setting change operation" so that the setting value update process (Fig. 83) is executed.

After setting the game stop flag to "1" in step SI402, a game stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SI403). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the game stop command, it reads a data table from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95 so that the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 can issue a notification to the player that the game progress has been blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the end reference number, and controls the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 according to the read data table.

When a negative judgment is made in step SI401, or when the processing of step SI403 is executed, on the condition that the first reserved information or the second reserved information is stored in the first and second special chart reserved areas 111 and 112 (step SI404: YES), processing for starting a game round is executed (step SI405). In the processing for starting a game round, the processing of steps S802 to S818 of the special chart change start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed.

Figure 260 (b) is a flowchart showing the special chart determination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. The special chart determination process is executed by the special chart special power control process (step SH315) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 249). Note that the processes of steps SI501 to SI508 in the special chart determination process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step SI501: YES), and the result of the current game is a jackpot (step SI502: YES), the opening and closing execution mode start process is executed (step SI503). In the opening and closing execution mode start process, the processes of steps S1003 to S1007 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed.

If the game result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step SI502: NO), it is determined whether the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SI504). If the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" (step SI504: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SI505). As already explained, if the game stop flag is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step SH306 of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 249), and the power outage monitoring process (step SH301), the process for updating various random numbers (steps SH302 to SH304), and the second management process (step SH322) are executed, but the processes for progressing the game, such as the ball entry detection process (step SH309), launch control process (step SH313), special chart special power control process (step SH315), normal chart normal power control process (step SH316), and payout output process (step SH319), are not executed.

With the above configuration, when the game stop flag is set to "1" based on the fact that the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured using the total winning number counter 441 has reached the end reference number, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding thereafter. In particular, since the launch control process (step SH313) is not executed, even if the launch operation device 28 is operated, the game balls are not launched toward the game area PA, making it impossible to play the game. Also, since the payout output process (step SH319) is not executed, it is possible to prevent subsequent prize ball instructions from being issued. On the other hand, since the power outage monitoring process (step SH301) is executed, it is possible to execute a power outage process for a power outage even if a power outage occurs in a situation in which the progress of the game is blocked. In the power outage process, the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the specific control work area 211, so that when the supply of operating power is resumed again, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 84 from being identified.

The state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" will not be cleared to "0" unless a "setting change operation" is performed and the setting value update process (Fig. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above. As a result, when the progress of the game is blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number, it is necessary to turn the power switch OFF once so that the supply of operating power is stopped, and then turn the power switch ON while performing the "setting change operation" so that the setting value update process (Fig. 83) is executed.

After setting the game stop flag to "1" in step SI505, a game stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SI506). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the game stop command, it reads a data table from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95 so that the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 can issue a notification to the player that the game progress has been blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the end reference number, and controls the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 according to the read data table.

If a negative judgment is made in step SI504, a state transition process at the end of a game round is executed (step SI507). In the state transition process at the end of a game round, the processes of steps S1008 to S1012 of the special chart confirmation process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed. If the process of step SI506 is executed, or if the process of step SI507 is executed, the value of the special chart special signal counter is cleared to "0" (step SI508).

Figure 260 (c) is a flowchart showing the special call end process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. The special call end process is executed by the special call control process (step SH315) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 249). Note that the processes of steps SI601 to SI606 in the special call end process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

If the value of the special chart timer counter is "0", i.e., if the ending period has elapsed (step SI601: YES), it is determined whether the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SI602). If the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" (step SI602: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SI603). As already explained, if the game stop flag is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step SH306 of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 249), and the power outage monitoring process (step SH301), the process for updating various random numbers (steps SH302 to SH304), and the second management process (step SH322) are executed, but the processes for progressing the game, such as the ball entry detection process (step SH309), launch control process (step SH313), special chart special power control process (step SH315), normal chart normal power control process (step SH316), and payout output process (step SH319), are not executed.

With the above configuration, when the game stop flag is set to "1" based on the fact that the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured using the total winning number counter 441 has reached the end reference number, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding thereafter. In particular, since the launch control process (step SH313) is not executed, even if the launch operation device 28 is operated, the game balls are not launched toward the game area PA, making it impossible to play the game. Also, since the payout output process (step SH319) is not executed, it is possible to prevent subsequent prize ball instructions from being issued. On the other hand, since the power outage monitoring process (step SH301) is executed, it is possible to execute a power outage process for a power outage even if a power outage occurs in a situation in which the progress of the game is blocked. In the power outage process, the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the specific control work area 211, so that when the supply of operating power is resumed again, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 84 from being identified.

The state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" will not be cleared to "0" unless a "setting change operation" is performed and the setting value update process (Fig. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above. As a result, when the progress of the game is blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number, it is necessary to turn the power switch OFF once so that the supply of operating power is stopped, and then turn the power switch ON while performing the "setting change operation" so that the setting value update process (Fig. 83) is executed.

After setting the game stop flag to "1" in step SI603, a game stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step SI604). When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the game stop command, it reads a data table from the sound/light side ROM 94 to the sound/light side RAM 95 so that the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 can issue a notification to the player that the game progress has been blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the end reference number, and controls the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 according to the read data table.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH602, a state transition process when the special call ends is executed (step SI605). In the state transition process when the special call ends, the processes of steps S1102 to S1109 of the special call end process in the first embodiment (FIG. 23) are executed. If the process of step SI604 is executed, or if the process of step SI605 is executed, the value of the special call counter is cleared to "0" (step SI606).

Figure 261 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the master MPU 82. Note that, among the processing of steps SI701 to SI733 in the main processing, the processing other than the clear processing called and executed in step SI717 and the first management processing called and executed in step SI728 is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the master MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control, and the clear processing and the first management processing are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the master MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps SI701 to SI716 execute the same processing as steps S4901 to S4916 in the main processing (Figure 81) in the 13th embodiment, and steps SI718 to SI733 execute the same processing as steps S4917 to S4932 in the main processing (Figure 81) in the 13th embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power is started and the setting value update process (step SI716) is executed due to the "setting change operation", the clear process is executed by the CALLI command (step SI717). In the clear process, as in the first management process (FIG. 85) in the 13th embodiment, Y (u+2) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control, and the information of various registers of the main MPU 82 is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and then the total acquisition number counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". Then, Y (r+a) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address at the time of return to specific control, and the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control is restored to the various registers of the main MPU 82. Then, the RETI command is used to return to the main process (FIG. 261) included in the process of specific control. In the 37th embodiment, the value of the total acquisition counter 441 is cleared to "0" in the first management process (FIG. 256), but in this embodiment, the process of clearing the value of the total acquisition counter 441 to "0" is not executed in the first management process (step SI728).

The embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winnings counter 441 reaches the standard number for ending the game, the game is prevented from progressing in a situation where ending is possible. This makes it possible to prevent excessive benefits from being awarded to the player.

Even if the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number and the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1", the game will not be blocked until the game can be ended. This makes it possible to block the game from progressing at a predetermined timing in a configuration in which the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number at any timing.

If the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number during the opening and closing execution mode, the game will be prevented from progressing when the opening and closing execution mode ends. This makes it possible to prevent the profits from the opening and closing execution mode that have been generated at that point from being lost, even if the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number.

If the predetermined number of balls difference reaches the ending reference number in the middle of a game round, the game round will not end midway, but will continue until the initial duration has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being interrupted in the middle of a game round, causing confusion for the player.

If the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number during a game round corresponding to a jackpot result, that game round ends, and if the open/close execution mode triggered by that game round ends, the game progress is blocked. This makes it possible to prevent the profits of the open/close execution mode corresponding to that jackpot result from being lost, even if the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, if the occurrence of the jackpot result has been identified by the win/loss determination process.

The measurement of the predetermined difference in the number of balls using the total number of wins counter 441 is executed as a non-specific control process. This makes it possible to measure the predetermined difference in the number of balls without increasing the program capacity and data capacity of the specific control process.

In a configuration in which the measurement of the predetermined difference in the number of balls is performed by non-specific control processing, the processing for stopping the progress of the game based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the ending reference number is executed by specific control processing. This makes it possible to execute game progress management by specific control processing in a configuration in which the measurement of the predetermined difference in the number of balls is executed by non-specific control processing, thereby suppressing increases in the program capacity and data capacity of the specific control processing.

In the non-specific control process, the results of balls entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a are managed as a game history, and the game history is used to calculate a base value. In the non-specific control process, the results of balls entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a are used to measure a predetermined difference in the number of balls. This makes it possible to measure the predetermined difference in the number of balls using the configuration for managing the game history.

When the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number and the progress of the game is blocked, a notification is issued by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to enable the player to recognize that the progress of the game has been blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the end reference number. This makes it possible to enable the player to recognize that the progress of the game has been blocked because the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the end reference number.

In a configuration in which the game stop flag is set to "1" and game progress is blocked when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 begins and the setting value update process (step SI716) is not executed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" will not be released. This makes it possible to make it necessary to execute the setting value update process (step SI716) in order to release the state in which game progress has been blocked.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, if a "setting change operation" is performed and the setting value update process (step SI716) is not executed, the total acquisition counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 are not cleared to "0." This makes it difficult to fraudulently clear the total acquisition counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 to "0."

When the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the notification reference number, which is a number less than the end reference number, a pre-end notification is executed and a signal corresponding to the predetermined difference in the number of balls being equal to or greater than the notification reference number is output to the management computer of the game hall. When the game hall confirms the pre-end notification or confirms that the external output has been made, if it does not want to create a situation in which the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number and the progress of the game is blocked, it is sufficient to execute the setting value update process (step SI716) by turning the power switch from OFF to ON and performing a "setting change operation" when the power switch is ON. On the other hand, if it is necessary to create a situation in which the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number and the progress of the game is blocked, it is sufficient to not turn the power switch from OFF to ON, or to turn the power switch from OFF to ON and not perform a "setting change operation" when the power switch is ON.

<Forty-first embodiment>
In this embodiment, the timing at which the game progress is stopped when the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured by the total winning number counter 441 reaches the end reference number is different from the above-mentioned 40th embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the above-mentioned 40th embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 40th embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 262 is a flowchart showing the special drawing special power control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the processing of steps SI801 to SI816 in the special drawing special power control process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

When the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SI801: YES), a forced termination process is executed (step SI802). In the forced termination process, if a game round is being executed, a process for terminating the game round midway is executed. Specifically, the display of the pattern in the special pattern display unit 37a, 37b that is the target of the game round is terminated in a state where the display of the pattern corresponding to the result is displayed. In addition, by transmitting a forced termination command for the game round to the sound and light side MPU 93, the performance for the game round in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 is terminated midway. In this case, the pattern display device 41 may be configured to execute a notification indicating that the performance for the game round is terminated when the predetermined difference ball number reaches the termination reference number. In addition, in the forced termination process, if the open/close execution mode is being executed, a process for terminating the open/close execution mode midway is executed. Specifically, the special electric winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b. Also, a forced termination command for the open/close execution mode is sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 to terminate the performance for the open/close execution mode in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In this case, the pattern display device 41 may be configured to issue a notification indicating that the performance for the open/close execution mode will end when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number.

Then, the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step SI803). As a result, in the next processing of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 249), a positive judgment is made in step SH306, and the processing of steps SH307 to SH321 is not executed, and the progress of the game is blocked. Then, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0", so that the special chart change start processing is executed in the current special chart special electricity control processing (Fig. 262) (step SI804).

If a negative determination is made in step SI801, or if the processing of step SI804 is executed, the processing of steps SI805 to SI816 is executed. In steps SI805 to SI816, the same processing as steps S601 to S612 of the special chart special call control processing (Figure 18) in the first embodiment is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, even if the game is in the middle of a round, the game is ended and the progress of the game is stopped, and even if the open/close execution mode is in the middle of the round, the open/close execution mode is ended and the progress of the game is stopped. This makes it possible to immediately stop the progress of the game when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number.



<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The following configurations of the other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed after the setting process for the time-saving result is executed in the specific confirmation process, and the setting process for the time-saving result may be executed after the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. In this case, when a ceiling time-saving state occurs in which the time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process in a game round in which the time-saving state can be set and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1, the setting of the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving state is prioritized over the setting of the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of times of time-saving continuation set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving state is equal to or greater than the number of times of time-saving continuation set in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result, or is greater than the number of times of time-saving continuation set in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result are set as the time-saving result, but only one of the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result may be set. Also, three or more types of time-saving results may be set. In this case, the number of time-saving continuations set in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result may be equal to or greater than the number of time-saving continuations set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving result, regardless of the type of time-saving result, as in each of the above embodiments, and the number of time-saving continuations for at least some of the time-saving results may be less than the number of time-saving continuations set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving result.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the number of times the time-saving continues is set in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result may be configured to be equal to or less than the number of times the time-saving continues is set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving result, or may be configured to be less than the number of times the time-saving continues is set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving result.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result may be configured to be the first high-frequency support mode rather than the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the time-saving state triggered by the jackpot result or the time-saving result is configured to be the first high-frequency support mode, and the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving result is configured to be the second high-frequency support mode.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving may be configured to be the first high-frequency support mode rather than the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the time-saving state triggered by a jackpot result or the ceiling time-saving state is configured to be the first high-frequency support mode, and the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result is configured to be the second high-frequency support mode.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode may be set in the time-saving state triggered by one of the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result, and the second high-frequency support mode may be set in the time-saving state triggered by the other result. This makes it possible to set a high-frequency support mode according to the type of time-saving result.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening in the normal drawing hit judgment, and the other execution modes of the normal drawing and normal electric are the same, but in addition to or instead of the probability, other execution modes may be different. For example, one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to have a longer duration of the variable display times in the normal drawing display unit 38a than the other, one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to have a longer average duration of the variable display times in the normal drawing display unit 38a than the other, one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to have a greater number of times that the second operating port 34 or the special winning device 151 is in the open state in the normal electric opening state than the other, or one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to have a longer total period in which the second operating port 34 or the special winning device 151 is in the open state in the normal electric opening state than the other. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to be more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode in any execution mode, the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode in any execution mode, or the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to be more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode for some execution modes and the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode for the remaining execution modes.

In addition, the probability of winning the electric role release in the normal winning/losing judgment may be the same or approximately the same regardless of the support mode.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the time-saving state of the second high-frequency support mode occurs regardless of whether a time-saving result occurs or a ceiling time-saving result occurs, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving result occurs, the time-saving state of the first high-frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time-saving result occurs, the time-saving state of the second high-frequency support mode occurs. When a time-saving result occurs, the time-saving state of the second high-frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time-saving result occurs, the time-saving state of the first high-frequency support mode occurs. When a time-saving result occurs, the time-saving state of the first high-frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time-saving result occurs, a high probability state occurs. When a time-saving result occurs, the time-saving state of the second high-frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time-saving result occurs, a high probability state occurs.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, when the win/loss determination process results in a time-saving result and the time-saving state occurs, the occurrence of the time-saving state is notified by the stop result of the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. However, this is not limited to this, and a stop result corresponding to the time-saving result may be displayed in the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, and then a notification may be executed to enable the player to recognize that the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result will begin until the end timing of the game round. However, in this configuration, since it is necessary to specify whether or not the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result will occur at the stage of determining the presentation for the game round, the setting process for the time-saving result needs to be executed at the start of the game round.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, a notification that the time-saving state will occur is not executed depending on the stop result of the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. However, this is not limited to this, and a stop result corresponding to the ceiling time-saving is displayed in the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, and then a notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will start until the end timing of the game round. However, in this case, since it is necessary to specify whether or not a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving will occur at the stage of determining the performance for the game round, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 needs to be executed at the start of the game round.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when the win/loss determination process results in a time-saving result and the game round in which the win/loss determination process was executed ends, the start of a new game round in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result is immediately permitted. However, this is not limited to this, and when a time-saving state occurs as a result of a time-saving result, the start of a new game round may be prevented for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) when the game round in which the time-saving result occurred ends. In this case, it is possible to use the predetermined period of time to execute a notification that allows the player to recognize that the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result will begin.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when a game round that triggers the ceiling time reduction has ended, the start of a new game round in the time-shortened state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is immediately permitted, but this is not limited to the above. When a time-shortened state is triggered by the ceiling time reduction, the start of a new game round may be prevented for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) when the game round that triggered the ceiling time reduction has ended. In this case, it is possible to use the predetermined period of time to issue a notification that allows the player to recognize that the time-shortened state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is about to begin.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, when a game round ends, the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented, the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented, the time-saving result is set, and the ceiling counter 131 is decremented. However, these processes may be executed after the win/loss determination process and before the specific process for the variable display period is executed. In this case, since it is possible to determine whether or not a ceiling time-saving will occur before the specific process for the variable display period is executed, the stop result of the special chart display units 37a and 37b may be selected to correspond to the occurrence of a ceiling time-saving, or the stop result of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 may be selected to correspond to the occurrence of a ceiling time-saving.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 134 and the setting process for the time-saving result are configured to be executed at the end of a game round, but this is not limited thereto, and the subtraction process of the time-saving state counter 134 may be executed at the start of a game round, and the setting process for the time-saving result may be executed at the end of a game round.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, both the decrement process of the time-saving state counter 134 and the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 are configured to be executed at the end of a game round, but this is not limited thereto, and the decrement process of the time-saving state counter 134 may be executed at the start of a game round, and the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the end of a game round.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the time-saving state is configured to end when a predetermined number of game rounds of time-saving continuation have been played, but this is not limited thereto, and the time-saving state may be configured to end when an end lottery result is obtained in an end lottery process executed in the time-saving state. In this case, the process of ending the time-saving state when the end lottery process is executed and an end lottery result is obtained may be configured to be executed before the setting process for the time-saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131. This makes it possible to start a new time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result or the ceiling time-saving in a game round in which the time-saving state has ended.

(17) In the first embodiment and the like described above, both the setting process for the time-saving result and the decrement process of the high-probability state counter 133 are configured to be executed at the end of a game round, but this is not limited thereto, and the setting process for the time-saving result may be executed at the start of a game round, and the decrement process of the high-probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of a game round.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like described above, both the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 and the decrement process of the high probability state counter 133 are configured to be executed at the end of a game round, but this is not limited thereto, and the decrement process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the start of a game round, and the decrement process of the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of a game round.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented even if a game round is played in a high probability state, but this is not limited thereto, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 may be decremented when a game round is played even in a high probability state. In this case, it is possible that the value of the ceiling counter 131 after decrementing by 1 in a high probability state becomes "0." In this case, it is preferable to disable the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and continue the high probability state.

(20) In the first embodiment and others described above, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented when a game round is played even in the time-saving state, but this is not limited thereto, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 may not be decremented even when a game round is played in the time-saving state.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, when a predetermined trigger occurs, a value such as a fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131, 325, and when a game round is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131, 325 is decremented by one, and when the value of the ceiling counter 131, 325 after the decrement becomes "0", a time-saving state occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and a time-saving state may occur when the ceiling counter 131, 325 is cleared to "0" when a predetermined trigger occurs, and when a game round is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131, 325 is incremented by one, and when the value of the ceiling counter 131, 325 after the increment becomes a value corresponding to the trigger such as a fixed ceiling count.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the winning/losing determination process using the winning random number counter C1 determines whether or not to generate a time-saving result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving result may be determined whether or not to generate a time-saving result using a different determination process using a random number counter other than the winning random number counter C1. In this case, in the above third embodiment, the time-saving result may be determined whether or not to generate a time-saving result using a fall determination process using the fall random number counter C5.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the type of time-saving result is determined using the type random number counter C2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of time-saving result may be determined using a random number counter different from the type random number counter C2. Also, instead of determining whether or not to generate a time-saving result using the win random number counter C1, the win random number counter C1 may be used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot result, a first time-saving result, a second time-saving result, or a miss result.

(24) In the first embodiment, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the same fixed ceiling number as when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set information corresponding to a number less than the fixed ceiling number when the opening/closing execution mode occurs. Also, in the fourth embodiment, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 and the setting value update process is executed, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the same fixed ceiling number as when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set information corresponding to a number less than the fixed ceiling number when the opening/closing execution mode occurs.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, when an information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which a time-saving state triggered by a ceiling time-saving state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1, the information of the ceiling number of times is set in the ceiling counter 131. However, this is not limited to this, and the information of the ceiling number of times may be set in the ceiling counter 131 when an information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which a high probability state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1, or the information of the ceiling number of times may be set in the ceiling counter 131 when an information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which an opening/closing execution mode occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1.

(26) In the first embodiment and the like described above, the information on the ceiling number is not set in the ceiling counter 131 when the setting value update process is executed. However, the information on the ceiling number may be set in the ceiling counter 131 when the setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to set the information on the ceiling number in the ceiling counter 131 when the setting value is changed.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, the ceiling count information is not set in the ceiling counter 131, 325 when the RAM clear process is executed, but the ceiling count information may be set in the ceiling counter 131, 325 when the RAM clear process is executed. This makes it possible to set the ceiling count information in the ceiling counter 131, 325 when the main RAM 84 is cleared.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RAM clear operation are not performed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, the ceiling counter 131, 325 is set to information corresponding to the fixed ceiling number, but this is not limited to this, and in that situation, information corresponding to a number greater than the fixed ceiling number may be set, or information corresponding to a number less than the fixed ceiling number may be set. Also, when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RAM clear operation are not performed and the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the ceiling counter 131, 325 may be set to information corresponding to a number greater than the fixed ceiling number, or information corresponding to a number less than the fixed ceiling number. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started while a dedicated operation button is being operated, the ceiling counters 131, 325 may be configured to set information corresponding to a fixed ceiling number, to set information corresponding to a number greater than the fixed ceiling number, or to set information corresponding to a number less than the fixed ceiling number.

(29) In the first embodiment and the like, when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information corresponding to the ceiling number during the special chart determination process, but this is not limited to this, and the ceiling counter 131 may be set with information corresponding to the ceiling number at a timing midway through the opening period, or the ceiling counter 131 may be set with information corresponding to the ceiling number immediately before the start of the first round of play in the opening and closing execution mode. Even in these cases, it is possible to set the ceiling counter 131 with information corresponding to the ceiling number when the opening and closing execution mode is started.

(30) In the sixth embodiment, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the ceiling number when it is confirmed that the ending period has elapsed in the special call end process, but this is not limited to this. The ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information corresponding to the ceiling number when the last round of play in the open/close execution mode ends, or the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information corresponding to the ceiling number just before the ending period begins, or the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information corresponding to the ceiling number halfway through the ending period.

(31) In the sixth embodiment, when the power failure monitoring process determines that the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result, information corresponding to a special ceiling count, which is a count greater than the fixed ceiling count, is set in the ceiling counter 131. However, this is not limited to this, and in the above situation, information corresponding to the fixed ceiling count may be set in the ceiling counter 131, or information corresponding to a count less than the fixed ceiling count may be set in the ceiling counter 131. In addition, in the power failure monitoring process, if the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to the ceiling count may be set in the ceiling counter 131 even if the trigger is not a low-frequency big win result or a first small win result.

(32) In the above first embodiment and the like, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", the state is set to a high reach frequency state, making it easier for the reach display to occur, but this is not limited thereto, and when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", a state may be set to a state in which an effect indicating that the ceiling time reduction is approaching is performed. By selecting a variable display period different from the case in which the reach display occurs and the case in which a complete miss occurs as the variable display period for the number of game plays in this state, it becomes possible for the sound/light side MPU 93 to identify from the information on the variable display period that the state is in which an effect indicating that the ceiling time reduction is approaching should be performed.

(33) In the first embodiment and the like described above, when the ceiling count information is set in the ceiling counter 131 in response to the opening/closing execution mode, information corresponding to the period switching reference number is set in the variable selection state counter 132. However, when the ceiling count information is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main processing when the supply of operating power is started, information corresponding to the period switching reference number is not set in the variable selection state counter 132. However, this is not limited to this, and when the ceiling count information is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main processing when the supply of operating power is started, information corresponding to the period switching reference number may be set in the variable selection state counter 132. In other words, when the ceiling count information is set in the ceiling counter 131, information corresponding to the period switching reference number may always be set in the variable selection state counter 132. In this case, if there are multiple types of ceiling counts set in the ceiling counter 131, the variable selection state counter 132 is configured to set information corresponding to a number that is a specified number less than the ceiling count, making it possible to enter a high reach frequency state in the game play before the specified number of times that the ceiling time reduction occurs, regardless of which ceiling count is set.

(34) In the first embodiment and the like described above, even if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the high reach frequency state is not entered if the time-saving state is in effect. However, the high reach frequency state may be entered even in the time-saving state. If the high reach frequency state is entered in the time-saving state, the probability that a reach display will occur in a game that results in a miss increases, and the probability that a long variable display period will be selected in a game that results in a jackpot or a miss reach display increases, but the shortest period on the special chart side will be selected in a game that results in a miss and does not result in a reach display.

(35) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the game count counter in the main RAM 84 reaches a reference number, control is executed so that the reach display is not generated in a game in which a jackpot result does not occur regardless of the game state. However, this is not limited to this, and the control may not be executed even if the reference number is reached in a high probability state, and the control may not be executed even if the reference number is reached in a time-saving state.

(36) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the play count counter in the main RAM 84 reaches a reference number, control is executed so that the reach display is not generated in a play count in which no jackpot result occurs, but this is not limited to the above. The seventh embodiment may be configured so that control is executed so that the reach display is not generated in a play count in which no jackpot result occurs for a specific number of play counts (e.g., three play counts) from the play count that reaches the reference number.

(37) In the seventh embodiment, the control is executed so that the reach display is not generated in a game in which a jackpot result does not occur each time the number of times the game is played after the open/close execution mode is ended reaches a reference number, but the present invention is not limited to this. The control may be executed so that the reach display is not generated in a game in which a jackpot result does not occur each time the number of times the game is played after the open/close execution mode or the time-saving state is ended reaches a reference number, or the control may be executed so that the reach display is not generated in a game in which a jackpot result does not occur each time the number of times the game is played after the time-saving state is ended reaches a reference number.

(38) In the eighth embodiment, whether the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result or the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving is ended, information corresponding to a predetermined switching reference number is set in the variable selection state counter 132, and when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the high-reach frequency state is entered. However, this is not limited to this, and the process of setting information corresponding to the predetermined switching reference number in the variable selection state counter 132 may be configured to be executed when the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result is ended but not executed when the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving is ended, or may be configured to be executed when the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving is ended but not executed when the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result is ended.

(39) In the above ninth embodiment, when a time-saving result or ceiling time-saving occurs in the time-saving state, the greater of the remaining continuation number in the current time-saving state and the time-saving continuation number corresponding to the new time-saving state becomes the remaining continuation number in the subsequent time-saving state. However, this is not limited to this, and the lesser of the remaining continuation number in the current time-saving state and the time-saving continuation number corresponding to the new time-saving state may become the remaining continuation number in the subsequent time-saving state, the time-saving continuation number corresponding to the new time-saving state may become the remaining continuation number in the subsequent time-saving state regardless of the remaining continuation number in the current time-saving state, or the number obtained by adding the time-saving continuation number corresponding to the new time-saving state to the remaining continuation number in the current time-saving state may become the remaining continuation number in the subsequent time-saving state.

(40) In the above ninth embodiment, when a time-saving result or ceiling time-saving occurs in a time-saving state that is the first high-frequency support mode, the remaining number of times that the time-saving state continues can be set to the first time-saving continuation number or the second time-saving continuation number, but the time-saving state that is the first high-frequency support mode continues. However, this is not limited to this, and the remaining number of times that the time-saving state continues can be set to the first time-saving continuation number or the second time-saving continuation number, and the time-saving state that is the second high-frequency support mode may be established.

(41) In each of the above embodiments, when a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process in a high probability state or the like and the time-saving result is invalidated, a combination of non-reach miss patterns is displayed in the pattern array Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, but this is not limited to this, and a combination of miss reach patterns may be displayed in a stopped state. Even in this case, it will be difficult for a player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated from the stopped results in the pattern array Z1 to Z3.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, when a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process in a high probability state or the like and the time-saving result is invalidated, a combination of non-reach-out patterns is displayed in the pattern array Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. However, this is not limited to this, and even if the time-saving result is invalidated, a combination of first time-saving generating patterns or a combination of second time-saving generating patterns may be displayed as the stopping result of the pattern array Z1 to Z3, as in the case where the time-saving result is not invalidated.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, when a time-saving result is selected in the win/loss determination process in a high probability state or the like and the time-saving result is invalidated, the display content of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 is different between the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result. However, this is not limited to this, and when the time-saving result is invalidated, the display content of the state suggestion area 43 may be the same in either the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result.

(44) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments described above, the time-save state does not end until the end of the game round that triggered the value of the time-save state counter 134 after subtraction of 1 to become "0", even if a game round triggered by reserved information different from the reserved information that triggered the start of that game round has ended. However, this is not limited to this, and if a specific game round that started before the start of a specific game round that triggered the value of the time-save state counter 134 after subtraction of 1 is started in the time-save state, the time-save state may be continued until the specific game round has ended, even if the specific game round has ended. When the predetermined number of play times is a number of play times triggered by the second reserved information, and the specific number of play times is a number of play times triggered by the first reserved information, if a long period on the special chart side is selected as the variable display period for the number of play times triggered by the first reserved information in the tenth or twelfth embodiment, it becomes possible to repeatedly consume the number of play times triggered by the second reserved information until the specific number of play times ends, even after the predetermined number of play times triggered by the second reserved information ends.

(45) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, when the variable display period of a game turn is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation in a game turn triggered by the second reserved information in the time-saving state, even if the result of the win/loss judgment process for that game turn is a time-saving result, the variable display period is determined in a manner similar to that of a game turn with a loss result in which no reach display occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and when the variable display period of a game turn is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation in a game turn triggered by the second reserved information, if the result of the win/loss judgment process for that game turn is a time-saving result, the variable display period may be determined in a manner different from that of a game turn with a loss result in which no reach display occurs. This makes it possible to determine the variable display period of a game turn in a manner corresponding to the time-saving result when a time-saving result occurs in the time-saving state.

(46) In the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the main MPU 82 may have a small win result in addition to the big win result, the time-saving result, and the miss result as a result of the hit/miss determination process. The small win result is a hit/miss result that triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode, but does not trigger a transition to the hit/miss lottery mode or the support mode. In addition, in the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once or twice in a short period of time (for example, one second), so that the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode is about one to three. Even if the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win result occurs, it is preferable that the ceiling number of times is not set to the ceiling counter 131 and the number of times is not set to the variable selection state counter 132. This makes it possible to generate a ceiling time-saving and a high-frequency reach state based on the open/close execution mode triggered by the big win result.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 when the time-saving result is obtained is configured to change depending on whether the second high-frequency support mode is set or not set as a result of the time-saving result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 when the time-saving result is obtained may be configured not to change depending on whether the second high-frequency support mode is set or not set as a result of the time-saving result. For example, when the first time-saving result is obtained, the state suggestion area 43 may stop displaying blue regardless of whether the second high-frequency support mode is set as a result of the first time-saving result, and when the second time-saving result is obtained, the state suggestion area 43 may stop displaying green regardless of whether the second high-frequency support mode is set as a result of the second time-saving result.

(48) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the unused areas of the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) are protected. However, the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) may not be protected. Even in this case, the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) includes the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) that exist between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the addresses of the main RAM 84. This simplifies the process for specifying the address range to be cleared.

(49) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the memory area that is the subject of the clearing process in the information anomaly monitoring process (Figure 119) is the work area 213 for non-specific control, but this is not limited to this, and the memory area that is the subject of the clearing process may be the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, since an unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the addresses of the main RAM 84, a protection release process is performed similar to step S7501 of the RAM clear process (Figure 118) before executing the clear process to release the protection by clearing the protection register 223c to "0", and then the clear process is performed by specifying a series of addresses from the address included in the work area 213 for non-specific control to the address included in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, including the unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)), and further, after executing the clear process, a protection setting process is performed similar to step S7506 of the RAM clear process (Figure 118) to set the protection register 223c to "1", thereby re-setting the protection. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing clear processing not only on the work area 213 for non-specific control but also on the stack area 214 for non-specific control during the information anomaly monitoring process (Figure 119).

(50) In the above thirteenth embodiment, when the protection release process (step S7501) is executed in the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) provided between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the address of the main RAM 84, the unused area (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)) provided between the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control in the address of the main RAM 84, and the unused area (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)) provided between the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control in the address of the main RAM 84 are cleared. Although the configuration is such that protection is released for all unused areas (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) provided between the control work area 213 and the non-specific control stack area 214, this is not limited thereto, and protection may be released for unused areas included in the address range that is the target of the clear process (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)), but protection may not be released for other unused areas (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In this case, a protection register 223c is provided for each of the unused areas included in the address range to be cleared (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) and the unused areas not included in the address range to be cleared (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)). In the protection setting process (step S4903) of the main process (Figure 81), all of these protection registers 223c are set to "1", thereby clearing all of the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address In the protection release process (step S7501) of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), the protect register 223c corresponding to the unused area included in the address range to be cleared (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is cleared to "0" to release the protection, whereas the protect register 223c corresponding to the unused area not included in the address range to be cleared (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is not cleared to "0" and thus protection is not released. Furthermore, in the protection setting process (step S7506) of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) after the clear process is completed, protection is set again for the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) by setting "1" to the protection register 223c corresponding to the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)). This makes it possible to prevent protection from being unnecessarily released for unused areas that are not included in the address range that is the target of the clear process (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

(51) In the above thirteenth embodiment, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the clearing process is performed on the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, but the clearing process is not performed on the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, the clearing process may also be performed on the work area 213 for non-specific control, or the clearing process may also be performed on the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In a configuration in which the clearing process is also performed on the work area 213 for non-specific control, an unused area (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)) provided between the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control in the address of the main RAM 84 is also included in the series of address ranges to be subjected to the clearing process. In addition, in a configuration in which a clear process is also performed on the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the unused area (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)) provided between the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control in the addresses of the main RAM 84, and the unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) provided between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the addresses of the main RAM 84 are also included in the series of address ranges that are the targets of the clear process.

(52) In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting display device 205 is provided, and the setting values are displayed on the setting display device 205 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting display device 205 may not be provided, and the setting values may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. Also, the setting values may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In a configuration in which the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201-204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) may be configured so that the display of the setting value and the display of the base value are alternately displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201-204 for notification every predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds). As a result, even if the setting value is displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201-204 that display the base value, it is possible to perform setting confirmation or setting change work while checking both the base value and the setting value by checking the first to fourth display devices 201-204 for notification.

In addition, in a configuration in which the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, the setting values may be displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, and the display of the setting values may be terminated when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) that was the target of execution is terminated. In this case, in a configuration in which the display of the base values is started before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is started, when the display of the setting values is terminated, the display of the type of base value that was the target of display on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the display of the setting values was started may be resumed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204. In addition, when the display of the base values of the type to be resumed is resumed, the display may be continued for the display duration regardless of the remaining display duration at the timing when the display was previously stopped.

In addition, in a configuration in which the display of the base value is started before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) are started, when the setting value is displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, the check display may be displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 before or after the display. In this case, when the display of the setting value ends and the display of the base value is resumed, or when the check display ends and the display of the base value is resumed, the display of the type of base value that was the display target on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the start of the check display or the display of the setting value may be resumed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204. In addition, when this resumption is performed, the display of the base value of the type to be resumed may be performed for the display duration regardless of the remaining display duration at the timing when it was previously stopped.

(53) In the thirteenth embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured to display base values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the following parameters may be calculated and displayed instead of or in addition to the base values. The number of game balls entering the outlet 24a is "K1", the number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 is "K2", the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is "K3", the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is "K4", and the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is "K5".
First parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K2 to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Second parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K3 to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Third parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K4 to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio; Fourth parameter: total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio; Fifth parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" 6th parameter: K3 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "number of prize balls for winning the general winning device 31" + K3 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 × "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34"); 7th parameter: K3 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 × "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" 7th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out in all game states (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at second operating port 34") / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from game area PA in all game states (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).

In the above configuration, for example, the first parameter may be set as the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first parameter at a plurality of different timings may be sequentially switched and displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 every time a predetermined display duration period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to sequentially switch and display the first parameter in the above-mentioned manner while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed. Furthermore, if a check display is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while the first parameters are being sequentially switched and displayed, the display of the type of first parameter that was the display target immediately before the start of the check display may be resumed after the check display ends, and upon the resumption, measurement of the specified display duration may be newly started.

In addition, for example, the first to seventh parameters may be set as notification targets on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to seventh parameters may be sequentially switched and displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 every time a predetermined display duration period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the first to seventh parameters may be sequentially switched and displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed. In addition, when a check display is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while the first to seventh parameters are being sequentially switched and displayed, the display of the type of parameter that was the display target immediately before the start of the check display may be resumed after the check display ends, and upon the resumption, measurement of the specified display duration may be newly started.

(54) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided on the main control device 71 mounted on the back of the game board 24, and in order to check the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205, it is necessary to unlock the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 and rotate the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. However, this is not limited to this, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the setting display device 205 may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, or both the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in a configuration in which at least one of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 is provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the display device provided on the front may also be configured to double as a display device for displaying other information. For example, in a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to display the number of game balls paid out in the open/close execution mode in addition to the base value. In addition, in a configuration in which the setting display device 205 is provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the setting display device 205 may be configured to display, in addition to the setting value, information corresponding to an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10.

Also, a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided on the front of the gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may display, in addition to the base value, either the number of virtual medals owned by the player or the number of gaming media awarded to the player when a small winning combination is achieved, and the setting display device 205 may display, in addition to the setting value, the other of the number of virtual medals and the number of gaming media awarded.

(55) In the above thirteenth embodiment, after the check display is finished, the display of the base value is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 continues regardless of whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed or open state. However, this is not limited to this, and the display of the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be started when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the display of the base value of the type that was the display target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the gaming machine main body 12 was last closed may be resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, when this is resumed, a new display may be performed for the display duration of the base value of the type to be resumed, regardless of the remaining display duration at the timing when the display of the base value of the type to be resumed was last stopped.

(56) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the non-specific control processing in the main MPU 82 executes a process for monitoring whether the detection of the game ball in each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud, and a process for monitoring whether a magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor, and the specific control processing in the main MPU 82 executes a process corresponding to the monitoring results. However, the non-specific control processing may be configured to execute only a part of the monitoring processes. Also, in addition to or instead of these monitoring processes, the non-specific control processing may be configured to execute a process for monitoring whether a radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor, and the specific control processing may be configured to execute a process corresponding to the monitoring results.

(57) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c, and the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h for determining whether the detection of the game ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud are provided in the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control, and the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, but this is not limited to this. For example, all of the timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h may be provided in the work area 211 for specific control, or all of the timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h may be provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

(58) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, in the ball entry detection process (Fig. 121), a prize ball counter setting process (step S7801) is executed, followed by various flag clearing processes (step S7802), and after executing the various flag clearing processes (step S7802), a process for monitoring whether or not a game ball has been detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a (steps S7803 to S7818) is executed. As a result, the setting process for the various prize ball counters according to the monitoring results of each detection sensor 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection process (Fig. 121) of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120) of a specified processing time is performed in the first processing time of the next processing time for the specified processing time. Although the configuration is such that the value is reserved until the ball entry detection process (Figure 121) in the one timer interrupt process (Figure 120), the present invention is not limited to this, and in the ball entry detection process (Figure 121), a process is executed in each processing round to monitor whether or not a game ball has been detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a, and a setting process is executed in various prize ball counters according to the monitoring results.If it is determined in the subsequent fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that the detection of a game ball by the detection sensor 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to that detection sensor 231a to 238a may be decremented by 1. In this case, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is incremented by 1 in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121), and in the subsequent payout output process (step S7716), the corresponding prize ball command is output due to the value of the predetermined prize ball counter being "1", and the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is decremented by 1 to become "0". If it is determined that the detection of the game ball that triggered the increment of the value of the predetermined prize ball counter was due to an abnormality or fraud, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is decremented by 1 to become "-1". The predetermined prize ball counter that has become "-1" is incremented by 1 to become "0" if it is subsequently determined that a game ball has been detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined prize ball counter. Therefore, the payout of game balls executed based on the detection of a game ball due to an abnormality or fraud is compensated for by not executing the payout of game balls based on the detection of a regular game ball thereafter.

(59) In the above 13th and 14th embodiments, when it is determined that the detection of a game ball by the first actuation port detection sensor 235a is due to an abnormality or fraud, both the storage of the first reserved information in the first special chart reserved area 111 and the payout of one game ball are not executed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have a configuration in which only one of these is not executed. Furthermore, this configuration may be applied to the processing when it is determined that the detection of a game ball by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a is due to an abnormality or fraud.

(60) In the above 13th and 14th embodiments, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is set to "1" in either case where it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is due to fraud in relation to the period measured by the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b provided in the work area 211 for specific control, or where it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is due to an abnormality in relation to the period measured by the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213e provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. However, this is not limited to this, and a different abnormality flag may be set to "1" depending on the respective case, and a process corresponding to the abnormality flag to which "1" has been set may be executed. For example, if it is determined that the detection of a game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is due to fraud, a specific abnormality flag is set to "1", and if the specific abnormality flag is set to "1", not only is the value of the 15 prize ball counter not incremented by 1, but the game stop flag is set to "1" and the execution of the process to proceed with the game is prevented. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection of a game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is due to an abnormality, a specific abnormality flag is set to "1", and if the specific abnormality flag is set to "1", the value of the 15 prize ball counter is not incremented by 1, but the game stop flag is not set to "1", so the execution of the process to proceed with the game may not be prevented. This makes it possible to execute the process corresponding to each.

(61) In the above 13th and 14th embodiments, the monitoring of whether the detection of the game ball by the special power detection sensor 234a or the second actuation port detection sensor 236a is due to fraud in relation to the period measured by the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c provided in the work area 211 for specific control is performed by non-specific control processing, and the monitoring of whether the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality in relation to the period measured by the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is performed by non-specific control processing. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the former monitoring may be performed by non-specific control processing, and the latter monitoring may be performed by specific control processing.

(62) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates without using a program, but this is not limited thereto, and the commands may be transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by control using a program. In this case, the control may be executed as a specific control process, or may be executed as a non-specific control process.

(63) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the commands sent to the sound/light side MPU 93 are stored in the command transmission buffer 223b. However, in addition to or instead of this, the commands sent to the dispensing control device 77 may be stored in the command transmission buffer 223b.

(64) In the above thirteenth embodiment, when it becomes necessary to send a command to the sound-light side MPU 93 in the processing of specific control, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, and when it becomes necessary to send a command to the sound-light side MPU 93 in the processing of non-specific control, the command is also stored in the command transmission buffer 223b. However, this is not limited to this, and when it becomes necessary to send a command to the sound-light side MPU 93 in the processing of specific control, the command is stored in the work area 211 for specific control or the stack area 212 for specific control, and when it becomes necessary to send a command to the sound-light side MPU 93 in the processing of non-specific control, the command may be stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, the processing for sending the stored commands may be performed by the command transmission circuit 224, may be performed in the processing of specific control, or may be performed in the processing of non-specific control.

(65) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the value of the second security counter 213k is added to the value of the first security counter 211a in the security process (FIG. 101), and a number of security signals corresponding to the value of the first security counter 211a after the addition are output to the outside. However, this is not limited to this, and the sum of the value of the first security counter 211a and the value of the second security counter 213k may be stored in a register of the main MPU 82, and a number of security signals corresponding to the sum stored in the register may be output to the outside.

(66) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the process for outputting a security signal is executed by specific control processing, but it may be executed by non-specific control processing. In this case, the value of the first security counter 211a may be added to the value of the second security counter 213k, and a number of security signals corresponding to the value of the second security counter 213k after the addition may be output to the outside. Also, in the non-specific control processing, the sum of the value of the first security counter 211a and the value of the second security counter 213k may be stored in a register of the main MPU 82, and a number of security signals corresponding to the sum stored in the register may be output to the outside.

(67) In the above 13th and 14th embodiments, when non-specific control processing is started while specific control processing is being executed, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control during the specific control processing, and the information in the other registers is saved to the work area 213 for non-specific control during the non-specific control processing. However, this is not limited to this, and the information in the flag register may be saved to the work area 211 for specific control, and the information in the other registers may be saved to the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

In addition, both the information in the flag register and the information in other registers may be configured to be saved in the work area 211 for specific control or the stack area 212 for specific control during specific control processing. In this case, when the processing of non-specific control ends and returns to the processing of specific control, the information is restored to the flag register and other registers during the processing of specific control.

In addition, both the information in the flag register and the information in other registers may be configured to be saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control during non-specific control processing. In this case, when the processing of non-specific control ends and returns to the processing of specific control, the information is restored to the flag register and other registers during the processing of non-specific control.

(68) In the above thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the operation of turning on the setting key insertion unit 195 and pressing the reset button 196 is the setting change operation, and the operation of turning on the setting key insertion unit 195 and not pressing the reset button 196 is the setting confirmation operation. However, these setting change operations and setting confirmation operations are not limited to this, and in a configuration in which the setting key insertion unit 195 can be switched to the OFF position, the first position, and the second position by the setting key, the setting change operation may be the switching of the setting key insertion unit 195 to the first position by the setting key, and the setting confirmation operation may be the switching of the setting key insertion unit 195 to the second position by the setting key.

(69) The characteristic configurations in the above fifteenth to thirty-sixth embodiments regarding the priority of the execution target, the selection of the variable display period of the number of game plays, the latency of the game state, and the execution of the effects may be applied to a high probability state in addition to or instead of the configurations applied to the time-saving state, or may be applied to a game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is lower than in the normal game state, or may be applied to a configuration in which there are states in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher and states in which it is lower than in the normal game state.

(70) In the above fifteenth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the first time-saving state ST1 may be configured so that the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play may be completed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1. For example, if the number of times the first time-saving state ST1 continues is 600 times and the ceiling number of times of play is 500 times, the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play may be completed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1. In this case, by configuring the first time-saving state ST1 to have a higher priority as an execution target than the second time-saving state ST2, even if the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play is completed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play is invalidated and the first time-saving state ST1 continues. Also, by configuring the second time-saving state ST2 to have a higher priority as an execution target than the first time-saving state ST1, if the consumption of the ceiling number of times of play is completed in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 will end in the middle and the second time-saving state ST2 will start anew.

In the above configuration, the first time-saving state ST1 may be configured to continue until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the first time-saving state ST1 may be configured to include a first time-saving state in which the number of times it continues is less than the ceiling number of times and a first time-saving state in which the number of times it continues is more than the ceiling number of times.

In addition, in the above configuration, if the ceiling number of game rounds is played in the middle of the first time-saving state ST1, the first time-saving state ST1 may continue and the second time-saving state ST2 may be latent. In this case, if a game round is played while the second time-saving state ST2 is latent, the remaining number of times the second time-saving state ST2 will continue may be reduced, and if the first time-saving state ST1 ends while the second time-saving state ST2 is latent, the latent second time-saving state ST2 may be executed.

(71) In the above-mentioned 15th to 19th and 21st to 36th embodiments, if the ceiling number of game rounds is played during the third time-saving state ST3, the third time-saving state ST3 may be continued as is. In this case, the second time-saving state ST2 may be latent, and if a game round is played while the second time-saving state ST2 is latent, the remaining number of times the second time-saving state ST2 will continue may be reduced, and if the third time-saving state ST3 ends while the second time-saving state ST2 is latent, the latent second time-saving state ST2 may be executed.

(72) In the above fifteenth to thirty-sixth embodiments, when the time-saving state ST1-ST3, ST1-ST3C, ST1-ST43 is in effect, the number of remaining update events (e.g., the occurrence of a game round or the occurrence of a small win result) required for the time-saving state ST1-ST3, ST1-ST3C, ST1-ST43 to end may be notified by a notification means such as the symbol display device 41. This allows the player to play while knowing the number of remaining update events (e.g., the occurrence of a game round or the occurrence of a small win result) required for the time-saving state ST1-ST3 to end when the time-saving state ST1-ST3, ST1-ST3C, ST1-ST43 is in effect.

(73) In the above-mentioned 19th to 36th embodiments, when the third time-saving state is latent in a time-saving state, a corresponding display may be made on the pattern display device 41. In this case, the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state will continue may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. This allows the player to know whether the latent third time-saving state will end before the current time-saving state ends. In addition, when multiple third time-saving states are latent, the remaining number of times that each of the third time-saving states will continue may be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the remaining number of times that each of the third time-saving states will continue may be displayed on the pattern display device 41 for the third time-saving state that will be executed when the current time-saving state ends, but the remaining number of times that each of the other latent third time-saving states will continue may not be notified. In addition, the display that the third time-saving state is latent may be displayed on the pattern display device 41, but the remaining number of times that each of the third time-saving states will continue may not be notified to the player. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to predict whether the latent third time-saving state will end before the current time-saving state ends.

(74) In the above 19th to 36th embodiments, when the third time-saving state is latent in a time-saving state, the remaining number of times that the latent third time-saving state will continue may not be subtracted even if a game round is played. In this case, since the latent third time-saving state will not end without becoming an execution target, when the currently execution target time-saving state ends, the latent third time-saving state will definitely occur and the remaining number of times that the third time-saving state will continue will become the initial number of times that the third time-saving state will continue.

(75) In the 19th to 25th embodiments, when the opening and closing execution mode occurs in a situation where the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, ST1 to ST3C are in effect and the third time-saving state ST3, ST3A to ST3C is latent, not only the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, ST1 to ST3C to be executed but also the latent third time-saving state ST3, ST3A to ST3C are forcibly terminated. However, this is not limited to this, and when the opening and closing execution mode occurs, the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, ST1 to ST3C to be executed are terminated, while the latent third time-saving state ST3, ST3A to ST3C may be maintained as is.

(76) As in the 19th to 25th embodiments, when an open/close execution mode occurs, a configuration in which not only the time-saving states ST1 to ST3, ST1 to ST3C to be executed but also the latent third time-saving states ST3, ST3A to ST3C are forcibly terminated may be applied to the configuration in the 26th to 36th embodiments in which the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C are latent.

(77) In the above 21st to 36th embodiments, the end condition of the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C, ST41 to ST43 is that the continuous number of game rounds is executed, but this is not limited to this. The end condition of at least some of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, ST41 to ST43 may be that a predetermined number of small win results occur, the end condition of at least some of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, ST41 to ST43 may be that a normal power release state occurs a predetermined number of times, the end condition of at least some of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, ST41 to ST43 may be that a predetermined time has passed, or the end condition of at least some of the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, ST41 to ST43 may be that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged from the game area PA.

(78) In the above fifteenth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the second time-saving state ST2 continues for a longer number of times than the first time-saving state ST1, but this is not limited to the above, and the first time-saving state ST1 and the second time-saving state ST2 may continue for the same number of times, or the first time-saving state ST1 may continue for a longer number of times than the second time-saving state ST2.

(79) In the above fifteenth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the support modes of the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, and the third time-saving state ST3, ST3A to ST3C, and ST41 to ST43 may all be the same. In this case, the normal play success/failure determination may be in the low probability mode for the normal play regardless of the time-saving state.

(80) In the above 21st to 36th embodiments, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C and ST41 to ST43 are not limited to three types, and may be two types, four types, five types, or six or more types.

(81) In the above-mentioned embodiments 37 to 41, the content of the pre-transition notification is arbitrary. For example, the pre-transition notification may be configured to display a text image saying "Please call a store clerk" on the pattern display device 41.

(82) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, when the predetermined ball difference number reaches the notification reference number, both the pre-transition notification and the external output of a signal are performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the pre-transition notification may be performed but the external output of a signal may not be performed, or the external output of a signal may be performed but the pre-transition notification may not be performed.

(83) In the above-mentioned 37th to 39th embodiments, the game state is switched to the normal game state when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the ending reference number, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the game state is in a high probability state, the game state may be switched to the normal game state, but if the game state is in a time-saving state, the time-saving state may be maintained. In addition, if a game round that results in a jackpot is executed in the time-saving state maintained in this configuration, the game state may be switched to the time-saving state or the normal game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the type of jackpot result.

(84) In the above-mentioned embodiments 37 to 39, when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number in the high probability state, the configuration is not limited to the end of the high probability state and transition to the normal game state, and the high probability mode may end but the high frequency support mode may be maintained to enter the time-saving state. In this case, the remaining number of times that the high probability state has continued may be carried over as the remaining number of times that the time-saving state has continued, or a fixed number such as 100 times may be set as the remaining number of times that the time-saving state has continued, or a number greater than the number set by the time-saving result or the ceiling time-saving number, such as 10,000 times, may be set as the remaining number of times that the time-saving state has continued.

(85) In the above thirty-seventh to thirty-ninth embodiments, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 is cleared to "0" when the supply of operating power is started, regardless of whether the setting value update process and the RAM clear process are executed or not. However, this is not limited to this, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 may be cleared to "0" when the setting value update process or the RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 may not be cleared to "0" when neither the setting value update process nor the RAM clear process is executed. Also, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 may be cleared to "0" when the setting value update process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 may not be cleared to "0" when the setting value update process is not executed.

(86) In the above 40th and 41st embodiments, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 is cleared to "0" by executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power is started, but this is not limited to this, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 may be cleared to "0" when the supply of operating power is started, regardless of whether the setting value update process and the RAM clear process are executed, as in the above 37th to 39th embodiments. Also, the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 may be cleared to "0" when the setting value update process or the RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 441 may not be cleared to "0" when neither the setting value update process nor the RAM clear process is executed.

(87) In the above thirty-seventh to thirty-ninth embodiments, when a transition to the normal game state occurs because the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, the setting value to be used may be increased by one level from the previous setting. In this case, if the setting value to be used is already the highest setting value of "6", it is preferable to maintain the highest setting value. Also, when a transition to the normal game state occurs because the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode may be increased.

(88) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification, which display the base value, may be configured to display the predetermined ball difference number. In this case, the display may be switched between the state in which the base value is displayed and the state in which the predetermined ball difference number measured by the total winning number counter 441 is displayed every time a predetermined time has passed. Also, instead of the display being switched over with the passage of time, the display may be configured to switch between the state in which the base value is displayed and the state in which the predetermined ball difference number is displayed by operating an operation unit such as the reset button 196. This makes it possible to check the predetermined ball difference number using the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification, which display the base value. Note that instead of the configuration in which the predetermined ball difference number is displayed, the configuration may be configured to display the number of balls required until the predetermined ball difference number reaches the end reference number.

(89) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, the predetermined difference in the number of balls stored in the total winning number counter 441 at the time when the supply of operating power is stopped or when the supply of operating power is started may be configured to be output to the outside. This makes it possible to manage the predetermined difference in the number of balls in a management computer of the game hall, etc.

(90) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, the total winning number counter 441 is used to subtract the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA until the occurrence of the predetermined ending trigger from the total number of game balls until the occurrence of the predetermined ending trigger, and the minimum value of the difference in the number of game balls until the predetermined ending trigger is set as a specific reference value, and the predetermined difference in the number of game balls is measured, which is the increase in the difference in the number of game balls from the specific reference value until the predetermined ending trigger. However, this is not limited to this. For example, even if the value of the total winning number counter 441 becomes a negative value, the value of the total winning number counter 441 is not cleared to "0", so that the increase or decrease in the number of balls held by the player from the initial value of the total winning number counter 441 when the initialization of the total winning number counter 441 is performed at the start of the supply of operating power is measured. In this case, in the 37th to 39th embodiments, a transition to the normal game state occurs based on the fact that the increase from the initial value "0" reaches the end reference number, while in the 40th and 41st embodiments, the game progress is stopped. Also, instead of the increase or decrease in the number of balls, the total number of balls paid out may be measured using the total number of balls won counter 441.

(91) In the above thirty-seventh to thirty-ninth embodiments, if the forced transition flag 442 is set to "1" during a game turn or during the opening and closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode may be terminated at that point to switch to the low-frequency support mode, and then when the game is neither during a game turn nor during the opening and closing execution mode, the game may be switched to the normal game state.

(92) In the above-mentioned embodiments 37 to 41, the number of game balls paid out in response to a game ball entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is treated as an increase in the predetermined difference number of balls, regardless of whether the game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of game balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the special electric winning device 32 may be treated as an increase in the predetermined difference number of balls, whereas the number of game balls paid out in response to a game ball entering any of the general winning opening 31, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 may not be treated as an increase in the predetermined difference number of balls. Also, the number of game balls dispensed when a game ball enters either the special electric winning device 32 or the second operating port 34 is treated as an increase in the number of predetermined ball differences, whereas the number of game balls dispensed when a game ball enters either the general winning port 31 or the first operating port 33 may not be treated as an increase in the number of predetermined ball differences.

(93) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, the predetermined number of balls difference is measured in any game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of balls difference may be measured only in some game states. For example, the predetermined number of balls difference may be measured only in the open/close execution mode. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined number of balls difference is started when one open/close execution mode is started, and when the open/close execution mode ends, the measurement of the predetermined number of balls difference is temporarily stopped, but the value of the total winning number counter 441 is maintained without being cleared to "0", and the measurement of the predetermined number of balls difference is resumed when a new open/close execution mode occurs after that.

(94) In the above 37th to 41st embodiments, when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the end reference number in a situation where the open/close execution mode is not in effect, when a new open/close execution mode is generated and the open/close execution mode is terminated, a transition to a normal game state occurs in the above 37th to 39th embodiments, and progress of the game may be blocked in the above 40th and 41st embodiments. Also, when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the end reference number in a situation where the open/close execution mode is in effect, when the open/close execution mode in the middle of execution is completed, a new open/close execution mode is generated and the open/close execution mode is terminated, a transition to a normal game state occurs in the above 37th to 39th embodiments, and progress of the game may be blocked in the above 40th and 41st embodiments.

(94) In the above 40th and 41st embodiments, when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, the game stop flag is set to "1" to prevent the game from progressing, but this is not limited to the above. When the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, the total winning number counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 in the work area 213 for non-specific control and in the memory areas other than the memory area in which the set value is stored in the work area 211 for specific control may be initialized (e.g., cleared to "0").

In addition, when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, the reset signal supplied to the main MPU 82 is turned from OFF to ON, and the main processing (FIG. 261) is started by the main MPU 82. In this case, the power failure monitoring process is not executed, and the main processing (FIG. 261) is started by the occurrence of a reset, so that the power failure flag is determined not to be set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 261) (step SI705: NO), and the game stop flag is set to "1" (step SI723). Then, when the game stop flag is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step SH306 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 249), and the processing of steps SH307 to SH321 is not executed, thereby preventing the progress of the game. In addition, in order to release the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it is necessary to start the supply of operating power in a state in which the "setting change operation" is performed, so that the setting value update process (step SI716) is executed.

(95) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured using the total winning number counter 441 may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. In this case, by displaying the predetermined difference in the number of balls on the pattern display device 41 when a game round and the open/close execution mode are not being executed, a player who is choosing a pachinko machine 10 to play on can use the displayed predetermined difference in the number of balls as a criterion for making a selection. In addition, by displaying the predetermined difference in the number of balls on the pattern display device 41 not only when a game round and the open/close execution mode are not being executed, but also when a game round is being executed and when the open/close execution mode is being executed, a player who is playing can use the predetermined difference in the number of balls as a criterion for making a selection when deciding whether or not to continue playing on that pachinko machine 10.

(96) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, the remaining number of balls required until the predetermined difference in the number of balls measured using the total winning number counter 441 reaches the ending reference number may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. In this case, by displaying the remaining number on the pattern display device 41 when a game round and the open/close execution mode are not being executed, a player who is choosing a pachinko machine 10 to play on can use the displayed remaining number as a criterion for making a selection. In addition, by displaying the remaining number on the pattern display device 41 not only when a game round and the open/close execution mode are not being executed, but also when a game round is being executed and when the open/close execution mode is being executed, a player who is playing can use the remaining number as a criterion for making a selection when deciding whether or not to continue playing on that pachinko machine 10.

(97) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, a light-emitting unit may be provided that is turned off when the value of the total winning number counter 441 is "0" and turned on when the value of the total winning number counter 441 is 1 or more. The light-emitting unit may be configured to be provided in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 being in an open state. In this case, the manager of the gaming hall can check whether the value of the total winning number counter 441 is 1 or more by visually checking the light-emitting unit without the need to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, and the player can also check whether the value of the total winning number counter 441 is 1 or more by visually checking the light-emitting unit. In addition, the light-emitting unit may be configured to be provided in a position that is visible when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is in an open state. In this case, the manager of the gaming hall can visually confirm the light-emitting part by opening the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14, but the player cannot visually confirm the light-emitting part.

This configuration may also be applied to a configuration in which the increase or decrease in the number of balls held by the player from the initial value is measured using the total number of balls counter 441 as described in (90) above. In this case, when the number of balls held by the player is equal to or less than the initial value, the light-emitting unit is turned off, and when the number of balls held by the player is greater than the initial value, the light-emitting unit is turned on.

(98) When the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, there is no transition to the normal game state as in the above-mentioned 37th to 39th embodiments, nor is the progress of the game halted as in the above-mentioned 40th and 41st embodiments, and information or a signal corresponding to the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the end reference number may be output to an external device of the pachinko machine 10, such as the management computer of the game hall. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the predetermined difference in the number of balls has reached the end reference number, without affecting the execution status of the game.

(99) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, a read-ahead process is executed to determine whether the reserved information stored in the special chart reserved areas 111, 112 corresponds to a jackpot result before the hit/miss determination process is executed, and a read-ahead performance corresponding to the result of the read-ahead process is executed. In this case, the read-ahead performance may not be executed if the predetermined difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the notification reference number.

In a configuration in which a transition to the normal game state occurs when the predetermined number of balls difference reaches the end reference number as in the 37th to 39th embodiments above, if a pre-reading effect is being executed that indicates a high expectation of a jackpot result or that a jackpot result has been confirmed, and the predetermined number of balls difference reaches the end reference number and a transition to the normal game state occurs, there is a risk of an inconvenience occurring in which a jackpot result does not occur when the reserved information that was the subject of the pre-reading effect becomes the subject of a game round. However, by configuring the pre-reading effect so that the pre-reading effect is not executed when the predetermined number of balls difference reaches or exceeds the notification reference number, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

In addition, in a configuration in which game progress is blocked when the predetermined number of balls difference reaches the end reference number as in the above 40th and 41st embodiments, if the predetermined number of balls difference reaches the end reference number and game progress is blocked when a look-ahead performance is being executed that indicates a high expectation of a jackpot result or that a jackpot result has been confirmed, there is a risk of an inconvenience occurring in which the game cannot be played without the game round corresponding to the pending information that was the target of the look-ahead performance being executed being executed. However, by configuring the game so that the look-ahead performance is not executed when the predetermined number of balls difference reaches the notification reference number or more, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

(100) As in the sixth embodiment, when the result of a game round is a small win result, the allocation winning device 161 is opened, and when a game ball that has entered the allocation winning device 161 is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the system transitions to an open/close execution mode. Alternatively, as in the thirty-seventh to thirty-ninth embodiments, a configuration in which a transition to a normal game state occurs when a predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number, or a configuration in which the progress of the game is stopped when a predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the termination reference number, as in the fortieth and forty-first embodiments, may be applied. In this configuration, if the predetermined difference number of balls becomes the end reference number during the distribution execution mode, if the V winning detection sensor 169 does not detect a game ball in the distribution execution mode, the transition to the normal game state or the blocking of game progress occurs when the distribution execution mode ends, and if the V winning detection sensor 169 detects a game ball in the distribution execution mode, the transition to the normal game state or the blocking of game progress occurs when the opening and closing execution mode executed following the distribution execution mode ends. Also, in a configuration such as the sixth embodiment, in which the reserved information on the second special chart side is not reserved and stored, but is reserved and stored, when the predetermined difference number of balls becomes the end reference number and all the reserved information on the second special chart side is consumed and the reserved information on the second special chart side becomes 0, the transition to the normal game state or the blocking of game progress may occur.

(101) In a configuration in which a small win result is included in the results that are selected with a high probability when a win/loss judgment process is executed on at least the reserved information on the second special chart side, and when the small win result is obtained, a short opening of about one second occurs 1 to 2 times in the special electric winning device 32, and in a game state in which the game round corresponding to the reserved information on the second special chart side is executed with priority, small win results occur repeatedly even if the big win result is not obtained, and the player's balls can be increased. In contrast, a configuration in which a transition to a normal game state occurs when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the end reference number as in the above 37th to 39th embodiments, or a configuration in which the progress of the game is blocked when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the end reference number as in the above 40th and 41st embodiments, may be applied. In this configuration, when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the end reference number in a game state in which the game round corresponding to the reserved information on the second special chart side is executed with priority, when the game state ends and the reserved number of balls on the reserved information on the second special chart side becomes 0, a transition to a normal game state or a blocking of the progress of the game may occur.

(102) In a configuration in which a jackpot is achieved by a game ball entering a V-winning section provided in the game area, a configuration in which a corresponding process is executed based on the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaching the end reference number may be applied. In this case, the jackpot state may be terminated midway when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, or the launch of game balls may be stopped when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number, or the main process may be started in the main MPU 82 by a reset signal being turned from OFF to ON for the main MPU 82 when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number.

(103) In the above-mentioned 37th to 41st embodiments, the process for measuring the predetermined difference in the number of balls using the total acquisition counter 441 and the process for setting the forced transition flag 442 to "1" when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number are not limited to a configuration in which they are executed as non-specific control processes, and the process for measuring the predetermined difference in the number of balls using the total acquisition counter 441 and the process for setting the forced transition flag 442 to "1" when the predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches the end reference number may be configured to be executed as specific control processes. In this case, the total acquisition counter 441 and the forced transition flag 442 need to be provided in the work area 211 for specific control.

(104) In the above-mentioned 37th to 39th embodiments, when the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the end reference number and a transition to the normal game state occurs, the information of the fixed ceiling number of times is set in the ceiling counter 131. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the process of setting the information of the fixed ceiling number of times is not executed in the ceiling counter 131 even if the predetermined difference number of balls reaches the end reference number and a transition to the normal game state occurs.

(105) A configuration in which a transition to a normal game state occurs when a predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches a reference number for ending, as in the 37th to 39th embodiments, may be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine, slot machine, or coinless slot machine. Also, a configuration in which game progress is stopped when a predetermined difference in the number of balls reaches a reference number for ending, as in the 40th and 41st embodiments, may be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine, slot machine, or coinless slot machine.

(106) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 101 is controlled by the audio and light emission control device 91 based on a command output from the main control device 71, the display control device 101 may be configured to control the audio and light emission control device 91 based on a command output from the main control device 71. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio and light emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, the functions of one of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 71, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 71. Also, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the audio and light emission control device 91 and the configuration of the command output from the audio and light emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 may be arbitrary.

(107) The device on which the effects for a game round are executed is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured to execute the effects for a game round by operating a movably mounted decorative member, or may be configured to execute the effects for a game round by turning on a specified light-emitting unit, or may be configured to execute the effects for a game round by combining all or part of the above aspects.

(108) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

(109) The characteristic configurations of the first to forty-first embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the seventh embodiment, the tenth embodiment, the fifteenth embodiment, the thirty-first embodiment, and the thirty-seventh embodiment may be combined; the characteristic configurations of the sixth embodiment, the eighth embodiment, the ninth embodiment, the nineteenth embodiment, the thirty-second embodiment, and the thirty-eighth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the eighth embodiment, the twenty-first embodiment, the thirty-third embodiment, and the thirty-ninth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the fourteenth embodiment, the twenty-third embodiment, and the thirty-fourth embodiment may be combined; The characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the 40th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the 13th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 26th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 35th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 41st embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the 14th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 28th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 36th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 37th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the 13th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 29th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 40th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the 14th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 30th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 41st embodiment. In addition, the configuration of the other form may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to 41st embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A game round control means (function of executing the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that controls the game round execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round;
a predetermined start execution means (a function for executing the setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments, a function for executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for starting a predetermined game state (a time-saving state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode) when it is determined that a predetermined start opportunity (a time-saving result, a ceiling time-saving) has occurred in the game round, and not starting the predetermined game state when it is determined that the predetermined start opportunity has not occurred;
a predetermined end execution means (a function of executing a subtraction process of the time-shortening state counter 134 of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for executing a predetermined end process (a subtraction process of the time-shortening state counter 134 of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for ending the predetermined game state when it is determined that a predetermined end trigger (the value of the time-shortening state counter 134 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0") has occurred in the game round, and not ending the predetermined game state when it is determined that the predetermined end trigger has not occurred;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round.

According to feature A1, the predetermined game state is started when it is determined in the predetermined start process that a predetermined start trigger has occurred, and the predetermined game state is ended when it is determined in the predetermined end process that a predetermined end trigger has occurred. Therefore, a player who expects to be in the predetermined game state expects the predetermined start trigger to occur when the predetermined game state is not in the predetermined game state, and expects the predetermined end trigger not to occur when the predetermined game state is in the predetermined game state. In this case, the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. As a result, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in that game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start process is executed later in that game round to start the predetermined game state again. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to continue the predetermined game state even in a game round in which the predetermined end trigger has occurred. In addition, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game round is the order in which the predetermined start process is executed after the execution of the predetermined end process.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, wherein the predetermined start execution means invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature A2, the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger is invalid in a predetermined game state, so that it is possible to prevent a new predetermined game state from starting in the middle of a predetermined game state. In this case, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the current predetermined game state is ended by first executing a predetermined end process in that game round, and then the predetermined game state is started again by executing a predetermined start process later in that game round. As a result, in a configuration that prevents a new predetermined game state from starting in the middle of a predetermined game state, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is treated as valid, making it possible to create a situation in which the predetermined game state continues for a long time.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the predetermined end process and the predetermined start process are both executed after the game-round operation in the game-round execution means is completed in the game round.

According to feature A3, the predetermined end process and the predetermined start process are both executed after the game-round operation is completed, so that these processes are executed in a situation where the process for starting the game-round operation and the process for progressing the game-round operation are not executed, which makes it possible to distribute the processing load. Furthermore, even with such a configuration that distributes the processing load, the configuration of feature A1 is included, and the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round, so that if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in that game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start process is executed later in that game round to restart the predetermined game state.

Feature A4. Equipped with a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the specified start trigger occurs when the number of times the game has been played measured by the specified measuring means becomes a specified trigger number (a fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth, seventh and eighth embodiments, a first ceiling number or a second ceiling number in the fifth embodiment, and a fixed ceiling number or a special ceiling number in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature A4, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state occurs based on the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, the configuration of feature A1 described above is included, and a predetermined start process is executed after a predetermined end process is executed in one game round, so that if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in that game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start process is executed in that game round to restart the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined game state will occur as a trigger when a predetermined number of game rounds have been executed.

Feature A5. Equipped with a predetermined lottery means (a function for executing the reserved information acquisition process and the winning/losing judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that executes a predetermined lottery process (the reserved information acquisition process and the winning/losing judgment process executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments),
The game number control means controls the game number execution means so that an operation result corresponds to a result of the predetermined lottery processing,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result (time-saving result).

According to feature A5, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state occurs based on the result of a predetermined lottery process becoming a predetermined lottery result, the configuration of feature A1 described above is included, and a predetermined start process is executed after a predetermined end process is executed in one game round, so that if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in that game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start process is executed later in that game round to restart the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined game state will occur when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result.

Feature A6. A specific measurement means (time-saving state counter 134) is provided to measure the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the specified end trigger occurs when the number of times the game is executed measured by the specific measurement means becomes a specific trigger number (first time-saving continuation number, second time-saving continuation number).

According to feature A6, the specified game state ends when the number of game plays executed in the specified game state reaches a specific trigger number, so the trigger for ending the specified game state becomes clear to the player.

Feature A7: A gaming machine according to Feature A6, characterized in that, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the total number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state before the predetermined end process is executed and the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start process is executed can be greater than the number of times the predetermined game state can be continued, which is set when the predetermined game state is entered from a game state that is not the predetermined game state.

According to feature A7, when both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. Therefore, when both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start process is executed later in the game round to restart the predetermined game state. When such an event occurs, the total number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state before the predetermined end process is executed and the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start process is executed may be greater than the number of times that the predetermined game state can be continued when the game state changes from a game state that is not the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occurring in one game round.

Feature A8. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and the special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means is configured to perform the game number action in each game number, with one game number being a time when a game number action is started and the game number action is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the specified gaming state is a gaming state in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature A8, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is granted to a player when the special information corresponds to the grant corresponding information, in a predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than in a different game state. Therefore, the player expects that the predetermined game state will be entered and that the predetermined game state will continue for a long time. In this case, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round, so that if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start process is executed later in the game round to start the predetermined game state again. Therefore, the player expects that if a predetermined end trigger occurs, the predetermined start trigger will occur in the game round in which the predetermined end trigger occurs.

In addition, for the configuration of features A1 to A8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group A can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the processing for progressing the game needs to be executed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A game control means (function to execute the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that controls the game play execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game play operation is executed in the game play;
a specific end execution means (a function of executing a subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for executing a specific end process (a subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that ends a specific game state (high probability state) when it is determined that a specific end trigger (the value of the high probability state counter 133 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0") has occurred in the game round, and does not end the specific game state when it is determined that the specific end trigger has not occurred;
a predetermined start execution means (a function for executing the setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, a function for executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for starting a predetermined game state (a time-saving state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode) when it is determined that a predetermined start opportunity (a time-saving result, a ceiling time-saving) has occurred in the game round, and not starting the predetermined game state when it is determined that the predetermined start opportunity has not occurred;
Equipped with
the predetermined start execution means prevents the predetermined start opportunity from occurring when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, or invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round.

According to feature B1, the specific game state is ended when the specific end process identifies that a specific end trigger has occurred, and the specific game state is started when the specific start process identifies that a specific start trigger has occurred, so a player who expects to be in the specific game state will expect that the specific end trigger will not occur in the specific game state, and a player who expects to be in the specific game state will expect that the specific start trigger will occur in a game state that is not the specific game state.

In this case, if the predetermined start process is executed in a specific game state, the predetermined start trigger will not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in a specific game state, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger will be invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of duplicate predetermined game states in a specific game state.

In addition, since the specific end process is executed after the specific start process is executed in one game round, even in a game round in which the specific game state ends, if the specific start process is executed in the specific game state, the specific start trigger does not occur, or if the specific start process is executed in the specific game state, the occurrence of the specific start trigger is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the specific game state from occurring in a game round that started in the specific game state, even if it is the last game round in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive benefit. In addition, the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved by a simple configuration in which the execution order of processes in one game round is the order in which the specific end process is executed after the execution of the specific start process.

Feature B2. A gaming machine according to Feature B1, characterized in that the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature B2, since a specific game state is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged even if the predetermined game state does not occur in a game round executed in a specific game state.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B1 or B2, characterized in that the specific end process and the predetermined start process are both executed after the game-round operation in the game-round execution means is completed in the game round.

According to feature B3, the specific end process and the predetermined start process are both executed after the game-round operation is finished, so that these processes are executed in a situation where the process for starting the game-round operation and the process for progressing the game-round operation are not executed, which makes it possible to distribute the processing load. Even in a configuration in which the processing load is distributed in this way, the configuration of feature B1 is included, and in a configuration in which the predetermined start process is executed in a specific game state and the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated when the predetermined start process is executed in a specific game state, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive benefit.

Feature B4. Equipped with a predetermined lottery means (a function for executing the acquisition process of reserved information and the winning/losing judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that executes a predetermined lottery process (the acquisition process of reserved information and the winning/losing judgment process executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments),
The game number control means controls the game number execution means so that an operation result corresponds to a result of the predetermined lottery processing,
The predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result (time-saving result),
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the specified start execution means invalidates the occurrence of the specified start trigger when the specified start processing is executed in the specific gaming state.

According to feature B4, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state occurs based on the result of a predetermined lottery process becoming a predetermined lottery result, the configuration has the configuration of feature B1 described above, and in a configuration in which the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger is invalidated if a predetermined start process is executed in a specific game state, a specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being awarded to the player.

Feature B5. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is played is provided,
The predetermined start execution means executes, as the predetermined start processing, a number update processing for updating the number of times the game rounds are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means, when the game round is executed (step S1503 executed by the master MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and step S3703 executed by the master MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment), and a start execution processing for starting the predetermined game state as the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger, when the number of times the game rounds are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means, becomes a predetermined trigger number (a fixed ceiling number in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) (step S1506 executed by the master MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and step S3705 executed by the master MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment).
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the number update process is not executed in the specific gaming state.

According to feature B5, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state occurs based on the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, even if a game round is executed in the specific game state, a count update process for updating the number of game rounds executed measured by a predetermined measurement means is not executed. This makes it possible not only to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the specific game state, but also to prevent even the count update process that brings the occurrence of the predetermined game state closer from being executed. In this case, with the configuration of feature B1 described above, a specific end process is executed after a specific start process is executed in one game round, so that it is possible to prevent the count update process that brings the occurrence of the predetermined game state closer from being executed even in a game round that ends the specific game state.

Feature B6. An acquisition means for acquiring special information (first reserved information, second reserved information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition trigger (in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S704 and S709 in the main MPU 82);
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
a bonus granting means (function of executing special line start processing, special line open processing, special line close processing, and special line end processing of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for granting a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
Equipped with
The game number control means is configured to perform the game number action in each game number, with one game number being a time when a game number action is started and the game number action is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the result of the award judgment is more likely to be the award corresponding result than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature B6, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the result of the award judgment will be the award-corresponding result is high, so the specific gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature B7: A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
a bonus granting means (function of executing special line start processing, special line open processing, special line close processing, and special line end processing of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for granting a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means is configured to perform the game number action in each game number, with one game number being a time when a game number action is started and the game number action is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the specified gaming state is a gaming state in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature B7, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when in a predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in a different gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature B8. The gaming machine described in Feature B7, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature B8, the specific game state is more advantageous than the predetermined game state in terms of the likelihood of the predetermined ball entry means becoming open. Therefore, even if the predetermined game state does not occur in a game round executed in the specific game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a significant disadvantage.

In addition, for the configuration of features B1 to B8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A game control means (function to execute the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that controls the game round execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round;
A state storage means (a start high probability flag of the main RAM 84) for storing information on the game state when the game round is started;
a predetermined start execution means (a function for executing the setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for starting a predetermined gaming state (a time-saving state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode) when it is determined that a predetermined start opportunity (a time-saving result, a ceiling time-saving) has occurred after the end of the game cycle operation, and for not starting the predetermined gaming state when it is determined that the predetermined start opportunity has not occurred;
Equipped with
The predetermined start execution means prevents the predetermined start trigger from occurring or invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger when the predetermined start processing is executed in a situation where specific state information is stored in the state memory means (a situation where the high probability start flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1").

According to feature C1, a predetermined game state is started when the predetermined start process identifies that a predetermined start trigger has occurred, so a player who expects to be in the predetermined game state expects the predetermined start trigger to occur in a game state that is not the predetermined game state. In addition, since the predetermined start process is executed after the game-use operation has ended, the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game-use operation and the process for progressing the game-use operation are not being executed, making it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, when the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring twice in the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information. Also, the state storage means stores information on the game state when a game round is started. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in a game round in a configuration in which the predetermined start process is executed after the game round operation is completed, even if the game state when the game round is started is the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information and the end condition of the game state is established before the predetermined start process is executed in the game round. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in a game round in which the benefit of the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information is granted, and it is possible to prevent the granting of an excessive benefit to the player.

Feature C2. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state at the time when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state);
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a specific end execution means (a function of executing a subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that ends a specific gaming state (high probability state) if it is determined that a specific end trigger has occurred (the value of the high probability state counter 133 after subtracting 1 becomes "0") after the gaming operation has ended, and executes a specific end process (a subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that does not end the specific gaming state if it is determined that the specific end trigger has not occurred.

According to feature C2, the specific game state is ended when the specific end process determines that a specific end trigger has occurred, so a player who expects to be in a specific game state will expect that a specific end trigger will not occur in the specific game state. In addition, since the specific end process is executed after the game-use operation has ended, the specific end process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game-use operation and the process for progressing the game-use operation are not being executed, making it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game round operation is completed. Then, depending on the execution order of these specific end processes and the predetermined start processes, there is a possibility that the predetermined start process may be executed after the game state becomes a non-specific game state, even for a game round started in a specific game state. In contrast, in a game round started in a specific game state, with the configuration of feature C1 described above, specific state information is stored in the information storage means when the game round is started, and if the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in a game round started in a specific game state, regardless of the execution order of the specific end process and the predetermined start process.

Feature C3. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state at the time when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state),
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature C3, since a specific game state is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged even if the predetermined game state does not occur in a game round started in a specific game state.

Feature C4. An acquisition means for acquiring special information (first reserved information, second reserved information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition trigger (in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S704 and S709 in the main MPU 82);
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
Equipped with
The game number control means is configured to perform the game number action in each game number, with one game number being a time when a game number action is started and the game number action is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination,
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the award judgment will be the award corresponding result is higher than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature C4, in a specific gaming state, the probability that the result of the award judgment will be an award-compatible result is high, so the specific gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature C5. A predetermined lottery means (a function for executing the acquisition process of reserved information and the winning/losing judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for executing a predetermined lottery process (a process for acquiring reserved information and the winning/losing judgment process executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) is provided,
The game number control means controls the game number execution means so that an operation result corresponds to a result of the predetermined lottery processing,
The predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result (time-saving result),
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the specified start execution means invalidates the occurrence of the specified start trigger when the specified start processing is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state memory means.

According to feature C5, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state occurs based on the result of a predetermined lottery process becoming a predetermined lottery result, the configuration of feature C1 described above is included, and information on the game state when a game round is started is stored in the state storage means, and when the predetermined start process is executed in a situation in which specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated, so that even if the game state when a game round is started is a game state that triggers the storage of specific state information and the end condition of the game state is met before the specific start process is executed in that game round, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in that game round.

Feature C6. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is played is provided;
The predetermined start execution means executes, as the predetermined start processing, a number update processing for updating the number of times the game rounds are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means, when the game round is executed (step S2103 executed by the master MPU 82 in the second embodiment), and a start execution processing for starting the predetermined game state as the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger, when the number of times the game rounds are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means, becomes a predetermined trigger number (a fixed ceiling number in the second embodiment) (step S2106 executed by the master MPU 82 in the second embodiment).
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that, when specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the number update process is not executed.

According to feature C6, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state occurs based on the execution of a predetermined number of game times, if specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the number update process for updating the number of game times measured by the predetermined measurement means is not executed even if a game time is executed. This makes it possible that not only does the predetermined game state not occur in the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information, but also that the number update process for approaching the occurrence of the predetermined game state is not executed. In this case, the configuration of feature C1 is provided, and information on the game state when a game time is started is stored in the state storage means, and when the specific start process is executed in a situation in which specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the number update process for updating the number of game times measured by the predetermined measurement means is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the number update process for approaching the occurrence of the predetermined game state from being executed even in a game time in which the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information ends.

Feature C7. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the second embodiment) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82);
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means controls the game number control unit so that the game number control unit is operated in each game number when the game number control unit is started and the game number control unit is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, the game number control unit being one game number.
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the specified gaming state is a gaming state in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature C7, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when in a predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in a different gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature C8. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state at the time when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state);
A gaming machine described in feature C7, characterized in that the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than the specified gaming state.

According to feature C8, the specific game state is more advantageous than the predetermined game state in terms of the likelihood of the predetermined ball entry means becoming open. Therefore, even if the predetermined game state does not occur in a game round executed in the specific game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a significant disadvantage.

In addition, for the configuration of features C1 to C8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group B and feature group C can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to award benefits to players in an appropriate manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A game control means (function to execute the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that controls the game round execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round;
A specific lottery means (a function for executing the fall determination process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for executing a specific end lottery process (a fall determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for determining whether or not to end the specific game state (high probability state) in the specific game state;
A predetermined lottery means (a function for executing the reserved information acquisition process and the winning/losing judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for executing a predetermined lottery process (a reserved information acquisition process and a winning/losing judgment process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
A predetermined benefit granting means (a function of executing a setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that grants a predetermined benefit (a second high-frequency support mode) to a player based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being a predetermined lottery result (a time-saving result);
Equipped with
The specific selection means executes the specific end selection process before the predetermined selection process is executed in one game round.

According to feature D1, when the specific end lottery process results in a lottery result that ends the specific game state, the specific game state is ended, and a specified bonus is given to the player based on the specified lottery result in the specified lottery process. Therefore, a player who expects to be in a specific game state expects that the specific end lottery process will not result in a lottery result that ends the specific game state in the specific game state, and a player who expects to be given a specified bonus expects that the specified lottery process will result in the specified lottery process. In this case, the specific end lottery process is executed before the specified lottery process is executed in one game round. As a result, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in the specific game state is a lottery result that ends the specific game state, the specified lottery process is executed after the lottery result that ends the specific game state, so that in a game round in which the specific game state ends, the specified lottery process can be executed in a situation where the specific game state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to perform the lottery process in an optimal manner.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, wherein the predetermined selection means changes the manner in which the predetermined selection process is executed depending on whether or not the specific gaming state is in effect.

According to feature D2, the manner in which the predetermined lottery process is executed differs depending on whether or not the specific game state is in effect, so the player will pay attention to the game state at the timing when the predetermined lottery process is executed. In this case, with the configuration of feature D1 described above, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in a specific game state is a lottery result that ends the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the lottery result that ends the specific game state is reached, so that in a game round in which the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in a situation in which the specific game state has ended. Therefore, in the predetermined lottery process, it becomes possible to treat a game round in which the specific game state ends as a game round in which the specific game state is not in a specific game state.

Feature D3. A means for executing a specific end process (step S2208 executed by the master MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for ending the specific game state based on the result of the specific end lottery process being an end result (fall result) (a function for executing the process of step S2208 of the master MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that when the result of the specific end lottery process becomes the end result, the specific end process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed.

According to feature D3, if the result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in a specific game state is an end result, it is possible to end the specific game state before the predetermined lottery process is executed in that game round.

Feature D4. A variable ball entry means (special telephone winning device 32) that is provided in the game area where the game balls flow down and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
A variable entry control means (a function of executing special line start processing, special line open processing, and special line closed processing of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that executes variable entry control by switching the variable entry means to the open state and then to the closed state;
A special transition means (a function of executing the special call start process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being a special lottery result (jackpot result);
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature D4, in a configuration in which a special game state occurs in which variable ball entry control for a variable ball entry means is executed based on the result of a predetermined lottery process being a special lottery result, a predetermined bonus is awarded based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being a predetermined lottery result. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to award a predetermined bonus by utilizing the configuration of the predetermined lottery process that determines whether or not to generate a special game state.

Feature D5. The gaming machine described in Feature D4, characterized in that the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the result of the predetermined lottery process is more likely to be the special lottery result than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature D5, the probability of a special game state occurring is high in the specific game state, making the specific game state an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, with the configuration of feature D1 described above, in a game round in which the result of the specific lottery process results in the end of the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specific game state ends. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of game rounds in which the predetermined lottery process is executed in the specific game state.

Feature D6: A specific update means (type random number counter C2) for updating numerical information;
a means for determining the type of benefit (open/close execution mode, win/lose lottery mode, and support mode) that can be granted to a player by executing a special type lottery process (the processing of step S2211 executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) using the numerical information updated by the specific update means when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the special lottery result (a function for executing the processing of step S2211 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
a means for determining the type of the predetermined benefit that can be given to a player by executing a predetermined type lottery process (the process of step S2217 executed by the master MPU 82 in the third embodiment) using the numerical information updated by the specific update means when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result (a function for executing the process of step S2217 of the master MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature D6, if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a special lottery result, the type of bonus selected by the special type lottery process is awarded, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the bonus is awarded. Also, if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result, the type of predetermined bonus selected by the predetermined type lottery process is awarded, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined bonus is awarded. In this case, in a configuration in which the numerical information of the specific update means is used in the special type lottery process, the numerical information of the specific update means is also used in the predetermined type lottery process. This makes it possible to determine the type of predetermined bonus to be awarded in the case of a predetermined lottery result by utilizing the configuration for determining the type of bonus to be awarded in the case of a special lottery result.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D6, characterized in that the predetermined bonus granting means does not grant the predetermined bonus even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in the specific gaming state.

According to feature D7, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result in a situation where the specific game state is in progress, the predetermined bonus is not awarded, thereby making it possible to prevent the predetermined bonus from being awarded excessively. In this case, with the configuration of feature D1 described above, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in the specific game state is a lottery result that ends the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the lottery result that ends the specific game state is reached, so that in a game round in which the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in a situation where the specific game state has ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to award the predetermined bonus in a game round in which the specific game state ends.

Feature D8. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The predetermined selection means executes the predetermined selection process based on the acquisition of the special information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the specified bonus awarding means, as a means for awarding the specified bonus, transitions the gaming state to a specified gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to reach the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature D8, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a predetermined lottery process is executed by acquiring the special information, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state when in a predetermined game state than when in another game state. Therefore, the player will hope that the predetermined game state will be reached and that the predetermined game state will continue for a long time. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features D1 to D8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group D can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

In gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the lottery process needs to be executed properly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A game control means (function to execute the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that controls the game round execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round;
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is played;
a number update means for updating the number of times the game has been played, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means, when the game has been played (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main MPU 82 in the first, third to eighth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
a predetermined benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit (second high frequency support mode) when the number of times the game is played measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number (a fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments, and a first ceiling number or a second ceiling number in the fifth embodiment) (a function for executing the process of step S1506 in the master MPU 82 in the first and third to eighth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2106 in the master MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3705 in the master MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S4505 in the master MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
an abnormality response means for executing an abnormality response process (step S121 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, step S2421 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2621 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment) when it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in a predetermined storage means (main RAM 84) when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step S121 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2421 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2621 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
a predetermined setting means for executing a predetermined setting process (step S122 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, step S2506 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2622 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment) for setting the information of the predetermined measuring means to a predetermined initial value ("500" in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments, and "800" in the fifth embodiment) based on the occurrence of the information abnormality (a function for executing the process of step S122 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2506 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2622 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature E1, a predetermined bonus is awarded when the number of game plays measured by a predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number, making it possible to give a player a predetermined bonus for repeatedly playing game plays. Furthermore, if an information abnormality occurs in the predetermined storage means when the supply of operating power is started, an abnormality response process is executed, making it possible to deal with the occurrence of the information abnormality. In this case, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality. When an information abnormality occurs, there is a risk that the information of the predetermined measuring means will also be abnormal, but in such a situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value, making it possible to prevent play from starting with the information of the predetermined measuring means remaining abnormal.

Feature E2. A means for executing a profit awarding process (a winning/losing determination process) in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing a winning/losing determination process in the main MPU 82);
a situation generating means for generating a setting possible situation (a situation in which a setting value update process is executed) in which it is possible to change the setting value to be used based on a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable situation.

According to feature E2, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, since the information of the specified measurement means is not set to a specified initial value in a setting possible situation, it is possible to maintain the information of the specified measurement means at the information before the supply of operating power was stopped even if a setting possible situation occurs. In this configuration, the configuration of feature E1 above is included, and the information of the specified measurement means is set to a specified initial value based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, so it is possible to prevent play from starting with the information of the specified measurement means remaining abnormal.

Feature E3: The abnormality response means stores abnormality response information (information of "1") in the abnormality response storage area (game stop flag of the main RAM 84) in the abnormality response process;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for initializing the abnormality response memory area when the settable situation occurs (in the first to third and fifth to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing RAM clearing in the setting value update process in the main MPU 82).

According to feature E3, in a configuration in which a configurable situation must be generated in order to erase abnormality response information stored based on the occurrence of an information anomaly, the information of the specified measurement means does not become a predetermined initial value in the configurable situation, but rather the information of the specified measurement means becomes a predetermined initial value when abnormality response information is stored. As a result, in the configurable situation, it is sufficient to initialize the abnormality response storage area regardless of whether abnormality response information is stored or not, and there is no need to differ in the execution content of the processing in the configurable situation depending on whether abnormality response information is stored or not. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load in the configurable situation.

Feature E4: The abnormality response means stores abnormality response information (information of "1") in the abnormality response storage area (game stop flag of the main RAM 84) in the abnormality response process;
This gaming machine is
A means for executing a profit awarding process (a winning/losing determination process) in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the winning/losing determination process in the main MPU 82);
A situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step S2417 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment) for generating a situation in which it is possible to change the setting value to be used (a situation in which a setting value update process is executed) based on a predetermined related operation (a setting change operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started;
A means for initializing the abnormality handling storage area when the setting possible situation occurs (a function for executing the processes of steps S2504 and S2505 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature E1 is characterized in that the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process when the settable situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality response information is not stored, and executes the predetermined setting process when the settable situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality response information is stored.

According to feature E4, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect that the more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. Also, in order to erase the abnormality response information stored based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, it is necessary to generate a setting possible situation. In this case, if a setting possible situation occurs in a situation where no abnormality response information is stored, the information of the specified measurement means will not become the specified initial value, and if a setting possible situation occurs in a situation where abnormality response information is stored, the information of the specified measurement means will become the specified initial value. This makes it possible to basically prevent the information of the specified measurement means from becoming the specified initial value when a setting possible situation occurs, while allowing the information of the specified measurement means to become the specified initial value accordingly when a setting possible situation occurs in order to erase the abnormality response information.

Feature E5: A means for executing an initialization process of predetermined information on the predetermined storage means based on a specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step S119 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2419 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2619 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment),
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized,
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to feature E5, in a configuration in which an initialization process for predetermined information is executed for a predetermined storage means based on the fact that a specific related operation is being performed when the supply of operating power is started, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a predetermined initial value even when the initialization process is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means at the information before the supply of operating power was stopped, even if the initialization process is executed. In this configuration, which includes the configuration of feature E1 above, and in which the information of the predetermined measurement means is set to the predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, it is possible to prevent gameplay from starting with the information of the predetermined measurement means remaining abnormal.

Feature E6. A means for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (a function for executing the special call start process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments);
a means for resetting information of the predetermined measurement means to the predetermined initial value upon transition to the special game state (a function for executing processing of step S1005 in the master MPU 82 in the first, fourth, eighth and ninth embodiments, a function for executing processing of step S1905 in the master MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function for executing processing of step S2305 in the master MPU 82 in the third embodiment, a function for executing processing of step S3109 in the master MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing processing of step S3305 in the master MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment, and a function for executing processing of step S4208 in the master MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature E6, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measurement means is set to a predetermined initial value upon transition to a special game state, the information of the predetermined measurement means is set to the predetermined initial value even if an information abnormality occurs when the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to make the number of game plays required to grant a predetermined benefit when an information abnormality occurs the same as the number of game plays required to grant a predetermined benefit after the special game state occurs.

Feature E7: Equipped with a means for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 82);
the predetermined benefit granting means grants the predetermined benefit when it is determined based on the information measured by the predetermined measuring means that the number of times the game is executed after the special game state has ended is the predetermined trigger number;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the number of times the game has been executed ("800" in the fifth embodiment) required until the number of times the game has been executed is determined to have reached the specified trigger number after the specified setting process is executed is different from the number of times the game has been executed ("500" in the fifth embodiment) required until the number of times the game has been executed is determined to have reached the specified trigger number after the special gaming state has ended.

According to feature E7, in a configuration in which a specified bonus is awarded when the number of game times executed after a special game state occurs reaches a specified trigger number, the number of game times required to determine that the number of game times executed has reached the specified trigger number after an information abnormality occurs differs from the number of game times required to determine that the number of game times executed has reached the specified trigger number after the special game state ends. This makes it possible to make the number of game times required to award the specified bonus different between after the special game state ends and after an information abnormality occurs.

Feature E8. The gaming machine described in Feature E7, characterized in that the number of times the game is executed that is required until the number of times the game is executed is determined to have reached the predetermined trigger number after the predetermined setting process is executed is greater than the number of times the game is executed that is required until the number of times the game is executed is determined to have reached the predetermined trigger number after the special gaming state ends.

According to feature E8, the number of play times required to determine that the number of play times has reached the predetermined trigger number after an information anomaly has occurred is greater than the number of play times required to determine that the number of play times has reached the predetermined trigger number after a special game state has ended. This makes it possible to increase the number of play times required to grant a predetermined bonus after an act of fraudulently causing an information anomaly has been performed.

Feature E9. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, and the special winning device 151 in the sixth, tenth to twelfth embodiments) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
an acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means controls the game number control unit so that the game number control unit is operated in each game number when the game number control unit is started and the game number control unit is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, the game number control unit being one game number.
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the specified bonus awarding means, as a means for awarding the specified bonus, transitions the gaming state to a specified gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to reach the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature E9, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when in a predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in a different gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features E1 to E9, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention related to the above feature group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

However, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to ensure that play is carried out smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A game control means (function for executing the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) that controls the game round execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round;
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is played;
a number update means for updating the number of times the game has been played, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means, when the game has been played (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main MPU 82 in the first, third to fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
a predetermined benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit (second high frequency support mode) when the number of times the game is played measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number (a fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth and seventh to twelfth embodiments, and a first or second ceiling number in the fifth embodiment) (a function for executing the process of step S1506 in the master MPU 82 in the first, third to fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2106 in the master MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3705 in the master MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S4505 in the master MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
A special transition means (a function for executing the special call start process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
A predetermined setting process (a process of step S1005 executed by the master MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, eighth and ninth embodiments, a process of step S1905 executed by the master MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a process of step S2305 executed by the master MPU 82 in the third embodiment, a process of step S3305 executed by the master MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment, a process of step S4005 executed by the master MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) for setting the information of the predetermined measurement means to a specific initial value ("500" in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) when the special game state is started. a predetermined setting means for executing the processing of step S4208 in the main MPU 82 (a function for executing the processing of step S1005 in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, eighth and ninth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of step S1905 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2305 in the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3305 in the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S4208 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature F1, a predetermined bonus is awarded when the number of times a game is played, which is measured by a predetermined measuring means, reaches a predetermined trigger number, so that a player can be given a predetermined bonus for playing a game repeatedly. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value when a special game state is triggered, it is possible to award a predetermined bonus when the number of times a game is played after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined trigger number. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value when a special game state is triggered, the specific initial value is set when the special game state starts. As a result, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is restarted after a certain amount of profit is obtained in the special game state and before the special game state ends, while the information of the predetermined measuring means is maintained, the maintained information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the specific initial value set when the special game state starts. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent act.

Feature F2. A means for executing a profit awarding process (a winning/losing determination process) in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing a winning/losing determination process in the main MPU 82);
a status generating means for generating a setting possible status (a status in which a setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2417 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable situation.

According to feature F2, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value in a setting possible situation, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means to the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if a setting possible situation occurs. In this configuration, the configuration of feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special game state is started. As a result, even if a fraudulent act is performed to forcibly end the special game state while maintaining the information of the predetermined measurement means by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power after a certain amount of profit is obtained in the special game state and before the special game state ends, the information of the maintained predetermined measurement means becomes the specific initial value set when the special game state starts. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize such fraudulent acts.

Feature F3. A means for executing an initialization process of predetermined information on a predetermined storage means (main RAM 84) based on a specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step S119 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2419 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2619 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment),
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to feature F3, in a configuration in which an initialization process for predetermined information is executed for a predetermined storage means based on the fact that a specific related operation is being performed when the supply of operating power is started, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value even if the initialization process is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means to the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if the initialization process is executed. In this configuration, the configuration of feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special game state is started. This makes it possible to perform a fraudulent act of forcibly ending the special game state while maintaining the information of the predetermined measurement means by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power after a certain amount of profit is obtained in the special game state and before the special game state ends, but the information of the predetermined measurement means that is maintained becomes the specific initial value that was set when the special game state started. This makes it possible to neutralize such fraudulent acts.

Feature F4: A means for executing a profit awarding process (a winning/losing determination process) in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the winning/losing determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments);
a status generating means for generating a setting possible status (a status in which a setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2417 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature F3 is characterized in that the predetermined setting means is configured not to execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed, and is configured not to execute the predetermined setting process in the settable situation, and executes the predetermined setting process in a predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a situation in which a positive judgment is made at step S113 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, a situation in which a positive judgment is made at step S2413 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a situation in which a positive judgment is made at step S2613 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment).

According to feature F4, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, so the player will expect that the more advantageous setting value is the setting value to be used. In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value, and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value in a configurable situation. Therefore, not only is it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means as it was before the supply of operating power was stopped even if the initialization process is executed, but it is also possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means as it was before the supply of operating power was stopped even if a configurable situation occurs. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, the information of the predetermined measurement means is set to a specific initial value in a specified situation in which neither the specific related operation nor the specific related operation is performed. As a result, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value even if the initialization process is executed and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value in a configurable situation, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measurement means to a specific initial value by making the specified situation occur when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature F5. A variable ball entry means (special telephone winning device 32) that is provided in the game area where the game balls flow down and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
A variable entry control means for executing variable entry control that switches the variable entry means to the open state and then to the closed state (a function for executing the special line start processing, the special line open processing, and the special line closed processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments);
Equipped with
The special transition means transitions the game state to the special game state after the game round in which the operation result of the game round operation becomes a special result (a stop result corresponding to a jackpot result) ends,
The variable ball entry control is executed in the special game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the result of the game play operation becomes the special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state.

According to feature F5, after the result of the game play operation becomes a special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state, it is possible to set the information of the specified measurement means to a specific initial value.

Feature F6. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, and the special winning device 151 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means controls the game number control unit so that the game number control unit is operated in each game number when the game number control unit is started and the game number control unit is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, the game number control unit being one game number.
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the specified bonus awarding means, as a means for awarding the specified bonus, transitions the gaming state to a specified gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to reach the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature F6, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when in a predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in a different gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features F1 to F6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group F can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to ensure that gaming machines such as those exemplified above can be played properly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A game control means (function to execute the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that controls the game round execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round;
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is played;
A number of times update means for updating the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game is executed (a function for executing the process of step S1503 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A predetermined benefit granting means (a function of executing the process of step S1506 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that grants a predetermined benefit (a second high frequency support mode) when the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, reaches a predetermined trigger number (a fixed ceiling number or a special ceiling number in the sixth embodiment);
A special transition means (a function for executing the special call start process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
A predetermined setting means (a function for executing the process of step S3109 of the master MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for executing a predetermined setting process (the process of step S3109 of the master MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for making the information of the predetermined measurement means become a specific initial value ("500" in the sixth embodiment) when the special game state ends;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature G1, a predetermined bonus is awarded when the number of times a game is played, which is measured by a predetermined measuring means, reaches a predetermined trigger number, so that a player can be given a predetermined bonus for playing a game repeatedly. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value when a special game state is triggered, it is possible to award a predetermined bonus when the number of times a game is played after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined trigger number. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value when a special game state is triggered, the specific initial value is set when the special game state ends. As a result, even if there are multiple patterns of game situations immediately before the transition to the special game state, it is possible to consolidate the process of setting a specific initial value in the predetermined measuring means when a special game state is triggered as the process when the special game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G2. The special transition means is
A means for transitioning the game state to the special game state when the game round is over (a function for executing the processing of steps S3002 to S3005 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A means for transitioning the game state to the special game state when an event other than the end of the game round occurs (a function for executing the allocation process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature G2, there are cases where a transition to a special game state occurs after a game round ends, and cases where a transition to a special game state occurs when an event other than the end of a game round occurs. This makes it possible to diversify the patterns of transition to a special game state. In this case, since the configuration of feature G1 described above is provided and a specific initial value is set in the specified measurement means when the special game state ends, even in a configuration in which there are multiple patterns of game situations immediately before transitioning to the special game state, it is possible to consolidate the process of setting a specific initial value in the specified measurement means in response to the special game state as the process when the special game state ends.

Feature G3. A gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that it is provided with a specific setting means (a function for executing the process of step S3204 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for executing a specific setting process (step S3204 executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for executing the game round in a state in which the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value after the supply of operating power is started again when the supply of operating power is stopped during the special game state.

In the case of a configuration in which a specific initial value is set to the specified measurement means when the special game state ends, it is conceivable that after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special game state and before the special game state ends, a fraudulent act would be to stop the supply of operating power and restart the supply of operating power to forcibly end the special game state while maintaining the information of the specified measurement means. In contrast, according to feature G3, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the special game state, a specific setting process is executed so that a game round is executed in a situation in which the information of the specified measurement means is a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value after the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature G4. When it is determined that the supply of operating power is stopped, a means for executing a power failure process (power failure monitoring process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) (a function for executing the power failure monitoring process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature G3 is characterized in that the specific setting means executes the specific setting process during the power outage processing when the supply of operating power is stopped during the special game state.

According to feature G4, if the supply of operating power is stopped during a special game state, a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value is set to the specified measurement means in the power failure processing, making it easier to identify whether the supply of operating power will be stopped during a special game state, compared to a configuration in which the processing for setting an initial value to the specified measurement means is executed when the supply of operating power begins.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to Feature G3 or G4, characterized in that the number of times the game is executed that is required until the number of times the game is executed is determined to have reached the predetermined trigger number after the predetermined setting process is executed ("500" in the sixth embodiment) is different from the number of times the game is executed that is required until the number of times the game is executed is determined to have reached the predetermined trigger number after the specific setting process is executed ("800" in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature G5, the number of game times required to determine that the number of game times has reached the predetermined trigger number after the special game state has ended is different from the number of game times required to determine that the number of game times has reached the predetermined trigger number after the supply of operating power is resumed when the supply of operating power is stopped during the special game state. This makes it possible to make the number of game times required to grant a predetermined benefit different between after the special game state has ended and after the supply of operating power is stopped and resumed during the special game state.

Feature G6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G3 to G5, characterized in that the number of times the game is executed that is required to determine that the number of times the game is executed has reached the predetermined trigger number after the specific setting process is executed is greater than the number of times the game is executed that is required to determine that the number of times the game is executed has reached the predetermined trigger number after the specific setting process is executed.

According to feature G6, when the supply of operating power is stopped during a special game state, the number of game times required to determine that the number of game times has reached the predetermined trigger number after the supply of operating power is resumed is greater than the number of game times required to determine that the number of game times has reached the predetermined trigger number after the special game state ends. Therefore, if an act of fraudulently stopping the supply of operating power during a special game state is performed, it is possible to increase the number of game times required to be played before the predetermined benefit is granted.

Feature G7: A means for executing a profit awarding process (a winning/losing determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a target for use from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the winning/losing determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for generating a situation in which it is possible to change the setting value to be used (a situation in which a setting value update process is executed) based on a predetermined related operation (a setting change operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G6, characterized in that the information of the specified measurement means is not changed in the settable situation.

According to feature G7, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value in the setting possible situation, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means at the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if the setting possible situation occurs. In this configuration, the configuration of feature G3 is provided, and if the supply of operating power is stopped during the special game state, a specific setting process is executed so that the game round is executed in a situation where the information of the predetermined measurement means is a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value after the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to neutralize fraudulent acts that forcibly end the special game state while maintaining the information of the predetermined measurement means by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special game state and before the special game state ends.

Feature G8: The device is provided with a means for executing an initialization process of predetermined information on a predetermined storage means (main RAM 84) based on a specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step S119 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G7, characterized in that the information of the specified measuring means is not changed even when the initialization process is executed.

According to feature G8, in a configuration in which an initialization process for predetermined information is executed for a predetermined storage means based on the fact that a specific related operation is being performed when the supply of operating power is started, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to an initial value even if the initialization process is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means at the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if the initialization process is executed. In this configuration, when the configuration of feature G3 is included and the supply of operating power is stopped during the special game state, a specific setting process is executed so that a game round is executed in a situation in which the information of the predetermined measurement means is a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value after the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to neutralize fraudulent acts that forcibly end the special game state while maintaining the information of the predetermined measurement means by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special game state and before the special game state ends.

Feature G9. Means for executing a profit awarding process (a winning/losing determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the winning/losing determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for generating a situation in which it is possible to change the setting value to be used (a situation in which a setting value update process is executed) based on a predetermined related operation (a setting change operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
The information of the predetermined measurement means is not changed even if the initialization process is executed, and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not changed in the setting possible situation.
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S114 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for causing the information of the predetermined measuring means to become the specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value when the supply of operating power is started and a specified situation occurs in which both the specific related operation and the specified related operation are not being performed (a situation in which a positive judgment is made in step S113 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature G9, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value, and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value in the settable situation. Therefore, not only can the information of the predetermined measurement means be maintained as the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if the initialization process is executed, but also, even if the settable situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measurement means can be maintained as the information before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, if the specified situation is one in which neither the specific related operation nor the specific related operation is performed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is set to a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value. As a result, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value even if the initialization process is executed and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value in the settable situation, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measurement means to a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value by making the specified situation occur when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature G10. A variable ball entry means (special telephone winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
A variable entry control means (a function of executing special line start processing, special line open processing, and special line closed processing of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that executes variable entry control by switching the variable entry means to the open state and then to the closed state;
Equipped with
The variable ball entry control is executed in the special game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G9, characterized in that the predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the variable ball entry control in the special game state is completed and before the end timing of the special game state.

According to feature G10, it is possible to set the information of the specified measurement means to a specific initial value after variable ball entry control is completed in the special game state and before the special game state ends.

Feature G11. A predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S2806 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the correctness determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that performs an assignment determination of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information (a correctness determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means controls the game number control unit so that the game number control unit is operated in each game number when the game number control unit is started and the game number control unit is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, the game number control unit being one game number.
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that the specified bonus awarding means, as a means for awarding the specified bonus, transitions the gaming state to a specified gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to reach the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature G11, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player when the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information, when in a predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in another gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features G1 to G11, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

The invention relating to the above feature group G can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

In gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be executed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A game control means (function to execute the special chart change start process, the special chart change process, and the special chart confirmation process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that controls the game play execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game play operation is executed in the game play;
A period determination means for determining the duration of the game (a function for executing a process for determining the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments);
A specific measurement means for measuring the number of times the game has been played (the variable selection state counter 132 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, and the game number counter in the main RAM 84 in the seventh embodiment);
A specific update means for updating the number of times the game has been played, which is measured by the specific measurement means when the game has been played (a function for executing the process of step S1703 of the master MPU 82 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S3401 of the master MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment);
a mode change means for changing the mode of determining the duration of the game in the period determination means based on the fact that the number of times the game has been played, which is measured by the specific measurement means after the occurrence of a measurement reference trigger (opening/closing execution mode), has reached a specific reference number (500 times in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, and a game number whose last digit is "7" in the seventh embodiment); and
A predetermined benefit granting means (a function of executing a setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that grants a predetermined benefit (second high-frequency support mode) when a predetermined granting opportunity (time-saving result) occurs;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the measurement standard trigger does not occur even if the predetermined award trigger occurs and the predetermined benefit is awarded.

According to feature H1, the manner in which the duration of a game is determined is changed based on the number of game plays executed after the occurrence of a measurement standard trigger reaching a specific standard number, so it is possible to prevent the manner in which the duration of a game is determined from becoming uniform when game plays are executed repeatedly. Furthermore, since a specified bonus is awarded when a specified award trigger occurs, the player will expect the specified award trigger to occur. In this case, even if the specified award trigger occurs and the specified bonus is awarded, the measurement standard trigger will not occur. This makes it possible to award a specified bonus in response to the occurrence of a specified award trigger without affecting the timing at which the manner in which the duration of a game is determined is changed.

Feature H2. Equipped with a predetermined lottery means (a function for executing the acquisition process of reserved information and the winning/losing judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that executes a predetermined lottery process (a process for acquiring reserved information and the winning/losing judgment process executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments),
The game number control means controls the game number execution means so that an operation result corresponds to a result of the predetermined lottery processing,
The gaming machine described in feature H1 is configured such that the predetermined award trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result (time-saving result).

According to feature H2, in a configuration in which a predetermined bonus can be awarded when the result of a predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result, it is possible to award a predetermined bonus based on the predetermined lottery result, without affecting the timing at which the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed.

Feature H3. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments);
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means controls the game number control unit so that the game number control unit is operated in each game number when the game number control unit is started and the game number control unit is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, the game number control unit being one game number.
The gaming machine described in feature H1 or H2, characterized in that the specified bonus awarding means, as a means for awarding the specified bonus, transitions the gaming state to a specified gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to reach the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature H3, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player when the special information corresponds to the award-compatible information, when in a predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in a different game state. Thus, the predetermined game state becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, with the configuration of feature H1, even if a predetermined award trigger occurs and a predetermined game state occurs, a measurement standard trigger does not occur. This makes it possible to cause a transition to a predetermined game state in response to the occurrence of a predetermined award trigger, without affecting the timing at which the determination mode of the duration of a game round is changed.

Feature H4. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is played;
a number update means for updating the number of times the game has been played, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means when the game has been played (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the master MPU 82 in the first, third to fifth and seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2103 in the master MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3703 in the master MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
Equipped with
When the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger, reaches a predetermined trigger number (a fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth and seventh to ninth embodiments, and a first ceiling number or a second ceiling number in the fifth embodiment), the predetermined benefit (a second high frequency support mode) or a different benefit is awarded;
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the specific reference number of times is a number that is a predetermined number of times less than the predetermined trigger number of times.

According to feature H4, when the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger, reaches the predetermined trigger number, the predetermined bonus or a different bonus is awarded to the player, so that the player can be awarded the predetermined bonus or a different bonus for repeatedly executing the game. In this case, the specific reference number is a number less than the predetermined trigger number by a predetermined number of times. This makes it possible to change the determination mode of the duration of the game in the game that is a predetermined number of times before the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger, reaches the predetermined trigger number and the predetermined bonus or a different bonus is awarded. Therefore, by changing the determination mode of the duration of the game, it is possible to make the player recognize that the situation in which the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined trigger number and the predetermined bonus or a different bonus is awarded is approaching. In this case, the configuration of feature H1 is provided, and even if the predetermined awarding trigger occurs and the predetermined bonus is awarded, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. This makes it possible to ensure that the granting of a specified bonus due to the occurrence of a specified granting trigger does not affect the game content described above.

Feature H5. The gaming machine described in Feature H4, wherein the mode change means changes the determination mode of the duration of the game in the period determination means based on the fact that the number of times the game has been played, measured by the specific measurement means, since the occurrence of the measurement reference trigger, has reached the specific reference number, so that the average duration of the game becomes longer than before.

According to feature H5, the average duration of game times is longer than the previous period in the game times that are a predetermined number of times before the number of game times measured by the predetermined measurement means from the measurement reference trigger becomes the predetermined trigger number and the predetermined bonus or a different bonus is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of game times before the number of game times measured becomes the predetermined trigger number and the predetermined bonus or a different bonus is awarded, and it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being awarded in a short period of time. In this case, with the configuration of feature H1 described above, even if the predetermined award trigger occurs and the predetermined bonus is awarded, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the awarding of the predetermined bonus due to the occurrence of the predetermined award trigger from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H6: The specific reference number of times is set in a plurality of types,
The gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the mode change means changes the determination mode of the duration of the game in the period determination means to a predetermined determination mode each time the number of times the game has been played measured by the specific measurement means since the occurrence of a measurement standard trigger reaches the specific reference number (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3405 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment).

According to feature H6, each time the number of game plays executed after the occurrence of a measurement standard trigger reaches one of a number of specific standard counts, the determination mode for the duration of the game play is changed to a predetermined determination mode, making it possible to regularly and repeatedly generate a situation in which the player focuses on the content of the game play. In this case, with the configuration of feature H1 described above, even if a predetermined award trigger occurs and a predetermined bonus is awarded, a measurement standard trigger will not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the awarding of a predetermined bonus due to the occurrence of a predetermined award trigger from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H6, wherein the mode change means does not change the mode of determination of the duration of the game by the period determination means when the number of times the game has been played, measured by the specific measurement means since the occurrence of the measurement reference trigger, reaches the specific reference number of times in a specific situation (second high frequency support mode).

According to feature H7, in a specific situation, even if the number of play times executed after the occurrence of a measurement reference trigger reaches a specific reference number, the determination mode of the duration of a play time is not changed, so that it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of a play time from being changed in a situation in which it is not desirable to change the determination mode of the duration of a play time.

Feature H8. The mode change means changes the determination mode of the duration of the game in the period determination means based on the fact that the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the specific measurement means after the occurrence of the measurement standard trigger, has reached the specific reference number of times, so that the average duration of the game becomes longer than before;
The specific situation is a situation in which the determination manner of the duration of the game round in the period determination means is a determination manner in which the average duration of the game round is shorter than in a normal game state.

According to feature H8, when the number of play times executed after the occurrence of the measurement standard trigger reaches a specific reference number, the average duration of the play times becomes longer than before, which makes it possible to create a situation in which a flashy presentation is generated as the presentation of the play times. In this case, in a situation in which the average duration of the play times is shorter than in a normal play state, if the number of play times executed after the occurrence of the measurement standard trigger reaches a specific reference number, the determination method for the duration of the play times is not changed. This makes it possible to prioritize a situation in which the efficiency of the play times is high.

In addition, for the configuration of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment);
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A game round control means (function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) controls a game execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is performed in each game round, with the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment;
A period determination means for determining the duration of the game (a function for executing a process for determining the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment);
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
A predetermined transition means for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (a second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than another game state (a normal game state);
A specific measurement means (a variable selection state counter 132 in the eighth embodiment) for measuring the number of times the game is played;
A mode change means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1705 and S3512 of the master MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) for changing the determination mode of the duration of the game in the period determination means based on the fact that the number of times the game has been played, which is measured by the specific measurement means after the end of the predetermined game state, has reached a specific reference number (50 times in the eighth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature I1, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player when the special information corresponds to the award corresponding information, in a predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, the determination mode of the duration of the game rounds is changed based on the number of game rounds executed since the end of the predetermined game state reaching a specific reference number, so that it is possible to change the determination mode of the duration of the game rounds at the timing when the specific reference number of game rounds has been played since the end of the predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game rounds from becoming uniform, and to provide the player with an element of surprise.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, wherein the predetermined transition means transitions the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state without granting the bonus based on the result of the awarding determination being a predetermined corresponding result (time-saving result) in which the special information corresponds to the predetermined corresponding information.

According to feature I2, it is possible to create a situation in which the game state transitions to a specified game state without a bonus being awarded, based on the result of the awarding judgment. Furthermore, since the configuration of feature I1 is provided and the manner in which the duration of game rounds is determined is changed based on the number of game rounds executed since the end of the specified game state reaching a specific reference number, it is possible to change the manner in which the duration of game rounds is determined when the specific reference number of game rounds have been played since the end of the specified game state. This makes it possible to prevent the manner in which the duration of game rounds is determined from becoming uniform, and to provide an element of surprise to the player.

Feature I3. The gaming machine described in Feature I1 or I2, wherein the mode change means changes the determination mode of the duration of the game round in the period determination means based on the fact that the number of times the game round has been executed, measured by the specific measurement means, since the end of the predetermined game state, has reached the specific reference number, so that the average duration of the game round becomes longer than before.

According to feature I3, when the number of play times executed after the end of a predetermined game state reaches a specific reference number, the average duration of the play times becomes longer than before. Therefore, when a predetermined game state occurs, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of the play times thereafter, and it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being awarded in a short period of time.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I3, wherein the mode change means does not change the determination mode of the duration of the game in the period determination means when the number of times the game is executed, measured by the specific measurement means, after the end of the predetermined game state, reaches the specific reference number of times, which is a specific situation (second high frequency support mode).

According to feature I4, in a specific situation, even if the number of play times executed after the end of a specified game state reaches a specific reference number, the determination mode of the duration of a play time is not changed, so that it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of a play time from being changed in a situation in which it is not desirable to change the determination mode of the duration of a play time.

Feature I5. The mode change means changes the determination mode of the duration of the game in the period determination means based on the fact that the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the specific measurement means after the end of the predetermined game state, has reached the specific reference number of times, so that the average duration of the game becomes longer than before;
The specific situation is a situation in which the determination manner of the duration of the game round in the period determination means is a determination manner in which the average duration of the game round is shorter than in a normal game state.

According to feature I5, when the number of play times executed after the end of a specified game state reaches a specific reference number, the average duration of the play times becomes longer than before, which makes it possible to create a situation in which a flashy presentation is generated as the presentation of the play times. In this case, in a situation in which the average duration of the play times is shorter than in the normal game state, if the number of play times executed after the end of a specified game state reaches a specific reference number, the determination method for the duration of the play times is not changed. This makes it possible to prioritize a situation in which the efficiency of playing times is high.

In addition, for the configuration of features I1 to I5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristic Group J>
Feature J1. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the ninth embodiment) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) of whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) controls a game execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is performed in each game round, with the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
A predetermined state setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3604 and S3705 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for setting the game state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state) without granting the bonus based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition opportunity (time-saving result, ceiling time-saving),
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the manner in which the predetermined game state is executed thereafter can differ depending on the game situation in which the predetermined transition trigger occurs.

According to feature J1, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player when the special information corresponds to the award corresponding information, when the predetermined game state is in effect, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when the game state is in another game state. Thus, the predetermined game state becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player. Also, when the predetermined game state is entered based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger, the predetermined game state is entered without any bonus being awarded. This makes it possible to provide an element of surprise to the player. In this case, the execution mode of the subsequent predetermined game state may differ depending on the game situation in which the predetermined transition trigger occurred. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the predetermined game state, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature J2. A gaming machine as described in Feature J1, characterized in that the manner in which the predetermined gaming state is subsequently executed may differ between when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state and when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a situation other than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature J2, depending on whether or not a predetermined transition trigger occurs in a predetermined gaming state, the transition manner of the subsequent predetermined gaming state may differ, so it is possible to draw the player's attention not only to whether or not a predetermined transition trigger occurs, but also to whether or not a predetermined transition trigger occurs in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature J3. The predetermined game state includes a first predetermined game state (first high frequency support mode) and a second predetermined game state (second high frequency support mode) in which the frequency at which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state is different from that of the first predetermined game state;
The predetermined state setting means
A first predetermined state setting means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3603 of the master MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for continuing the first predetermined gaming state when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state;
A second predetermined state setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3604 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for setting the subsequent gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a gaming state other than the first predetermined gaming state;
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature J3, the existence of a first predetermined game state as a predetermined game state and a second predetermined game state which differs from the first predetermined game state in the frequency with which the predetermined ball entry means is opened makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined game states are executed. Furthermore, if a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined game state, the first predetermined game state continues, and if a predetermined transition trigger occurs in a game state that is not the second predetermined game state, the subsequent game state is the second predetermined game state. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined game state.

Feature J4. A gaming machine as described in Feature J3, characterized in that the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state more frequently in the first predetermined gaming state than in the second predetermined gaming state.

According to feature J4, in a configuration in which the predetermined ball entry means is opened more frequently in the first predetermined game state than in the second predetermined game state, when a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined game state, the first predetermined game state is continued, making it possible to prioritize the continuation of the first predetermined game state, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature J5. The device is provided with a means for terminating the predetermined game state based on the number of times the game has been played in the predetermined game state reaching a reference number of times (first time-shortening continuation number, second time-shortening continuation number) (a function for executing a subtraction process of the time-shortening state counter 134 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
The predetermined state setting means is configured to set the end reference number of times of the predetermined game state to a predetermined number (a first time-shortening continuation number, a second time-shortening continuation number) when the predetermined game state is transitioned to the predetermined game state based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger,
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J4, characterized in that when the specified transition trigger occurs in the specified gaming state, it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3605 to S3610 and steps S3706 to S3708 of the main MPU 82 in the 9th embodiment) that sets the remaining number of times required to reach the termination reference number of the specified gaming state at that time and the greater of the specified number of times to the termination reference number of the subsequent specified gaming state.

According to feature J5, when a predetermined transition trigger occurs in a predetermined gaming state, it is possible to set the reference number of times for ending the subsequent predetermined gaming state to a number that is advantageous to the player.

Feature J6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J1 to J5, characterized in that the predetermined transition trigger occurs based on the result of the award determination being a predetermined corresponding result (time-saving result) in which the special information corresponds to the predetermined corresponding information.

Feature J6 makes it possible to create a situation in which the gaming state transitions to a specified gaming state without awarding a bonus based on the result of the bonus award determination. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature J7: A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is played;
A number of times update means for updating the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game is executed (a function for executing the process of step S3703 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that the specified transition trigger occurs when the number of times the game has been played as measured by the specified measurement means reaches a specified trigger number (fixed ceiling number).

According to feature J7, a predetermined game state is entered when the number of game plays measured by a predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number, so it is possible to transition the game state to a predetermined game state in response to repeated play plays. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

In addition, for the configuration of features J1 to J7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group H, feature group I, and feature group J can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. An acquisition means for acquiring special information (first reserved information, second reserved information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition trigger (in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S704 and S709 in the main MPU 82, in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2803 and S2806 in the main MPU 82, and in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S3801 and S3901 in the main MPU 82);
A predetermined judgment means (a function of executing the judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for making a predetermined judgment (correct/incorrect judgment process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information;
A predetermined benefit granting means (a function of executing a setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that grants a predetermined benefit (a second high-frequency support mode) to a player based on the result of the predetermined judgment being a predetermined corresponding result (a time-saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined corresponding information;
A predetermined display control means (a function of executing a special pattern change start process, a special pattern change process, and a special pattern determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) controls the display of the predetermined display means (the first special pattern display unit 37a, the second special pattern display unit 37b) so that the predetermined pattern change display is performed in each game round, with the start of a change display of the predetermined pattern and the end of the change display of the predetermined pattern as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the predetermined judgment being counted as one game round;
A specific display control means (sound/light side MPU 93, display side MPU 103) that controls the display of the specific display means (pattern display device 41) so that a variable display of a specific pattern (pattern of the pattern row Z1 to Z3) is executed during the game round;
Equipped with
The predetermined display means has a display range narrower than that of the specific display means,
The predetermined benefit granting means grants the predetermined benefit based on the result of the predetermined judgment being the predetermined corresponding result in a grantable situation (normal game state in the first to eighth embodiments, and normal game state or time-saving state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments) that is not a restricted situation (high probability state or time-saving state in the first to eighth embodiments, and high probability state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments), and does not grant the predetermined benefit when the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result in the restricted situation;
The predetermined display control means displays a predetermined stop result ("4" or "5") as a stop result of the variable display of the predetermined pattern on the predetermined display means when the result of the predetermined judgment becomes the predetermined corresponding result, regardless of whether the situation is the award possible situation or the restricted situation,
The specific display control means
When the result of the predetermined judgment in the award possible situation becomes the predetermined corresponding result, a specific stop result ("1.23" or "3.4.1") is displayed as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern in the specific display means (a function of executing the process of step S1408 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments);
A limiting response means (a function for executing the process of step S1410 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for displaying a predetermined miss result (a combination of non-missing symbols) that can be displayed when the result of the predetermined judgment is a miss result as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific symbols in the specific display means when the result of the predetermined judgment is the miss result in the limited situation;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature K1, a predetermined benefit is awarded based on the result of a predetermined judgment being a predetermined corresponding result, so the player will expect the result of the predetermined judgment to be the predetermined corresponding result. In addition, a predetermined benefit is awarded based on the result of a predetermined judgment being a predetermined corresponding result in a situation in which it is possible to award the benefit, whereas in a restricted situation, even if the result of a predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result, the predetermined benefit is not awarded. This makes it possible to limit the circumstances in which a predetermined benefit is awarded.

In this case, in the specific display means having a wider display range than the predetermined display means, when the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result in an award possible situation, a specific stop result is displayed as the result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern, whereas when the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result in a restricted situation, a predetermined miss result that can be displayed when the result of the predetermined judgment is a miss result is displayed as the result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern. This makes it possible to make it noticeable that the predetermined benefit will be awarded when the predetermined benefit is awarded, and to make it less noticeable when the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result but the predetermined benefit is not awarded.

On the other hand, in the predetermined display means, when the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result, whether in a grantable situation or a restricted situation, the predetermined stop result is displayed as the result of stopping the variable display of the predetermined pattern. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to easily visually confirm that the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result. Also, because the predetermined display means has a narrower display range than the specific display means, even if the predetermined stop result is displayed on the predetermined display means in a restricted situation, it is difficult for the player to notice that the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined corresponding result in a restricted situation.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, characterized in that the specific display control means includes a display difference means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1413 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that causes the display content of the special display area (state suggestion area 43) in the specific display means to differ between when the result of the specific judgment in the restricted situation is the specific corresponding result and when the result of the specific judgment is the miss result.

According to feature K2, even if a predetermined miss result is displayed as a result of stopping the variable display of a specific pattern on the specific display means when a predetermined judgment results in a predetermined response result in a restricted situation, the display content in the special display area of the specific display means will be different from the display content when the predetermined judgment results in a miss result, so that when a predetermined miss result is displayed on the specific display means, the manager of the amusement hall can understand from the display content of the specific display means whether or not it is triggered by a predetermined response result in a restricted situation.

Feature K3. As the predetermined response results, at least a first predetermined response result (first time-saving result) and a second predetermined response result (second time-saving result) exist;
the predetermined benefit granting means grants a different content of the predetermined benefit when the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result and when the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined response result,
the predetermined display control means causes the content of the predetermined stop result to differ between a case where the result of the predetermined judgment is the first predetermined response result and a case where the result of the predetermined judgment is the second predetermined response result,
The grant possible response means changes the content of the specific stop result between a case where the result of the predetermined determination in the grant possible situation is the first predetermined response result and a case where the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined response result,
The restriction response means displays the predetermined out-of-prescribed result as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific symbol on the specific display means, regardless of whether the result of the predetermined judgment in the restriction situation is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result,
The gaming machine described in feature K2 is characterized in that the display difference means makes the display content of the special display area different when the result of the specified judgment in the restricted situation is the first specified response result and when the result is the second specified response result.

According to feature K3, when the result of the predetermined judgment is the first predetermined response result and when the result is the second predetermined response result in a grantable situation, the content of the specific stop result, which is the result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern on the specific display means, is different, so that the content of the specific bonus to be granted thereafter can be suggested to the player by the content of the specific stop result. On the other hand, when the result of the predetermined judgment is either the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in a restricted situation, the predetermined failure result is displayed as the result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern on the specific display means, so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined response result has been reached, including the type of the predetermined response result. Even in this case, the display content of the special display area on the specific display means is different when the result of the predetermined judgment is the first predetermined response result and when the result is the second predetermined response result, so that the manager of the game hall can understand from the display content of the specific display means whether the failure result is triggered by which of the predetermined response results in the restricted situation when it is displayed on the specific display means.

Feature K4. The gaming machine described in Feature K2 or K3, characterized in that the display range of the special display area on the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area on the specific display means in which the specific pattern is displayed.

According to feature K4, even if the display content of the special display area on the specific display means is configured to be different from the display content when the result of the specified judgment in a restricted situation is a specified corresponding result, since the display range of the special display area on the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area on the specific display means where the specific pattern is displayed, it is possible to make the special display area less noticeable to the player.

Feature K5. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The acquisition opportunity is generated based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that the specified bonus awarding means, as a means for awarding the specified bonus, transitions the gaming state to a specified gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to reach the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature K5, special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a transition to a predetermined game state can be made if the special information corresponds to the predetermined corresponding information. When in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in another game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature K6. The specific benefit granting means (functions of executing the special call start process, the special call open process, the special call close process, and the special call end process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) is provided to grant a special benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the predetermined judgment being a grant corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the grant corresponding information;
The gaming machine described in feature K5 is characterized in that the specified bonus granting means transitions the gaming state to the specified gaming state without granting the specific bonus based on the result of the specified judgment being the specified corresponding result.

According to feature K6, when the result of the predetermined judgment is a predetermined corresponding result, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state without the specific benefit being awarded. This makes it possible to provide an element of surprise to the player.

Feature K7. The specific benefit granting means (functions of executing the special call start process, the special call open process, the special call close process, and the special call end process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) grants a special benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the predetermined judgment being a grant corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the grant corresponding information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that the restricted situation is a specific gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability that the result of the specified judgment will be the corresponding result is higher than in another gaming state.

According to feature K7, in a specific game state in which the probability that the result of a predetermined judgment will be a corresponding result for granting is higher than in another game state, it is possible to prevent a predetermined benefit from being granted even if the result of a predetermined judgment is a corresponding result for granting. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features K can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

However, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to ensure that play is carried out smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A first acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) for acquiring first special information (first reserved information) based on the occurrence of a first acquisition opportunity (entry of a game ball into the first operating port 33);
A first granting determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S4005 in the special chart fluctuation start processing in the first special chart special electric control processing of the master MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) that executes a first granting determination of whether the first special information corresponds to the granting of a specific benefit (opening/closing execution mode) (step S4005 in the special chart fluctuation start processing in the first special chart special electric control processing of the master MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
A first game control means (a function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the first special chart special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) causes the first game execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a) to execute the first game operation in each game time triggered by the first special information, with the first game operation being started and the first game operation being ended as a state corresponding to the result of the first award determination being counted as one game time;
A second acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3901 of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) for acquiring second special information (second reserved information) based on the occurrence of a second acquisition opportunity (entry of a game ball into the special winning device 151);
A second grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4005 in the special chart fluctuation start process in the second special chart special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) for executing a second grant determination as to whether the second special information corresponds to the grant of the specific benefit or not;
A second game control means (a function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the second special chart special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) causes the second game execution means (the second special chart display unit 37b) to execute the second game execution process in each game cycle triggered by the second special information, with the second game execution means (the second special chart display unit 37b) executing a second game cycle operation when the second game cycle operation is started and the second game cycle operation is ended as a state corresponding to the result of the second awarding judgment, which is counted as one game cycle;
A predetermined transition means for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (time-saving state) (a function for executing the setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing a process of determining the termination of the time-shortening state of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the total number of times of the games triggered by the first special information and the games triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined gaming state has reached a termination trigger number (a first time-shortening continuation number, a second time-shortening continuation number);
Equipped with
At least a part of a period during which a game is being played triggered by the first special information and at least a part of a period during which a game is being played triggered by the second special information may overlap,
The predetermined termination means terminates the predetermined game state after the end of the other game round that was started before the start of one of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information, even if the total number of times becomes the termination trigger number when the one of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information has ended, if the other game round that was started before the start of the one of the game rounds is in progress.

According to feature L1, the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information can be executed in overlapping fashion, which makes it possible to increase the overall frequency of execution of game times. In this case, even if the total number of times reaches the end trigger number when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is finished, if the other game time that started before the one game time is started is in the middle of the other game time, the specified game state ends after the other game time ends. As a result, the number of game times executed until the specified game state ends varies depending on the duration of the game time that started when the total number of times in the specified game state is one less than the end trigger number, as well as the start timing and duration of the game time triggered by the special information on the side other than the special information that triggered the said game time, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Feature L2. The gaming machine described in Feature L1 is characterized by having a period determination means (a function for executing a process for determining the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) that makes the average duration of the game times triggered by the second special information shorter than the average duration of the game times triggered by the first special information in the specified game state.

According to feature L2, by repeating a game round triggered by the second special information, which has a relatively short average duration of a game round in a specified game state, it is possible to increase the efficiency of playing times. On the other hand, in a situation where the total number of times in a specified game state is one less than the end trigger number, a game round triggered by the first special information, which has a relatively long average duration of a game round, is started, so that the specified game state continues until the game round triggered by the first special information ends. Then, by executing a game round triggered by the second special information while a game round triggered by the first special information is being executed, it is possible to make the total number of game rounds executed in the specified game state greater than the end trigger number.

Feature L3. The gaming machine described in Feature L2, characterized in that the period determination means includes a means for determining by lottery the duration of a game session triggered by the first special information that was started in a situation in which the total number of times in the specified gaming state is one less than the termination trigger number (a function for executing the processing of steps S4809 to S4811 of the main MPU 82 in the 12th embodiment).

According to feature L3, when a game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in a specified game state is one less than the number of times that triggers the end, the duration of that game round is determined by lottery, so a player who wants to maximize the number of game rounds executed in the specified game state will hope that a long period will be selected as the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information.

Feature L4. A first ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the first area (left area PA2);
A second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second area (right area PA3);
Equipped with
The first acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the second acquisition trigger occurs when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means.

According to feature L4, the player can select whether to execute a game round triggered by the first special information or a game round triggered by the second special information in a predetermined game state. In particular, in a configuration having feature L2 or L3, the game round triggered by the second special information is repeated until the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number, and when the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number, the game round triggered by the first special information is executed, and after the game round triggered by the first special information is started, the game round triggered by the second special information is executed, thereby making it possible to execute as many game rounds as possible before the predetermined game state ends.

Feature L5. A predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the specified gaming state is a gaming state in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature L5, in a configuration in which second special information is obtained based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and whether or not the second special information corresponds to the granting of a specific benefit is determined, when in a predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in a different gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features L1 to L5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features L can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A first acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the 11th and 12th embodiments) for acquiring first special information (first reserved information) based on the occurrence of a first acquisition trigger (entry of a game ball into the first operating port 33);
A first granting determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S4005 in the special chart fluctuation start processing in the first special chart special electric control processing of the master MPU 82 in the 11th and 12th embodiments) that executes a first granting determination of whether the first special information corresponds to the granting of a specific benefit (opening/closing execution mode) or not (step S4005 in the special chart fluctuation start processing in the first special chart special electric control processing of the master MPU 82 in the 11th and 12th embodiments);
A first game control means (a function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the first special chart special electric control process of the master MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) causes the first game execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a) to execute the first game operation in each game time triggered by the first special information, with the first game operation being started and the first game operation being ended as a state corresponding to the result of the first award determination being counted as one game time;
A second acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3901 of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) for acquiring second special information (second reserved information) based on the occurrence of a second acquisition opportunity (entry of a game ball into the special winning device 151);
A second granting determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S4005 in the special chart fluctuation start processing in the second special chart special electric control processing of the master MPU 82 in the 11th and 12th embodiments) for executing a second granting determination of whether the second special information corresponds to the granting of the specific benefit or not;
A second game control means (a function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the second special chart special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the 11th and 12th embodiments) causes the second game execution means (the second special chart display unit 37b) to execute the second game operation in each game time triggered by the second special information, with the second game operation being started and the second game operation being ended as a state corresponding to the result of the second award determination being counted as one game time;
A predetermined transition means for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (time-saving state) (a function for executing a setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 and a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments);
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing a process of determining the termination of the time-shortening state of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the total number of times of the games triggered by the first special information and the games triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined gaming state has reached a termination trigger number (a first time-shortening continuation number, a second time-shortening continuation number);
A period determination means for making the average duration of the game times triggered by the second special information in the specified game state shorter than the average duration of the game times triggered by the first special information (a function for executing the processes of steps S4710 to S4713 of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S4812 to S4815 of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment);
Equipped with
At least a part of a period during which a game is being played triggered by the first special information and at least a part of a period during which a game is being played triggered by the second special information may overlap,
The predetermined ending means ends the predetermined game state after the end of the other game round that was started before the start of one of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information, even if the total number of times reaches the end trigger number when the game round is ended, if the other game round that was started before the start of the one of the game rounds is in progress,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the period determination means is equipped with a short-term selection means (in the 11th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4709 of the main MPU 82, and in the 12th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4809 to S4811 of the main MPU 82) that makes the duration of a game triggered by the first special information, which is started in a situation in which the total number of times in the specified game state is one less than the termination trigger number, shorter than or more likely to be a shorter period than the duration of a game triggered by the first special information, which is started in another situation in the specified game state.

According to feature M1, a game round triggered by the first special information and a game round triggered by the second special information can be executed in an overlapping manner, which makes it possible to increase the overall frequency of game rounds. In addition, by repeating a game round triggered by the second special information, which has a relatively short average duration in a given game state, it is possible to increase the efficiency of game rounds.

In this case, even if the total number of times becomes the end trigger number when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game time triggered by the second special information has ended, if the other game time that started before the one game time started is in the middle of the game, the specified game state will end after the other game time has ended. This makes it possible to continue the specified game state until the game time that triggered the end of the specified game state has ended.

However, in this configuration, if a game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the specified game state is one less than the end trigger number, the game round triggered by the second special information may be repeatedly executed until the game round triggered by the first special information is finished, and the actual total number of times of the game rounds executed in the specified game state may become extremely greater than the end trigger number. In contrast, the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information that is started in a situation where the total number of times in the specified game state is one less than the end trigger number is shorter or tends to be shorter than the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information that is started in another situation in the specified game state. This makes it possible to prevent the actual total number of times of the game rounds executed in the specified game state from becoming extremely greater than the end trigger number.

Feature M2. The gaming machine described in Feature M1, characterized in that the short-term selection means sets the duration of a game in which the first special information is triggered and which is started in a situation in which the total number of times in the specified gaming state is one less than the termination trigger number, to a duration equal to or shorter than the duration selected for a game in which the second special information is triggered in the specified gaming state.

According to feature M2, the duration of a game in a specified game state triggered by first special information that is started when the total number of times is one less than the termination trigger number is equal to or less than the duration selected for a game in a specified game state triggered by second special information, so that it is possible to prevent the actual total number of times that a game is executed in the specified game state from being greater than the termination trigger number.

Feature M3. A first ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the first area (left area PA2);
A second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second area (right area PA3);
Equipped with
The first acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means,
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, characterized in that the second acquisition trigger occurs when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means.

Feature M3 allows the player to select whether to execute a game round triggered by the first special information or a game round triggered by the second special information in a given game state.

Feature M4. A predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the 11th and 12th embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features M1 to M3, characterized in that the specified gaming state is a gaming state in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature M4, in a configuration in which second special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and whether or not the second special information corresponds to the granting of a specific benefit is determined, when in a predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features M1 to M4, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features M can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

However, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to ensure that play is carried out smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. A control unit (main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes various predetermined processes (specific control processes),
An information storage means (main RAM 84 in the thirteenth embodiment) into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed by the control means;
Equipped with
The information storage means includes:
A first storage area (a work area 211 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
A second storage area (an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5) in the thirteenth embodiment) which is continuous with the first storage area in the address of the information storage means and into which no information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
a third storage area (a stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) that is continuous with the second storage area in terms of addresses of the information storage means and into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an erasure execution means (a function of executing the RAM clear process of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment) that executes an information erasure process (RAM clear process) on the memory area of the information storage means including the first memory area, the second memory area and the third memory area when a specified information erasure trigger occurs (a negative judgment in step S4918, or execution of a setting value update process).

According to feature N1, a first storage area and a third storage area are provided as storage areas into which information is written when various predetermined processes are executed in the control means, and it is possible to use the first storage area and the third storage area as the storage area into which information is written depending on the role. In addition, a second storage area is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area in the address of the information storage means, and information is not written to the second storage area when various predetermined processes are executed, so it is possible to clearly distinguish between the first storage area and the third storage area in the address of the information storage means.

In this case, when a specified information erasure trigger occurs, the information erasure process is executed not only for the first and third storage areas that are used when the specified various processes are executed, but also for the second storage area that is not used when the specified various processes are executed. This makes it possible to execute the information erasure process by collectively specifying the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area that are consecutive in the address of the information storage means, rather than individually specifying the first storage area and the third storage area to execute the information erasure process. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration when executing the information erasure process.

Feature N2. The gaming machine described in Feature N1, characterized in that the erasure execution means executes the information erasure process on a memory area in the information storage means in a continuous address range from a predetermined address (address Y(3)) in the first memory area to a specific address (address Y(s+1)) in the third memory area.

According to feature N2, even if a second storage area is provided as an unused area between the first storage area and the third storage area, it is only necessary to execute the information erasure process on a storage area in a series of addresses ranging from a specified address in the first storage area to a specific address in the third storage area, so that the processing configuration when executing the information erasure process can be simplified.

Feature N3: A predetermined disable setting means for setting a predetermined disable state so that information is not written to the second storage area (a function for executing the processes of steps S4903 and S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A predetermined disable canceling means (a function of executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that cancels the predetermined disable setting when the information erasing process is executed;
A gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature N3, the specified prohibition setting prevents information from being written to the second storage area, making it possible to prevent information from being written to the second storage area by mistake. In this case, when the information erasure process is executed, the specified prohibition setting is deliberately released. As a result, in a configuration in which information is prevented from being written to the second storage area by mistake, it becomes possible to specify the consecutive first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area together in the address of the information storage means and execute the information erasure process.

Feature N4. The gaming machine described in Feature N3, wherein the predetermined disable setting means performs the predetermined disable setting after the information erasure process is executed.

According to feature N4, even if the specified disable setting is released when the information erasure process is executed, the specified disable setting is performed after the information erasure process is executed. This makes it possible to once again restore a state in which information is not erroneously written to the second storage area after the information erasure process is executed.

Feature N5. The gaming machine described in Feature N3 or N4, wherein the predetermined disable setting means performs the predetermined disable setting when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature N5, a predetermined disable setting is performed when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, so that it is possible to prevent information from being written to the second memory area by mistake before game play begins.

Feature N6: A predetermined setting area (protect register 223c) that becomes one of the binary information when the predetermined disable setting is performed and becomes the other of the binary information when the predetermined disable setting is released,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (RAM management circuit 225) for excluding the second memory area from the target for writing information when the information in the specified setting area is one of the information.

According to feature N6, to set a specific prohibited setting, the information in the specific setting area is set as one of the binary information values, and to cancel the specific prohibited setting, the information in the specific setting area is set as the other of the binary information values. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting a specific prohibited setting and the processing load for canceling the specific prohibited setting.

Feature N7. The control means is
A predetermined control execution means for executing the predetermined various processes (a function for executing a specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A separate control execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing various other processes (non-specific control processing);
Equipped with
The information storage means includes a fourth storage area (a work area 213 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) into which information is written when the other various processes are executed,
When the predetermined various processes are executed, information is written to the first storage area and the third storage area, but when the other various processes are executed, information is not written to the first storage area and the third storage area,
The fourth storage area is configured to write information when the other various processes are executed, but is not configured to write information when the predetermined various processes are executed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features N1 to N6, characterized in that the erasure execution means does not execute the information erasure process on the fourth memory area when the specified information erasure trigger occurs.

According to feature N7, when the control means executes various predetermined processes, the first and third storage areas in the information storage means are targets for writing information, and when the control means executes other various processes, the fourth storage area in the information storage means is a target for writing information. This makes it possible to distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written depending on the type of process executed by the control means. In this case, when a predetermined information erasure trigger occurs, in a configuration in which the information erasure process is executed including the second storage area, which is an unused area, when the predetermined various processes are executed, the information erasure process is not executed for the fourth storage area. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first and third storage areas and the fourth storage area in terms of the targets for executing the information erasure process in a configuration in which the information erasure process is executed including the second storage area to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature N8: A predetermined disable setting means for setting a predetermined disable state so that information is not written to the second storage area (a function for executing the processes of steps S4903 and S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A predetermined disable canceling means (a function for executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for canceling the predetermined disable setting when the information erasing process is executed;
Another erasing means (a function for executing an information anomaly monitoring process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing an information erasing process for the fourth storage area when a specific information erasing opportunity (a positive determination in step S7602) occurs;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature N7, characterized in that when the information erasure process is executed on the fourth memory area by the separate erasure means, the specified disable setting is not released.

According to feature N8, in a configuration in which an information erasure process is not executed for the fourth storage area when a specific information erasure trigger occurs, an information erasure process is executed for the fourth storage area when a specific information erasure trigger occurs. This makes it possible to execute an information erasure process for the fourth storage area as well. In this case, when the information erasure process is executed, the specified disallowed setting is not released. This makes it possible to prevent the specified disallowed setting from being released in a situation in which an information erasure process is not executed for the second storage area.

In addition, for the configuration of features N1 to N8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features N can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be executed appropriately by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1. Means for executing a profit awarding process (step S805 of the master MPU 82) in a manner corresponding to a set value corresponding to the player's advantage degree (function for executing the process of step S805 of the master MPU 82);
A situation generating means (a function of making a positive determination in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for making it possible to set the setting value to be used (a situation in which the setting value update process in the thirteenth embodiment is executed);
a history storage execution means (a function of executing the normal ball entry management process of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for storing game history information corresponding to a specific event (entry of a game ball into the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34) in the history storage means (normal counter area 251) when a specific event occurs as a result of the execution of a game;
An information deriving means (a function of executing the result calculation process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
A mode notification control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process and a display process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls a mode notification means (the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the mode information derived by the information derivation means is notified;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode information can be notified by the mode notifying means even when the setting is possible.

According to feature O1, since the setting value to be used is set, the player will expect that a more advantageous setting value will be set. In addition, when a specific event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive behavior information corresponding to the results of the game, and the derived behavior information is notified. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a specific event. In this case, the behavior information can be notified by the behavior notifying means even if the setting is possible. This makes it possible to set the setting value in a behavior corresponding to the specific event while checking the content of the notified behavior information. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the gaming machine.

Feature O2. A gaming machine according to Feature O1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling a setting notification means (setting display device 205) so that the setting value is notified in the setting possible situation (a function for executing the processing of step S7203 and steps S7207 to S7212 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment).

According to feature O2, when a setting is possible, the setting notification means notifies the setting value, and the mode notification means notifies the mode information. This allows the amusement hall manager to carry out setting work while checking the content of the mode information notified by the mode notification means until the desired setting value based on the content of the mode information is notified by the setting notification means. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency for setting the desired setting value based on the content of the mode information.

Feature O3. The gaming machine described in Feature O2, characterized in that the setting notification means is mounted on the mounting surface (the element mounting surface of the main control board 81) on which the mode notification means is mounted.

According to feature O3, since the setting notification means is mounted on the mounting surface on which the mode notification means is mounted, it becomes easy to check both the content of the mode information notified by the mode notification means and the setting value notified by the setting notification means.

Feature O4: The situation generating means causes the setting possible situation to occur based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger (both the pressing of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 195, and the setting update display flag being set to "1") when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine described in any one of features O1 to O3, characterized in that the mode notification control means starts a notification corresponding to the mode information when the supply of operating power is started and the settable state occurs, and when the settable state begins.

According to feature O4, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting is possible based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger, so in order to set the setting value, it becomes necessary to start the supply of operating power again. This makes it possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started and the setting is possible, a notification corresponding to the mode information is initiated when the setting possible state begins. This makes it possible to prevent a notification corresponding to the mode information from being initiated before the amusement hall manager begins work to set the setting value.

Feature O5. A check control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4926 and S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) is provided to cause the mode notification means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether an abnormality has occurred in the mode notification means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, wherein the check control means starts the check display in the mode notification means when the settable state ends.

According to feature O5, a check display is provided that allows confirmation of whether an abnormality has occurred in the mode notification means, and the manager of the gaming hall can identify whether an abnormality has occurred in the mode notification means by checking the check display. In this case, if a settable state occurs, the check display is started when the settable state ends. This makes it possible to prioritize the mode notification means' notification of the mode information in a settable state over the check display of the mode notification means.

Feature O6: The situation generating means causes the setting possible situation to occur based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger (both the pressing of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 195, and the setting update display flag being set to "1") when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine described in feature O5 is characterized in that, when a predetermined situation occurs in which the setting is not possible when the supply of operating power is started (a situation in which the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed), the mode notification control means starts a notification corresponding to the mode information after the check display has ended (when the execution of the second timer interrupt process is permitted in step S4932 of the main processing in the 13th embodiment, thereby starting the notification of the base value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to feature O6, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting becomes possible based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger, so in order to set the setting value, it becomes necessary to start the supply of operating power again. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value. In this case, if a specified situation occurs in which the setting is not possible when the supply of operating power is started, a notification corresponding to the mode information is started after the check display ends. This makes it possible to prioritize the check display over the start of a notification corresponding to the mode information when the setting is not possible.

Feature O7. The device includes a behavior information storage unit (the calculation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) that stores a plurality of the behavior information derived by the information derivation unit,
The mode notification control means includes:
A sequential notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S7408 to S7414 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls the mode notification means so that notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the mode information storage means are sequentially executed;
a notification restart means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7419 and S7420 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for controlling the mode notification means so that, when the check display following the end of the setting possible state ends, notification is executed from the mode information of the type that was the subject of notification immediately before the start of the check display;
A gaming machine according to feature O5 or O6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature O7, the mode notification means sequentially issues notifications corresponding to the multiple mode information items, allowing the amusement hall manager to grasp the contents of the multiple mode information items by checking the mode notification means. In this case, when the check display after the end of the settable state ends, a notification is issued from the type of mode information that was the subject of notification immediately before the check display began. As a result, after the check display ends, the amusement hall manager can check the contents of the type of mode information that was interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Feature O8. The sequential notification control means changes the type of the aspect information to be notified based on the lapse of a predetermined notification duration (display duration),
The gaming machine described in feature O7 is characterized in that, when the check display following the end of the settable status ends, a notification is executed from the status information of the type that was the target of the notification just before the check display was started, and the notification corresponding to the status information of that type is executed for the specified notification duration regardless of the remaining specified notification duration when the check display was started.

According to feature O8, when the check display following the end of the settable status ends, a notification is executed from the type of behavior information that was the subject of notification immediately before the check display began, and notification of that type of behavior information is executed for a predetermined notification duration period after the check display ends. This makes it possible to ensure that, after the check display ends, the amusement hall manager has ample opportunity to check the content of the type of behavior information that was interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

In addition, for the configuration of features O1 to O8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group O can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. A display object storage means (the calculation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing a plurality of display object information (base values);
a predetermined display control means (function of executing a second timer interrupt process and a display process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls a predetermined display means (the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for annunciation) so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of display target information stored in the display target storage means is executed in sequence, and changes the type of the display target information to be displayed based on the lapse of a predetermined display duration (display duration);
Equipped with
The specified display control means causes the display to be executed from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the start of a specified situation when a specified situation in which a display corresponding to the display target information is not performed ends, and the gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a display resume means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7419 and S7420 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment) that causes the display corresponding to the type of display target information to be executed for the specified display duration regardless of the remaining specified display duration when the specified situation begins.

According to feature P1, the predetermined display means sequentially displays each of the multiple pieces of display target information, and the type of display target information to be displayed changes based on the lapse of a predetermined display duration, so that the manager of the amusement hall can grasp the contents of the multiple pieces of display target information by checking the predetermined display means. In this case, when the predetermined situation ends, the display is started from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the start of the predetermined situation, and the display of that type of display target information is executed for the predetermined display duration after the end of the predetermined situation. This makes it possible to ensure that, after the end of the predetermined situation, the manager of the amusement hall has a sufficient opportunity to check the contents of the type of display target information that was interrupted by the occurrence of the predetermined situation.

Feature P2: A separate display control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4926 and S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for causing the predetermined display means to perform a separate display different from the display corresponding to the display target information is provided;
the predetermined situation is a situation in which the separate display is being performed,
The display restart means, when the separate display is ended, executes the display from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the separate display was started, so that the display corresponding to that type of display target information is executed for the specified display duration regardless of the remaining specified display duration when the separate display was started.

According to feature P2, when a situation arises in which a separate display is to be performed on the specified display means, the display corresponding to the display target information is not performed, so that the separate display can be given priority. In this case, when the separate display ends, the display is executed starting with the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the separate display started, and the display of that type of display target information is executed for a specified display duration period after the end of the separate display. This makes it possible to ensure that, after the end of the separate display, the manager of the amusement hall has ample opportunity to check the content of the type of display target information that was interrupted by the occurrence of the separate display.

Feature P3. The gaming machine described in Feature P2, wherein the separate display control means causes the specified display means to display a check display as the separate display, which allows the user to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the specified display means.

According to feature P3, a check display is provided that allows confirmation of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specified display means, and the manager of the amusement hall can identify whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specified display means by checking the check display. In this case, with the configuration of feature P1 described above, when the check display ends, the display is started from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the check display started, and the display of that type of display target information is continued for a specified display duration period after the check display ends. This makes it possible to ensure that, after the check display ends, the manager of the amusement hall has a sufficient opportunity to check the content of the type of display target information that was interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Feature P4: The predetermined display control means is
When the supply of operating power is started and the first situation (the situation in which the setting value update process is executed) occurs, a means for starting the display of the display target information before the check display is started (a function for executing the process of step S5101 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
When the supply of operating power is started and the second situation (a situation in which the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed) occurs, a means for starting the display of the display target information after the check display has ended without starting the display of the display target information until the check display has ended (a function for executing the process of step S4932 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature P3 is characterized by comprising:

Feature P4 makes it possible to cause the display of the display target information to start before the check display starts, or the display of the display target information to start after the check display ends, without starting until the check display ends, depending on the situation when the supply of operating power starts.

Feature P5: A means for executing a profit awarding process (step S805 of the master MPU 82) in a manner corresponding to a set value corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the process of step S805 of the master MPU 82);
a situation generating means (a function of making an affirmative judgment in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for causing a setting possible situation (a situation in which the setting value update process in the thirteenth embodiment is executed) in which it is possible to set the setting value to be used before the check display is started, based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger (both the pressing of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 195 being performed, and the setting update display flag being set to "1") when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
the first condition occurs when the configurable condition occurs;
A gaming machine according to feature P4, characterized in that the second situation occurs when the settable situation does not occur.

According to feature P5, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set, the player will expect that a more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. In this case, if a settable situation occurs when the supply of operating power is started, the display of the display target information will start before the check display is started, and if a settable situation does not occur when the supply of operating power is started, the display of the display target information will not start until the check display ends, and will start after the check display ends. This makes it possible to display the display target information in a settable situation when a settable situation occurs, while starting the display of the display target information after the check display ends when a settable situation does not occur.

Feature P6. A history storage execution means (function for executing the normal ball entry management process of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for storing the history information of the game corresponding to a specific event (entry of a game ball into the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34) in the history storage means (normal counter area 251) when a specific event occurs due to the execution of a game,
An information deriving means (a function of executing the result calculation process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P5, characterized in that the information to be displayed is the aspect information.

According to feature P6, when a specific event occurs, corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive behavior information corresponding to the results of the game, and the derived behavior information is displayed. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a specific event. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described in feature P1 above.

In addition, for the configuration of features P1 to P6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features P can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the display on the specified display means is performed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Q group>
Feature Q1. A first process group execution means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the first process group (the specific control process);
A second process group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the second process group (the non-specific control process);
a first process corresponding storage area (a work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) into which information can be written and read when the processes of the first process group are executed, and into which information can be read but not written when the processes of the second process group are executed;
a second process corresponding storage area (a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the second process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the first process group are executed;
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means includes a means for executing an occurrence information storage process for storing predetermined event occurrence information (setting any one of the abnormality flags 213l to 213t to “1”) in the second processing corresponding storage area when a predetermined event (an event determined to be positive in step S6003, an event determined to be positive in step S6009, an event determined to be positive in step S6014, or an event determined to be positive in step S6505 by the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) occurs as a process of the second processing group (a function for executing the process of step S6004, step S6010, step S6015, or step S6506 by the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
The first process group execution means is a special process execution means (in the thirteenth embodiment, steps S6602, S6603, S6605, S6606, S6608, S6609, S6611, S6612, S6614, S6615, S6617, S6618, S6620 of the main MPU 82) that executes a special process when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area as the process of the first process group. , a function of executing the processing of step S6622 or step S6624, and in the fourteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S8006 by the main MPU 82, the processing of step S8013, the processing of making a positive judgment in step S8102, the processing of making a positive judgment in step S8105, the processing of making a positive judgment in step S8108, the processing of making a positive judgment in step S8111, the processing of making a positive judgment in step S8115, and the processing of making a positive judgment in step S8118.

According to feature Q1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the first processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the second processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written, and when the processing of the second processing group is executed, the second processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the first processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the first processing group is executed from the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the first processing corresponding storage area but also from the second processing corresponding storage area, and even when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the second processing corresponding storage area but also from the first processing corresponding storage area. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if the occurrence of a specified event is identified in the processing of the second processing group and specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area, a corresponding special process is executed in the processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a specified event as processing of the first processing group, even in a configuration in which the processing for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred is executed as processing of the second processing group rather than processing of the first processing group, thereby allowing for leeway in the processing that can be executed as processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to execute processing in the control means preferably.

Feature Q2. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a grant trigger process for identifying whether or not a privilege grant trigger has occurred as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620, or step S5622 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S7803, step S7805, step S7807, step S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815, or step S7817 of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the special processing is processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit specified in the opportunity processing.

According to feature Q2, the first processing group's processing of the award trigger process determines whether or not a bonus award trigger has occurred, and if the second processing group's processing of the occurrence information storage process determines that a specified event has occurred and stores the specified event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding memory area, the bonus award trigger is invalidated by the special processing process of the first processing group. This allows the process for determining whether or not a specified event has occurred to be executed as a process of the second processing group rather than as a process of the first processing group, allowing for some leeway in the processes that can be executed as a process of the first processing group, while consolidating the process for determining the occurrence of a bonus award trigger and the process for invalidating the bonus award trigger in the process of the first processing group.

Feature Q3. The first processing group execution means
As a process of the first process group, when it is determined in the award trigger process that an opportunity for awarding the privilege has occurred, a means for executing a reservation process for reserving the awarding of the privilege (a function for executing the processes of steps S8017 to S8018 or steps S8021 to S8022 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
As a process of the first process group, when the special process is not executed after the reservation process is executed, a means for executing a privilege granting process for granting the privilege reserved in the reservation process (a function for executing the process of step S8004 or step S8011 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature Q2 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q3, when the first processing group determines that a bonus-granting trigger has occurred, the granting of the bonus is temporarily withheld, and if the second processing group subsequently does not store the specified event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding memory area and the first processing group does not execute a process to invalidate the bonus-granting trigger, the first processing group grants the bonus that was temporarily withheld. This makes it possible to grant a bonus in response to a bonus-granting trigger when a specified event has not occurred, and to invalidate the bonus-granting trigger when a specified event has occurred, so that the bonus is not granted, even if the second processing group's process of storing occurrence information is not executed between the grant trigger process and the bonus granting process in the first processing group.

Feature Q4: The reservation process is a process of acquiring numerical information used in the lottery process from the numerical information update means (the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3),
The gaming machine described in feature Q3, wherein the bonus awarding process is a process for storing the numerical information in the first process corresponding memory area so that the numerical information can be used in the lottery process.

According to feature Q4, in a configuration in which, when an opportunity to grant a bonus occurs, numerical information is acquired from the numerical information update means and the acquired numerical information is used to execute a lottery process, when an opportunity to grant a bonus occurs, numerical information is acquired from the numerical information update means but is in a reserved state, and if it is determined thereafter that a specified event has not occurred, the reserved numerical information is stored in the first process-compatible memory area so that it can be used in the lottery process. This makes it possible to obtain numerical information at the timing when an opportunity to grant a bonus occurs, while achieving the excellent effects described in feature Q3 above.

Feature Q5. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing an information identification process for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area in a situation where the granting of the privilege is reserved in the reservation process as the process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S8002 or step S8009 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in feature Q3 or Q4, characterized in that the special processing execution means executes the special processing when it is determined in the information identification process that the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area.

According to feature Q5, in a situation where the granting of a bonus is reserved in the reservation process, an information identification process is executed to identify whether or not predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding memory area, and if it is identified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored, the opportunity to grant a bonus is invalidated as a special process. This makes it possible to prevent the information identification process from being executed in a situation where the granting of a bonus is not reserved.

Feature Q6. The device is provided with a means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The predetermined unit process includes the generation information storage process, the special process, the award trigger process, the reservation process, and the special benefit award process,
A gaming machine described in any one of features Q3 to Q5, characterized in that the processing order of the specified unit processes in one processing round is set so that the generation information storage process is processed in a later order than the processing of the first processing group.

Feature Q6 makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while ensuring that the generation information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is processed later than the processes of the first process group in a given unit process in one processing round.

Feature Q7. The predetermined unit process includes the processes of the second process group (information clear process, test firing process, timer update process for non-specific control, information abnormality monitoring process, and check process) in addition to the generated information storage process,
A gaming machine described in feature Q6, characterized in that the processing order of the specified unit processes in one processing round is set so that the processing of the second processing group is performed after the processing of the first processing group.

According to feature Q7, in a predetermined unit process in one processing round, the processing of the second processing group is consolidated as a processing order after the processing of the first processing group, so that it is not necessary to repeatedly switch between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in a predetermined unit process in one processing round. In addition, even with this configuration, the configuration of feature Q3 is included, and when it is determined that a bonus award trigger has occurred in the processing of the first processing group, the award is temporarily withheld, and when the processing of the second processing group does not subsequently store the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding storage area and the processing of the first processing group does not execute the processing of invalidating the bonus award trigger, the bonus that was temporarily withheld is granted in the processing of the first processing group. As a result, even if the generation information storage processing, which is the processing of the second processing group, is not executed between the grant trigger processing and the bonus award processing in the processing of the first processing group, it is possible to grant a bonus in response to the bonus award trigger when a predetermined event has not occurred, and to invalidate the bonus award trigger when a predetermined event has occurred, so that the bonus is not granted.

Feature Q8. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a grant trigger process for storing grant trigger information (setting each confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d to "1") in the first process corresponding storage area when it is determined that a privilege grant trigger has occurred as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618, step S5621, or step S5623 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features Q1 to Q7, characterized in that the special processing is a processing for erasing the award trigger information stored in the first processing corresponding memory area.

According to feature Q8, when the occurrence of a bonus award trigger is identified in the award trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, the award trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding memory area, and when the occurrence of a specified event is identified in the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding memory area, the award trigger information in the first process corresponding memory area is erased in the special process, which is the process of the first process group. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred as a process of the second process group rather than the process of the first process group, it is possible to provide a margin for the processes that can be executed as the process of the first process group, while integrating the process for identifying the occurrence of a bonus award trigger and the process for invalidating the bonus award trigger in the process of the first process group while using the first process corresponding memory area.

Feature Q9. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a privilege granting process when the grant trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding storage area as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S5518, step S5704, or step S5709 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature Q8, wherein the generation information storage process and the special process are executed after the award trigger process is executed and before the bonus award process is executed.

According to feature Q9, the occurrence information storage process, which is a process of the second processing group, and the special process, which is a process of the first processing group, are executed after the grant trigger process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed and before the bonus granting process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed. This makes it possible to have a margin for the processes that can be executed as processes of the first processing group by executing the process for determining whether or not a specified event has occurred as a process of the second processing group rather than as a process of the first processing group, while disabling the bonus granting trigger before the bonus granting process is executed if a specified event has occurred.

Feature Q10. The device is provided with a means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The first process group execution means includes a means for executing an information identification process for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area as the process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619, or step S6621 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
the special process execution means executes the special process when it is determined in the information identification process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area,
The predetermined unit process includes the generation information storage process, the award trigger process, the benefit award process, and the information identification process,
The gaming machine described in feature Q9 is characterized in that the processing order of the specified unit processes in one processing round is set so that the generating information storage process is executed after the award trigger process, the information identification process is executed after the generating information storage process, and the bonus awarding process is executed after the information identification process.

According to feature Q10, in a configuration in which a predetermined unit process includes an occurrence information storage process, an award trigger process, a bonus awarding process, and an information identification process, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects simply by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the occurrence information storage process is executed after the award trigger process, the information identification process is executed after the occurrence information storage process, and the bonus awarding process is executed after the information identification process.

Feature Q11. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing an information identification process for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area as the process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619, or step S6621 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S8002, step S8009, step S8102, step S8105, step S8108, step S8111, step S8115, or step S8118 of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment),
the special process execution means executes the special process when it is determined in the information identification process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features Q1 to Q10, characterized in that the second processing group execution means includes a means for executing an occurrence information erasure process that erases the specified event occurrence information after the information identification process is executed as a process of the second processing group (a function for executing an information clearing process of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments).

According to feature Q11, in a configuration in which a special process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed when it is determined in an information identification process, which is a process of the first processing group, that specific event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area, the specific event occurrence information is erased in an occurrence information erasure process, which is a process of the second processing group, after the information identification process is executed. This makes it possible to erase the specific event occurrence information in the processing of the second processing group, while still executing a special process for the specific event occurrence information when it is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area.

Feature Q12. The second process group execution means includes a means for executing an event occurrence identification process for identifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group (a function for executing the processes of steps S6001 to S6003, steps S6007 to S6009, or steps S6013 to S6014 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments);
When the occurrence of the predetermined event is identified in the event occurrence identification process, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area in the occurrence information storage process,
The gaming machine described in feature Q11, wherein the occurrence information erasure process is executed before the event occurrence identification process is executed when the event occurrence identification process is executed.

According to feature Q12, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a predetermined event is identified in the event occurrence identification process, which is the process of the second processing group, and the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second processing group, stores the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding storage area, when the event occurrence identification process is executed, an occurrence information erasure process is executed to erase the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence identification process is executed. In other words, the event occurrence identification process and the occurrence information storage process are executed after the predetermined event occurrence information is once erased. As a result, in a configuration in which the process for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding storage area is executed in the process of the second processing group, and the special process when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area is executed in the process of the first processing group, it is possible to execute the occurrence information erasure process that erases the predetermined event occurrence information at an appropriate timing in the process of the second processing group while preventing the special process from being executed multiple times due to the storage of the predetermined event occurrence information once.

Feature Q13. The first process group execution means, based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments), as the processing of the first process group, is provided with a means for executing a predetermined measurement start processing to start measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area (special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the first process corresponding storage area (a function for executing the processing of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments);
A gaming machine described in any one of features Q1 to Q12, characterized in that in the occurrence information storage process, when a specified corresponding event occurs in a situation in which the specified corresponding event should not occur in relation to the specified monitoring period, the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area as the occurrence of the specified event.

According to feature Q13, in a configuration in which, when a specified response event occurs in a situation in which the specified response event should not occur in relation to the specified monitoring period, specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area as the occurrence of a specified event and special processing is executed, it becomes possible to perform processing for measuring the specified monitoring period using a specified measurement memory area in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature Q14. The gaming machine described in Feature Q13, wherein the first process group execution means includes a means for executing a process for identifying whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as the process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S6103 or step S6302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature Q14, in a configuration in which processing for determining whether a predetermined measurement start event has occurred is executed in the processing of the first processing group, the configuration of feature Q13 described above is provided, and processing for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement memory area is executed in the processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to consolidate the processing for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processing of the first processing group.

Feature Q15. The gaming machine described in Feature Q13 or Q14, characterized in that the second process group execution means includes means for executing a specific measurement start process (a function for executing the process of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) that starts measuring a specific monitoring period using a specific measurement memory area (the 1st to 8th winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second process corresponding memory area based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event (positive judgment of step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) as the process of the second process group.

According to feature Q15, the process for measuring a specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event is included in the process of the second process group. This makes it possible to distribute the process for measuring various periods between the process of the first process group and the process of the second process group in units of the type of period to be measured.

Feature Q16. The gaming machine described in Feature Q15, characterized in that the second process group execution means includes means for executing a process for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the second process corresponding memory area when a specific response event occurs in a situation in which the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period, as the process of the second process group (a function for executing the process of step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature Q16, when a specified response event occurs in a situation where it should not occur in relation to the specified monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group, the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area as the occurrence of the specified event and special processing is executed, and also when a specific response event occurs in a situation where it should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group, the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area and special processing is executed. This makes it possible to distribute the processing of measuring each period for determining whether or not an event that triggers the storage of the specified event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding memory area has occurred between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in units of the type of period to be measured.

In addition, for the configuration of features Q1 to Q16, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1. A first process group execution means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the first process group (the specific control process);
A second process group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the second process group (the non-specific control process);
a first process corresponding storage area (a work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) into which information can be written and read when the processes of the first process group are executed, and into which information can be read but not written when the processes of the second process group are executed;
a second process corresponding storage area (a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the second process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the first process group are executed;
Equipped with
The second process group execution means
As the processing of the second processing group, a means for executing an event occurrence identification process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event (an event determined to be positive in step S6003, an event determined to be positive in step S6009, or an event determined to be positive in step S6014 by the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) has occurred (a function for executing the processing of steps S6001 to S6003, steps S6007 to S6009, or steps S6013 to S6014 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments);
As a process of the second process group, when the occurrence of the predetermined event is identified by the event occurrence identification process, a means for executing an occurrence information storage process for storing predetermined event occurrence information (setting any one of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r to "1") in the second process corresponding storage area (a function for executing the process of step S6004, step S6010, or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments);
Equipped with
The first process group execution means
a means for executing an information identification process for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding memory area (a function for executing the process of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S8002, step S8009, step S8102, step S8105, step S8108, step S8111, step S8115, step S8118 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
As the processing of the first processing group, a special processing execution means (in the 13th embodiment, steps S6602, S6603, S6605, S6606, S6608, S6609, S6611, S6612, S6614, S6615, S6617, S6619, S6620, S6621, S6622, S6623, S6624, S6625, S6626, S6627, S6628, S6629, S6630, S6631, S6632, S6633, S6634, S6635, S6636, S6637, S6638, S6639, S6640, S6641, S6642, S6643, S6644, S6645, S6646, S6647, S6648, S6649, S6650, S6651, S6652, S6653, S6654, S6655, S6656, S6657, S6658, S6659, S66660, S66661 In the fourteenth embodiment, the main MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of step S8006, the processing of step S8013, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8102, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8105, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8108, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8111, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8115, and the processing of making a positive determination in step S8118).
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means is provided with a means for executing an occurrence information erasure process (a function for executing an information clear process of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) that erases the specified event occurrence information before the event occurrence identification process is executed as a process of the second processing group.

According to feature R1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the first processing corresponding memory area is the target to which information is written, but the second processing corresponding memory area is not the target to which information is written, and when the processing of the second processing group is executed, the second processing corresponding memory area is the target to which information is written, but the first processing corresponding memory area is not the target to which information is written. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of memory area to which information is written when the processing of the first processing group is executed from the type of memory area to which information is written when the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the first processing corresponding memory area but also from the second processing corresponding memory area, and even when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the second processing corresponding memory area but also from the first processing corresponding memory area. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if the occurrence of a specified event is identified in the processing of the second processing group and specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area, a corresponding special process is executed in the processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a specified event as processing of the first processing group, even in a configuration in which the processing for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred is executed as processing of the second processing group rather than processing of the first processing group, thereby allowing for leeway in the processing that can be executed as processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to execute processing in the control means preferably.

In addition, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a predetermined event is identified in the event occurrence identification process, which is the process of the second processing group, and the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second processing group, stores the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding memory area, when the event occurrence identification process is executed, an occurrence information erasure process is executed to erase the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence identification process is executed. In other words, the event occurrence identification process and the occurrence information storage process are executed after the predetermined event occurrence information is once erased. As a result, in a configuration in which the process for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding memory area is executed in the process of the second processing group, and the special process when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area is executed in the process of the first processing group, it is possible to execute the occurrence information erasure process that erases the predetermined event occurrence information at an appropriate timing in the process of the second processing group while preventing the special process from being executed multiple times due to the storage of the predetermined event occurrence information once.

Feature R2. The gaming machine described in Feature R1, characterized in that the information identification process is executed after the event occurrence identification process is executed and before the occurrence information erasure process corresponding to the next execution of the event occurrence identification process is executed.

According to feature R2, in a configuration in which a special process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed when it is determined in an information identification process, which is a process of the first processing group, that predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased in an occurrence information erasure process, which is a process of the second processing group, after the information identification process is executed. This makes it possible to erase the predetermined event occurrence information in the processing of the second processing group, while still executing a special process for the predetermined event occurrence information when it is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area.

Feature R3. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a grant trigger process for identifying whether or not a privilege grant trigger has occurred as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620, or step S5622 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S7803, step S7805, step S7807, step S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815, or step S7817 of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or R2, wherein the special process is a process for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit specified in the opportunity for awarding process.

According to feature R3, the first processing group's processing of the award trigger process determines whether or not a bonus award trigger has occurred, and if the second processing group's processing of the occurrence information storage process determines that a specified event has occurred and stores the specified event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding memory area, the bonus award trigger is invalidated by the special processing process of the first processing group. This allows the process for determining whether or not a specified event has occurred to be executed as the second processing group's processing rather than the first processing group's processing, allowing for some leeway in the processing that can be executed as the first processing group's processing, while consolidating the process for determining the occurrence of a bonus award trigger and the process for invalidating the bonus award trigger in the first processing group's processing.

Feature R4. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a grant trigger process for storing grant trigger information (setting each confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d to "1") in the first process corresponding storage area when it is determined that a privilege grant trigger has occurred as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618, step S5621, or step S5623 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features R1 to R3, characterized in that the special process is a process for erasing the award trigger information stored in the first process corresponding memory area.

According to feature R4, when the occurrence of a bonus award trigger is identified in the award trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, the award trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding memory area, and when the occurrence of a specified event is identified in the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding memory area, the award trigger information in the first process corresponding memory area is erased in the special process, which is the process of the first process group. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred as a process of the second process group rather than the process of the first process group, it is possible to provide a margin for the processes that can be executed as the process of the first process group, while integrating the process for identifying the occurrence of a bonus award trigger and the process for invalidating the bonus award trigger in the process of the first process group while utilizing the first process corresponding memory area.

Feature R5. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a privilege granting process as a process of the first process group when the grant trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding storage area (a function for executing the process of step S5518, step S5704, or step S5709 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature R4 is characterized in that the event occurrence identification process and the information identification process are executed after the award trigger process is executed and before the bonus award process is executed.

According to feature R5, the event occurrence identification process, which is a process of the second processing group, and the information identification process, which is a process of the first processing group, are executed after the grant trigger process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed and before the bonus granting process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed. In this way, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred as a process of the second processing group rather than the process of the first processing group, it is possible to provide some leeway for the processes that can be executed as the processes of the first processing group, while, if a specified event has occurred, it is possible to disable the bonus granting trigger before the bonus granting process is executed.

Feature R6. Equipped with a means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The predetermined unit process includes the event occurrence identification process, the award trigger process, the benefit award process, and the information identification process,
The gaming machine described in feature R5 is characterized in that the processing order of the specified unit processes in one processing round is set so that the event occurrence identification process is executed after the award trigger process, the information identification process is executed after the event occurrence identification process, and the bonus awarding process is executed after the information identification process.

According to feature R6, in a configuration in which a predetermined unit process includes an event occurrence identification process, an award trigger process, a bonus awarding process, and an information identification process, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects simply by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the event occurrence identification process is executed after the award trigger process, the information identification process is executed after the event occurrence identification process, and the bonus awarding process is executed after the information identification process.

In addition, for the configuration of features R1 to R6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group S>
Feature S1. A first process group execution means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the first process group (the specific control process);
A second process group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the second process group (the non-specific control process);
a first process corresponding storage area (a work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) into which information can be written and read when the processes of the first process group are executed, and into which information can be read but not written when the processes of the second process group are executed;
a second process corresponding storage area (a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the second process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the first process group are executed;
Equipped with
The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a predetermined measurement start process (a function for executing the process of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for starting measurement of a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area (the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the first process corresponding storage area based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second processing group execution means is equipped with a predetermined response execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) that executes a predetermined response processing when a predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, as processing of the second processing group.

According to feature S1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the first processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the second processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written, and when the processing of the second processing group is executed, the second processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the first processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the first processing group is executed from the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the first processing corresponding storage area but also from the second processing corresponding storage area, and even when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the second processing corresponding storage area but also from the first processing corresponding storage area. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if a specified response event occurs in a situation where the specified response event should not occur in relation to the specified monitoring period, the specified response process is executed in the process of the second process group. This makes it possible to provide a margin for the process that can be executed as the process of the first process group by executing the process for determining whether or not a specified response event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group. This makes it possible to execute the process in the control means preferably.

In addition, in a configuration in which the second processing group executes a specified response process when a specified response event occurs in a situation in which the specified response event should not occur in relation to the specified monitoring period, it becomes possible for the first processing group to perform processing for measuring the specified monitoring period using a specified measurement memory area.

Feature S2. The gaming machine described in Feature S1, characterized in that the first process group execution means includes a means for executing a process for identifying whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S6103 or step S6302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature S2, in a configuration in which processing for determining whether a predetermined measurement start event has occurred in the processing of the first processing group is executed, the configuration of feature S1 is provided, and processing for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement memory area is executed in the processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to consolidate the processing for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S3. The gaming machine described in feature S1 or S2, characterized in that the second process group execution means includes means for executing a specific measurement start process (a function for executing the process of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) that starts measuring a specific monitoring period using a specific measurement memory area (the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second process corresponding memory area based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event (positive determination of step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) as the process of the second process group.

According to feature S3, the process for measuring a specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event is included in the process of the second process group. This makes it possible to distribute the process for measuring various periods between the process of the first process group and the process of the second process group in units of the type of period to be measured.

Feature S4. The gaming machine described in Feature S3, characterized in that the predetermined response execution means executes the predetermined response process when a specific response event occurs in a situation in which the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period.

According to feature S4, the specified response process is executed when a specified response event occurs in a situation where it should not occur in relation to the specified monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group, and also when a specific response event occurs in a situation where it should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group. This makes it possible to distribute the process of measuring each period for determining whether or not an event that will trigger the execution of the specified response process has occurred between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in units of the type of period to be measured.

Feature S5: The predetermined response process is a process for storing predetermined event occurrence information (setting any one of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r to "1") in the second process corresponding storage area when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation in which the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period,
The first process group execution means is a special process execution means (in the 13th embodiment, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620 or step S6621 of the main MPU 82) that executes a special process when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area as the process of the first process group. A gaming machine described in any one of features S1 to S4, characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute processing of step S6622 of the main MPU 82, and in a fourteenth embodiment, a function to execute processing of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, processing of step S8013, processing of making a positive judgment in step S8102, processing of making a positive judgment in step S8105, processing of making a positive judgment in step S8108, processing of making a positive judgment in step S8111, processing of making a positive judgment in step S8115, and processing of making a positive judgment in step S8118.

According to feature S5, when a specified response event occurs in a situation where the specified response event should not occur in relation to the specified monitoring period, specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area, and when the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area, special processing is executed in the processing of the first processing group. As a result, even in a configuration in which the processing for identifying whether or not a specified response event has occurred is executed as processing of the second processing group rather than processing of the first processing group, allowing for leeway in the processing that can be executed as processing of the first processing group, it becomes possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a specified response event as processing of the first processing group.

Feature S6: The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a grant trigger process for identifying whether or not a privilege grant trigger has occurred as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620, or step S5622 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S7803, step S7805, step S7807, step S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815, or step S7817 of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special processing is processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit specified in the opportunity processing.

According to feature S6, the first processing group's processing is a grant trigger processing that determines whether or not a bonus grant trigger has occurred, and if the second processing group's processing is an occurrence information storage processing that determines that a specified event has occurred and the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area, the bonus grant trigger is invalidated by the special processing that is the first processing group's processing. As a result, by executing the processing for determining whether or not a specified event has occurred as processing of the second processing group rather than the processing of the first processing group, it is possible to provide a margin for processing that can be executed as processing of the first processing group, while consolidating the processing for determining the occurrence of a bonus grant trigger and the processing for invalidating the bonus grant trigger in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S7: The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a grant trigger process for storing grant trigger information (setting each confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d to "1") in the first process corresponding storage area when it is determined that a privilege grant trigger has occurred as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618, step S5621, or step S5623 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special process is a process for erasing the award trigger information stored in the first process corresponding memory area.

According to feature S7, when the occurrence of a bonus award trigger is identified in the award trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, the award trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding memory area, and when the occurrence of a specified event is identified in the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding memory area, the award trigger information in the first process corresponding memory area is erased in the special process, which is the process of the first process group. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred as a process of the second process group rather than the process of the first process group, it is possible to provide a margin for the processes that can be executed as the process of the first process group, while integrating the process for identifying the occurrence of a bonus award trigger and the process for invalidating the bonus award trigger in the process of the first process group while using the first process corresponding memory area.

In addition, for the configuration of features S1 to S7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature T group>
Feature T1. A first process group execution means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the first process group (the specific control process);
A second process group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the process of the second process group (the non-specific control process);
a first process corresponding storage area (a work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) into which information can be written and read when the processes of the first process group are executed, and into which information can be read but not written when the processes of the second process group are executed;
a second process corresponding storage area (a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the second process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the first process group are executed;
Equipped with
The second process group execution means includes a means for executing an occurrence information storage process (a function for executing the process of step S6004, step S6010, or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for storing predetermined event occurrence information (setting any one of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r to "1") in the second process corresponding storage area when a predetermined event (an event determined to be positive in step S6003, an event determined to be positive in step S6009, or an event determined to be positive in step S6014 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) occurs as the process of the second process group,
The first process group execution means
As a process of the first process group, a means for executing a grant trigger process for storing grant trigger information (setting each confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d to "1") in the first process corresponding memory area when it is determined that a privilege grant trigger has occurred (a function for executing the process of step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618, step S5621 or step S5623 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
As the processing of the first processing group, a special processing execution means (in the 13th embodiment, steps S6602, S6603, S6605, S6606, S6608, S6609, S6611, S6612, S6614, S6615, S6616 of the main MPU 82) executes a special processing for erasing the given opportunity information stored in the first processing corresponding memory area when the given event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding memory area. 17, a function of executing the processing of step S6618, step S6620, or step S6622; in the 14th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the processing of step S8013, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8102, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8105, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8108, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8111, the processing of making a positive determination in step S8115, and the processing of making a positive determination in step S8118);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature T1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the first processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the second processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written, and when the processing of the second processing group is executed, the second processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the first processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the first processing group is executed from the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the first processing corresponding storage area but also from the second processing corresponding storage area, and even when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the second processing corresponding storage area but also from the first processing corresponding storage area. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if the occurrence of a bonus award trigger is identified in the award trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, the award trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding memory area, and if the occurrence of a specified event is identified in the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the specified event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding memory area, the award trigger information in the first process corresponding memory area is erased in the special process, which is the process of the first process group. This makes it possible to perform the process for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred as a process of the second process group rather than the process of the first process group, while leaving room for the process that can be executed as the process of the first process group, and to perform the process for identifying the occurrence of a bonus award trigger and the process for invalidating the bonus award trigger in a consolidated manner in the process of the first process group while using the first process corresponding memory area.

Feature T2. The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a privilege granting process as a process of the first process group when the grant trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding storage area (a function for executing the process of step S5518, step S5704, or step S5709 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature T1 is characterized in that the generation information storage process and the special process are executed after the award trigger process is executed and before the bonus award process is executed.

According to feature T2, the occurrence information storage process, which is a process of the second processing group, and the special process, which is a process of the first processing group, are executed after the grant trigger process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed and before the bonus granting process, which is a process of the first processing group, is executed. In this way, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a specified event has occurred as a process of the second processing group rather than as a process of the first processing group, it is possible to provide some leeway for the processes that can be executed as processes of the first processing group, while disabling the bonus granting trigger before the bonus granting process is executed if a specified event has occurred.

Feature T3. The device includes a means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The first process group execution means includes a means for executing an information identification process for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area as the process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619, or step S6621 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
the special process execution means executes the special process when it is determined in the information identification process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area,
The predetermined unit process includes the generation information storage process, the award trigger process, the benefit award process, and the information identification process,
The gaming machine described in feature T2 is characterized in that the processing order of the specified unit processes in one processing round is set so that the generating information storage process is executed after the award trigger process, the information identification process is executed after the generating information storage process, and the bonus awarding process is executed after the information identification process.

According to feature T3, in a configuration in which a predetermined unit process includes an occurrence information storage process, an award trigger process, a bonus awarding process, and an information identification process, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects simply by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the occurrence information storage process is executed after the award trigger process, the information identification process is executed after the occurrence information storage process, and the bonus awarding process is executed after the information identification process.

In addition, for the configuration of features T1 to T3, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristic U group>
Feature U1. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes various processes,
The control means
A first process group execution means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the process of the first process group (the specific control process) among the various processes;
A second process group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the process of the second process group (the non-specific control process) among the various processes;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
a first process corresponding storage area (a work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the first process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the second process group are executed;
a second process corresponding storage area (a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the second process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the first process group are executed;
Equipped with
The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a first transmission information storage process for storing first transmission information (a normal return command, a return command at the time of clearing, a confirmation start command, a return command at the time of confirmation, an update start command, a return command at the time of updating, a first hold command, and a second hold command) in a transmission information storage area (a command transmission buffer 223b) when a first transmission trigger occurs as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the processes of steps S4914, S4921, S5003, S5007, S5105, S5114, S5705, or S5710 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The second processing group execution means includes a means for executing a second transmission information storage process for storing second transmission information (a disconnection occurrence command, a short circuit occurrence command, a normal power winning abnormality command, a special power winning abnormality command, or a magnetic abnormality command) in the transmission information storage area when a second transmission trigger occurs as a process of the second processing group (a function for executing the process of step S5404, step S5408, step S6005, step S6011, or step S6507 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
This gaming machine is characterized by having a transmission execution means (command transmission circuit 224) that transmits the first transmission information to a transmission target (sound-light side MPU 93) when the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information memory area, and transmits the second transmission information to a transmission target (sound-light side MPU 93) when the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information memory area.

According to feature U1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the first processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the second processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written, and when the processing of the second processing group is executed, the second processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the first processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the first processing group is executed from the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the first processing corresponding storage area but also from the second processing corresponding storage area, and even when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the second processing corresponding storage area but also from the first processing corresponding storage area. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, when the first transmission trigger occurs, the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area by the first transmission information storage process, which is the process of the first processing group, and when the second transmission trigger occurs, the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area by the second transmission information storage process, which is the process of the second processing group. Then, when the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the first transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target, and when the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the second transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target. In other words, in a configuration in which the storage area in which information can be written by the processing of the first processing group and the storage area in which information can be written by the processing of the second processing group are distinguished as the first processing corresponding storage area and the second processing corresponding storage area, the transmission information transmitted to the transmission target is written to a common transmission information storage area. This makes it possible to consolidate the configuration for transmitting the transmission information compared to a configuration in which the transmission information is transmitted individually by each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature U2. The control means is configured to write information into an internal storage means (register area 223) provided in the control means when executing the various processes;
The gaming machine described in feature U1, wherein the transmission information memory area is provided in the internal memory means.

According to feature U2, a transmission information storage area in which the first transmission information is stored in the processing of the first processing group and the second transmission information is stored in the processing of the second processing group is provided in the internal storage means of the control means. As a result, in a configuration in which the storage area to which information can be written in the processing of the first processing group and the storage area to which information can be written in the processing of the second processing group are clearly distinguished as a first processing corresponding storage area and a second processing corresponding storage area, it is possible to make the storage area to which the transmission information is written common to the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group while not using the first processing corresponding storage area and the second processing corresponding storage area.

Feature U3. The gaming machine described in feature U1 or U2, characterized in that the transmission execution means is not included in either the first process group execution means or the second process group execution means.

Feature U3 makes it possible to transmit the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area to the transmission target independently of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature U4. The first process group execution means executes the process of the first process group by using a program;
the second process group execution means executes the process of the second process group by utilizing a program;
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, characterized in that the transmission execution means performs the transmission without using a program.

According to feature U4, the processes of the first processing group and the second processing group are executed using a program, whereas the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area is transmitted to the transmission target without using a program. This makes it possible to transmit the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area to the transmission target independently of the processes of the first processing group and the second processing group, and to execute control to transmit the transmission information without increasing the required program capacity.

Feature U5. A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4, characterized in that the first transmission information can be transmitted not only when the control means is executing the processes of the first processing group but also when the control means is executing the processes of the second processing group, and the second transmission information can be transmitted not only when the control means is executing the processes of the second processing group but also when the control means is executing the processes of the first processing group.

Feature U5 makes it possible to transmit the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area to the transmission target, regardless of the execution status of the processes of the first processing group and the second processing group.

In addition, for the configuration of features U1 to U5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature V Group>
Feature V1. A first process group execution means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the first process group (specific control process) among various processes;
A second process group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the process of the second process group (the non-specific control process) among the various processes;
a first process corresponding storage area (a work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the first process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the second process group are executed;
a second process corresponding storage area (a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information can be written and read when the processes of the second process group are executed, and information can be read but not written when the processes of the first process group are executed;
Equipped with
The first process group execution means includes a means for executing a first update process for updating information in a first numerical value storage area (the first security counter 211a) when a first update trigger occurs as a process of the first process group (a function for executing the process of step S4917 or step S4920 of the master MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The second process group execution means includes a means for executing a second update process for updating information in a second numerical value storage area (the second security counter 213k) when a second update trigger occurs as the process of the second process group (a function for executing the process of step S5405, step S5409, step S6006, step S6012, or step S6508 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
This gaming machine is characterized by having a means for executing specific response processing corresponding to both the information in the first numerical memory area and the information in the second numerical memory area (a function for executing security processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment).

According to feature V1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the first processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the second processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written, and when the processing of the second processing group is executed, the second processing corresponding storage area is the target to which information is written, but the first processing corresponding storage area is not the target to which information is written. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the first processing group is executed from the type of storage area to which information is written when the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the first processing corresponding storage area but also from the second processing corresponding storage area, and even when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the second processing corresponding storage area but also from the first processing corresponding storage area. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, when a first update trigger occurs, the information in the first numerical storage area is updated in the first update process, which is the process of the first processing group, and when a second update trigger occurs, the information in the second numerical storage area is updated in the second update process, which is the process of the second processing group. Then, specific corresponding processing corresponding to both the information in the first numerical storage area and the information in the second numerical storage area is executed. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to the content specified in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in a configuration in which the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are clearly distinguished.

Feature V2. The gaming machine described in Feature V1, characterized in that the first numerical value memory area is provided in the first process-compatible memory area.

Feature V2 makes it possible to use the first process corresponding memory area as a memory area for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of the first update trigger.

Feature V3. The gaming machine described in Feature V2, characterized in that the second numerical value memory area is provided in the second process-compatible memory area.

According to feature V3, it is possible to use the first process corresponding memory area as a memory area for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of a first update trigger, and it is possible to use the second process corresponding memory area as a memory area for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of a second update trigger.

Feature V4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features V1 to V3, characterized in that the specific response process is included in either the process of the first process group or the process of the second process group.

Feature V4 makes it possible to consolidate the specific response process into either the process of the first process group that includes the first update process or the process of the second process group that includes the second update process.

Feature V5. The specific response process is included in the first process group;
The first processing corresponding storage area includes a confirmed storage area (a previous value storage area 211 e) for storing information of the second numerical value storage area when the specific processing is executed,
The specific response processing includes:
A difference determination process for determining a difference between the information in the second numerical value storage area and the information in the confirmed storage area (the process of steps S6701 to S6703 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A process for executing control corresponding to both the difference information identified by the difference identification process and the information in the first numerical value storage area (the processes of steps S6706 to S6714 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4, characterized in that it includes:

According to feature V5, in a configuration in which the first update process and the predetermined response process are included in the processes of the first process group, and the second update process is included in the processes of the second process group, it becomes possible to execute control corresponding to both the difference in information in the second numerical storage area and the information in the first numerical storage area in the predetermined response process.

Feature V6. The first numerical value storage area can be used to count the number of times the first update trigger occurs;
The second numerical value storage area can be used to count the number of times the second update trigger occurs,
A gaming machine described in any one of features V1 to V5, characterized in that the specific response processing executes a processing corresponding to the sum of the information of the first numerical memory area and the information of the second numerical memory area.

Feature V6 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration that executes processing corresponding to the sum of the number of times the first update trigger occurs and the number of times the second update trigger occurs.

In addition, for the configuration of features V1 to V6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature Q group, feature R group, feature S group, feature T group, feature U group, and feature V group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be executed appropriately by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature W group>
Feature W1. A first information setting means (function for executing the process of step S8705 in the main MPU 82 in the 15th embodiment) that sets in a predetermined storage means (main RAM 84) first predetermined state information (information of "1" of the third time-shortening state flag 324 in the 15th embodiment, information of "3" of the event target counter 371 in the 21st embodiment) that enables execution of a first predetermined state (third time-shortening state ST3 in the 15th embodiment, third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C in the 21st embodiment) in which the advantage of a predetermined event (frequency of the second operating port 34 being in an open state) is different from that of a normal game state based on the occurrence of a first predetermined opportunity (execution of a game round corresponding to a time-shortening result in the 15th embodiment, execution of a game round corresponding to the first to third time-shortening results in the 21st embodiment);
a second information setting means for setting, in the predetermined storage means, second predetermined state information (information of "1" of the first time-shortened state flag 322 or information of "1" of the second time-shortened state flag 323 in the 15th embodiment, and information of "1" or "2" of the event target counter 371 in the 21st embodiment) that enables a second predetermined state (first time-shortened state ST1 or second time-shortened state ST2 in the 15th and 21st embodiments) in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from that of the normal game state based on the occurrence of a second predetermined trigger (the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 15th and 21st embodiments or the consumption of the ceiling number of game turns in the 15th and 21st embodiments), and
Equipped with
A gaming machine, characterized in that the priority of information set in the predetermined storage means is set higher for the second predetermined status information than for the first predetermined status information.

According to feature W1, a first predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event differs from the normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a first predetermined trigger, and a second predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event differs from the normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a second predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to diversify the game state in relation to the degree of advantage of the predetermined event. In this case, the priority of setting information for the predetermined storage means is set to be higher for the second predetermined state information than for the first predetermined state information. This makes it possible to prioritize the second predetermined state over the first predetermined state, and even if the first predetermined trigger and the second predetermined trigger each occur at any timing, it is possible to set the type of predetermined state that is prioritized to occur at the design stage of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to preferably realize an improvement in the interest of the game.

Feature W2. The gaming machine described in Feature W1, characterized in that the first information setting means does not set the first predetermined state information in the predetermined storage means when the first predetermined trigger occurs in the second predetermined state.

According to feature W2, even if the first predetermined trigger occurs in the second predetermined state, the priority of setting information in the predetermined storage means is set to be higher for the second predetermined state information than for the first predetermined state information, so the first predetermined state information is not set in the predetermined storage means, and the state in which the second predetermined state information is set in the predetermined storage means is maintained. This makes it possible to maintain the second predetermined state even if the first predetermined trigger occurs in the second predetermined state.

Feature W3. When the first predetermined opportunity occurs in the second predetermined state, a standby state setting means (a function of executing the process of step SC409 of the main MPU 82 in the 21st embodiment) is provided to set the first predetermined state information to the predetermined storage means in a standby state in which the first predetermined state information is set;
A gaming machine described in feature W2, characterized in that the first information setting means sets the first predetermined state information in the predetermined storage means when the second predetermined state ends in the waiting state.

According to feature W3, when the first predetermined trigger occurs in the second predetermined state, the second predetermined state is maintained, but a standby state is set in which the setting of the first predetermined state information is awaited in the predetermined storage means. Then, when the second predetermined state ends in the standby state, the first predetermined state information is set in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined trigger from being invalidated when the first predetermined trigger occurs in the second predetermined state.

Feature W4. A gaming machine according to Feature W3, characterized in that when an end trigger occurs in the standby state, the standby state is released without the first predetermined state information being set in the predetermined storage means.

Feature W4 makes it possible to create a situation in which the first predetermined state information is not set in the predetermined storage means even when the standby state is reached.

Feature W5. A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W4, characterized in that the second information setting means sets the second predetermined state information in the predetermined storage means when the second predetermined trigger occurs in the first predetermined state.

According to feature W5, when a second predetermined trigger occurs in a first predetermined state, the second predetermined state information is set to have a higher priority for setting information in the predetermined storage means than the first predetermined state information, and therefore the second predetermined state information is set in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to start the second predetermined state instead of the first predetermined state when the second predetermined trigger occurs in the first predetermined state.

Feature W6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features W1 to W5, characterized in that the first predetermined trigger occurs based on a predetermined trigger result (a time-saving result in the fifteenth embodiment, a first to third time-saving results in the twenty-first embodiment) being achieved in a predetermined lottery process (a win/lose determination process in step S805 in the fifteenth embodiment, a win/lose determination process in step S805 and a time-saving allocation determination process in step S811 in the twenty-first embodiment) executed when a game round is played.

According to feature W6, the first predetermined trigger occurs based on the predetermined trigger result being achieved in the predetermined lottery process executed when a game round is played, so the first predetermined trigger occurs irregularly. In this case, since the configuration of feature W1 is provided and the priority of setting information in the predetermined storage means is set to the second predetermined state information higher than the first predetermined state information, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second predetermined state information is set in the predetermined storage means even if the first predetermined trigger occurs irregularly in a situation in which the second predetermined state information is set in the predetermined storage means.

Feature W7. A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6, characterized in that the second predetermined trigger occurs when a predetermined advantageous gaming state (open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

According to feature W7, the priority of the second predetermined state information set in the predetermined storage means in response to the execution of a predetermined advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set higher than the first predetermined state information, making it possible to make it easier to maintain the second predetermined state that is executed in conjunction with the execution of the advantageous game state.

Feature W8. Equipped with a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 325 in the fifteenth and twenty-first embodiments) for measuring the number of times a game is played;
A gaming machine described in any one of features W1 to W6, characterized in that the second specified trigger occurs when the number of times the game has been played as measured by the specified measurement means reaches a specified trigger number (ceiling number of times).

According to feature W8, the priority of the second predetermined state information set in the predetermined storage means when the number of play times reaches the predetermined trigger number is set higher than the first predetermined state information, making it possible to easily maintain the second predetermined state that is executed when the number of play times reaches the predetermined trigger number.

Feature W9. Based on the occurrence of a third predetermined opportunity (the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 15th and 21st embodiments), a third predetermined state information (information of "1" of the first time-saving state flag 322 in the 15th embodiment, information of "1" of the event target counter 371 in the 21st embodiment) that enables the execution of a third predetermined state in which the advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state (first time-saving state ST1 in the 15th and 21st embodiments) is set in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the process of step S8406 in the main MPU 82 in the 15th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SC207 in the main MPU 82 in the 21st embodiment);
a priority of setting information in the predetermined storage means is set to be higher for the third predetermined status information than for the first predetermined status information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features W1 to W8, characterized in that the third predetermined trigger does not occur in the second predetermined state, and the second predetermined trigger does not occur in the third predetermined state.

According to feature W9, a third predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event differs from the normal gaming state can be executed based on the occurrence of a third predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state in relation to the degree of advantage of the predetermined event. In this case, the priority of setting information in the predetermined storage means is set to be higher for the third predetermined state information than for the first predetermined state information. This makes it possible to give priority to the third predetermined state over the first predetermined state, and even if the first and third predetermined triggers each occur at any timing, it is possible to determine the type of predetermined state that is given priority at the design stage of the gaming machine.

In this case, the third predetermined trigger does not occur in the second predetermined state, and the second predetermined trigger does not occur in the third predetermined state. This makes it unnecessary to set a priority for the settings between the second predetermined state information and the third predetermined state information, and therefore simplifies the processing configuration for executing control according to the priority.

Feature W10. A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W9, characterized in that the gaming state corresponds to the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature W10 makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects in a configuration in which the game state corresponds to the information stored in a specified storage means.

Feature W11. A predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the fifteenth and twenty-first embodiments) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth and twenty-first embodiments);
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82 in the 15th and 21st embodiments) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special call start process, a special call open process, a special call closed process, and a special call end process of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth and twenty-first embodiments) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function of executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82 in the 15th and 21st embodiments) that can switch the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features W1 to W10, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature W11, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when the game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, in the first or second predetermined state, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features W1 to W11, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Characteristics Group X>
Feature X1. A setting means (main MPU 8 in the 19th embodiment) that sets the advantage of a predetermined event (frequency in which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) to a predetermined state different from a normal game state (first time-shortening state ST1, second time-shortening state ST2, or third time-shortening state ST3 in the 19th and 20th embodiments, first time-shortening state ST1, second time-shortening state ST2, or third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C in the 21st to 29th embodiments) based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 19th and 20th embodiments, the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result, the consumption of a ceiling number of game rounds, or the execution of a game round corresponding to a time-shortening result in the 21st to 29 ...). a function of executing the processing of step SA907, step SB105 or step SB204 in the first embodiment; a function of executing the processing of step SB707, step SB806 or step SB904 in the main MPU 82 in the twentieth embodiment; a function of executing the processing of step SC207, step SC305 or step SC404 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-first embodiment; a function of executing the processing of steps SD704 to SD711 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-sixth embodiment; a function of executing the processing of steps SE304 to SE311 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-eighth embodiment; and a function of executing the processing of steps SE804 to SE811 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-ninth embodiment.
a standby state setting means for setting a standby state in a situation where the target of the game state is the predetermined state and the execution of the predetermined state is made on standby (in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB206 after a positive determination is made in step SB203 in the master MPU 82; in the twentieth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB811 or step SB908 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC409 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SD712 to SD716 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SE312 to SE325 in the master MPU 82; and in the twentyninth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SE812 to SE820 in the master MPU 82);
a post-standby setting means for setting the predetermined state that is in the standby state as the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state to be executed is completed in the standby state (in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB409 or step SB417 in the master MPU 82; in the twentieth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC109 or step SC113 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC607 to step SC609 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SD809 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SE411 to step SE413 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SE911 to step SE913 in the master MPU 82);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature X1, in a configuration in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event is set to a predetermined state different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, a standby state may be set in which the execution of the predetermined state is on standby when the execution target of the game state is a predetermined state, and when the execution target predetermined state ends in the standby state, the standby predetermined state becomes the execution target of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state is the execution target of the game state, and a predetermined state that can be the execution target thereafter is on standby, making it possible to diversify the execution modes of the predetermined state. This makes it possible to preferably realize an increase in the interest of the game.

Feature X2. The gaming machine described in Feature X1, characterized in that when an end trigger occurs in the standby state, the predetermined state that was the standby state ends without being set to a gaming state.

According to feature X2, a predetermined state that is waiting to be executed may not only be executed later, but may also end without being executed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a predetermined state is executed.

Feature X3. An update means (in the 19th embodiment, the third time-shortening state counter 374, in the 20th embodiment, the second time-shortening standby counter 382 or the third time-shortening standby counter 383, in the 21st embodiment, the third time-shortening standby counter 387, in the 26th and 28th embodiments, the third A time-shortening standby counter 401, the third B time-shortening standby counter 402 or the third C time-shortening standby counter 403, in the 29th embodiment, the first standby counter 406, the second standby counter 407 or the third standby counter 408) for updating the end trigger information stored in the end trigger memory area (the third time-shortening state counter 374 in the 19th embodiment, the second time-shortening standby counter 382 or the third time-shortening standby counter 383 in the 20th embodiment, the third time-shortening standby counter 387 in the 21st embodiment, the third A time-shortening standby counter 401, the third B time-shortening standby counter 402 or the third C time-shortening standby counter 403 in the 26th and 28th embodiments, the first standby counter 406, the second standby counter 407 or the third standby counter 408 in the 29th embodiment) to approach the end target information (the value of "0"). a function of executing the processing of step SB405 in the main MPU 82, in the twentieth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC104 or step SC105 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC604 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD804 to SD806 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE404 to SE406 in the main MPU 82, and in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE904 to SE906 in the main MPU 82),
The termination trigger is that the termination trigger information becomes the termination target information,
The gaming machine according to feature X2, wherein the update means updates the end trigger information to bring it closer to the end target information even when the update event occurs in the standby state.

According to feature X3, in a configuration in which a predetermined state that is in a standby state is terminated when the termination trigger information updated based on the occurrence of an update event becomes the termination trigger information, even if an update event occurs in the standby state, the termination trigger information is updated to the side that brings it closer to the termination target information. This makes it possible to gradually bring the predetermined state closer to the side where the termination trigger for the predetermined state occurs each time an update event occurs when the predetermined state is in a standby state.

Feature X4. The gaming machine described in Feature X3, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed is ended in the waiting state, the post-standby setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the end trigger information stored in the end trigger memory area as the game state to be executed.

According to feature X4, when a predetermined state to be executed ends while the predetermined state is in a standby state, the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the termination trigger information at that time becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to start the standby predetermined state from an intermediate state that corresponds to the period of time it took for the predetermined state to become a target for execution after it became a standby state.

Feature X5. Means for updating the termination trigger information to move away from the termination target information when the specified trigger occurs in the standby state corresponding to the specified state that is the standby state (in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB206 after a negative determination is made in step SB208 in the main MPU 82; in the 20th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB811 in a situation where the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 in the main MPU 82 is 1 or more, or a function for executing the process of step SB908 in a situation where the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is 1 or more; in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB908 in a situation where the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main MPU 82 is 1 or more) is 1 or more; in the 26th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps SD712 to SD716 when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the master MPU 82; in the 28th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps SE312 to SE325 when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the master MPU 82; and in the 29th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps SE812 to SE820 when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the master MPU 82).

According to feature X5, when a predetermined trigger occurs while a predetermined state is on standby, the termination trigger information is updated to move away from the termination target information. This makes it possible to prevent a predetermined trigger that occurs while a predetermined state is on standby from being wasted.

Feature X6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features X1 to X4, characterized in that when the predetermined trigger occurs during the standby state, which corresponds to the predetermined state that is in the standby state, no setting is made for the predetermined state in response to the occurrence of the predetermined trigger.

According to feature X6, even if a predetermined trigger occurs when a predetermined state is on standby, settings related to the predetermined state are not made in response to the occurrence of the predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for putting the predetermined state on standby.

Feature X7. The setting means is
Based on the occurrence of a first predetermined trigger (execution of a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the 19th and 20th embodiments, and execution of a game round corresponding to a first to third time-saving results in the 21st to 29th embodiments), a first setting means (executing the processing of step SB204 in the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment) sets the degree of advantage of the predetermined event to a first predetermined state (third time-saving state ST3 in the 19th and 20th embodiments, and third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C in the 21st to 29th embodiments) different from the normal game state as the predetermined state. a function of executing the processing of step SB904 in the main MPU 82 in the 20th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC404 in the main MPU 82 in the 21st embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD704 to SD711 in the main MPU 82 in the 26th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE304 to SE311 in the main MPU 82 in the 28th embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps SE804 to SE811 in the main MPU 82 in the 29th embodiment)
a second setting means for setting the predetermined state to a second predetermined state (a first time-shortened state ST1 or a second time-shortened state ST2 in the nineteenth, twenty, and twenty-first to twenty-ninth embodiments) in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state, based on the occurrence of a second predetermined event (the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the nineteenth, twenty, and twenty-first to twenty-ninth embodiments or the consumption of the ceiling number of game turns in the nineteenth, twenty-ninth, and twenty-ninth embodiments) (a function for executing the process of step SA907 or step SB105 in the main MPU 82 in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB707 or step SB806 in the main MPU 82 in the twentieth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SC207 or step SC305 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-ninth to twenty-ninth embodiments);
Equipped with
The standby state may be a state in which execution of the first predetermined state is waited for when the gaming state is the second predetermined state,
The post-standby setting means sets the first predetermined state that was in the standby state in which the first predetermined state is on standby to the game state to be executed when the second predetermined state is ended in the standby state.

According to feature X7, a first predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event differs from that of a normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a first predetermined trigger, and a second predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event differs from that of a normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a second predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to diversify the game state in relation to the degree of advantage of the predetermined event. In this case, the configuration is such that the execution of the first predetermined state can be put into a standby state in a situation in which the second predetermined state is in effect, and when the second predetermined state ends while the first predetermined state is on standby, the standby first predetermined state becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which each of the first and second predetermined states is to be executed.

Feature X8. The gaming machine described in Feature X7, wherein the standby state setting means sets the standby state to a standby state that puts the execution of the first predetermined state on hold when the first predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which the second predetermined state is the game state to be executed.

According to feature X8, if the first predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which the second predetermined state is in progress, execution of the first predetermined state is put into a standby state. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined trigger from being wasted when the first predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which the second predetermined state is in progress.

Feature X9. The gaming machine described in Feature X8, wherein the second setting means sets the second predetermined state to the gaming state to be executed when the second predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the first predetermined state is the gaming state to be executed.

According to feature X9, when the first predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the second predetermined state is in effect, not only is the execution of the first predetermined state put on hold, but when the second predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the first predetermined state is in effect, the second predetermined state is entered. This makes it possible to give priority to the second predetermined state over the first predetermined state.

Feature X10. The gaming machine described in Feature X8, wherein the standby state setting means sets the game machine to a standby state that waits for execution of the second predetermined state when the second predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which the first predetermined state is being executed.

According to feature X10, when a first predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the second predetermined state is in progress, the execution of the first predetermined state is put on hold, and when a second predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the first predetermined state is in progress, the execution of the second predetermined state is put on hold. This makes it possible to ensure that the predetermined states are completed in the order in which they occur.

Feature X11. The gaming machine described in any one of Features X7 to X10, characterized in that the standby state setting means can set a plurality of standby states in which both the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state are on standby.

According to feature X11, multiple standby states can be set in which both the first and second predetermined states are on standby, making it possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined state is entered.

Feature X12. The gaming machine described in Feature X11, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed in the multiple waiting states is completed, the post-wait setting means sets the waiting first predetermined state or the waiting second predetermined state, whichever has a higher predetermined priority, as the execution target of the game state.

According to feature X12, when a predetermined state that is the target of execution in multiple waiting states ends, the waiting first predetermined state or second predetermined state with the higher priority becomes the target of execution of the game state, making it possible to make it easier for the predetermined state with the higher priority to become the target of execution of the game state.

Feature X13. The gaming machine described in Feature X11, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed in the multiple waiting states is ended, the post-wait setting means sets the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state that occurred first as the game state to be executed.

According to feature X13, when a predetermined state to be executed in multiple waiting states ends, the waiting first predetermined state or second predetermined state that occurred first becomes the target of execution of the game state, so that it is possible to make the predetermined states the target of execution of the game state in the order of occurrence.

Feature X14. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The predetermined event is a period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature X14, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when the game is played in a predetermined state such that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features X1 to X14, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Characteristic Group Y>
Feature Y1. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
A transition determination means (a function for executing the correct/incorrect determination process of the main MPU 82) for performing a transition determination (correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to advantageous transition information;
a favorable transition means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) for transitioning to a favorable game state (open/close execution mode) which is more favorable to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the transition determination being a favorable corresponding result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the favorable transition information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
a predetermined transition means (a function of executing subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 325 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments or setting processing for the time-saving result in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments) for transitioning to a predetermined state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than the normal game state (the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving state ST3, or the third time-saving state ST5 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments, and the second time-saving state ST2, the third time-saving states ST3A to ST3C, or the third time-saving states ST41 to ST43 in the twenty-first to twenty-ninth embodiments) without transitioning to the advantageous game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger (the completion of the ceiling number of game rounds or the execution of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments, and
A recognition means (external terminal 333 for a second big win signal) used to make a management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that a game state has been changed;
A recognition control means (a function for executing the process of step S9014 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments) for setting the recognition means to a predetermined recognition state (a state in which the output state of the second jackpot signal is set to a HI level) in response to the transition to the predetermined state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature Y1, in a configuration in which a transition to a favorable game state occurs based on the result of the transition judgment being a favorable corresponding result, when a predetermined transition trigger occurs, the game does not transition to the favorable game state, but transitions to a predetermined state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than in the normal game state. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that a situation in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than in the normal game state has suddenly occurred, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the recognition means is set to a predetermined recognition state in response to the transition to the predetermined state. This makes it possible to grasp the occurrence of the transition in a management device external to the gaming machine, even if a transition to the predetermined state occurs without a transition to the favorable game state, so that the manager of the game hall can grasp this even if an act is performed to fraudulently create a state such as the predetermined state. This makes it possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature Y2. The gaming machine described in Feature Y1, characterized in that the predetermined transition trigger is a result of the transition determination that the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information (a time-saving result in the fifteenth to twentieth and thirtieth embodiments, and a first to third time-saving result in the twenty-first to twenty-ninth embodiments).

Feature Y2 makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects in a configuration in which a transition to a predetermined state occurs based on the result of the transition determination being a predetermined response result.

Feature Y3. A game round is started in response to the execution of the transition determination,
A game round control means (a function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process of the main MPU 82 in the 15th to 30th embodiments) that controls a game round execution means (a first special chart display unit 37a, a second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game round operation is executed in the game round;
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 325) for measuring the number of times the game is played;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature Y1 is characterized in that the specified transition trigger is that the number of times the game has been executed as measured by the specified measurement means becomes a specified trigger number (the ceiling number in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments).

Feature Y3 makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects in a configuration in which a transition to a predetermined state occurs based on the execution of a predetermined number of game turns.

Feature Y4. The predetermined transition means is
a first predetermined transition means (a function of executing a setting process for the time-shortening result of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments) for transitioning to a predetermined state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than the normal game state (a third time-shortening state ST3 or a third time-shortening state ST5 in the fifteenth to twentieth and thirtieth embodiments, and a third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C or a third time-shortening state ST41 to ST43 in the twenty-first to twenty-ninth embodiments) without transitioning to the advantageous game state, based on the result of the transition judgment being a predetermined corresponding result in which the special information corresponds to the predetermined transition information (a time-shortening result in the fifteenth to twentieth and thirtieth embodiments, and a first to third time-shortening result in the twenty-first to twenty-ninth embodiments) as the occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger;
a second predetermined transition means (a function of executing a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments) for transitioning to a predetermined state (a second time-shortened state ST2 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than the normal game state, without transitioning to the advantageous game state, based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger being that the number of times the game has been executed measured by the predetermined measurement means has reached the predetermined trigger number;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature Y3, characterized in that the recognition control means sets the recognition means to the predetermined recognition state in response to a transition to the predetermined state by the first predetermined transition means, and sets the recognition means to the predetermined recognition state in response to a transition to the predetermined state by the second predetermined transition means.

According to feature Y4, whether the transition to the predetermined state is based on the transition determination resulting in a predetermined response result or based on the execution of a predetermined number of game turns, the recognition means is set to the predetermined recognition state, so that regardless of which trigger causes the transition to the predetermined state, it is possible to grasp this in a management device external to the gaming machine.

Feature Y5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features Y1 to Y4, characterized in that the recognition control means includes a switching means (a function for executing the process of step S9021 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments) that switches the recognition means from the predetermined recognition state to another state (a state in which the output state of the second jackpot signal is set to a LOW level) during the predetermined state.

According to feature Y5, when the recognition means is set to a predetermined recognition state in conjunction with a transition to a predetermined state, the recognition means is switched from the predetermined recognition state to another state during the predetermined state. This makes it possible to cause the recognition means to switch to the predetermined recognition state for each of the multiple predetermined states, even if the predetermined states occur multiple times in succession without a normal game state in between.

Feature Y6. The gaming machine described in Feature Y5, characterized in that the switching means switches the recognition means from the predetermined recognition state to the other state based on the fact that a predetermined duration (ON duration) has elapsed since the recognition means was set to the predetermined recognition state in response to the transition to the predetermined state.

According to feature Y6, when the recognition means is set to a predetermined recognition state in response to a transition to a predetermined state, the recognition means is switched from the predetermined recognition state to another state based on the elapse of a predetermined duration since being set to the predetermined recognition state. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for switching the recognition means from the predetermined recognition state to another state while in the predetermined state.

Feature Y7. A gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y6, characterized in that it is equipped with a separate control means (a function for executing the processing of step S9003 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth to thirtieth embodiments) that sets the recognition means to a predetermined recognition state in response to the transition to the advantageous gaming state.

According to feature Y7, the recognition means is set to a predetermined recognition state even when a transition to a favorable gaming state occurs. This makes it possible to use a single recognition means to allow a management device external to the gaming machine to recognize not only a transition to a favorable gaming state, but also a transition to a predetermined state.

Feature Y8. The separate control means maintains the recognition means in the predetermined recognition state when the advantageous game state continues;
The gaming machine described in feature Y7 is characterized in that the recognition control means is equipped with a switching means (a function of executing the processing of step S9021 of the main MPU 82 in the 15th to 30th embodiments) that switches the recognition means from the specified recognition state to another state (a state in which the output state of the second jackpot signal is set to a LOW level) in the middle of the specified state.

According to feature Y8, in a configuration in which the recognition means is set to the predetermined recognition state whether a transition to an advantageous game state occurs or a transition to a predetermined state occurs, the recognition means is maintained in the predetermined recognition state when the advantageous game state continues, whereas in the case of a predetermined state, the recognition means is switched from the predetermined recognition state to another state midway through. As a result, in a configuration in which the recognition means is set to the predetermined recognition state whether a transition to an advantageous game state occurs or a transition to a predetermined state occurs, a management device external to the gaming machine can identify whether the recognition means corresponds to the advantageous game state or the predetermined state based on the period during which the recognition means is maintained in the predetermined recognition state.

Feature Y9: A separate recognition means (external terminal 332 for a first big win signal) is provided to allow the management device to recognize that a game state has been changed;
The separate control means sets the recognition means to the predetermined recognition state and sets the separate recognition means to the predetermined recognition state in response to the transition to the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine described in feature Y7 or Y8, characterized in that the recognition control means sets the recognition means to the predetermined recognition state in response to the transition to the predetermined state, while not setting the other recognition means to the predetermined recognition state.

According to feature Y9, in addition to the recognition means, another recognition means is provided that is set to a predetermined recognition state when a game state transitions to an advantageous game state, but is not set to the predetermined recognition state when a game state transitions to a predetermined state. This makes it possible to select between the recognition means and the another recognition means as the object to be managed in the gaming hall, depending on the event to be managed.

Feature Y10. The gaming machine described in any one of Features Y1 to Y9, characterized in that the recognition control means sets the recognition means to the predetermined recognition state when a new setting related to the predetermined state is made in the predetermined state.

According to feature Y10, the recognition means is set to a predetermined recognition state even when a new setting is made in a predetermined state, so that a management device external to the gaming machine can use the recognition means to grasp not only that a transition to a predetermined state has occurred, but also that a new setting has been made in the predetermined state in relation to the predetermined state.

In addition, for the configuration of features Y1 to Y10, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Characteristics Group Z>
Feature Z1. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
A first predetermined transition means (a function of executing a setting process for the time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the 30th embodiment) for transitioning to a first predetermined state (the third time-saving state ST5 in the 30th embodiment) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state based on the occurrence of a first predetermined transition trigger (the execution of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result in the 30th embodiment);
A second predetermined transition means (a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 325 of the main MPU 82 in the 30th embodiment) for transitioning to a second predetermined state (a second time-shortened state ST2 in the 30th embodiment) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal gaming state, based on the occurrence of a second predetermined transition trigger (the consumption of the ceiling number of games in the 30th embodiment);
A first termination means for terminating the first predetermined state when a first termination trigger occurs (the occurrence of five small wins) other than the number of games played in the first predetermined state reaching a predetermined number (a function for making a positive determination in step SF718 when the value of the third time-saving small win counter 411 of the main MPU 82 in the 30th embodiment is "0");
A second termination means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SF714 of the main MPU 82 in the 30th embodiment) for terminating the second predetermined state when a second termination trigger (consumption of 150 game times) different from the first termination trigger occurs in the second predetermined state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature Z1, the first predetermined state is entered in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than in the normal game state when a first predetermined transition trigger occurs, and the second predetermined state is entered in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than in the normal game state when a second predetermined transition trigger occurs. This makes it possible to diversify the game state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than in the normal game state. In this case, the first predetermined state ends when a first end trigger occurs that is different from the game round reaching a predetermined number in the first predetermined state, so that in the first predetermined state, the player's attention can be directed to things other than the consumption of game rounds. In addition, in the second predetermined state, the second predetermined state ends when a second end trigger different from the first end trigger occurs, so that it is possible to diversify the end conditions of the predetermined state. This makes it possible to preferably realize an increase in the interest of the game.

Feature Z2. The gaming machine described in Feature Z1, characterized in that the second termination trigger is that the number of game plays reaches a termination-corresponding number (150 times) that corresponds to the second predetermined state.

According to feature Z2, when the number of game plays in the second predetermined state reaches the number of play plays corresponding to the second predetermined state, the second predetermined state ends, so that in the second predetermined state, it is possible to focus the player's attention on the completion of game plays.

Feature Z3. A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or Z2, characterized in that it is equipped with a separate termination means (a function for making a positive determination in step SF718 when the value of the third time-saving game counter 412 of the main MPU 82 in the 30th embodiment is "0") that terminates the first predetermined state when the number of games executed in the first predetermined state reaches the number of games corresponding to the termination (30 games).

According to feature Z3, the first predetermined state ends not only when the first end trigger occurs, but also when the number of game plays reaches the end-corresponding number corresponding to the first predetermined state, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to various events in the first predetermined state. In addition, when the configuration of feature Z2 is provided, the object that the player should pay attention to when grasping the end triggers of the first and second predetermined states is the same in that the number of game plays reaches the corresponding end-corresponding number, so that it is possible to easily understand the game content in the predetermined state.

Feature Z4. A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3, characterized in that the first end trigger and the second end trigger differ in their likelihood of occurring.

According to feature Z4, the first termination trigger and the second termination trigger differ in their likelihood of occurring, making it possible to diversify the specified state in terms of the ease with which the specified state ends.

Feature Z5. A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z4, characterized in that the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state differ in the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature Z5, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state differ in the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means. This makes it possible to diversify the predetermined states not only in terms of the end conditions but also in terms of the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature Z6. A variable ball entry means (special telephone winning device 32) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
A variable entry control means for executing variable entry control to set the variable entry means to an open state and then to a closed state (a function for executing the processing of step S9706 of the main MPU 82, special line start processing, special line open processing, and special line closed processing);
A means (a function of executing the special call termination process of the main MPU 82) for executing a variable control state in which the variable ball entry control is executed based on the result of the award determination being a predetermined corresponding result (small winning result) in which the special information corresponds to the predetermined corresponding information, and for enabling the game state to be maintained before and after the variable control state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features Z1 to Z5, characterized in that the first termination trigger occurs when the number of times the specified corresponding result occurs reaches the termination trigger number (5 times).

According to feature Z6, the first predetermined state ends when the number of times the predetermined response result occurs reaches the end trigger number, so it is possible to focus the player's attention on whether or not the predetermined response result occurs in the first predetermined state.

Feature Z7. A standby state setting means for setting the execution target of the game state to a standby state in one of the first and second predetermined states to wait for the execution of the other of the first and second predetermined states (a function of making a positive determination in step SF505 of the main MPU 82 in the 30th embodiment and executing the processing of step SF508);
A post-standby setting means for setting the other predetermined state in the standby state as the execution target of the game state when the one predetermined state is ended in the standby state (a function for executing the processing of steps SF719 to SF722 of the main MPU 82 in the 30th embodiment);
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature Z7, when one of the first and second predetermined states is in a predetermined state, a standby state may be set to wait for the execution of the other predetermined state, and when the predetermined state to be executed is completed in the standby state, the predetermined state in the standby state becomes the target for execution. This allows a situation in which one predetermined state is the target for execution, and the other predetermined state that may be the target for execution thereafter may be in standby, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined states are executed.

Feature Z8. The gaming machine described in Feature Z7, characterized in that when an end trigger occurs in the standby state that corresponds to the other of the first and second end triggers, the other of the standby states ends without being set as an execution target.

According to feature Z8, not only does a predetermined state that is waiting to be executed subsequently become an execution target, but it may also end without becoming an execution target. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined states are executed. In addition, since the configuration of feature Z1 is provided and the first end trigger of the first predetermined state and the second end trigger of the second predetermined state are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to each of the end triggers of the predetermined state that is the execution target and the end trigger of the predetermined state that is waiting, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature Z9. The gaming machine described in Feature Z8, characterized in that the first end trigger and the second end trigger that correspond to one of the predetermined states are more likely to occur than the first end trigger and the second end trigger that correspond to the other of the predetermined states.

According to feature Z9, in a situation where one predetermined state is to be executed and the other predetermined state is in a standby state, the trigger for terminating one predetermined state is more likely to occur earlier than the trigger for terminating the other predetermined state. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the other predetermined state will end in a standby state.

Feature Z10. A gaming machine described in any one of features Z7 to Z9, characterized in that the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state is longer per unit period when the game is played so that the game balls flow down the game area in the same manner in the other predetermined state than in the one predetermined state.

According to feature Z10, in a situation where one predetermined state is the execution target and the other predetermined state is in a standby state, the other predetermined state has a higher frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means than the one predetermined state, so the player will expect the end trigger of one predetermined state to occur before the end trigger of the other predetermined state occurs.

In addition, for the configuration of features Z1 to Z10, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Feature group a>
Feature a1. A game play performance control means (a function for executing a process of determining a variation pattern of the sound and light side MPU 93 in the 15th embodiment) that controls a game play performance means (a pattern display device 41) so that a game play performance is executed in a game play;
A determination means for determining a predetermined execution content (a variable display period of a game) of the game-time performance (a function for executing a specific process of the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth and nineteenth embodiments);
a predetermined transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a predetermined state (first time-shortened state ST1, second time-shortened state ST2, and third time-shortened state ST3 in the fifteenth and nineteenth embodiments) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (a function for executing the process of step S8406, step S8605, and step S8705 in the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SA907, step SB105, and step SB204 in the main MPU 82 in the nineteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a mode change means for changing the determination mode of the specified execution content depending on the progress of the specified state (in the 15th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S9102 to S9116 and the processing of steps S9201 to S9208 in the main MPU 82, and in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SB504 to SB511 in the main MPU 82).

According to feature a1, the manner in which the predetermined execution content of the game play presentation changes depending on the progress of the predetermined state. This makes it possible to diversify the predetermined execution content of the game play presentation in the predetermined state while adapting it to the progress of the predetermined state. This makes it possible to effectively improve the interest of the game.

Feature a2. The gaming machine described in feature a1, characterized in that the predetermined execution content corresponds to the execution period of the game play presentation.

According to feature a2, the manner in which the execution period of the game play performance is determined changes depending on the progress of the specified state. This makes it possible to diversify the execution period of the game play performance in a specified state while adapting it to the progress of the specified state.

Feature a3. Based on the occurrence of an update event (consumption of game times) in the predetermined state, an update means (a function for executing the process of step S9101 in the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB503 in the master MPU 82 in the nineteenth embodiment) is provided for updating information stored in a trigger memory area (a state duration counter 327 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a time-saving duration counter 375 in the nineteenth embodiment)
The gaming machine according to feature a1 or a2, wherein the mode change means changes the determination mode of the specified execution content according to the information in the trigger memory area.

According to feature a3, the manner in which the predetermined execution content of the game play presentation changes depending on the number of update events that occur in a predetermined state. This makes it possible to diversify the predetermined execution content of the game play presentation in a predetermined state while matching it to the number of update events that occur in the predetermined state.

Feature a4. The gaming machine according to any one of features a1 to a3, characterized in that the mode change means includes a final setting means for changing the determination mode of the predetermined execution content in the last game round in the predetermined state from the determination mode of the predetermined execution content in the previous game rounds in the predetermined state (a function for executing the processing of steps S9209 and S9210 by referring to the game round period table 315 for the third stage time reduction in the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps SB512 and SB513 after executing the processing of step SB505 in the master MPU 82 in the nineteenth embodiment).

According to feature a4, the manner in which the predetermined execution content of the game-run presentation in the last game run in the specified state is determined is different from the manner in which the predetermined execution content of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs in the specified state is determined. This makes it possible to execute the game-run presentation in a manner suitable for the last game run in the specified state.

Feature a5. The gaming machine described in feature a4, wherein the final setting means makes the execution period of the game-run presentation in the final game run in the predetermined state longer or more likely to be longer than the execution periods of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs in the predetermined state.

According to feature a5, the execution period of the game-run presentation for the last game run in a given state is longer or is likely to be longer than the execution period of the game-run presentation for the previous game runs in the given state, making it possible to provide the presentation corresponding to the last game run in the given state with ample time to spare.

Feature a6. The mode changing means is
a first mode setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9209 and S9210 by referring to the first-stage time-saving game duration table 313 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the determination mode of the predetermined execution content to a first determination mode (a mode in which the variable display period of the game duration is determined by referring to the first-stage time-saving game duration table 313) from the start of the predetermined state until the occurrence of a predetermined reference trigger (the consumption of 20 game durations);
A second mode setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S9209 and S9210 by referring to the game time period table 314 for the second stage time reduction of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the determination mode of the predetermined execution content to a second determination mode (a mode in which the variable display period of the game time is determined by referring to the game time period table 314 for the second stage time reduction) after the occurrence of the predetermined reference trigger in the predetermined state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features a1 to a5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature a6, the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-time presentation is the first determination mode from the start of the predetermined state until the occurrence of the predetermined reference trigger, and the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-time presentation is the second determination mode after the occurrence of the predetermined reference trigger in the predetermined state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-time presentation in the predetermined state is changed for each game.

Feature a7. The gaming machine described in feature a6, characterized in that the mode change means, when a termination condition is satisfied in the predetermined state and the predetermined state is subsequently executed, sets the determination mode of the predetermined execution content in the first game of the subsequently executed predetermined state to the first determination mode set by the first mode setting means (a function of executing the process of step SB413 or step SB421 of the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment).

According to feature a7, if a predetermined state is executed following a predetermined state after an end condition is met in the predetermined state, the determination mode of the predetermined performance content of the game round performance in the first game round of the subsequently executed predetermined state becomes the first determination mode again. This makes it possible to determine the predetermined execution content of the game round performance in the determination mode corresponding to the start of the latter predetermined state even if two predetermined states are executed consecutively.

Feature a8. A first information setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8408, S8607, and S8707 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting information in a state corresponding storage area (the state determination counter 326 in the fifteenth embodiment) to the first information ("1") when the predetermined state is started;
A second information setting means (a function for executing the process of step S9104 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the information in the state corresponding storage area to second information ("2") when the predetermined reference trigger occurs in the predetermined state;
Equipped with
the first behavior setting means sets a determination behavior of the predetermined execution content to the first determination behavior when the information in the state corresponding storage area is the first information;
The gaming machine described in feature a6 or a7, characterized in that the second mode setting means sets the determination mode of the specified execution content to the second determination mode when the information in the status corresponding memory area is the second information.

According to feature a8, when a predetermined state is initiated, the information in the state-corresponding memory area becomes first information, and when the information in the state-corresponding memory area is the first information, the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-round presentation becomes the first determination mode. Also, when a predetermined reference trigger occurs in a predetermined state, the information in the state-corresponding memory area becomes second information, and when the information in the state-corresponding memory area is the second information, the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-round presentation becomes the second determination mode. This makes it possible to identify the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-round presentation by referencing the information in the state-corresponding memory area, thereby reducing the processing load for identifying the determination mode of the predetermined execution content.

Feature a9. A third information setting means (a function for executing the process of step S9111 or step S9116 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) is provided to set the information in the state corresponding storage area to third information ("0" or "3") when a specific reference event occurs in the predetermined state;
The mode change means includes a third mode setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S9209 and S9210 by referring to the game time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the determination mode of the predetermined execution content to a third determination mode (a mode in which the variable display period of the game time is determined by referring to the game time period table 315 for the third stage time reduction) when the information in the state corresponding memory area is the third information,
The gaming machine described in feature a8, wherein the first information, the second information, and the third information are numerical information that are consecutive in a predetermined order.

According to feature a9, by referring to the information in the state-corresponding memory area, it is possible to specify whether the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-time presentation should be the first determination mode, the second determination mode, or the third determination mode. In addition, since the first information, the second information, and the third information are set as numerical information in a predetermined order in the state-corresponding memory area, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects without setting a flag area for each of the first information, the second information, and the third information individually.

Feature a10. A specific storage means (main ROM 83) is provided that stores in advance a first determination mode information group (play time period table 313 for first stage time reduction) corresponding to the first determination mode, a second determination mode information group (play time period table 314 for second stage time reduction) corresponding to the second determination mode, and a read information group (play time period address table 311) in which read information (start address) for reading each of the first determination mode information group and the second determination mode information group is set;
The read information group is set such that the read information of the first determination mode information group is set in a memory area corresponding to a first address ("00A1H"), and the read information of the second determination mode information group is set in a memory area corresponding to a second address ("00A2H");
the first behavior setting means derives the first address by utilizing the first information, and uses the read information of the first determination behavior information group read from the read information group based on the derived first address to read the first determination behavior information group, thereby causing the first determination behavior information group to be used by the determination means;
The gaming machine described in feature A8 or A9, characterized in that the second mode setting means derives the second address using the second information, and reads out the second determination mode information group by using the read information of the second determination mode information group read from the read information group based on the derived second address, thereby causing the second determination mode information group to be used in the determination means.

According to feature a10, the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-time presentation becomes the first determination mode by referring to the first determination mode information group, and the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-time presentation becomes the second determination mode by referring to the second determination mode information group. In addition, since a read information group in which read information for reading out each of the first determination mode information group and the second determination mode information group is set is pre-stored in a specific storage means, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading out the first determination mode information group and the second determination mode information group.

In this case, when the first information is stored in the state corresponding memory area, the first address of the read information group is derived using the first information, and the first determination mode information group is read out by using the read information of the first determination mode information group read out from the read information group based on the derived first address. Also, when the second information is stored in the state corresponding memory area, the second address of the read information group is derived using the second information, and the second determination mode information group is read out by using the read information of the second determination mode information group read out from the read information group based on the derived second address. In other words, in order to read out the corresponding read information from the read information group, the information in the state corresponding memory area for identifying each situation in a predetermined state is used. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature a11. The first mode setting means derives the first address by executing an address derivation process (the process of steps S9204 to S9206 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) using the first information, and reads out the first determination mode information group by using the read-out information of the first determination mode information group read out from the read-out information group based on the derived first address;
The gaming machine described in feature a10, characterized in that the second mode setting means derives the second address by executing the address derivation process using the second information, and reads out the second determination mode information group by utilizing the read-out information of the second determination mode information group read from the read-out information group based on the derived second address.

According to feature a11, when deriving an address using information in the state-associated memory area, a common address derivation process is executed regardless of the situation in a given state. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature a12. The gaming machine described in feature a11, characterized in that the difference between the second address and the first address corresponds to the difference between the second information and the first information.

According to feature a12, since the difference between the second address and the first address corresponds to the difference between the second information and the first information, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration of the address derivation process for deriving an address by using information in the state corresponding memory area from becoming complicated.

Feature a13. The gaming machine according to feature a11 or a12, characterized in that the address derivation process is a process of deriving an address to be referenced in the read information group by adding information corresponding to the information in the state corresponding memory area to a start address set in the read information group.

According to feature a13, the address to be referenced in the read information group is derived by adding information corresponding to the information in the state-corresponding memory area to the starting address set in the read information group, so that it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the address derivation process for deriving an address using the information in the state-corresponding memory area.

Feature a14. Based on the occurrence of an update event (consumption of game times) in the predetermined state, an update means (a function of executing the process of step S9101 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) updates the information stored in the trigger memory area (the state duration counter 327 in the fifteenth embodiment) to approach the end target information (the value of "0");
A means for setting first start target information ("20") in the trigger memory area when the predetermined state is started (a function for executing the processes of steps S8407, S8606, and S8706 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
the predetermined reference trigger is that when the predetermined state is started, information in the trigger storage area in which the first start target information is set becomes the end target information;
This gaming machine is
A means for setting second start target information ("79", "129", or "29") in the trigger memory area when the predetermined reference trigger occurs (a function for executing the processes of steps S9105 to S9109 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment);
A means for terminating a state in which the determination mode of the predetermined execution content is set to the second determination mode by the second mode setting means when the predetermined reference trigger occurs, in which the information in the trigger storage area in which the second start target information is set becomes the end target information (a function for executing the processes of steps S9110 to S9112 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features a6 to a13, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature a14, when a predetermined state is started, the first start target information set in the trigger memory area is updated based on the occurrence of an update event, becoming end target information, changing the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-run presentation from the first determination mode to the second determination mode, and in this case, the second start target information set in the trigger memory area is updated based on the occurrence of an update event, becoming end target information, thereby ending the situation in which the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-run presentation is the second determination mode. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for identifying the end trigger of each situation in a predetermined state.

Feature a15. The gaming machine described in feature a14, characterized in that the control means having the determination means includes a means for transmitting predetermined transmission information (time-saving command) including information in the trigger memory area to the game play presentation control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S9113 to S9115 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment).

According to feature a15, the predetermined transmission information including the information of the trigger memory area is transmitted to the game presentation control means, so that the game presentation control means can identify the progress of each situation in a predetermined state.

Feature a16: A first information setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8408, S8607, and S8707 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting information in a state corresponding storage area (the state determination counter 326 in the fifteenth embodiment) to the first information ("1") when the predetermined state is started;
A second information setting means (a function for executing the process of step S9104 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the information in the state corresponding storage area to second information ("2") when the predetermined reference trigger occurs in the predetermined state;
Equipped with
the first behavior setting means sets a determination behavior of the predetermined execution content to the first determination behavior when the information in the state corresponding storage area is the first information;
the second behavior setting means sets a determination behavior of the predetermined execution content to the second determination behavior when the information in the state corresponding storage area is the second information;
The gaming machine described in feature a15, wherein the predetermined transmission information also includes information of the status corresponding memory area.

According to feature a16, when a predetermined state is initiated, the information in the state-corresponding memory area becomes first information, and when the information in the state-corresponding memory area is the first information, the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-round presentation becomes the first determination mode. In addition, when a predetermined reference trigger occurs in a predetermined state, the information in the state-corresponding memory area becomes second information, and when the information in the state-corresponding memory area is the second information, the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-round presentation becomes the second determination mode. As a result, the determination mode of the predetermined execution content of the game-round presentation can be identified by referring to the information in the state-corresponding memory area, so it is possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the determination mode of the predetermined execution content.

In addition, since the specified transmission information includes not only information from the trigger memory area but also information from the state corresponding memory area, the game play presentation control means can identify which of the specified states the game is in based on the specified transmission information, and can also identify the progress of the identified state.

Feature a17. The gaming machine described in feature a15 or a16, characterized in that the game round presentation control means includes presentation content determination means (a function for executing the time-saving presentation control process of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 15th embodiment) that determines the presentation content in the game round presentation means based on the information in the trigger memory area that is set in the predetermined transmission information.

According to feature a17, when the game play presentation control means determines the content of the presentation in the game play presentation means, the game play presentation control means can execute a presentation according to the progress of each situation in a specified state simply by making the determination based on the information set in the specified transmission information.

Feature a18. The gaming machine according to feature a17, characterized in that the presentation content determination means includes a regulating means (a function for executing the process of step S9409 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the fifteenth embodiment) that prevents a regulated presentation from being executed if the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information is regulated information, regardless of whether the determination mode of the specified execution content is the first determination mode or the second determination mode.

According to feature a18, if the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information is regulated information, the regulated performance is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the regulated performance from being executed when the progress status in each situation is a regulated situation. In addition, it is possible to determine from the specified transmission information whether or not to restrict the execution of such a regulated performance.

Feature a19. An acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a second special chart reserve area 112) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
Equipped with
The game round is executed in response to the execution of the award determination,
The gaming machine includes a destination specifying means (a function of executing a pre-reading process of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for specifying information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the award determination, at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the award determination;
The effect content determination means includes a means for executing a predetermined special effect (special hold display) corresponding to the information specified by the destination determination means at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination (a function for executing the process of step S9410 in the sound/light side MPU 93 in the fifteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature a18, wherein the regulating means prevents the specified special effect from being executed as the regulated effect when the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information is regulated information which is information indicating that the number of occurrences of the update event required until the information in the trigger memory area becomes the termination target information is within a specified target number of times.

According to feature a19, if the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information indicates that the number of occurrences of the update event required until the information in the trigger memory area becomes the end target information is within the range of the specified target number of times, the execution of the special effect corresponding to the previously specified result is restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the special effect from being executed in a situation where the end of each situation in the specified state is approaching. In addition, it is possible to determine from the specified transmission information whether or not to restrict the execution of such a restricted effect.

Feature a20. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features a1 to a19, characterized in that the specified state is a gaming state in which the period per unit period in which the specified ball entry means is in the open state is longer than the normal gaming state when a game is played so that game balls flow down the gaming area in the same manner.

According to feature a20, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-eligible information, when the game is played in such a way that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, in the predetermined state, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features a1 to a20, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group W, feature group X, feature group Y, feature group Z, and feature group A can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature group b>
Feature b1. A first control means (the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment);
A second control means (a sound/light side MPU 93 and a display side MPU 103) for controlling the execution of a performance in the performance execution means (the pattern display device 41) based on the transmission information transmitted from the first control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
An update means (a function for executing the process of step S9101 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for updating information stored in a trigger memory area (the state duration counter 327 in the fifteenth embodiment) to approach termination target information (a value of "0") based on the occurrence of an update event (consumption of game times) in a predetermined game state (the first stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 in the fifteenth embodiment);
When the information in the trigger memory area becomes the termination target information in the predetermined game status, a status setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9104 to S9109 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) sets a specific game status (a second stage of the time-saving status ST1 to ST3 in the fifteenth embodiment) different from the predetermined game status;
Equipped with
The first control means is provided with a predetermined transmission means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9113 to S9115 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for transmitting predetermined transmission information (a time-saving command) including information on the trigger memory area to the second control means,
The second control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a performance content determination means (a function of executing performance control processing during time reduction of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 15th embodiment) that determines the performance content in the performance execution means based on the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information.

According to feature b1, in a specified game situation, the information in the trigger memory area is updated based on the occurrence of an update event, and becomes end target information, thereby terminating the specified game situation and entering a specific game situation. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for identifying the end trigger of the specified game situation. In this case, the specified transmission information including the information in the trigger memory area is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, and when the second control means determines the content of the performance in the performance execution means, it becomes possible to execute a performance according to the progress of the specified game situation simply by making the decision based on the information set in the specified transmission information. This makes it possible to preferably control the execution of the performance.

Feature b2. A first setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8407, S8606, and S8706 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) is provided for setting the first start target information ("20") in the trigger memory area when the predetermined game situation is started;
The gaming machine described in feature b1 is characterized in that the situation setting means sets the specific gaming situation when the information in the trigger memory area in which the first start target information is set becomes the end target information when the specified gaming situation is started.

According to feature b2, when a predetermined game situation is started, if the information in the trigger memory area in which the first start target information is set becomes the end target information, the predetermined game situation ends and a specific game situation occurs, making it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

Feature b3. A second setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S9105 to S9109 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) is provided for setting second start target information ("79", "129" or "29") in the trigger memory area when the specific game situation is started;
The situation setting means sets a game situation different from the specific game situation when the information in the trigger memory area in which the second start target information is set becomes the end target information when the specific game situation is started,
The gaming machine described in feature b2 is characterized in that the presentation content determination means determines the presentation content in the presentation execution means based on the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information, regardless of whether the specified game status is the specified game status or the specific game status.

According to feature b3, in a configuration in which the end trigger for each of the predetermined game status and the specific game status is identified by referencing the information in the trigger memory area, the second control means determines the presentation content in the presentation execution means based on the information in the trigger memory area set in the predetermined transmission information transmitted from the first control means, regardless of whether it is the predetermined game status or the specific game status. This makes it possible to standardize the processing configuration while making the presentation content in each of the predetermined game status and the specific game status correspond to the progress of each status.

Feature b4. A first information setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8408, S8607, and S8707 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the information of the state corresponding storage area (the state determination counter 326 in the fifteenth embodiment) to the first information ("1") when the predetermined game state is reached;
A second information setting means (a function for executing the process of step S9104 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the information in the state corresponding memory area to the second information ("2") when the specific game state is reached;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature b3, wherein the predetermined transmission information also includes information of the state corresponding memory area.

According to feature b4, when the game status is a predetermined one, the information in the state corresponding memory area becomes the first information, and when the game status is a specific one, the information in the state corresponding memory area becomes the second information, so that it is possible to identify whether the game status is a predetermined one or a specific one by checking the information in the state corresponding memory area. In this case, since the predetermined transmission information includes not only the information in the trigger memory area but also the information in the state corresponding memory area, the second control means can identify whether the game status is a predetermined one or a specific one based on the predetermined transmission information, and can also identify the progress of the identified situation.

Feature b5. The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b4, characterized in that the presentation content determination means includes a regulating means (a function for executing the process of step S9409 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the fifteenth embodiment) that prevents a regulated presentation from being executed if the information in the trigger memory area set in the predetermined transmission information is regulated information.

According to feature b5, if the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information is regulated information, the regulated performance is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the regulated performance from being executed when the progress status in the specified game status is a regulated status. In addition, it is possible to determine from the specified transmission information whether or not to restrict the execution of such a regulated performance.

Feature b6. A first setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8407, S8606, and S8706 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the first start target information ("20") in the trigger memory area when the predetermined game situation is started;
A second setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S9105 to S9109 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting second start target information ("79", "129" or "29") in the trigger memory area when the specific game situation is started;
Equipped with
the situation setting means sets the specific game situation when the information in the trigger memory area in which the first start target information is set becomes the end target information when the predetermined game situation is started, and sets a game situation different from the specific game situation when the information in the trigger memory area in which the second start target information is set becomes the end target information when the specific game situation is started,
The gaming machine described in feature b5 is characterized in that the regulating means prevents a regulated performance from being executed when the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information is regulated information, regardless of whether the specified gaming status is the specified gaming status or the specific gaming status.

According to feature b6, if the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information is regulated information, the regulated performance is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the regulated performance from being executed when the progress status in each of the specified game status and the specific game status is a regulated status. In addition, it is possible to determine from the specified transmission information whether or not to restrict the execution of such a regulated performance.

Feature b7. An acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a second special chart reserve area 112) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
Equipped with
The gaming machine includes a destination specifying means (a function of executing a pre-reading process of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for specifying information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the award determination, at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the award determination;
The effect content determination means includes a means for executing a predetermined special effect (special hold display) corresponding to the information specified by the destination determination means at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination (a function for executing the process of step S9410 in the sound/light side MPU 93 in the fifteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature b5 or b6, wherein the regulating means prevents the specified special effect from being executed as the regulated effect when the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information is regulated information which is information indicating that the number of occurrences of the update event required until the information in the trigger memory area becomes the termination target information is within a specified target number of times.

According to feature b7, if the information in the trigger memory area set in the specified transmission information indicates that the number of occurrences of the update event required until the information in the trigger memory area becomes the target end information is within the range of the specified target number of times, the execution of the specified special effect corresponding to the previously specified result is restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the execution of the specified special effect when the end of the specified game situation is approaching. In addition, it is possible to determine from the specified transmission information whether or not to restrict the execution of such a restricted effect.

Feature b8. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
A means for setting the predetermined ball entry means to a predetermined state (time-shortened states ST1 to ST3) in which the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period is longer than the normal game state when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner (a function for executing the processing of step S8406, step S8605, or step S8705 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b7, characterized in that the predetermined gaming situation and the specific gaming situation are situations included in one of the predetermined states.

According to feature b8, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, in a predetermined state, the advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when the game is played so that the gaming balls flow down the game area in the same manner differs from the normal game state. In a configuration in which a predetermined game situation and a specific game situation are included in one predetermined state, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

In addition, for the configuration of features b1 to b8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature group c>
Feature c1. A performance execution means (symbol display device 41) capable of executing a specific performance (performance for game play);
A performance control means (a sound/light side MPU 93 and a display side MPU 103) for controlling the performance execution means so that the specific performance is executed;
A determination means for determining the predetermined execution content (variable display period of the game) of the specific performance (a function for executing a specific process of the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the 15th and 19th embodiments);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determining means is
A first mode setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9209 and S9210 by referring to the game time period table 313 for the first stage time reduction of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the determination mode of the predetermined execution content to a first determination mode (a mode in which the variable display period of the game time is determined by referring to the game time period table 313 for the first stage time reduction) when the predetermined game status is (the first stage of the time reduction status ST1 to ST3 in the fifteenth embodiment);
In the case of a specific game situation (the second stage of the time-saving states ST1 to ST3 in the fifteenth embodiment), a second mode setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9209 and S9210 by referring to the game-repeat period table 314 for the second stage time-saving of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) sets the determination mode of the predetermined execution content to a second determination mode (a mode in which the variable display period of the game-repeat is determined by referring to the game-repeat period table 314 for the second stage time-saving);
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
A first information setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8408, S8607, and S8707 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting information in a state corresponding storage area (the state determination counter 326 in the fifteenth embodiment) to the first information ("1") when the predetermined game state is reached;
A second information setting means (a function for executing the process of step S9104 of the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the information in the state corresponding memory area to the second information ("2") when the specific game state is reached;
A specific storage means (main ROM 83) that stores in advance a first determination mode information group (a game time period table 313 for a first stage time reduction) corresponding to the first determination mode, a second determination mode information group (a game time period table 314 for a second stage time reduction) corresponding to the second determination mode, and a read information group (a game time period address table 311) in which read information (start addresses) for reading out each of the first determination mode information group and the second determination mode information group is set;
Equipped with
The read information group is set such that the read information of the first determination mode information group is set in a memory area corresponding to a first address ("00A1H"), and the read information of the second determination mode information group is set in a memory area corresponding to a second address ("00A2H");
the first behavior setting means derives the first address by utilizing the first information, and uses the read information of the first determination behavior information group read from the read information group based on the derived first address to read the first determination behavior information group, thereby causing the first determination behavior information group to be used by the determination means;
The second mode setting means derives the second address using the second information, and uses the read-out information of the second determination mode information group read from the read-out information group based on the derived second address to read out the second determination mode information group, thereby causing the second determination mode information group to be used in the determination means.

According to feature c1, in a specified game situation, the determination mode of the specified execution content of the specific presentation becomes the first determination mode, and in a specified game situation, the determination mode of the specified execution content of the specific presentation becomes the second determination mode, so that it is possible to make the determination mode of the specified execution content of the specific presentation different depending on each game situation. Also, by referencing the first determination mode information group, the determination mode of the specified execution content of the specific presentation becomes the first determination mode, and by referencing the second determination mode information group, the determination mode of the specified execution content of the specific presentation becomes the second determination mode. Also, since a read information group in which read information for reading each of the first determination mode information group and the second determination mode information group is set is pre-stored in the specific storage means, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading the first determination mode information group and the second determination mode information group.

In this case, when first information is stored in the state corresponding memory area, the first address of the read information group is derived using the first information, and the first determination mode information group is read out by using the read information of the first determination mode information group read out from the read information group based on the derived first address. Also, when second information is stored in the state corresponding memory area, the second address of the read information group is derived using the second information, and the second determination mode information group is read out by using the read information of the second determination mode information group read out from the read information group based on the derived second address. In other words, the information in the state corresponding memory area for identifying each game status is used in order to read out the corresponding read information from the read information group. This makes it possible to perform optimal execution control of the presentation.

Feature c2. The gaming machine described in feature c1, characterized in that the predetermined execution content corresponds to the execution period of the specific performance.

According to feature c2, the manner in which the execution period of a specific effect is determined changes depending on the game situation, making it possible to diversify the execution period of a specific effect while adapting it to the game situation. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature c3. The first mode setting means derives the first address by executing an address derivation process (the process of steps S9204 to S9206 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) using the first information, and reads out the first determination mode information group by using the readout information of the first determination mode information group read out from the readout information group based on the derived first address;
The gaming machine described in feature c1 or c2, characterized in that the second mode setting means derives the second address by executing the address derivation process using the second information, and reads out the second determination mode information group by utilizing the read-out information of the second determination mode information group read from the read-out information group based on the derived second address.

According to feature c3, when deriving an address using information in the state-associated memory area, a common address derivation process is executed in any situation. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature c4. The gaming machine described in feature c3, characterized in that the difference between the second address and the first address corresponds to the difference between the second information and the first information.

According to feature c4, since the difference between the second address and the first address corresponds to the difference between the second information and the first information, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration of the address derivation process for deriving an address using information in the state corresponding memory area from becoming complicated.

Feature c5. The gaming machine according to feature c3 or c4, characterized in that the address derivation process is a process of deriving an address to be referenced in the read information group by adding information corresponding to the information in the state corresponding memory area to a start address set in the read information group.

According to feature c5, the address to be referenced in the read information group is derived by adding information corresponding to the information in the state-corresponding memory area to the starting address set in the read information group, so that it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the address derivation process for deriving an address using the information in the state-corresponding memory area.

Feature c6. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
A means for setting the predetermined ball entry means to a predetermined state (time-shortened states ST1 to ST3) in which the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period is longer than the normal game state when a game is played in such a way that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner (a function for executing the processing of step S8406, step S8605 or step S8705 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c5, characterized in that the specified gaming situation and the specific gaming situation are situations included in one of the specified states.

According to feature c6, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, in a predetermined state, the advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when the game is played so that the gaming balls flow down the game area in the same manner differs from the normal game state. In a configuration in which a predetermined game situation and a specific game situation are included in one predetermined state, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

In addition, for the configuration of features c1 to c6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group b and feature group c can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary for the execution control of the presentation to be executed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature group d>
Feature d1. A setting means for setting a predetermined state (first time-shortened state ST1, second time-shortened state ST2, or third time-shortened state ST3 in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in which the advantage of a predetermined event (frequency in which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) is different from that of a normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments, the consumption of a game round of the ceiling number of times, or the execution of a game round corresponding to a time-shortened result) as the execution target of the game state (a function for executing the processing of step S8406 or step S8605 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S9506 of the main MPU 82 in the sixteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S9906 in the seventeenth embodiment);
a continuation means for continuing the predetermined state set as the current execution target without starting the predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger anew when the predetermined trigger occurs in the predetermined state, which is a first response state (a state in which a positive determination is made in step S9505 in the sixteenth embodiment, a state in which a positive determination is made in step S9905 in the seventeenth embodiment, or a state in which a positive determination is made in step SA105 and a positive determination is made in step SA106), (a function for making a positive determination in step S9505 of the master MPU 82 in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for making a positive determination in step S9905 of the master MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment, or a function for making a positive determination in step SA105 and a positive determination in step SA106 of the master MPU 82);
When the predetermined trigger occurs in the situation that is the predetermined state and is a second response situation (a situation in which a negative determination is made in step S9505 in the sixteenth embodiment, a situation in which a negative determination is made in step S9905 in the seventeenth embodiment, or a situation in which a negative determination is made in step SA105 or step SA106), a starting means for newly starting the predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger (a function for making a negative determination in step S9505 of the main MPU 82 in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for making a negative determination in step S9905 of the main MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment, or a function for making a negative determination in step SA105 or step SA106 of the main MPU 82);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature d1, if a predetermined trigger occurs when the situation is a predetermined state and the first corresponding situation, the predetermined state currently being executed is continued, and if a predetermined trigger occurs when the situation is a predetermined state and the second corresponding situation, a new predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger is started. This makes it possible to handle the occurrence of a predetermined trigger in a predetermined state differently depending on the game situation in the predetermined state, making it possible to ideally improve the interest of the game.

Feature d2. The setting means is
a first setting means (a function for executing the process of step S9506 of the main MPU 82 in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S9906 in the seventeenth embodiment) for setting the predetermined state to a first predetermined state (a third time-saving state ST3 in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state, based on the occurrence of a first predetermined event (the execution of a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) as the predetermined event;
a second setting means (a function for executing the process of step S8406 or step S8605 of the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the predetermined state to a second predetermined state (a first time-shortening state ST1 or a second time-shortening state ST2 in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state, based on the occurrence of a second predetermined event (the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments or the consumption of the ceiling number of game turns) as the predetermined event;
Equipped with
the continuing means, when the first predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation in which the second predetermined state is the first corresponding situation, continues the second predetermined state that is currently being executed without starting the first predetermined state anew;
The gaming machine described in feature d1 is characterized in that the starting means starts the first predetermined state anew when the first predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which the second predetermined state is present and the second corresponding situation is present.

According to feature d2, a first predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a first predetermined trigger, and a second predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a second predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to diversify the game state in relation to the degree of advantage of the predetermined event. In this case, if the first predetermined trigger occurs when the situation is the second predetermined state and the first corresponding situation, the second predetermined state that is currently being executed is continued, and if the first predetermined trigger occurs when the situation is the second predetermined state and the second corresponding situation, the first predetermined state is newly started. This makes it possible to vary whether or not the first predetermined state starts when the first predetermined trigger occurs in the second predetermined state depending on the game situation in the second predetermined state, making it possible to preferably realize an increase in the interest of the game.

Feature d3. The gaming machine described in feature d2, characterized in that the degree of advantage of the predetermined event differs between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state.

Feature d3 makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects in a configuration in which the degree of advantage of a specified event differs between the first and second specified states.

Feature d4. A gaming machine according to feature d2 or d3, characterized in that the second predetermined state is more advantageous for the predetermined event than the first predetermined state.

According to feature d4, since the second predetermined state has a higher degree of advantage for the predetermined event than the first predetermined state, when the first predetermined trigger occurs in relation to the degree of advantage, it becomes possible to direct the player's attention to both the first game situation in which the second predetermined state continues and the second game situation in which the first predetermined state is newly started.

Feature d5. Based on the occurrence of an update event (a game number in the sixteenth embodiment, a game number or a small win result in the seventeenth embodiment), an update means (a function for executing the processes of steps S9101 to S9112 and S9116 in the main MPU 82 in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S9803 to S9805 in the main MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment) for updating the end opportunity information stored in the end opportunity memory area (the state determination counter 326 and the state continuation counter 327 in the sixteenth embodiment, the time-saving game number counter 365 and the time-saving small win number counter 366 in the seventeenth embodiment) to approach the end target information (a value of "0");
A means for terminating the predetermined state when the termination trigger information becomes the termination target information in the predetermined state (a function for executing the process of step S8905 in the main MPU 82 in the sixteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S9807 in the main MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Equipped with
The first corresponding situation is a situation in which the end trigger information is in the first information range (in the sixteenth embodiment, the remaining number of times is 50 times or more, in the seventeenth embodiment, the remaining number of small wins is 5 times or more, and in another form of the seventeenth embodiment, the remaining number of small wins is 5 times or more and the remaining number of times is 30 times or more),
The second corresponding situation is a situation in which the end trigger information is in the second information range (in the sixteenth embodiment, the remaining number of times is less than 50, in the seventeenth embodiment, the remaining number of small wins is less than 5, and in another form of the seventeenth embodiment, the remaining number of small wins is less than 5 or the remaining number of times is less than 30).

According to feature d5, when a predetermined trigger occurs in a predetermined state, the predetermined state will either continue or a new predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger will start in relation to the number of update events required to end the predetermined state. This makes it possible to focus the player's attention on the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined trigger in relation to the number of update events required to end the predetermined state, and makes it possible to effectively increase the interest of the game.

Feature d6. The first information range includes a range of information in which the end trigger information is farther from the end target information than the predetermined reference information (in the sixteenth embodiment, the remaining number of times is 50, in the seventeenth embodiment, the remaining number of small wins is 5, and in another form of the seventeenth embodiment, the remaining number of small wins is 5 and the remaining number of times is 30),
A gaming machine described in feature d5, characterized in that the second information range includes a range of information in which the end trigger information is closer to the end target information than the specified reference information.

According to feature d6, if a predetermined trigger occurs when the end of the predetermined state to be executed is not imminent, the predetermined state is continued, and if a predetermined trigger occurs when the end of the predetermined state to be executed is imminent, a new predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger is started. This makes it possible to lengthen the period of the predetermined state by starting a new predetermined state when the end of the current predetermined state is imminent, while giving priority to continuing the current predetermined state.

Feature d7. The gaming machine described in feature d6, characterized in that the predetermined reference information is information that is set in the end trigger memory area when the predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger that occurs in a situation that is the predetermined state is started.

According to feature d7, if the number of occurrences of update events required to end the specified state to be executed is greater than the number of possible occurrences of initial update events in the specified state corresponding to the specified trigger, the specified state to be executed is continued, and if the number of occurrences of update events required to end the specified state to be executed is less than the number of possible occurrences of initial update events in the specified state corresponding to the specified trigger, a new specified state corresponding to the specified trigger is started. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling disadvantaged even if the specified state to be executed is ended midway due to the occurrence of a specified trigger and a new specified state corresponding to the specified trigger is started.

Feature d8. A first update means (a function for executing the process of step S9805 in the main MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment) for updating the first end opportunity information stored in the first end opportunity memory area (the time-saving small win counter 366 in the seventeenth embodiment) to approach the end target information based on the occurrence of a first update event (small win result);
A second update means (a function for executing the process of step S9803 in the main MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment) updates the second end opportunity information stored in the second end opportunity storage area (the time-saving game number counter 365 in the seventeenth embodiment) to approach the end target information based on the occurrence of a second update event (a game number);
A means for terminating the predetermined state when the first termination trigger information becomes termination target information in the predetermined state, and for terminating the predetermined state when the second termination trigger information becomes termination target information in the predetermined state (a function for executing the process of step S9807 in the main MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to any one of features d1 to d4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature d8, the predetermined state ends when the first update event occurs a predetermined number of times, and also ends when the second update event occurs a predetermined number of times. This diversifies the events that the player focuses on in the predetermined state, making it possible to effectively increase the interest of the game.

Feature d9: The first response situation is a situation in which the reference target information, which is a predetermined side of the first end trigger information and the second end trigger information, is a first information range;
A gaming machine described in feature d8, characterized in that the second corresponding situation is a situation in which the reference target information is in the second information range.

According to feature d9, when a predetermined trigger occurs in a predetermined state, it is determined whether to continue the predetermined state of the execution target or to start a new predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger, based on one of the first and second end trigger information. This makes it possible to make it easy for the player to understand which situation will occur.

Feature d10: The first response situation is a situation in which the first end trigger information is in a predetermined information range and the second end trigger information is in a specific information range;
A gaming machine as described in feature d8, characterized in that the second response situation is a situation in which the first end trigger information is not within the specified information range or the second end trigger information is not within the specific information range.

According to feature d10, if the first end trigger information is within a predetermined information range and the second end trigger information is within a specific information range, the predetermined state of the execution target is continued, and if the first end trigger information is not within the predetermined information range or the second end trigger information is not within the specific information range, a new predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger is started. This makes it possible to set strict conditions for continuing the predetermined state of the execution target.

Feature d11. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features d1 to d10, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature d11, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-receiving information, when the game is played in a predetermined state such that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features d1 to d11, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Feature group e>
Feature e1. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 19th embodiment, the consumption of the ceiling number of game times or the execution of a game time corresponding to the time-saving result in the 21st to 23rd embodiments, the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result, the consumption of the ceiling number of game times or the execution of a game time corresponding to the 1st to 3rd time-saving results in the 21st to 23rd embodiments), the advantage of a predetermined event (the frequency at which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) is a predetermined state (the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3 in the 19th embodiment, the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST3, or the third time-saving state ST4 in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) different from the normal game state. A setting means for setting the time-shortening state ST2 to the second time-shortening state ST2 or the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C) (in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SA907, step SB105, or step SB204 in the main MPU 82; in the twenty-first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SC207, step SC305, or step SC404 in the main MPU 82; in the twenty-second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SC704 to step SC706 in the main MPU 82; and in the twenty-third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SC904 to step SC906 in the main MPU 82);
a standby information setting means for setting standby information in a standby storage area (the third time-shortened state counter 374 in the nineteenth embodiment, the third time-shortened standby counter 387 in the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, and the third time-shortened standby counter 387 and the standby target counter 395 in the twenty-third embodiment) when an opportunity occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on standby in a situation where the target of the execution of a game state is the predetermined state (a function for executing the process of step SB206 after a positive determination is made in step SB203 in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC409 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC708 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-second embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps SD101 to SD110 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-third embodiment);
a post-wait setting means for setting the predetermined state corresponding to the wait information as the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state of the execution target ends in a situation where the wait information is stored in the wait storage area (a function for executing the process of step SB409 in the master MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the process of steps SC607 to SC609 in the master MPU 82 in the 21st and 22nd embodiments, and a function for executing the process of steps SD309 to SD311 in the master MPU 82 in the 23rd embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the waiting information setting means prevents a state in which multiple pieces of waiting information are stored in the waiting memory area when an opportunity occurs that makes it possible to wait for the execution of a new specified state when the waiting information is stored in the waiting memory area.

According to feature e1, in a configuration in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event is set to a predetermined state different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, the execution of a new predetermined state may be put on hold when the target of the game state is a predetermined state, and when the target of the execution of the new predetermined state ends in the waiting state, the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting memory area becomes the target of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state is the target of the game state, and a predetermined state that can be the target of execution thereafter is on hold, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined state is executed.

In addition, when a trigger occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold while standby information is stored in the standby memory area, the standby memory area will not have multiple pieces of standby information stored. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which multiple predetermined states are on hold at the same time, and makes it easier for players to understand the content of the waiting predetermined state. This makes it possible to ideally increase the interest of the game.

Feature e2. The gaming machine described in feature e1, characterized in that when an end trigger for the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting memory area occurs, the predetermined state ends without being set to a gaming state.

According to feature e2, a predetermined state that is waiting to be executed may not only be executed later, but may also end without being executed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a predetermined state is executed.

Feature e3. Based on the occurrence of an update event (execution of a game), an update means is provided that executes an update process so as to reduce the number of occurrences of the remaining update events in the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting memory area (a function for executing the process of step SB405 in the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC604 in the main MPU 82 in the 21st and 22nd embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step SD304 in the main MPU 82 in the 23rd embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature e2, wherein the termination trigger is when the number of occurrences of the remaining update events becomes zero.

According to feature e3, if an update event occurs while execution of a specified state is pending, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events of the pending specified state decreases, so that if an update event occurs while execution of a specified state is pending, it becomes possible to gradually approach the side where the trigger for the end of the specified state occurs.

Feature e4. The gaming machine described in feature e3, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed ends while the waiting information is stored in the waiting storage area, the post-wait setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information to the predetermined state that can continue until the remaining number of occurrences of the update event after being updated by the update means until the predetermined state that was the target of execution ends.

According to feature e4, when a predetermined state is waiting and the predetermined state to be executed ends, the predetermined state that can continue until the remaining number of occurrences of the update event at that time is exhausted becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to start the waiting predetermined state from an intermediate state according to the period of time it took from when the predetermined state became a waiting state until it became a target for execution.

Feature e5. As the predetermined state, at least a first state (a 3A time-saving state ST3A in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) and a second state (a 3B time-saving state ST3B in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) exist,
The gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e4, characterized in that the waiting information setting means sets first waiting information ("50") in the waiting memory area as the waiting information when an opportunity occurs that makes it possible to put a new execution of the first state on hold when the target of the game state to be executed is the specified state, and sets second waiting information ("100") in the waiting memory area as the waiting information when an opportunity occurs that makes it possible to put a new execution of the second state on hold when the target of the game state to be executed is the specified state.

According to feature e5, when the first state is on standby, first standby information is set in the standby memory area, and when the second state is on standby, second standby information is set in the standby memory area. This makes it possible to set the standby state according to the type of the specified state that triggered the standby state.

Feature e6. The gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e5, wherein the standby information setting means overwrites the standby information corresponding to the new predetermined state in the standby memory area when an opportunity occurs that allows the execution of the new predetermined state to be put on hold while the standby information is stored in the standby memory area.

According to feature e6, when a trigger occurs that allows execution of a new specified state to be put on hold while standby information is stored in the standby memory area, the standby information corresponding to the new specified state is overwritten in the standby memory area, so that when the specified state to be executed ends, the specified state corresponding to the latest standby trigger can be executed.

Feature e7. Based on the occurrence of an update event (execution of a game), an update means (a function for executing the process of step SB405 in the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC604 in the main MPU 82 in the 22nd embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SD304 in the main MPU 82 in the 23rd embodiment) is provided for executing an update process so as to reduce the number of occurrences of the remaining update events in the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting memory area;
A gaming machine as described in feature e6, characterized in that when the waiting information is overwritten in the waiting memory area, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events of the specified state corresponding to the waiting information becomes the initial number corresponding to the specified state.

According to feature e7, when an update event occurs while the execution of a specific state is being awaited, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events of the waiting specific state decreases, so that when an update event occurs while the execution of a specific state is being awaited, it is possible to gradually approach the side where the end trigger of the specific state occurs. In this case, when a trigger that allows the execution of a new specific state to be awaited occurs in a situation where standby information is stored in the standby storage area, and the standby information is overwritten in the standby storage area, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events of the specific state corresponding to the standby information becomes the initial number corresponding to the specific state, so that when the specific state to be executed ends and the specific state corresponding to the standby information starts, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events of the specific state can be made to be reasonably high.

Feature e8. The gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e5, wherein when an opportunity occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold while the standby information is stored in the standby memory area, the standby information setting means does not set information in the standby memory area in response to the occurrence of the opportunity.

According to feature e8, when a trigger occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold while standby information is stored in the standby memory area, no information is set in the standby memory area in response to the occurrence of that trigger, which simplifies the processing configuration and makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the standby predetermined state.

Feature e9. The gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e5, wherein the waiting information setting means, when an opportunity arises that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold while the waiting information is stored in the waiting memory area, overwrites the waiting information corresponding to the new predetermined state in the waiting memory area if the predetermined state has a higher priority (the priority of the third time-shortening states ST3A to ST3C in the 23rd embodiment) than the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting memory area.

According to feature e9, when an opportunity arises to put the execution of a new predetermined state on hold while standby information is stored in the standby memory area, if the new predetermined state has a higher priority than the predetermined state corresponding to the standby information stored in the standby memory area, the standby information corresponding to the new predetermined state is overwritten in the standby memory area. This makes it possible to put the predetermined state with a higher priority on hold.

Feature e10. The setting means is
a first setting means for setting, as the predetermined state, a first predetermined state (a third time-shortened state ST3 in the 19th embodiment, and third time-shortened states ST3A to ST3C in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state, based on the occurrence of a first predetermined event (the execution of a game round corresponding to a time-shortened result in the 19th embodiment, and the execution of a game round corresponding to a first to third time-shortened result in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) as the predetermined event; and
a second setting means for setting the predetermined state to a second predetermined state (a first time-shortening state ST1 or a second time-shortening state ST2 in the nineteenth, twenty-first to twenty-third embodiments) in which the degree of advantage of the predetermined event is different from the normal game state, based on the occurrence of a second predetermined event (the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the nineteenth, twenty-first to twenty-third embodiments or the consumption of the ceiling number of game turns in the nineteenth, twenty-first to twenty-third embodiments) as the predetermined state (a function for executing the process of step SA907 or step SB105 in the main MPU 82 in the nineteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SC207 or step SC305 in the main MPU 82 in the twenty-first to twenty-third embodiments);
Equipped with
The waiting information setting means sets the waiting information in the waiting storage area based on the occurrence of the first predetermined opportunity in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the second predetermined state;
The gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e9, characterized in that when the second predetermined state to be executed is completed while the waiting information is stored in the waiting memory area, the post-waiting setting means sets the first predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information as the execution target of the game state.

According to feature e10, a first predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event differs from that of a normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a first predetermined trigger, and a second predetermined state in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event differs from that of a normal game state can be executed based on the occurrence of a second predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to diversify the game state in relation to the degree of advantage of the predetermined event. In this case, the configuration is such that the execution of the first predetermined state can be put into a standby state in a situation in which the second predetermined state is in effect, and when the second predetermined state ends while the first predetermined state is on standby, the standby first predetermined state becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which each of the first and second predetermined states is to be executed.

Feature e11. The gaming machine described in feature e10, wherein the waiting information setting means does not set the waiting information in the waiting memory area when the second predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the first predetermined state.

According to feature e11, when the target of the game state is the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state occurs, the standby information is not set in the standby memory area. This makes it possible to limit the types of predetermined states that trigger the setting of the standby information.

Feature e12. The gaming machine described in feature e10 or e11, wherein the second setting means sets the target of the game state to the second predetermined state when the second predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the target of the game state is the first predetermined state.

According to feature e12, if a second predetermined trigger occurs when the target of the game state to be executed is the first predetermined state, the target of the game state to be executed becomes the second predetermined state, making it possible to prioritize the execution of the second predetermined state.

Feature e13. When a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the 19th embodiment, and a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) is executed in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state, a trigger occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold;
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e12, characterized in that when the waiting information is set in the waiting memory area as a result of the execution of the specified game round when the game state to be executed is the specified state, it is equipped with a means for setting the presentation mode of the game round presentation in the specified game round to a waiting presentation mode (in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SB311 and SB312 in the sound-light side MPU 93; in the 21st embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SC513 and SC514 in the sound-light side MPU 93; in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SC812 and SC813 in the sound-light side MPU 93; and in the 23rd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD214 and SD215 in the sound-light side MPU 93).

According to feature e13, when standby information is set in the standby memory area as a result of a specified game round being executed, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the specified game round becomes a standby presentation mode, so that it is possible to make the player aware, by using the game round presentation, that the execution of a new specified state is now on standby in a situation where a specified state is in place.

Feature e14. When a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the 19th embodiment, and a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) is executed in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state, a trigger occurs that enables the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the game state to be executed is the predetermined state and the predetermined game round is executed but the standby information is not set in the standby memory area, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the predetermined game round is changed to a non-standby presentation mode that can occur in a game round other than the predetermined game round (in the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SB306 and SB307 in the sound/light side MPU 93; in the 21st embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC506 and SC507 in the sound/light side MPU 93; in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC806 and SC807 in the sound/light side MPU 93; and in the 23rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD206 and SD207 in the sound/light side MPU 93).

According to feature e14, when the game state of the target game is a predetermined state and a predetermined game round is executed but standby information is not set in the standby memory area, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the predetermined game round becomes a non-standby presentation mode that can also occur in a game round other than the predetermined game round, so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the predetermined game round has occurred.

Feature e15. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e14, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature e15, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-eligible information, when the game is played in such a way that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, in the predetermined state, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features e1 to e15, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Feature f group>
Feature f1. A setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC207, SC305, or steps SD704 to SD711 in the main MPU 82 in the 26th embodiment) for setting the degree of advantage of a predetermined event (the frequency at which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) to a predetermined state (the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C in the 26th embodiment) different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 26th to 29th embodiments, the consumption of the ceiling number of game rounds, or the execution of game rounds corresponding to the 1st to 3rd time-saving results in the 26th to 29th embodiments). In the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE104 to SE113 in the main MPU 82; in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE304 to SE311, SE504 to SE511, SE604 to SE611, or SE704 to SE713 in the main MPU 82; and in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE804 to SE811, steps SF104 to SF111, steps SF204 to SF211, or steps SF404 to SF413 in the main MPU 82).
In a situation where the target of the game state is the predetermined state, when an opportunity occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold, a waiting information setting means (in the 26th embodiment, step SC207, step SC305 or step SC406 in the main MPU 82) sets waiting information in a waiting memory area (the 3A time-saving waiting counter 401, the 3B time-saving waiting counter 402 and the 3C time-saving waiting counter 403, in the 28th embodiment, the 3A time-saving waiting counter 401, the 3B time-saving waiting counter 402, the 3C time-saving waiting counter 403 and the occurrence order memory area 405, in the 29th embodiment, the first waiting counter 406, the second waiting counter 407 and the third waiting counter 408) a function of executing the processes of steps SE104 to SE113 in the main MPU 82 in the 27th embodiment; a function of executing the processes of steps SE304 to SE311, SE504 to SE511, SE604 to SE611, or SE704 to SE713 in the main MPU 82 in the 28th embodiment; and a function of executing the processes of steps SE804 to SE811, SF104 to SF111, SF204 to SF211, or SF404 to SF413 in the main MPU 82 in the 29th embodiment).
a post-wait setting means for setting the predetermined state corresponding to the wait information as the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state of the execution target is completed in a situation where the wait information is stored in the wait storage area (a function for executing the processing of steps SD901 to SD909 in the master MPU 82 in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SE201 to SE209 in the master MPU 82 in the 27th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SE411 to SE413 in the master MPU 82 in the 28th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps SE911 to SE913 or steps SF311 to SF314 in the master MPU 82 in the 29th embodiment);
Equipped with
The standby storage area includes:
A first standby memory area capable of storing the standby information (the third C time-saving standby counter 403 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the third C time-saving standby counter 403 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and the first standby counter 406 in the twenty-ninth embodiment);
A second standby memory area capable of storing the standby information (the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 in the 26th embodiment, the 3B time-saving standby counter 402 in the 28th embodiment, and the second standby counter 407 in the 29th embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature f1, in a configuration in which the degree of advantage of a predetermined event is set to a predetermined state different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, the execution of a new predetermined state may be put on hold when the target of the game state is a predetermined state, and when the target of the game state ends in the waiting state, the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting memory area becomes the target of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state is the target of the game state, and a predetermined state that can be the target of the game state to be executed after that to be put on hold, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined state is executed.

The standby memory area also includes a first standby memory area and a second standby memory area, each capable of storing standby information. This allows multiple predetermined states to be in standby at the same time, and ensures a long period during which the standby state is active. This makes it possible to effectively increase the interest of the game.

Feature f2. A gaming machine according to feature f1, characterized in that when an end trigger for the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting memory area occurs, the predetermined state ends without being set to a gaming state.

According to feature f2, a predetermined state that is waiting to be executed may not only be executed later, but may also end without being executed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a predetermined state is executed.

Feature f3. Based on the occurrence of an update event (execution of a game), an update means is provided that executes an update process so as to reduce the number of occurrences of the remaining update events in the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the waiting storage area (a function for executing the process of steps SD804 to SD806 in the master MPU 82 in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the process of steps SE404 to SE406 in the master MPU 82 in the 28th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of steps SE904 to SE906 or steps SF304 to SF306 in the master MPU 82 in the 29th embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature f2, wherein the termination trigger is when the number of occurrences of the remaining update events becomes zero.

According to feature f3, if an update event occurs while execution of a specific state is pending, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events of the pending specific state decreases, so that if an update event occurs while execution of a specific state is pending, it becomes possible to gradually approach the side where the trigger for the end of the specific state occurs.

Feature f4. The gaming machine described in feature f3, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed ends while the waiting information is stored in the waiting storage area, the post-wait setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information to the predetermined state that can continue until the remaining number of occurrences of the update event after being updated by the update means until the predetermined state that was the execution target ends.

According to feature f4, when a predetermined state is waiting and the predetermined state to be executed ends, the predetermined state that can continue until the remaining number of occurrences of the update event at that time is exhausted becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to start the waiting predetermined state from an intermediate state according to the period of time it took from when the predetermined state became a waiting state until it became the target for execution.

Feature f5. As the predetermined state, at least a first state (a third C time-saving state ST3C in the twenty-sixth to twenty-ninth embodiments) and a second state (a third B time-saving state ST3B in the twenty-sixth to twenty-ninth embodiments) exist,
The gaming machine described in any one of features f1 to f4, characterized in that the waiting information setting means sets first waiting information ("130") in the first waiting memory area as the waiting information when an opportunity occurs that makes it possible to put a new execution of the first state on hold when the target of the game state to be executed is the specified state, and sets second waiting information ("100") in the second waiting memory area as the waiting information when an opportunity occurs that makes it possible to put a new execution of the second state on hold when the target of the game state to be executed is the specified state.

According to feature f5, when the first state is on standby, first standby information is set in the first standby storage area, and when the second state is on standby, second standby information is set in the second standby storage area. This makes it possible to set the standby state according to the type of the specified state that triggered the standby state.

Feature f6. The gaming machine according to any one of features f1 to f5, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed ends in a situation where the waiting information is stored in the first waiting storage area and the waiting information is stored in the second waiting storage area, the post-wait setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information with a higher priority among the waiting information as the execution target of the game state (in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD901 to SD909 in the main MPU 82, and in the 27th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SE201 to SE209 in the main MPU 82).

According to feature f6, when multiple predetermined states are waiting, if the predetermined state to be executed ends, the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information with the higher priority becomes the target to be executed. This makes it possible to give the predetermined state with the higher priority more opportunities to become the target to be executed.

Feature f7. The gaming machine according to any one of features f1 to f6, characterized in that the post-wait setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the wait information stored in the first wait storage area as the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state of the execution target ends in a situation where the wait information is stored in the first wait storage area and the wait information is stored in the second wait storage area (in the 26th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD901 to SD909 in the main MPU 82; in the 27th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE201 to SE209 in the main MPU 82; in the 29th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE911 to SE913 in the main MPU 82).

According to feature f7, when waiting information is stored in both the first waiting memory area and the second waiting memory area, if a predetermined state to be executed ends, the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the first waiting memory area can be set as the execution target of the game state, thereby reducing the processing load for setting the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information as the execution target of the game state.

Feature f8. The gaming machine described in feature f7, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed ends in a situation where the waiting information is stored in the first waiting memory area and the waiting information is stored in the second waiting memory area, the post-wait setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the first waiting memory area as the execution target of the game state, regardless of the order in which the waiting information is set in the corresponding waiting memory area (in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD901 to SD909 in the main MPU 82, and in the 27th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SE201 to SE209 in the main MPU 82).

According to feature f8, when a predetermined state to be executed ends in a situation where waiting information is stored in both the first waiting memory area and the second waiting memory area, the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the first waiting memory area becomes the execution target of the game state, regardless of the order in which the waiting information is set in the corresponding waiting memory area. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the first waiting memory area.

Feature f9. The gaming machine according to feature f6 or f8, wherein the waiting information setting means overwrites the waiting information corresponding to the new predetermined state in the first waiting memory area when an opportunity occurs that allows the execution of the new predetermined state to be put on hold while the waiting information is stored in the first waiting memory area.

According to feature f9, when a trigger occurs that allows execution of a new specified state to be put on hold while wait information is stored in the first wait memory area, the wait information corresponding to the new specified state is overwritten in the first wait memory area, so that when the specified state to be executed ends, the specified state corresponding to the latest wait trigger can be executed.

Feature f10: When an opportunity occurs that allows execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold in a situation in which the wait information is stored in the first wait storage area and the wait information is not stored in the second wait storage area, the wait information setting means sets the wait information corresponding to the new predetermined state in the second wait storage area;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step SE913 or step SF314 of the main MPU 82 in the 29th embodiment) for setting the waiting information stored in the second waiting memory area to the first waiting memory area when the predetermined state to be executed is ended in a situation where the waiting information is stored in the first waiting memory area and the waiting information is stored in the second waiting memory area, and the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the first waiting memory area is set as the target for execution of the game state.

According to feature f10, when an opportunity occurs multiple times that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold when the target of the game state is a predetermined state, the waiting information is set first in the first waiting memory area, and then the waiting information is set in the second waiting memory area. Also, when the predetermined state that is the target of execution ends, the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information stored in the first waiting memory area is made the target of execution, and the waiting information stored in the second waiting memory area is shifted to the first waiting memory area. As a result, when an opportunity occurs multiple times that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold when the target of the game state is a predetermined state, it is possible to make the predetermined states the target of execution in order starting from the one that corresponds to the trigger that occurred first.

Feature f11. The gaming machine described in any one of features f1 to f5, characterized in that when the predetermined state to be executed ends in a situation where the waiting information is stored in the first waiting storage area and the waiting information is stored in the second waiting storage area, the post-waiting setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the waiting information that is earlier in the order stored in the corresponding waiting storage area as the execution target of the game state (a function of executing the processing of steps SE411 to SE413 of the main MPU 82 in the 28th embodiment).

According to feature f11, when a trigger occurs multiple times that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold while the target of execution of the game state is a predetermined state, it is possible to make the predetermined states to be executed in order starting from the trigger that occurred first.

Feature f12. The gaming machine described in feature f10 or f11, wherein when an opportunity occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state corresponding to the setting of the waiting information in the first waiting memory area to be put on hold while the waiting information is stored in the first waiting memory area, the waiting information setting means does not set information in the first waiting memory area in response to the occurrence of the opportunity.

According to feature f12, when a trigger occurs that allows the execution of a new specified state corresponding to the setting of the waiting information in the first waiting memory area while waiting information is stored in the first waiting memory area, the setting of information in the first waiting memory area is not performed in response to the occurrence of the trigger, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration so that the specified states corresponding to the trigger that occurred first are made the target of execution in order.

Feature f13. When a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results) is executed in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state, a trigger occurs that enables the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold;
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in any one of features f1 to f12, characterized in that when the game state to be executed is the specified state and the wait information is set in the wait memory area as a result of the execution of the specified game round, the presentation mode of the game round presentation in the specified game round is set to a wait presentation mode (in the 26th and 29th embodiments, a function of executing the processing of steps SD214 and SD215 in the sound/light side MPU 93, and in the 28th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC513 and SC514 in the sound/light side MPU 93).

According to feature f13, when standby information is set in the standby memory area as a result of a specified play round being executed, the presentation mode of the play round presentation for the specified play round becomes a standby presentation mode, so that it is possible to make the player aware, by using the play round presentation, that the execution of a new specified state is now on standby in a situation where a specified state is in place.

Feature f14. When a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results) is executed in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state, a trigger occurs that allows the execution of a new predetermined state to be put on hold;
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in any one of features f1 to f13, characterized in that, when the game state to be executed is the specified state and the specified game round is executed but the standby information is not set in the standby memory area, the presentation mode of the game round presentation in the specified game round is changed to a non-standby presentation mode that can also occur in a game round other than the specified game round (in the 26th and 29th embodiments, a function of executing the processing of steps SD206 and SD207 in the sound/light side MPU 93, and in the 28th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC506 and SC507 in the sound/light side MPU 93).

According to feature f14, when the game state of the target game is a predetermined state and a predetermined game round is executed but standby information is not set in the standby memory area, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the predetermined game round becomes a non-standby presentation mode that can also occur in a game round other than the predetermined game round, so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the predetermined game round has occurred.

Feature f15. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features f1 to f14, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature f15, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-eligible information, when the game is played in such a way that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, in the predetermined state, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features f1 to f15, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Feature g group>
Feature g1. A setting means (a function for executing the process of step S8705 in the main MPU 82 in the 15th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S9506 in the main MPU 82 in the 16th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S9906 in the main MPU 82 in the 17th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SA503 in the main MPU 82 in the 18th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB204 in the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SA503 in the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB204 in the main MPU 82 in the 20th embodiment) for setting the advantage degree of a predetermined event (the frequency at which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (in the 15th to 20th embodiments, the execution of a game round corresponding to the time-saving result, and in the 21st to 29th embodiments, the execution of a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results, and in the 20th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S100 in the main MPU 82 in the 23rd embodiment). in the twenty-first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB904 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC404 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC904 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps SD504 to SD513 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps SD704 to SD711 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps SE105 to SE113 in the main MPU 72, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps SE304 to SE311 in the main MPU 82, and in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps SE804 to SE811 in the main MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined trigger can occur even after the predetermined trigger has occurred and before the predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger has ended.

According to feature g1, the degree of advantage of a predetermined event is set to a predetermined state different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the predetermined trigger will occur. In this case, the predetermined trigger may occur even after the occurrence of the predetermined trigger and before the end of the predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to diversify the situations in which the predetermined trigger occurs, and makes it possible to effectively increase the interest of the game.

Feature g2. A means for executing an update process based on the occurrence of an update event (execution of a game) in the predetermined state so as to reduce the number of occurrences of the remaining update events in the predetermined state (in the fifteenth and sixteenth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S9101 in the master MPU 82; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of steps S9803 to S9805 in the master MPU 82; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SA701 in the master MPU 82; in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB405 in the master MPU 82);
a means for terminating the predetermined state based on the occurrence count of the remaining update events becoming 0 in the predetermined state (a function for executing the process of step S8905 in the main MPU 82 in the fifteenth and sixteenth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S9807 in the main MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SA605 in the main MPU 82 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB423 in the main MPU 82 in the nineteenth embodiment);
a means for setting, when the predetermined trigger occurs in the predetermined state, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events in the predetermined state to an initial number corresponding to the predetermined state (a function for executing the processes of steps S8706 and S8707 in the master MPU 82 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S9507 and S9508 in the master MPU 82 in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S9907 and S9908 in the master MPU 82 in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SA503 and SA504 in the master MPU 82 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB206 in the master MPU 82 in the nineteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature g1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature g2, when a predetermined trigger occurs in a predetermined state, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events in that predetermined state is set to the initial number corresponding to that predetermined state, so that a player who expects the predetermined state to continue for a long time will expect the predetermined trigger to occur in the predetermined state.

Feature g3. A standby state setting means for setting a standby state in which the execution of the predetermined state corresponding to the predetermined trigger is on standby when the predetermined trigger occurs in the predetermined state (in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB206 after a positive determination is made in step SB203 in the main MPU 82, in the 20th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB811 or step SB908 in the main MPU 82, in the 21st embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC409 in the main MPU 82, in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SD712 to SD716 in the main MPU 82, in the 28th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SE312 to SE325 in the main MPU 82, and in the 29th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SE812 to SE820 in the main MPU 82);
a post-standby setting means for setting the predetermined state that is in the standby state as the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state to be executed is completed in the standby state (in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB409 or step SB417 in the master MPU 82; in the twentieth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC109 or step SC113 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC607 to step SC609 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SD809 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SE411 to step SE413 in the master MPU 82; in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SE911 to step SE913 in the master MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to feature g1 or g2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature g3, when a predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the target of execution of the game state is a predetermined state, the game state may be set to a standby state in which the execution of the predetermined state is on hold, and when the target of execution of the predetermined state ends in the standby state, the target of execution of the game state becomes the target of execution of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state that can be the target of execution afterwards is on hold in a situation where a predetermined state is the target of execution of the game state, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined state is executed.

Feature g4. A gaming machine according to feature g3, characterized in that when an end trigger occurs in the standby state, the predetermined state that was the standby state ends without being set to a gaming state.

According to feature g4, a predetermined state that is waiting to be executed may not only be executed later, but may also end without being executed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a predetermined state is executed.

Feature g5. An update means (in the 19th embodiment, the third time-shortening state counter 374, in the 20th embodiment, the second time-shortening standby counter 382 or the third time-shortening standby counter 383, in the 21st embodiment, the third time-shortening standby counter 387, in the 26th and 28th embodiments, the third A time-shortening standby counter 401, the third B time-shortening standby counter 402 or the third C time-shortening standby counter 403, in the 29th embodiment, the first standby counter 406, the second standby counter 407 or the third standby counter 408) for updating the end trigger information stored in the end trigger memory area (the third time-shortening state counter 374, in the 19th embodiment, the second time-shortening standby counter 382 or the third time-shortening standby counter 383, in the 20th embodiment, the third time-shortening standby counter 387, in the 21st embodiment, the third A time-shortening standby counter 401, the third B time-shortening standby counter 402 or the third C time-shortening standby counter 403, in the 26th and 28th embodiments, the first standby counter 406, the second standby counter 407 or the third standby counter 408) to approach the end target information (the value of "0") based on the occurrence of an update event (the execution of a game round). a function of executing the processing of step SB405 in the main MPU 82, in the twentieth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC104 or step SC105 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC604 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD804 to SD806 in the main MPU 82, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE404 to SE406 in the main MPU 82, and in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE904 to SE906 in the main MPU 82),
The termination trigger is that the termination trigger information becomes the termination target information,
The gaming machine according to feature g4, wherein the update means updates the end trigger information to bring it closer to the end target information even if the update event occurs during the standby state.

According to feature g5, in a configuration in which a predetermined state that is in a standby state is terminated when the termination trigger information updated based on the occurrence of an update event becomes the termination trigger information, even if an update event occurs in the standby state, the termination trigger information is updated to the side that brings it closer to the termination target information. This makes it possible to gradually bring the predetermined state closer to the side where the termination trigger for the predetermined state occurs each time an update event occurs when the predetermined state is in a standby state.

Feature g6. The gaming machine described in Feature g5, wherein the post-standby setting means, when the predetermined state of the target to be executed is ended in the standby state, sets the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the end trigger information stored in the end trigger memory area as the game state of the target to be executed.

According to feature g6, when a predetermined state is on standby and the predetermined state to be executed ends, the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the termination trigger information at that time becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to start the waiting predetermined state from an intermediate state that corresponds to the period of time it took for the predetermined state to become the target for execution after it became a waiting state.

Feature g7. When the predetermined trigger occurs in the standby state, the information setting means updates the termination trigger information to move away from the termination target information (in the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB206 after a negative determination is made in step SB208 in the main MPU 82; in the 20th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB811 in a situation where the value of the second time-saving standby counter 382 in the main MPU 82 is 1 or more, or a function of executing the process of step SB908 in a situation where the value of the third time-saving standby counter 383 is 1 or more; in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB908 in a situation where the value of the third time-saving standby counter 387 in the main MPU 82 is 1 or more). is 1 or more; in the 26th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps SD712 to SD716 when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the master MPU 82; in the 28th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps SE312 to SE325 when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the master MPU 82; and in the 29th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps SE812 to SE820 when the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C is latent in the master MPU 82).

According to feature g7, when a predetermined trigger occurs while a predetermined state is on standby, the termination trigger information is updated to move away from the termination target information. This makes it possible to prevent a predetermined trigger that occurs while a predetermined state is on standby from being wasted.

Feature g8. The gaming machine described in feature g7, wherein when the predetermined trigger occurs in the standby state and corresponds to the predetermined state that is the standby state, the information setting means sets information on the initial number of times corresponding to the predetermined state as the termination trigger information in the termination trigger memory area.

According to feature g8, when a predetermined trigger occurs during a standby state that corresponds to a predetermined state that is currently in standby, the number of occurrences of the remaining update events for the predetermined state that is currently in standby becomes the initial number that corresponds to that predetermined state. Therefore, when the predetermined state to be executed ends and the predetermined state that corresponds to the standby state begins, it is possible to make the number of occurrences of the remaining update events for that predetermined state a reasonably large number.

Feature g9. A gaming machine according to feature g5 or g6, characterized in that when the predetermined trigger occurs during the standby state, which corresponds to the predetermined state that is in the standby state, no setting is made for the predetermined state in response to the occurrence of the predetermined trigger.

According to feature g9, even if a predetermined trigger occurs when a predetermined state is on standby, settings related to the predetermined state are not made in response to the occurrence of the predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for putting the predetermined state on standby.

Feature g10. The predetermined trigger is that a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the 19th embodiment, and a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the game state to be executed is set to the predetermined state and the predetermined game round is executed, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for setting the presentation mode of the game round presentation in the predetermined game round to a standby presentation mode (in the 19th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SB311 and SB312 in the sound/light side MPU 93; in the 21st embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SC513 and SC514 in the sound/light side MPU 93; in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SC812 and SC813 in the sound/light side MPU 93; and in the 23rd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD214 and SD215 in the sound/light side MPU 93).

According to feature g10, when a standby state is set due to the execution of a specified game round, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the specified game round becomes a standby presentation mode, so that it is possible to make the player aware, by using the game round presentation, that the execution of a new specified state is now on standby in a situation where a specified state is in place.

Feature g11. The predetermined trigger is that a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the 19th embodiment, and a game round corresponding to the first to third time-saving results in the 21st to 23rd embodiments) is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the game state to be executed is the predetermined state and the predetermined game round is executed but no setting for the standby state is made, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the predetermined game round is changed to a non-standby presentation mode that can occur in a game round other than the predetermined game round (in the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SB306 and SB307 in the sound/light side MPU 93; in the 21st embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC506 and SC507 in the sound/light side MPU 93; in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC806 and SC807 in the sound/light side MPU 93; and in the 23rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD206 and SD207 in the sound/light side MPU 93).

According to feature g11, when the game state of the target game is a predetermined state and a predetermined game round is executed but no setting for a standby state is made, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the predetermined game round becomes a non-standby presentation mode that can also occur in a game round other than the predetermined game round, so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the predetermined game round has occurred.

Feature g12. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing the normal map normal power control process of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features g1 to g11, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature g12, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-receiving information, when the game is played in a predetermined state such that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features g1 to g12, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<Feature group h>
Feature h1. A game play performance control means (a function for executing a process of determining a variation pattern of the sound and light side MPU 93 in the 19th embodiment) that controls a game play performance means (a pattern display device 41) so that a game play performance is executed in a game play;
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SA907, step SB105 or step SB204 of the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment) for setting the degree of advantage of a predetermined event (the frequency at which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) to a predetermined state different from a normal gaming state (the first time-shortening state ST1, the second time-shortening state ST2 or the third time-shortening state ST3 in the 19th embodiment) based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 19th embodiment, the consumption of the ceiling number of game rounds or the execution of a game round corresponding to the time-shortening result in the 19th embodiment);
A standby state setting means for setting a standby state in which the execution of the predetermined state is awaited when the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state (a function for executing the process of step SB206 after making a positive determination in step SB203 of the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment);
A post-standby setting means for setting the predetermined state that is in the standby state to be the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state to be executed in the standby state is ended (a function for executing the process of step SB409 or step SB417 of the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment);
Equipped with
The game machine is characterized in that the game round presentation control means is equipped with a specific presentation setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SB609 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 19th embodiment) which sets the presentation mode of the game round presentation executed in a specific game round in the specified state when the game machine is in the standby state to a specific presentation mode.

According to feature h1, when the target of execution of a game state is a predetermined state, a standby state may be set to wait for the execution of the predetermined state, and when the target of execution of the predetermined state ends in the standby state, the standby state becomes the target of execution of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state that can be the target of execution afterwards is on standby in a situation in which a predetermined state is the target of execution of the game state, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined state is executed.

In addition, when the game is in a standby state, the presentation mode of the game-round presentation executed in a specific game round in a predetermined state is a specific presentation mode. This allows the player to understand that the game is in a standby state in a predetermined state from the game-round presentation, making it possible to ideally improve the interest of the game.

Feature h2. The gaming machine described in feature h1, wherein the specific play time is the last play time in the predetermined state when the machine is in the standby state.

According to feature h2, when in a standby state, the presentation mode of the game-round presentation executed in the last game round of a specified state is a specific presentation mode, so the player can understand from the game-round presentation that a new specified state will be executed after the current specified state ends.

Feature h3. The gaming machine described in feature h2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a period setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB505 of the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment) that makes the execution period of the game-run presentation executed in the last game run of the specified state, at least when in the standby state, longer or more likely to be longer than the execution periods of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs of the specified state.

According to feature h3, the execution period of the game-run effect executed in the last game run of a given state when in a standby state is longer or more likely to be longer than the execution period of the game-run effect in the previous game runs of the given state, making it possible to ensure a sufficient period for the effect mode of the game-run effect to be a specific effect mode.

Feature h4. The gaming machine described in Feature h3, wherein the period setting means makes the execution period of the game-run presentation executed in the last game run in the specified state longer or more likely to be longer than the execution periods of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs in the specified state, regardless of whether the game is in the standby state or not.

According to feature h4, regardless of whether the game is in a standby state or not, the execution period of the game-run effect executed in the last game in a specified state is longer or more likely to be longer than the execution period of the game-run effect in the previous game times in the specified state, so that there is no need to specify whether the game is in a standby state or not when determining the execution period of the game-run effect in the last game time in a specified state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load.

Feature h5. A gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h4, characterized in that the specific effect setting means does not set the effect for the game turn to the specific effect mode if the specific game turn in the predetermined state in the standby state corresponds to the granting of a predetermined bonus (a function of making a positive determination in step SB606 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 19th embodiment and executing the process of step SB608).

According to feature h5, even if a specific play time is in a predetermined state during a standby state, if the specific play time corresponds to the granting of a predetermined bonus, the presentation mode of the play time presentation will not be a specific presentation mode, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the play time presentation of the play time corresponding to the granting of the predetermined bonus.

Feature h6. A gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h5, characterized in that when an end trigger occurs in the standby state, the predetermined state that was the standby state ends without being set to a gaming state.

According to feature h6, not only does a given state that is waiting to be executed subsequently become an execution target, but it may also end without becoming an execution target. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a given state is executed.

Feature h7. Based on the occurrence of an update event (execution of a game), an update means (a function of executing the process of step SB405 of the main MPU 82 in the 19th embodiment) is provided for updating the end opportunity information stored in the end opportunity memory area (the third time-saving state counter 374 in the 19th embodiment) to approach the end target information (the value of "0");
The termination trigger is that the termination trigger information becomes the termination target information,
The gaming machine according to feature h6, wherein the update means updates the end trigger information to bring it closer to the end target information even if the update event occurs during the standby state.

According to feature h7, in a configuration in which a predetermined state that is in a standby state is terminated when the termination trigger information updated based on the occurrence of an update event becomes the termination trigger information, even if an update event occurs in the standby state, the termination trigger information is updated to the side that brings it closer to the termination target information. This makes it possible to gradually bring the predetermined state closer to the side where the termination trigger for the predetermined state occurs each time an update event occurs when the predetermined state is in a standby state.

Feature h8. The gaming machine according to feature h7, wherein the post-standby setting means, when the predetermined state of the target to be executed is ended in the standby state, sets the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the end trigger information stored in the end trigger memory area as the game state of the target to be executed.

According to feature h8, when a predetermined state is in a standby state and the predetermined state to be executed ends, the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the termination trigger information at that time becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to start the standby predetermined state from an intermediate state that corresponds to the period of time it took for the predetermined state to become a target for execution after it became a standby state.

Feature h9. The predetermined trigger is that a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the 19th embodiment) is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the game state to be executed is set to the predetermined state and the predetermined game round is executed, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for setting the presentation mode of the game round presentation in the predetermined game round to a standby presentation mode (a function for executing the processing of steps SB311 and SB312 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 19th embodiment), as described in any one of features h1 to h8.

According to feature h9, when a standby state is set due to the execution of a specified play round, the presentation mode of the play round presentation for the specified play round becomes a standby presentation mode, so that it is possible to make the player aware, by using the play round presentation, that the execution of a new specified state is now on standby in a situation where a specified state is in place.

Feature h10. The predetermined trigger is that a predetermined game round (a game round corresponding to a time-saving result in the 19th embodiment) is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the game state to be executed is the specified state and the specified game round is executed but no setting is made regarding the standby state, it has a means (a function of executing the processing of steps SB306 and SB307 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 19th embodiment) for changing the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the specified game round to a non-standby presentation mode that can also occur in a game round other than the specified game round.

According to feature h10, when the game state of the target game is a predetermined state and a predetermined game round is executed but no setting for a standby state is made, the presentation mode of the game round presentation for the predetermined game round becomes a non-standby presentation mode that can also occur in a game round other than the predetermined game round, so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the predetermined game round has occurred.

Feature h11. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing the assignment determination process of the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function of executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process of the main MPU 82) that grants a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entry control means (a function for executing the normal entry control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features h1 to h10, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature h11, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-eligible information, when the game is played in such a way that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, in the predetermined state, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features h1 to h11, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

The invention relating to the above group d, group e, group f, group g, and group h of features makes it possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature i group>
Feature i1. A game control means (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart confirmation process in the main MPU 82) that controls a game execution means (a first special chart display unit 37a, a second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game-use operation is executed in a game;
A first information update means (a function of executing the process of step SG903 of the master MPU 82 in the 36th embodiment) for updating information of a number of times storage means (a ceiling counter 325 in the 36th embodiment) for the execution of the game in a predetermined game state (a normal game state or a first time-shortened state ST1);
A situation generating means (a function of executing the process of step SG905 of the main MPU 82 in the 36th embodiment) for generating a specific game situation (second time-shortened state ST2) based on the information of the number-of-plays storage means corresponding to the number of times the game was played in the specified game situation becoming a transition target number (a reference value for generating the second time-shortened state ST2);
A second information update means (a function of executing the process of step SH103 of the master MPU 82 in the 36th embodiment) for updating information of the number of times storage means when a predetermined event occurs in the specific game situation;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature i1, the number of times a game is executed in a specified game situation is measured using a count storage means, and a specific game situation is established based on the number of times the game has been executed that is measured using the count storage means becoming the number of times to be transferred. In this case, the number of times a specified event occurs in the specific game situation is also measured using the count storage means. This makes it possible to use the count storage means used to measure the number of times a game is executed in a specified game situation when measuring the number of times a specified event occurs in a specific game situation, and makes it possible to reduce the memory capacity required for game execution control compared to a configuration in which a different count storage means is provided for each situation.

Feature i2. The gaming machine described in feature i1, wherein the predetermined event is the execution of the game round.

According to feature i2, the number of times a game is played in a specific game situation is also measured using the number of times storage means. This makes it possible to use the number of times storage means used to measure the number of times a game is played in a specific game situation, and it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to control the execution of the game, compared to a configuration in which a different number of times storage means is provided for each situation.

Feature i3. The first information update means adds a predetermined number to the information of the number storage means for the execution of the game in the predetermined game situation,
The gaming machine described in feature i1 or i2, wherein the second information update means updates the information of the number of times storage means so that the information in the number of times storage means in the specific game situation does not become information less than the transfer target number of times.

According to feature i3, in a configuration in which the number of times a game is executed in a specified game situation is measured in an additive manner in the count storage means, the number of occurrences of a specified event is measured using the count storage means so that the information in the count storage means does not become information less than the transfer target number in a specific game situation. This makes it possible to maintain a state in which the information in the count storage means is equal to or greater than the transfer target number in a configuration in which the number of occurrences of a specified event is measured using the count storage means even in a specific game situation. Therefore, even if the specific game situation ends and returns to the specified game situation, it is possible to maintain a state in which the information in the count storage means is equal to or greater than the transfer target number until an opportunity to erase the information in the count storage means occurs, and it becomes possible to prevent a specific game situation from occurring again in a situation in which an opportunity to erase the information in the count storage means has not occurred.

Feature i4. The number of times storage means is configured such that information is not erased when the predetermined game situation changes to the specific game situation,
The gaming machine described in feature i3, wherein the second information update means adds a predetermined number to the information of the frequency storage means in response to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the specific gaming situation.

According to feature i4, when a specific game situation is reached from a specific game situation, the information in the count storage means is not erased, and the number of occurrences of a specific event in the specific game situation is additively measured in the count storage means. This makes it possible to maintain the information in the count storage means at or above the transition target count in a configuration in which the number of occurrences of a specific event is measured using the count storage means even in a specific game situation. Therefore, even if the specific game situation ends and the game situation returns to the specific game situation, it is possible to maintain the information in the count storage means at or above the transition target count until an opportunity to erase the information in the count storage means occurs, and it becomes possible to prevent a specific game situation from occurring again in a situation in which an opportunity to erase the information in the count storage means has not occurred.

Feature i5. The predetermined event is the execution of the game round;
A gaming machine described in any one of features i1 to i4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step SH105 of the main MPU 82 in the 36th embodiment) for terminating the specific gaming situation based on the information in the number memory means in the specific gaming situation becoming information corresponding to the number of times the game was executed in the specific gaming situation becoming a target number for termination (termination reference value).

According to feature i5, in a specified gaming situation, a specific gaming situation occurs when the information in the count storage means becomes information corresponding to the number of times that a game was executed in the specified gaming situation becoming a transition target number, and in a specific gaming situation, a specific gaming situation ends when the information in the count storage means becomes information corresponding to the number of times that a game was executed in the specific gaming situation becoming a termination target number. This makes it possible to identify both the trigger for transition to a specific gaming situation and the trigger for ending a specific gaming situation by using the count storage means.

Feature i6. A gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i5, characterized in that it is provided with a means for changing the mode of execution of the presentation in accordance with the information of the number of times storage means in the specific game situation (a function for executing the processing of steps SH208 to SH217 of the main MPU 82 in the 36th embodiment).

According to feature i6, in a specified game situation, a specific game situation occurs based on the information in the count storage means becoming information corresponding to the number of times a game was executed in the specified game situation becoming a transition target count, and in the specific game situation, the execution mode of the presentation is changed according to the information in the count storage means. This makes it possible to identify both the trigger for transition to a specific game situation and the trigger for changing the execution mode of the presentation in a specific game situation using the count storage means.

Feature i7. A gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i6, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step SG805 of the main MPU 82 in the 36th embodiment) for erasing information from the count storage means based on the fact that a special privilege (opening/closing execution mode) has been granted to a player.

Feature i7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which a specific gaming situation occurs when the number of games played in a specific gaming situation after a bonus has been awarded to a player reaches the transition target number.

Feature i8. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process in the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function for executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process in the main MPU 82) for granting a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing a normal power control process in the main MPU 82) that can switch the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game number control means controls the game number control unit so that the game number control unit is operated in each game number when the game number control unit is started and the game number control unit is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, the game number control unit being one game number.
A gaming machine described in any one of features i1 to i7, characterized in that the specific gaming situation is a gaming situation in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than the specified gaming situation (normal gaming situation) prior to the transition to the specific gaming situation.

According to feature i8, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player when the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when a specific gaming situation is present, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when the specific gaming situation is present before transitioning to the specific gaming situation. Therefore, the player will expect the specific gaming situation to occur. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

In addition, for the configuration of features i1 to i8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group i of features makes it possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to reduce the memory capacity required to control game execution, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature j group>
Feature j1. A setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC207 to SC208, steps SC305 to SC306, or steps SC404 to SC406 in the main MPU 82) for setting the advantage of a predetermined event (the frequency at which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) to a predetermined state (the first time-saving state ST1, the second time-saving state ST2, or the third time-saving state ST3A to ST3C in the 32nd embodiment) different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result in the 32nd embodiment, the consumption of the ceiling number of game rounds, or the execution of game rounds corresponding to the first to third time-saving results);
A standby state setting means (a function for executing the process of step SC409 in the main MPU 82) for setting a standby state in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state, and for waiting for the execution of the predetermined state;
A post-standby setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps SC607 to SC609 in the master MPU 82) for setting the predetermined state that is in the standby state to be the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state to be executed in the standby state is ended;
A mode change means (a function for executing the process of step SG207 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 32nd embodiment) for changing the mode of the execution control of the performance in the predetermined state when the standby state is entered;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature j1, when the target of execution of a game state is a predetermined state, a standby state may be set to wait for the execution of the predetermined state, and when the target of execution of the predetermined state ends in the standby state, the standby state becomes the target of execution of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state that can be the target of execution afterwards is on standby when the target of execution of the game state is a predetermined state, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined state is executed.

In this case, when the standby state is entered, the mode of control over the execution of the presentation in the specified state is changed. This makes it possible for the execution content of the presentation in the specified state to correspond to the standby state when the standby state is entered in a specified state. This allows the player to understand that the standby state has been entered from the execution content of the presentation, and makes it possible for the presentation to be executed with content that matches the standby state. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the interest in the game.

Feature j2. When an end trigger occurs in the standby state, the predetermined state that was the standby state is ended without being set to a gaming state;
The gaming machine described in feature j1 is characterized in that the mode change means does not change the mode of execution control of the presentation in the specified state even if the waiting state is entered, if the specified state that is the subject of the waiting state does not become the subject of execution of a game state after the specified state that is currently the subject of execution is completed (a function of making a positive judgment at step SG206 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 32nd embodiment).

According to feature j2, even if a new predetermined state becomes a standby state in a predetermined state, if the predetermined state that is the subject of the standby state is not subsequently subject to execution of a game state, the mode of execution control of the presentation is not changed even if the standby state is entered. This makes it possible to prevent the mode of execution control of the presentation in the predetermined state from being affected if the standby state does not affect the execution content of the subsequent game state.

Feature j3. A game round control means (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart confirmation process in the main MPU 82) that controls a game round execution means (a first special chart display unit 37a, a second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game round operation is executed in a game round;
A means for ending the predetermined state when the remaining number of times of the game in the predetermined state becomes 0 (a function for executing the process of step SC610 in the main MPU 82);
When the game is executed in the standby state, a means for subtracting the remaining number of times of the game in the predetermined state that is the subject of the standby state (a function for executing the process of step SC604 in the main MPU 82);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature j1 or j2 is characterized in that the mode change means does not change the mode of the execution control of the presentation in the specified state even if the waiting state is entered, if the remaining number of times that the specified state that is the target of the waiting state continues is less than the remaining number of times that the specified state that is currently being executed at that time (a function of making a positive judgment at step SG206 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 32nd embodiment).

According to feature j3, even if a new predetermined state becomes a standby state in a predetermined state, if the number of remaining play times of the predetermined state that is the subject of the standby state is less than the number of remaining play times of the predetermined state to be executed at that time, the predetermined state that became the subject of the standby state will not be the subject of subsequent execution of the game state. And if a predetermined state that became the subject of the standby state in this way will not be the subject of subsequent execution of the game state, the mode of execution control of the presentation will not change even if the standby state is entered. As a result, if entering a standby state does not affect the execution content of the subsequent game state, it is possible to prevent the mode of execution control of the presentation in the predetermined state from being affected.

Feature j4: When a new standby trigger occurs in a situation where the standby state is already in effect, the standby state setting means sets the predetermined state corresponding to the new standby trigger as a target of the standby state while maintaining the predetermined state that is already a target of the standby state as a target of the standby state;
The gaming machine described in feature j3 is characterized in that when the new wait trigger occurs when the game is already in the wait state, the mode change means does not change the mode of the execution control of the presentation in the specified state if the number of remaining game rounds in the specified state corresponding to the occurrence of the new wait trigger is less than the number of remaining game rounds in the specified state that is already the subject of the wait state (a function of making a positive judgment at step SG507 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 34th embodiment).

According to feature j4, multiple predetermined states can overlap and become the target of a standby state, making it possible to diversify the manner in which a predetermined state becomes a standby state. In this case, if the number of remaining play times of a predetermined state corresponding to the occurrence of a new standby trigger is less than the number of remaining play times of a predetermined state that is already the target of a standby state, the manner in which the performance execution control in the predetermined state is not changed. As a result, if a standby state is entered but does not affect the execution content of the subsequent game state, it is possible to prevent the manner in which the performance execution control in the predetermined state is affected.

Feature j5. A game control means (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart confirmation process in the main MPU 82) that controls a game run execution means (the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game run operation is executed in the game run;
A content change means for changing the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state according to the number of times the game has been executed in the predetermined state (a function for executing the processing of steps SG304 to SG308 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 32nd embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps SG403 to SG405 of the main side MPU 82 in the 33rd embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in any one of features j1 to j4, characterized in that when the standby state is entered, the mode change means changes the mode of execution control of the presentation in the specified state so that the execution mode of the presentation in the specified state becomes a specified execution mode (first stage presentation) that will be executed when the specified state is newly started.

According to feature j5, the execution mode of the presentation in a predetermined state is changed depending on the number of times play has been performed in the predetermined state, making it possible to diversify the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state. In this case, when a standby state is entered, the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state becomes the execution mode that will be executed when the predetermined state is newly started. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a standby state has been entered, and makes it possible to reset the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state by using the standby state as an opportunity.

Feature j6. The gaming machine described in Feature j5, wherein the content change means changes the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state to the predetermined execution mode (first stage presentation) from when the predetermined state is newly started until the number of times the game has been played in the predetermined state reaches a reference number, and changes the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state to a specific execution mode (second stage presentation) after the number of times the game has been played in the predetermined state reaches the reference number.

Feature j6 makes it possible to gradually change the execution mode of the presentation in a predetermined state. In this case, when a standby state is entered, the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state becomes the execution mode that will be executed when the predetermined state is newly started. This makes it possible to make the player aware that a standby state has been entered, and makes it possible to reset the execution mode of the presentation in the predetermined state by using the standby state as a trigger.

Feature j7. A game round control means (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart confirmation process in the main MPU 82) that controls a game round execution means (a first special chart display unit 37a, a second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game round operation is executed in a game round;
A period determination means for determining a period during which the game operation is executed (a function for executing a process for determining a variable display period in the main MPU 82);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features j1 to j6, wherein the period determination means does not change the determination manner of the period during which the game operation is executed even when the waiting state is entered.

According to feature j7, in a configuration in which the manner of control of the execution of a presentation in a predetermined state is changed when the standby state is entered, the manner of determining the period during which the game play operation is executed is not changed even when the standby state is entered. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing fluctuations in the efficiency of game play.

Feature j8. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process in the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function for executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process in the main MPU 82) for granting a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing a normal power control process in the main MPU 82) that can switch the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
A game time control means (a function of executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the main MPU 82) that performs the game time operation in each game time, with the game time operation being counted as one game time when the game time operation is started and the game time operation is ended in a state corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features j1 to j7, characterized in that the specified state is a gaming state in which the specified ball entry means is more likely to enter the open state than the normal gaming state.

According to feature j8, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player when the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when the predetermined state is in place, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in an open state than when the normal game state is in place. Therefore, the player will expect the predetermined state to be reached. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

In addition, for the configuration of features j1 to j8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature group k>
Feature k1. A game play performance control means (a function for executing a process for determining a variation pattern of the sound and light side MPU 93) that controls the game play performance means (the pattern display device 41) so that a game play performance is executed in a game play;
a setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC207 to SC208, steps SC305 to SC306, or steps SC404 to SC406 in the main MPU 82) for setting the degree of advantage of a predetermined event (the frequency at which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) to a predetermined state (the first time-shortening state ST1, the second time-shortening state ST2, or the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C in the 31st embodiment) different from a normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 31st embodiment, the consumption of a game round of the ceiling number of times, or the execution of a game round corresponding to the first to third time-shortening results);
A standby state setting means (a function for executing the process of step SC409 in the main MPU 82) for setting a standby state in a situation where the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state, and for waiting for the execution of the predetermined state;
A post-standby setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps SC607 to SC609 in the master MPU 82) for setting the predetermined state that is in the standby state to be the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state to be executed in the standby state is ended;
Equipped with
The game machine is characterized in that the game round presentation control means is equipped with a predetermined presentation setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SG113 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 31st embodiment) which sets the presentation mode of the game round presentation to be executed in a predetermined game round of the predetermined state that has been made the target for execution of the game state from the standby state by the post-standby setting means to a predetermined presentation mode (a third stage presentation for mid-way termination).

According to feature k1, when the target of execution of a game state is a predetermined state, a standby state may be set to wait for the execution of the predetermined state, and when the target of execution of the predetermined state ends in the standby state, the standby state becomes the target of execution of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state that can be the target of execution afterwards is on standby in a situation in which a predetermined state is the target of execution of the game state, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined state is executed.

In addition, the presentation mode of the game-round presentation executed in a predetermined game round when the game state is changed from the standby state to the game state will be a predetermined presentation mode. This allows the player to understand from the game-round presentation that the game state is changed from the standby state to the predetermined state, which makes it possible to effectively increase the interest of the game.

Feature k2. The gaming machine described in feature k1, characterized in that the predetermined game round is the last game round of the predetermined state that is set as the execution target of the game state from the standby state by the post-standby setting means.

According to feature k2, the presentation mode of the game-round presentation executed in the last game round of the predetermined state that is the target of execution of the game state from the standby state becomes the predetermined presentation mode, so the player can understand from the game-round presentation that the predetermined state that is the target of execution of the game state from the standby state will end.

Feature k3. The gaming machine described in feature k2 is characterized by having a period setting means (a function for executing the process of step SF805 of the main MPU 82 in the thirty-first embodiment) that makes the execution period of the game-run presentation executed in the last game run of the predetermined state that has been set as the execution target for the game state from the standby state by the post-standby setting means longer or more likely to be longer than the execution period of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs of the predetermined state.

According to feature k3, the execution period of the game-run effect executed in the last game run of a predetermined state that is set as the execution target of the game run from the standby state becomes longer or tends to become longer than the execution period of the game-run effect in the previous game runs of the predetermined state, making it possible to secure a sufficient period for the performance mode of the game-run effect to become the predetermined performance mode.

Feature k4. The gaming machine described in feature k3, characterized in that the period setting means makes the execution period of the game-run presentation executed in the last game run of the predetermined state longer or easier to make longer than the execution period of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs of the predetermined state, regardless of whether the predetermined state is the one that is set as the execution target of the game state from the standby state by the post-standby setting means.

According to feature k4, regardless of whether the predetermined state is a target state for execution of the game state from the standby state, the execution period of the game-run effect executed in the last game turn of the predetermined state is longer or more likely to be longer than the execution period of the game-run effect in the previous game turns of the predetermined state, so that when determining the execution period of the game-run effect in the last game turn of the predetermined state, there is no need to specify whether the predetermined state is a target state for execution of the game state from the standby state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load.

Feature k5. The gaming machine described in any one of features k1 to k4, characterized in that the predetermined effect setting means does not set the effect for the game turn to the predetermined effect mode when the predetermined game turn of the predetermined state that is set as the execution target of the game state from the standby state by the post-standby setting means corresponds to the granting of a predetermined bonus (a function of making a positive determination in step SG108 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 31st embodiment and executing the process of step SG112).

According to feature k5, even if a predetermined play time is a predetermined state that is set as the execution target for a play time from a standby state, if the predetermined play time corresponds to the granting of a predetermined bonus, the presentation mode of the play time presentation will not be the predetermined presentation mode, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the play time presentation of the play time that corresponds to the granting of the predetermined bonus.

Feature k6. The content change means (the function of executing the processing of steps SG104 to SG114 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 31st embodiment) is provided to change the execution content of the performance in the predetermined state according to the number of times the game has been executed in the predetermined state;
The gaming machine described in any one of features k1 to k5, characterized in that the content change means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step SG113 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 31st embodiment) for changing the presentation content of the game round presentation to a predetermined execution content (first stage presentation) to be executed when the predetermined state that was the target of the standby state by the post-standby setting means is made the target of the game state to be executed, regardless of the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined state that was the target of the game state until then.

According to feature k6, the execution content of the presentation in a predetermined state changes depending on the number of times play has been performed in the predetermined state, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the presentation is executed in the predetermined state. In this case, when a predetermined state that was the subject of a standby state becomes the execution subject of a game state, the execution content of the presentation in that predetermined state becomes the execution content that will be executed when that predetermined state is newly started. This makes it possible to reset the execution content of the presentation in the predetermined state when the predetermined state that was the subject of a standby state becomes the execution subject of a game state.

However, in this configuration, if the number of remaining play times of a predetermined state that has been made the target of a game state from the target of a standby state is less than the number of remaining play times that would be the case if the predetermined state had been made the target of a game state without going into standby, there is a risk that the progress of the presentation from the start of the predetermined state that has been made the target of a game state from the target of a standby state to its end will be different from the original. In contrast, the presentation mode of the play time presentation will be the predetermined presentation mode for the predetermined play times of the predetermined state that has been made the target of a game state from the target of a standby state, making it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the progress of the presentation being different from the original.

Feature k7. A gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k6, characterized in that when an end trigger occurs in the standby state, the predetermined state that was the standby state ends without being set to a gaming state.

According to feature k7, a predetermined state that is waiting to be executed may not only be executed later, but may also end without being executed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a predetermined state is executed.

Feature k8. Based on the occurrence of an update event (execution of a game), an update means (a function for executing the processing of step SC604 in the main MPU 82) is provided for updating the end opportunity information stored in the end opportunity memory area (the third time-saving standby counter 387) to approach the end target information (the value of "0");
The termination trigger is that the termination trigger information becomes the termination target information,
The gaming machine according to feature k7, wherein the update means updates the end trigger information to bring it closer to the end target information even if the update event occurs during the standby state.

According to feature k8, in a configuration in which a predetermined state that is in a standby state is terminated when the termination trigger information updated based on the occurrence of an update event becomes the termination trigger information, even if an update event occurs in the standby state, the termination trigger information is updated to the side that brings it closer to the termination target information. This makes it possible to gradually bring the predetermined state closer to the side where the termination trigger for the predetermined state occurs each time an update event occurs when the predetermined state is in a standby state.

Feature k9. The gaming machine described in feature k8, wherein the post-standby setting means, when the predetermined state of the target to be executed is ended in the standby state, sets the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the end trigger information stored in the end trigger memory area as the game state of the target to be executed.

According to feature k9, when a predetermined state to be executed ends while the predetermined state is in a standby state, the predetermined state corresponding to the state of the termination trigger information at that time becomes the game state to be executed. This makes it possible to start the standby predetermined state from an intermediate state according to the period of time it took for the predetermined state to become a target for execution after it became a standby state.

Feature k10. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process in the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function for executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process in the main MPU 82) for granting a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing a normal power control process in the main MPU 82) that can switch the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features k1 to k9, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature k10, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-compatible information, when the game is played in a predetermined state such that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features k1 to k10, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

The invention relating to the above feature group j and feature group k can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature group I>
Feature 11. A game play performance control means (a function for executing a process for determining a variation pattern of the sound and light side MPU 93) that controls the game play performance means (the pattern display device 41) so that a game play performance is executed in a game play;
a setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC207 to SC208, steps SC305 to SC306, or steps SC404 to SC406 in the main MPU 82) for setting the degree of advantage of a predetermined event (the frequency at which the second operating port 34 is in an open state) to a predetermined state (the first time-shortening state ST1, the second time-shortening state ST2, or the third time-shortening state ST3A to ST3C in the 35th embodiment) different from a normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R low probability result in the 35th embodiment, the consumption of a game round of the ceiling number of times, or the execution of a game round corresponding to the first to third time-shortening results);
A means for terminating the predetermined state when the remaining number of times of the game in the predetermined state becomes 0 (a function for executing the process of step SC610 in the main MPU 82);
Equipped with
The game play presentation control means is equipped with a mode change means (a function for executing the processing of steps SG603 to SG616 of the main side MPU 82 in the 35th embodiment and a function for executing the processing of steps SG701 to SG709 of the sound/light side MPU 93) that changes the mode of the execution control of the presentation in the specified state depending on the remaining number of times the game play will continue in the specified state.

According to feature l1, the degree of advantage of a predetermined event is set to a predetermined state different from the normal game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, and the predetermined state ends when the remaining number of times of play in the predetermined state becomes 0. In this case, the mode of execution control of the performance in the predetermined state is changed according to the remaining number of times of play in the predetermined state. This makes it possible to change the mode of execution control of the performance according to the number of times of play executed in the predetermined state, and it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of the performance in the predetermined state. In addition, the mode of execution control of the performance is not changed according to the number of times of play executed in the predetermined state, but the mode of execution control of the performance is changed according to the remaining number of times of play in the predetermined state. This makes it possible to provide a performance that has continuity toward the end of the predetermined state, based on the mode of execution control of the performance in the predetermined state, even if the predetermined state is started in a situation where the remaining number of times of play in the predetermined state is less than the original number of times of play. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the execution control of the performance in an appropriate manner.

Feature l2. The gaming machine described in Feature l1, wherein the mode change means changes the mode of execution control of the performance in the predetermined state according to the remaining number of times the game will continue, based on changing the mode of determining the duration of the performance for the game play according to the remaining number of times the game will continue in the predetermined state.

Feature l2 makes it possible to vary the efficiency of game play depending on the number of remaining game play times in a given state.

Feature 13. A standby state setting means (a function for executing the process of step SC409 in the main MPU 82) for setting a standby state in a situation in which the execution target of the game state is the predetermined state, and
A post-standby setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps SC607 to SC609 in the master MPU 82) for setting the predetermined state that is in the standby state to be the execution target of the game state when the predetermined state to be executed in the standby state is ended;
When the game is executed in the standby state, a means for subtracting the remaining number of times of the game in the predetermined state that is in the standby state (a function for executing the process of step SC604 in the main MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to feature l1 or l2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature l3, when the target of execution of the game state is a predetermined state, it may be set to a standby state in which the execution of the predetermined state is awaited, and when the target of execution of the predetermined state ends in the standby state, the standby state becomes the target of execution of the game state. This allows a situation in which a predetermined state that can be the target of execution afterwards is on standby in a situation in which a predetermined state is the target of execution of the game state, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined state is executed.

In addition, when a game is played in a standby state, the number of remaining game times in the predetermined state in the standby state is subtracted, so that the predetermined state does not continue excessively. In addition, in such a configuration in which the number of remaining game times in the predetermined state in the standby state is subtracted when a game is played in a standby state, when the predetermined state that is the target of the standby state becomes the target of a game state, the predetermined state ends with the execution of a number of game times that is fewer than the original number of times that the predetermined state should continue. Even in this case, the configuration of the above characteristic l1 is provided, and the mode of execution control of the presentation is not changed according to the number of game times played in the predetermined state, but rather the mode of execution control of the presentation is changed according to the number of remaining game times in the predetermined state, so that it is possible to provide a presentation that has continuity toward the end of the predetermined state based on the mode of execution control of the presentation in the predetermined state.

Feature l4. The gaming machine described in feature l3, characterized in that the game round presentation control means includes a specific presentation setting means (a function for executing the process of step SG709 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 35th embodiment) for setting the presentation mode of the game round presentation executed in the last game round in the predetermined state when in the standby state to a specific presentation mode.

According to feature l4, by setting the presentation mode of the game turn presentation executed in the last game turn of a specified state when in a standby state to a specific presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the presentation at the start of the specified state becomes a midway presentation of the original presentation of the specified state when the number of remaining game turns of the specified state is less than the original number of times the specified state is to continue when the specified state is in a standby state and becomes the target of the execution of the game state.

Feature l5. The gaming machine described in feature l4 is characterized by having a period setting means (a function for executing the process of step SG604 of the main MPU 82 in the thirty-fifth embodiment) that makes the execution period of the game-run presentation executed in the last game run of the predetermined state, at least when in the standby state, longer or more likely to be longer than the execution periods of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs of the predetermined state.

According to feature l5, when in a standby state, the execution period of the game-run effect executed in the last game run of a specified state is longer or more likely to be longer than the execution period of the game-run effect in the previous game runs of the specified state, making it possible to ensure a sufficient period for the effect mode of the game-run effect to be a specific effect mode.

Feature l6. The gaming machine described in Feature l5, wherein the period setting means makes the execution period of the game-run presentation executed in the last game run in the specified state longer or more likely to be longer than the execution periods of the game-run presentation in the previous game runs in the specified state, regardless of whether the game is in the standby state or not.

According to feature 16, regardless of whether the game is in a standby state or not, the execution period of the game-run effect executed in the last game in a specified state is longer or more likely to be longer than the execution period of the game-run effect in the previous game times in the specified state, so that there is no need to specify whether the game is in a standby state or not when determining the execution period of the game-run effect in the last game time in a specified state. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load.

Feature l7. The gaming machine described in any one of features l4 to l6, characterized in that the specific effect setting means does not set the effect for the game turn to the specific effect mode if the specific game turn in the predetermined state in the standby state corresponds to the granting of a predetermined bonus (a function of making a positive determination in step SG706 of the sound/light side MPU 93 in the 35th embodiment and executing the process of step SG708).

According to feature l7, even if a specific play time is in a predetermined state during a standby state, if the specific play time corresponds to the granting of a predetermined bonus, the presentation mode of the play time presentation will not be a specific presentation mode, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the play time presentation of the play time corresponding to the granting of the predetermined bonus.

Feature 18. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reserved information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the assignment determination process in the main MPU 82) that performs an assignment determination (a correct/incorrect determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information;
A bonus granting means (a function for executing a special line start process, a special line open process, a special line closed process, and a special line end process in the main MPU 82) for granting a bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination being a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the bonus corresponding information;
A predetermined entrance control means (a function for executing a normal power control process in the main MPU 82) that can switch the predetermined entrance means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features l1 to l7, characterized in that the specified event is the period during which the specified ball entry means is in the open state per unit period when a game is played so that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner.

According to feature l8, in a configuration in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and a bonus is awarded to a player if the special information corresponds to the bonus-eligible information, when the game is played in a predetermined state such that game balls flow down the game area in the same manner, the degree of advantage for the period during which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state per unit period differs from that in the normal game state.

In addition, for the configuration of features l1 to l8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, Any one or more of the features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group I can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the execution control of the presentation is carried out appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature group m>
Feature m1. A predetermined derivation means (a function for executing the processes of steps SH503 to SH508 of the main MPU 82 in the 37th embodiment) for deriving the award corresponding information (a predetermined difference in the number of balls in the 37th to 41st embodiments) by using at least the number of game values awarded to the player in a predetermined situation;
Based on the fact that the given corresponding information derived by the predetermined derivation means becomes the predetermined target information (the termination reference number in the thirty-seventh to forty-first embodiments), a specific process (processing of steps SH602 to SH605, SH705 to SH708, and SH803 to SH806 in the main MPU 82 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, processing of steps SI206 to SI210 in the main MPU 82 in the thirty-eighth embodiment, processing of steps SI302 to SI304 in the main MPU 82 in the thirty-ninth embodiment, processing of steps SI402, SI505, and SI603 in the main MPU 82 in the fortieth ...3, SI404, SI505, and SI606 in the main MPU 82 in the fortieth embodiment, processing of steps SI405, SI506, and SI607 in the main MPU 82 in the fortieth embodiment) is performed. a specific execution means for executing a process of step SH602 to step SH605, step SH705 to step SH708, and step SH803 to step SH806 in the main MPU 82 in the 37th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SI206 to step SI210 in the main MPU 82 in the 38th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SI302 to step SI304 in the main MPU 82 in the 39th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SI402, step SI505, and step SI603 in the main MPU 82 in the 40th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SI803 in the main MPU 82 in the 41st embodiment;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature m1, at least in a predetermined situation, the number of game values granted to a player is used to derive the grant correspondence information, and a specific process is executed based on the derived grant correspondence information becoming the predetermined target information. This makes it possible to execute a process to deal with a situation in which a predetermined number or more of game values are granted to a player, and allows the game to be played in an optimal manner.

Feature m2. The gaming machine described in feature m1, characterized in that the specific execution means executes the specific process when the given correspondence information becomes the predetermined target information and the process is executable (a state in which the game round and the open/close execution mode are not in progress in the 37th embodiment, a state in which the game round and the round game are not in progress in the 38th embodiment, and a state in which the game round and the open/close execution mode are not in progress in the 40th embodiment).

According to feature m2, even if the attached corresponding information becomes the specified target information, the specific process is not executed if the processing is not possible, and the specific process is executed if the attached corresponding information becomes the specified target information and the processing is possible. This makes it possible to execute the specific process in a predetermined processing possible state, even if the attached corresponding information becomes the specified target information at any timing.

Feature m3. Equipped with a means for controlling a game execution means (first special chart display unit 37a, second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game operation is started when a start trigger occurs and the game operation is ended when a termination trigger occurs (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the main MPU 82);
The gaming machine described in feature m1 or m2 is characterized in that when the grant corresponding information becomes the specified target information while the game-use operation is being executed, the specific execution means executes the specific processing after the game-use operation is completed.

According to feature m3, if the grant correspondence information becomes the specified target information while a game-use action is being executed, the specific process is executed after the game-use action ends. This makes it possible to prevent the specific process from being executed while a game-use action is being executed.

Feature m4. The device is provided with a special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the expected value of the game value to be awarded is higher than that in the normal game state;
The specific execution means of a gaming machine described in any one of features m1 to m3 executes the specific processing when the special game state ends when the grant corresponding information becomes the specified target information while the special game state is being executed.

According to feature m4, if the grant correspondence information becomes the specified target information while a special game state is being executed, a specific process is executed when the special game state ends. This makes it possible to prevent the specific process from being executed while the special game state is being executed. It also makes it possible to prevent the benefits of the currently executed special game state from being lost due to the execution of the specific process.

Feature m5. Equipped with a means for controlling a game execution means (first special chart display unit 37a, second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game operation is started when a start trigger occurs and the game operation is ended when a termination trigger occurs (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the main MPU 82);
The special transition means transitions to the special game state after the game action in a game corresponding to the special transition (a game corresponding to a jackpot result) is completed,
The gaming machine described in feature m4 is characterized in that the specific execution means executes the specific processing when the grant corresponding information becomes the specified target information while the game turn action for the special transition corresponding game turn is being executed, and when the special game state triggered by the game turn ends.

According to feature m5, if the grant corresponding information becomes the specified target information while a game-round action is being executed in a game round that supports a special transition, a specific process is executed when the special game state triggered by that game round ends. This makes it possible to prevent the specific process from being executed in the middle of a game-round action, and to prevent the profit from the special game state that would have been obtained from being lost due to the execution of the specific process.

Feature m6. A gaming machine according to any one of features m1 to m5, characterized in that the specific execution means executes, as the specific process, a regulating process for regulating the execution of a predetermined progress process for progressing the game (the processes of steps SI402, SI505, and SI603 in the main MPU 82 in the 40th embodiment, and the process of step SI803 in the main MPU 82 in the 41st embodiment).

According to feature m6, when the grant corresponding information becomes the specified target information, a regulating process is executed to regulate the execution of a specified progress process for progressing the game, so that if a player is granted a specified number of game values or more, it becomes impossible to continue the game thereafter.

Feature m7. A means for executing a power outage monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage (a function for executing the process of step SH301 in the main MPU 82) is provided;
A gaming machine described in feature m6, characterized in that the power outage monitoring process is executed even in a situation where the execution of the specified progress process is restricted.

According to feature m7, even in a situation where the execution of a predetermined progression process for progressing the game is restricted because the grant correspondence information has become the specified target information, the power outage monitoring process is executed, so that it is possible to appropriately respond to the occurrence of a power outage even in a situation where the execution of the specified progression process is restricted.

Feature m8. The regulating process is a process of storing regulating information ("1") in the information storage means (the game stop flag in the fortieth and forty-first embodiments);
This gaming machine is
A means for restricting the execution of the predetermined progress process when the restriction information is stored in the information storage means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SH306 in the main MPU 82);
A means for generating a setting possible situation in which a setting value corresponding to a player's advantage level can be set based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the processing of step SI716 of the main MPU 82 in the fortieth embodiment);
A means for erasing the restriction information stored in the information storage means when the setting possible situation occurs (a function for executing the process of step SI717 of the main MPU 82 in the fortieth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature m6 or m7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature m8, when the grant correspondence information becomes the specified target information, the restriction information is stored in the information storage means, and when the restriction information is stored in the information storage means, the execution of the specified progress process for progressing the game is restricted. In this case, in a configuration in which a settable situation occurs in which a set value can be set based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger when the supply of operating power is started, the restriction information stored in the information storage means is erased when the settable situation occurs. As a result, in order to release the state in which the progress of the game is restricted because the grant correspondence information becomes the specified target information, it is necessary to temporarily stop the supply of operating power, and then start the supply of operating power in a situation in which the situation occurrence trigger occurs, thereby generating the settable situation, so that it is possible to make it difficult to release the state in which the progress of the game is restricted fraudulently.

Feature m9. The gaming machine according to any one of features m1 to m5, characterized in that the specific execution means executes, as the specific process, a process for transitioning the gaming state to a normal gaming state (in the 37th embodiment, the process of steps SH602 to SH605, steps SH705 to SH708, and steps SH803 to SH806 in the master MPU 82; in the 38th embodiment, the process of steps SI206 to SI210 in the master MPU 82; in the 39th embodiment, the process of steps SI302 to SI304 in the master MPU 82).

According to feature m9, when the grant correspondence information becomes the specified target information, the game state transitions to the normal game state, so that when a specified number or more game values are granted to a player, it becomes possible to temporarily end the game state in which game values are likely to be granted.

Feature m10. A gaming machine according to feature m9, characterized in that it is provided with a means for initializing the grant correspondence information based on a transition from a gaming state other than the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function for executing the processing of steps SH515 and SH712 of the main MPU 82 in the 37th embodiment).

According to feature m10, the grant correspondence information is initialized based on the transition of the game state to the normal game state, so that it is possible to execute a specific process when the grant correspondence information becomes the specified target information as a result of the game being played without an intervening normal game state. In addition, since players generally do not stop playing in a game state other than the normal game state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a state in which the grant correspondence information is close to the specified target information will be handed over to a new player.

Feature m11. An area processing execution means (specific control processing unit 221) that executes area processing (specific control processing) using a program within a predetermined address range in a program storage means (main ROM 83);
an outside-area processing execution means (non-specific control processing unit 222) for executing outside-area processing (non-specific control processing) by using a program at an address outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means;
Equipped with
The processing within the area includes a predetermined processing for progressing the game,
The out-of-area process includes a specific process for managing a game history,
The process for deriving the added corresponding information in the predetermined deriving means is included in the outside area process,
A gaming machine described in any one of features m1 to m10, wherein the specific process is included in the in-area process.

According to feature m11, in a configuration in which the predetermined processing for progressing the game is included in the in-area processing and the specific processing for managing the game history is included in the out-area processing, the processing for deriving the grant correspondence information is included in the out-area processing, so it is possible to derive the grant correspondence information without increasing the program capacity of the in-area processing. On the other hand, the specific processing that is executed based on the grant correspondence information becoming the predetermined target information is included in the in-area processing, so it is possible to cause the specific processing to be executed in the in-area processing that includes the predetermined processing for progressing the game.

Feature m12. A gaming machine according to any one of features m1 to m11, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a notification process to enable recognition that the assigned corresponding information is approaching the specified target information (a function for executing the processes of steps SH513 and SH514 of the main MPU 82 in the 37th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SH911 of the sound/light MPU 93).

According to feature m12, a notification process is executed to enable the user to recognize that the assigned corresponding information is approaching the specified target information, so that when the assigned corresponding information is approaching the specified target information, it becomes possible to take some kind of action before the assigned corresponding information becomes the specified target information.

Feature m13. The gaming machine according to any one of features m1 to m12, characterized in that the grant correspondence information is information corresponding to an increase from a minimum value of a predetermined subtraction value, where the result of subtracting the number of game values used in a game from the number of game values granted to a player is a predetermined subtraction value.

According to feature m13, when the result of subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the number of game values granted to the player is set to a predetermined subtraction value, in a configuration in which the granted correspondence information is information corresponding to the increase of the predetermined subtraction value from the minimum value, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In addition, for the configuration of features m1 to m13, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

<n group of features>
Feature n1. A predetermined opportunity determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps SH509 and SH510 of the main MPU 82 in the 37th embodiment) for determining that a predetermined opportunity (the predetermined difference in the number of balls in the 37th to 41st embodiments reaches the end reference number) has occurred;
After the occurrence of the predetermined trigger is identified by the predetermined trigger identification means, specific processing for creating a situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than before (in the 37th embodiment, processing of steps SH602 to SH605, steps SH705 to SH708, and steps SH803 to SH806 in the master MPU 82; in the 38th embodiment, processing of steps SI206 to SI210 in the master MPU 82; in the 39th embodiment, processing of steps SI302 to SI304 in the master MPU 82; in the 40th embodiment, processing of steps SI402, SI505, and SI603 in the master MPU 82; in the 41st embodiment, processing of steps SI402, SI505, and SI603 in the master MPU 82; a specific execution means for executing a process of step SH602 to step SH605, step SH705 to step SH708, and step SH803 to step SH806 in the main MPU 82 in the 37th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SI206 to step SI210 in the main MPU 82 in the 38th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SI302 to step SI304 in the main MPU 82 in the 39th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SI402, step SI505, and step SI603 in the main MPU 82 in the 40th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SI803 in the main MPU 82 in the 41st embodiment;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature n1, after it is determined that a predetermined trigger has occurred, a specific process is executed to create a situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than before. This makes it possible to proactively create a situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than before in response to the occurrence of the predetermined trigger, making it possible to play the game in an optimal manner.

Feature n2. The gaming machine described in feature m1, characterized in that the specific execution means executes the specific process when the occurrence of the specific trigger is determined by the specific trigger determination means and the process is executable (in the 37th embodiment, the situation is not a game round and opening/closing execution mode, in the 38th embodiment, the situation is not a game round and round play, and in the 40th embodiment, the situation is not a game round and opening/closing execution mode).

According to feature n2, even if a predetermined trigger occurs, if the processing is not possible, the specific processing is not executed, but if the predetermined trigger occurs and the processing is possible, the specific processing is executed. This makes it possible to execute the specific processing in a predetermined processing possible state, even if the predetermined trigger occurs at any timing.

Feature n3. A means for controlling a game execution means (first special chart display unit 37a, second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game operation is started when a start trigger occurs and the game operation is ended when a termination trigger occurs (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the main MPU 82);
The gaming machine described in feature n1 or n2 is characterized in that when the predetermined trigger identification means identifies that the predetermined trigger has occurred while the game-use operation is being executed, the specific execution means executes the specific processing after the game-use operation has ended.

According to feature n3, if a predetermined trigger occurs while a game operation is being performed, the specific process is executed after the game operation ends. This makes it possible to prevent the specific process from being executed while a game operation is being performed.

Feature n4. Equipped with a special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the expected value of the game value is higher than that in the normal game state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features n1 to n3, characterized in that the specific execution means executes the specific processing when the special game state ends when the specified trigger identification means identifies that the specified trigger has occurred while the special game state is being executed.

According to feature n4, if a predetermined trigger occurs while a special game state is being executed, a specific process is executed when the special game state ends. This makes it possible to prevent a specific process from being executed while a special game state is being executed. It also makes it possible to prevent the benefits of the currently executed special game state from being lost due to the execution of a specific process.

Feature n5. Equipped with a means for controlling a game execution means (first special chart display unit 37a, second special chart display unit 37b) so that a game operation is started when a start trigger occurs and the game operation is ended when a termination trigger occurs (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart determination process in the main MPU 82);
The special transition means transitions to the special game state after the game action in a game corresponding to the special transition (a game corresponding to a jackpot result) is completed,
The gaming machine described in feature n4 is characterized in that when the predetermined trigger identification means identifies that the predetermined trigger has occurred in a situation where the game-round operation for the game round corresponding to the special transition is being executed, the specific execution means executes the specific processing when the special game state triggered by the game round ends.

According to feature n5, if a predetermined trigger occurs while a game-round action is being executed in a game round that supports a special transition, a specific process is executed when the special game state triggered by that game round ends. This makes it possible to prevent the specific process from being executed in the middle of a game-round action, and also makes it possible to prevent the profit that would have been obtained from the special game state from being lost due to the execution of the specific process.

Feature n6. A gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n5, characterized in that the specific execution means executes, as the specific process, a regulating process for regulating the execution of a predetermined progress process for progressing the game (in the 40th embodiment, the process of steps SI402, SI505, and SI603 in the main MPU 82, and in the 41st embodiment, the process of step SI803 in the main MPU 82).

According to feature n6, when a predetermined trigger occurs, a regulating process is executed to regulate the execution of a predetermined progression process for progressing the game, so that when a predetermined trigger occurs, it becomes possible to prevent the game from progressing thereafter.

Feature n7. A means for executing a power outage monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage (a function for executing the process of step SH301 in the main MPU 82) is provided;
A gaming machine described in feature n6, characterized in that the power outage monitoring process is executed even in a situation where the execution of the specified progress process is restricted.

According to feature n7, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in a situation where the execution of a predetermined progression process for progressing the game is restricted due to the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, so it is possible to appropriately deal with the occurrence of a power outage even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted.

Feature n8. The regulating process is a process of storing regulating information ("1") in the information storage means (the game stop flag in the fortieth and forty-first embodiments);
This gaming machine is
A means for restricting the execution of the predetermined progress process when the restriction information is stored in the information storage means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SH306 in the main MPU 82);
A means for generating a setting possible situation in which a setting value corresponding to a player's advantage level can be set based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the processing of step SI716 of the main MPU 82 in the fortieth embodiment);
A means for erasing the restriction information stored in the information storage means when the setting possible situation occurs (a function for executing the process of step SI717 of the main MPU 82 in the fortieth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature n6 or n7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature n8, when a predetermined trigger occurs, restriction information is stored in the information storage means, and when the restriction information is stored in the information storage means, the execution of a predetermined progress process for progressing the game is restricted. In this case, in a configuration in which a settable situation occurs in which a setting value can be set based on the occurrence of a situation occurrence trigger when the supply of operating power is started, the restriction information stored in the information storage means is erased when the settable situation occurs. As a result, in order to release the state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, it is necessary to temporarily stop the supply of operating power, and then start the supply of operating power in a situation in which the situation occurrence trigger occurs, thereby generating the settable situation, making it possible to make it difficult to release the state in which the progress of the game is restricted fraudulently.

Feature n9. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n5, characterized in that the specific execution means executes, as the specific process, a process for transitioning the gaming state to a normal gaming state (in the 37th embodiment, the process of steps SH602 to SH605, steps SH705 to SH708, and steps SH803 to SH806 in the master MPU 82; in the 38th embodiment, the process of steps SI206 to SI210 in the master MPU 82; in the 39th embodiment, the process of steps SI302 to SI304 in the master MPU 82).

According to feature n9, when a predetermined trigger occurs, the game state transitions to the normal game state, so when a predetermined trigger occurs, it is possible to temporarily end the game state in which game value is likely to be awarded.

Feature n10. An area processing execution means (specific control processing unit 221) that executes area processing (specific control processing) using a program within a predetermined address range in a program storage means (main ROM 83);
an outside-area processing execution means (non-specific control processing unit 222) for executing outside-area processing (non-specific control processing) by using a program at an address outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means;
Equipped with
The processing within the area includes a predetermined processing for progressing the game,
The out-of-area process includes a specific process for managing a game history,
The process for determining whether the predetermined event has occurred in the predetermined event determination means is included in the outside-area process,
A gaming machine described in any one of features n1 to n9, characterized in that the specific process is included in the in-area process.

According to feature n10, in a configuration in which the predetermined processing for progressing the game is included in the in-area processing and the specific processing for managing the game history is included in the out-area processing, since the processing for determining whether or not a predetermined trigger has occurred is included in the out-area processing, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined trigger has occurred without increasing the program capacity of the in-area processing. On the other hand, since the specific processing executed based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger is included in the in-area processing, it is possible to cause the specific processing to be executed in the in-area processing that includes the predetermined processing for progressing the game.

Feature n11. A gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing a notification process to enable the player to recognize that the occurrence of the predetermined trigger is approaching (a function for executing the processes of steps SH513 and SH514 of the main MPU 82 in the 37th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SH911 of the sound/light MPU 93).

According to feature n11, a notification process is executed to enable the user to recognize that a specified event is approaching, so that if the event is approaching, it becomes possible to take some kind of action before the event occurs.

In addition, for the configuration of features n1 to n11, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, features M1 to M4, features N1 to N8, features O1 to O8, features P1 to P6, features Q1 to Q16, features R1 to R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5 , features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X14, features Y1 to Y10, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a20, features b1 to b8, features c1 to c6, features d1 to d11, features e1 to e15, features f1 to f15, features g1 to g12, features h1 to h11, features i1 to i8, features j1 to j8, features k1 to k10, features l1 to l8, features m1 to m13, and features n1 to n11 may be applied in one or more configurations. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the configurations.

The invention relating to the above group m of features and group n of features can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, there are known pachinko machines that are configured to transition to a special game state when an internal lottery is won based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area, and that transition to a special game state occurs when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. When the transition to the special game state occurs, for example, a ball entry device provided in the game area starts opening and closing, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

However, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be able to play smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: gaming machines equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is started by operating a start operation means, the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is given to the player according to the picture after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Outlet, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 31... General winning port, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 37a... First special chart display section, 37b... Second special chart display section, 41... Pattern display device, 43... State suggestion area, 81... Main control board, 82... Main side MPU, 83... Main side ROM, 84... Main side RAM, 93... Sound and light side MPU, 103... Display side MPU, 131... Ceiling counter, 133... High probability state counter, 134... Time reduction state counter, 151... Special winning device, 195... Setting key insertion section, 196... Reset button, 201-204... First to fourth notification display devices, 205... Setting display device, 211... Specific Work area for control, 211a...first security counter, 211b...special power monitoring delay timer counter, 211c...general power monitoring delay timer counter, 211d...confirmation flag group, 211e...previous value storage area, 212...stack area for specific control, 213...work area for non-specific control, 213a-213h...first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters, 213k...second security counter, 213l-213r...abnormal flag, 214...stack area for non-specific control, 221...specific control processing unit, 222...non-specific control processing unit, 223...register area, 223b...command transmission buffer, 223c...protect register , 224...command transmission circuit, 225...RAM management circuit, 251...normal counter area, 252...calculation result storage area, 311...address table for game time period, 313...game time period table for first stage time reduction, 314...game time period table for second stage time reduction, 315...game time period table for third stage time reduction, 322...first time reduction state flag, 323...second time reduction state flag, 324...third time reduction state flag, 325...ceiling counter, 326...state determination counter, 327...state continuation counter, 332...external terminal for first jackpot signal, 333...external terminal for second jackpot signal, 365...time reduction game count counter, 366...time Short and small win counter, 371...event target counter, 374...third time-saving state counter, 375...time-saving continuation counter, 382...second time-saving standby counter, 383...third time-saving standby counter, 387...third time-saving standby counter, 395...standby target counter, 401...third A time-saving standby counter, 402...third B time-saving standby counter, 403...third C time-saving standby counter, 406...first standby counter, 407...second standby counter, 408...third standby counter, 411...third time-saving small win counter, 412...third time-saving game counter, 441...total win counter, 442...forced transition flag, PA2...left area, PA3...right area.

Claims (1)

A predetermined derivation means for deriving the awarded corresponding information by utilizing at least the number of game values awarded to the player in a predetermined situation;
A specific execution means for executing a specific process for stopping a game based on the fact that the grant corresponding information derived by the specific derivation means becomes the specific target information ;
an area processing execution means for executing an area processing by using a program in a predetermined address range in the program storage means;
an outside-area processing execution means for executing outside-area processing by utilizing a program at an address outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means;
Equipped with
The processing within the area includes a predetermined processing for progressing the game,
The out-of-area process includes a specific process for managing a game history,
The process for deriving the added corresponding information in the predetermined deriving means is included in the outside area process,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific process is included in the in-area process.

Images